Tesys - Motor Stater Solution - 2006

s
MOTOR STATER SOLUTION

CONTROL PROTECTION COMPONENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TeSys Motor Stater open version TeSys Motor Stater enclosed version Protection Component Motor Circuit Breaker Protection Component Fuse Protection Contactors Protection Components Relays Control Relays Technical Informations
Sommaire
1 - TeSys motor starters open version
b Levels of services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/4
Combination automatic motor starters

b D.O.L. starters, type 1 coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6 b D.O.L. starters, type 2 coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10
Combination starters for customer assembly

b D.O.L. starters v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker . . page 1/16 v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18 v With integral 18, 32, 63 contactor breakers with overload protection by separate module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22 v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/24 v With fuse protection (BS fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32 b Star-delta starters v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuitbreaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26 v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/28 v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/30 v With fuse protection (BS fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/33
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

b 4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34
Star-delta starters for motor control

b 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/37 b 7.5 to 132 kW, without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly . . page 1/39 b 90 to 375 kW, v Without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/45 v On chassis for customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/47
TeSys U starter-controllers
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/52 b TeSys U starter-controllers v Presentation and application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/54 v Non-reversing and reversing power bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/64 v Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/66 v Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks and accessories . page 1/67 v Standard and advanced control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/69 v Multifunction control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/70 v Function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/71 b PowerSuite software workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/72 b TeSys U controllers v Control bases and control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/76 b Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components . . . . page 1/80
1/0
b AS-Interface communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/82 b Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil connection components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/84 b Communication gateways LUF P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/86
integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

b General, terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/116 b Equipment selection for starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/122 b Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 18 . . . . . . page 1/126 b Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 32 . . . . . . page 1/144 b Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63 . . . . . . page 1/166
Adaptators for use with busbar system

b With 40 mm and 60 mm pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/200
TeSys Quickfit installation system for motor starter components

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/212 b Power circuit pre-wiring components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/219 b Control-command pre-wiring components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/221
Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

b Busbar systems, removable power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/234 b Component mounting plates, extension plates, control terminal blocks, accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/235 b Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/238
1/1
General
TeSys motor starters

Levels of service
Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard
The standard defines tests at different levels of current; the purpose of these tests is to place the equipment in extreme conditions. The standard defines 2 types of coordination, according to the condition of the components after testing: type 1, type 2. To determine the type of coordination, the standard requires that the behaviour of the equipment be tested under overload and short-circuit conditions for 3 fault current values, covering overload and short-circuit conditions. Type 1 coordination Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts. Type 2 coordination Type 2 coordination requires that In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must subsequently be able to resume operation. The risk of contact welding is permissible; in this case, the manufacturer must indicate measures to be taken regarding maintenance of the equipment. Type 2 coordination increases reliability of operation.
t
Overload zone Low-level short-circuit zone Short-circuit zone
Current values
Current Ico (overload I < 10 In) The thermal overload relay associated with the contactor provides protection against this type of fault, up to a value Ico (see curve) defined by the manufacturer. Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies the 2 current values to be used for checking coordination between the thermal overload relay and the short-circuit protection device: b at 0.75 Ico only the thermal overload relay must trip, b at 1.25 Ico the short-circuit protection device must operate. Current r (low level short-circuit 10 < I < 50 In) The main cause of this type of fault is the deterioration of insulating materials. Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines an intermediate short-circuit current r. This test current makes it possible to check whether the protection device is providing protection against low-level short-circuits.
Operational current Ie (AC-3) (A) Ie y 16 16 < Ie y 63 63 < Ie y 125 125 < Ie y 315 315 < Ie y 630 630 < Ie y 1000 Current r (kA) 1 3 5 10 18 30
2 4 5
7 3
1 In 10 0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico Ico Ir
6
50 Iq a k In
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Thermal overload relay curve. Fuse. Tripping of thermal overload relay only. Thermal limit of the circuit-breaker. Thermal overload relay limit. Current broken by the SCPD (1). Circuit breaker magnetic trip.
Current Iq (short-circuit > current r) This type of fault corresponds to a dead short and is relatively rare. It can be caused by a connection error during maintenance work. Short-circuit protection is provided by fast operating devices. Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines a current Iq. The coordination tables supplied by Schneider Electric are based on a current Iq that is generally u 50 kA.
(1) SCPD: short-circuit protection device.
1/2
General (continued)
TeSys motor starters

Levels of service
Selection
No coordination Considerable risks to both persons and equipment. Not authorised by standards: v NF C 15-100 and IEC 60364-1, article 133-1 (installation regulations), v EN/IEC 60204-1, article 7 (electrical equipment in machines), v IEC 60947-4-1, article 8.2.5. (starters) Type 1 coordination The most frequently used solution. b Equipment costs are lower. b Reliability of operation is not a requirement. b Before restarting, it may be necessary to repair the motor starter. Consequences: v significant amount of machine downtime, v skilled maintenance personnel required to repair, check, obtain supplies. Example: air conditioning in commercial premises. Type 2 coordination This solution ensures reliability of operation. Consequences: v reduced machine downtime, v reduced maintenance after a short-circuit. Example: escalators. Total coordination With this solution, no damage or misadjustment is permissible and reliability of operation is guaranteed. Consequences: v immediate return to service, v no special precautions required. Examples: smoke extraction, fire-fighting pumps.
1/3
Selection guide
TeSys motor starters - open version
Applications
Pre-assembled starters
1
Starter type
Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters
Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters
D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker
D.O.L. starters with fuse protection
Soft start units or star-delta starters to be used in association with a circuit-breaker or fuses
Level of service
Type 1 coordination
Type 2 coordination
Power at 400 V
Up to 5.5 kW
Up to 37 kW
Up to 37 kW
Up to 132 kW
Type of components
Combination automatic motor starter with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
Fuse carrier + plate mounted contactor
3 contactors (line, star and delta, mounted on plate, rail or chassis)
Pages
1/6 and 1/7
1/8 and 1/9
1/10 and 1/11
1/34
1/37
1/4
Starters for customer assembly
Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters
1
D.O.L. or star-delta starters with fuses
D.O.L. or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers
Total coordination
Type 1 and type 2 coordination
Up to 30 kW
Up to 110 kW
Up to 315 kW
Up to 355 kW
Contactor-breaker
Thermal magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor(s)
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay
Fuse carrier + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay
Switch-disconnector-fuse + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay
1/22 and 1/23
1/16 and 1/17 1/26 and 1/27
1/18 and 1/19 1/28 and 1/29
1/24 1/30
1/25, 1/31 1/32 and 1/33
1/5
References

Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination
1
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA
This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2 ME, b 1 3-pole contactor, b 1 combination block GV2 AF01.
ME06K1 50 50 50
ME07K1 50 50 50
ME08K1 50 50 50
ME10K1 50 50 50
ME14K1 50 15 10 (4 kW) 6 (5.5 kW)
ME16K1 15 8 6
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in AC-3 400/ 440 V 500 V 415 V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Pre-assembled Weight
Motor Contactor circuit-breaker Reference to Reference be completed (3)
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) GV2 ME06K1pp kg 0.460
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 GV2 ME10K1pp 3 4 5.5
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
A 11.6
A 22.5
GV2 ME06
LC1 K06
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME07
LC1 K06
GV2 ME07K1pp
0.460
2.54
51
GV2 ME08
LC1 K06
GV2 ME08K1pp
0.460
46.3
78
GV2 ME10
LC1 K06
GV2 ME10K1pp
0.460
610
138
GV2 ME14
LC1 K09
GV2 ME14K1pp
0.460
914
170
GV2 ME16
LC1 K12
GV2 ME16K1pp
0.460
Add-on blocks
Description Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference GV2 AF01 Weight kg 0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 380/400 a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 c (4) BW3 (3) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
Dimensions : page 1/12
Schemes : page 1/14
1/6
References

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2 ME, b 1 3-pole reversing contactor, b 1 combination block GV2 AF01.
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA ME06K2 50 50 50 ME07K2 50 50 50 ME08K2 50 50 50 ME10K2 50 50 50 ME14K2 50 15 10 (4 kW) 6 (5.5 kW) ME16K2 15 8 6
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) GV2 ME06K2pp kg 0.460
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
A 11.6
A 22.5
GV2 ME06
LC2 K06
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME07
LC2 K06
GV2 ME07K2pp
0.460
2.54
51
GV2 ME08
LC2 K06
GV2 ME08K2pp
0.460
GV2 ME10K2 pp
46.3
78
GV2 ME10
LC2 K06
GV2 ME10K2pp
0.460
610
138
GV2 ME14
LC2 K09
GV2 ME14K2pp
0.460
914
170
GV2 ME16
LC2 K12
GV2 ME16K2pp
0.460
Add-on blocks
Description Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference GV2 AF01 Weight kg 0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 380/400 a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 c (4) BW3 (3) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
Schemes : page 1/14
1/7
References

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 37 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination
1
Characteristics
Starter type GV2/GV3
This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2 ME or GV3 ME, b 1 3-pole contactor, b 1 combination block GV2 AF3 (for GV2 DM) or 3 power connections (for GV3 DM).
Breaking capacity (lq) (1)
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
kA kA kA
DM 102 to DM 110 50 50 50
DM 114
DM 116
DM 120
DM 121
DM 122
DM 132
DM 138
DM 140
DM 150
DM 163
DM 180
50 15 6
15 8 6
15 8 6
15 6 4
15 6 4
10 6 4
35 25 8
35 25 8
35 25 8
35 25 8
35 10 4
References
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) GV2 DM102pp (3) GV2 DM103pp (3) GV2 DM104pp (3) GV2 DM105pp (3) GV2 DM106pp (3) kg 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596
GV2 DM102pp
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 25 30 45
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 55
A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6
A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5
GV2 ME02 GV2 ME03 GV2 ME04 GV2 ME05 GV2 ME06
LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp
1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 2540 2540 4063 4063 5680
33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 520 520 819 819 1040
GV2 ME07 GV2 ME08 GV2 ME10 GV2 ME14 GV2 ME16 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ME22 GV2 ME32
LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D18pp LC1 D25pp LC1 D25pp LC1 D32pp
GV2 DM107pp (3) GV2 DM108pp (3) GV2 DM110pp (3) GV2 DM114pp (3) GV2 DM116pp GV2 DM120pp GV2 GV2 GV2 GV3 GV3 GV3 GV3 GV3 DM121pp DM122pp DM132pp DM138pp DM140pp DM150pp DM163pp DM180pp
0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.601 0.606 0.646 0.646 0.651 1.965 2.917 2.917 2.917 3.044
Add-on blocks
Mounting Sold in Unit Weight of GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between 5 rail 10 GV2 AF3 0.016 circuit-breaker and contactor Mounting plate 10 GV2 AF4 0.016 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 220 230 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (4) BD (3) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/17. (4) Only available for GV2 DM. Coil with integral suppression device as standard. Description
Dimensions : pages 1/12 and 1/13
Schemes : page 1/14
1/8
References

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2 ME, b 1 3-pole reversing contactor, b 1 combination block GV2 AF3.
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA DM202 to DM210 50 50 50 DM214 50 15 10 DM216 15 8 6 DM220 15 8 6 DM221 15 6 4 DM222 15 6 4 DM232 10 6 4
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing (3)
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) GV2 DM202pp GV2 DM203pp GV2 DM204pp GV2 DM205pp GV2 DM206pp kg 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5
A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6
A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5
GV2 DM202pp
1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432
33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416
GV2 ME07 GV2 ME08 GV2 ME10 GV2 ME14 GV2 ME16 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ME22 GV2 ME32
GV2 DM207pp GV2 DM208pp GV2 DM210pp GV2 DM214pp GV2 DM216pp GV2 DM220pp GV2 DM221pp GV2 DM222pp GV2 DM232pp
0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.973 0.983 1.063 1.063 1.073
Add-on blocks
Mounting Sold in Unit Weight of GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between 5 rail 10 GV2 AF3 0.016 circuit-breaker and contactor Mounting plate 10 GV2 AF4 0.016 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 220 230 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (5) BD (3) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/19. (4) See page 5/58. (5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard. Description
Schemes : page 1/15
1/9
References

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination
1
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA
This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2 P, b 1 3-pole contactor, b 1 combination block GV2 AF3.
DP102 to DP110 130 130 130
DP114 130 130 50
DP116 130 50 42
DP120 50 20 10
DP121 50 20 10
DP122 50 20 10
DP132 50 20 10
References
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) GV2 DP102pp GV2 DP103pp GV2 DP104pp GV2 DP105pp GV2 DP106pp kg 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5
A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6
A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5
GV2 P02 GV2 P03 GV2 P04 GV2 P05 GV2 P06
1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432
33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416
GV2 P07 GV2 P08 GV2 P10 GV2 P14 GV2 P16 GV2 P20 GV2 P21 GV2 P22 GV2 P32
GV2 DP107pp GV2 DP108pp GV2 DP110pp GV2 DP114pp GV2 DP116pp GV2 DP120pp GV2 DP121pp GV2 DP122pp GV2 DP132pp
0.686 0.696 0.736 0.736 0.741 0.736 0.741 0.741 0.741
GV2 DP102pp
Add-on blocks
Mounting Sold in Unit Weight of GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between 5 rail 10 GV2 AF3 0.016 circuit-breaker and contactor Mounting plate 10 GV2 AF4 0.016 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 220 230 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (4) BD (3) See page 5/58. (4) Coil with integral suppression device as standard. Description
Schemes : page 1/15
1/10
References

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker type GV2 P, b 1 3-pole reversing contactor, b 1 combination block GV2 AF3.
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA DP202 to DP210 130 130 130 DP214 130 130 50 DP216 130 50 42 DP220 50 20 10 DP221 50 20 10 DP222 50 20 10 DP232 50 20 10
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) GV2 DP202pp GV2 DP203pp GV2 DP204pp GV2 DP205pp GV2 DP206pp kg 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5
A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6
A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5
GV2 P02 GV2 P03 GV2 P04 GV2 P05 GV2 P06
GV2 DP202pp
1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432
33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416
GV2 P07 GV2 P08 GV2 P10 GV2 P14 GV2 P16 GV2 P20 GV2 P21 GV2 P22 GV2 P32
GV2 DP207pp GV2 DP208pp GV2 DP210pp GV2 DP214pp GV2 DP216pp GV2 DP220pp GV2 DP221pp GV2 DP222pp GV2 DP232pp
1.053 1.073 1.153 1.153 1.163 1.153 1.163 1.163 1.163
Add-on blocks
Mounting Sold in Unit Weight of GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between 5 rail 10 GV2 AF3 0.016 circuit-breaker and contactor Mounting plate 10 GV2 AF4 0.016 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 220 230 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (4) BD (3) See page 5/58. (4) Coil with integral suppression device as standard. Description
Schemes : page 1/15
1/11
Dimensions, mounting

GV2 MEppKppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200
GV2 MEppK1 pp
GV2 MEppK2pp
152
11
66 87
45
90
GV2 DMppppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 With adapter plate LAD 311 GV2 DM1pppp GV2 DM2pppp
152
125 3
c1 c c1 c d1 d
DMp02pp to DMp20pp 176.4 99.6 94.1 DMp21pp to DMp32pp 186.8 105.9 100.4 DMp02pp to DMp20pp 135.6 130.1 112.5 107 DMp21 pp to DMp32 pp 141.9 136.4 112.5 107
234
45
90
GV2 b c c1
GV2 c c1 d d1
References : pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/12
Dimensions, mounting (continued)

GV2 DPppppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 With adapter plate LAD 311 GV2 DP1pppp GV2 DP2pppp
125 3
c1 c d1 d
234
45
90
c1 c
DPp10pp to DPp32pp 186.8 111.9 106.4 100.5 95 GV2 c c1 DPp02 pp to DPp08 pp 141.6 136.5 DPp10pp to DPp32pp 147.9 142.4
GV2 b c c1 d d1
DPp02 pp to DPp08 pp 176.4 105.6 100.1 100.5 95
GV3 DMppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 Screw fixing
125
125
283
c1 c
283
266
80
4 x 4
GV3
DM138
c c1
147 137
DM140, DM180 150, 163 149 156 139 146
1/13

A2 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6
14 22 21/NC 13/NO 14 13/NO
Schemes
GV2 MEppK1pp
GV2 DM1 pppp, GV3 DM1 pppp

A2 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1 A1
1/14
A1 1/L1 2/T1 3/L2 4/T2 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3 3/L2 1/L1
A2 A1 1 3 5 13/NO 14 21/NC 1/L1 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 14 A2 A1 3/L2 5/L3 13/NO L3 6/T3
5/L3
A2 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 3/L2 5/L3 13/NO 1/L1
A1 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2 L1 2/T1 L2 4/T2
3/L2
1/L1
4 6 14 22
GV2 DM2pppp
GV2 MEppK2 pp
U 1 3 5 13/NO 21/NC A1 4 6 14 22 A2
Schemes (continued)

GV2 DP1pppp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
GV2 DP2 pppp

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
1/L1 2/T1
3/L2 4/T2
5/L3 6/T3
L1 2/T1
L2 4/T2
13/NO
A2
A1
21/NC
L3 6/T3 13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
14
22
A1
21/NC 22
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
A2
22
14
Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts

Control circuit a Control circuit c
A1 A1 A2 A2 KM2
A1
01
A1
02
01
01
KM1 02
KM2 A1 A1 KM1 02 A2 A2 KM2 KM1
A2
A2
01
02
14
A2
A1
1/15

1
D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
0.06 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq (1) P Ie kW A kA kW A 0.06 0.22 50 0.06 0.19 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 37 45 45 50 75 90 110 132 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 0.99 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 64 76 76 90 125 146 178 215
Circuit-breaker Reference Iq (1) kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 6 25 25 25 10 25 10 25 25 35 35 35 35 500 V P kW Ie A Iq (1) kA
Setting range of thermal trips A 0.160.25
Contactor Reference (2)
GV2 ME02
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 37 45 55 75 90 110
0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 0.98 1.5 2 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 69 81 100 135 165 200
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 35 35 35 15 25 25 25 35 35 35
GV2 ME03 GV2 ME04 GV2 ME05
0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 11.6
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 55 55 75 90 110 132 160
1 1.21 1.5 2 2.6 3.8 5 6.5 9 12 13.9 18.4 23 28.5 28.5 33 45 55 65 65 80 80 105 129 156 187 220
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 10 10 6 6 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 4 18 4 18 30 30 30 30 30
GV2 ME06 GV2 ME06
1.6.2.5 2.54 46.3 610 914
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K09 or LC1 D09 LC1 K12 or LC1 D12
GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ME22 GV2 ME32 GV3 ME40 GV3 ME40 GV3 ME63 GV3 ME63 GV3 ME80 GV7 RE80 GV3 ME80 GV7 RE80 GV7 RE100 GV7 RE100 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE220
1318 1723 2025 2432 2540 2540 4063 4063 5680 4880 5680 4880 60100 60100 90150 90150 90150 132220
LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D38 LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D65 LC1 D65 LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F185
GV7 RE220 GV7 RE220
132220 132220
LC1 F265 LC1 F225
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/16

(continued)
1
D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Reference (2) Setting 400/415 V 440 V 500 V range of thermal trips P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A 0.06 0.22 130 0.06 0.19 130 GV2 P02 or GV2 ME02 0.160.25 0.09 0.28 130 0.09 0.36 130 0.12 0.37 130 GV2 P03 or GV2 ME03 0.250.4 0.12 0.42 130 0.18 0.6 130 0.18 0.55 130 GV2 P04 or GV2 ME04 0.40.63 0.25 0.88 130 0.25 0.76 130 0.37 0.98 130 0.37 0.99 130 GV2 P05 or GV2 ME05 0.631 0.37 1 130 0.55 1.5 130 0.55 1.36 130 0.55 1.21 130 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 11.6 0.75 1.5 130 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 11.6 0.75 2 130 0.75 1.68 130 1.1 2.37 130 1.1 2 130 GV2 P07 or GV2 ME07 1.62.5 1.1 2.5 130 1.5 2.6 130 1.5 3.5 130 1.5 3.06 130 2.2 3.8 130 GV2 P08 or GV2 ME08 2.54 2.2 5 130 GV2 P10 or GV2 ME10 46.3 2.2 4.42 50 3 5.77 50 3 5 50 GV2 ME10 46.3 2.2 4.42 130 3 5.77 130 3 5 130 GV2 P10 46.3 3 6.5 130 4 8.4 130 GV2 P14 or GV2 ME14 610 4 7.9 15 4 6.5 10 5.5 9 10 GV2 ME14 610 4 6.5 50 4 7.9 130 5.5 9 50 GV2 P14 610 5.5 11 130 5.5 10.4 50 7.5 12 42 GV2 P16 or GV2 ME16 914 7.5 13.7 50 9 13.9 42 7.5 14.8 50 9 16.9 20 GV2 P20 or GV2 ME20 1318 9 18.1 50 11 20.1 20 11 18.4 10 GV2 P21 or GV2 ME21 1723 11 21 50 GV2 P22 or GV2 ME22 2025 15 23 10 GV2 P22 2025 15 28.5 35 15 26.5 25 18.5 28.5 10 GV2 P32 or GV2 ME32 2540 15 28.5 70 15 26.5 65 18.5 28.5 50 GV7 RS40 2540 18.5 35 70 18.5 32.8 65 22 33 50 GV7 RS40 2540 22 39 65 GV7 RS40 2540 30 45 50 GV7 RS50 3050 37 55 50 GV7 RS80 4880 22 42 70 GV7 RS50 3050 30 57 70 30 51.5 65 GV7 RS80 4880 GV7 RS80 4880 37 69 70 37 64 65 45 76 65 GV7 RS80 4880 45 65 50 GV7 RS80 4880 55 80 50 GV7 RS80 4880 45 81 70 55 90 65 GV7 RS100 60100 55 100 70 75 125 65 75 135 70 90 146 65 90 129 50 GV7 RS150 90150 90 165 70 110 178 65 110 156 50 GV7 RS220 132220 110 200 70 132 215 65 GV7 RS220 132220 132 187 50 160 220 50 GV7 RS220 132220 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3 , see page 3/9. (2) Combinations with circuit-breaker GV2 ME are type 2 coordinated only at 400/415 V and 440 V. (3) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. Contactor Reference (3)
LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D32 LC1 D40 LC1 D40 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265
1/17

1
D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P Ie kW A kA kW A 0.06 0.22 50 0.06 0.19 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 1 1.5 2 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 70 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 0.55 0.76 1 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.4 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.5 39 0.09 0.12 0.28 0.37
Circuit-breaker 500 V P Ie kW A 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 6 65 65 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 1 1.21 1.5 2 2.6 3.8 5 6.5 12 13.9 18.4 23 26.5 33 Reference Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 10 6 6 4 4 4 25 Rating Irm (1) A 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.63 0.63 1 A 5 5 5 8 8 13
Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 0.160.23 0.230.36 0.360.54 0.360.54 0.540.8 0.540.8
Iq kA 50 50 50
GV2 LE03 GV2 LE03 GV2 LE03 GV2 LE04 GV2 LE04 GV2 LE05
LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06
LR2 K0302 LR2 K0303 LR2 K0304 LR2 K0304 LR2 K0305 LR2 K0305
GV2 LE05
13
LC1 K06
LR2 K0306
0.81.2
GV2 LE06 GV2 LE07
1.6 2.5
22.5 33.5
LC1 K06 LC1 K06
LR2 K0307 LR2 K0307
1.21.8 1.21.8
GV2 LE07 GV2 LE08 GV2 LE08 GV2 LE10 GV2 LE10 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE20 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE32 NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA
2.5 4 4 6.3 6.3 10 10 10 14 14 18 25 25 32 50 50 50
33.5 51 51 78 78 138 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 416 500 450 650
LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K09 LC1 K09 LC1 K09 LC1 K12 LC1 D18 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D38 LC1 D40 LC1 D40
LR2 K0308 LR2 K0310 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0316 LR2 K0321 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 35 LRD 3355 LRD 3357
1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 5.58 5.58 811.5 1014 1218 1218 1624 1624 2332 3038 3040 3750
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/18

(continued)
1

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination (continued)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P Ie kW A kA kW A 22 42 70 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 57 69 81 100 135 165 200 240 285 352 388 437 70 70 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 30 37 45 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 51.5 64 76 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 470 Circuit-breaker 500 V P Ie kW A 30 40 37 45 55 50 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 55 65 80 90 105 129 156 187 220 281 310 360 445 500 Reference Iq kA 25 25 25 25 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) Rating Irm (1) A 50 50 80 80 80 100 100 150 150 150 150 220 220 220 220 220 320 320 320 320 320 320 500 500 500 500 500 500 A 650 880 960 960 1040 1300 1200 1500 1350 1800 1950 2200 2640 2420 2640 2860 3200 2860 3520 4160 3840 4160 5000 5550 5000 5500 6000 6500 Contactor Reference (2) Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 3750 4865 4865 5570 6380 80104 80104 95120 95120 110140 132220 132220 132220 132220 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 300500 300500 300500 380630
Iq kA 65 65 65 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA NS100 pMA (3) NS100 pMA (3) NS160 pMA (3) NS160 pMA (3) NS160 pMA (3) NS160 pMA (3) NS250 pMA (3) NS250 pMA (3) NS250 pMA (3) NS250 pMA (3) NS250 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS630 pMA (3) NS630 pMA (3) NS630 pMA (3) NS630 pMA (3) NS630 pMA (3) NS630 pMA (3)
LC1 D50 LC1 D65 LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F330 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F500
LRD 3357 LRD 3359 LRD 3359 LRD 3361 LRD 3363 LRD 3365 LRD 4365 LRD 4367 LRD 4367 LRD 4369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. (3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100 pMA NS160 pMA and NS250pMA NS400 pMA and NS630pMA 400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130 440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130 500 V 18 50 30 50 50 70 660/690 V 8 10 8 10 20 35 Code N H N H H L
1/19

(continued)
1

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P Ie kW A kA kW A 0.06 0.22 130 0.06 0.19 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 0.98 1.6 2 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 50 50 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 3 4 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 0.99 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 4.42 5.77 7.9 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5
Circuit-breaker 500 V P Ie kW A 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3 3 4 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 1 1.21 1.5 2 2.6 3.8 5 5 5 6.5 6.5 9 9 12 13.9 18.4 23 28.5 33 Reference Iq kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 13 50 130 10 50 10 50 42 42 10 10 10 25 Rating Irm (1) A 0.4 A 5
Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 0.160.25
Iq kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 130 130 15 130 50 50 20 20 20
GV2 L03 or LE03
LC1 D09
LRD 02
GV2 L03 or LE03
0.4
LC1 D09
LRD 03
0.250.40
GV2 L04 or LE04
0.63
LC1 D09
LRD 04
0.40.63
GV2 L05 or LE05 GV2 L05 or LE05
1 1
13 13
LC1 D09 LC1 D09
LRD 05 LRD 06
0.631 11.7
1.6 2.5
22.5 33.5
LC1 D09 LC1 D09
LRD 06 LRD 07
11.7 1.62.5
4 4
51 51
LC1 D09 LC1 D09
LRD 08 LRD 10
2.54 46
GV2 L10 or LE10
6.3
78
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
GV2 LE10
6.3
78
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
GV2 L10 GV2 L14 or LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 or LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L16 GV2 L20
6.3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 18
78 10 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 170 170 223
LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D12 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25
LRD 10 LRD 12 LRD 12 LRD 12 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 21
46 5.58 5.58 5.58 710 710 710 710 710 913 1218 1218
GV2 L22
25
327
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
GV2 L22 GV2 L32 NS80HMA
25 32 50
327 416 450
LC1 D32 LC1 D40 LC1 D40
LRD 22 LRD 3353 LRD 3353
1624 2332 2332
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/20

(continued)
1

0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination (continued)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P Ie kW A kA kW A 18.5 35 70 18.5 32.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 42 57 69 81 100 135 165 200 240 285 352 388 437 70 70 70 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 Circuit-breaker 500 V P Ie kW A 30 37 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 45 55 55 65 80 105 129 156 187 220 281 310 360 445 500 Reference Iq kA 25 25 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) Rating Irm (1) A 50 50 A 550 650 Contactor Reference (2) Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 3040 3750
Iq kA 65 65 65 65 65 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
NS80HMA NS80HMA
LC1 D40 LC1 D50
LRD 3355 LRD 3357
NS80HMA NS100 pMA (3) NS100 pMA (3) NS80HMA NS100 pMA (3) NS100 pMA (3) NS160 pMA (3) NS160 pMA (3) NS160 pMA (3) NS160 pMA (3) NS160 pMA (3) NS250 pMA (3) NS250 pMA (3) NS250 pMA (3) NS250 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3) NS400 pMA (3)
80 100 100 80 100 100 150 150 150 150 150 220 220 220 220 320 320 320 320 320 320
880 880 960 1000 1040 1300 1500 1050 1950 1950 1200 2420 1540 2860 2200 3520 2200 4000 4000 3500 3500
LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 D150 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400
LRD 3359 LRD 3359 LRD 3361 LRD 3363 LRD 3363 LR9 D5367 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379
4865 4865 5570 6380 6380 60100 90150 90150 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 300500 200330 300500
NS630 pMA (3)
500
5500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
NS630 pMA (3)
500
4500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
NS630 pMA (3) NS630 pMA (3)
500 500
6250 5000
LC1 F500 LC1 F630
LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381
300500 380630
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. (3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100 pMA NS160 pMA and NS250pMA NS400 pMA and NS630pMA 400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130 440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130 500 V 18 50 30 50 50 70 660/690 V 8 10 8 10 20 35 Code N H N H H L
1/21

1
D.O.L. starters with integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers with overload protection by separate module
0.06 to 4 kW at 400/415 V: (total coordination)
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 Ie A 0.22 0.36 Iq kA 70 70 P kW 0.06 0.09 Ie A 0.19 0.28 Iq kA 70 70
Contactor breaker 500 V P kW Ie A Iq kA Without control test function Reference LD1 LB030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 With control test function Reference
Protection module Reference Setting range Thermal (2) A 0.160.25 0.250.4 0.250.4 0.250.4 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.40.63 0.40.63 0.40.63 0.631 0.631 11.6 11.6 11.6 11.6 1.62.5 1.62.5 1.62.5 1.62.5 2.54 2.54 2.54 2.54 46 46.3 46 46.3 610 6.310 610 6.310 Magnetic (3) A 3.8 6 2.44.8 6 2.44.8 9.5 3.87.6 9.5 3.87.6 15 612 24 9.519 24 9.519 37.5 1530 37.5 1530 60 2448 60 2448 90 3876 90 3876 150 60120 150 60120
LB1 LB03P02 LB1 LB03P03 LB1 LC03M03 LB1 LB03P03 LB1 LC03M03 LB1 LB03P04 LB1 LC03M04 LB1 LB03P04 LB1 LC03M04 LB1 LB03P05 LB1 LC03M05 LB1 LB03P06 LB1 LC03M06 LB1 LB03P06 LB1 LC03M06 LB1 LB03P07 LB1 LC03M07 LB1 LB03P07 LB1 LC03M07 LB1 LB03P08 LB1 LC03M08 LB1 LB03P08 LB1 LC03M08 LB1 LB03P10 LB1 LC03M10 LB1 LB03P10 LB1 LC03M10 LB1 LB03P13 LB1 LC03M13 LB1 LB03P13 LB1 LC03M13
LD4 LC130
0.12
0.37
70
LD4 LC130
0.12
0.42
70
0.18
0.55
70
LD4 LC130
0.18
0.6
70
LD4 LC130
0.25
0.88
70
0.25
0.76
70
0.37
70
LD4 LC130
0.37
70
0.37
70
0.55
1.21
70
LD4 LC130
0.55
1.5
70
0.55
1.36
70
0.75
1.5
70
LD4 LC130
0.75
70
0.75
1.68
70
1.1
70
LD4 LC130
1.1
2.37
70
LD4 LC130
1.1
2.5
70
1.5
2.6
70
LD4 LC130
1.5
3.5
70
1.5
3.06
70
2.2
3.8
70
LD4 LC130
2.2
70
2.2
4.42
(1)
15
LD4 LC130
5.77
(1)
LD4 LC130
6.5
70
7.9
(1)
6.5
15
LD4 LC130
8.4
70
5.5
15
LD4 LC130
(1) Iq = 40 kA for LD1 LB; Iq = 70 kA for LDp LC. (2) Irth min. to Irth max. (3) For LB1 LB, the magnetic protection is fixed, set at 15 Irth max. For LB1 LC, the magnetic protection is adjustable from 6 to 12 Irth max.
1/22

(continued)
1

D.O.L. starters with integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers with overload protection by separate module
5.5 to 30 kW at 400/415 V: (total coordination)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P kW 5.5 Ie A 11 Iq kA 70 P kW 5.5 Ie A 10.4 Iq kA (1) Contactor breaker 500 V P kW 7.5 Ie A 12 Iq kA (2) Without control test function Reference LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LB030 or LD1 LC030 LD1 LC030 LD1 LC030 LD1 LC030 LD1 LD030 LD1 LD030 LD1 LD030 LD1 LD030 LD1 LD030 With control test function Reference Protection module Reference Setting range Thermal (3) A 1016 1016 1016 1016 1218 1016 1218 1625 1625 1625 2332 2840 2840 3550 4563 4563 Magnetic (4) A 240 95190 240 95190 270 95190 270 150300 150300 150300 190380 240480 240480 300600 380760 380760
LD4 LC130
LB1 LB03P17 LB1 LC03M17 LB1 LB03P17 LB1 LC03M17 LB1 LB03P21 LB1 LC03M17 LB1 LB03P21 LB1 LC03M22 LB1 LC03M22 LB1 LC03M22 LB1 LC03M53 LB1 LD03M55 LB1 LD03M55 LB1 LD03M57 LB1 LD03M61 LB1 LD03M61
7.5
14.8
70
7.5
13.7
(1)
LD4 LC130
13.9
(2)
LD4 LC130
18.1
70
16.9
(1)
LD4 LC130 LD4 LC130 LD4 LC130 LD4 LC130 LD4 LD130 LD4 LD130 LD4 LD130 LD4 LD130 LD4 LD130
11 15 18.5 22 30
21 28.5 35 42 57
70 70 70 70 70
11 15 18.5 22 30 33
20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 58.5
70 30 70 70 40 40
11 15 18.5 22 30 37
18.4 23 28.5 33 45 55
20 20 15 35 35 35
(1) Iq = 40 kA for LD1 LB; Iq = 70 kA for LDp LC. (2) Iq = 10 kA for LD1 LB; Iq = 25 kA for LDp LC. (3) Irth min. to Irth max. (4) For LB1 LB, the magnetic protection is fixed, set at 15 Irth max. For LB1 LC and LB1 LD, the magnetic protection is adjustable from 6 to 12 Irth max.
1/23

1
D.O.L. starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses)
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie P Ie kW A kW A 0.06 0.22 0.06 0.19 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 (3) 45 55 0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 1 1.5 2 2.5 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 81 100 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 1 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90
500 V P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Fuse carrier (1) (basic block) Reference Ie A 1 1.21 1.5 2 2.6 3.8 5 6.5 9 12 13.9 18.4 23 28.5 33 45 55 65 80 105
aM fuses Size Rating A 2 2
Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 0.160.23 0.230.36
LS1 D32 LS1 D32
10 x 38 10 x 38
LC1 K06 LC1 K06
LR2 K0302 LR2 K0303
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0304
0.360.54
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0305
0.540.8
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0306
0.81.2
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0307
1.21.8
LS1 D32 LS1 D32
10 x 38 10 x 38
4 4
LC1 K06 LC1 K06
LR2 K0308 LR2 K0310
1.82.6 2.63.7
LS1 D32 LS1 D32 LS1 D32 LS1 D32 LS1 D32 LS1 D32 LS1 D32
10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38
6 8 8 12 16 16 20
LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K09 LC1 K09 LC1 K12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25
LR2 K0312 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0316 LR2 K0321 LRD 21 LRD 21
3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 811.5 1014 1218 1218
GK1 EK GK1 EK GK1 EK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK
14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58
25 32 40 50 80 80 80 80 100 100 125 125
LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D50 LC1 D65 LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D115
LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 3355 LRD 3357 LRD 3359 LRD 3359 LRD 3361 LRD 3361 LRD 3363 LRD 3365 LRD 4365 LRD 4367
1624 2332 3040 3750 4865 4865 5570 5570 6380 8093 80104 95120
(1) For breaking under load, add a rotary switch disconnector. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. (3) 400 V maximum.
1/24

(continued)
1

D.O.L. starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V 500 V P Ie P Ie P Ie kW A kW A kW A 0.06 0.22 0.06 0.19 0.09 0.28 0.09 0.36 0.12 0.42 0.12 0.37 0.18 0.6 0.18 0.55 0.25 0.76 0.25 0.88 0.37 1 0.37 1 0.37 1 0.55 1.21 0.55 1.5 0.55 1.36 0.75 1.5 0.75 2 0.75 1.68 1.1 2.37 1.1 2 1.1 2.5 1.5 2.6 1.5 3.5 1.5 3.06 2.2 3.8 2.2 5 2.2 4.42 3 5 3 6.5 3 5.77 4 6 4 8.4 4 7.9 5.5 9 5.5 11 5.5 10.4 7.5 12 7.5 14.8 7.5 13.7 9 13.9 9 16.9 9 18.1 11 20.1 11 18.4 11 21 15 23 15 28.5 15 26.5 18.5 28.5 18.5 35 18.5 32.8 22 33 22 42 22 39 30 45 30 51.5 37 55 30 57 37 64 45 65 37 69 45 76 55 80 45 81 55 100 55 90 75 105 75 135 75 125 90 129 90 165 90 146 110 156 110 200 110 178 132 187 132 240 132 215 160 220 160 256 160 285 200 321 200 281 220 310 200 352 220 388 220 353 250 360 250 437 250 401 315 445 355 500 315 555 315 505 355 549 400 611 400 540 (1) For reversing operation. replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. SwitchaM fuses disconnector-fuse Reference Size Rating A 10 x 38 2 10 x 38 2 10 x 38 2 10 x 38 2 Contactor Reference (1) Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 0.160.25 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631
GS1 DD GS1 DD GS1 DD GS1 DD
LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09
LRD 02 LRD 03 LRD 0 LRD 05
GS1 DD GS1 DD GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 DD DD DD DD DD DD F F F F J J J J J J J J L L N N QQ QQ QQ QQ
10 x 38 2 10 x 38 4 10 10 10 10 10 10 14 x 38 x 38 x 38 x 38 x 38 x 38 x 51 4 6 8 10 16 16 20 25 3 40 50 80 80 80 80 100 100 100 125 160 200 250 315 315 400 400 500 500 630 630 800
LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 D09 D09 D09 D09 D12 D18 D25 D25 D32 D40 D50 D50 D65 D65 D95 D80 D115 D95 D150 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F330 F400
LRD 06 LRD 07 LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD 08 10 12 14 16 21 21
11.7 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 3750 4865 4865 5570 5570 6380 60100 8093 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 380630 380630 380630
14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4
LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 3355 LRD 3357 LRD 3359 LRD 3359 LRD 3361 LRD 3361 LRD 3363 LR9 D5367 LRD 3365 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381 LR9 F7381 LR9 F7381
GS1 S GS1 S GS1 S GS1 S GS1 V
LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F630
1/25

1
Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
Maximum operating rate: LC3 K: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie IrD (1) Iq (2) P kW A A kA kW 1.5 3.5 2 50 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 30 37 37 45 55 75 90 110 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 57 69 69 81 100 135 165 200 2.9 3.8 4.9 6.4 8.6 10 12 17 20 24 33 33 40 40 47 58 78 95 115 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 35 35 35 25 15 25 25 25 35 35 35 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 30 37 37 45 45 55 75 90 Circuit-breaker Reference Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 51.5 64 64 76 76 90 125 146 IrD (1) A 1.8 2.6 3.3 4.6 6 7.9 9.8 12 15 19 23 30 30 37 37 44 44 52 72 84 Iq (2) kA 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 6 25 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 25 35 35 Setting range of thermal trips A 2.54 Star-delta contactors Reference (2)
GV2 ME08
LC3 K06
GV2 ME10
46.3
LC3 K06
GV2 ME14 GV2 ME16 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ME22 GV2 ME32 GV3 ME40 GV3 ME40 GV3 ME63 GV7 RE80 GV3 ME63 GV7 RE80 GV3 ME80 GV7 RE80 GV3 ME80 GV7 RE80
610 914 1318 1318 1723 2025 2432 2540 2540 4063 4880 4063 4880 5680 4880 5680 4880
LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K09 LC3 D12A LC3 D12A LC3 D12A LC3 D18A LC3 D18A LC3 D18A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A LC3 D40 LC3 D40 LC3 D50 LC3 D50
GV7 RE100 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE150
60100 90150 90150
LC3 D50 LC3 D80 LC3 D115
110 132
178 215
103 124
35 35
GV7 RE220 GV7 RE220
132220 132220
LC3 D115 LC3 D150
(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection. (2) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9.
1/26

(continued)
1

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

Maximum operating rate: LC1 D: 30 starts/hour; LC1 F: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC1 D: 30 seconds; LC1 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 0/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P kW A kA kW 1.5 3.5 130 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 81 100 135 165 200 130 130 130 130 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 Circuit-breaker Reference Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 Iq (1) kA 130 130 130 130 50 50 20 20 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 Setting range of thermal trips A 2.54 46.3 4...6.3 610 610 914 914 1318 1723 2025 2540 2540 2540 3050 4880 4880 4880 60100 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220 Star-delta contactors Reference
GV2 P08 GV2 P10 GV2 P10 GV2 P14 GV2 P14 GV2 P16 GV2 P16 GV2 P20 GV2 P21 GV2 P22 GV7 RS40 GV7 RS40 GV7 RS40 GV7 RS50 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS100 GV7 RS100 GV7 RS150 GV7 RS150 GV7 RS220 GV7 RS220
3 x LC1 D09 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D115 3 x LC1 D115 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 F185 3 x LC1 F225
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/9.
1/27

1
Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay
Maximum operating rate: LC3 K and LC3 F: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3 K and LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker Star-delta Thermal overload relay motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 contactors 400/415 V 440 V Reference Rating Irm (2) Reference Reference Setting range P Ie IrD (1) Iq P Ie IrD (1) Iq kW A A kA kW A A kA A A A 1.5 3.06 1.8 50 1.5 3.5 2 50 2.2 4.42 3 50 GV2 LE08 4 51 LC3 K06 LR2 K0308 1.82.6 2.2 5 3 50 3 5.77 3 50 GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC3 K06 LR2 K0310 2.63.7 3 6.5 4 50 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.75.5 4 7.9 5 50 GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.75.5 4 8.4 5 50 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.75.5 5.5 10.4 6 15 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0314 5.58 5.5 11 6 15 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 K06 LR2 K0314 5.58 7.5 13.7 8 8 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 811.5 7.5 14.8 9 15 GV2 LE20 18 223 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 811.5 9 16.9 1 8 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 D12A LRD 16 913 9 18.1 10 15 GV2 LE22 25 327 LC3 K12 LR2 K0316 811.5 11 20.1 12 8 GV2 LE20 18 223 LC3 K12 LR2 K0321 1014 11 21 12 15 GV2 LE22 25 327 LC3 K12 LR2 K0321 1014 15 26.5 15 6 GV2 LE22 25 327 LC3 D18A LRD 21 1218 15 28.5 16 10 GV2 LE32 32 384 LC3 D18A LRD 21 1218 18.5 35 20 70 18.5 32.8 19 65 NS80HMA 50 350 LC3 D18A LRD 22 1624 22 39 23 65 NS80HMA 50 400 LC3 D18A LRD 22 1624 22 42 24 70 NS80HMA 50 400 LC3 D32A LRD 32 2332 30 51.5 30 65 NS80HMA 80 560 LC3 D32A LRD 32 2332 30 57 33 70 NS80HMA 80 560 LC3 D32A LRD 35 3038 37 64 37 65 NS80HMA 80 560 LC3 D40 LRD 3355 3040 45 76 44 65 NS80HMA 80 640 LC3 D40 LRD 3357 3750 55 90 52 65 NS80HMA 80 800 LC3 D50 LRD 3359 4865 80 640 LC3 D40 LRD 3359 4865 37 69 40 70 NS80HMA 75 125 72 (3) NS160 pMA (3) 150 1200 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 6380 45 81 47 (3) NS100 pMA (3) 100 800 LC3 D50 LRD 3357 3750 55 100 58 (3) NS100 pMA (3) 100 1200 LC3 D50 LRD 3361 5570 75 135 78 (3) NS160 pMA (3) 150 1200 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 6380 90 146 85 (3) NS160 pMA (3) 150 1200 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80104 90 165 96 (3) 110 178 103 (3) NS250 pMA (3) 220 1760 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80104 132 215 125 (3) NS250 pMA (3) 220 1760 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110140 220 1760 LC3 D115 LRD 4369 110140 110 200 116 (3) NS250 pMA (3) 160 256 148 (3) NS400 pMA (3) 320 2240 LC3 D150 LR9 D5369 90150 200 321 186 (3) NS630 pMA (3) 500 3150 LC3 F225 LR9 F5371 132220 132 240 139 (3) NS400 pMA (3) 320 2240 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110140 160 285 165 (3) NS400 pMA (3) 320 2560 LC3 F185 LR9 F5371 132220 200 352 204 (3) 220 353 204 (3) NS630 pMA (3) 500 3150 LC3 F225 LR9 F5371 132220 220 388 225 (3) 250 401 233 (3) NS630 pMA (3) 500 3500 LC3 F265 LR9 F7375 200330 280 480 278 (3) NS630 pMA (3) 500 4000 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200330 315 505 295 (3) C801 p+STR35ME 800 4000 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200330 315 555 322 (3) 355 518 300 (3) C801 p+STR35ME 800 4500 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200330 375 575 334 (3) C801 p+STR35ME 800 5000 LC3 F400 LR9 F7379 300500 (1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection. (2) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance NS100pMA NS160pMA NS400 pMA C801p Iq (kA) NS250pMA NS630 pMA +STR35ME 400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130 70 150 440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130 65 100 Code E S E S H L H L
1/28

(continued)
1

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P kW A kA kW 1.5 3.5 130 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 81 100 135 165 200 240 285 352 388 437 130 130 130 50 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 Circuit-breaker Reference Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 Iq kA 130 130 130 20 20 20 20 20 65 65 65 65 65 65 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) Rating A 4 Irm (1) A 51 Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 2.54
GV2 L08
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 08
GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22
6.3 10 10 14 18 25
78 138 138 170 223 327
3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25
LRD 10 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 21
46 710 913 913 1218 1218
GV2 L22 NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA
25 50 50 50
327 300 350 400
3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D40 3 x LC1 D50 3 x LC1 D50
LRD 22 LRD 3353 LRD 3355 LRD 3357
1624 2332 3040 3750
NS80HMA NS80HMA NS100 pMA (2) NS160 pMA (2) NS160 pMA (2) NS160 pMA (2) NS250 pMA (2) NS250 pMA (2) NS250 pMA (2) NS400 pMA (2) NS400 pMA (2) NS400 pMA (2) NS630 pMA (2) NS630 pMA (2) NS630 pMA (2)
80 80 100 150 150 150 220 220 220 320 320 320 500 500 500
560 640 800 1200 1200 1200 1760 1760 1760 2240 2560 2880 3150 3500 4000
3 x LC1 D65 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D115 3 x LC1 D115 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 F185 3 x LC1 F225 3 x LC1 F225 3 x LC1 F265 3 x LC1 F330 3 x LC1 F330 3 x LC1 F400 3 x LC1 F400 3 x LC1 F500
LRD 3359 LRD 3363 LR9 D5367 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379
4865 6380 60100 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 300500
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed Breaking performance NS100pMA NS160 pMA Iq (kA) NS250 pMA 400/415 V 25 70 36 440 V 25 65 35 Code E S E
by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: NS400pMA NS630pMA 70 70 130 65 65 130 S H L
1/29

1
Star-delta starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses)
Maximum operating rate: LC3 K and LC3 F: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3 K and LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie IrD (1) Iq P kW A A kA kW 1.5 3.5 2 50 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 220 280 315 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 81 100 135 165 200 240 285 388 480 555 3 4 5 6 9 10 12 16 20 24 33 40 47 58 78 95 115 139 165 225 278 322 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 375 Fuse carrier (basic block) Reference Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 401 505 518 575 IrD (1) A 2 3 3 5 6 8 10 12 15 19 23 30 37 44 52 72 84 103 124 148 185 233 293 300 334 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 aM fuses Size Rating Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 1.82.6 2.63.7
LS1 D32 LS1 D32
A 10 x 38 4 10 x 38 6
LC3 K06 LC3 K06
LR2 K0308 LR2 K0310
LS1 D32 LS1 D32 LS1 D32 LS1 D32 LS1 D32 LS1 D32 GK1 EK GK1 EK GK1 EK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GK1 FK GS1 K GS1 K GS1 L GS1 L GS1 N GS1 N GS1 QQ GS1 QQ GS1 QQ GS1 QQ GS1 S GS1 S
10 x 38 8 10 x 38 8 10 x 38 12 10 x 38 16 10 x 38 16 10 x 38 20 14 x 51 25 14 x 51 32 14 x 51 40 22 x 58 50 22 x 58 50 22 x 58 63 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 100 22 x 58 100 22 x 58 125 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 160 160 200 200 250 315 400 400 500 500
LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K09 LC3 D12A LC3 D12A LC3 D18A LC3 D18A LC3 D18A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A LC3 D40 LC3 D40 LC3 D50 LC3 D50 LC3 D50 LC3 D50 LC3 D80 LC3 D115 LC3 D115 LC3 D115 LC3 D150 LC3 F185 LC3 F225 LC3 F265 LC3 F265 LC3 F330
LR2 K0310 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0316 LRD 16 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 32 LRD 3355 LRD 3357 LRD 3357 LRD 3357 LRD 3359 LRD 3361 LRD 3363 LRD 4365 LRD 4367 LRD 4367 LRD 4369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5369 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375
2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 811.5 913 913 1218 1624 1624 2332 2332 3040 3750 3750 3750 4865 5570 6380 80104 95120 95120 110140 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330
GS1 S GS1 S
T3 T3
630 630
LC3 F330 LC3 F400
LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379
200330 300500
(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection.
1/30

1
Star-delta starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P kW A kA kW 1.5 3.5 50 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 81 100 135 165 200 240 285 352 388 437 555 605 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 SwitchaM fuses disconnector-fuse Reference Size Rating Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 505 549 611 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 A 4 6 8 10 16 16 Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218
GS1 DD GS1 DD GS1 DD GS1 DD GS1 DD GS1 DD
10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38
3 x LC1 D09 3 x LC1 D09 3 x LC1 D09 3 x LC1 D09 3 x LC1 D12 3 x LC1 D18
LRD 08 LRD 10 LRD 12 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 21
GS1 F GS1 F GS1 F GS1 F GS1 J GS1 J GS1 J GS1 J GS1 L GS1 L GS1 L GS1 L GS1 N GS1 N GS1 QQ GS1 QQ GS1 QQ
14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 T0 T0 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2
25 32 40 50 80 80 80 100 125 125 160 160 200 250 315 315 400
3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D32 3 x LC1 D40 3 x LC1 D50 3 x LC1 D65 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D115 3 x LC1 D115 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 F185 3 x LC1 F185 3 x LC1 F225 3 x LC1 F265 3 x LC1 F330 3 x LC1 F330
LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 3355 LRD 3357 LRD 3361 LRD 3363 LRD 3365 LR9 D5367 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379
1624 2332 3040 3750 5570 6380 8093 60100 90150 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500
GS1 S GS1 S GS1 S
T3 T3 T3
500 500 630
3 x LC1 F400 3 x LC1 F500 3 x LC1 F630
LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381
300500 300500 380630
GS1 V GS1 V
T4 T4
800 800
3 x LC1 F630 3 x LC1 F780
LR9 F7381 LR9 F7381
380630 380630
1/31

1
D.O.L. starters with fuse protection (BS fuses)
0.06 to 375 kW at 415 V: type 2 coordination
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 415 V 440 V 500 V P Ie P Ie P Ie kW A kW A A kA 0.06 0.22 0.06 0.19 0.09 0.28 0.09 0.36 0.12 .42 0.12 0.37 0.18 0.6 0.18 0.55 0.25 0.76 0.25 0.88 0.37 1 0.37 1 0.37 1 0.55 1.36 0.55 1.2 0.55 1.5 0.75 1.68 0.75 1.5 0.75 2 1.5 2.6 1.5 3.5 1.5 3.06 2.2 3.8 2.2 5 2.2 4.42 3 5 3 6.5 3 5.77 4 6.5 9 4 8.4 4 7.9 5.5 5.5 11 5.5 10.4 7.5 12 7.5 14 7.5 13.7 9 13.9 9 18.1 9 16.9 11 21 11 20 11 18.4 15 23 15 28.5 15 26.5 22 33 22 42 22 39 30 45 30 51.5 30 57 45 76 45 65 45 81 55 80 55 100 55 90 80 116 80 138 80 132 100 143 110 156 100 182 100 162 110 196 110 178 140 200 140 250 140 226 160 220 160 285 160 256 220 310 220 388 220 353 257 362 270 380 257 450 257 412 270 460 270 433 610 375 577 375 508 375 425 556 (1) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
Switchdisconnectorfuse Reference
BS fuses
Contactor
Thermal overload relay
Size
Rating A NIT 2 NIT 2 NIT 2 NIT 2 NIT 4
Reference (1)
Reference
Setting range A 0.160.25 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 0.631
GS1 DDB GS1 DDB GS1 DDB GS1 DDB GS1 DDB
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09
LRD 02 LRD 03 LRD 04 LRD 05 LRD 05
GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1
DDB DDB DDB DDB DDB DDB DDB DDB DDB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB LLB LLB LLB LLB LB LB
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 A3 A3 A4 A4 A4 A4 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B3 B3 B4 B4 B4 C2 C2 C2
NIT 6 NIT 10 NIT 10 NIT 16 NIT 16 NIT 20 NIT 20 NIT 20M25 NIT 20M32 TIA 32M35 TIA 32M50 TIA 32M63 TIS 63M80 TIS 63M100 TIS 63M100 TIS 63M100 TCP 100M125 TCP 100M125 TCP 100M160 TCP 100M160 TF 200 TF 200M250 TF 200M250 TF 200M250 TF 200M315 TKF 315M355 TKF 315M355 TKF 315M355 TMF 400 TMF 400M450 TTM 500 TTM 500 TTM 630
LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
D09 D09 D09 D09 D09 D09 D09 D12 D18 D18 D25 D32 D40 D50 D50 D65 D80 D95 D115 D115 D150 D150 F185 F185 F225 F265 F265 F330 F400 F400 F500
LRD 06 LRD 07 LRD 08 LRD 08 LRD 10 LRD 12 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 3355 LRD 3357 LRD 3359 LRD 3359 LRD 3363 LRD 3365 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5367 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381 LR9 F7381
11.7 1.62.5 2.54 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 3750 4865 4865 6380 8093 90150 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 380630 380630
GS1 LB GS1 MMB GS1 MMB GS1 NB GS1 NB GS1 QQB GS1 QQB GS1 QQB GS1 SB GS1 SB GS1 SB
LC1 F500 LC1 F630
1/32

(continued)
1

Star-delta starters with fuse protection (BS fuses)
1.5 to 375 kW at 415 V: type 2 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 415 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 Switchdisconnectorfuse Reference Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 39 51.5 76 90 132 162 178 226 256 353 412 433 577 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 BS fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
1
Size Rating A NIT 16 NIT 16 NIT 20 NIT 20 NIT 20M25 NIT 20M32 TIA 32M35 TIA 32M50 TIA 32M63 TIS 63M80 TIS 63M100 TIS 63M100 Reference Reference Setting range A 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 4865 4865 6380 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500
Ie A 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 42 57 81 100 138 182 196 250 285 388 450 460 610
Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
GS1 DDB GS1 DDB GS1 DDB GS1 DDB GS1 DDB GS1 DDB GS1 GB GS1 GB GS1 GB GS1 GB GS1 GB GS1 GB GS1 LLB GS1 LLB GS1 LB GS1 MMB GS1 MMB GS1 NB GS1 QQB GS1 QQB
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 A3 A4 A4 B2 B2 B2 B3 B3 B4
3 x LC1 D09 3 x LC1 D09 3 x LC1 D09 3 x LC1 D09 3 x LC1 D12 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D32 3 x LC1 D40 3 x LC1 D50 3 x LC1 D65
LRD 08 LRD 10 LRD 12 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 3355 LRD 3359 LRD 3359 LRD 3363 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379
TCP 100M125 3 x LC1 D80 TCP 100M160 3 x LC1 D115 TF 200M250 TF 200M250 TF 200M315 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 F185 3 x LC1 F225
TFK 315M355 3 x LC1 F265 TFK 315M355 3 x LC1 F330 TMF 400M450 3 x LC1 F400
GS1 SB GS1 SB
C2 C2
TTM 500 TTM 630
3 x LC1 F500 3 x LC1 F630
LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381
300500 380630
1/33
References

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control 4 to 37 kW, (1), with isolating device, pre-assembled
References
1
106558_1
Utilisation category AC-3 Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 220 V 380 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW kW 2.2 4 4 4
500 V kW 5.5
660 V 690 V kW
Operational current 440 V up to A 9
Fuses to be fitted by the customer Size Type aM A 10 x 38 12
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2)
Weight
LC4 D09App
kg 0.870
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
12
10 x 38 16
LC4 D12App
0.870
7.5
10
18
10 x 38 20
LC4 D18App
1.150
5.5
11
11
11
15
25
10 x 38 25
LC4 D25App
1.580
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
32
14 x 51 32
LC4 D32App
2.630
11 LC4 D09App
18.5
22
22
22
30
40
14 x 51 40
LC4 D40pp
2.930
15
22
25
30
30
33
50
22 x 58 63
LC4 D50pp
3.200
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
65
22 x 58 80
LC4 D65pp
3.340
22
37
45
45
55
45
80
22 x 58 80
LC4 D80pp
3.650
Specifications
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections. 3-pole isolating device
(1) Thermal overload relay to be ordered separately (see pages 24514/2 and 24514/3). (2) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 50/60 Hz B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7
For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 1/35
1/34
Dimensions, schemes

1
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control 4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled
Dimensions
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, pre-assembled
LC4 D09AD25A
1
LC4 b c1 without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6 DK10 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover D09AD18A 218 94 96 127 139 147 151 D25A 221 100 102 133 145 153 157
98 79
33 110
173
c1
= =
55 71 86
= =
LC4 D32A LC4 c1 without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6 DK10 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover D32A 100 102 133 145 153 157
124
50
63
36
c1 = 90 165
LC4 D40D80
88 =
110
c c1 c2
G a
LC4 a b b1 c c1 without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks with LA1 DN (1 contact) with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6 DK with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover c2 G
D40D65 281 143 45 130 124 129 149 157 169 177 181 100 263
D80 311 143 48 140 135 140 160 168 180 188 192 178 293
= =
Scheme
D.O.L. starters
LC4 D09A to D80
1/L1
Q1
4 2 6
3/L2
KM1
2 4 6
References : page 1/34
5/L3
b1
100/110
60
1/35
Presentation

Start-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
Current
7 6 5
This method of starting is applicable to motors on which all 6 stator terminals are accessible and whose delta connection voltage corresponds to the mains voltage.
1
4 3 2
2
1 0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
Speed
Star-delta starting should be used for motors starting on no-load or having a low load torque and gradual build-up: - the starting torque in star connection is reduced to one third of the direct starting torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated torque. - the starting current in star connection is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated current. The transition from star to delta connection must occur when the machine has run up to speed. A too rapid build-up in load torque would cause the stabilised run-up speed to be too low and would therefore eliminate any advantage in this method of starting: this is the case with certain machines whose load torque depends on the machine speed (a characteristic of centrifugal machines, for example).
1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection
Current 2,5
1
1,5
(1)
2
0,5
3
0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed
All star-delta starters are supplied with a special LAD S2 or LA2 KT2p time delay relay which imposes a delay on the delta contactor during the transition period in order to allow the star contactor sufficient breaking time. For ratings D115 and D150, this function is performed by a time delay auxiliary contact block LAD T2 and a control relay.
1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection 3 Resistive torque of the machine
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques. Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a proportion of the rated torque).
1/36
References

Star-delta starters for motor control 5.5 to 132 kW, (1), without isolating device, pre-assembled
Plate mounted starters

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage delta connection 220/ 380/ 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V Auxiliary contacts available on each contactor line KM2 delta KM3 star KM1 Star delta mechanical interlock Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Weight
DF522669
kW 4 5.5 11 15 LC3 D32App 18.5
kW 7.5 11 18.5 25 37
kW 7.5 11 22 30 37
kW 7.5 11 22 30 37
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
1 1 1 1 1
With With With With Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With
LC3 D09App LC3 D12App LC3 D18App LC3 D32App LC3 D40pp LC3 D40ppA64 LC3 D50pp LC3 D50ppA64 LC3 D80pp LC3 D80ppA64 LC3 D115pp (4) LC3 D115ppA64 (4) LC3 D150pp (4) LC3 D150ppA64 (4)
kg 1.530 1.530 1.730 2.030 4.360 4.500 4.360 4.500 5.200 5.400 11.800 12.100 12.100 12.100
30
55
59
59
(3)
(3)
37
75
75
75
(3)
(3)
63
110
110
110
(3)
(3)
75
132
132
147
(3)
1 (3)
Rail mounted starters (35 mm 7 rail)

kW 3 4
kW 5.5 7.5
kW 5.5 7.5
kW 5.5 7.5 1 1 With With LC3 K06pp LC3 K09pp
kg 0.740 0.740
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds

4 5.5 11 15 7.5 11 18.5 25 7.5 11 22 30 7.5 11 22 30 (3) (3) (3) (3) 1 1 1 1 With With With With LC3 D090App LC3 D120App LC3 D180App LC3 D320App 1.530 1.530 1.730 2.030
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current (see pages 6/16 and 6/17). (2) Standard control circuit voltages: Volts a 50/60 Hz 24 36 42 48 110 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 Star-delta starters LC3 K06 and K09 Code B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Star-delta starters LC3 D09A...D150, LC3 D090AD320A Code B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD N can also be fitted, see page 5/69. (4) These starters consist of contactors LC1 D115 or D150 without connectors.
Schemes : page 1/43
1/37
KM2
1b 1c
KM1
KM3
KM1 KM3 KM2
1b
1c
1a
1/38
References

Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1), without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or on mounting rail) (2)
Starters for direct combination with a circuit-breaker

Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors (3) Mains voltagedelta connection 400/ 440 V 415 V kW kW 7.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker Contactors (basic references, to be completed by adding the voltage code) (4)
GV2 GV2 GV2 GV2 GV2
ME20 ME20 ME21 ME22 ME32
line KM2 LC1 D09pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D18pp
delta KM3 LC1 D09pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D18pp
star KM1 LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp
Separate component
Description Mounting kit comprising: power circuit connections and 1 time delay contact block LAD S2 Illustration item no. a Reference LAD 912GV Weight kg 0.130
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors (3) Mains voltage - delta connection 220/ 380/ 415 V 440 V 230 V 400 V kW kW kW kW 4 5.5 11 15 18.5 30 37 63 75 7.5 11 18.5 25 37 55 75 110 132 7.5 11 22 30 37 59 75 110 132 7.5 11 22 30 37 59 75 110 147 Contactors (basic references, to be completed by adding the voltage code) (4) line KM2 LC1 D09pp LC1 D18pp (6) LC1 D25pp (7) LC1 D32pp LC1 D40pp LC1 D50pp LC1 D80pp LC1 D115pp LC1 D150pp delta KM3 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 D09pp D12pp D25pp (7) D32pp D40pp D50pp D80pp D115pp D150pp star KM1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 D09pp D09pp D09pp D18pp D40pp D40pp D50pp D80pp D115pp Separate components (see below)
Component types D09 D12 D18 D32 D40 D50 D80 D115 (5) D150 (5)
Separate components
Description Mounting kit comprising: - 1 time delay contact block LAD S2 (D09D80) (3), - power circuit connections (D09D80), - screws and clamps for fixing contactors to the plate (D40D80). Illustration item no. 1a 1b 1c D18 and D32 D40 and D50 D80 Equipment mounting plates 2 D09, D12, D18 D32 D40 and D50 D80 LAD 93217 LA9 D5017 LA9 D8017 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 D12974 D32974 D40973 D80973 0.310 0.380 0.680 0.150 0.180 0.300 0.300 For components type (5) D09 and D12 Reference LAD 91217 Weight kg 0.180
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 5/118 and 5/119. (2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment. (3) See comments on page 1/36. (4) See page 5/58. (5) For D115 and D150 components, see illustration and separate parts on pages 1/40 and 1/41. (6) A D12 component is adequate for the application, but use of a D18 is recommended. (connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections). (7) A D18 component is adequate for the application, but use of a D25 is recommended. (connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
Illustrations : page 1/38
Schemes : page 1/43
1/39
13
12
11
10
14 6 8
1/40
References (continued)

Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1), without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or mounting rail) (2)
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

Separate components (continued)
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks 1 N/O Control relay Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Lead sealing kit for time delay auxiliary contact blocks Thermal magnetic circuit-breaker for control circuit (200415 V) Set of 3 connectors for wider terminations (optional) Set of power connections with fixing accessories Spare volt free terminals Illustration For item no. use on 1 D115 (star) 3 4 D115, D150 D115, D150 No. Sold in lots of 1 1 Unit reference LAD N10 Weight kg 0.020
1 1
1 1
CAD 32pp (3) LAD T2
0.320 0.060
D115, D150
LA9 D901
0.005
D115, D150
GB2 CB05
0.060
D115, D150
LA9 FG980
0.200
D115 D150
1 1 1 2
1 1 10 10 10 100 10 1 100 100
LA9 D11517 LA9 D15017 DZ3 HA3 DZ3 GA3 AB1 BC9535 AB1 AB8M35 AM1 ED021 AM3 PA65 AF1 VA618 AF1 VA410
0.800 1.050 0.007 0.006 0.236 0.005 0.210 1.950 0.006 0.002
D115, D150
Lug-connector terminal block End stop Mounting rail 5 35 mm Pre-slotted mounting plate Screw with captive washer
10 11 12 13 14
D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150
1 3 1 1 12 2
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/16 and 6/17. (2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment. (3) See page 24525/3.
Schemes : page 1/43
1/41
Dimensions

Star-delta starters
Dimensions
Star-delta starters
Plate mounted, pre-assembled LC3 K Pre-assembled: LC3 D09AD32A For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 to D32
124
KM2
110
94
150 175
90 a
On starters LC3 D09A to D18A, a connection block is mounted on the upper part of contactor KM2, increasing the overall height of the product by 6.5 mm.
LC3 a b c with LAD S with LAD S and sealing cover
D09A 143 26.5 139 143
110
110
D12A 143 26.5 139 143
KM3
KM1
D18A 144 26.5 139 143
D32A 165 32.5 145 149
Pre-assembled: LC3 D40, D50 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 or D50
Pre-assembled: LC3 D80 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D80
= 100/110 = = 183 (1) 47 = 293 311

(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover
175 (1)
45
263 281
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover Pre-assembled: LC3 D115, D150 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D115 or D150
c
a 450 450 b 555 555
G a
c 205 205 G 425 425 H 525 525
LC3 D115 or 3 x LC1 D with components LC3 D150 or 3 x LC1 D with components References : pages 1/36 to 1/41 Schemes : pages 1/43
D115 D150
1/42
100/110
143
143
60
60
Dimensions (continued), schemes

1
Star-delta starters
Dimensions (continued)
Star-delta starters (continued)
On mounting rail AM1 DP, pre-assembled LC3 D090A D320A
1
2x7
KM1
KM3 KM2
160 175
LC3 b c with LAD S with LAD S and sealing cover LC3 K

KM3/5 95
D090A D180A 153 139 143
D320A 137 145 149
Schemes
LC3 K, LC3 D09A to D80 LC3 D090A to D320A
L1 L2 L3
LC3 D
KM3/5
KM2
KM3
KM1 14
KM2 KM1 54 53 13
U1
V1
W1
(1)
2 4 6
22 KM3 21
KM2
14
KM1 22
KM1
U1
W1
55 14
W2
U2
V2
V1
13 14
21
13
(2)
13 22
21 96
O 96
95
15
KM2
KM2
21 56
T A1 16
W2
U2
V2
A1
A1
A1
KM3
KM1
A1 22
T A2 KM2/1 (N)
A2
A2
A2
N KM3/1
A2
A2
Note: LC3 D09A to D18A: Mechanical interlock between KM3 and KM1. LC3 D115 and D150
L1 L2 L3 2 4 6 F1
U1
V1
W1
F1 21 96
W2
U2
V2
153
(2)
l
22
KM2
KM3
KM1
95
13
KM1 184 154
KM2 68
W1
W2
161 56
U2
V2
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
U1
V1
14
67
KM1 55 183
KM2 153 13 KA1 A1 14 KM3 A2 A2
KM3 A1 162 A1
KM2 A1154
F2
KM1 A2
Y
KM2 A2
L
KA1
(1) Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end). (2) Remote control. References : pages 1/36 to 1/41
171
KM1
172
1/43
A2
KM1
KM2
A1
KM1 Y
KM3
KM2
KM3
A1 22
21 67
68
Presentation
Motor starters - open version

Start-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
Current
7 6 5
This method of starting is applicable to motors on which all 6 stator terminals are accessible and whose delta connection voltage corresponds to the mains voltage.
1
4 3 2
2
1 0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed
Star-delta starting should be used for motors starting on no-load or having a low load torque and gradual build-up: - the starting torque in star connection is reduced to one third of the direct starting torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated torque. - the starting current in star connection is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated current. The transition from star to delta connection must occur when the machine has run up to speed. A too rapid build-up in load torque would cause the stabilised run-up speed to be too low and would therefore eliminate any advantage in this method of starting: this is the case with certain machines whose load torque depends on the machine speed (a characteristic of centrifugal machines, for example).
1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection
Current 2,5
1
1,5
(1)
2
0,5
3
0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed
Switching from star to delta connection must be completed within a minimum time. This function is performed by a control relay and a time delay auxiliary contact block.
1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection 3 Resistive torque of the machine
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques. Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a proportion of the rated torque).
1/44
References

Star-delta starters for motor control, 90 to 375 kW (1), without isolating device, pre-assembled
Pre-assembled starters
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3 Fppppp: 20 seconds, LC3 FpppppA64: 30 seconds (3 identical contactors). Composition of starters without mechanical interlock, see pages 1/47 and 1/49. Star-delta starters
(3)
813202
kW 90
kW 160
kW 160
kW 185
Without With
LC3 F185pp LC3 F185ppA64 LC3 F225pp LC3 F225ppA64 LC3 F265pp LC3 F265ppA64 LC3 F330pp LC3 F330ppA64 LC3 F400pp LC3 F400ppA64
kg 16.500 16.625 16.500 16.625 27.300 27.425 37.000 37.125 37.000 37.125
100
200
200
220
Without With
110
220
220
250
Without With
LC3 FpppppA64
160
280
280
315
Without With
185
315
355
375
Without With
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/28 and 6/29. (2) Standard control circuit voltages: Volts a 50/60 Hz 48 110 115 220/230 230 240 380/400 400 415 Code E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD N can be fitted.
Presentation : page 1/44
Schemes : page 1/51
1/45
1
*
*
1 7
KM1 KM3 KM2

1
* *
1
See page 1/48

1/46
References

Star-delta starters for motor control, 90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly (on chassis)
Contactors
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 20 seconds (3)
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors 220/ 380/ 415 V 230 V 400 V kW kW kW 90 160 160 100 110 160 185 200 220 280 315 200 220 280 355 Contactors (2) line 440 V kW 185 220 250 315 375 KM2 LC1 F185pp LC1 F225pp LC1 F265pp LC1 F330pp LC1 F400pp delta KM3 LC1 F185pp LC1 F225pp LC1 F265pp LC1 F330pp LC1 F400pp star KM1 LC1 D150pp LC1 F185pp LC1 F185pp LC1 F265pp LC1 F265pp Separate components (see below) Component types F185 F225 F265 F330 F400
Separate components (4)

Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks 2 N/O + 2 N/C Control relay Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Sealing cover Illustration For item no. use on 1 F185 to F400 No. 3 Sold in lots of 1 Unit reference LAD N22 Weight kg 0.050
2 3 4
F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 F225 to F400 F185 F225 F265 F330 and F400
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CAD 32 LAD T2 LA9 D901 GB2 CB10 LA9 FG980 LA9 FJ980 LA9 F18517 LA9 F22510 LA9 FH610 LA9 FJ610
0.580 0.060 0.005 0.050 0.200 0.490 0.800 1.400 1.400 1.500
Thermal magnetic circuit5 breaker for 5 A control circuit Sets of 3 connectors 6 for wider terminations (optional) Sets of power connections 7
Set of 3 busbars for thermal overload connections
F185 to F400
LA7 Fppp (Selected according to size of thermal overload relay) see pages 6/28 and 6/29.
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/28 and 6/29. (2) Contactors supplied with coil. Complete the reference by adding the control circuit voltage code. Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): LC1 D150 Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415 50/60 Hz E7 F7 FE7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 LC1 F185 and F225 Volts 50 Hz (coil LX1) 60 Hz (coil LX1)
48 E5 E6
110 F5 F6
115 FE5
120 G6
220 M5 M6
230 P5
240 U5 U6
380 Q5 Q6
400 V5
415 N5
LC1 F185 to F400 Volts 48 110 115 120 220 40 400 Hz (5) E7 (6) F7 FE7 G7 M7 Standard voltages, see page 5/102. For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, see pages 5/118 to 5/125. (3) For longer starting times, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Other separate components, see page 1/49. (5) Coil LX1: LC1 F265, F330 and F400. Coil LX9: LC1F185 and F225. (6) Except for LC1 F400.
230 P7
240 U7
380 Q7
400 V7
415 N7
Schemes : page 1/51
1/47
14
12
10
17
1
15
*
9
* *
KM1 KM3 KM2
* *
16
13
* * *
17 11
See page 1/46

1/48

Star-delta starters for motor control, 90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly (on chassis)
Separate components (continued from page 1/47)

Description Spare volt free terminals Illustration item no. 9 For use on F185 F225F400 Neutral terminals with stop and spare volt free terminal (for control circuit) 10 F185 No. 3 3 1 2 1 F225 and F265 1 2 1 F330 and F400 1 2 1 Reducer bracket Mounting rails (2) 11 12 13 Uprights (2) 1/4 turn sliding clip nuts and corresponding bolts for rails AM1 DE 1/4 turn sliding clip nuts and corresponding bolts for rails AM1 DE 1/4 turn sliding clip nuts and corresponding bolts for equipment fixing 14 15 F400 F185F400 F185F400 F115F400 F185F400 2 1 1 2 2 Sold in lots of 10 10 10 100 10 10 100 10 10 100 10 1 10 4 4 10 100 16 F185F400 8 10 10 17 F185F330 15 10 100 F400 8 10 10 100 10 4 Enclosures: metal, grey RAL 7032 F185F225 F265 F330 and F400 Fixing lugs adjustable for enclosure ACM 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 4 Unit reference DZ3 GA3 DZ3 HA3 AB1 BC9535 AB1 AB8P35 DZ3 HA3 AB1 BC15035 AB1 AB8M35 DZ3 JA3 AB1 BC24035 AB1 AB8M35 DZ3 JA3 LA9 F100 AM1 DE200 AM1 EC200 AM1 EC200 AF1 CD061 AF1 VA618 AF1 CD081 AF1 VC820 AF1 CD061 AF1 VA618 AF1 CD061 AF1 CD081 AF1 VA618 AF1 VC820 Weight kg 0.006 0.007 0.236 0.006 0.007 0.277 0.007 0.010 0.287 0.007 0.010 0.100 0.900 2.980 2.980 0.020 0.006 0.020 0.024 0.020 0.006 0.020 0.020 0.006 0.024
25 x H6 screws with washers ACM GV763 ACM GV973 ACM GV1084 AE3 FX122 19.090 33.310 54.000 0.080
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 27074/2 and 27074/3. (2) Supplied in 2 m lengths. See page 1/50 for cutting to length.
Schemes : page 1/51
1/49
Dimensions

Star-delta starters
Dimensions
Chassis mounted starters

Pre-assembled: LC3 F185 to LC3 F400 For customer assembly: 2 x LC1 Fppp and 1 x LC1 D150 or 3 x LC1 Fppp
G F1 F2
KM2
KM3
KM1
K3
K1 110 110 110 140 140 K2 80 80 100 100 100
K4
c
a 565 565 665 765 765 b 675 675 775 975 975 c 235 235 266 276 276 G 525 525 625 725 725
a
H 625 625 725 825 925 K 160 160 165 195 195 K3 110 110 110 110 180 K4 80 80 110 180 110
LC3 F185 or 2 x LC1 F ppp + 1 x LC1 D with components F185 LC3 F225 or 3 x LC1 F ppp with components F225 LC3 F265 or 3 x LC1 F ppp with components F265 LC3 F330 or 3 x LC1 F ppp with components F330 LC3 F400 or 3 x LC1 F ppp with components F400
References : pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49
1/50
K1
K2
Schemes

Star-delta starters
Schemes
Star-delta starters
LC3 F185 to F400
L1 L2 L3
1
2 4 V1 V2 U1 W1 A2 A1 14 13 W2 6
KM2
6 2 4
KM3
6 2 4
KM1
U2 2 4 6 68 67
U1
V1
W1
F1
W2
U2
V2
F1
96
O
13 22
Remote control
21
95
l
14
153
KM1
184 154
KM2
KM1
183
KM1
171 53
KM2
56
55
172
KM2
61
KA1
KM3
62
A1
A1
KM1
A2
KM2
A2
KA1
A2
A1
54
KM3
F2
1/51
Selection guide
Function performed Selectable overload class
Function not performed
Detection of overtorque, no-load running, long starting times Earth fault protection (equipment protection only)
Protection against phase imbalance Protection against phase loss Fault differentiation With contact block
Reset on thermal overload
Manual or automatic
Manual
Manual or automatic
Manual
Alarms (thermal overload, overcurrent, ...) Indication of motor load
Protection function parameter entry "Log" function, monitoring
Remote motor starter status and commands via serial or parallel link
Motor starter management via serial link (status, commands, selection and parameter entry for alarms, log, monitoring) Isolation function Protection against overloads and short-circuits
Modbus port built-in
Power at 400 V
With circuit-breaker With fuses
0.0675 kW 0.0675 kW Magnetic circuit-breaker or fuses
30450 kW 30450 kW Magnetic circuit-breaker or fuses
0.06110 kW
Thermal magnetic circuit-breaker
Contactor
Contactor
Contactor
Contactor
Thermal overload relay
Electronic thermal overload relay
Multifunction protection relay
1/52
With function module
Indication on front panel, processing by communication Reset parameters can be set to manual or automatic Indication on front panel, processing by communication Indication on front panel, processing by communication
Manual
Remote or automatic with function module
With function module With function module
Indication on front panel, processing by communication With communication module or control splitter box With AS-Interface or Modbus communication module (1) With AS-Interface or Modbus communication module (indication of motor load and thermal overload alarm only with Modbus communication module) (1) (1) With Modbus communication module
0.0611 kW
0.0615 kW
0.0615 kW
0.0615 kW
Quickfit solution
Starter-controller with standard control unit
Starter-controller with advanced control unit
Starter-controller with multifunction control unit
Contactor
Contactor
Controller with advanced control unit
Controller with multifunction control unit
(1) Parallel wiring module
1/53
Presentation

Presentation
521288
The TeSys U starter controller is a D.O.L. starter (1) which performs the following functions: b protection and control of single-phase or 3-phase motors: v breaking function, v overload and short-circuit protection, v thermal overload protection and power switching, b control of the application: v protection function alarms, v application monitoring (running time, number of faults, motor current values, ...), v logs (last 5 faults saved, together with motor parameter values). These functions can be added by selecting control units and function modules which simply clip into the power base. The product can therefore be customised at the last moment. Setting-up accessories simplify or completely eliminate wiring between components.
Basic starter-controller
Consists of a power base and a control unit. Power base 1 Is independent of the control voltage and of the motor power. It incorporates the breaking function with a breaking capacity of 50 kA at 400 V, total coordination (continuity of service) and the switching function. b 2 ratings are available: 012 A and 032 A. b Non-reversing (LUB) and reversing (LU2B). Control units 2 These must be selected according to the control voltage, the power of the motor to be protected and the type of protection required. b Standard control unit (LUCA): satisfies the basic protection requirements for motor starters: thermal overload and short-circuit (for details see page 1/55). b Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC or LUCD): allows additional advanced functions such as alarm, fault differentiation, (for details see page 1/56). b Multifunction control unit (LUCM): suitable for the most sophisticated control and protection requirements (for details see page 1/57). The control units are interchangeable without rewiring and without using tools. They have a wide range of adjustment (range of 4) and low heat dissipation.
1 3
Control options
5 8
Function modules can be used to increase the functions of the starter-controller. Function modules 3 Must be used with advanced control units. 4 types are available: b thermal overload alarm (LUF W10), b thermal fault and manual reset (LUF DH11), b thermal fault and automatic or remote reset (LUF DA01 and LUF DA10), b indication of motor load (LUF V), which can also be used with the multifunction control unit. All alarm and fault information processed by these modules is available on digital contacts. Communication modules 3 The information processed is exchanged: b via a parallel bus: v parallel wiring module (LUF C00), b via a serial bus: v AS-Interface modules (ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51), v Modbus modules (LUL C031, LUL C032 and LUL C033). They must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit and require a c 24 V control voltage. Connection to other protocols such as FIPIO, Profibus-DP and DeviceNet is possible via gateway modules (LUFP). Auxiliary contact modules (LUFN) 3 3 possible configurations 2 N/O, 1 N/O + 1 N/C or 2 N/C. Add-on contact blocks 4 Indicate the following status of power base: ready, fault and pole status.
Power options
Reverser block 5 Allows a non-reversing power base to be converted to reversing operation. The reverser block (LU2M) is mounted directly beneath the power base without modifying the width of the product (45 mm). The reverser block LU6M is mounted separately from the power base when the height available is limited. Limiter-disconnector LUA LB 6 This unit is mounted directly on the power base. It allows the breaking capacity to be increased up to 130 kA at 400 V.
Setting-up accessories
Plug-in terminal blocks 7 The control terminal blocks are of the plug-in type, so allowing wiring to be prepared away from the machine or the replacement of products without rewiring. Control circuit pre wiring system 8 Numerous pre-wired accessories provide simple, clip-in connections (e.g. connection of reverser control terminals, ... (1) For use with resistive and inductive loads. Control of d.c. or capacitive loads is not possible.
1/54
Presentation

TeSys U starter-controllers with standard control unit
b b b b
Protection against overloads and short-circuits Protection against phase failure and phase imbalance Protection against insulation breaks (equipment protection only) Manual reset
520726
3-phase motor Class 10
Power base LUB or LU2B
Standard control unit LUCA
Status
Status and commands transmitted by the bus Parallel bus Serial bus
Blanking cover LU9C 1
Auxiliary contact module LUF N
Parallel wiring module LUF C00
Modbus AS-Interface communication communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 modules LUL C031, LUL C032 and LUL C033
Status
Add-on contact blocks LUA1
1/55
Presentation

TeSys U starter-controllers with advanced control unit
b b b b
Protection against overloads and short-circuits Protection against phase failure and phase imbalance Protection against insulation breaks (equipment protection only) Manual reset (remote or automatic with a function module)

533842
Single-phase motor Class 10
Advanced control unit LUCB
Advanced control unit LUCD
Advanced control unit LUCC
Status
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset
Thermal overload signalling and automatic reset
Alarm
Indication of motor load (analogue)
b Thermal overload signalling and manual, remote or automatic reset b Alarm b Indication of motor load
Auxiliary contact module LUF N
Function module LUF DH11
Function modules LUF DA01 and UF DA10
Function module LUF W10
Function module LUF V
AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Modbus communication modules LUL C031, LUL C032 and LUL C033
Status
1/56
Presentation

TeSys U starter-controllers with multifunction control unit
b b b b b b b b
Protection against overloads and short-circuits Protection against phase failure and phase imbalance Protection against insulation breaks (equipment protection only) Reset parameters can be set to manual or automatic Protection function alarm Indication on front panel or on remote terminal via Modbus RS 485 port "Log" function "Monitoring" function, indication of main motor parameters on front panel of the control unit or via a remote terminal b Fault signalling b Overtorque, no-load running
565397
Single-phase or 3-phase motors Class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Multifunction control unit LUCM
Status
Indication of motor load (analogue)
Remote programming and monitoring of all functions
Aduxiliary contact module LUF N
Function module LUF V
AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Modbus communication modules LUL C031, LUL C032 and LUL C033
Status
1/57
Application examples

520965
Application
Starting and protection of a pump.
Operating conditions
b b b b b v v b Power: 4 kW at 400 V. In: 9 A. Maximum of 10 class 10 starts per hour. Duty class S3. 3-wire control: Start button (S2), Stop button (S1), Control circuit voltage: a 230 V.
Products used
Products used Power base 12 A with screw clamp connections Standard control unit Item 1 2 Quantity Reference 1 LUB 12 1 LUCA 12FU Page 1/64 1/69
561680
Functions performed
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400 V. b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of service) in case of a short-circuit. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In). b Indication of motor status by N/C or N/O contact. b Interlock between the motor starter control and the selector knob position; not possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.
Scheme
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
230 V
C.U.
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
W1
U1
V1
A2
M 3
1/58
A1
14
13

561681
Application
Expansion of an existing installation for improved control of its operation.
Monitor the status of the motor and obtain alarm signalling by a digital contact in order to improve operation of the pump and anticipate a complete stoppage due to thermal overload.
Additional products used

Products used Item Quantity Reference Page
Replace the standard control unit with an advanced control unit and insert a thermal overload alarm function module.
Advanced control unit Alarm function module 2 3 1 1 LUCB 12FU LUF W10 1/69 1/71
Functions performed
b Alarm information is generated by the advanced control unit and is processed by the thermal overload alarm function module to make it usable. b The advanced control unit includes a thermal trip Test button on its front panel.
Scheme
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
a 230 V
C.U.
14
13
LUF W10
Alarms Module
07
08
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
To application
W1
U1
V1
A2
a
M 3a
Other versions
The advanced control unit can provide other functions, depending on the type of function modules used (instead of the LUF W module described above): - thermal fault signalling with function modules LUF DA01, LUF DA10 or LUF DH11, - indication of motor load with the function module LUF V2. This module delivers a 4-20 mA, analogue signal which is proportional to the average 3-phase current drawn by the motor. This allows the load current to be monitored and provides access to other application functions using this value, or to predictive or preventive maintenance possibilities (replacement of the motor before it breaks down).
A1
1/59

520969
Application
Monitoring operation of a surface pump in a water treatment plant to avoid running empty, which could lead to destruction of the pump.
b b b b b Power: 15 kW at 400 V. In: 28.5 A. Duty class S1. Control circuit voltage: c 24 V. Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Item 1 2 3 4 Quantity 1 1 1 1 Reference LUB 320 LUCM 32BL LUL C032 LU9B N11C Page 1/64 1/70 1/85 1/85
Products used
Products used Power base 32 A without connections Multifunction control unit Modbus communication module Pre-wired coil connection Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals Connection cable for connecting the communication module to the serial bus T-junction
1 1
VW3 A8 306 Rpp VW3 A8 306 TF03
1/85 1/85
510301
Functions performed
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V. b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of service) in case of a short-circuit. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Load ing (1.5 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In). b Measurement of load current and detection of no-load running by the multifunction control unit. b Interlock between the motor starter control and the selector knob position; not possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position. b No-load running or operation under load. To use this function, the following parameters must be entered: v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function, v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be below the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 200 s). v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting current. If the ratio remains below this threshold for the time specified in the previous parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 30 to 100 %). b Indication of the various motor starter status and currents.
Schemes
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LUCM
Multifunction Control Unit
LUL C032
Modbus Module
D (B) D (A) Gnd
Modbus profile IEC 64915 Commands (Register 704) Forward running Reverse running Reserved Reset Reserved Connection test Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 3-phase control Reserved Reserved Reserved
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15
Status (Register 455) Ready (available) Poles closed Fault Alarms Tripped Reserved reset enabled A1-A2 powered Motor running Motor current % (bit 0) Motor current % (bit 1) Motor current % (bit 2) Motor current % (bit 3) Motor current % (bit 4) Motor current % (bit 5) Reserved Motor starting
24 V Aux
4 5 8
LU9B N11C Pre wired coil
LO1 LI1 LI2
C.U.
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
W1 6/T3
c 24 V
M 3a
Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03
Other functions
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions, such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm, Module LUL C032 also provides a programmable output and two programmable discrete inputs.
1/60
D (B) D (A) Gnd 4 5 8
24 V 24 V c Aux COM

520967
Application
Starting and control of a packing machine conveyor belt.
b b b b b Power: 0.37 kW at 400 V. In: 0.98 A. Duty class S1. Control circuit voltage: c 24 V Control and command by the AS-Interface cabling system.
Item 1 2 3 4 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 Reference LUB 120 LUCA 1XBL ASILUF C5 XZ CG0142 LU9B N11C Page 1/64 1/69 1/82 1/83 1/83
Products used
Products used Power base 12 A without connections Standard control unit AS-Interface Communication module Tap-off for connecting the communication module to the serial bus Pre-wired coil connection Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals
521489
Functions performed
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400 V. b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of service) in case of a short-circuit. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In). b Indication of motor status by N/C or N/O contact. b Interlock between the motor starter control and the selector knob position; not possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position. b Start/Stop commands and Ready, Running and Stopped motor status are transmitted by the bus. The AS-Interface 7.D.F.O profile of the new AS-Interface V2 protocol, implemented in the starter-controller, ensures total compatibility with that of the LF enclosed starter range. b Indication of module operation and communication status by 2 LEDs on the front panel of the communication module. b Addressing of the module is achieved using adjustment console ASI TERV2 or console XZ MC11. Using pre-wired coil connector LU9B N11C avoids having to wire the control connections. However, easy access to the control connector on the front panel of the starter allows any control schemes required by the user to be included in the line (local controls, emergency stop, safety contact, .....)
Scheme
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
ASILUF C5
AS-Interface Module
24 V
AS-i
C.U.
+
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 24 V
W1
U1
V1
AS-i
XZ CG0142
M 3
1/61

520971
Application
Manual control of a 2-position turntable.
b b b b b v v v b b Power: 2.2 kW at 400 V. In: 6 A. 30 starts per hour Duty class S4. 3-wire control: Pushbutton for Position 1 (S1), Pushbutton for Position 2 (S2), Stop button (S5), Stopping at the positions is achieved by limit switches S3 and S4. Control circuit voltage: a 115 V.
Products used
Products used Power base reversing, 12 A with screw clamp connections Standard control unit Item 1 2 Quantity Reference 1 LU2B 12FU 1 LUCA 12FU Page 1/65 1/69
523761
Functions performed
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V. b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of service) in case of a short-circuit. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In). b Interlock between the motor starter control and the selector knob position; not possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position. Electrical interlocking is ensured by pre-wired connector LU9M R1C (item 3) included on base LU2B 12. The design of the reversing power block makes mechanical interlocking unnecessary.
Scheme (manual control)

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LU2B
Reverser Motor Controller
A3
B3
A1
B1
C.U.
2/T1
4/T2
M 3
W1
U1
V1
6/T3
115 V
1/62
A2

TeSys U controllers
520973
Application
Detection of a rock crusher blockage by monitoring the motor current.
b b b b b Power: 90 kW at 400 V. In: 185 A. Duty class S1. Control circuit voltage: a 230 V Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Quantity 1 1 1 3 1 1 Reference LUT M20BL LUCM T1BL LUL C032 LUT C4001 LC1 F185P7 NS 250HMA Page 1/77 1/77 1/85 1/77
Products used
Products used Controller Multifunction control unit Modbus communication module Current transformer Contactor Circuit-breaker
Functions performed
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 70 kA at 400V. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Detection of crusher blockage by monitoring the induced overcurrent. To use the "overtorque or jam" function, the following parameters must be entered : v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function, v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be above the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 30 s). v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting current. If the ratio remains above this threshold for the time specified in the previous parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 100 to 800 %). It is possible to set the parameter for an alarm at a preset threshold under the same conditions as above. 5
523762
1 2
Scheme
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 KA1 LUCM T1BL Multifunction Control Unit Q6 LUT M20BL S2 KA1 Controller KA1 LUL C032
Modbus Module
230 V a
D (B) D (A) Gnd
LO1
S1
24 V Aux
LI1
L1 L2
L3
I.6
I.3
I.7
LI2
D (B) D (A) Gnd
24 V 24 V c Aux COM
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
4 5 8
From S1/T1, S1/T2, S1/ T3, S2/T1, S2/T2, S2/T3
4 5 8
KA1
T1
S1 S2 T2 S1
KA1 KM1 S2 T3 S1 S2
To KA1
Q6
Q6
KM1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
+
c 24 V
KM1
V1 4T2
W1 6T3
U1 2T1
KA1
Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03
M 3a
Other functions
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions, such as: monitoring and control of phase currents, alarm, Communication module LUL C032 also provides a programmable output and two programmable inputs. 1/63
A2
A1
13
96
References

Non-reversing power bases
Two versions of control connection are available: b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block, b without connection. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of control connection prewiring accessories) or when a reverser block is to be mounted by the customer.
520739
561330
Power bases for non-reversing D.O.L. starting (1)

Connection Power Control Item (2) Rating 440 V 500 V A A Reference 690 V A Weight kg
These bases have 2 auxiliary contacts: 1 N/O (13-14) and 1 N/C (21-22) which indicate the closed or open position of the power poles.
LUB p2 LUB p20
A low power internal contact allows power supply to the control unit to be switched off when the control knob is no longer in the ON position. The power bases must be used in conjunction with a control unit, see pages 1/68 to 1/70.
Screw clamp Screw terminals clamp terminals 1 + 2 + 3 12 +4 32 12 32
520740
12 23 12 23
9 21 9 21
LUB 12 LUB 32 LUB 120 LUB 320
0.900 0.900 0.865 0.865
1 2
Without 1+2 connections
Terminal block for power bases without connections

Connection Screw clamp terminals For base LUB 120 or 320 Item (2) 3+4 Reference LU9B N11 Weight kg 0.045
4 3
LUB p2
(1) Rated breaking capacity for operation on short-circuit (Ics), see table below. For higher values, use current limiters, see page 1/67. Volts 230 440 500 690 (3) kA 50 50 10 4 (2) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown in the illustration. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
Other versions
Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device (short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate fuses). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Characteristics : pages 1/88 and 1/89
Schemes : pages 1/104 to 1/107
1/64
References

Reversing power bases
561270
Two versions of control connection are available: b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block, b without connection. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and is recommended when a communication module is required, allowing the use of control connection pre-wiring accessories.
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting, pre-assembled

Connection Power Control Item (1) Rating 440 V 500 V A A 690 V A Reference, to be completed (2) Weight
kg
These bases have two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate nonreversing and reversing operating status.
Screw clamp Screw terminals clamp terminals Without connections 1 + 2 + 3 12 + 4 + 5 32 1 + 2 + 3 12 +5 32 12 23 12 23 9 21 9 21 LU2B 12pp LU2B 32pp LU2B A0pp LU2B B0pp 1.270 1.270 1.270 1.250
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting, for customer assembly

LU2B p2
A reverser block should preferably be combined with a non-reversing power base without connections to create a reversing starter-controller. The built-in N/O (13-14) and N/C (21-22) contacts are used for electrical interlocking between the reverser block and the base; they are therefore no longer available as output contacts. The reverser block has two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate non-reversing and reversing operating status.
32 A reverser block
1
For mounting directly beneath the power base For mounting separately from the base (screw or rail fixing)
Connection Power Screw clamp terminals Screw clamp terminals
Control
Without connections Without 6 connections
Item (1) Reference, to be completed (2) 3 LU2M B0pp LU6M B0pp
520741
Weight kg 0.400 0.425
Accessories
Description Control terminal block Item 4 Application Reversing power base without connections LU2B A0pp or B0 pp Reverser block LU2M B0pp for direct mounting beneath power base Reverser block LU6M B0pp for mounting separately from power base Reverser block LU6M B0pp for mounting separately from power base Item Reference LU9 M1 LU9 M1 LU9 M1 LU9M R1 Weight kg 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.030
3
7
5
Description
Control circuit pre-wiring components

Weight kg Pre-wired connector (3) 5 LU9M R1C 0.035 (1) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown in the illustration. (2) Select the same control voltage as that of the control unit. Standard control circuit voltages: Volts 24 4872 110240 c BL a B c or a ES (4) FU (5) (3) For control connection between a power base and a reverser block, for direct mounting. (4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V. (5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V. Reference
4
LU2B p2
520826
Other versions
7
Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device (short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate fuses). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
LU6M + LU9 M1 + LU9M R1
1/65
Presentation, references

1
Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules
Contact states
Product status
Position of Indication N/O pole control on front contact handle panel or
N/C pole contact
References of add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules Terminal referencing
or
or
LUF N20 33-34 43-44 LUF N11 43-44 LU9B N11 13-14
N/O contact N/C contact any fault any fault N/O contact product ready LUF N11 LUA1 C20 LUA1 C11 LUA1 C20 31-32 97-98 95-96 17-18 LUF N02 LUA1 C200 LUA1 C110 LUA1 C200 31-32 no terminal no terminal no terminal 41-42 block block block LU9B N11 LUA1 C11 21-22 17-18 LUA1 C110 no terminal block
or Off
0
OFF
Ready to operate Start Tripped on short-circuit Tripped on thermal overload Manual reset mode Automatic reset on thermal overload fault mode Remote reset mode N/O contact
0 1 I>> 0 0 0 in closed position. N/O contact in open position
TRIP
TRIP
References
Add-on contact blocks
561521
Signalling and composition 1 N/C fault signalling contact (95-96) and 1 N/O contact (17-18) indicating control handle in ready position 1 N/O fault signalling contact (97-98) and 1 N/O contact (17-18) indicating control handle in ready position
Connection Screw clamp terminals Without connections Screw clamp terminals Without connections
Item 1+2 1
Reference LUA1 C11 LUA1 C110
Weight kg 0.030 0.012
1+2 1
LUA1 C20 LUA1 C200
0.030 0.012
Auxiliary contact modules for connection by screw clamp terminals Module with 2 contacts indicating the status of the starter-controller power poles Operation: a or c 24250 V, I th: 5 A
Composition 2 N/O contacts (33-34 and 43-44) 1 N/C contact (31-32) and 1 N/O contact (43-44) 2 N/C contacts (31-32 and 41-42) Item 3 3 3 Item 2 2 Reference LUF N20 LUF N11 LUF N02 Reference LU9B C11 LU9B C20 LU9C 1 LU9C 2 Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 Weight kg 0.022 0.022 0.020 0.010
2 5
LUB + LUA1 + LUF N
Accessories
Description For use on
Screw clamp LUA1 C110 terminal blocks LUA1 C200
Blanking covers Location for auxiliary contact, 4 communication or function module Location for add-on contact blocks 5
Characteristics : page 1/90
Schemes : page 1/88
1/66
References

Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks and accessories
533843
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 63 A

Description Application 2 tap-offs 3 tap-offs 4 tap-offs
4 1
2
Sets of 3-pole 63 A busbars
533844
Protective end cover Terminal block for supply to one or more busbar sets
5 tap-offs For unused busbar outlets Connection from the top
Pitch mm 45 54 45 54 45 54 54
Item 2 1 4 3
Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1
Unit reference GV2 G245 GV2 G254 GV2 G345 GV2 G354 GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G554 GV1 G10 GV1 G09
Weight kg 0.036 0.038 0.058 0.060 0.077 0.085 0.100 0.005 0.040
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 160 A

The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support. Set of 4-pole busbars: 3-phase + neutral or 3-phase + common
Number of Item tap-offs at 18 mm intervals 18 5 Number of points Thermal used on the current busbar system 2 16 32 Length mm 452 Item For mounting in enclosure width mm 800 Cable lengths 200 250 1000 Reference Weight kg 0.900 Weight kg 0.040 0.045 0.060 Weight
AK5 JB144
Removable 3-phase power sockets

Sold in Unit lots of reference 6 6 6 AK5 PC13 (1) AK5 PC33 (1) AK5 PC33L (1) Unit reference
6 6
Limiter blocks and accessories

Application Item Breaking Mounting capacity Iq 440 V 690 V kA kA 130 70 Direct on power base 100 130 35 70 Separate
10 8
Limiterdisconnector (3) (6) Current limiters (3) Limiter cartridge Clip-in marker holder
7 + 10
LUA LB1 (2)
kg 0.310
533845
8 10
LA9 LB920
0.320 0.135 0.001
Limiter-disconnector LUA LF1 On power base, LAD 90 (4) on reverser block, on parallel link splitter box
Phase barrier
Phase barrier LU9 SP0 must be used: b To build a UL 508 type E certified starter (Self Protected Starter). Without the phase barrier, the starter-controller is certified UL 508. b If the starter-controller is to be used on an operational voltage of 690 V.
Description Phase barrier Item 9 Application LUB or LU2B 12 or 120 LUB or LU2B 32 or 320 LUA LB1 Mounting Reference Direct on LU9 SP0 terminals L1, L2, L3 Item Reference Weight kg 0.030
561524
Door interlock mechanisms

561425
Description
11
12
13
Fixing kit (5) (7) 11 + 12 LU9 AP00 Door-mounted black handle/blue front plate, IP54 13 LU9 AP11 Door-mounted red handle/yellow front plate, IP54 13 LU9 AP12 (1) The maximum permissible peak current for power sockets AK5 PCpp is 6 kA. When used in association with power bases LUBpp, the prospective short-circuit current must not exceed 7 kA (2) Supplied with limiter cartridge. (3) These devices make it possible to increase the breaking capacity of the power base. (4) Sold in lots of 100. (5) The fixing kit includes a shaft extension (maximum depth 508 mm). (6) The limiter must be mounted on an LUB or LU2B power base. The limiter can therefore not be common to several motor starters. (7) To use the fixing kit with a D.O.L. reversing power base, only reverser block LU6 M must be used.
Weight kg 0.490 0.150 0.150
1/67
Selection

Control units
Operating characteristics
Control units Thermal overload protection Overcurrent protection Short-circuit protection Protection against phase loss Protection against phase imbalance Earth fault detection (equipment protection only) Tripping class Motor type Thermal overload test function Overtorque No-load running Long starting times Reset mode Manual Automatic or remote
Standard LUCA
Advanced LUCB LUCC
LUCD
Multifunction LUCM 3 to 17 x the setting current
14.2 x the setting current 14.2 x the max. current
10 3-phase
10 20 Single-phase 3-phase
530 Single-phase and 3-phase
Parameters can be set With function module or parameters can Parameters can be set be set via the bus with a communication module, see chart below. Parameters can be set via the bus with a communication module (see below). Thermal overload alarm only with function module or communication module, see below. Possible for each type of fault. Indication on front panel of the control unit, via remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1). With communication modules to make use of these alarms via a bus, see below. Log of the last 5 trips. Number of starts, number of trips, number of operating hours.
Alarm
"Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Display of main motor parameters on front panel of the control unit via remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1).
With function modules
(2) With module LUF W With module LUF DH11 With modules LUF DA01 and LUF DA10 With module LUF V
Thermal overload alarm Thermal overload signalling and manual reset Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset Indication of motor load (analogue)
With communication module or via Modbus port on control unit LUCM (2)
Starter status (ready, running, fault) Reset mode Alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions "Log" function "Monitoring" function Built-in function (1) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant. (2) Mounting possibilities: 1 function module or 1 communication module. Function provided with accessory With any communication module Parameters can be set via the bus With Modbus modules LUL C031, LUL C032 and LUL C033 (thermal overload alarm only). With Modbus modules LUL C031, LUL C032 and LUL C033 and Modbus port on the control unit (alarm possible for all types of fault).
With Modbus modules LUL C031, LUL C032 and LUL C033 and Modbus port on the control unit.
1/68
References

Standard and advanced control units
530655
Description
1 5 2
1 2 3 4 5
Extraction and locking handle Test button (on advanced control unit only) Ir adjustment dial Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover Sealing of locking handle
Setting range Clip-in mounting on power base Rating A 12 12 12 12 32 32 and and and and 32 32 32 32 Reference to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) LUCA LUCA LUCA LUCA LUCA LUCA X6pp 1Xpp 05pp 12pp 18pp 32pp Weight
Standard control units

Maximum standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 400/440 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW 0.09 0.25 1.5 2.2 3 5.5 5.5 9 7.5 9 15 15 15 18.5
LUCA pppp LUCB pppp

520735
A 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832
kg 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135
Advanced control units

Pressing the Test button on the front panel simulates tripping on thermal overload. Class 10 for 3-phase motors
0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15 2.2 5.5 9 15 3 9 15 18.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 12 12 12 32 32 and and and and 32 32 32 32 LUCB LUCB LUCB LUCB LUCB LUCB X6pp 1Xpp 05pp 12pp 18pp 32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
Class 10 for single-phase motors

0.09 0.55 2.2 4 7.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 12 12 12 32 32 and and and and 32 32 32 32 LUCC LUCC LUCC LUCC LUCC LUCC X6pp 1Xpp 05pp 12pp 18pp 32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
LUB p2 + LUCA pppp
520736
Class 20 for 3-phase motors

0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15 2.2 5.5 9 15 3 9 15 18.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 12 12 12 32 32 and and and and 32 32 32 32 LUCD LUCD LUCD LUCD LUCD LUCD X6pp 1Xpp 05pp 12pp 18pp 32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
(1) Standard control circuit voltages: Volts 24 4872 110240 c BL (2), (3) a B c or a ES (4) FU (5) (2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module. (3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V. (5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V. LUB p2 + LUCB pppp
1/69
References

Multifunction control units
530656
Description
6 1 2 3 5
LUCM ppBL
1 Extraction and locking handle 2 Built-in display window (2 lines, 12 characters) 3 4-button keypad 4 c 24 V auxiliary power supply 5 Modbus RS485 communication port. Connection by RJ45 connector. 6 Sealing of locking handle The display window 2 and keypad 3 allow: b in configuration mode: local configuration of protection functions and alarms, b in run mode: display of parameter values and events. The Modbus communication port 5 is used to connect: b an operator terminal, b a PC, b a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA).
Multifunction control units

Parameter entry, monitoring of parameter values and consultation of logs are carried out: b either on the front panel, using the built-in display window/keypad, b or via an operator terminal, b or via a PC or a PDA with PowerSuite software, b or remotely, via a Modbus communication bus. Programming of the product via the keypad requires a c 24 V auxiliary power supply.
Maximum standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 400/415 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW 0.09 0.25 1.5 2.2 3 5.5 7.5 15 5.5 9 15 9 15 18.5 Setting range Clip-in mounting on power base Rating A 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 Reference (1) Weight
520737
A 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832
LUCM X6BL LUCM 1XBL LUCM 05BL LUCM 12BL LUCM 18BL LUCM 32BL
kg 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175
LUB p2 + LUCM ppBL
TeSys U user's manual (2)

Application On CD-Rom Language Multi-language (3) Reference LU9 CD1 Weight kg 0.022
Operator terminal
This compact Magelis terminal enables the parameters of multifunction control unit LUCM to be read and modified. It is supplied pre-configured to provide dialogue with 8 TeSys U starter-controllers (Modbus protocol, application pages and alarm pages loaded). Starter-controller alarm and fault management takes priority.
Language Multi-language (3) XBT NU400 Function Display window 4 lines of 20 characters Length Supply voltage c 24 V Reference XBT NU400 Weight kg 0.150
521335
Connecting cable (4)

Type Reference Connects terminal XBT NU400 2.5 m SUB-D 25-way XBT Z938 to a multifunction control unit. female - RJ45 (1) Input voltage c 24 V with maximum ripple of 10 %. (2) The CD-Rom contains user's manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish (4) If a terminal is used with several control units, this cable can be connected to a Modbus hub or to T-junctions (see page 1/85). Weight kg 0.200
1/70
References

Function modules
Function modules
Output Item Application Reference Weight kg
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset Module LUF DH11 makes it possible to differentiate thermal overload and shortcircuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks LUA1 C). The module includes two contacts for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED on the front panel. To reset the motor starter, the operator must use the rotary knob on the power base. The module can only be used with an advanced control unit and requires an a/c 24240 V external powr supply.
533846
1 N/O + 1 N/C
a or c 24250 V
LUF DH11
0.060
Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset These modules make it possible to differentiate thermal overload and short-circuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks LUA1 C). The modules include one contact for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED on the front panel. A second contact (terminals Z1-Z2) must be wired in series with terminal A1 of the motor starter. In the event of a thermal overload fault, this wiring allows motor control to be switched off. The rotary knob on the power base will then stay in the "ready position" . Resetting of the motor starter is automatic after the required motor cooling time if terminals X1-X2 are linked by a strap, or remote by pulsed closing of a volt-free contact connected to terminals X1-X2. These modules can only be used with an advanced control unit and require an a/c 24240 V external powr supply.
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp + LUFW 10 or LUF Vp
Note : Terminals X1-X2 are not isolated from the signalling module power supply. For remote resetting, use a volt-free contact specifically for each module to be reset. 1 N/C 4 a or c 24250 V LUF DA01 1 NO 4 a or c 24250 V LUF DA10
0.055 0.055
% 200
100
Thermal overload alarm Through load shedding, this module makes it possible to avoid stoppages in operation due to overload tripping. Imminent thermal overload tripping is displayed as soon as the thermal state exceeds the threshold of 105 % (hysteresis = 5 %). Signalling is possible via an LED on the front panel of the module and externally by an N/O relay output. It can only be used with an advanced control unit, from which it takes its power.
1 2 3
1 N/O 1 2.2 kW 2 4 kW 3 7.5 kW
12 mA 20 mA
510445
a or c 24250 V
LUF W10
0.055
Indication of motor load This module provides a signal which is representative of the motor load status (I average/Ir). b I average = average value of the rms currents in the 3 phases, b Ir = value of the setting current. The value of the signal (4-20 mA) corresponds to a load status of 0 to 200 % (0 to 300 % for a single-phase load). It can be used with an advanced or multifunction control unit. Module LUF V2 requires a c 24 V external power supply.
4 - 20 mA 2 LUF V2 0.050
1/71
Presentation, functions
PowerSuite software workshop

1
534513
Presentation
The PowerSuite software workshop for PC is a user-friendly tool designed for setting up control devices for the following Telemecanique brand motors: b TeSys U controller-starters b Altistart soft start/soft stop units b Altivar variable speed drives. It includes various functions designed for setup phases such as: b Preparing configurations b Start-up b Maintenance. In order to simplify the start-up and maintenance phases, the PowerSuite software workshop can use the Bluetooth wireless link.
Functions (1)
PowerSuite screen on PC Installed base management
Preparing configurations The PowerSuite software workshop can be used on its own to generate the device configuration. It can be saved, printed and exported to office automation software. The PowerSuite software workshop can also be used to convert: b An Altivar 28 drive configuration to an Altivar 31 drive configuration b An Altivar 38 drive configuration to an Altivar 61 drive configuration b An Altivar 58 or Altivar 58F drive configuration to an Altivar 71 drive configuration. Start-up When the PC is connected to the device, the PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Transfer the generated configuration b Adjust b Monitor. This option has been enhanced with new functions such as: v The oscilloscope v The high speed oscilloscope (minimum time base: 2 ms) v Displaying communication parameters b Control b Save the final configuration.
533181
PowerSuite screen on PC View of PI regulator function parameters
Maintenance In order to simplify maintenance operations, the PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Compare the configuration of a device currently being used with a saved configuration b Manage the users installed base of equipment, in particular: v Organize the installed base into folders (electrical equipment, machinery, workshops, etc.) v Store maintenance messages v Simplify Ethernet connection by storing the IP address.
533182
User interface The PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Present the device parameters arranged by function in the form of illustrated views of diagrams or simple tables b Customize the parameter names b Create: v A user menu (choice of particular parameters) v Monitoring control panels with graphic elements (cursors, gauges) b Perform sort operations on the parameters b Display text in five languages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish). The language changes immediately and there is no need to restart the program. It also has online contextual help: b On the PowerSuite tool b On the device functions by direct access to the user manuals.
(1) Some functions are not available for all devices. See the table of function availability, page 1/73. References: page 1/74
PowerSuite screen on PC Monitoring control panel (cursor, gauge)
1/72
Functions (continued)
Function availability for the PowerSuite software workshop Functions not listed in the table are available for all devices.
Function available with devices Controllerstarter TeSys U Soft start/soft Drives stop unit ATS 48 ATV 11
1
ATV 31 ATV 61 ATV 71
Monitoring Oscilloscope High speed oscilloscope Display of communication parameters Control Customization of parameter names Creation of a user menu Creation of monitoring control panels Sort operation on parameters Functions available Functions not available
PowerSuite
(1) Modbus communication bus The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the device terminal port or Modbus network port via the serial port on the PC. Two types of connection are possible: b With a single device (point-to-point connection), using a VW3 A8 106 PC serial port connection kit b With a number of devices (multidrop connection), using the XGS Z24 interface. Ethernet TCP/IP communication network The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected to an Ethernet TCP/IP network. In this case, the devices can be accessed: b Using a VW3 A58 310 communication card for the Altivar 61 and 71 drives b Using a 174 CEV 300 20 Ethernet-Modbus bridge. Bluetooth wireless link The PowerSuite software workshop can communicate via a Bluetooth radio link with a device equipped with a Bluetooth - Modbus VW3 A8 114 adapter. The adapter plugs into the device terminal port or Modbus network port and has a range of 10 m (class 2). If the PC does not have Bluetooth technology, use the VW3 A8 115 USB-Bluetooth adapter.
Connections
522793
RS 232 XGS Z24 RS 485
Modbus bus
ATV 31
ATV 61
ATV 71
TeSys U
ATS 48
Modbus multidrop connection

PLC (2)
522794
PowerSuite
Ethernet TCP/IP network
Bridge
Modbus bus
Remote maintenance Using a simple Ethernet connection, the PowerSuite software workshop can be used for remote monitoring and diagnostics. When devices are not connected to the Ethernet network, or it is not directly accessible, various remote transmission solutions may be possible (modem, teleprocessing gateway, etc.). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) Please refer to the compatibility table on page 1/75. (2) Please refer to our specialist Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7 software and Automation platform Modicon TSX Micro - PL7 software catalogues.
ATV 31
ATS 48
ATV 61
ATV 71
Ethernet connection
Presentation: page 1/72
References: page 1/74
1/73
References

522838
Description PowerSuite CD-ROM
Composition
Reference
VW3 A8 104
VW3 A8 114
b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian VW3 A8 104 and Spanish b Variable speed drive and starter technical manuals. PowerSuite update b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian VW3 A8 105 0.100 CD-ROM (1) and Spanish b Variable speed drive and starter technical manuals. Connection kit for PC serial b 1 x 3 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 106 0.350 port b 1 RS 232/RS 485 converter with one 9-way female SUB-D for point-to-point Modbus connector and 1 RJ45 connector connection b 1 converter for the ATV 11 drive, with one 4-way male connector and one RJ45 connector b 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter for connecting ATV 38/58/58F drives b 1 RJ45/9-way female SUB-D adapter for connecting ATV 68 drives. RS 232-RS 485 interface 1 multidrop Modbus converter for connection XGS Z24 0.105 for multidrop Modbus connection to screw terminals. Requires a 24 V c (20...30 V), 20 mA power supply (3). b 1 Bluetooth adapter (10 m range, class 2) VW3 A8 114 0.155 Modbus-Bluetooth adapter (2) with 1 RJ45 connector b 1 x 0.1 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors for PowerSuite b 1 x 0.1 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector and 1 mini DIN connector for TwidoSoft b 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter for connecting ATV 38/58/58F drives. This adapter is required for a PC which is not equipped VW3 A8 115 0.290 USB-Bluetooth adapter with Bluetooth technology. It is connected to a USB port on the PC. for PC Range of 10 m (class 2). (1) Updates a version u V1.50 with the latest available version. For versions < V1.50, you should order the PowerSuite CD-ROM, VW3 A8 104. (2) Can also be used to communicate between a Twido PLC and the TwidoSoft software workshop. (3) Please consult our Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies catalogue.
Weight kg 0.100
533188
Functions: pages 1/72 and 1/73
1/74
Compatibility
Compatibility of PowerSuite software workshop with the following devices (1)

Connection Controllerstarter TeSys U V1.40 Soft start/ Drives soft stop unit ATS 48 ATV 11 V1.30 V1.40 V1.50 V2.2 ATV 31 V2.0 V2.0 V2.2 ATV 61 V2.30 V2.30 V2.30 V2.30 ATV 71 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2
Modbus Ethernet (device equipped with an Ethernet TCP/IP card) Ethernet via Modbus Ethernet bridge Bluetooth Compatible software versions Incompatible software versions
Hardware and software environments

The PowerSuite software workshop can operate in the following PC environments and configurations: b Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows XP b Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 MB available, 128 MB RAM b SVGA or higher definition monitor
(1) Software version supplied for the latest version of drive available.
Functions: pages 1/72 and 1/73
1/75
Presentation, combinations
TeSys control components

1
TeSys U controllers
Presentation
Above 32 A, the TeSys U controller provides a motor starter management solution identical to that provided by TeSys U starter-controllers. Used in conjunction with a short-circuit protection device and a contactor, it provides a motor starter whose functions are the same as those of a TeSys U starter-controller and, in particular, provides the following functions: overload protection, motor starter control and application monitoring.
Composition
It consists of a control unit whose adjustment range is compatible with the secondary of current transformers, plus a control base which also allows fitment of a function module or a communication module. It requires a c 24 V external power supply. The secondaries of current transformers, the c 24 V power supply, the 10 inputs and the 5 outputs are connected by screw terminal block.
Combinations providing type 2 coordination

With circuit-breaker
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P Ie kW A 18,5 35 22 42 30 57 37 69 45 81 55 100 75 135 90 165 110 200 132 240 160 285 200 352 220 388 250 437 Circuit-breaker (1) Contactor TeSys U controller Current transformers
Reference NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA NS100HMA NS160HMA NS160HMA NS250HMA NS250HMA NS400HMA NS400HMA NS630HMA NS630HMA NS630HMA
Rating A 50 50 80 80 100 150 150 220 220 320 320 500 500 500
Irm (2) A 500 650 880 1040 1300 1350 1800 2200 2640 3200 4160 5000 5500 6000
Reference (3) LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500
Reference LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp
Reference 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT C0501 C1001 C1001 C1001 C1001 C2001 C2001 C2001 C4001 C4001 C4001 C4001 C4001 C8001
With fuses
Standard power ratings Switch of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz disconnector-fuse in category AC-3 400/415 V P Ie Reference kW A 18,5 35 GS1 F 22 42 GS1 J 30 57 GS1 J 37 69 GS1 J 45 81 GS1 J 55 100 GS1 L 75 135 GS1 L 90 165 GS1 N 110 200 GS1 N 132 240 GS1 QQ 160 285 GS1 QQ 200 352 GS1 S 220 388 GS1 S 250 437 GS1 S 315 555 GS1 S (1) Product marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. (2) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip (3) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. aM fuses Contactor TeSys U controller Current transformers
Size 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T3
Rating A 40 50 80 100 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 500 500 630
Reference (3) LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630
Reference LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUTM + LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp LUCp
Reference 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x 3x LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT C0501 C1001 C1001 C1001 C1001 C2001 C2001 C2001 C4001 C4001 C4001 C4001 C4001 C8001 C8001
Dimensions, mounting : page 1/78
Schemes : page 1/79
1/76
References

TeSys U controllers
References
532083
Control bases (control circuit voltage c 24 V)

Connection Current transformers Screw Control Screw For use with contactor LC1 Dpp LC1 F ppp Reference Weight kg 0.800 0.800
LUT M10BL LUT M20BL
Control units
Description Advanced Class 10 20 Multifunction 5 to 30 For motor Setting range type 3-phase 0.351.05 3-phase 3-phase 0.351.05 0.351.05 Reference LUCB T1BL LUCD T1BL LUCM T1BL Weight kg 0.140 0.140 0.175
Current transformers
LUT M + LUCM T1BL + LUTC pp Operating current Primary Secondary 30 1 50 100 200 400 800 1 1 1 1 1 Reference LUT C0301 LUT C0501 LUT C1001 LUT C2001 LUT C4001 LUT C8001 Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.430 0.600
Function modules and communication modules The TeSys U controller is compatible with the modules listed below. b Thermal overload alarm module LUF W10 (1), see page 1/71. b Motor load indication module LUF V2, see page 1/71. b Modbus communication modules LUL C032 and LUL C033, see page 1/84.
(1) Module LUF W10 is only compatible with control units LUCB T1BL and LUCD T1BL .
Schemes : page 1/79
1/77

1
TeSys U controllers
Dimensions
1
163 114 173
45
Mounting
73
114
30
171
Schemes : page 1/79
1/78
Schemes

TeSys U controllers
Schemes
Reversing controller LUT M
LUTM S2 S1 L1 L2 L3 I.1 I.2 I.3 I.4 LUTM
24 V Aux.
1
LUTM
+
I.10
Local/remote
I.5
I.6
I.7
I.8
LUTM
13/NO
23/NO
96/NO
97/NC
95
98
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact

24 V c 24250 V a
Any fault
KM1
KM2
95
96
97
98
05
(1)
(1)
05
06/NC
Channel 1
Channel 2
Control unit fault
06
13
23
I.5 RST
I.7 SR
I.6 SF
24 V c I.10 I.8 I.9
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
Reset
AV
KM1
AR
KM2
Q1 Trip
Stop
External fault
Control for Modbus communication modules LUL C032 and LUL C033
KM1
KM2
24 V c 24250 V a
Any fault
Man 1
Man 2
KM1
Stop
KM2
AU
Modbus network port Communication module
95
96
97
98
05
COM
OA1
OA3
LO1
LI1
Channel 1 Channel 2
Control unit fault
I.5 RST
I.7 SR
I.6 SF
24 V c I.10 I.8 I.9
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
Free
Free
KM1
Reset KM2
Q1 Trip
Q1 On
AU
Local/ remote
(1) The contacts are represented with controller powered up and not in a fault condition.
Prsentation : page 1/76
24 V c
LI2
Any fault
06
13
23
24 V c
I.9
1/79
References

Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components
Parallel type connection
Architecture
1 Parallel wiring module
LUF C00
4
2 Pre-wired coil connection
LU9B N11C
3 Connection cable LU9 R p with
2 1
To PLC
2 1
one RJ45 connector at each end 4 Splitter box LU9 G02 for 8 motor starters with channel connections on the PLC side by 2 HE 10 connectors and on the starter-controller side by 8 RJ45 connectors. 5 Connection cable TSX CDPppp with one HE 10 connector at each end.
520836
Parallel wiring module

The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect starter-controllers to the PLC I/O modules quickly and without any need for tools. It replaces traditional screw terminal and single wire connections. It is used with the Telefast pre-wired system (1). The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each starter-controller. It must be used with an LUB 12 or LU2B 12BL power base and a c 24 V control unit LUC p ppBL. Splitter box LU9 G02 distributes information from the PLC I/O modules to each of the starter-controllers connected to it. This splitter box is optimised for use with card TSX DMZ28DTK. When used in conjunction with the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution, the TeSys U starter-controller is ideal in decentralised automation architectures (2). The use of dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 allows remote connection of 4 starter-controllers. Each of the modules 4 channels has: b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running, b 3 inputs: position of the rotary knob, fault indication and position of the poles. Connection to the dedicated module is by means of the following cables: b RJ45 LU9Rpp, for lengths less than 3 metres, b 490 NTW 000pp, for lengths greater than 3 metres.
Description Item 1 Reference LUF C00 Weight kg 0.045
6
6 7
Outputs for starter commands RJ45 connector for connecting to splitter box
531810
10 9
11 12 12
Parallel wiring module
(1) Please consult our "Power Control and connection components catalogue. (2) Please consult our "Distributed I/O Advantys STB, the open device integration I/O system" catalogue.
Dedicated parallel interface module (STB EPI 2145) 9 Power base 10 c 24 V control unit (LUC B/D/C/M pp BL) 11 Parallel wiring module (LUF C00), 12 Options: add-on contact blocks, reverser blocks
1/80
References

Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components
520813
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.
Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired connections is recommended.
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUB pp LU2B pp Item 2 8 Reference LU9B N11C LU9M RC Weight kg 0.045 0.030
2
LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired connector LU9M RC may be used.
Connection of parallel wiring module to the PLC

No tools are required to connect the parallel wiring module to the PLC. Connection is via a splitter box which allows up to 8 starter-controllers to be connected; a maximum of 4 reversing starters per splitter box is allowed. The splitter box requires a c 24 V power supply. Splitter block
Connectors PLC side (16I/12O) 2 x HE 10 20-way Connectors 2 x RJ45 connectors Item Starter-controller side 8 x RJ45 Reference Weight kg 4 LU9 G02 (1) 0.260
561420
Connection cables to the splitter box

Item 3 Length m 0.3 1 3 Reference LU9 R03 LU9 R10 LU9 R30 Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125
1 8
Connection cables from splitter box to PLC

Type of connection PLC side Splitter box side HE 10 20-way HE 10 20-way Gauge C.s.a. Length Reference Weight
AWG 22
mm 2 0.324
LU2B + LUF C00 + LU9M
m 0.5 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 3 5
TSX CDP 053 TSX CDP 103 TSX CDP 203 TSX CDP 303 TSX CDP 503 ABF H20 H100 ABF H20 H200 ABF H20 H300 TSX CDP 301 TSX CDP 501
kg 0.085 0.150 0.280 0.410 0.670 0.080 0.140 0.210 0.400 0.660
28
0.080
Bare wires
HE 10 20-way
22
0.324
(1) Allows "run" and "fault" status of each starter-controller to be fed back to the PLC and transmits commands.
1/81
References

As-Interface communication modules
Series type connection
Architecture Communication modules ASI LUF C5 or ASI LUF C51 2 Tap-off XZ CG0142 3 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
1
2
c 24 V AS-Interface
Information transmitted by the AS-Interface system

AS-Interface profiles Data bits (command) Bit value Command Command Command Command Bit value Status D0 Status D1 Status D2 Status D3 7.D.F.0 profile and 7.A.7.E profile =0 =1 Stop forward Forward running Stop reverse Reverse running Not used Not used Not used Not used =0 Not ready or fault Stopped Not used Not used =1 Ready Running Not used Not used
4
531118
D0 D1 D2 D3
(O) (O) (O) (O)
Data bits (status)
(I) (I) (I) (I)
AS-Interface communication modules

The AS-Interface communication modules make it easy to connect starter-controllers to the AS-Interface cabling system, and therefore allow remote control and command of these starter-controllers.
6
4 5
Module ASILUF C51 incorporates wide mounting rail. The various operating states of the modules (AS-Interface voltage present, communication fault, addressing fault,) are indicated on the front panel by 2 LEDs (green 4 and red 5). Operation of the modules is continuously monitored by auto-testing, in a way that is totally transparent to the user. The incorporation of AS-Interface V.2.1 functions allows diagnostics to be performed on the modules, either remotely via the line or locally via the ASI TERV2 addressing terminal. The communication modules must be connected to a c 24 V auxiliary supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUC p ppBL. The product is supplied with a yellow connector 6 for connection to the AS-Interface system, a black connector 7 for connection to the c 24 V auxiliary supply and a black connector 8 for connection of the outputs.
Description Communication modules Item 1 1 Reference ASI LUF C5 ASI LUF C51 Weight kg 0.065 0.065
Green LED: AS-Interface voltage present Red LED: AS-Interface or module fault 6 Outputs for starter commands 7 Yellow connector for connection to the AS-Interface system 8 Black connector for connection to c 24 V auxiliary power supply
1/82

As-Interface communication modules
531121

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
1
LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B

531122
b Wire link Allows insertion, for example, of an Emergency stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC may be used.
Connection of the communication module
(1)
Achieved by using a tap-off for connection to 2 ribbon cables: b 1 for AS-Interface (yellow). b 1 for separate c 24 V supply (black).
1 5
Description Tap-off Length m 2 Reference XZ CG0142 Weight kg 0.265
Consoles and cable adapters

Description Addressing terminal Battery operated. Battery charger supplied AS-Interface V.1 and V.2.1 compatible Adjustment and diagnostics console Runs on LR6 batteries Allows addressing of AS-Interface V.2.1 interfaces and diagnostics Cable adapter For console XZ MC11 Reference XZ MC11 Weight kg 0.550
LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M

520898 520899
ASI TERV2
0.500
XZ MG12
0.070
Software set-up
XZ MC11
561421
ASI TERV2
AS-Interface configuration is carried out using PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. From the module declaration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices corresponding to all the AS-Interface I/O. Configuration is carried out by following the instructions on the screen.

Application On CD-Rom Language Reference Multi-language LU9 CD1 (3) (1) Degree of protection IP 54. Connection by 4 x 0.34 mm2 wires. Black wire: + 24 V. White wire: 0 V. Blue wire: AS-Interface (). Brown wire: AS-Interface (+). (2) The CD-Rom contains user's manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish. Configuration example with Premium TSX SAY 1000 module Weight kg 0.022
1/83
References

Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil connection components
Series type connection
Architecture Star topology
Bus topology
4 6
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
To PLC
5
1 2 3 4 5 6
5 6
Communication modules LUL C031, LUL C032 or LUL C033 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C Connection cable with one RJ45 connector at each end VW3 A8 306 Rpp Modbus hub LU9 GC3 with channel connections to PLC and to starter-controller with RJ45 connectors, T-junction VW3 A8 306 TFpp LIne terminator VW3 A8 306 R
Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit Starter status (ready, running, fault) Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions "Log" function "Monitoring" function Start and Stop commands Functions performed Standard Advanced Multifunction
For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual LU9 CD1, see page opposite.
Modbus communication modules compatibility

With starter-controllers and controllers
Starter-controllers Controller LUB pp / LU2Bp2 LUT M ppBL Association possible. LUL C031 LUL C032 LUL C033
With power bases

Software versions of control units LUCA ppBL LUCB ppBL LUCM ppBL V1.04 V1.05 V1.06 V1.10 (1) LUL C031 V2.3 (1) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LUL C032 V1.1 (1) No No No No No No LUL C033 V2.2 (1) Yes Yes No Yes No Yes
(1) And higher versions. Association not permitted.
1/84
References

Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil connection components
Modbus communication modules compatibility (continued)

With controller bases, version 1.200 (1)
Software versions of control units LUL C031 V2.3 (1) No No LUL C032 V1.1 Yes No V1.2 (1) Yes Yes LUL C033 V2.1 (1) Yes Yes
LUL C031
LUL C032, LUL C033
535175
LUCB T ppBL LUCM T ppBL V2.11 (1) (1) And higher versions. Association not permitted.
535176
Modbus communication modules

Communication modules LUL C031, LUL C032 and LUL C033 enable the TeSys U starter-controller to be connected to the Modbus network. They must have a c 24 V supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCp ppBL. They incorporate a 0.5 A, c 24 V discrete output for local command requirements. Module LUL C032 and LUL C033 also have two configurable discrete inputs.
Description Communication modules Item 1 1 1 Reference LUL C031 LUL C032 LUL C033 Weight kg 0.080 0.080 0.080
7 8 9 10 11 12
Module status signalling LED 24 V supply connection RJ45 connector for RS485 Modbus link 2 discrete inputs 1 discrete output Outputs for starter commands

By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
520810
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired connector LU9M RC may be used.
2
Connection of communication modules on the serial bus

Achieved either by means of a Modbus hub or using T-junctions.
Description Modbus hub 8 slaves Cables fitted with 2 x RJ45 connectors T-junctions (1) RS 485 line terminator Length m 0.3 1 3 0.3 1 Item 4 3 3 3 5 5 6 Reference LU9 GC3 VW3 VW3 VW3 VW3 VW3 VW3 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 A8 306 306 306 306 306 306 R03 R10 R30 TF03 TF10 R Weight kg 0.260 0.045 0.065 0.125 0.032 0.032 0.012
LUB + LUL C03p + LU9B
520811

Application Language Multi-language (3) Reference LU9 CD1
1
On CD-Rom
Weight kg 0.022
7
LU2B + LUL C03p + LU9M
(1) Fitted with 2 RJ45 female connectors (bus side) and a 0.3 m or 1 m length cable supplied with an RJ45 male connector (station side). (2) The CD-Rom contains user's manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish.
1/85
Presentation, description, setting-up

Communication gateways LUF P
1
Presentation
Communication gateways LUF P allow connection between Modbus and field buses such as Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet. After configuration, these gateways manage information which can be accessed by the Modbus bus and make this information available for read/write functions (command, monitoring, configuration and adjustment) on the field buses. An LUF P communication gateway consists of a box which can be clipped onto a 35 mm omega rail, allowing connection of up to 8 Slaves connected on the Modbus bus. Example of architecture
Configuration of gateway by PC
LUF P
Fipio Profibus DP DeviceNet
(1) Modbus
561511
1
(1) Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop.
ATS 48 ATV 31
Description
Front panel of the product 1 LED indicating : - communication status of the Modbus buses, - gateway status, - communication status of the Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet bus. 2 Connectors for connection to Fipio, Profibus DP or DeviceNet buses.
561512
Underside of product 3 RJ45 connector for connection on the Modbus bus 4 RJ45 connector for link to a PC 5 c 24 V power supply 3 4
Software set-up
For the Fipio bus, software set-up of the gateway is performed using either PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software or ABC Configurator software. For the Profibus DP and DeviceNet buses, software set-up is performed using ABC Configurator. This software is included: b in the PowerSuite software workshop for PC (see page 1/74), b in the TeSys U user's manual.
Characteristics, references: page 1/87
Dimensions: page 1/87
1/86
Characteristics, references, dimensions

Communication gateways LUF P
1
Characteristics
Bus type Environment Ambient air temperature Degree of protection Electromagnetic compatibility Conforming to IEC 60664 Around the device Fipio Profibus DP DeviceNet Degree of pollution: 2 C + 5+ 50 IP 20 Conforming to IEC 50081-2: 1993 Conforming to IEC 61000-6-2: 1999 y8 By RJ45 connector conforming to Schneider Electric RS485 standard By RJ45 connector, with PowerSuite connection kit By SUB D9 female By SUB D9 female By 5-way removable connector connector screw connector V External supply, c 24 10 % mA 280 mA 100 By LED on front panel FED C32 or FED C32P 26 configurable words (1) 122 configurable words 256 configurable words 26 configurable words (1) 122 configurable words 256 configurable words By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW) (1) If the gateway is configured using PL7 and not ABC Configurator, the I/O capacity is limited to a total of 26 words. For use with TeSys U starter-controllers, Altistart 48, Altivar 31 With bus type Fipio/Modbus Profibus DP/Modbus DeviceNet/Modbus Connectors 1 RJ45 type connector and one end with stripped wires 2 RJ45 type connectors 2 RJ45 type connectors 2 RJ45 type connectors 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 1 SUB-D 9 male connector Reference LUF P1 LUF P7 LUF P9 Reference Weight kg 0.245 0.245 0.245
Emission Immunity Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected Connection Modbus To a PC Field bus
Supply Consumption Indication/diagnostics Services
Max. Typical Profile Command Monitoring Configuration and adjustment
References
Description Communication gateways
Connection accessories
822631
Description Connection cables TSX FP ACC 12
For use with Modbus
Length m 3 0.3 1 3
Weight kg VW3 A8 306 D30 0.150 VW3 A8 306 R03 VW3 A8 306 R10 VW3 A8 306 R30 TSX FP ACC12 490 NAD 911 04 490 NAD 911 03 0.050 0.050 0.150 0.040
822713
Connectors
Fipio Profibus mid line Profibus line end
490 NAD 911 03
Documentation
Description User's manual for TeSys U range Medium Language Reference Weight kg 0.022
CD-Rom Multilingual: English, French, German, Italian, LU9 CD1 (2) Spanish (2) This CD-Rom contains user's manuals for AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software, ABC Configurator.
Dimensions
= 75 = 120
27
Presentation, description: page 1/86
Setting-up: page 1/86
1/87
Characteristics

Environment
Product certifications
UL, CSA Pending: BV, GL, LROS, DNV, ABS, RINA IEC/EN 60947-6-2, CSA C22-2 N14, Type E UL 508 type E: with phase barrier LU9 SP0 690
Conforming to standards Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 Conforming to UL508, CSA C22-2 n14 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 appendix N V
V kV V
600 6 Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400 Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 400 IP 40 IP 20 IP 20
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Safety separation of circuits SELV
Degree of protection Front panel outside connection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone (protection against Front panel and wired terminals direct finger contact) Other faces Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 Storage Operation
Ambient air temperature around the device
TH Cycles 12 h 48 C - 40+ 85 C Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70. (At temperatures above 60C and up to 70C, for Ie = 32 A, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products). Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60. (At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products. At temperatures above 55 C up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between products.) m 2000
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
30 90 90
30
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 C C V2 960 (parts supporting live components) 650 Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable Power poles open: 10 gn Power poles closed: 15 gn Power poles open: 2 gn Power poles closed: 4 gn In open air: 8 - Level 3 On contact: 8 - Level 4 10 - Level 3 All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4 Serial link: 2 - Level 3 Common mode 2 Not applicable 10 Serial mode 1
Environmental restrictions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated highfrequency disturbance Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock waves
Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 kV kV Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 V/m Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 kV kV
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 kV Uc a 24240 V, Uc c 48220 V Uc = 24 V c Immunity to conducted high- Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V frequency disturbance (1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
1/88
Characteristics

Power bases and control units
Power base and control unit type
LUB 12 + LUCA or LUCB or LUCC or LUCD
LUB 32 + LUCA or LUCB or LUCC or LUCD
LUB 12 + LUCM
LUB 32 + LUCM
LU2M LU6M
Power circuit connection characteristics

Connection to 4 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m 2.510 2.510 1.56 1.56 16 16 16 16 110 110 16 16 Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 6 mm 1.92.5 1.92.5 2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5 2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5 2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5
Control circuit connection characteristics

Connection to 3 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m a 50/60 Hz c c 24 V (1) a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V Closing Opening V V V V V V V V V V V mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA W ms ms ms 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 Philips n 1 or flat screwdriver: 5 mm 0.81.2 0.81.2 24240 24240 24220 24220 2027 2027 2026.5 2026.5 a 38.572. c 38.593 a 88264 a 88264 c 88242 c 88242 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 29 29 55 55 130 220 140 220 280 280 280 280 60 80 70 90 35 45 35 25 2 3 24 V : 70 ; 48 V : 60 ; u 72 V : 50 35 35 3 3 At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms 15 15 3600 3600 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 24 2028 14.5 150 70 1.7 75 35 3 15 3600 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 24 2028 14.5 200 75 1.8 65 35 3 15 3600 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 120 2360 2300 1000 120 (2) (2) (2)
Control circuit characteristics

Rated voltage of control circuit Voltage limits Operation
Drop-out
Typical consumption I max while closing
I rms sealed
Heat dissipation Operating time
Resistance to micro-breaks Resistance to voltage drops IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour
Main pole characteristics

Number of poles Isolation function To IEC/EN 60947-1 3 3 3 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank A 12 32 12 32 Rated thermal current y 70C: 12A y 70C: 32A y 55C: 12A y 55C: 32A Rated operating current To IEC/ In cat. AC-41 (Ue y 440V) EN 60947-6-2 In cat. AC-43 y 70C: 12A y 70C: 32A y 55C: 12A y 55C 32A V 690 (3) 690 (3) 690 (3) 690 (3) Rated operating voltage Hz 4060 4060 4060 4060 Frequency limits Of the operating current A 3 6 9 12 18 25 32 Power dissipated Operating current in the power circuits 0.1 0.3 0.6 1.1 2.4 4.6 7.5 Power dissipated in all three poles W V 230 440 500 690 Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit kA 50 50 10 4 ms 2 2 2 Total breaking time kAs 90 120 90 120 Thermal stress limit With Isc max on 440 V (1) Voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0. Possible Padlocking
1/89
Characteristics

Reversing power bases and auxiliary contacts
Specific characteristics of power bases LU2B and reverser blocks LU2M or LU6M
Duration of inrush phase Maximum operating time
a 50/60 Hz ms ms c ms Without change of direction ms With change of direction A Hz V mA A A A A m ms
25 15 75 150 5 Up to 400 17 5 gG fuse: 4 30 40 50 10 2 (on energisation and on de-energisation)
General characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Conventional thermal For ambient temperature < 70 C current (Ith) Frequency of the operating current U min Minimum switching capacity = 10 -8 I min Short-circuit Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 protection Short-time rating Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Linked contacts Mirror contact Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to draft standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Rated operating voltage (Ue) Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA
Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts built-into the power base

Each power base has 1 N/O contact and 1 N/C contact which are mechanically linked The N/C contact fitted in each power base reliably represents the state of the power contacts (safety scheme) Up to a 690; c 250 690 600
V V V
Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts in modules LUF N, of auxiliary contacts LUA1 and of reverser blocks LU2M and LU6M
Rated operating voltage (Ue) Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA Operational power of contacts Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos = 0.4). V VA VA VA 24 60 16 4 48 120 32 8 115 280 80 20 230 560 160 40 400 960 280 70 440 600 1050 1440 300 80 420 100 d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W 24 120 70 25 48 90 50 18 125 75 38 14 250 68 33 12 V V V Up to a 250; c 250 250 250
1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles

1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Millions of operating cycles
1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V
24 V 48 V 125 V
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,2
0,3 0,4
0,6 0,8 1 0,5 0,7 0,9
6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A
0,1 0,1
0,2
0,3 0,4
0,6 0,8 1 0,5 0,7 0,9
4 6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A
1/90
Characteristics

Control units
Characteristics of standard control units LUCA

Protection Overload protection Motor type Conforming to standard Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operating current Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping threshold Tripping tolerance 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 10 Hz C 4060 - 25+ 70 With 14.2 x Ir (setting current) 20 %
Short-circuit protection
Characteristics of advanced control units LUCB, LUCC and LUCD

Control unit type Protection Motor type Conforming to standard Overload protection Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operating current Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping threshold Tripping tolerance LUCB LUCC LUCD 3-phase Single-phase 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 CSA C22-2 n14 CSA C22-2 n14 10 10 20 Hz C 4060 - 25+ 70 Yes 14.2 x Ir max. 20 % 4060 - 25+ 55 14.2 x Ir max. 20 % 4060 - 25+ 70 Yes 14.2 x Ir max. 20 %
Characteristics of multifunction control units LUCM

Protection Overload protection Motor type Conforming to standard Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operating current Temperature compensation Physical interface Connector Protocol Maximum transmission speed Maximum return time Type Language version Accuracy Resolution External type Heat dissipation Selectable: single-phase or 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 (selectable) Hz C 4060 - 25+ 55 RS 485 multi-drop RJ45 on front panel Modbus RTU 19 200 (self-configuration up to this value) 200 LCD, 2 lines of 12 characters Multilanguage (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish) 5% 1 % of Ir c 24, with maximum ripple of 10 %. 0.8
Communication interface for terminal on enclosure door
bit/s ms
Display
Auxiliary supply
V W
Configuration table for protection devices and alarms on multifunction control units LUCM
Adjustment of tripping threshold Factory setting Factory setting Range Default value Activated (1) 317 Ir 14.2 Activated (1) Activated 0.1532 A (2) Ir min Tripping Alarm Adjustment of time before tripping Range Default value Class: 530 5 Adjustment of alarm threshold Range Default value 10100 % of 85 % the thermal state 0.25 Ir min 0.3 Ir min 1030 % 10 % 18 Ir 2 Ir 0.31 Ir 0.5 Ir 18 Ir Ir
Overcurrent Overload
Earth fault Phase imbalance Torque limitation No-load running Long starting times
Activated Activated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Factory setting Manual 120 s 3-phase motor Self-cooled English Average current
Activated Activated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
0.25 Ir min 1030 % 18 Ir 0.31 Ir 18 Ir
0.3 Ir min 10 % 2 Ir 0.5 Ir Ir
0.11.2 s 0.220 s 130 s 1200 s 1200 s
0.1 s 5s 5s 10 s 10 s
Configuration of additional functions on multifunction control units LUCM

Reset Time before reset Type of load Language Display Setting range Manual, automatic or remote 11000 s 3-phase motor, single-phase motor Self-cooled, force cooled English, French, German, Italian, Spanish Average current, thermal state of motor, current in phase 1 / 2 / 3, earth leakage current, phase imbalance, cause of last 5 faults
(1) This function cannot be deactivated. (2) The setting range depends on the rating of the control unit used.
1/91
Characteristics

Limiter-disconnector, current limiter, thermal overload alarm function module and thermal overload fault signalling modules
Characteristics of limiter-disconnector LUA LB1
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Conventional thermal current (Ith) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Operating threshold Breaking capacity Mounting Connection Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque
V A I rms kA V kA
690 32 50 440 690 130 70 Directly on the upstream terminals of the starter-controller
1 2 1 2 1 2
conductor conductors conductor conductors conductor conductors
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
1.510 1.5...6 110 16 1...6 1...6 Phillips n2 or flat screwdriver 6 mm 1.92.5
Characteristics of current limiter LA9 LB920

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Conventional thermal current (Ith) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Operating threshold Breaking capacity Mounting Connection Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque V A I rms A V kA 690 63 1000 440 100 Separate 1.525 1.5...10 1.525 2.510 1.516 1.54 Phillips n2 or flat screwdriver 6 mm 2.2
690 35
1 2 1 2 1 2
conductor conductors conductor conductors conductor conductors
Characteristics of thermal overload alarm function module LUF W10

Activation threshold Hysteresis between activation and switching off Indication Supply Discrete output characteristics Type AC-15 DC-13 A Conventional thermal current For ambient (Ith) temperature < 70 C Short-circuit protection Conforming to A IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Module type Fault signalling External power supply Module consumption Discrete outputs Type AC-15 DC-13 For ambient A temperature < 70 C A Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Conductor c.s.a. mm2 m Length Fixed at 88% of the thermal tripping state 5% By LED on front panel Powered by the control unit N/O contact 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles 2 gG fuse: 2
Characteristics of thermal overload fault signalling and reset modules

V mA LUF DH11 LUF DA01 By LED on front panel a /c 24240 7 at c 24 1.1 at a 240 1 N/C + 1 N/O 1 N/C 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles 2 gG fuse: 2 0.2 min 500 (R = 50 , L = 52.8 mH, Cp = 93 pF) LUF DA10
1 N/O
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Short-circuit protection Reset input
1/92
Characteristics

Function modules and communication modules
Characteristics of motor load indication function module LUF V2

Analogue output Signal delivered Load impedance Minimum Maximum Typical Precision Precision Resolution k 4 - 20 mA Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 2 for LUCB and LUCD Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 3 for LUCC 500 100 6% 10 % 1 % of Ir External c 24 V ASILUF C5 ASILUF C51 AS-Interface V2.1 n 52901 AS-Interface V2.1 n 52303 7.D.F.0 7.A.7.E Operation - 25+ 70 5 10 29.5...31.5 Normal operation: 25 Fault condition: 30 200 c 24 30 % 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation 0.5 A/24 V (outputs protected against short-circuits) By 2 LEDs on front panel LUL C031 LUL C032 and LUL C033 RS 485 multi-drop RJ45 on front panel Modbus RTU 19 200 (self-configuration up to this value) 30 By switches: from 0...31 Operation - 25+ 55 2 (to be assigned according to configuration) c 24 7 c 24 (positive logic) 7 10 ( 30 %) 10 ( 30 %) Resistive 3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation c 24 500 1 200 0.5 A/24 V By 3 LEDs on front panel LUF W10, LUF V2 DH11, DA01 and DA10 Pitch 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor 2 identical conductors (Use a double cable end) 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 5.08 0.21.5 0.21 0.251.5 0.251 0.251.5 0.51 0.21.5 0.21 AWG 24 to AWG 16 0.50.6 3.5 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG 26 to AWG 16 0.220.25 2.5 ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 Inputs and Outputs 24 V auxiliary 5.08 3.81 0.21.5 0.141 0.21 0.140.75 0.251.5 0.251 0.251 0.250.34 0.251.5 0.250.5 0.51 0.5 0.21.5 0.21 AWG 24 to AWG 16 0.50.6 3.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG 26 to AWG 16 0.220.25 2.5 LUL C031 LUL C032 LUL C033 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG 26 to AWG 16 0.220.25 2.5 LUFC 00
Signal characteristics with advanced control unit Signal characteristics with multifunction control unit Supply Modules type Product certification AS-Interface profile Ambient air temperature Cycle time AS-Interface supply Current consumption
Characteristics of AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Auxiliary supply Number of outputs Switching capacity of the solid state outputs Indication/diagnostics Module type Physical interface Connector Protocol Maximum transmission speed Maximum return time Addressing Ambient air temperature Logic inputs
C ms V By the AS-Interface system mA mA On 24 V supply for the outputs mA V
Characteristics of Modbus communication modules LUL C03p
bit/s ms C Number Supply Input current Voltage Current Change to state 1 Change to state 0 V mA V mA ms ms
Nominal input values Response time Input type Solid state outputs
Number Supply Max. current Protection gI fuse Current consumption On 24 V supply for the outputs Switching capacity of the solid state outputs Indication/diagnostics
V mA A mA
Connection characteristics
Module type
Connectors Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable Without insulated with cable end ferrule With insulated ferrule Solid cable without cable end Conductor size Tightening torque Flat screwdriver
3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG 26 to AWG 16 0.220.25 2.5
N.m mm
1/93
Characteristics

TeSys U controllers
Control bases and control units
Environment
Control base and control unit type Product certifications Conforming to standards V Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, of the outputs overvoltage category III, (Ui) degree of pollution: 3 Conforming to UL508, CSA C22-2 V n14 Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 kV voltage of the outputs (Uimp) Degree of protection Front panel (outside connection zone) To IEC/EN 60947-1 Front panel and wired terminals (protection against Other faces direct finger contact) Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 Cycles h C C m
LUT M + LUCB T1BL or LUCD T1BL LUT M + LUCM T1BL or LUL C without LUL C UL, CSA Pending: BV, GL, LROS, DNV, PTB IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 N14 250
250 4
IP 40 IP 20 IP 20 TH 12 48 - 40+ 85 - 25+ 70 2000
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 Ambient air temperature Storage around the device Operation Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
- 25+ 60
30 90 90
30
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 C C V2 960 (parts supporting live components) 650 15 gn 4 gn kV kV V/m kV kV V In open air: 8 - Level 3 On contact: 6 - Level 3 10 - Level 3 CT outputs and inputs: 4 - Level 4 Inputs and supply: 2 - Level 3 10
Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated fields Immunity to fast transient currents
Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4
Immunity to radio Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 electrical fields Control base and control unit relays Immunity to dissipated Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 shock waves Output relays / power line Inputs Serial communication
Common mode kV kV kV 4 2 2
Serial mode 2 1
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
Schemes : page 1/77
1/94
Characteristics

TeSys U controllers
Control bases and control units
Control supply characteristics

Operating voltage Power consumption Associated protection Connection Connectors Flexible cable without cable end V W A c 20.428.8 2 max gG fuse, 0.5
Pitch 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor 2 identical conductors (1) 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor
mm mm 2 mm 2
5 0.22.5 0.21.5
Flexible cable with cable end Without insulated ferrule
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2
0.252.5 0.251 0.252.5 0.51.5 0.22.5 0.21 AWG 24 to AWG 12 0.50.6 3
With insulated ferrule
Solid cable without cable end
Conductor size Tightening torque Flat screwdriver
N.m mm
Input characteristics
Operating voltage Logic inputs V c 24 Logic state 1: I u 6 mA - 16 V Logic state 0: I y 1.5 mA - 5 V
Discrete output characteristics

Control base type Type Load a.c. supply d.c. supply For 500 000 operating cycles For 500 000 operating cycles VA LUT M10BL Single break volt-free contacts C 300 24 V/5 A 180 LUT M20BL
B 300 24 V/5 A 500
Permissible power in cat. AC-15
Permissible power in cat. DC-13
30
30
Associated protection For use in association with contactor (2)
gG fuse, 4 Control voltage c 24 V: LP1K, LC1 D09D95. Control voltage c 24240 V: LC1K, LC1D.
gG fuse, 4 Control voltage a 100240 V: LC1K, LC1D, LC1 F185F500
Characteristics of external current transformers

Precision Precision limit factor Maximum operating temperature Transformer ratio Hole diameter Maximum wire c.s.a. Class 5P 10 70 30/1 28 30 x 10 50/1 22 30 x 10 100/1 35 40 x 10 200/1 32 65 x 32 400/1 38 x 127 800/1 53 x 127
mm mm 2
(1) Use a double cable end. (2) For other combinations, use an intermediate relay between the output of controller LUTM and the contactor coil.
Schemes : page 1/77
1/95
Curves

Tripping curves for control units LUCA, LUCB, LUCD

Time (s)
Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %.

1000
100
3
10
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 20 30 x the setting current (Ir)
1 LUCD, 3 poles from cold state, class 20. 2 LUCA, LUCB, 3 poles from cold state, class 10. 3 LUCA, LUCB, LUCD, 3 poles from hot state.
Tripping curves for control units LUCC

Time (s)
1000
100
2
10
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 20 30 x the setting current (Ir)
1 LUCC, single-phase, cold state. 2 LUCC, single-phase, hot state.
1/96
Curves (continued)

Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Cold state curves
Time (s)
10000
1000
100
10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 20 15 17 19 30
x the setting current (Ir)
1/97
Curves (continued)

Tripping curves for control units LUCM
Hot state curves

Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %
Time (s)
10000
1000
100
10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 20 15 17 19 30
1/98
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit

Ue = 460 V
Maximum current (kA)
100
1
1
10
2 3
0,1 0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6 0,8 1
8 10
20
30
40 60 80 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
1 Maximum peak current 2 32 A power base 3 12 A power base
Thermal limit on short-circuit

Ue = 460 V
Sum of Idt (As) 103
1000
1
100
10
1 0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6 0,8 1
8 10
20
30
40
60
80 100
Prospective Isc (kA)
1 32 A power base 2 12 A power base
1/99
Selection guide

Use in category AC-41

LUB 12
10 8 6 5 4 3 2
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 Current broken in A

Ue y 440 V
LUB 12 LUB 32
LUB 32
Ue = 690 V
LUB 12 LUB 32
10 8 6 5 4 3 2
10 8 6 5 4 3 2
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 Current broken in A 5,5 7,5
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 21 Current broken in A
0,55
0,75
1,5
2,2
230 V 0,55 0,75 1,5 2,2 5,5 7,5
kW
11
15 15
400 V 0,55 0,75 2,2 5,5 1,5 7,5
kW
11
440 V
kW
1/100
Selection guide


Ue y 440 V
LUB 12 LUB 32
Ue = 690 V
LUB 12 LUB 32
0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
1 0,8
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
0,01 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 40 50 66 100 200 60 80 170 Current broken in A
0,01 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 200 50 60 100 40 54 80 126 Current broken in A
1/101
Dimensions

Starter-controllers
Non-reversing
Reversing Rail mounting 126 Screw fixing 30 4 Rail mounting Screw fixing 29 4
X2 73 154 163
X1
126
224
X1
135 (1)
45
X2
135 (1)
Minimum electrical clearance: X1 = 50 mm for Ue = 440 V and 70 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V, X2 = 0 (1) Maximum depth (with Modbus communication module)
45
Reverser block for mounting separately from power base

Rail mounting Screw fixing
115
113
45
113
36
Sets of busbars and plug-in power sockets

GV2 G445 and GV2 G454 GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09 GV2 G245 and G254
18
a l
p
GV1 G09
104
95
30
120/125
233
I 89 98 I 134 152
GV2 G245 (2 x 45) GV2 G254 (2 x 54) I 179 206 P 45 54 GV2 G554 GV2 G345 and G354
GV2 G445 (2 x 45) GV2 G454 (2 x 54)
260
Number of tap-offs GV2 G445 (2 x 45) GV2 G454 (2 x 54)
a 5 224 260
6 269 314
7 314 368
8 359 422
GV2 G345 (2 x 45) GV2 G354 (2 x 54)
AK5 JB144
AK5 PC13, PC33, PC33L
82
79
81
438 452
1/102
45
30
38
35,5
45,5
Dimensions

Limiter-disconnector LUA LB1 Disconnector LUA LB10
Current limiter LA9 LB920
1
93
2M4
146
103 51 195
154
135 (1)
45
6 53,5
(1) Maximum depth (with Modbus communication module).

LU9 AP00 Door cut-out
55
= = 54
162 230
508
11,5
Addressing consoles
XZ MC11 ASI TERV2
209
80
30
84
= = 54
35
Modbus hub LU9 GC3 Splitter box LU9 G02
154
128
45
128
30
163
115
1/103
Schemes

Starter-controllers, 12 or 32 A
With standard, advanced or multifunction control unit

Non-reversing
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Reversing
1/L1 3/L2
4/T2
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
Control Unit
22/NC
Control Unit
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
6/T3
A1
A2
5/L3
Pre-wired
With control unit LUCC or LUCM

Connection of a single-phase motor
1 L1 5 L2
Reverser
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
81
84
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
22/NC
Control Unit
Control terminal block
U 2
V 6
A1
A2
LU2B Reverser Motor Controller
A3
B3
A1
B1
Reverser blocks
LU2M
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 S1 S2 S3
LU6M
Control terminal blocks
S1 S2 S3
LU6M
Reverser Block
A3
B3
A1
B1
Reverser
With pre-wired connector LU9M RC

S1 S2 S3
LU6M 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil 81 84 A3 B3 A1 B1 A2 82
Reverser Block
Basic scheme
13 A2 21
A1
A2
A2
LU2M
14
22
S2
S1
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
S3
LU6M
(1)
B3 Reverse A3Reverse B1 Forward A1Forward
S1 Start next stage S2 Electrical interlocking S3 Maintaining contact B1 Maintain forward running B3 Maintain reverse running A1 Pulse forward running A2 Common A3 Pulse reverse running (1) Electronically operated bistable electromagnet.

LUA1 C11
17/NO 95/NC 18/NO 96/NC
Add-on contact modules

LUFN 20
33/NO 43/NO 34/NO 44/NO
LUA1 C20
17/NO 97/NO 18/NO 98/NO
LUFN 11
43/NO 31/NC 44/NO 32/NC
A2
LUFN 02
31/NC 41/NC 32/NC 42/NC
1/104
82
Schemes (continued)

Control units
Standard control unit LUCA
Basic scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6 LUCA
Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3 Supply and Detection of start sequence Thermal overload memory Power Base Interface Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3 Supply and Detection of start sequence
Thermal overload memory
Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC, LUCD)

Basic scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6 LUCp
Power Base Interface
Control A.S.I.C.
tr
Control A.S.I.C.
tr
Test
A1
A2
A1
A2
Interface module
9 10 11
12
1 and 2 Trips 3 and 4 Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C
1 and 2 Trips 3 and 4 Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C 7 Weight 8 Thermal status/Set 9 Reset mode/Reset 10 (lm/Ir) 11 Vc2 12 Vc1
Multifunction control unit LUCM

LUCM
Multifonction Control Unit
24 V Aux
Basic scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6 LUCM
Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3 Supply and detection of start sequence Thermal overload memory Supply 24 V Aux Power Base Interface Display and Parameter Entry
ESC ENT
D(B) D(A) +5V 0V 4 5 7 6 8

Control A.S.I.C.
RS485
D(B) D(A) +5V 0V
4 5 RJ45 7 8
A1
A2
Interface module
9 10 11 12
1 and 2 Trips 3 and 4 Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C 7 Weight 8 N/C 9 Weight 10 (lm/Ir) 11 Rx/Tx 12 Vc1
1/105
Schemes (continued)

Function modules
Alarm LUF W10
Indication of motor load LUFV 2

4-20 mA output
LUFW 10 07
Alarms Module
LUFV 2 4...20 mA
Analogue output Module 24 V Aux 24 V Aux
08
NC
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit
Basic scheme
LUFW 10
Input interface LED Supply Input interface P - Analogue/Digital converter Isolation Bistable Relay Digital/Analogue converter Supply
LUFV 2
07
08
Voltage/Current converter
4...20 mA
c 24 V
100 < load < 500 c 30 V max and 40 mA min
1/106
Schemes (continued)

Communication modules
Communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Without pre-wired coil connection With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
1
AS-i
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 Com OA1 OA3
AS-Interface Module
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil
AS-Interface Module
AS-i
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil
AS-Interface Module
AS-i
Basic scheme
ASILUF C5 or
Ready-Fault-Pole LED
ASILUF C51
A2SI
Output Interface
Com
OA1
OA3
c 24 V
AS-i
1/107
Schemes (continued)

Communication modules (continued)
Modbus communication modules LUL C031

Without pre-wired coil connection
Modbus communication modules LUL C032 and LUL C033

LUL C031 Com Com OA1 OA3 LO1

24 V Aux
Modbus Module
LUL C032 or LUL C033 Com OA1 OA3 LO1 LI1 LI2
24 V c 24 V Aux
Modbus Module COM
D(B) D(A) 0V
4 5 8 6
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
LUL C031 Com LO1

24 V Aux
Modbus Module
LUL C032 or LUL C033 LO1 LI1 LU9B N11C Pre wired coil LI2
24 V c 24 V Aux
Modbus Module COM
D(B) D(A) 0V
LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil
4 5 8 6
LUL C031 Com LO1

24 V Aux
Modbus Module
LUL C032 or LUL C033 LO1 LI1 LI2

24 V c 24 V Aux
Modbus Module COM
D(B) D(A) 0V
LU9M RC Pre wired coil
4 5 8
LU9M RC Pre wired coil
Basic scheme
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller
x6 LULC 031
Input interface Ready-Fault-Pole Control unit interface Controller interface
LULC 032 or LULC 033
LED
Address
LED
Address
Ready-Fault-Pole
D(B) RS485 D(A) 0V AL1

Supply Output Interface
D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 8 D(B) 4 5 Modbus RJ45 8 D(A) 0V AL2
4 5 Modbus RJ45 8 AL1 RS485
AL2 24 V
24 V Aux
Output Interface
I/O interface
Supply 24 V c 24 V Aux
Com
Com
Com
OA1
OA3
LO1
OA1
OA3
LO1
LI1
1/108
LI2
COM
D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 8 6
D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 8 6
Schemes (continued)


Parallel wiring modules
Without pre-wired coil connection With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
LUF C00 Com OA1 OA3
Parallel bus Module Link // RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LUF C00 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil
LUF C00 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil
Basic scheme
LUF C00
Poles ReadyFault
Com
OA3
OA1
RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Forward running Reverse running Output common Knob in position Pole state Reserved Fault Input common
1/109
Schemes (continued)

Wiring hub and splitter box

Modbus hub LU9G C3
X1
N/C N/C N/C D (B) D (A) + RJ 45 N/C N/C 0V
Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G02

LU9 GC3
Forward running Reverse running Output common N/C Pole state N/C Fault Input common
X1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LU9 G02
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ 45
X9 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fault X1 Fault X2 Fault X3 Fault X4 Fault X5 Fault X6 Fault X7 Fault X8 Pole state X1 Pole state X2 Pole state X3 Pole state X4 Pole state X5 Pole state X6 Pole state X7 Pole state X8 + 24 V Aux - 24 V Aux + 24 V Aux - 24 V Aux
Colours of TSX CDP ppp connection cable wires (4)

1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Grey 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red 9 Black 10 Violet 11 Grey-pink 12 Red-blue 13 White-green 14 Brown-green 15 White-yellow 16 Yellow-brown 17 White-grey 18 Grey-brown 19 White-pink 20 Pink-brown
X2 X9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RJ 45
N/C N/C N/C D (B) RJ 45 D (A) + N/C 24 V (1) 0V
X2
RJ 45
X3
X3
(2)
RJ 45
RJ 45
X4
X4
RJ 45
RJ 45
X5
Forward running N/C Output common N/C Pole state N/C Fault Input common
X5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 X10 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Forward running X1 Forward running X2 Forward running X3 Forward running X4 Forward running X5 Forward running X6 Forward running X7 Forward running X8 Reverse running X1 Reverse running X2 Reverse running X3 Reverse running X4 N/C N/C N/C N/C + c 24 V - c 24 V + c 24 V - c 24 V
RJ 45
X10
RJ 45
X6
RJ 45
RJ 45
X6
X7
RJ 45
(3)
RJ 45
Shielding
X7
X8
RJ 45
RJ 45
X8
RJ 45
c 24 V
Shielding Shielding
24 V Aux Inputs
D (A) +
Outputs
D (B)
Com
(1) Not connected on connectors X1 to X8. Only present on RJ45 IN and OUT connectors. (2) 20-way HE 10 input connector. (3) 20-way HE 10 output connector. (4) Correspondence between wire colours and HE 10 connector pin numbers.
Gateways
LUF P1 LUF P7 LUF P9
LUF P1
24 V Aux
Gateway Fip I/O - Modbus
LUF P7
24 V Aux
Gateway Profibus - Modbus
Com
0V
0V
LUF P9
24 V Aux
Gateway DeviceNet - Modbus
D(B) D(A) 0V
D(B) D(A) 0v
X2 Fip I/O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X1
X2 Profibus 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X1
X2 DeviceNet 1 2 3 4 5
X1
4 5 8
4 5 8
1/110
D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 8
Schemes (continued)

Data profile under AS-Interface

Control unit present in the product Status Commands Standard D0 D1 D0 D1 Ready (available) Poles closed (running) Forward running Reverse running Advanced Multifunction
Register addresses accessible under Modbus

Control unit present in the product Marking Register 0Register 99 WordsBits Commercial reference, serial number, software version Log Register 100Register 450 WordsBits Fault log, Operating log, Log of last 5 trips Register 451Register 464 WordsBits Alarm signalling (bits), Fault signalling (bits) Register 465Register 473 Words Irms phase 1, phase 2, phase 3. Motor load, thermal status Earth leakage current. Phase imbalance and phase failure Register 474Register 599 WordsBits Reserved Configuration Register 600Register 699 WordsBits Protection and alarm thresholds, fallback mode and reset mode Commands Status and values Register 700Register 714 WordsBits Commands Register 452 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 3 Word Word Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Value 0 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Commands Register 700 Register 704 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 615 Short-circuit fault Overcurrent fault Thermal overload fault Ready (available) Poles closed Fault Alarms Tripped ("TRIP" position) Fault acknowledgement allowed Reserved Motor running Motor current % (bit 0) Motor current % (bit 1) Motor current % (bit 2) Motor current % (bit 3) Motor current % (bit 4) Motor current % (bit 5) Reserved Motor starting Thermal overload alarm Thermal status value Motor load value (Im/Ir) Manual reset on thermal overload fault Remote reset on thermal overload fault Automatic reset on thermal overload fault Fallback mode validation Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged Outputs OA1 and OA3 forced to 0 Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged, signalling existence of communication failure Outputs OA1 forced to 1 and OA3 unchanged Outputs OA3 forced to 1 and OA1 unchanged LO1 output command OA1 output command OA3 output command Reserved Fault acknowledgement Reserved Trip test Reserved Status Values Standard Advanced Multifunction
Register 455
Register 461 Register 465 Register 466 Configuration Register 602
Register 682
Data accessible
1/111
Basic schemes

Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter-controllers LUB
1/L1
3/L2 V1 4/T2 M 3a
Control Unit
U1 2/T1
2-wire control via 2-position switch
W1 6/T3
5/L3
Connection of a motor load indicator module LUFV 2
A1
Start Stop
A2
A1
A2
LUFV 2 4...20 mA 24 V Aux
Analogue output Module 24 V Aux
13
14
NC
Connection of thermal overload fault signalling modules LUF DA10

Automatic reset
V1
Remote reset
V1
07
08
07
Automatic or remote reset
LUF DA10 X1 Z1 Z2
08
LUF DA10 X1 Z1 Z2
Automatic or remote reset
X2
A2
A1
A2
A1
S2
QF1
QF1
S1
X2
24230 V
24230 V
S1
Control via Modbus communication module LUL C031

Control via Modbus communication modules LUL C032 and LUL C033
LULC 031 Com Com OA1 OA3 LO1
Modbus Module
LUL C032 or LUL C033 Com OA1 OA3 LO1

24 V 24 V c Aux
Modbus Module COM
D(B) D(A) GND
LI1
LI2
4 5 8 6
S1 Modbus
A2 A1 A2 A1
S2 Modbus
1/112
D(B) D(A) GND 4 5 8 6
24 V Aux
Basic schemes (continued)

Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter controllers LUB (continued)

Control via communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection With local control
1
AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
A2
A1
A2
A1
Without pre-wired coil connection With local control
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51
AS-Interface Module
Adjustment
AS-Interface line Normal
AS-Interface line
AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
AS-Interface line
AS-Interface line
A2
A1
Adjustment Normal
Without pre-wired coil connection With multifunction control unit LUCM
AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface
A2
A1
AS-Interface line
LUCM
24 V Aux
D(B) D(A) GND 4 5 8 6 Bus Modbus RS 485
RJ45
1/113

Reversing
Reversing starter-controllers LU2B
1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LU2B
LU2B
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1 B1
Start forward running Control Unit Stop forward running and reverse running Stop forward running
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
forward running Stop reverse running
Start reverse running
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
M 3

With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC With multifunction control unit LUCM
W1 6/T3
Stop reverse running
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact and limit switches
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51
AS-Interface Module
LU2B
AS-Interface
LU9M RC Pre wired coil Limit switch Stop forward forward running running Start forward running
A3
B3
A1
AS-Interface line
LUCM
24 V Aux
Stop forward running and reverse running
D(B) D(A) GND
Limit switch Stop reverse reverse running running
Start reverse running
4 5 8 6 Bus Modbus RS 485

Without pre-wired coil connection With running direction pilot lights and limit switches
LU2B A3 B3 A1
Com
OA1
OA3
ASILUF C5/C51 AS-Interface Module AS-Interface
B1
A2
AS-Interface line
53
54
81
84 82
1/114
A2
A2

Reversing
Reversing starter controllers LU2B (continued)

Control via Modbus communication module LUL C031
Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control
Control via Modbus communication modules LUL C032 and LUL C033
Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control
LU2B A3 B3
Com
Com
Com
OA1
OA1
OA3
OA3
LO1
LO1 LI1
24 V Aux
D(B) D(A) GND
LI2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A1
B1 A2
A2
4 5 8 6
Modbus
Modbus
Adjustment
Adjustment
Start forward running Start reverse running
NOrmal
Start forward running Start reverse running
Reversing starter-controllers LUB + LU6M

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Control Unit
2/T1
4/T2
1/L1
3/L2
U1 2/T1
4/T2
M 3
W1 6/T3
V1
5/L3
6/T3
A1 13 14
A2 A1 A2
21
22
21
S1
S2
S1
S2
S3
LU6M
Reverser Block
LU6M
A3
B3
A1
S3
Reverser Block
B1
A3
B3
A1
B1
Stop forward running and Stop forward reverse running running S5 S6
Start forward running S8
Stop reverse running S7
Start reverse running S9
A2
forward running Stop reverse running
A2
Normal
22
D(B) D(A) GND 4 5 8 6
LULC 031
Modbus Module
LU2B
LULC 032 or LUL C033

24 V c
Modbus Module 24 V Aux COM
1/115
General

1
534529
integral: a high performance concept for reliability of operation
integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers combine all the functions of a power switching assembly up to 63 A in a single compact device, with performance equivalent to that of the best separate specialist devices. They conform to the main standards currently in force, in particular IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-2, IEC 60947-3, IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2 (welding of power poles impossible), as well as to international approvals UL, CSA, and the European directives. The integral range ensures reliability of operation up to 63 A. In addition to safety of operation, integral has numerous other functions: increased protection, communication, remote control, fault identification, isolation, padlocking.
Functions performed by integral units
The equipment in a power switching circuit must perform 4 main functions: b power switching, b isolation, b overload protection, b short-circuit protection. These functions are traditionally performed by separate devices which must be combined to form a motor starter assembly, the most common being: v fuses + contactor + thermal overload relay, v circuit breaker + contactor + thermal overload relay.
Power switching
Contactor (for automatic and remote control) b Operational power for use in category AC-43: v up to 30 kW at 400/415 V 50 Hz, v up to 33 kW at 440/415 V 50 Hz. b Electrical life in number of operating cycles, in category AC-43, at 415 V and at rated power: v 2 million for integral 18, v 1.5 million for integral 32, v 1.2 million for integral 63. b v v v Mechanical life in number of operating cycles: 20 million for integral 18, 10 million for integral 32, 5 million for integral 63.
534530
Reversing pairs Two 3-pole contactors, horizontally mounted: b mechanically and electrically interlocked for integral 18, b mechanically interlocked for integral 32 and 63. Can be fitted with the same protection modules as integral contactor breakers.
534531
References integral 18 : pages 1/134 to 1/141
Dimensions, schemes : pages 1/190 to 1/199
1/116
General (continued)

Functions performed by integral units

(continued)
Isolation
Isolation conforming to IEC 60947 integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers provide isolation and padlocking functions conforming to standards IEC 60947. In addition, integral 32 and 63 LD4 contactor breakers and LD5 reversing contactor breakers incorporate specific poles for control testing and padlocking.
Overload protection
Thermal-magnetic protection module (for protection against overload and overcurrent) A range of interchangeable modules allows the equipment to be adapted to suit: b the rated operational current (rating and settings), b the application: v motors, v frequent starting motors, v distribution circuits.
534529
534530
High breaking capacity current limiting circuit breaker For short-circuit protection. High breaking capacity with short-circuit limited by ultra-fast tripping. Possibility of increasing the breaking capacity of the integral unit by adding a current limiter (LA9 LB920). The current limiter is fitted upstream of the integral unit. Several integral units may be fitted downstream of the current limiter (Ith = 63 A, Ie = 32 A).
Signalling and attachments

534531
These devices provide comprehensive local signalling: b pole position indicator, b different signalling for overload and short-circuit. They also allow dialogue with the automated control system by means of numerous add-on blocks: b auxiliary contact and signalling blocks, b remote electrical reset device for integral 32 and 63, b undervoltage and shunt trips for integral 32 and 63, b control circuit switching, b etc.
Simple fixing and cabling methods
integral 18 and 32 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers clip directly onto 35 mm 7 rails. integral 63 contractor breakers and reversing contactor breakers fit onto 75 mm 7 rails using a separate mounting plate. integral units can also be mounted on: b panels, b pre-slotted mounting plates type AM1 P, b 2 x 35 mm 7 rails using sliding clip nuts, b CMD prefabricated plug-in busbar trunking (providing an economical assembly, combining safety and simplicity of use), b AK5 panel busbar systems.
References integral 63 : pages 1/176 to 1/187 Dimensions, schemes : pages 1/190 to 1/199
1/117
Terminology

Terminology
Altitude
The rarefied atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor breaker. It also reduces the cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor breaker (unless the temperature drops at the same time). No derating is necessary up to 3000 m. Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage and current (a.c. supply) are as follows:
Altitude Rated operational voltage Rated operational current 3500 m 0.90 0.92 4000 m 0.80 0.90 4500 m 0.70 0.88 5000 m 0.60 0.86
Ambient air temperature

The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The operating characteristics are given: b with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 C. b with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 C.
Rated operational current (Ie)

This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and duty, utilisation category and air temperature around the device.
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) (1) The current Ith which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a minimum of 8 hours without its temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards. Short time rating
The current which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a short time, after a period of no load, without dangerous overheating.
Rated operational voltage (Ue)

This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current, determines the use of the contactor breaker or starter, and on which the corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits, it is expressed as the voltage between phases. Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui.
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form (less than 5% total harmonic distortion).
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and referred to in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As the specifications are not identical for all standards, the rated values given for each of them are not necessarily the same.
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

This is the highest peak value of an impulse voltage, of prescribed form and polarity, which the device is able to withstand without failure under specified test conditions, and to which isolation clearance values are referred. The rated impulse withstand voltage of a device must be equal to or higher than the values stated for the transient overvoltages appearing in the circuit in which the device is fitted.
Note: these definitions are based on extracts from standard IEC 60947. (1) Conventional free air thermal current, conforming to IEC standards.
1/118
Terminology (continued)

Rated operational power (expressed in kW) The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor breaker, at the stated operational voltage. Rated breaking capacity (Iq) (1) This is the current value which the contactor breaker can break in accordance with the breaking conditions specified in the IEC standard. Rated making capacity (1) This is the current value which the contactor breaker can make in accordance with the making conditions specified in the IEC standard. On-load factor (m)
This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T): t m = -T
T
Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current.
Pole impedance
The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components between the input terminal and the output terminal. The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component X = L ). The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally given for 50 Hz. The average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current.
Electrical durability
This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage.
Mechanical durability
This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow through the main poles) which the contactor breaker can perform without mechanical failure.
Coordination
The coordination of protection devices involves combining, in a selective way, a short-circuit protection device (fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers) with a contactor and an overload protection device. Its objective is to break any abnormal current, in plenty of time, without any danger to personnel, whilst providing adequate protection of the equipment against an overload or short-circuit current. Type 1 - IEC 60947-4-1 In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and may not be able to resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts. Type 2 - IEC 60947-4-1 In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must be able to resume operation. The risk of contact welding is permissible if they can be easily separated. Total, ensuring reliability of operation - IEC 60947-6-2 In the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of welding is permissible on the equipment constituting the motor starter. Operation can be resumed without any maintenance.
Note: these definitions are based on extracts from standard IEC 60947. (1) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component.
1/119

Definition
1
Reminder of standards IEC 60947
The standard utilisation categories define the current values which the contactor breaker must be able to make or break. These values depend on: b the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors, b the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting or running, reversing, plugging. b IEC 60947-1: general rules, b IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers, b IEC 60947-3: isolating devices, b IEC 60947-4-1: contactors and motor starters, b IEC 60947-5-1: control and signalling units, b IEC 60947-6-2: control and protection devices,
Standards for contactor breakers
IEC 60947-4-1
Standard IEC 60947-4-1: covers contactors and electromechanical motor starters. It concerns: b types of equipment with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage does not exceed 1000 V for a.c. applications or 1500 V for d.c. applications, b contactors used in conjunction with overload and/or short-circuit protection devices, b motor starters used in conjunction with separate short-circuit protection devices and/or with separate short-circuit protection devices and built-in overload protection devices, b contactors and combination motor starters which incorporate their own shortcircuit protection device.
IEC 60947-6-2
Standard IEC 60947-6: covers multi-function equipment. It concerns connection, power switching and protection devices (or equipment) with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage is less than or equal to 1000 V for a.c. applications, or 1500 V for d.c. applications. Such devices are designed to perform both the power switching function and the protection of remotely controlled circuits function; they can also perform other functions, such as isolation. After short-circuit (Isc) tests, the products must be able to make and break the currents corresponding to the specified utilisation categories, and to the number of operating cycles specified in the standard, without failing. This series of tests is completed by temperature rise tests. Standard IEC 947-6-2 specifies that, in the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of contact welding is permissible on the devices constituting the motor starter. The integral contactor breaker, through its design, ensures reliability of operation. After eliminating the fault, operation can be resumed instantly without any maintenance work on the product, other than resetting. Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-1
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95 (cos y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution. Category AC-2
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors. b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-3
This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running. b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors (lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
1/120

Standards for contactor breakers

(continued)
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications (continued)

Category AC-4
This category covers starting, plug braking and inching of squirrel cage motors. On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5 to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy industry. Category AC-41
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95 (cos y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution. Category AC-42
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors. b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-43
This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running; inching or occasional reversing of limited duration are permissible if the number of operating cycles does not exceed 5 per minute, or 10 within a 10 minute period. b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.). Category AC-44
This category covers applications with plug braking and inching of squirrel cage or slip ring motors. On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5 to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy industry.
Tripping classes of protection modules The creation of thermal tripping classes allows better adaptation of the thermal protection to suit different motor and application technologies (short or long starting times). Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2.
Class Tripping time at 7.2 Ir (1) 10 A 210 s 10 410 s 20 620 s 30 930 s
Standards for auxiliary contacts
IEC 60947-5
Standard IEC 60947-5-1: covers switching devices and components for control circuits. It concerns electromechanical devices for control circuits. Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (2)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays. Category AC-15 (2)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is greater than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.
Utilisation categories for d.c. applications

Category DC-13 (3)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time taken to reach 95 % of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the power P drawn by the load (with P y 50 W). Application example: switching the operating coil of contactor breakers.
(1) Ir = protection module setting current. (2) Replaces category AC-11. (3) Replaces category DC-11.
1/121
Equipment selection for starters

1
When designing an installation, it is essential to take into account precise criteria for determining the conductor c.s.a. and selecting equipment. In particular: b permissible currents for the conductors, b maximum voltage drops, b short-circuit protection, b protection against indirect contact. The latter three criteria must be taken into account when selecting the integral unit. The principle behind the rules described below is, on the whole, common to all European publications. However, the calculations and values concerning protection against indirect contact are based on French standard NF C 15-100, and it is up to the user to check the regulations in force in the country concerned.
Cable protection against overload

To achieve this, the thermal setting value Irth selected must be greater than the current drawn I B and less than or equal to the permissible current Iz in the cable to be protected. IB < Irth y Iz
Breaking capacity rule Check that the breaking capacity (BC) of the integral unit is equal to or greater than the prospective short-circuit current (Isc max) at the point where it is to be installed. BC u Isc max Breaking time rule 2 conditions must be fulfilled: b The short-circuit current at the end of the circuit, Isc min, must be greater than or equal to the minimum current required for magnetic tripping of the device, b The short-circuit current at the start of the circuit, Isc max, must be such that: I2sc max t m y I2oto I2oto = permissible thermal stress limit for the circuit, tm = operating time of the integral unit or of the short-circuit protection device.
These 2 checks need only be made when modules with a low rating are used. Example: for a 6.3/10 A module, a cable c.s.a. u 2.5 mm2 is required to withstand Isc max = 50 kA.
Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes

TN multiple earthed neutral scheme
A
PEN
B'
C'
TNC scheme
b b b b b v v
Neutral is connected to earth. The earths are connected to neutral. Any phase/earth insulation fault causes a short-circuit. As contact voltage is dangerous, breaking must occur at the first fault. The PE conductor and the neutral conductor may be: combined (TNC scheme), separate (TNS scheme).
General : pages 1/116 to 1/121
1/122
Equipment selection for starters

1
Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes (continued) b Protection against indirect contact (TN schemes), for dead shorts only, requires that the following 2 conditions be fulfilled simultaneously: v The fault current Id must be greater than or equal to the minimum current required for magnetic tripping of the integral unit, i.e. 1.12 Irth max.
Uo Id = c.q. ___ Zb c = coefficient taking into account the upstream part of the fault loop impedance assumed to be equal to 0.8, unless otherwise indicated. q = coefficient dependent on the earth connection scheme and equal to 1 in the TN scheme. Uo = phase-neutral voltage in volts. Zb = fault loop impedance in m/m such that: Zb R (fault loop resistance). L = length of the fault loop equal to twice the length Lc of the circuit. S = Sph, c.s.a of the phase conductors = SPE = c.s.a. of the protective conductors. = resistivity of the copper = 0.0225. = ratio between the magnetic tripping current and the maximum setting current of the instantaneous thermal tripping device.
L Lc R = __ = 2 ___ S S
v The contact voltage (UL) for a dead short is at most equal to the value determined by the safety curve for the operating time tm of the integral unit in its magnetic tripping zone. This condition is generally fulfilled for power supplies of 230/415 V. (In fact, for UL = 50 V, a tm y 500 ms would be required and for U L = 25 V, a tm y 110 ms would be required). The first condition allows us to calculate the maximum length of the circuit to provide protection against indirect contact in the TN scheme. For the TN scheme: c.q.Uo.Sph L y __________ 2.1. Irth 0.8 x Uo x Sph i.e. L max = _______________________ 2 x 0.0225 x 1.2 Irth max
Maximum length of 230/415 V circuits with TN scheme

C.s.a. mm 2 1.5 2.5 Irth max. A 10 16 10 16 25 32 16 25 32 40 25 32 40 50 32 40 50 63 32 40 50 63 32 40 50 63 =3 m 180 112 298 186 118 92 296 190 148 118 284 222 178 142 370 296 236 188 590 472 378 300 922 738 590 468 =6 m 90 56 149 93 59 46 148 95 74 59 142 111 89 71 185 148 118 94 295 236 189 150 461 369 295 234 = 12 m 45 28 75 47 32 23 74 48 37 30 71 56 45 36 93 74 59 47 148 118 95 75 281 185 148 117 = 15 m 36 22 60 37 60
10
16
25
1/123
Selection according to utilisation category and required electrical durability

1
Selection for a temperature y 40 C
Rated operational voltage integral 18 integral 32 integral 63
V A A A
220/240 18 32 63
400/415 18 32 63
440 18 32 63
480/525 18 32 63
600/690 18 32 63
Rated operational currents (according to the rated operational voltage)
Rated operational powers (for standard motors)

integral 18 integral 32 integral 63 kW kW kW 4 7.5 15 9 15 33 9 15 33 11 18.5 37 15 25 55
Control and protection of motors at Ue y 415 V
b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-6-2.
integral 18
Millions of operating cycles 20
integral 32 and 63
Millions of operating cycles 20
10 8 6 5 4 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 1
2 1
10 8 6 5 4 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01
(32 A) (63 A)
20 2 3 4 5 67 9 1,5 8 10 18
40 60 100 200 45 80 150 300 Current broken in A
1 1,5
2 3 45 79 20 40 60 80 150 200 32 63 100160 300 6 8 10 Current broken in A
1 Not having previously broken a short-circuit current 2 Having broken a short-circuit current 10 times at 30 Ie (most common values of short-circuit current during operation)
Current breaking limit
AC-3 AC-43
AC-2 AC-42
1/124
Selection according to utilisation category and required electrical durability

1
a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-3, AC-41, AC-43

Rated operational currents (according to ambient temperature)
integral 18 integral 32 integral 63 With cable c.s.a. 4 mm2 6 mm2 16 mm2 A A A y 40 C 18 32 63 y 55 C 16 28 55 y 70 C 14 25 50
a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-41

Maximum operating rates in operating cycles/hour
On-load factor 85 % Operation at Ie max 600 1200 1200 On-load factor 25 % Operation at Ie max 900 1800 1800
integral 18 integral 32 integral 63
Operating cycles/h Operating cycles/h Operating cycles/h
Operation at 0.5 Ie 1200 2400 2400
Electrical durability Ue y 415 V

20 10 8 6 5 4 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 (18 A) (32 A) (63 A)
4 5 6 7 8 10 9
20 18
32 40
63 80 100 60 Current broken in A
Note: for use in category AC-44, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
1/125
Characteristics

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 18
Type
integral 18
3 In AC-43 A V In AC-43 at 415V a c with converter 18 690 2 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles 1200 operating cycles/hour 600 operating cycles/hour IEC: 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-3, 60947-4-1, 60947-6-2 VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660 EN 60 947-1, 60 947-2, 60 947-3, 60 947-4-1, 60 947-6-2 NEN, NBN ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, CSA DEMKO, DNV NEMKO, RINA, SEMKO, SETI, UL TH - 20+ 60 - 40+ 80 - 25+ 50 - 25+ 70 Energised state: 3 gn De-energised state: 3 gn Energised state: 8 gn De-energised state: 8 gn IP 20B Protection against direct finger contact Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and decree of 22-12-81 (JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982) Conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072 3000 From fixing plane From main axis (fore-aft tilt) (left-right tilt)
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Electrical durability Mechanical durability at Uc Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 55 C
Environment
Conforming to standards
Product certifications Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device
Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration Shock resistance Permissible acceleration Degree of protection
Operation Storage c Operation (1) Storage 5100 Hz Impulse duration: 11 ms Conforming to IEC 60144 and 60529 Conforming to VDE 0106
C C C C
Flame resistance
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions (without derating)
Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Voltage limits at y 55 C Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz a 60 Hz c with converter Operation Drop-out a Inrush Sealed c (1) Inrush Sealed a 50/60 Hz c with converter "C" O "C" O 21660 21600 24 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.7 Uc VA 75 (50 Hz). 90 (60 Hz) VA 8 (50 Hz). 9 (60 Hz) W 100 W 1.5 W 2.5 (50 Hz). 2.8 (60 Hz) ms 925 ms 725 ms 1520 ms 2025 (1) With converter. (2) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate. V V V
Heat dissipation Operating time (2) at 20 C and at Uc
Selection : pages 1/122 to 1/125
Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/190 to 1/199
1/126
Characteristics (continued)

Type
integral 18 y 40 C A Hz Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V A Operational current W Power per pole, hot state 18 4060 6 in enclosure 690 0.16 2.3
Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency limits of the operational current Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Heat dissipation in the power circuits of the contactor breaker and its protection module Rated making capacity I rms I peak Rated breaking capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-2
0.25 2.3
0.4 2.3
0.6 2.3
1 2.3
1.6 2.3
2.5 2.3
4 2.4
6 2.9
10 3.2
16 3.8
18 3.8
Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA Operational voltage Value of cos Icu (O-t-CO) (1) Ics (O-t CO-t-CO) (1) Icu = Ics O-t-CO-t-rCO (1) V
15 x Ith (above this value, the breaker trips) 105 380/415 0.25 50 50 50 440 0.25 40 50 25 480/525 0.3 10 10 7.5 600/690 0.5 4 5 2
Conforming to IEC 60947-6-2 ensuring reliability of operation Total breaking time Thermal limit Cabling
220/240 0.25 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 kA eff 50
With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz
ms A2s
2.5 100 x 103 Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a. 2 x 1.5 2x1 2 x 1.5 American Wire Gauge AWG 2 x AWG 16 to 2 x AWG 10
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable Tightening torque
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m
2x6 2 x 4 or 1 x 6 2x6 1.7
Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules

Module type Protection Conforming to standards Number of poles Number of protected poles Rated operational voltage Maximum continuous current Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping class Instantaneous trip current setting range Tripping tolerance LB1 LB03Ppp Standard motors IEC 60947-6-1, IEC 60947-6-2 3 3 690 0.1618 0.1/0.1612/18 - 20+ 60 With 10 Fixed at 15 Irth max 20 % IEC 60947 690 10 000 1 padlock, 5 shank (1) O: breaking short-circuit current, t: time CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (manual) rCO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (remote control). V
V A A C
Thermal protection
Magnetic protection conforming to IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2
Characteristics of versions without control test function, with padlocking facility

Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking Operating cycles
1/127

Add-on current limiter and auxiliary contacts
Add-on current limiter LA9 LB920
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational voltage (Uc) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Operational thermal current (Ie) Operating threshold Cabling
Tightening torque
Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V V A A A rms current mm2 Solid cable mm2 Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end Nm
690 (50/60 Hz) 690 (50/60 Hz) 63 32 1000 (non adjustable threshold) 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor, or 2 x 1.5 to 10 identical conductors 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 10 conductors 1 x 1.5 to 16 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 4 conductors 2.2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 LB0pp

Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Switching capacity Rated operational power a category AC-15 (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 With U u 17 V and I u 10 mA Voltage 1 million operating cycles 1.5 million operating cycles a category AC-15 Voltage 1 million operating cycles 1.5 million operating cycles c category DC-13 A V mVA V VA VA VA V W W W mm2 A V 10 690 600 48 110/127 300 500 160 300 1500 3500 24 48 120 90 70 50 800 700 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 Minimum 6 690 220/240 600 330 6000 110 75 38 400 c.s.a.: 2 x 1 380/415 520 300 7500 220 68 33 260 440 500 280 7000 440 61 28 220
Making capacity Rated c category operational DC-13 (2) power Making capacity Cabling Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operational power for 200 000 operating cycles a
Signalling contacts LA1 LB001

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Voltage Resistive load Lamp load (3) Inductive load (4) Motor (5) Voltage Resistive load Lamp load (3) Inductive load (4) Motor (5)
Cabling
V 110/127 220 VA 600 750 VA 90 125 VA 875 500 VA 160 200 V 24 48 110/125 200 W 100 100 50 50 W 50 50 6 7.5 W 75 75 50 50 W 75 75 6 7.5 mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 - Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1 (1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4). (2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time constant increasing with the load. (3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current. (4) Inductive load: cos 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation. (5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.
1/128
Characteristics

Electronic serial timer modules
Type
LA4 DT (On-delay) IEC 60255-5 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact - 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 - 25+ 70 250
LA4 DR (Off-delay) IEC 60255-5 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact - 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 - 25+ 70 250
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation For operation at Uc Conforming to IEC 60947-1 and VDE 0110 (group C)
C C C V

Built-in protection On input Contactor breaker coil suppression V By varistor By varistor a or c 24250 0.81.1 Uc By mechanical contact only Minimum c.s.a.: 1 x 1 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 By varistor By bidirectional peak limiting diode a 24250 0.81.1 Uc By mechanical contact only (connecting cable < 10 m) Minimum c.s.a.: 1 x 1 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Voltage limits Control type Cabling Flexible or solid cable, with or without cable end
mm 2
Time delay characteristics

Timing ranges Repeat accuracy Reset time Immunity to microbreaks Minimum control pulse duration Time delay signalling s 040 C During time delay period After time delay period During time delay period After time delay period By LED ms ms ms ms ms 0.12 - 1.530 - 25500 3 % (10 ms minimum) 100 50 10 2 Illuminates during time delay period 0.12 - 1.530 - 25500 3 % (10 ms minimum) 225 20 40 Illuminates during time delay period
Switching characteristics (solid state type)

Maximum power dissipated Leakage current Residual voltage Overvoltage protection Electrical durability W mA V Millions of operating cycles 2 < 5 3.3 3 kV; 0.5 joule 30 3.5 <5 3.3 3 kV; 0.5 joule 30
Operating diagrams
Electronic on-delay timer LA4 DT Electronic off-delay timer LA4 DR
Uc supply (A1 - A2)
1 0
Uc supply (A1 - A2) Operator (A1 - A2)
1 0 1 0
Time delay output1 Contactor breaker0 coil Red LED
t 1 Time delay output Contactor breaker coil 0 t

Red LED
1/129
Characteristics

Interface modules and converters
Type Used for control of the integral 18
Interface modules By a programmable controller, with a.c. control of the electromagnet
Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Operation Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Protection against direct finger contact Cabling Min. Max. Operating limits Protection
TH
Converters By a programmable controller, with d.c. control of the electromagnet Control on d.c. supply TH
C C V
- 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 250 conforming to IEC 60158-1 and 60947-1 and VDE 0110 (group C) Conforming to VDE 0106 1x1 2 x 2.5 Of the input and against reverse polarity: by diode
- 40+ 80 - 25+ 50 Conforming to VDE 0106 1x1 2 x 2.5 0.8...1.1 Uc (2) Against reverse polarity (by diode) and against overvoltage
mm 2 mm 2

Module or converter type Technology Schemes LA4 DFB Relay LA4 DFE LA4 DLB LA4 DLE Relay + override LA4 DWB Solid state LA4 LB080BD Solid state
E1 +
E1 +
E2
E1 +
E2
E2
+ _ (0V)
A1 A2
E1 E3 E2
A1 A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
Indication of input state Input signals (logic side) Voltage Current State 0 guaranteed State 1 guaranteed Supply voltage For U For I For U V mA V mA V V
By built-in LED c 24 (E1-E2) 25 < 2.4 <2 17 < U < 30 a 24250 (A1-A2) c 48 (E1-E2) 15 < 4.8 < 1.3 33 < U < 60 c 24 (E1-E2) 25 < 2.4 <2 17 < U < 30 c 48 (E1-E2) 15 < 4.8 < 1.3 33 < U < 60 c 524 (E1-E2) 8.5 for 5 V 15 for 24 V < 2.4 <2 5 < U < 30
c 24 (E2-E3) 10 <7 <5 U > 14 c 24 (E1-E2) (2)
Electrical durability 10 10 3 3 20 2 in millions of operating cycles Immunity to microbreaks ms 4 4 4 4 1 W 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4 Inrush:100 Average consumption Sealed:1.5 at 20 C ms 1530 1530 1530 1530 30 Operating time Pull-in at 20 C ms 2035 2035 2035 2035 15 Drop-out and at Uc (1) (1) The operating times depend on the type of electromagnet driving the contactor breaker and its control method. The closing time C is measured from the moment the integral coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate. (2) Warning: for supply from rectified a.c., the 2 following conditions must be met: the power supply must exceed 150 VA and the maximum ripple must be y 14 %.
1/130
Characteristics

Breaking capacity of integral 18 contactor breakers, ensuring reliability of operation, according to the operational voltage and protection module fitted.
Breaking capacity without current limiter

Protection module Reference Irth min A LB1 LB03P01 0.1 LB1 LB03P02 LB1 LB03P03 LB1 LB03P04 LB1 LB03P05 LB1 LB03P06 LB1 LB03P07 LB1 LB03P08 LB1 LB03P10 LB1 LB03P13 LB1 LB03P17 LB1 LB03P21 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6 10 12 Operational voltage 220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V max A 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6 10 16 18 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 50 50 50 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 50 50 50 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 50 50 25 25 480/525 V 600/690 V kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 50 10 7.5 7.5 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 50 u 50 5 5 2 2
Breaking capacity with current limiter LA9 LB920

Protection module Reference Irth min A LB1 LB03P01 0.1 LB1 LB03P02 LB1 LB03P03 LB1 LB03P04 LB1 LB03P05 LB1 LB03P06 LB1 LB03P07 LB1 LB03P08 LB1 LB03P10 LB1 LB03P13 LB1 LB03P17 LB1 LB03P21 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6 10 12 Operational voltage 220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V max A 0.16 0.25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6 10 16 18 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 65 65 65 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 65 65 65 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 65 65 65 65 480/525 V 600/690 V kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 65 65 65 65 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 50 50 50 42 42 42
1/131
Selection of protection module according to the tripping characteristics

1
Motor protection
By thermal-magnetic modules (1) LB1 LB03P

Time
300 min 2,5 0,16 0,4 1 0,25 0,63 1,6 100 0,1 min 6 4 12 18 10 16
10 min
P01 P03 P05 P07 P10 P17
P02 P04 P06 P08 P13 P21
(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in these curves are for an ambient air temperature of 20 C, without prior current flow (cold state). The average operating times after prolonged current flow (hot state) can be calculated by applying the coefficient 0.5.
1 min
10 s
0,15 2,4 0,1 s
3,75 6
9,45 15
24 37,5
60 90
150 240 180 270
0,01 s 0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000
Current in A
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit

3-phase 400/415 V, 50 Hz

Maximum peak current in kA
Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone
100 80 60
=0 ,3
100 80 60 40
40 20
=0 ,5
8 7 6 5
=0
,2
4 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2
=0
,7
10 8 6
co s
8 6
7 5 4 3
20
10 8 6 4
2
2
3 2
1
0,1 0,1 1 0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10 100 200 130 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA 20 50 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 50 100 200
130 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 2 3 4
0.631 A 11.6 A 1.62.5 A 2.54 A
5 6 7 8
46 A 610 A 1016 A 1218 A
1/132

1
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit (continued)

3-phase 480/525 V, 50 Hz


Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone
100 80 60
=0 ,3
=0 ,2 5
100 80 60 40
40 20 10 8 6
=0 ,5
8 7
4 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,1
=0
8 7 6
20
5 4 3
10 8 6 4
co s
,7
3 2
2 1
0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10 100 200 130 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA 20 50
1 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 100 200 130 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA 50
1 2 3 4
0.631 A 11.6 A 1.62.5 A 2.54 A
5 6 7 8
46 A 610 A 1016 A 1218 A
1/133
References

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 18 for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)
3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)
Without control test function, with padlocking facility

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V 440 V 240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob 4 9 9 9 15 Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) to be completed by adding for the control voltage code (2) Ue y 415 V A 18 kA 50 LD1 LB030 p Weight
kg 0.650
3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V 440 V 240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob (VDE 013) 4 9 9 9 15 Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) to be completed by adding for the control voltage code (2) Ue y 415 V A 18 kA 50 LD5 LB130 p Weight
LD1 LB030p
kg 1.600
Thermal-magnetic protection modules (compensated and differential for normal starting motors) (5)
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Thermal Reference Weight motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 setting 220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V range 440 V 240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V (Irth min./Irth max.) kW kW kW kW kW A kg g g g g g 0.10.16 LB1 LB03P01 0.250 g 0.06 g g g 0.160.25 LB1 LB03P02 0.250 0.06 0.09 g g g 0.250.4 LB1 LB03P03 0.250 g 0.12 g g 0.37 0.40.63 LB1 LB03P04 0.250 0.18 0.09 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.631 LB1 LB03P05 0.250 0.12 0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 11.6 LB1 LB03P06 0.250 0.25 0.55 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.62.5 LB1 LB03P07 0.250 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 2.54 LB1 LB03P08 0.250 0.75 1.5 1.1 2.2 2.2 3.7 4 46 LB1 LB03P10 0.250 1.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 610 LB1 LB03P13 0.250 2.2 4 3 5.5 7.5 10 11 1016 LB1 LB03P17 0.250 7.5 4 9 9 11 15 1218 LB1 LB03P21 0.250 g : There are no standard power ratings for these motors. (1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see above. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 600 660 400 50 Hz LDp LB B D E F M P/PU7 U Q N R S Y 60 Hz LDp LB BC CC D K FC LC MC MC/PU7 Q N S Q c (4) LDp LB BD (3) UL 508 type E approved version (SPCD) at 347/600 V, as standard. (4) For use on c, the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression device (2 converters for reversing contactor breakers). (5) Protection modules UL and CSA approved.
LD5 LB130p
LB1 LB03P06
Characteristics : pages 1/126 to 1/133
1/134
References

(pre-assembled) Control circuit voltage: 220 V, 50 Hz
3-pole contactor breakers with thermal-magnetic protection module

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 480 V 240 V 415 V 525 V kW kW kW kW 0.09 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 0.55 0.75 600 V 690 V kW 0.55 Thermal setting range (Irth min to Irth max) A 0.631 Breaking capacity (Iq) for Ue y 415 V kA u 130 Reference Weight
LD3 LB130M05
kg 0.900
1.1
11.6
u 130
LD3 LB130M06
0.900
1.1
1.1
1.5
1.62.5
u 130
LD3 LB130M07
0.900
0.55 0.75 LD3 LB130Mpp 1.1
1.1 1.5 2.2
1.5
2.2
2.54
u 130
LD3 LB130M08
0.900
2.2
3.7
46
u 130
LD3 LB130M10
0.900
1.5 2.2 3
3 4 5.5 7.5
5.5
7.5
610
50
LD3 LB130M13
0.900
7.5
10
11
1016
50
LD3 LB1130M17
0.900
1/135
References

Add-on blocks
AUTO
+ TRIP.
AUTO
+ TRIP.
LD5 LB + LB1-LB
LA1 LB001
LA1 LB021
LA1 LB001
LA1 LB015
LA1 LB0311
LA1 LB0211
AUTO
+ TRIP.
LA1 LB034
LD1 LB + LB1 LB LD3 LB
LA1 LB031
LA1 LB0341
1/136
References

Add-on blocks
Current limiter
For use on LD1 or LD5 For mounting, see page 1/192 For use on LA9 LB920 LD1 or LD5 Mounted on RH side LD1 Mounted on LH side Function
(IP 20)
Reference LA9 LB920 Weight kg 0.320
Increases the breaking capacity of the integral unit
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20)

Type and number of blocks per unit Composition Reference Weight kg
1 block of 5 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts contactor state b 2 signalling contacts tripped 1 block of 2 signalling contacts control knob in any position other than "Auto" 1 block of 2 signalling contacts control knob in any position other than "Auto" 1 block of 4 contacts comprising: b 2 signalling contacts control knob in any position other than Auto" b 2 signalling contacts tripped on short-circuit 1 block of 4 contacts comprising: b 2 signalling contacts control knob in any position other than Auto" b 2 signalling contacts tripped on short-circuit LD5 1 block of 5 contacts comprising: Mounted b 3 signalling contacts on LH side contactor state b 2 signalling contacts control knob in any position other than Auto 1 block of 5 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts contactor state b 2 signalling contacts control knob in any position other than Auto
LA1 LB015 2 1 2 1 1 LA1 LB031
0.100
0.100
LA1 LB0311
0.100
LA1 LB034 2 1 1
0.100
LA1 LB0341 1 1 1 1
0.100
LA1 LB021 2 2 1
0.100
LA1 LB0211 2 1 1 1
0.100
Signalling contact block (IP 10)

For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Composition Reference Weight kg
LD1 or 1 block comprising LD5 1 signalling contact Mounted contactor state on RH side or LH side
LA1 LB001
0.035
Test device
Application LA9 LB398 For control circuits 1 Reference LA9 LB398 Weight kg 0.010
1/137
References

Add-on blocks
AUTO
+ TRIP.
AUTO
TRIP. +
AUTO
TRIP. +
1/138
References

Accessories and spare parts
Interface modules
Mounting Type
(1)
Operational voltage 50/60 Hz V 24250 24250 24250 24250 24250 Reference Weight
Control voltage c V 524 24 48 24 48
On top of the integral unit
Solid state Relay output Relay output (with override)
LA4 DWB LA4 DFB LA4 DFE LA4 DLB LA4 DLE
kg 0.045 0.050 0.050 0.045 0.045

Mounting Type Time delay s 0.12 1530 25500 0.12 1530 25500 Operational voltage 50/60 Hz (2) V 24250 24250 24250 24250 24250 24250 Operational voltage 50/60 Hz V 2448 50127 110250 2448 50127 110250 y 250 Reference Weight
On-delay
Off-delay
LA4 DT0U LA4 DT2U LA4 DT4U LA4 DR0U LA4 DR2U LA4 DR4U Reference
kg 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.050 0.050 Weight
Suppressor modules
Mounting Type
RC circuit (3) (resistor-capacitor) Screw connections to coil of integral unit Varistor (peak limiting) Screw connections to coil of integral unit RC circuit (3) (resistor-capacitor)
LA4 DA2E LA4 DA2G LA4 DA2U LA4 DE2E LA4 DE2G LA4 DE2U LA9 D09982
kg 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.010
Clip-on
Auto-Man-Stop control modules

Mounting Type Operational voltage 50/60 Hz V 24100 100250 Reference Weight
Automatic-Manual-Stop
LA4 DMK LA4 DMU
kg 0.040 0.040
Replacement voltage converters (1)

For c control circuit operation
Mounting For use on integral Operational voltage c (4) V 24 (6) Consumption Inrush Sealed Description Reference (5) Weight
LDp LB pppBD
W 100
W 1,5
Coil Converter
LX LB024 LA1 LB080BD
kg 0.065 0.045
(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters. (2) For use on 24 V, the integral unit must be fitted with a 21 V coil (see page 1/141). (3) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time). (4) When used on rectified single-phase or 3-phase supply, the peak to peak ripple voltage must be equal to or less than 0.14 of the average voltage. Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 C. (5) It is essential that the voltage converter be associated with the specific coil indicated. (6) The 24 V converter can be operated by low level input. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the supply voltage (24 V).
1/139
References

Accessories
Protection accessories
Description Sealing cover Protective end cover
For use on Protection module Protection of unused busbars
Sold in lots of 1 5
Unit reference LA1 LB090 GV1 G10
Weight kg 0.010 0.005
Mounting accessory
Description LA1 LB090 Mounting plate For use on LD1, LD3, LD5 Mounting on 2 x 32 mm 4 rails Reference LA9 LC010 Weight kg 0.150
Cabling accessories
Description Terminal blocks, 63 A, 3-pole for incoming supply to one or more busbar sets GV1 G09 Busbar sets, 63 A, 3-pole For use on Cable entry from above Cable entry from below Supply to 2 or more integral units Pitch mm Reference GV1 G09 LA9 LB960 Weight kg 0.040 0.110
57 72
LA9 LB930 GV2 G272 GV2 G472 LA9 LB940
0.037 0.050 0.085 0.050
Supply to 4 or more integral units Supply to 1 current limiter on LH side 1 current limiter on RH side
72 72
Flush mounting accessories

Description Recessed terminals For Auxiliary contact associated with flush mounted integral 18 integral 18 Sold in lots of 2 Unit reference LA9 LB910 Weight kg 0.001
Blanking plate
10
GA1 C6
0.001
LA9 LB960
Locking accessories
Description Control knob locking kit For Fixing on front face, 3 padlocks, 6 mm shank max. (padlocks to be ordered separately) For LD1, LD3, LD5 Sold in lots of 1 Unit reference LA9 LB390 Weight kg 0.160
Door interlock mechanisms (IP 54)

Type LA9 LB930 Adjustable from 0 to 185 mm with extension (control knob mounted on plate or door) Colour of knob Red Black Reference LA9 LB330 LA9 LB331 Weight kg 0.400 0.400
LA9 LB390
1/140
References

Coils (replacement parts)
a.c. operation
Rated control circuit voltages Uc Uc 50 Hz 60 Hz V V 21 21 24 LX1 LB ppp 42 48 110 127 220 230 230 240 380/400 415 440 500 660 24 36 48 110 115/120 220 230/240 240 440 460/480 575/600 Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 3.27 4.07 5.17 8.96 16.41 21.13 87.04 102.22 109 137 353 379 448 463 463 493 1389 1491 1779 3312 3554 Inductance Voltage of closed code (1) circuit H 0.14 0.18 0.23 0.40 0.72 0.95 4 4.4 5 6.6 16 17.5 20 22 22 24 60 70 80 102 180 Reference Weight
JV BC B CC D E K FC F G LC MC M P PU7 U Q N R S Y
LX1 LB019 LX1 LB021 LX1 LB024 LX1 LB032 LX1 LB042 LX1 LB048 LX1 LB100 LX1 LB105 LX1 LB110 LX1 LB127 LX1 LB200 LX1 LB210 LX1 LB220 LX1 LB230 LX1 LB234 LX1 LB240 LX1 LB380 LX1 LB415 LX1 LB440 LX1 LB500 LX1 LB660
kg 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065
Consumption at 50 Hz: inrush (cos : 0.55) 75 VA; sealed (cos : 0.28) 8 VA. Consumption at 60 Hz: inrush (cos : 0.55) 90 VA; sealed (cos : 0.30) 9 VA.
d.c. operation
The integral 18 can operate on a d.c. supply when fitted with a standard coil and a corresponding voltage converter: see page 1/139. (1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral unit.
1/141
Operation

Contactor breakers integral 18
Auxiliary contact states according to the positions of the control knob
LD1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Auxiliary contact actuators

Auto
1
A1
A2
+0
Auto
+0
Auto
+0
Auto
+0
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LB015
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
LA1 LB001 LA1 LB031 LA1 LB0311 LA1 LB034
LA1 LB0341
15
17
17
15
17
05
07
17
15
05 06
13 23 31
95
16
18
18
16
18
08
18
16
14 24 32
96
Contact closed Off
98
42
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
16
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
06
15 17 16 18
05 07 06 08
17 15 18 16
05 07 06 08
On, contactor open

AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
05 07 06 08
17 15 18 16
05 07 06 08
On, contactor closed

AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
05 07 06 08
17 15 18 16
05 07 06 08
Tripped on overload
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
05 07 06 08
17 15 18 16
05 07 06 08
Tripped on short-circuit
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
05 07 06 08
17 15 18 16
05 07 06 08
Off after short-circuit

TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
05 07 06 08
17 15 18 16
05 07 06 08
Manual reset
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
15 17 16 18
05 07 06 08
17 15 18 16
05 07 06 08
RESET
1/142
08
Contact open
97
41
15
07
Operation

Reversing contactor breakers integral 18
LD5
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

Auto
+0
Auto
+0
A1
A2
A1
II
A2
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LB015 LA1 LB001 LA1 LB021 LA1 LB0211 LA1 LB001 On the integral
17 15 41 05 06 07
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
13 23 31
95
97
41
13 23 31
15
17
14 24 32
96
98
42
14 24 32
16
18
14 24 32
18
16
42
Contact closed Off
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
15 17 16 18
13 23 31 14 24 32
17 15 18 16
41 42
05 07 06 08
On, contactors open

AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
15 17 16 18
13 23 31 14 24 32
17 15 18 16
41 42
05 07 06 08
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
15 17 16 18
13 23 31 14 24 32
17 15 18 16
41 42
05 07 06 08
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
15 17 16 18
13 23 31 14 24 32
17 15 18 16
41 42
05 07 06 08
Tripped on overload
D clench TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
15 17 16 18
13 23 31 14 24 32
17 15 18 16
41 42
05 07 06 08
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
15 17 16 18
13 23 31 14 24 32
17 15 18 16
41 42
05 07 06 08

D clench TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
15 17 16 18
13 23 31 14 24 32
17 15 18 16
41 42
05 07 06 08
Manual reset
D clench TRIP. + R arm. RESET
13 23 31 14 24 32
95 97
96 98
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
15 17 16 18
13 23 31 14 24 32
17 15 18 16
41 42
05 07 06 08
1/143
08
Contact open
13 23 31
Characteristics

Type
integral 32
A V 3 32 690 1.5 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles 3600 operating cycles/hour 600 operating cycles/hour IEC: 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-3, 60947-4-1, 60947-6-2 VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660 BS: 5424, 4752, 4941 NEN, NBN ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA DEMKO, DNV, GL NEMKO, NNK, VE, PTB, RINA, SCC, SEMKO, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS TH - 20+ 60 - 40+ 80 - 25+ 50 - 25+ 70 Energised state: 3 gn De-energised state: 3 gn Energised state: 8 gn De-energised state: 8 gn IP 20B Protection against direct finger contact Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and decree of 22-12-81 (JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982) Conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072 3000 From fixing plane From main axis (fore-aft tilt) (left-right tilt)
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-43 Rated operational voltage (Ue) Electrical durability In AC-43 at 415V Mechanical durability at Uc Maximum operating rate a at ambient temperature y 55 C c with converter
Environment
Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration Shock resistance Permissible acceleration Degree of protection
Operation Storage c Operation (1) Storage 5100 Hz Impulse duration: 11 ms Conforming to IEC 60144 and 60529 Conforming to VDE 0106
C C C C
Flame resistance

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Voltage limits at y 55 C Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz a 60 Hz c with converter Operation Drop-out a Inrush Sealed c (1) Inrush Sealed a 50/60 Hz c with converter "C" O "C" O V V V 21660 21600 24, 48, 110 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.7 Uc 160 (50 Hz), 185 (60 Hz) 12 (50 Hz or 60 Hz) 250 for 50 ms 4 4 (50 Hz), 5 (60 Hz) 925 720 2535 1020
VA VA W W W ms ms ms ms
(1) With converter. (2) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
1/144
Characteristics

Type
integral 32 y 40 C A Hz 32 4060 8 690 1.6 1.6
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency limits of the operational current Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Heat dissipation in the power circuits of the contactor breaker and its protection module Rated making capacity I rms I peak Rated breaking capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-2
Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V A Operational current W Power per pole, hot state
2.5 1.8
4 1.8
6.3 2
10 2
16 3.4
25 4.8
32 6
Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA Operational voltage Value of cos Icu (O-t-CO) (1) Ics (O-t CO-t-CO) (1) Icu = Ics O-t-CO-t-rCO (1) V
12 x Ith (above this value, the breaker trips) 105 380/415 0.25 50 50 50 440 0.25 50 (2) 35 (2) 50 480/525 0.3 20 20 15 600/690 0.8 5 (cos 0.7) 5 4
Conforming to IEC 60947-6-2 ensuring reliability of operation Total breaking time Thermal limit Cabling
220/240 0.25 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 kA rms 50
With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable
ms A2s
4 100 x 103 Maximum c.s.a. 1 x 10 or 2 x 6 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 10 or 2 x 6 2 Minimum c.s.a. 1x1 1x1 1x1
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m
Tightening torque

Module type Protection Conforming to standards Number of poles Number of protected poles Rated operational voltage Max. continuous current Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping class Instantaneous trip current setting range Tripping tolerance LB1 LC03M LB6 LC03M Standard motors Frequent starting IEC 60947-4 type 2 (Iq = 50 kA) NF C 63-650 NF C 63-650 3 3 3 3 690 690 0.432 0.432 0.25/0.4023/32 - 20+ 60 20+ 60 With Without 10 612 Irth max (Usual setting 910 Irth max) 20 % 612 Irth max 20 % LB1 LCppL Distribution circuits NF C 63-120 3 4 3 3 690 1032 6.3/1023/32 20+ 60 Without 36 Irth max 20 %
4 4
Thermal protection
V A A C

Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking V Operating cycles IEC 60947 690 10 000 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, shank 8 mm max and 5 mm min.
Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility

Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking V Operating cycles IEC 60947, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, VDE 0113 690 10 000 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, shank 8 mm max and 5 mm min. When flush mounting, interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible.
(1) O: breaking short-circuit current, t: time CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (manual) rCO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (remote control) (2) Conforming to BS 4752 36 kA cycle P2, 50 kA cycle P1.
1/145

Add-on current limiter LA9 LB920

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational voltage (Uc) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Operational thermal current (Ie) Operating threshold Cabling Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V V A A A rms current mm2 Solid cable mm2 Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end Nm 690 (50/60 Hz) 690 (50/60 Hz) 63 32 1000 (non adjustable threshold) 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor, or 2 x 1.5 to 10 identical conductors 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 10 conductors 1 x 1.5 to 16 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 4 conductors 2.2
Tightening torque
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Switching capacity Rated operational power a category AC-15 (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 With U u 17 V and I u 10 mA Voltage 1 million operating cycles 1.5 million operating cycles a category AC-15 Voltage 1 million operating cycles 1.5 million operating cycles c category DC-13 A V mVA V VA VA VA V W W W mm2 60 690 600 48 110/127 220/240 300 500 600 160 300 330 1500 3500 6000 24 48 110 120 90 75 70 50 38 800 700 400 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 . Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1 380/415 520 300 7500 220 68 33 260 440 500 280 7000 440 61 28 220
Making capacity Rated c category operational DC-13 (2) power Making capacity Cabling
Signalling contacts
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operational power for 200 000 operating cycles a Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Voltage Resistive load Lamp load (3) Inductive load (4) Motor (5) Voltage Resistive load Lamp load (3) Inductive load (4) Motor (5) A V V VA VA VA VA V W W W W mm2 3 250 110/127 600 90 875 160 24 48 110/125 100 100 50 50 50 6 75 75 50 75 75 6 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 - Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1 220 750 125 500 200 200 50 7.5 50 7.5
Cabling
Isolating auxiliary contacts

Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947 and NF C 63-130 Cabling a.c. supply d.c. supply A V V 6 690 125
mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 1.5 or 1 x 2.5 (1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4). (2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time constant increasing with the load. (3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current. (4) Inductive load: cos 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation. (5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.
1/146
Characteristics

Type Used for control of the integral 32 Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Operation Isolation Cabling Min. Max. Operating limits Protection
Converters By a programmable controller, with d.c. control of the electromagnet Control on d.c. supply
C C kV mm 2 mm 2
- 25+ 70 - 25+ 50 rms voltage between inputs and outputs: 2.5 1x1 2 x 2.5 0.85...10.1 Uc Against reverse polarity (by diode) and against overvoltage LA1 LC 580BD
- 25+ 70 - 25+ 50 Common negative terminal 1x1 2 x 2.5 0.8...1.1 Uc (2) Against reverse polarity (by diode) and against overvoltage LA1 LC 080BD
Module or converter type
580ED
180BD
080ED
080FD

Schemes LA1 LC580 pD LA1 LC180BD
A1
LA1 LC080BD LA1 LC080ED

A1
LA1 LC080FD
+ E1
E2
+ E1
E2
+
A2
E1 (0V) E3 E2
A1 A2
(0V)
E1
A1 A2
A2
E2
Indication of input state Input signals Voltage (logic side) Current State 0 guaranteed State 1 guaranteed Supply voltage For U For I For U
V mA V mA V V
By LED c 24 (E1-E2) 30 < 2.4 <2 > 20.4 a 24240 (A1-A2)
c 48 (E1-E2) 20 < 4.8 <2 > 40.8 a 24240 (A1-A2)
c 524 (E1-E2) 1524 V 8.55 V < 2.5 <2 >4 a 24240 (A1-A2)
c 24 (1) (E3-E2) 20 <7 <5 > 14 c 24 (2) (E1-E2)
c 48 (1) (E3-E2) 10 <14 < 2.5 > 28 c 48 (2) (E1-E2)
c 110 (E1-E2)
Electrical durability 5 1 in millions of operating cycles VA 160 Average Inrush 50 Hz consumption VA 185 60 Hz at 20 C W 250 c 12 Sealed 50/60 Hz VA W 4 c ms 1530 1530 1035 30 Operating time Pull-in at 20 C ms 2235 2035 830 15 Drop-out and at Uc (1) For direct control by external contact: connect E1-E3. (2) Warning: for supply from rectified a.c., the 2 following conditions must be met: the power supply must exceed 250 VA and the maximum ripple must be y 14 %.
1/147
Characteristics

Tripping and reset devices, coil suppressor module
Environment
Conforming to standards Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device
Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc
C C C
IEC 60337-1 TH - 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 - 25+ 70 Conforming to VDE 0106
Protection against direct finger contact
Tripping devices
Type Pull-in voltage Drop-out voltage Average consumption Minimum pulse time Uc Uc Inrush Sealed LA1 LC070p, LA1 LC072p 0.81.1 0.350.7 8 4 LA1 LC071p 0.71.1 8 4 10
VA VA ms
Reset devices
Type Consumption Duration of a reset cycle Minimum impulse duration Mechanical durability VA s s Operating cycles LA1 LC052p 9 9 0.5 u 10 000
Suppressor module LA9 D09982

Type of protection Connection scheme Operational voltage V RC (resistor-capacitor)
y 250
1/148
Characteristics

Breaking capacity of integral 32 contactor breakers, ensuring reliability of operation, according to the operational voltage and protection module fitted.
Breaking capacity without current limiter

Protection module Reference Irth min A LBp LC03M03 0.25 LBp LC03M04 LBp LC03M05 LBp LC03M06 LBp LC03M07 LBp LC03M08 LBp LC03M10 LBp LC03M13 LBp LC03M17 LBp LC03M22 LBp LC03M53 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 23 Operational voltage 220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V max A 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 32 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 50 50 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 50 50 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 50 50 50 500 V kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 15 15 50 600/690 V kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 15 10 4 4 4
Breaking capacity with current limiter LA9 LB920

Protection module Reference Irth min A LBp LC03M03 0.25 LBp LC03M04 LBp LC03M05 LBp LC03M06 LBp LC03M07 LBp LC03M08 LBp LC03M10 LBp LC03M13 LBp LC03M17 LBp LC03M22 LBp LC03M53 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 23 Operational voltage 220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V max A 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 32 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 65 65 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 65 65 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 65 65 65 500 V kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 65 65 65 600/690 V kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 42 42 42 42/20 (1) 42/20 (1)
(1) 42 kA for 600 V - 20 kA for 690 V
1/149

1
Motor protection
Standard motors By thermal-magnetic modules (1) LB1 LC03M
Time
Frequent starting motors By magnetic modules LB6 LC03M

Time
300 min 100 min
0,25 0,40 0,63 1 1,6 2,5 4 6,3 10 16 23 25 32 irth
10 min
M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M10 M13 M17 M22 M53
300 min 100 min
10 min
1 min
1 min
10 s
10 s M06 M07 M08 M13 M10 60 M17

M22
M53
1s
2,4
1s
4,8 7,6 12 19 30 48 76 120 190 3,8 6 9,5 15 24 38 60 95 150 380
9,5 15 19 0,1 s
24 38 30
95 150190
300
48 76 120 190 300380
0,1 s
0,01 s
0,01 s
0,1
0,2
0,4 0,6
10
20
40 60 100
200 400 600 Current in A
0,8 1
10
20
40 60
100
200
Distribution circuit protection

By thermal-magnetic modules (1) LB1 LCpp L
Time
300 min 100 min
6,3 10 16 23 32 irth 25
10 min
L13 L17 L22 L53
1 min
10 s
1s 30 48 75 95 60 0,1 s 95 150190
,01 s
0,8 1
10
20
40 60
100
200
(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves are for an ambient air temperature of 20 C, without prior current flow (cold state). The average operating times after prolonged current flow (hot state) can be calculated by applying the coefficient 0.5.
1/150

1

3-phase 400/415 V, 50 Hz
1
Thermal limit I2t in kA 2s in the short-circuit protection zone

100 80 60
=0 ,3
100 80 60 40
40 20 10 8 6
s
8 (1) 7 6 5 4
=0
,2
8 (1) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
=0
,5
20
4 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4
=0
3
10 8 6 4
co
,7
2 0,2 0,1 0,1 1 0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 11.6 A 2 1.62.5 A 3 2.54 A
4 46.3 A 5 6.310 A 6 1016 A
7 1625 A 8 2332 A
For 1 to 1.6 A ratings, the thermal limit is less than 1x103A2s.
(1) Associated thermal protection rating. The breaking capacity is unlimited on contactor breakers fitted with modules: - up to a rating of 1016 A at 220-380-415 V, - up to a rating of 6.310 A at 440-500 V. 3-phase 480/525 V, 50 Hz


100 80 60 40
=0 ,3
100 80 60 40
8 (1) 7 6 5
20 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4
=0 ,5
co s
6 5 4 3 2 1
8 (1) 7
4
20
=0 ,7
3
10 8 6 4
2 0,2 0,1 0,1 1 0,2 0,4 0,6 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 100 200 50 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 11.6 A 2 1.62.5 A 3 2.54 A
4 46.3 A 5 6.310 A 6 1016 A
7 1625 A 8 2332 A
For 1 to 1.6 A ratings, the thermal limit is less than 1x103A2s.
(1) Associated thermal protection rating. The breaking capacity is unlimited on contactor breakers fitted with modules: - up to a rating of 1016 A at 220-380-415 V, - up to a rating of 6.310 A at 440-500 V. General : pages 1/116 to 1/121 Selection : pages 1/122 to 1/125 References : pages 1/152 to 1/163 Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/190 to 1/199
1/151
References


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob (CNOMO, VDE 0113) 7.5 15 15 18.5 25 Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding for Ue the control circuit voltage code (2) y 415 V A 32 kA 50 LD1 LC030 p Weight
kg 1.430
LD1 LC030 p
With control test function and padlocking facility

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob (CNOMO. VDE 0113) 7.5 15 15 18.5 25 Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding for Ue the control circuit voltage code (2) y 415 V A 32 kA 50 LD4 LC130 p Weight
kg 1.450
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 7.5 15 15 18.5 25 32 50 LD4 LC130 p
LD4 LC030 p
1.450

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob (CNOMO. VDE 0113) 7.5 15 15 18.5 25 Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding for Ue the control circuit voltage code (2) y 415 V A 32 kA 50 LD5 LC130 p (5) Weight
kg 2.800
LD4 LC030 p
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 7.5 15 15 18.5 25 32 50
LD5 LC030 p (5)
2.800
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see page opposite. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 600 400 50 Hz B D E F M M U Q N N S 60 Hz c (4) LD5 LC030 p BC BD CC D ED FC FD FC MC MC/PU7 MC Q Q S
660 Y
(3) Variant: UL 508 approved version (starter) at 600 V, to order, add suffix H51 to the reference. Example: LD1 LC030MH51 (4) For use on c, the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression device (2 converters for reversing contactor breakers). (5) It is essential to provide electrical locking for reversing contactor breakers integral 32.
1/152
References

for control and protection of motors (for customer assembly)
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max. (2)
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 480 V 240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V kW kW kW kW 0.06 g g g g 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 g g g 1.1 1.5 2.2 4 7.5 11 15 g 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 4 7.5 11 15 g 0.37 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.7 5.5 10 15 18.5 Thermal setting range (Irth min to Irth max) A 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 6.310 1016 1625 2332 Magnetic protection Reference Weight
LB1 LC03Mpp
600 V 690 V kW g g 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 7.5 11 18.5 25
A 2.44.8 3.87.6 612 9.519 1530 2448 3876 60120 95190 150300 190380
LB1 LC03M03 LB1 LC03M04 LB1 LC03M05 LB1 LC03M06 LB1 LC03M07 LB1 LC03M08 LB1 LC03M10 LB1 LC03M13 LB1 LC03M17 LB1 LC03M22 LB1 LC03M53
kg 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400
Magnetic only protection modules (for frequent starting motors)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 480 V 240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V kW kW kW kW 0.18 g 0.55 0.75 0.25 0.37 1.1 1.1 1.1 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 1.5 2.2 4 7.5 11 15 1.5 2.2 4 7.5 11 15 2.2 3.7 5.5 10 15 18.5 Magnetic protection 600 V 690 V kW 1.1 1.5 3 4 7.5 11 18.5 25 Reference Weight
A 9.519 1530 2448 3876 60120 95190 150300 190380
LB6 LC03M06 LB6 LC03M07 LB6 LC03M08 LB6 LC03M10 LB6 LC03M13 LB6 LC03M17 LB6 LC03M22 LB6 LC03M53
kg 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400
LB6 LB03Mpp
(1) Protection modules UL and CSA approved. g There are no standard power ratings for these motors. (2) To order PTB approved versions, add suffix H8 to the reference. Example: LB1 LC03M03H8.
1/153
Selection

for control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1
Selecting the type of contactor breaker and protection module
Neutral point connection Neutral connection TNC (neutral and PE combined)
Type of circuit 3-pole + PEN
Equipment scheme
Combination contactor breaker + protection module LD1 LC030 p + LB1 LC03Lpp LD4 LC130 p + LB1 LC03Lpp LD4 LC030 p + LB1 LC03Lpp
PEN
TNS 3-pole (neutral and PE separated)
LD1 LC030 p + LB1 LC03Lpp LD4 LC130 p + LB1 LC03Lpp LD4 LC030 p + LB1 LC03Lpp
3-pole + N
N
Note: - the PEN conductor must not be isolated, - all live conductors must be isolated. Neutral protection optional.
1/154
References

3 and 4-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Rated thermal current I th y 40 C A 32 Maximum operational current AC-1 y 40 C A 32 Maximum Breaking operational capacity (Iq) voltage for Ue y 415 V V kA 690 50 Number of poles Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control circuit voltage code (2) Weight
3 4
LD1 LC030p LD1 LC040p
kg 1.430 1.750

Rated Maximum Maximum Breaking thermal operational operational capacity (Iq) current I th current AC-1 voltage for y 40 C y 40 C Ue y 415 V A A V kA Black knob on blue background (CNOMO, VDE 0113) 32 32 690 50 Number of poles Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control circuit voltage code (2) Weight
LD1 LC030p
kg 3 4 LD4 LC130p LD4 LC140p 1.450 1.780
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 32 32 690 50 3 4
1.450 1.780
Protection modules (for customer assembly)

Thermal-magnetic (compensated)
Thermal Magnetic setting range setting range (Irth min to Irth max) (36 Irth max) A A 6.310 3060 Number of poles 3 4 Number of protected poles 3 4 3 1016 4895 3 4 LD4 LC030p 1625 75150 3 4 3 4 3 3 4 3 2332 95190 3 4 LB1 LC03Lpp 3 4 3 Reference Weight
LB1 LC03L13 LB1 LC04L13 LB1 LC05L13 LB1 LC03L17 LB1 LC04L17 LB1 LC05L17 LB1 LC03L22 LB1 LC04L22 LB1 LC05L22 LB1 LC03L53 LB1 LC04L53 LB1 LC05L53
kg 0.400 0.500 0.500 0.400 0.500 0.500 0.400 0.500 0.500 0.400 0.500 0.500
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 400 50 Hz B D E F M M U Q N N 60 Hz BC CC D FC FC MC MC MC Q c (3) BD ED FD (3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.
480 Q
500 S
600 S
660 Y
1/155
References

Add-on blocks
AUTO
+ TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
AUTO
+ TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
AUTO
+ TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
LA1 LC030 (LD4) LA1 LC030 (LD4)
1/156
References

Add-on blocks
Current limiter
For use on LD1 or LD5 For mounting see page 1/192 For use on LA9 LB920 Function
(IP 20)
Reference LA9 LB920 Weight kg 0.320
Increases the breaking capacity of the integral unit
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20) (1)

Type and number of blocks per unit Composition Reference Weight kg
N/O N/C C/O LD1, LD4 1 block of 6 contacts comprising: or LD5 b 3 signalling contacts Mounted "contactor state on RH side b 1 signalling contact control knob in any position other than Auto" b 1 signalling contact "tripped on short-circuit" b 1 signalling contact tripped LA1 LC010 2 1 1 0.280
1 LA1 LC012 0.220
1 block of 5 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts 2 contactor state 1 b 1 signalling contact "tripped on short-circuit" 1 b 1 signalling contact tripped 1 block of 4 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts 2 contactor state 1 b 1 signalling contact tripped, selectable+ by the user 1 block of 3 signalling contacts contactor state LD4 Mounted on LH side LD5 Mounted on LH side 1 control circuit isolating block (1 or 2 blocks per unit) 1 block of 3 signalling contacts contactor state 1 control circuit isolating block comprising 2 contacts 2
LA1 LC025 1 1
0.170
LA1 LC020
0.100
LA1 LC030
0.035
LA1 LB021
0.100
LA1 LC031
0.100
Complementary block with one instantaneous auxiliary contact

(IP 10) (1)
For use on Type and number of blocks per unit 1 block comprising 1 signalling contact contactor state Mounted on LH or RH side Composition Reference Weight kg
LD1, LD4 or LD5
N/O N/C C/O 1 LA1 LC001
0.035
(1) UL and CSA approved.
Characteristics: pages 1/144 to 1/151
1/157
References

Accessories
AUTO
+ TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
1/158
References

Accessories
Electrical tripping and reset devices

For use on Type and number per unit Time delay 0.2 s Instantaneous Instantaneous 24 V 50/60 Hz 42 V 50 Hz 48 V 50/60 Hz 100/127 V 50/60 Hz 200/240 V 50/60 Hz Basic reference To be completed by adding the control voltage code (1) LA1 LC070p LA1 LC072p LA1 LC071p LA1 LC052B LA1 LC052E Weight kg 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.320 0.320
LD1, LD4 1 undervoltage trip or LD5 fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 block or 1 shunt trip LD1, LD4 1 remote electrical or LD5 reset device fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 block
LA1 LC052F
0.320
LA1 LC052M
0.320
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/400 50 Hz B E F M U Q 60 Hz B E F F M M Q
415 N
440 N N
1/159
References

Accessories
AUTO
TRIP. +
Off
O
RESE
AUTO
TRIP. +
Off
O
RESE
AUTO
TRIP. +
Off
O
RESE
1/160
References

Accessories
Interface modules (1)

Mounting Type Control voltage c V 524 24 48 Operational voltage 50/60 Hz V 24240 24240 24240 Reference Weight kg 0.110 0.110 0.110
Solid state Relay output
LA1 LC180BD LA1 LC580BD LA1 LC580ED
Replacement coils and voltage converters (1)

Mounting For use on integral Operational voltage c (2) V 24 (4) Consumption Inrush Sealed W 250 W 4 Description Reference (3) Weight
LDp LCpppBD
Coil Converter
LX1 LC0249 LA1 LC080BD LX1 LC0489 LA1 LC080ED LX1 LC1109 LA1 LC080FD
kg 0.120 0.150 0.120 0.150 0.120 0.150
LDp LCpppED
48 (4)
250
Coil Converter
LDp LCpppFD
110
250
Coil Converter
Suppressor module
Mounting Type Operational voltage 50/60 Hz V y 250 Reference Weight kg 0.010
Clip-on
RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) (5)
LA9 D09982
(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters. (2) When used on rectified single-phase or 3-phase supply, the peak to peak ripple voltage must be equal to or less than 0.14 of the average voltage. Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 C. (3) It is essential that the voltage converter be associated with the specific coil indicated. (4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by Low level input. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the supply voltage (24 or 48 V). (5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
1/161
References

Accessories
Description Power terminal protection shrouds Sealing covers
For use on Upstream power terminals (L1, L2, L3) Protection module
Sold in lots of 5 1
Unit reference LA9 LC701 LA1 LC090
Weight kg 0.050 0.010
Mounting accessories
Description LA9 LC701 Mounting plates For use on LD1, LD4, LD5 Mounting on 2 x 32 mm 4 rails Reference LA9 LC010 Weight kg 0.150
1 x 75 mm 7 rail or 2 x 32 mm 4 rails Height compensation plate LA1 LC090 integral 32 (raises its front face to the same height as the integral 63)
LA9 LC012
0.450
Panel or LA9 LC011 mounting plate LA9 LD010
0.200
Separate component
Description Kit for lockable knob (LD1) For use on For converting a black, non-padlockable control knob to a padlockable knob Reference LA9 LC393 Weight kg 0.100

Type Adjustable from 0 to 185 mm (control knob mounted on plate or door) For use on LD1 Colour of knob Red Black LD4, LD5 Red Black Unit reference LA9 LC330 LA9 LC331 LA9 LC530 LA9 LC531 Weight kg 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400
1/162
References

a.c. operation
Rated control circuit voltages Uc 50 Hz Uc 60 Hz V V 24 24 42 48 LX1 LCppp 110 127 220/230 230 240 380/400 415/440 500 660 36 48 110/120 220/240 240 440/480 550/600 Average Inductance Voltage resistance at of closed code (1) 20 C 10 % circuit 1.125 1.78 2.92 5.56 7.10 29.51 37.15 54.28 117.4 168.2 168.72 203 515.1 581.8 741.2 1603 H 0.107 0.142 0.24 0.45 0.59 2.43 3.12 4.19 9.7 13 13 15.4 39 46 59 117 BC B CC D E FC F G MC M PU7 U Q N S Y Reference Weight
LX1 LC020 LX1 LC024 LX1 LC030 LX1 LC042 LX1 LC048 LX1 LC100 LX1 LC110 LX1 LC127 LX1 LC190 LX1 LC220 LX1 LC234 LX1 LC240 LX1 LC380 LX1 LC415 LX1 LC500 LX1 LC660
kg 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120
Consumption at 50 Hz: inrush (cos : 0.55) 150 to 200 VA; sealed (cos : 0.28) 10 to 16 VA. Consumption at 60 Hz: inrush (cos : 0.55) 170 to 230 VA; sealed (cos : 0.30) 12 to 18 VA.
d.c. operation
The integral 32 can operate on a d.c. supply when fitted with a special coil and corresponding voltage converter: see page 1/161. (1) Coil voltage reference code. Used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral unit.
1/163
Operation

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
A1
A2
A1
A2
5/L3
LD1
LD4

Auto
+0
U U U
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC010
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
LA1 LC012
LA1 LC025
LA1 LC001
98 41
LA1 LC020
13 23 31 14 24 32
13 23 31 14 24 32
LA1 LC030
(53) 63 (54) 64
53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54
08
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
98
13 23 31
Contact open Contact closed
96
ou
05
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
95
14 24 32
LD1
LD4
Off + control test function

13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
95
95
95
Off
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
42
41 42
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
95
95
On, contactor open

AUTO AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
95
95

AUTO AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
95
95
Off after overload

TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
95
95
Tripped on overload
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
95
95
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
95
95

TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
95
95
Manual reset
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
95
95
RESET
RESET
1/164
Operation

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LD5

Auto
+0
U U U
1
ou
A2 A1
A2
A1
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LC020
98 13 23 31
LC001 LC021
41 13 23 31
LA1
LA1
LA1 LC031
53 54 63 64
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
13 23 31
96 98
13 23 31
06 08
13 23 31
16 18
08
98
96
14 24 32
95
14 24 32
95
05
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
42
15
Contact closed Off + control test function

13 23 31 14 24 32
95
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
14 24 32
13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32
Contact open
ou
53 63 54 64
95
95
Off
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
53 63 54 64
95
95
On, reversing contactor open

AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
53 63 54 64
95
95
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
53 63 54 64
95
95
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
53 63 54 64
95
95
Tripped on overload
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
53 63 54 64
95
95
Off after overload

TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
53 63 54 64
95
95
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
53 63 54 64
95
95

TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
53 63 54 64
95
95
Manual reset
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
53 63 54 64
95
RESET
95
1/165
Characteristics

Type
integral 63
A V 3 63 690 1.2 million operating cycles 5 million operating cycles 3600 operating cycles/hour 600 operating cycles/hour
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3 Rated operational voltage (Ue) Electrical durability In AC-3 at 400 V Mechanical durability at Uc Maximum operating rate a at ambient temperature y 55 C c with converter
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC: 158-1, 204-1, 204-2, 364, 947-1/2 and 4 UTE: NF C 63-110, C 63-120, C 63-130, C 63-650, C 79-100, C 20-040 VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660 BS: 5424, 4752, 4941 NEN, NBN ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL NEMKO, NKK, VE, RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS TH - 20+ 60 - 40+ 80 - 25+ 50 - 25+ 70 Energised state: 3 gn De-energised state: 3 gn Energised state: 8 gn De-energised state: 8 gn IP 20B Protection against direct finger contact Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and decree of 22-12-81 (JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982) Conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072 3000 From main axis (left-right tilt)
Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration Shock resistance Permissible acceleration Degree of protection Flame resistance
Operation Storage c Operation (1) Storage 5100 Hz Impulse duration: 11 ms Conforming to IEC 60144 & 60529 Conforming to VDE 0106
C C C C

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Voltage limits at y 55 C Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz a 60 Hz c with converter Operation Drop-out a Inrush Sealed c (1) Inrush Sealed a 50/60 Hz c with converter "C" O "C" O V V V 24660 24600 24, 48, 110 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.7 Uc 375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz) 25 (50 Hz or 60 Hz) 300 for 50 ms 8 8 (50 Hz), 11 (60 Hz) 1235 720 2540 1525
(1) With converter. (2) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
1/166
Characteristics

Type
integral 63 y 40 C A Hz 63 4060 8 690 25 4.4
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency limits of the operational current Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Heat dissipation in the power circuits of the contactor breaker and its protection module Rated making capacity I rms I peak Rated breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2
Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V A Operational current W Power per pole, hot state
32 5
40 5.8
50 7
63 9
Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA Operational voltage Value of cos Cycle P1 (O-t-CO) Icu (1) Cycle P2 (O-t CO-t-CO) Ics (1) Icu = Ics V
12 or 15 x Ith (above this value. the breaker trips) 105 380/415 0.25 50 50 50 440 0.25 50 50 50 480/525 0.25 35 35 30 600/690 0.5 10 10 10
conforming to IEC 60947-6-2 ensuring reliability of operation Total breaking time Electrical durability in AC-3 at Ie max and at 415 V after 1 cycle O-CO-r-CO at Isc Thermal limit Cabling
220/240 0.25 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 kA rms 50
Prospective rms short-circuit current at terminals of a new device Millions of operating cycles With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable
ms kA
4 3
10
25
35
50
A2s
1 300 x 103 Maximum c.s.a. 1 x 50 or 2 x 35 2 x 25 1 x 50 6 LB1 LD03P Standard motors NF C 63-650 3 3 690 1363 10/1345/63 - 20+ 60 With
0.9
0.6
0.5
0.2
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m
Minimum c.s.a. 1x6 1x6 1x6
Tightening torque Module type Protection Conforming to standards Number of poles Number of protected poles Rated operational voltage Max. continuous current Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping class Instantaneous trip current setting range Tripping tolerance Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking

LB1 LD03M Standard motors NF C 63-650 3 3 690 1363 10/1345/63 20+ 60 With LB6 LD03M Frequent starting NF C 63-650 3 3 690 1363 20+ 60 Without 612 Irth max LB1 LD03L Distribution circuits NF C 63-120 3 3 690 1363 10/1345/63 20+ 60 Without 36 Irth max
Thermal protection
V A A C
20 20 Fixed at 15 Irth max 612 Irth max (usual setting 910 Irth maxi) 20 % 20 % IEC 60947 690 10 000 By 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, 8 mm shank
20 %
20 %

V Operating cycles

Operating cycles IEC 60947, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, VDE 0113 690 10 000 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, shank 8 mm max and 5 mm min. When flush mounting, interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible. (1) O: breaking short-circuit current (open), t: time CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open) V
1/167

Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Switching capacity Rated a category operational AC-15 (1) power Making capacity Rated c category operational DC-13 (2) power Making capacity Cabling
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 With U u 17 V and I u 10 mA Voltage 1 million operating cycles 1.5 million operating cycles a category AC-15 Voltage 1 million operating cycles 1.5 million operating cycles c category DC-13
A V mVA V VA VA VA V W W W mm2
6 690 600 48 110/127 300 500 160 300 1500 3500 24 48 120 90 70 50 800 700 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
220/240 600 330 6000 110 75 38 400
380/415 520 300 7500 220 68 33 260
440 500 280 7000 440 61 28 220
Signalling contacts
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operational power for 200 000 operating cycles a Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Voltage Resistive load Lamp load (3) Inductive load (4) Motor (5) Voltage Resistive load Lamp load (3) Inductive load (4) Motor (5) A V V VA VA VA VA V W W W W mm2 3 250 24 48 100 100 50 50 75 75 75 75 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1 110/127 600 90 875 160 110/125 50 6 50 6 220 750 125 500 200 200 50 7.5 50 7.5
Cabling
Isolating auxiliary contacts

Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947 and NF C 63-130 Cabling a.c. supply d.c. supply A V V mm2 6 690 125 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 1.5 or 1 x 2.5
(1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4). (2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time constant increasing with the load. (3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current. (4) Inductive load: cos 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation. (5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.
1/168
Characteristics

Type Used for control of the integral 32 Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Operation Isolation Cabling Min. Max. Operating limits Protection
Converters By a programmable controller, with d.c. control of the electromagnet Control on d.c. supply
C C kV mm 2 mm 2
- 25+ 70 - 25+ 50 rms voltage between inputs and outputs: 2.5 1x1 2 x 2.5 0.85...10.1 Uc Against reverse polarity (by diode) and against overvoltage LA1 LC 580BD
- 25+ 70 - 25+ 50 Common negative terminal 1x1 2 x 2.5 0.8...1.1 Uc (2) Against reverse polarity (by diode) and against overvoltage LA1 LC 080BD
Module or converter type
580ED
180BD
080ED
080FD

Schemes LA1 LCp580pD LA1 L p180BD
A1
LA1 Lp080BD LA1 Lp080ED

A1
LA1 L p080FD
+ E1
E2
+ E1
E2
+
A2
E1 (0V) E3 E2
A1 A2
(0V)
E1
A1 A2
A2
E2
Indication of input state Input signals Voltage (logic side) Current State 0 guaranteed State 1 guaranteed Supply voltage For U For I For U
V mA V mA V V
By LED c 24 c 48 (E1-E2) (E1-E2) 30 20 < 2.4 <2 > 20.4 < 4.8 <2 > 40.8
c 524 (E1-E2) 1524 V 8.55 V < 2.5 <2 >4
c 24 (E1-E2) 50 < 2.4 <2 > 20.4
c 48 (E1-E2) 25 < 4.8 <2 >4
c 524 (E1-E2) 1524 V 8.55 V < 2.5 <2 >4
c 24 (1) c 48 (1) (E3-E2) (E3-E2) 20 10 <7 <5 > 14 < 14 < 2.5 > 28 c 48 (2) (E1-E2) c 110 (2) (E1-E2)
c 24 (1) c 48 (1) (E3-E2) (E3-E2) 20 10 <7 <5 > 14 c 24 (2) (E1-E2) <14 < 2.5 > 28 c 48 (2) (E1-E2) c 110 (2) (E1-E2)
a a a a a a c 24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24 (2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (E1-E2)
Electrical durability in millions of operating cycles Average Inrush 50 Hz consumption 60 Hz c Sealed 50/60 Hz c Operating time Pull-in at 20 C Drop-out and at Uc 5 VA VA W VA W ms ms 160 185 12 1530 2235 160 185 12 1530 2235 160 185 12 1035 830 375 450 25 2040 2545 375 450 25 2040 2545 375 450 25 1045 830 1 250 4 30 15 250 4 30 15 250 4 30 15 300 8 35 20 300 8 35 20 300 8 35 20
(1) For direct control by external contact: connect E1-E3. (2) Warning: for supply from rectified a.c., the 2 following conditions must be met: the power supply must exceed 300 VA and the maximum ripple must be y 14 %.
1/169
Characteristics

Tripping and reset devices, coil suppressor module
Environment
Conforming to standards Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device
Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc
C C C
IEC 60337-1 TH - 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 - 25+ 70 Conforming to VDE 0106
Protection against direct finger contact
Tripping devices
Type Pull-in voltage Drop-out voltage Average consumption Minimum pulse time Uc Uc Inrush Sealed LA1 LC070p, LC072p 0.81.1 0.350.7 8 4 LA1 LC071p 0.71.1 8 4 10
VA VA ms
Reset devices
Type Consumption Duration of a reset cycle Minimum pulse duration VA s s LA1 LC052p 9 9 0.5
Suppressor module LA9 D09982

Type of protection Connection scheme Operational voltage V RC (resistor-capacitor)
y 250
1/170
Characteristics

Breaking capacity of integral 63 contactor breakers, according to the operational voltage and protection module fitted.
Breaking capacity
Protection module Reference Irth min A LBp LD03p16 10 LBp LD03p21 LBp LD03p22 LBp LD03p53 LBp LD03p55 LBp LD03p57 LBp LD03p61 13 18 23 28 35 45 Operational voltage 220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V max A 13 18 25 32 40 50 63 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130 kA u 130 u 130 u 130 50 50 50 50 kA u 130 u 130 50 50 50 50 50 500 V kA u 130 u 130 35 35 30 30 30 600/690 V kA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1/171

1
Motor protection (normal starting)

By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03P (1)
Time
300 min 100 min 10 13 18
23 28 35 45 63 25 32 40 50 irth P16 P21 P22 P53 P55 P57 P61
10 min 40 s
1 min
10 s
1s 195 375 270 0,1 s 600 480 750 945
0,01 s 6 10 15 20 30 40 54 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000

Current in A
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03M (1)
Time
300 min 100 min 10 13 18
23 28 35 45 63 25 32 40 50 irth M16 M21 M22 M53 M55 M57 M61
Thermal zone
10 min
1 min
10 s
Magnetic zone
1s
78
156 108 190
240 300 380
480 600 760
150 216
0,1 s
0,01 s 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 Current in A
(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves are for an ambient air temperature of 20 C, without prior current flow (cold state). The average operating times after prolonged current flow (hot state) can be calculated by applying the coefficient 0.5.
1/172

1
Motor protection (frequent starting)

By magnetic modules LB6 LD03M
Time
300 min 100 min
Thermal zone
10 min
1 min
10 s
Magnetic zone
1s 78 156 108 190 150 216 0,1 s 240 300 380 480 600 760
0,01 s 6 10 20 40 60 80 100 110 200 400 600 1000 2000

Current in A
Distribution circuit protection

By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03L
Time
300 min 100 min
25 32 40 50 18 23 28 35 45 63 irth L22 L53 L55 L57 L61
10 min
1 min
10 s
1s
75 95
0,1 s
150 190 120 240 150 300 190 380
0,01 s 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 Current in A
1/173

1
3-phase 400/415 V, 50 Hz Current limitation on short-circuit

100 80 60 40
= 0, 3
0,
25
20
=
0,
1 (1)
10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,1

os =
0,
0,2
0,4 0,3
4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A

1000 800 600 400
200
(1)
100 80 60 40
20
10 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
(1) LB1 LD03p22 to LD06p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.
1/174

1
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit (continued)

3-phase 480/500 V, 50 Hz Current limitation on short-circuit
1
= = 0, 3 0, 25
100 80 60 40 20
=
0,
1 (1)
10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,1

c os
0,
0,2
0,4 0,3
6 8 10 15 20
35 50
100
200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A Current limitation on short-circuit

1000 800 600 400
1
200
(1)
100 80 60 40
20
10 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 35 50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
(1) LB1 LD03 p22 to LD03p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.
1/175
References


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob 15 30 33 37 55 33 Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding for the control circuit voltage code (2) Ue y 415 V A 63 kA 50 LD1 LD030 p Weight
kg 3.700

LD1 LD030 p Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob (CNOMO, VDE 0113) 15 30 33 37 55 33 Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding for the control circuit voltage code (2) Ue y 415 V A 63 kA 50 LD4 LD130 p Weight
kg 3.800
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 15 30 33 37 55 63 50 33
LD4 LD030 p
3.800

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob (CNOMO, VDE 0113) 15 30 33 37 55 33 Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding for the control circuit voltage code (2) Ue y 415 V A 63 kA 50 LD5 LD130 p Weight
kg 7.600
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 15 30 33 37 55 63 50 33
LD5 LD030 p
7.600
LD5 LC030 p
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see page opposite. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 600 400 50 Hz B D E F M M U Q N N S 60 Hz c (4) BC BD CC CE ED K FD FC LC MC MC UX Q S
660 Y
(3) Variant: UL 508 type E approved version (SPCD) at 347/600 V; to order, add suffix H5 to the reference. Example: LD1 LD030MH5. (4) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing contactor breakers).
1/176
References

Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 480 V 440 V 525 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 9 11 15 22 25 33 9 11 15 22 25 33 11 15 18.5 25 33 40 Thermal Magnetic setting range protection (Irth min to Irth max) 600 V 690 V kW 10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55 Reference Weight
LB1 LD03Mpp
A 1013 1318 1825 2332 2840 3550 4563
LB1 LD03P16 LB1 LD03P21 LB1 LD03P22 LB1 LD03P53 LB1 LD03P55 LB1 LD03P57 LB1 LD03P61
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 480 V 440 V 525 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 9 11 22 22 25 33 9 11 22 22 25 33 11 15 25 25 33 40 Thermal Magnetic setting range protection (Irth min to Irth max) 600 V 690 V kW 10 15 18.5 33 33 45 55 Reference Weight
A 1013 1318 1825 2332 2840 3550 4563
A 78156 108216 150300 190380 240480 300600 380760
LB1 LD03M16 LB1 LD03M21 LB1 LD03M22 LB1 LD03M53 LB1 LD03M55 LB1 LD03M57 LB1 LD03M61
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
Magnetic only protection modules (for frequent starting motors)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 480 V 440 V 525 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 9 11 22 22 25 33 9 11 22 22 25 33 11 15 25 25 33 40 Magnetic protection Reference Weight
LB6 LD03Mpp
600 V 690 V kW 10 15 18.5 33 33 45 55
A 78156 108216 150300 190380 240480 300600 380760
LB6 LD03M16 LB6 LD03M21 LB6 LD03M22 LB6 LD03M53 LB6 LD03M55 LB6 LD03M57 LB6 LD03M61
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
(1) Protection modules UL and CSA approved.
1/177
Selection

Selecting the type of contactor breaker and protection module
Neutral point connection Neutral connection TNC (neutral and PE combined)
Type of circuit 3-pole + PEN
Equipment scheme
Combination contactor breaker + protection module LD1 LD030 p + LB1 LD03Lpp LD4 LD130 p + LB1 LD03Lpp LD4 LD030 p + LB1 LD03Lpp
PEN
Note: the PEN conductor must not be isolated, Neutral point Type of connection circuit Neutral connection TNS 3-pole (neutral and PE separated)
Equipment scheme
Combination contactor breaker + protection module LD1 LC030 p + LB1 LC03Lpp LD4 LC130 p + LB1 LC03Lpp LD4 LC030 p + LB1 LC03Lpp
Note: all live conductors must be isolated. Neutral protection optional.
1/178
References


Rated thermal current I th y 40 C A Black knob 63 Maximum operational current AC-1 y 40 C A 63 Maximum Breaking Number operational capacity (Iq) of poles voltage for Ue y 415 V V kA 690 50 3 Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight
kg LD1 LC030p 3.700

Rated Maximum Maximum thermal operational operational current I th current AC-1 voltage y 40 C y 40 C A A V Black knob (CNOMO. VDE 0113) 63 63 690 Breaking Number capacity (Iq) of poles for Ue y 415 V kA 50 3 Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight
kg LD4 LD130p 3.800
LD1 LD030p
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO. VDE 0113) Emergency Stop 63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD030p
3.800
Protection modules
Thermal setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) A 1013 1318 1825 LB1 LD03Lpp 2332 2840 3550 4563
(for customer assembly) Number of poles Number of protected poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Reference Weight
Magnetic setting range (36 Irth max) A 3978 54108 75150 95190 120240 150300 190380
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
LB1 LD03L16 LB1 LD03L21 LB1 LD03L22 LB1 LD03L53 LB1 LD03L55 LB1 LD03L57 LB1 LD03L61
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 400 50 Hz B D E F M M U Q N N 60 Hz BC CC CE K FC LC MC MC UX c (3) BD ED FD (3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.
480 Q
500 S
600 S
660 Y
1/179
References

Add-on blocks
AUTO
+ TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
AUTO
+ TRIP.
RESE
AUTO
+ TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
1/180
References

Add-on blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20) (1)

For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Composition Reference Weight kg
N/O N/C C/O LD1, LD4 1 block of 6 contacts comprising: or LD5 b 3 signalling contacts Mounted contactor state on RH side b 1 signalling contact control knob in any position other than Auto" b 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit b 1 signalling contact tripped LA1 LC010 2 1 1 0.280
1 LA1 LC012 0.220
1 block of 5 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts 2 contactor state 1 b 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit 1 b 1 signalling contact tripped 1 block of 4 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts 2 contactor state 1 b 1 signalling contact tripped, selectable by the user 1 block of 3 signalling contacts contactor state LD4 Mounted on LH side LD5 Mounted on LH side 1 control circuit isolating block (1 or 2 blocks per unit) 1 block of 3 signalling contacts contactor state 1 control circuit isolating block comprising 2 contacts 2
LA1 LC025 1 1
0.170
LA1 LC020
0.100
LA1 LC030
0.035
LA1 LB021
0.100
LA1 LC031
0.100
Complementary block with one instantaneous auxiliary contact

(IP 10) (1)
For use on LD1, LD4 or LD5 Type and number of blocks per unit 1 block comprising 1 signalling contact contactor state Mounted on LH or RH side Composition Reference Weight kg 0.035
N/O N/C C/O 1 LA1 LC001
(1) UL and CSA approved.
1/181
References

Accessories
AUTO
+ TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
1/182
References

Accessories
Electrical tripping and reset devices

For use on LD1, LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 block LD1, LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 add-on block Type and number of devices per unit 1 undervoltage trip Time delay 0.2 s Instantaneous or 1 shunt trip 1 remote electrical reset device Instantaneous 24 V 50/60 Hz 42 V 50 Hz 48 V 50/60 Hz 100/127 V 50/60 Hz 200/240 V 50/60 Hz Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control voltage code (1) LA1 LC070p LA1 LC072p LA1 LC071p LA1 LC052B LA1 LC052E Weight kg 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.320 0.320
LA1 LC052F
0.320
LA1 LC052M
0.320
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/400 50 Hz B E F M U Q 60 Hz B E F F M M Q
415 N
440 N N
1/183
References

Accessories
AUTO
+ TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
AUTO
+ TRIP.
RESE
AUTO
+ TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
1/184
References

Interface modules (1)

Mounting Type Control voltage c V 524 24 48 Operational voltage 50/60 Hz V 24240 24240 24240 Reference Weight
Solid state Relay output
LA1 LD180BD LA1 LD580BD LA1 LD580ED
kg 0.110 0.110 0.110
Replacement coils and voltage converters (1)

Mounting For use on integral Operational voltage c (2) V 24 (4) Consumption Inrush Sealed W 300 W 8 Description Reference (3) Weight
LDp LDpppBD
Coil Converter
LX1 LD0249 LA1 LD080BD LX1 LD0489 LA1 LD080ED LX1 LD01109 LA1 LD080FD
kg 0.300 0.150 0.300 0.150 0.300 0.150
LDp LDpppED
48 (4)
300
Coil Converter
LDp LDpppFD
110
300
Coil Converter
Suppressor module
Mounting Type Operational voltage 50/60 Hz V y 250 Reference Weight kg 0.010
Clip-on
RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) (5)
LA9 D09982
(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters. (2) When used on rectified single-phase or 3-phase supply, the peak to peak ripple voltage must be equal to or less than 0.14 of the average voltage. Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 C. (3) It is essential that the voltage converter be associated with the specific coil indicated. (4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by Low level input. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the supply voltage (24 or 48 V). (5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
1/185
References

Accessories
Description Power terminal protection shroud Sealing cover
For use on Upstream power terminals (L1, L2, L3) Protection module
Sold in lots of 5 1
Unit reference LA9 LD701 LA1 LC090
Weight kg 0.050 0.010
Description LA1 LC090 Mounting plate For use on LD1, LD4, LD5 Mounting on 1 x 75 mm 7 rail or 2 x 32 mm 4 rails Reference LA9 LD010 Weight kg 0.450

Type Adjustable from 0 to 185 mm with extension (control knob mounted on plate or door) For use on LD1 Colour of knob Red Black LD4, LD5 Red Black Unit reference LA9 LC330 LA9 LC331 LA9 LC530 LA9 LC531 Weight kg 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400
LA9 LD010
1/186
References

a.c. operation
Rated control circuit voltages Uc 50 Hz Uc 60 Hz V V 24 24 42 48 LX1 LDppp 110 127 220/230 240 380/400 415/440 500 660 36 48 110 115/120 220 230/240 440 460/480 575/600 Average Inductance Voltage resistance at of closed code (1) 20 C 10 % circuit 0.213 0.323 0.503 0.845 0.987 1.26 4.88 5.89 6.48 9.80 19.82 23.24 30.51 37.66 80.46 93.63 116.46 152.18 290.80 H 0.045 0.071 0.106 0.19 0.22 0.29 1 1.18 1.48 2.13 4.2 4.5 6.7 7.9 16.7 20 23.7 31 60 BC B CC CE D E K FC F G LC MC M U UX Q N S Y Reference Weight
LX1 LD020 LX1 LD024 LX1 LD030 LX1 LD040 LX1 LD042 LX1 LD048 LX1 LD090 LX1 LD100 LX1 LD110 LX1 LD127 LX1 LD180 LX1 LD190 LX1 LD220 LX1 LD240 LX1 LD360 LX1 LD380 LX1 LD415 LX1 LD500 LX1 LD660
kg 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300
Consumption at 50 Hz: inrush (cos : 0.55) 350 to 400 VA; sealed (cos : 0.28) 20 to 30 VA. Consumption at 60 Hz: inrush (cos : 0.55) 420 to 500 VA; sealed (cos : 0.30) 24 to 36 VA.
d.c. operation
The integral 63 can operate on a d.c. supply when fitted with a special coil and corresponding voltage converter: see page 1/185. (1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral unit.
1/187
Operation

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
A1
A2
A1
A2
5/L3
LD1
LD4

Auto
+0
U U U
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC010
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
LA1 LC012
LA1 LC025
LA1 LC001
98 41
LA1 LC020
13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32
LA1 LC030
(53) 63 (54) 64 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54
08
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
98
13 23 31
96
ou 05 14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 95 14 24 32 95
LD1
LD4
Off + control test function

13 23 31 14 24 32 16 18 15 0608 05 96 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 08 05 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 96 98 95 95 41 42
Off
13 23 31 14 24 32 16 18 15 0608 05 96 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 08 05 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 96 98 95 95 41 42 13 23 31 14 24 32
On, contactor open

AUTO AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
95
42
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32

AUTO AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
Off after overload

TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
Tripped on overload
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32

TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
Manual reset
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
RESET
RESET
1/188
Operation

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LD5

Auto
+0
U U U
1
ou
A1
A2
A2
A1
Auxiliary contacts
98 13 23 31
LA1 LC001
41
LA1 LC021
13 23 31 14 24 32
13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32
LA1 LC031
53 63 54 64
53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64
13 23 31
96 98
13 23 31
06 08
13 23 31
16 18
08
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
98
96
14 24 32
14 24 32
95
95
95
14 24 32
14 24 32
15
05
05
Contact closed Off + control test function
95
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
Off
13 23 31 14 24 32 16 18 15 06 08 05 96 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 08 05 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 96 95 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 41 42
On, reversing contactor open

AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
Tripped on overload
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
Off after overload

TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
Off after short-circuit TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
Manual reset
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
RESET
42
41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42
Contact open
ou
1/189
Dimensions

Control circuit: a.c. LD1 LB030 + LBp LB03P LD3 LB LD5 LB130 + LBp LB03P
Control circuit: d.c. LDp LBp30 + LBp LB03P + LA1 LB080
LA1 LB080
78,5
148,5
97,5
167,5
45 135
45 135
70
109,5 123 139
36 4,5 45
45 90 99
70
109,5
36 45
4,5
123
139

Control circuit: a.c. LDp LCp30 + LBp LC03 LDp LCp40 + LB1 LC0p Control circuit: d.c. LDp LCpp0 + LBp LC0p + LA1 LC080 LDp LCp30
45 135
4,5
LDp LCp40
LA1 LC080 68,5 45 74,5
LA1 LC080 68,5 45 74,5
100
100
99
188
160
99
89
88
88
89
188
160
109 123 155
=1 9 = = = 66
= 38 = 52 33 85
109 123 155
=1 9 = = = 66
= 38 = 52 33 85

Control circuit: a.c. LDp LDp30 + LBp LD03 Control circuit: d.c. LDp LDp30 + LBp LD03 + LA1 LD080
LA1 LD080
121,5
97,5
243
45 210
128,5
250
121,5
100,5
121,5
16,5
146 158,5 192
= 90
= 90

LD5 LCp30 + LBp LC03M

LD5 LDp30 + LBp LD03M
68,5 45 68,5 160
94
93
16,5 129,5
= 28 =
146 158,5 192
= 28 =
153,5
182
275
88
89
100,5
45 210
104,5
123 155
132 160,5 194 59 63 181 59 16,5 148 45
1/190
100,5
109
85
= 33
121,5
210
45

1
Current limiter
LA9 LB920
Add-on blocks
For mounting on contactor breakers integral 18 LA1 LB015 LA1 LB031 LA1 LB001 LA1 LB0311 LA1 LB034 LA1 LB0341 LA1 LB080BD LA4 D
2M4
146
103 115
LA1 LB001 LA1 LB015
6 53,5
51
12
11
12
12
b LA1 LB080BD 19 LA4 DA, DE, DF, DT 12 LA4 DL, DM, DR, DW 19
Add-on blocks
For mounting on contactor breakers integral 32 and 63 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC010 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC07p LA1 LC052 LA1 LC020 LA1 LC030 (1 or 2) LA1 LC025 LA LC001
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC070 LA1 LC071 LA1 LC072 26 51 12 9 9 12 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC025
13
11
11
Add-on blocks
For mounting on reversing contactor breakers integral 18 LA1 LB015 LA1 LB021, LB0211, LA1 LB001 LA1 LB080BD LA4 D
LA1 LB001 LA1 LB021, LB0211

b
b LA1 LB080BD 19 LA4 DA, DE, DF, DT 12 LA4 DL, DM, DR, DW 19 LA1 LC010 LA1 LC07pp LA1 LC052
LA1 LB001 LA1 LB015 11 12 12 11
Add-on blocks
For mounting on reversing contactor breakers integral 32 and 63 LA1 LC021, LC 025 LA1 LC031 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC020
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC021 LA1 LC025
LA1 LC031 LA1 LC021
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC012

11 13 12 26
13
11
26
51
12
1/191
Mounting

integral 18
78,5 148,5
On 35 mm 6 rail
On 32 mm 4 rails, at 145 mm centres
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
145
135
139
70
(AM1 DE200) 10
45
139
15
36
139
AF1 EA4
36
integral 18 with current limiter LA9 LB920

LH side Upstream
Several integral 18 units with current limiter LA9 LB920
integral 32
On 35 mm 6 rail On 32 mm 4 rails, at 170 mm centres On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
93
182
100 mini
LA9 LB930
170
160
DZ5 ME8
89
155
(AM1 DE200) 10
a 66 85 66 85 132
155
15
G 19 38 19 38 85
155
LCp30 LCp40 LCp30 LCp40 LCp30
AF1 EA4
G 19 38 19 38 85
LD1 LD1 LD4 LD4 LD5
LD1 LD1 LD4 LD4 LD5
LD1 LD1 LD4 LD4 LD5
integral 32 with current limiter LA9 LB920

LH side Upstream
integral 63
On 75 mm 6 rail, with mounting plate LA9 LD010 On 32 mm 4 rails, at 220 mm centres On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
137,5
266
210
100 mini
LA9 LD010
128,5
220
DZ5 ME9
c
a 266 266 282
33
b 137.5 137.5 153.5
G 75
c 192 192 194
4xM5
G 28 28 63
c
c 192 192 194
15
G 28 28 63
210
c
c 192 192 194
AF1 EA5
G 28 28 63
LD1 LD4 LD5
LD1 LD4 LD5
LD1 LD4 LD5 References integral 63 : pages 1/176 to 1/187
1/192
210
160
135
DZ5 ME8
Mounting

integral 18
With mounting plate LA9 LC010 On 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres
1
110
139
36
integral 32
With mounting plate LA9 LC010 On 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres With mounting plate LA9 LC012 On 35 mm 6 rail With mounting plate LA9 LC012 On 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres
120
LA9 LC012 120 110
LA9 LC012 DZ5 ME5 50
110 206
160
96
155
36 155 33
36
120
19 75
155
31
40
With height compensation plate LA9 LC011 (1) With mounting plate LA9 LD010 On 75 mm 6 rail
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
LA9 LD010
LA9 LC011
4xM5,5
160
160
210
155
37 33 75
28
155
37
28
(1) For raising the front face of the integral 32 to the same height as that of the integral 63.
integral 63
With mounting plate LA9 LD010 On 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres
LA9 LD010 DZ5 ME5 G
68
120
40
c
c 192 192 194
31
G 78 78 94
LD1 LD4 LD5
110
208
LA9 LC011
1/193
110
Mounting

integral 18 (contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers)
Flush mounting
Minimum electrical clearance

20
4 a
==
46
(2)
a1 a2 2
LD1 LB030 LD5 LB130 LA1 LB0pp 2 x LA1 LB0pp
a 46 100
a1 13.5
a2 27
(1)
(1) Centre of operating handle. (2) Fixing centre.

Flush mounting Minimum electrical clearance
a 66 66 85 85 122 a1 13 13 a2 51 51
a1 a2
LD1 LD4 LD1 LD4 LD5 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1
LC030 LCp30 LC040 LCp40 LCp30 LC010 LC012 LC010 + LA1 LC052 p LC012 + LA1 LC052 p
==
46
1 (2)
(3)
(1) Maximum door thickness for interlocking by LD4 and LD5. (2) Centre of operating handle. (3) Fixing centre.

Flush mounting Minimum electrical clearance
30
a a1 a2
References integral 32 : pages 1/152 to 1/163 References integral 63 : pages 1/176 to 1/187
4 (1)
(1) Maximum door thickness for interlocking by LD4 and LD5. (2) Centre of operating handle. (3) Fixing centre.
1/194
30
LD1 LD4 LD5 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1
LD030 LDp30 LDp30 LC010 LC012 LC010 + LA1 LC052 p LC012 + LA1 LC052 p
a 90 90 181
a1 13 13
a2 51 51
==
46
1 (2)
(3)
20
20
4 (1)
20
Mounting of accessories

integral 18
Adjustable door interlock mechanism LA9 LB33p
For mounting on LD1 LB030 + LBp LB03P pp, LD5 LB130 + LBp LB03Ppp LD1 LB030 + LBp LB03P pp Door drillings LD5 LB130 + LBp LB03Ppp
148,5
135
135
65
63,25
63,25
54
180340 == 45
36 =
90 = 99
= = 54
integral 32
Adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p
For mounting on LD4 LCp30 and LCp40, LD5 LCp30 LD4 LCp30 LD4 LCp40 LD5 LCp30 Door drillings
80
80
182
65
80
80
80
= = 54
54
170320
= 19 = = = 66
= 38 = 52 33 85
85 99 132
= 33
integral 63
Adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p
For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30 LD4 LDp30 LD5 LDp30 Door drillings
105
105
243
65
275
105
54
207357 (LD4) 209359 (LD5)
= 28 = = 90 = 59 63 181
105
45 59
105
= = 54
= = 54
= = 54
= = 54
1/195
Schemes

Contactor breakers integral 18 with protection module LBp
Reversing contactor breakers integral 18 with protection module LBp

LD5 LB130 + LB1 LB03P
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Current limiter LA9 LB920 + contactor breakers integral 18 with protection module LBp
LD1 LB030 + LB1 LB03P
1/L1 3/L2 3/L2 4/T2 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3
LD1 LB030 + LB1 LB03P, LD3 LB130Mpp

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A1
A2
A1
A1
A2
A2
II
I A1 A2
6/T3
2/T1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
4/T2
Add-on blocks
For contactor breakers LD1 and LD3 Mounted on LH side For contactor breakers LD1 and LD3 and reversing contactor breakers LD5 Mounted on RH side
Breaker
LA1 LB034 05 07
LA1 LB031
Short-circuit signalling
LA1 LB015 13 23 31
LA1 LB001 41
14
24
32
06
08
Trip signalling
95
15
17
15
17
Signalling
96
16
18
16
18
Control knob position
For reversing contactor breakers LD5 Mounted on LH side

Breaker
LA1 LB0341 05 07
LA1 LB0311
LA1 LB001 41
LA1 LB021 13 23 31
98
97
Auto 0
Contacts incorporated in unit
06
08
42
14
24
32
42
05
07
15
17
15
17
Auto 0 06 08
Signalling
16
18
16
18
15
17
Auto 0
Signalling
16
18
Breaker
LA1 LB001 41
LA1 LB0211 13 23 31
Contacts incorporated in unit
42
14
24
32
05
07
06
08
15
17
Auto 0
Signalling Control knob position
Dimensions : pages 1/190 to 1/195
1/196
16
18
2/T1
1/L1
Schemes


LD5 LCp30 + LB1 LC03M
3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LD1 LC0p0 + LB1 LC0pp

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 N1
LD4 LCpp0 + LB1 LC0pp

1/L1 N1
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
N2
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
4/T2
LB6 LC03M
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 N2
LB6 LC03M
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
Current limiter LA9 LB920 + contactor breakers integral 32 with protection module LBp
LDp LCp30 + LB1 LC03Mpp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
A1
A2
2/T1
4/T2
Add-on blocks
For contactor breakers LD4 Mounted on LH side
Isolator
6/T3
5/L3
For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5 Mounted on RH side
Breaker
LA1 LC030 (64) (63) 54 53 53
LA1 LC010 13 23 31
LA1 LC012 13 23 31
LA1 LC020 13 23 31
LA1 LC025 13 23 31
6/T3
LB1 LC05L
6/T3
N2
A2 14 24 32 98 95 95
or
LA1 LC001 41 42
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
54
96
98
98
1 or 2 LA1 LC030
Trip signalling
32

06
08
95
LA1 LC001 41
LA1 LC021 13 23 31
42
14
24
32
16
Control knob position signalling
53
54
64
63
15
LA1 LC031
Isolator
18
Auto
+0
05
05
08
95
96
or
A1
1/197
Schemes


LD5 LDp30 + LB1 LD03M or LD03P
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
5/L3
LD1 LD030 + LB1 LD03p

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LD4 LDp30 + LB1 LD03p

1/L1 A1 A2 3/L2
A1
A2
A1
Q1
Q1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A2
2/T1
4/T2
LB6 LD03M
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
LB6 LD03M
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
Add-on blocks
For contactor breakers LD4 Mounted on LH side
Isolator
For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5 Mounted on RH side
Breaker
LA1 LC030 (64) (63) 54 53 53
LA1 LC010 13 23 31
LA1 LC012 13 23 31
LA1 LC020 13 23 31
LA1 LC025 13 23 31
6/T3
A2 14 24 32 98 95 95
or
LA1 LC001 41 42
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
54
96
98
98
1 or 2 LA1 LC030
Trip signalling
32

LA1 LC001 41 LA1 LC021 13 23 31
06
08
42
14
24
32
16
LA1 LC031 53 63
Isolator
54
64
1/198
15
18
Auto
+0
05
05
08
95
95
96
or
A1
Schemes

Tripping devices (1) for LD1, LD4, LD5

LA1 LC071
C1
Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD1 to LD5

LA1 LC052p
LA1 LC070, LC072

D1
U< C2 D2
TRIP + RESET
The use of instantaneous auxiliary contact block LA1 LC020 prevents the use of tripping devices or electrical reset devices
B4 B2 B3
B1
(1) For contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers already fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 instantaneous auxiliary contact block.
Interface modules
LA4 DW solid state
E1 + E2
LA4 DF relay output

E1 + E2
LA4 DL relay output (with manual override)

E1 + E2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
LA1 LC180, LD180

A1
LA1 LC580, LD580

A1
+ E1
E2
A2
+ E1
E2
A2
Voltage converters LA1 LB080, LC080, LD080 (supplied with contactor breakers for c control circuit operation )
Switching by control contact 24 or 48 V
E1 E1
Switching by Low level input 24 or 48 V

E1
Low level input
+
(0V)
A1
+
(0V)
A1
Supply
A2
A1
E3
E3 E2 A2 E2 A2
A2
(0V)
E2

LA4 DT On-delay LA4 DR Off-delay

LA4 DMp
B2
A2
A1
A1
A2
A1
AUTO/ MAN I/O
A1
A1
A2
A2
A1
B1
(1)
(1) PLC
A2
A2
1/199
Presentation, characteristics

1
Adaptors for use with busbar systems
Presentation
Reducing the installation time of components is an important factor that also increases productivity. The comprehensive range of adaptors and mounting accessories allows this objective to be achieved. There are numerous advantages: b saving of space in enclosures, b reduced size of enclosures, b reduced wiring time, b increased protection of personnel against accidental direct contact (IP 20) through the use of insulated mounting rails, b flexibility and modularity of equipment, b reliable operation of the equipment with easier maintenance. Description Power distribution is achieved by a 3-pole or 5-pole busbar system. The adaptors clip directly onto the busbar system, providing instantaneous electrical connection. Busbar system pitch: 40 or 60 mm. These adaptors allow mounting of motor starter components such as: b GV2 ME, GV2 P or GV3 ME motor circuit-breakers, b model k and model d contactors up to 38 A, b integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers, They are available in different sizes to allow easy installation of varying component combinations. These adaptors can be used in conjunction with interface modules communicating with an AS-Interface cabling system. This enables motor starters to be set up on an AS-Interface cabling system, bringing all the advantages of the 2 technologies.
LA9 Z32199
General characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Temperature resistance Rated frequency of current Rated operational current Depending on type of busbar and at 35 C Coefficient K to be applied according to ambient temperature Rated insulation voltage Rated operational voltage Rated permissible With insulated busbar support peak current Busbar dimensions Rated current Maximum let-through energy Support fixing, by screws Cabling, by connectors Flexible cable with cable end Multi-strand cable Solid cable Tightening torque C Hz mm A C K V V mm kA A2s mm IEC 60439 IP 20 with insulated mounting rail LA9 Z098pp 120 50/60 12 x 5 12 x 10 15 x 5 20 x 5 20 x 10 25 x 5 200 360 250 320 520 400 35 40 45 50 55 60 1 0.9 0.75 0.65 0.55 0.35 690 conforming to IEC 60947-1 and NF C 20-040 690 LA9 Z11098 and Z11099 LA9 Z11100 and Z11101 12 x 5 12 x 10 12 x 5 12 x 10 20 x 10 35 35 30 35 35 1 x 108 4 x 108 1 x 108 11 x 108 11 x 108 4x6 4x5 LA9 Z11103 LA9 Z11104 Min. Max. Min. Max. 4 35 16 70 4 35 16 70 4 35 1x6 1 x 10
30 x 5 450
30 x 10 630
30 x 5 30 x 10 45 55 6.2 x 108 24.8 x 108 LA9 Z11105 Min. Max. 120 120 35 120 3 x 12
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Characteristics of adaptors for use with busbar systems

Adaptor type LA9 Z 32196 32228 23229
(3-phase)
32199 32343, 32344 32345 32200 40132, 60132 32208 to 210 40232, 60232 32232 32253 32248 32249
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Conductor c.s.a. (colour: black) Type of conductor insulation Permissible current Rated insulation voltage Rated peak current Maximum let-through energy
mm2
A V kA A2s
IP 20 4 6 6 10 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 10 AWG 8 PVC 105 C 25 32 32 63 690 conforming to NF C 20-040 and IEC 60947-1 6 6 6 10 2 x 105 2 x 10 5 2 x 105 3 x 105
16 80 10 3 x 105
2.5 AWG 22/14 15 250
1/200
Characteristics

Short-circuit resistance
Determining the spacing between busbar supports (1)

Busbar system with 40 mm pitch
Peak current Ipk (kA)
Busbar system with 60 mm pitch

Peak current Ipk (kA)
50
70
40
12 x 5 and 12 x 10
60 30 x 10 50 30 x 5
30
20
40
12 x 10 and 20 x 10
10
30
12 x 5
0 200 300 400 500 Busbar support fixing centres (mm) 600
20 200 300 400 500 Busbar support fixing centres (mm) 600
(1) Depending on the prospective short-circuit current
Current capacity of busbars

For an ambient temperature of 35C and a busbar temperature of 65C
C.s.a. Permissible current mm2 A 12 x 5 200 15 x 5 250 20 x 5 320 25 x 5 400 30 x 5 450 12 x 10 360 20 x 10 520 30 x 10 630
If the above climatic conditions are modified, consult the chart below to find the correction factor K 2 to be applied.
C 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Ambient temperature Factor K2 2,2
2,1 2,0 1,9 1,8 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1 1,0 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
95 100 105 110 115 120 125 Busbar temperature (C)
Example: in normal operating conditions, a set of 30 x 10 tinned busbars can withstand a continuous load of 630 A. 800 A ). It follows that the temperature rise of the busbars will be For a load of 800 A, the correction coefficient K 2 to be applied will be 1.3 ( 630 A 82.5 C.
References : pages 1/202 to 1/209 Dimensions : pages 1/210 and 1/211
1/201
40 mm : LA9 Z32228 60 mm : LA9 Z32229
GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z32196
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06K12
40 mm : LA9 Z32199 60 mm : LA9 Z32200
GV2 ME, GV2 P 40 mm : LA9 Z40132 60 mm : LA9 Z60132
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC1 D09D38
LC1 D09D38
1/202
References

Adaptors for busbar systems with 40 mm pitch - non-reversing

Motor starter type Operational current AC-3 440 V A 12 Width x height of adaptor mm 45 x 139 45 x 182 32 45 x 182 54 x 182 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1, LP4 K06K12 or GV2 P GV2 ME + LC1 D09D38 or GV2 P
4 4 4 4
LA9 Z32196 LA9 Z32228 LA9 Z40132 LA9 Z32199
kg 0.788 0.984 0.984 1.144

Motor starter type Operational current AC-3 440 V A 12 Width x height of adaptor mm 45 x 182 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
LA9 Z32229
kg 0.984
32
45 x 182 54 x 182
4 4
LA9 Z60132 LA9 Z32200
0.984 1.220
1/203
60 mm : LA9 Z32210
GV2 ME, GV2 P 40 mm : LA9 Z32232
GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z32208 60 mm : LA9 Z32209
GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z40232 60 mm : LA9 Z60232
GV2 ME, GV2 P LC2 D09D38
LC2 D09D38
1/204

Adaptors for busbar systems with 40 mm pitch - reversing

LA9 Z32232
kg 0.788
32
90 x 182 135 x 182
4 1
LA9 Z40232 LA9 Z32208
1.884 0.638

LA9 Z32210
kg 1.868
32
90 x 182 135 x 182
4 1
LA9 Z60232 LA9 Z32209
1.948 0.651
1/205
60 mm : LA9 Z32343
60 mm : LA9 Z32253
LD1 LB, LC, LD4 LC
GV3 ME
60 mm : LA9 Z32344
60 mm : LA9 Z32345
LD5 LB, LC
LD1 LD, LD4 LD
1/206


Motor starter type Operational current AC-3 440 V A 18 32 63 80 Width x height of adaptor mm 67.5 x 182 67.5 x 182 108 x 244 72 x 182 Reference Weight kg 0.590 0.590 0.887 0.347
integral LD1 LB integral LD1, LD4 LC integral LD1, LD4 LD GV3 ME
LA9 Z32343 LA9 Z32343 LA9 Z32345 LA9 Z32253

Type of starter Operational current AC-3 440 V A 18 32 Width x height of adaptor mm 135 x 182 135 x 182 Reference Weight kg 1.001 1.001
integral LD5 LB integral LD5 LC
LA9 Z32344 LA9 Z32344
1/207
LA9 Z11099 LA9 Z11098
LA9 Z11103 LA9 Z32936
LA9 Z32ppp LA9 Z098pp
LA9 Z11098
LA9 Z11099
LA9 Z11100 LA9 Z32248 LA9 Z32249 LA9 Z91413 LA9 Z11105 LA9 Z32ppp LA9 Z098pp
LA9 Z11101
LA9 Z11102
60 mm
LA9 Z11100 LA9 Z11118 LA9 Z11101
LA9 Z11104
LA9 Z32248 LA9 Z32249
LA9 Z11105
1/208
40 mm

Accessories for busbar sets with 40 mm pitch

Description Busbar system supports (1) 3-pole 3-pole + N + T Insulated rails (length 1 m) For busbars, thickness 5 mm For busbars, thickness 10 mm Connector Protective cover Side module, 13.5 x 182 mm Plug-in terminal blocks on LA9 Z32ppp (7-pole) Capacity 35 mm 2 For connector LA9 Z11103 For increasing the width of the adaptor Width 54 mm Width 45 mm Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 50 1 4 1 1 Unit reference LA9 Z11098 LA9 Z11099 LA9 Z09818 LA9 Z09820 LA9 Z11103 LA9 Z91413 LA9 Z32936 LA9 Z32248 LA9 Z32249 Weight kg 1.040 1.400 0.420 0.940 2.300 0.160 0.472 0.066 0.055
Accessories for busbar sets with 60 mm pitch

Description Busbar system supports (1) 3-pole 3-pole + N Insulated terminal shroud 3-pole 4-pole Insulated rails (length 1 m) For busbars, thickness 5 mm For busbars, thickness 10 mm Connectors Capacity 70 mm 2 3-pole capacity 120 mm2 Protective cover Plug-in terminal blocks on LA9 Z32ppp (7-pole) For connector LA9 Z11104 Width 54 mm Width 45 mm Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 1 1 1 1 Unit reference LA9 Z11100 LA9 Z11101 LA9 Z11102 LA9 Z11118 LA9 Z09819 LA9 Z09820 LA9 Z11104 LA9 Z11105 (2) LA9 Z91413 LA9 Z32248 LA9 Z32249 Weight kg 2.100 2.660 0.310 0.380 0.800 0.940 1.875 0.719 0.160 0.066 0.055
(1) For dimensions and rated operational current, see pages 1/200 and 1/201. (2) Supplied complete with protective cover
1/209
Dimensions

Motor starter combinations for customer assembly
Dimensions
GV2 ME or P + LC p, LPp K
GV2 ME or P + LCp D
e1
40/60 40/60
e1
40/60 40/60
a c
40/60 40/60
e1
Motor starter combinations, non-reversing

Motor starter type a b 40 mm system c a c or LC(1) 125 125 145 125 145 139 142 146 146 131 142 140 142 145 125 145 139 142 146 146 137 142 146 146 Adaptor reference LA9 Z32196 LA9 Z32196 LA9 Z32228 LA9 Z32228 LA9 Z40132 LA9 Z40132 LA9 Z40132 LA9 Z40132 LA9 Z32199 LA9 Z32199 LA9 Z32199 LA9 Z32199 60 mm system c a c or LC(1) 135 155 149 152 156 156 141 152 150 152 135 155 149 152 156 156 147 152 156 156 e1 Other 195 225 250 180 Adaptor reference LA9 Z32229 LA9 Z32229 LA9 Z60132 LA9 Z60132 LA9 Z60132 LA9 Z60132 LA9 Z32200 LA9 Z32200 LA9 Z32200 LA9 Z32200 LA9 Z32343 LA9 Z32343 LA9 Z32345 LA9 Z32253 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 33 33 33 33 33 33 50 50
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 GV2 P + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 GV2 ME + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 GV2 P + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 GV2 ME + LC1 D09 to D18 GV2 P + LC1 D09 to D18 GV2 ME + LC1 D25 to D38 GV2 P + LC1 D25 to D38 GV2 ME + LC1 D09 to D18 GV2 P + LC1 D09 to D18 GV2 ME + LC1 D25 to D38 GV2 P + LC1 D25 to D38 integral 18 LD1 integral 32 LD1, LD4 integral 63 LD1, LD4 GV3 ME (1) LC = Low Consumption
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 54 54 54 54 68 68 108 72
152 152 184 184 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 184 184 244 182
X electrical clearance GV2 ME GV2 P integral 18 or 32 integral 63 GV3 ME
Ue y 415 V 40 40 30 20 40
Ue = 440 V 40 80 20 20 40
Ue = 500 and 600 V 40 120 30 20 50
1/210

Motor starter combinations for customer assembly
Dimensions
GV2 ME or P + LC2, LP2 K integral
1
60 e1 60
40/60 40/60
e1
a c a
Motor starter combinations, reversing

Motor starter type a b 40 mm system c a c or LC(1) 125 125 145 139 142 146 146 131 142 140 142 145 139 142 146 146 137 142 146 146 125 145 Adaptor reference LA9 Z32232 LA9 Z32232 LA9 Z40232 LA9 Z40232 LA9 Z40232 LA9 Z40232 LA9 Z32208 LA9 Z32208 LA9 Z32208 LA9 Z32208 LA9 Z32232 LA9 Z32232 60 mm system c a c or LC(1) 135 155 149 152 156 156 141 152 150 152 135 155 149 152 156 156 147 152 156 156 135 155 e1 LD5 195 195 Adaptor reference LA9 Z32210 LA9 Z32210 LA9 Z60232 LA9 Z60232 LA9 Z60232 LA9 Z60232 LA9 Z32209 LA9 Z32209 LA9 Z32209 LA9 Z32209 LA9 Z32210 LA9 Z32210 LA9 Z32344 LA9 Z32344 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 33 33 33 33 40 40 40 40 33 33
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 GV2 P + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 GV2 ME + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 GV2 P + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 GV2 ME + LC2 D09 to D18 GV2 P + LC2 D09 to D18 GV2 ME +LC2 D25 to D38 GV2 P + LC2 D25 to D38 GV2 ME + LC2 D09 to D18 GV2 P + LC2 D09 to D18 GV2 ME + LC2 D25 to D38 GV2 P + LC2 D25 to D38 GV2 ME + LP5 K06 to K12 GV2 P + LP5 K06 to K12 GV2 ME + LP5 K06 to K12 GV2 P + LP5 K06 and K12 integral 18 LD5 integral 32 LD5 (1) LC = Low Consumption
90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 135 135 135 135 90 90 90 90 135 135
150 150 184 184 200 200 200 200 203 203 201 201 150 150 184 184 184 184
1/211
Selection guide
Installation system
TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components
Functions
Assembly and connection of motor starter components with spring terminals, without using tools
1
Product type Power circuit pre-wiring components Control-command pre-wiring components
For contactors
TeSys d
Type of starter
Direct and reversing
Direct
Reversing
Coil control
Yes
No
Yes
No
Use with motor starters
Limited to 60 A (Ith)
Limited to 8 starters (1)
Number of motor starters
Type of connection or bus
Number of channels
References
LAD 3p
LAD 9AP3pp
Pages (1) With upstream terminal block LAD 3B1.
1/219
1/221
1/212
Communication with the processing part
1
Splitter box Parallel interface module, with Advantys STB network interface modules
8 starters per splitter box
4 starters per module
HE 10
Modbus Plus, Fipio, CANopen, Ethernet TCP/IP, Profibus DP INTERBUS, DeviceNet
16 inputs/12 outputs
LU9 G02
STB EPI 2145
1/221
1/213
Presentation
Installation system
TeSys Quickfit is a modular system which standardises and simplifies setting up of motor starters with its pre-wired control and power circuits. Installation of a motor starter is therefore quick, simple, safe and flexible. In addition, this system: b enables the motor starter to be customised at a later date, b reduces maintenance time and b optimises panel space by reducing the number of terminals and intermediate interfaces and the amount of ducting.
System for motor starters with spring terminals, from 0 to 25 A (up to 11 kW/400 V)
The motor starters concerned are those formed by combining: - GV2 ME circuit-breakers, with an operating limit of 80% of maximum current at 60C ambient temperature, up to 690 V - 9 to 25 A model d contactors (LC1). This range comprises pre-wiring components for: b the power circuits, b the control circuits. Power circuit pre-wiring components b a power circuit connection kit comprising, for each starter, a plate for mounting the contactor and the circuit-breaker and two power connection modules, b a power splitter box for 2 or 4 starters, b an upstream terminal block for a power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2), b an outgoing terminal block for connection of the motor power supply cables and the earth cables (6 mm 2). Control circuit pre-wiring components b a control circuit connection module which plugs directly into the contactor and the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module incorporates status and control data for this motor starter. b a parallel wiring module which concentrates the data of each motor starter: v HE 10 connector, for centralised applications. Data is transmitted to the plc via the Advantys Telefast pre-wired system. v STB, designed for decentralised automation architectures. This module is suitable for use in an Advantys STB configuration for connection to the plc via a field bus.
Description: pages 1/216 and 1/217
References: pages 1/218 to 1/221
Dimensions: pages 1/224 and 1/225
Schemes : pages 1/226 and 1/227
1/214
Presentation (continued)
Installation system
Control/command
HE 10 connection
Automation platform
1
LU9 G02
TSXCDPpp ABFH20pp
Connection on bus using Advantys STB (1)

Configuration example (for motor starter applications only): Power supply module Module STB PDT 3100 Connection base STB XBA 2200 Terminal block STB XTB 1130 Parallel interface module (2) Module STB EPI 2145 Connection base STB XBA 3000 Network interface module (3) CANopen STB NCO 1010 (4) Fipio STB NFP 2210 Ethernet TCP/IP STB NIP 2210 InterBus STB NIB 1010 (4) Profibus DP STB NDP 1010 (4) DeviceNet STB NDN 1010 (4) Modbus Plus STB NMP 2210 Terminal block STB WTS 2120
2 Network interface module 3 Power supply module 4 Parallel interface module
TeSys Quickfit LAD 9AP3 pp used with modules APP1 Cpp
5 TeSys Quickfit module 6 Adapter plate APP 2CX 7 Splitter box LU9 G02 for eight direct motor starters with channel connections on the APP 1C module side by two HE 10 connectors (20-way) and on the TeSys Quickfit side, by eight RJ45 connectors. 8 Connection cable APP 2AH40H060
The motor starter is connected to an APP 1Cp module 4 using an adapter plate APP 2CX 5 and a connecting cable APP 2AH40H060 7. Information is available on the module for each motor starter: b 1 output: motor control, b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status.
(1) Please consult our catalogue IP 20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB. (2) For 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters. (3) Reference to be selected according to the network used. (4) Optimised version. Description: pages 1/216 and 1/217 Characteristics : pages 1/222 and 1/223 References: pages 1/218 to 1/221 Dimensions: pages 1/224 and 1/225 Schemes : pages 1/226 and 1/227
1/215
Description
Installation system
Components with spring terminals
Power components
Power kits LAD 3p Each motor starter requires a power kit which consists of a plate 1 and two Quickfit technology power connection modules 2. The plate is used for mounting TeSys d contactors 3 (9 to 25 A, direct or reversing, with spring terminals and fitted with a.c. or d.c. coil) and the GV2 ME circuit-breaker 4 only. This plate is mounted on two 35 mm 7 rails or is screwed onto a base plate. The two power connection modules 2a and 2b are identical, whatever the rating of the contactor up to 25 A. The upper power connection module 2a connects the power between the splitter box and the circuit-breaker. The lower power connection module 2b connects the power between the circuit-breaker and the contactor. Splitter box LAD 32p Splitter boxes 5 are available for 2 or 4 starters. They can be combined to create motor starters up to 60 A per power supply. A reversing starter occupies a width equivalent to that of two direct starters. Direct supply of power to the splitter boxes is possible up to 25 A (4 mm 2). Upstream terminal block LAD 3B1 The upstream terminal block 6 performs two functions: b power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2), b power supply between two connected splitter boxes. The upstream terminal block connects to the splitter box using Quickfit technology. It is positioned on the splitter box or straddling two splitter boxes and takes up a width equivalent to two motor starters. Outgoing terminal block LAD 331 The outgoing terminal block 7 performs two functions: b connection of the motor power supply cables up to 6 mm 2, b connection of the motor earth cables. In addition, the terminal block enables quick connection and disconnection for maintenance, avoiding the risk of phase reversal. The outgoing terminal block connects to the downstream spring terminals on the contactor, using Quickfit technology.
2a
2b 3
Presentation: pages 1/214 and 1/215
Schemes: pages 1/226 and 1/227
1/216
Description (continued)
Installation system
Control/command components
1
Control circuit connection modules LAD 9 AP3 pp The control circuit connection module 1 plugs directly into the control terminals on the contactor and on the GV2 circuit-breaker, in the location provided for the front-mounting block. It is compatible with all contactor ratings up to 25 A. Mechanical locking 2 of the system onto the top of the contactor ensures a perfect connection, whatever the operating conditions (vibrations, knocks etc.). These modules are available in 4 versions: for direct or reversing starter, with or without contactor coil interface relay. The coil control can be a.c. or d.c., up to a 250 V and c 130 V. The version without relay is designed to control the contactor coils with no interface, at 24 V d.c. The version with relay has an auxiliary power supply for supply to the contactor. Module LAD9 AP3 pp incorporates, in its lower part, several external connectors: 3 RJ45 connector, for connecting the automation system. 4 2-way connector, for connecting the contactor power supply (only on versions with relay). 5 2-way connector, for connecting an external contact in series with the contactor coil (supplied complete with shunt). Parallel wiring modules The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect motor starters which incorporate TeSys Quickfit technology to the processing unit (PLC) quickly and without any need for tools. The parallel wiring module provides status and command information for each motor starter. Control connection modules LAD9 AP3 pp are connected to the parallel wiring modules using cables RJ45 LU9Rpp 6, which are available in different lengths. The following information is available for each motor starter: b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status, b 1 output: contactor coil control. A direct motor starter uses one RJ45 channel. A reversing motor starter uses two RJ45 channels.
Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G02
3 4 5
This module 7 enables connection of up to 8 direct or 4 reversing motor starters directly to the I/O modules of PLCs. It is used with the Advantys Telefast pre-wired system (1). This splitter box is optimised for use with card TSX DMZ28DTK.
Dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 (2)
This module enables 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters to be connected via the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution. With STB network interface modules, motor starters can be connected to the following communication networks: Modbus Plus, Fipio, CANopen, Ethernet TCP/IP, Profibus DP, INTERBUS, DeviceNet
(1) Please refer to our Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies catalogue. (2) Please consult our IP 20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB catalogue.
Characteristics: pages 1/222 and 1/223
1/217
1/218
References
Installation system
503797
Power circuit pre-wiring components

Description Upstream terminal block Description LAD 3B1 Power splitter box, 60 A Description Maximum connection c.s.a. 16 mm2 (1) Extension by LAD 32p Application Power supply of 1 or 2 power splitter boxes Number of starters 2 4 Kit composition Sold in lots of 1 Reference LAD 3B1 Reference LAD 322 LAD 324 Reference Weight kg 0.212 Weight kg 0.120 0.240 Weight kg 0.078
510365
Direct starter
LAD 324 Power connection kit 1 plate LAD 311 for GV2 ME and 2 power connection modules LAD 341 LAD 252
Reversing starter
563641
To build a reversing starter, order 2 kits LAD 252 Description Outgoing terminal block Description Maximum connection c.s.a. 6 mm2 Application Connection of motor cables No. of starters 1 1 Sold in lots of 10 Sold in lots of 10 10 Reference LAD 331 Unit reference LAD 311 LAD 341 Weight kg 0.050 Weight kg 0.042 0.018
Plate for mounting a GV2 ME circuit-breaker and a contactor Power connection module LAD 252
(1) Cables with one end pre-crimped are available to allow fast connection. References: 1 set of 3 x 6 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B061, length 2 m: LAD 3B062 and length 3 m: LAD 3B063 , 1 set of 3 x 10 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B101, length 2 m: LAD 3B102 and length 3 m: LAD 3B103 , 1 set of 3 x16 mm2 (length 1 m: LAD 3B161, length 2 m: LAD 3B162 and length 3 m: LAD 3B163.
563643
LAD 331
1/219
1/220
Installation system
503847
Control-command pre-wiring components

Description Control connection modules TeSys d coil voltage a 12... 250 V or c 5.... 130 V c 24 V Type of coil control relay Electromechanical Without relay Type of starter Direct Reversing Direct Reversing Reference LAD 9AP31 r LAD 9AP32 r LAD 9AP3D1 r LAD 9AP3D2 r Weight kg 0.150 0.200 0.140 0.190
Parallel wiring modules (c 24 V)

Description Splitter box LAD 9AP3p Description Advantys STB parallel interface module Connectors PLC side 2 x HE 10 20-way Connectors PLC side Reference Motor starter side 8 x RJ45 LU9 G02 Weight kg 0.260
Reference Motor starter side 4 x RJ45 STB EPI 2145
Weight kg 0.165
Connection cables
Between the control connection module and the splitter box LU9 G02 or STB EPI 2145
Connectors 2 x RJ45 connectors Length m 0.3 1 3 Reference LU9 R03 LU9 R10 LU9 R30 Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125
Between splitter box LU9 G02 and the PLC

Type of connection PLC side HE 10 20-way Gauge Splitter box side HE 10 20-way AWG 22 mm 2 0.324 m 0.5 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 3 5 TSX CDP 053 TSX CDP 103 TSX CDP 203 TSX CDP 303 TSX CDP 503 ABF H20 H100 ABF H20 H200 ABF H20 H300 TSX CDP 301 TSX CDP 501 kg 0.085 0.150 0.280 0.410 0.670 0.080 0.140 0.210 0.400 0.660 C.s.a. Length Reference Weight
28
0.080
Bare wires
HE 10 20-way
22
0.324
Separate components
Description Characteristics Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference APE 1PRE21 Weight kg 0.020
Spring terminal connections for: b the external contact b the auxiliary power supply Self-stripping connector for: b the external contact b the auxiliary power supply Connecting cable between module APP 1Cp and splitter box LU9 G02 (length: 0.6 m)
2-way, 5 mm pitch Wire c.s.a.: 0.22.5 mm
2-way, 5 mm pitch Wire c.s.a.: 0.75 mm
16
APE 1PAD21
0.020
Connectors: 1 x 30-way HE 10 2 x 20-way HE 10
APP 2AH40H060
0.400
r Available 3rd quarter 2006.
1/221
Characteristics
Installation system
Type of control connection module
LAD 9AP3pp IEC 60439-1 UL, CSA (pending) IP 40 (mounted assembly) 960 11 ms and 15 gn (half sine wave) 2100 Hz: 4 and 3100 Hz: 0.7 Level 3 10 (261000 MHz) Level 3 2 in common mode, 0.6 in differential mode Wave form: 1.2/50 s - 8/20 s 10 (0.15...80 MHz) - 5+ 60 - 5+ 40 - 40+ 70 > 30 3 On 2 x 35 mm rails or with 2 x 5.5 mm screws on plate for GV2 ME 3 16 25 25 2 1.5 2.5 2.5
General environment
Standard Certifications Degree of protection Resistance to incandescent wire Shock resistance Vibration resistance Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radiated fields Immunity to fast transient currents Surge withstand Immunity to radio electrical fields Ambient air temperature Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1
Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 gn and BV/LR Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 Operation in floor-standing enclosure Operation in wall-mounted enclosure Storage For inserting cables and heat dissipation V/m
kV V C C C mm
Space required around mounted assembly Degree of pollution Assembly fixing Suitable wire Voltage supply Number of wires c.s.a. for power Flexible cable with cable end Flexible cable without cable end Solid cable Voltage supply Number of wires for contactor Flexible cable with cable end coil control (max) Flexible cable without cable end (max) Solid cable (max)
mm mm mm mm mm mm
3-phase power circuit characteristics

Maximum current Per power Conforming to IEC supply Per sub-base Conforming to IEC GV2 operating limit Maximum current per starter Insulation voltage Operational voltage U imp Rated operational frequency Rated conditional Conforming to IEC short-circuit current Isc at 415 V Permissible Conforming to IEC short-time rating Icw 60439-1 60439-1 A A A V V kV Hz kA kA 60 (single power supply to one or more sub-bases or splitter boxes) 60 80 % of Imax at 60 C ambient temperature (see table on opposite page) 25 (with an empty slot between two starters) 750 690 6 50-60 50 9.1 (for 70 ms)
60439-1 60439-1

Contactor coil control voltage V V V a 12250 (with interface relay) c 524 (without interface relay) c 5130 (with interface relay)
1/222
Installation system
Table of GV2 circuit-breaker current limitation at 60C ambient temperature with TeSys Quickfit
Circuit-breaker reference GV2 ME06 GV2 ME07 GV2 ME08 GV2 ME10 GV2 ME14 GV2 ME16 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ratings (1) 1 - 1.6 A 1.6 - 2.5 A 2.5 - 4 A 4 - 6.3 A 6 - 10 A 9 - 14 A 13 - 18 A 17 - 23 A Maximum current of GV2 with TeSys Quickfit 1.28 A 2A 3.2 A 5A 8A 11.2 A 14.4 A 18 A
Electromechanical relay characteristics

Type of control connection module Rated voltage at Us Energisation threshold at 40 C Drop-out voltage at 20 C Maximum operational voltage Maximum current at Us Drop-out current at 20 C Maximum power dissipated at Us Supply failure V V V V mA mA W ms LAD 9AP31, LAD 9AP32 c 24 c 19.2 c 2.4 c 30 15 1 0.36 5
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay control circuit (PLC side)
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay output circuit

Contact type Maximum switching voltage Frequency of the operating current Maximum current of the contact V V Hz A 1 N/O a 250 c 130 50/60 4
Other characteristics of the electromechanical relay

Maximum operating time at Us Between coil energisation (including bounce) and closing of the contact Between coil de-energisation and opening of the contact Maximum operating rate No-load At Ie Mechanical life In millions of operating cycles Dielectric strength Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage Maximum current 24 V - DC13 for 500 000 operations 230 V - AC15 ms ms Hz Hz 10 5
10 0.5 20 V 1000 (50/60 Hz) - 1 min kV 2.5 V 300 A 0.6 A 0.9 (1) Thermal trip setting range.
1/223
Dimensions
Installation system
Dimensions
Mounted assembly (TeSys Quickfit for components with spring terminals)

120
5 4 3 2 1
255
110 135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Circuit-breaker and contactor support plate Power connection module Power splitter box Control splitter box Upstream terminal block Control connection module Outgoing terminal block
(1)
(1) 2 starters: 90 mm, 4 starters: 180 mm, 8 starters: 360 mm.
285
1/224
Dimensions (continued) schemes
Installation system
1
Dimensions
Parallel wiring modules
Splitter box LU9 G02 Parallel wiring module Advantys STB EPI 2145
56
42 155 120 35
35
75
47
70
28,1 (1)
Schemes
Splitter box LU9 G02
X1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LU9 G02
X2
RJ45 X3
(2)
RJ45 X4
RJ45 X5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
X6
RJ45
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Control contact NC Output common NC Contactor status NC Circuit-breaker status Input common
X10
Control X1 Control X2 Control X3 Control X4 Control X5 Control X6 Control X7 Control X8 Not used with TeSys Quickfit NC NC NC NC + c 24 V - c 24 V + c 24 V - c 24 V
(3)
X7
RJ45 X8
RJ45 c 24 V
24 V Aux Inputs
Outputs
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Control contact NC Output common NC Contactor status NC Circuit-breaker status Input common
10
(1) Dimension to be multiplied by the number of STB EPI 2145 modules present in the configuration.
RJ45
X9
Fault X1 Fault X2 Fault X3 Fault X4 Fault X5 Fault X6 Fault X7 Fault X8 Pole status X1 Pole status X2 Pole status X3 Pole status X4 Pole status X5 Pole status X6 Pole status X7 Pole status X8 + 24 V Aux - 24 V Aux + 24 V Aux - 24 V Aux
Colours of TSX CDPppp connection cable wires (4)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 White Brown Green Yellow Grey Pink Blue Red Black Violet Grey-pink Red-blue White-green Brown-green White-yellow Yellow-brown White-grey Grey-brown White-pink Pink-brown
(2) 20-way HE 10 input connector. (3) 20-way HE 10 output connector. (4) Corresponding to colour of the HE 10 connector pin wires. Characteristics: pages 1/222 and 1/223 References: pages 1/218 to 1/221 Schemes: pages 1/226 and 1/227
Com
Com
1/225
Schemes (continued)
Installation system
Wiring schemes
With relay
LAD9 AP31 LAD9 AP32
13
23
13
Q1
Q1
14
24
14
21
21
24
23
13
KM1
(1)
13
KM1
13
21
KM2
14
22
22
14
KA1 (2)
14
KA1 (2)
22
(1)
(1)
KA2 (2)
Ph
Ph
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 1
Ph
Shunt 2
Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker. (1) Contactor coil. (2) Interface relay.
1/226
Schemes (continued)
Installation system
Wiring schemes (continued)

Without relay
LAD9 AP3D1 LAD9 AP3D2
1
13
Q1
13
23
Q1
14
24
14 21
21
24
23
13
13
KM1
KM1
13
21
KM2
14
22
22
14
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 2
Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker. (1) Contactor coil.
14
22
(1)
(1)
(1)
1/227
5 1
8 10 11
12
6 9 8
6 7 13
10
15
12
14
1/228
Presentation
Power distribution in control panels

The assembly of automated control and distribution panels requires the use of products that are not only safe but also simple and quick to mount and cable. The AK5 pre-assembled busbar system meets these criteria by incorporating prefabricated elements which cater for 3 principal functions:
Carrying of electric current

Pre-assembled 4-pole busbar system 1, 160 A at 35 C. 4-pole busbar systems can be used for 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common. The busbar systems are available in 6 lengths: 344, 452, 560, 668, 992, 1100 mm. An incoming supply terminal block 2 is located at the extreme left of the busbar system. "Knock-out" partitions allow connection of the power supply from above or below to the terminal block connections 3 which are protected by a removable cover 4. Upstream protection of the busbar system is shown on page 1/230.
Current distribution
Tap-off units 5 (factory assembled) are available in 4 versions: b 2-pole, b 3-pole, b 4-pole (3-phase + Neutral), b 4-pole (3-phase + Common). The tap-offs clip onto the busbar system with instantaneous mechanical and electrical connection to the busbars. 2 ratings are available: 16 and 32A. The tap-off units ensure not only rapid mounting, but also a neat appearance for the power distribution system and complete safety when accessing under live circuit conditions.
Component mounting
Component mounting plates with incorporated tap-off allow mounting of and supply of power to components. They are available in 25 A or 50 A ratings. These mounting plates clip onto the mounting rail 11, which also supports the busbar system, and at the same time make electrical connection via the incorporated tap-off. 2 types of mounting plate are available: b single plate 6 (height 105 mm), with bolt-on 35 mm wide 7 rail 7, which may be bolted on in one of two positions, allowing height adjustment of 10 mm. b double plate 8 and 14 (height 190 mm), with two bolt-on, 35 mm wide 7 rails 9 mounted on 100 mm fixing centres; each rail may be bolted on in one of 4 positions, allowing height adjustment in 10 mm steps. These plates are supplied with connectors 12 to allow wiring between control and protection devices. Single mounting plates enable the following types of distribution: b 2-pole (Ph + N) and (Ph + Ph) b 3-pole, b 4-pole (3 Ph + N or 3 Ph + common). Double mounting plates enable the following types of distribution; 2-pole (Ph + N, Ph + Ph), 3-pole or 4-pole (3 Ph + N and 3 Ph + common). Extension plates 10 can be bolted onto single and double mounting plates to enable mounting of wider components. Using a side stop 15 in conjunction with these extension plates also supports the AK5 JB busbar system when used vertically. A control terminal block 13 comprising a support plate bolted onto the single or double mounting plates and a 10-pole plug-in block, enables connection of the control circuit wires (c.s.a. 1.5 mm 2 max).
References : pages 1/234 and 1/235
Mounting possibilities : pages 1/232 and 1/233
1/229
Characteristics

Busbar system characteristics
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Against access to live parts Conforming to IEC 60695 Conforming to UL 94 Number of conductors Supply current Rated operational frequency Rated operational current Ambient temperature 35 C Hz A AK5 JB14p C
IEC 60439 UL, CSA, DNV, LROS IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529
Flame resistance
850 (incandescent wire) V0 4 a 50 or 60 160
Coefficient K to be applied according to the ambient temperature
35
40
45
50
55
60
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.83
0.78
Rated insulation voltage
Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to UL and CSA
V V
690 600 Off-load plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched on 400 480 Plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched off 690 600 25
Operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to UL, CSA V V
Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Maximum permissible peak current Maximum let-through energy Upstream short-circuit (1) and overload protection Type of protection
V V kA
A2s
1 x 107 Merlin Gerin circuit-breaker NS 160 H NS 160 H 160 70 Fuses aM 160 100 gF 160 100
Rating Prospective short-circuit current Operational current Connection Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable Tightening torque Mounting position Horizontal or vertical (2)
A kA
160 36
160 Maximum c.s.a.
160
160 Minimum c.s.a. 2.5 2.5
160
mm2 mm2 Nm
70 70 10
Fixing with screws provided (1) For conditions where conditional short-circuit current exceeds 25 kA. (2) Using side stop AK5 BT01 on mounting plates AK5 PA. Dimensions : pages 1/236 and 1/237 Mounting possibilities : pages 1/232 and 1/233
Presentation : pages 1/228 and 1/229
1/230

Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5 PC12 AK5 PC12PH AK5 PC13 AK5 PC14 AK5 PC131 AK5 PC32L AK5 AK5 PC32LPH PC33 PC33L AK5 PC34 PC34L AK5 PC331
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Polarity
IEC 60439 UL, LROS, CSA, DNV Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529 Phase + Neutral mm 2 2 x 2.5 Phase + Phase 2 x 2.5 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 4 x 2.5 3-phase + Common 3 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 Phase + Neutral 2x4 Phase + Phase 2x4 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 4x4 3-phase + Common 3x4 1 x 1.5
Conductor c.s.a. (UL cables)
3 x 2.5
3x4
Conductor colours
Black Blue (Neutral) A 16
Black
Black
Black Blue (Neutral) 16
Black Black White Blue (Common) (Neutral) 16 32 10 (Common)
Black
Black
Black Blue (Neutral) 32
Black White (Common) 32 10 (Common)
Permissible current
16
16
32
32
Rated insulation voltage Rated peak current Maximum let-through energy Conductor insulation Type
V kA A2s
690 conforming to IEC 60439-1 6 100 000 PVC 105 C AK5 PA211N1 PA211N2 PA211N3 PA212N1 PA212N2 PA212N3 IEC 60439 UL, LROS, CSA, DNV Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529 Ph + N Ph + Ph 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 4x4 3-phase + Common 3x4 1 x 1.5 25 10 (Common) 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 2 x (4 x 4) 3-phase + Common 2 x (3 x 4) 1 x 1.5 50 10 (Common) AK5 PA211PH12 PA211PH13 PA211PH23 PA212PH12 PA212PH13 PA212PH23 AK5 PA231 PA232 PA232S AK5 PA241 PA242 200 000
Tap-off characteristics
AK5 PA2311 PA2312 PA2312S AK5 PA532 AK5 PA542 AK5 PA5312
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Polarity
Conductor c.s.a. (UL cables) Permissible current
mm 2
2x4
2x4
3x4
2 x (3 x 4)
25
25
25
25
50
50
Rated insulation voltage Rated peak current Maximum let-through energy Conductor insulation
V kA A2s
690 conforming to IEC 60439-1 6 200 000 PVC 105 C
Characteristics of mounting rails AM1 DL201 and AM1 DL2017 Type Omega 7 (width 75 mm, depth 15 mm)
Material Surface treatment 2 mm sheet steel Zinc
1/231
Mounting (equipment possibilities)

1
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
Note: if the equipment is wider than the mounting plate, an extension plate can be used to increase the width of the support plate. (1) 3-pole + common Mounting plate Width in mm incorporating Height in mm tap-off No. of 18 mm pitches Thermal current Application Type of starter Minimum centres with 60 mm ducting
AK5 PA211N1 PA211N2 PA211N3 54 105 3 25 A Ph + N
AK5 AK5 PA231 PA241 PA2311 (1) 54 105 3 25 A 3-Ph 54 105
AK5 PA212PH12 PA213PH13 PA212PH23 54 190 3 25 A Ph + Ph
AK5 AK5 PA232 PA242 PA2312 (1) 54 190 3 25 A 3-Ph 54 190
AK5 PA232S PA2312S (1) 108 190
AK5 AK5 PA532 PA542 PA5312 (1) 108 190 6 50 A 3-Ph 108 190 6 50 A 3-Ph + N
3 25 A 3-Ph + N Number of points used on the
4 6 25 A 25 A 3-Ph + 3-Ph N
busbar system
Fuses, contactors and thermal overload relay

LS1 D25 170 LS1 D25 + LA8 D254 170 LS1 D25 + LC1 D09 to D25 and overload relay up to LR2 D1322 320 LS1 D25 + LC1 D09 to D25 (with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 overload relay up to LR2 D1322 LS1 D25 + LC2 D09 to D18 (with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 overload relay up to LR2 D1322 LS1 D25 + LC2 D25 (with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 overload relay up to LR2 D1322 4 4 5 4 4
Fuses, reversing contactors + thermal overload relay

6
Optimal breaker switch

GK2 CF03 to 22 GK2 CF03 to 22 + 4 blocks GK2 AX GK3 EF40 GK3 EF40 + 4 blocks GK2 AX 170 170 270 270 3 5 6 6
Optimal breaker switch + contactor + thermal overload relay

GK2 CF03 to CF21 + LC1 D09 to D18 + overload relay up to 320 LR2 D1322 GK2 CF03 to CF22 + LC1 D09 to D25 + overload relay up to 320 LR2 D1322 GK2 CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks GK2 AX + LC1 D09 to D18 with 1 320 block LA8 D + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 GK2 CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocs GK2 AX + LC2 D09 to D18 with 320 1 block LA8 D + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 GK2 CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks GK2 AX + LC2 D25 with 1 block 320 LA8 D + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 3
Optimal breaker switch + reversing contactor + thermal overload relay

6
1/232
Mounting (equipment possibilities)

(continued)
1

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
Note 1: if the equipment is wider than the mounting plate, an extension plate can be used to increase the width of the support plate. Note 2: for upstream protection, see page 1/230. (1) 3-pole + common Mounting plate Width in mm incorporating Height in mm tap-off No. of 18 mm pitches Thermal current Application Type of starter Minimum centres with 60 mm ducting 170 270
AK5 AK5 AK5 PA241 PA212N1 PA212PH12 PA212N2 PA213PH13 PA212N3 PA212PH23 54 54 54 105 190 190 3 3 3 25 A 25 A 25 A 3 Ph + Ph + N Ph + Ph N Number of points used on the busbar system
AK5 PA231 PA2311 (1) 54 105 3 25 A 3 Ph
AK5 PA232 PA2312 (1) 54 190 3 25 A 3 Ph
AK5 AK5 PA242 PA232S PA2312S (1) 54 108 190 190 4 6 25 A 25 A 3 Ph + 3 Ph N
AK5 PA532 PA5312 (1) 108 190 6 50 A 3 Ph
AK5 PA542
108 190 6 50 A 3 Ph + N
Motor circuit-breaker (type 1 coordination)

GV2 p06 to p22 GV3 M01 to M40 3 6
Circuit-breaker + contactor
GV2 p06 to p16 + LC1 D09 or D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D GV2 p06 to p20 + LC1 D09 to D18 GV2 p06 to p22 + LC1 D09 to D25 with 1 add-on block LA8 D GV3 M01 to M40 with GV1 App + LC1 D09 to D32 GV3 M01 to M40 + LC1 D09 to D32 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270 270 4 3
270 270 270
7 8
Motor circuit-breaker + reversing contactor

GV2 p06 to p20 + LC2 D09 to D18 with or without add-on block 270 LA8 D GV2 p22 + LC2 D25 with 1 addon block LA8 D 270 LD1 LB030 + LB1 LB03P pp (integral 18) 6 7
Integral contactor breaker + protection module

270 LD1 LB030 with 2 add-on blocks LA1 LB + LB1 LB30P (integral 18) 270 LD1 LB030 with 4 add-on blocks LA1 LB + LB1 LB03P (integral 18) 270 LD1 LC030 + LB1 LC03M (integral 32) 270 LD1 LC030 + LB1 LC03M (integral 32) with 1 add-on block 270 LA1 LC and 1 reset device LA1 LC052p LD1 LC030 with 2 add-on blocks LA1 LB + LB1 LC03M (integral 32) 270 LD5 LB130 + LB1 LB03P pp 270 LD5 LB130 with 3 add-on blocks LA1 LB + LB1 LB03P 270 2369p 2370p 2371p and 2372p 170 170 170 3 4 6 6 7
2 2 3 4
6 8 3
6 3 4
Reversing contactor breaker integral 18 + protection module
Merlin Gerin C 60 circuit-breaker for circuit protection
1/233
References

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5 Busbar systems, tap-off units
Busbar systems
The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support. However, if it is to be used in conjunction with component mounting plates incorporating a tap-off, it is essential that it is mounted on the AM1 DL201 rail. When mounting tap-offs, the rated operational current of the busbar system should be taken into account: 160 A at 35 C. Number of Number of Length Suitable for Reference Weight conductors tap-offs at mounting in 18 mm intervals enclosure width mm mm kg 4 (1) 12 344 600 AK5 JB143 0.700 18 24 30 452 560 668 992 1100 800 800 800 1200 1200 AK5 JB144 AK5 JB145 AK5 JB146 AK5 JB149 AK5 JB1410 0.900 1.100 1.300 1.900 2.100
AK5 JB1
48 54
Omega rail, width 75 mm

This rail is designed to accommodate the busbar system when it is used with AK5 PA mounting plates incorporating tap-offs. It supports the busbar system. The plates simply clip onto the rail. Material and Depth Length Sold in Unit Weight surface treatment lots of reference 2 mm sheet steel treated with zinc mm 15 mm 2000 (4) 6 AM1 DL201 kg 3.000
Removable power sockets

Use Number of points Thermal used on the current busbar system A 1 16 32 Cable length mm 200 1000 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
Single-phase + Neutral
6 (2) 6 (2)
AK5 PC12 AK5 PC32L
kg 0.035 0.040
AK5 PC12
2-phase 1 16 32 3-phase 2 16 32 200 1000 200 250 1000 6 (3) 6 (3) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 AK5 PC12PH AK5 PC32LPH AK5 PC13 AK5 PC33 AK5 PC33L AK5 PC14 AK5 PC34 AK5 PC34L AK5 PC131 AK5 PC331 0.035 0.040 0.040 0.045 0.060 0.045 0.050 0.065 0.045 0.050
AK5 PC14
3-phase + Neutral
16 32
200 250 1000
3-phase + common
AK5 GF1
16 10 (common) 32 10 (common)
200 250
Accessories
Description Maximum no. of connections C.s.a. Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.300 mm 2 Cable guide 4 2.5 or 4 20 AK5 GF1 (1) 4-pole: 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common. (2) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (N + L1), 2 sockets (N + L2), 2 sockets (N + L3). (3) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (L1 + L2), 2 sockets (L1 + L3), 2 sockets (L2 + L3). (4) Cut and drill to suit use.
Mounting possibilities: pages 1/232 and 1/233
1/234
References

Component mounting plates, extension plates, terminal blocks, mounting rails, accessories
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off

Single plate (height 105 mm)
Use No. of 18 mm points used on the busbar system 3 Phase Thermal current Number of 6 rails for component support 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference Weight
Single-phase + neutral
Ph1+N Ph2+N Ph3+N Ph1+Ph2 Ph1+Ph3 Ph2+Ph3
A 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
AK5 PA211N1 AK5 PA211N2 AK5 PA211N3 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 PA211PH12 PA211PH13 PA211PH23 PA231 PA2311 PA241
kg 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.140 0.145 0.145
2-phase
AK5 PA231
3-phase 3-phase + common 3-phase + neutral 3 3 3
Double plate (height 190 mm)

Prefabricated 25 A connectors are supplied for connecting the 2 protection and control devices. Single-phase + neutral 2-phase 3 Ph1+N Ph2+N Ph3+N Ph1+Ph2 Ph1+Ph3 Ph2+Ph3 25 2 25 2 25 2 25 2 25 2 25 2 25 2 25 2 50 1 25 2 25 (10 common) 2 25 (10 common) 2 50 (10 common) 1 50 1 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 PA212N1 PA212N2 PA212N3 PA212PH12 PA212PH13 PA212PH23 PA232 PA232S PA532 PA242 PA2312 PA2312S PA5312 PA542 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.230 0.600 0.700 0.230 0.235 0.610 0.710 0.715
3-phase
3 6 3 3 6 6
3-phase + neutral 3-phase + common
AK5 PA232
3-phase + neutral
Extension plates
These plates bolt onto the support plates, after having removed them from the rails, to be able to mount wider components. Use Number of tap-offs Reference Weight at 18 mm intervals kg For mounting plates Single 4 AK5 PE17 0.100 incorporating Double 4 AK5 PE27 0.150 tap-off
Side stop (AK5 JB mounted vertically)

Use Sold in lots of 50 Sold in lots of Unit reference AK5 BT01 Unit reference Weight kg 0.005 Weight kg
For extension plate
Control terminal blocks

AK5 BT01
Thermal current A A 10-pole terminal blocks, for screwing onto plate AK5 PAppp Description
10 10 AK5 SB1 10-pole front connecting plug-in terminal blocks which can be clipped onto 1 6 4 rails Fixed part Moving part 10 10 Marking 10 10 AB1 DV10235U AB1 DVM10235U
0.065
0.047 0.021 Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050
Accessories
AK5 SB1
Sold in Unit lots of reference Strips of 09 25 AB1 Rp (1) clip-in markers + 25 AB1 R12 10 identical numbers, signs 25 AB1 R13 or capital letters per strip AZ 25 AB1 G p (1) (1) Replace the p in the selected reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1 R1 or AB1 GA. Description
1/235
Dimensions

Busbar systems
AK5 JBppp
82
79
30
AK5
G a
JB143 JB144 JB145 JB146 JB149 JB1410
344 452 560 668 992 1100
330 438 546 654 978 1086
N of 18 mm points 12 18 24 30 48 54
81
Busbar feed units

AK5 JBppp Installation of AK5 JBppp busbar systems Connection Flexible cable with or without cable end 1 x 2.5 1 x 70 (1) 2 x 2.5 2 x 35 Flexible bar Flexible bar 9x4 9x4 + + 1 x 2.5 1 x 35 2 x (9 x 4) C.s.a. in mm2 min. max.
+ flexible cable with or without cable end
(1) Maximum c.s.a. or connection of conductor without cable end.
Removable power sockets, 16 and 32 A

AK5 PC12p, AK5 PC32Lp
Mounting plates incorporating tap-offs, 25 A

AK5 PA2p1, AK5 PA2311, AK5 PA211pppp
45
AK5 PE17
Single width extension plates
53 (1)
105
45,5
10
38
35,5
15
46
54
15 7
71
Note : It is recommended that the power sockets or the removable plates are connected as close as possible to the busbar feed unit. (1) Can be fixed at 43 mm
1/236
10
105
AK5 PCp3, AK5 PC33L AK5 PCp4, AK5 PC34L AK5 PCp31
53 (1)
38
17,5
45,5

Mounting plates incorporating tap-off

AK5 PA232, AK5 PA2312, AK5 PA242
Double width extension plate

AK5 PE27
1
53 (1) 100
10 100 190
40
53 (1)
15
46
54
15 7
71
Mounting plates incorporating tap-off

AK5 PA232S, AK5 PA2312S AK5 PA532, AK5 PA5312, AK5 PA542
53 (1)
10
10 100 190
93 63 106 63 106
190
10
Side stop
AK5 BT01

AK5 SB1
15,5 4,2 75
22
7
(1) Can be fixed at 43 mm Presentation : pages 1/228 and 1/229 Characteristics : pages 1/230 and 1/231
22
54
10 10 5
p. 0,8
20
190
1/237
Selection guide
Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors
Applications Application area
Speed control for asynchronous motors Building (HVAC) (1) Industry Pumps and fans Simple machines Pumps Simple machines
Type of machine
Power range for 5060 Hz supply (kW) Single phase 100120 V (kW) Single phase 200240 V (kW) Three phase 200230 V (kW) Three phase 200240 V (kW) Three phase 380480 V (kW) Three phase 380500 V (kW) Three phase 525600 V (kW) Drive Output frequency Type of control Asynchronous motor
0.7530 0.7530 0.7530 0.5200 Hz Sensorless flux vector control, voltage/frequency ratio (2 or 5 points), energy saving ratio 110% of the nominal motor torque
0.182.2 0.180.75 0.182.2 0.182.2 0.5200 Hz Sensorless flux vector control
0.1815 0.182.2 0.1815 0.3715 0.7515 0.5500 Hz
Synchronous motor Transient overtorque
150170% of the nominal motor torque
180% of the nominal motor torque for 2 seconds
Functions Number of functions Number of preset speeds Number of I/O Analog inputs Logic inputs Analog outputs Logic outputs Relay outputs Communication Embedded Available as an option
50 7 2 3 1 2 Modbus LON WORKS, METASYS N2, APOGEE FLN, BACnet
26 4 1 4 1 1
50 16 3 6 1 2 Modbus and CANopen Ethernet TCP/IP, DeviceNet, Fipio, Profibus DP
Cards (available as an option)
Standards and certification
IEC/EN 61800-5-1, IEC/EN 61800-3 (environments 1 and 2) EN 55011, EN 55022: class A, EN 55011, EN 55022: class B with option card, class A gr.1 and class B e, UL, CSA, C-Tick, NOM 117 e, UL, CSA, C-Tick, N998
EN 55011, EN 55022: class A, class B with option card, e, UL, C-Tick, N998
References
ATV 21
ATV 11
ATV 31
Pages
Please consult the Altivar 21 Please consult the Soft starters and variable speed drives variable speed drives catalogue catalogue (1) Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
1/238
Pumps and fans
Complex, modular machines, high-power machines Machines requiring high-performance torque and accuracy at very low speed as well as high dynamics
0.37630 0.375.5 0.7590 0.75630 0.51000 Hz up to 37 kW, 0.5500 Hz from 45 kW to 630 kW Sensorless flux vector control, voltage/frequency ratio (2 or 5 points), energy saving ratio
0.37500 0.375.5 0.3775 0.75500 01000 Hz up to 37 kW, 0500 Hz from 45 kW to 500 kW Flux vector control with or without sensor, voltage/frequency ratio (2 or 5 points), ENA System
110120% of the nominal motor torque for 60 seconds
Vector control without speed feedback 220% of the nominal motor torque for 2 seconds 170% for 60 seconds
> 100 8 24 620 13 08 24 Modbus and CANopen Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipio, Modbus Plus, INTERBUS, Profibus DP, Modbus/Uni-Telway, DeviceNet, LONWORKS, METASYS N2, APOGEE FLN, BACnet I/O extension cards, Controller Inside programmable card, multi-pump cards
> 150 16 24 620 13 08 24
Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipio, Modbus Plus, INTERBUS, Profibus DP, Modbus/Uni-Telway, DeviceNet
Encoder interface cards, I/O extension cards, Controller Inside programmable card
IEC/EN 61800-5-1, IEC/EN 61800-3 (environments 1 and 2, C1 to C3), EN 55011, EN 55022, IEC/EN 61000-4-2/4-3/4-4/4-5/4-6/4-11 e, UL, CSA, DNV, C-Tick, NOM 117, GOST
ATV 61
ATV 71
Please consult the Altivar 61 variable speed drives catalogue
Please consult the Altivar 71 variable speed drives catalogue
1/239
Contents
2 - TeSys motor starters enclosed version
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 2/2
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

b Pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4 b Assembled by user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/5 b Add-on modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

b Type GV2 ME v Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/10 v Assembly of a safety enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12
D.O.L. starters for motor control

b 0.55 to 30 kW v With manual control and with magnetic circuit-breakers. . . . . . . . . . . page 2/14 b 2.2 to 45 kW v Without isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/16 v With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/20 b 0.25 to 7.5 kW v With 3-phase thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/24 b 0.37 to 5.5 kW v With thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/26
Star-delta starters for motor control

b 5.5 to 132 kW v Without isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/28 b 7.5 to 75 kW v With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/32 b 90 to 375 kW v Without isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/38
D.O.L. starters for control in category AC-1

b Without isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/40 b With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/44

b Enclosures and door interlock mechanisms for customer assembly . . . page 2/48
2/0
integral 32 and 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

b Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/54 b Door interlock mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/55 b For control and protection of motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/56 b For control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1 . . . . . . page 2/58 b Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/59
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE
b Non-reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/62 b Reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/64
Soft starters for asynchronous motors

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/72
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/74 b Models LF1, LF2, LF7 and LF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/76 b Models LF1 P, LF2 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/86 b Models LF1 M, LF2 M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/87 b Model LF7 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/88 b Model LF8 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/89
LA9 Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system

b For D.O.L. starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/102
2/1
General selection guide
TeSys enclosed starters
Applications
D.O.L. starters
Type
Standard starters
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors in AC-3 400/415 V
437 kW
0.0645 kW
0.5530 kW
0.375.5 kW
0.2545 kW
Starters Manual Auto p p p p p
Isolation Switch Circuit-breaker Disconnector p p p p
Protection Short-circuit Overload p p p p p p p
Communication
References Non-reversing
VpF VCFN VpFX
GV2 ME GV3 CE
GV2 LC GV NGC
LE1 GVME
LE1 M LE1 D LE2 K LE2 D
Reversing
Pages
2/4 and 2/5
2/10 and 2/11
2/14
2/26
2/16, 2/17 and 2/24
2/2
Soft start units
Starters for safety applications
Starters for use on AS-Interface line
Standard star-delta starters
2.245 kW
0.0611 kW
0.069 kW
0.069 kW
0.065.5 kW
5.5132 kW
7.575 kW
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
LE4 K LE4 D LE8 K LE8 D LE2 D

2/20 and 2/21
GV2 ME
LG1 K LG1 D
LG7 K LG7 D LJ7 K LG8 K LJ8 K
LF1 M LF1 P LF7 P LF2 M LF2 P LF8 P

2/86 to 2/89
LE3 K LE3 D LE3 F
LE6 D LE3 D
2/12 and 2/13
2/63
2/62, 2/63, 2/68 and 2/69
2/28, 2/29 and 2/38
2/32 and 2/33
2/3
References
Enclosed starters
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors, pre-assembled
580545
Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications

b b b b b Marking on operator O . 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 140 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60204. Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not included). IP 65 degree of protection enclosures, sealable and lockable. Cover lockable in position I (ON) up to 63 A rating.
2
VCF 0GE
580546
3-pole main and emergency stop switch disconnectors (1)

Operator Handle lthe Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 60 x 60 A 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 100 140 Power AC-23 at 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 Incorporated switch body V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 Possible attachments (2) Reference Weight
Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8 shank)
2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1
VCF 02GE VCF 01GE VCF 0GE VCF 1GE VCF 2GE VCF 3GE VCF 4GE VCF 5GE VCF 6GE
kg 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.930 0.930 2.190 2.190
Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8 shanks) VCF 3GE
Yellow 90 x 90
3-pole main switch disconnectors (1)

Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8 shank) Black 60 x 60 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 100 140 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 VBF 02GE VBF 01GE VBF 0GE VBF 1GE VBF 2GE VBF 3GE VBF 4GE VBF 5GE VBF 6GE 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.930 0.930 2.190 2.190
580547
Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8 shank)
Black 90 x 90
Enclosed switch disconnectors for standard applications

b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 32 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1. b Degree of protection IP 55.
VBF 0GE
3-pole main and emergency stop switch disconnectors (1)

Operator Handle lthe Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 60 x 60 A 10 16 20 25 32 Power AC-23 at 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 Incorporated switch body VN 12 VN 20 V0 V1 V2 Possible attachments (2) Reference Weight
Red Padlockable, either by 1 ( 8 shank) or by 3 padlocks ( 6 shank)
2 2 0 0 0
VCFN VCFN VCFN VCFN VCFN
12GE 20GE 25GE 32GE 40GE
580548
(2) (2)
kg 0.422 0.422 0.512 0.512 0.512
(1) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) For VCF and VBF enclosures, see page 2/6. For VCFN enclosures, see page 2/7.
VCFN 12GE
Schemes : page 2/9
2/4
References
Enclosed starters
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors, assembled by the user
580549
Empty enclosures
IP 65 enclosure with red padlockable handle operator and yellow front plate (for mounting a main or emergency stop switch disconnector)
For switch body VN 12, VN 20 V02V2 V02V2 VBFX GE2 V3 lthe A 1032 Possible attachments (1) 2 Reference VCFX GE1 Weight kg 0.340
1032 50
4 3
VCFX GE4 VCFX GE2
0.660 0.660
IP 65 enclosure with black padlockable handle and black front plate (for mounting a main switch disconnector)
VN 12, VN 20 V02V2 V02V2 V3 1032 2 VBFX GE1 0.340
1032 50
4 3
VBFX GE4 VBFX GE2
0.660 0.660
Switch bodies for standard applications (2)

Description 3-pole switch disconnectors Rating A 10 16 Reference VN 12 VN 20 Weight kg 0.110 0.110
Switch bodies for high performance applications (2)

Description 3-pole switch disconnectors Rating A 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 Reference V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
580550
V0
(1) See pages 2/6 and 2/7. (2) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 2/9
2/5
References
Enclosed starters
Add-on modules
580589
580594
Add-on modules for enclosures VCF and VBF

Description Main pole module (mounted in enclosure) Rating A 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 10 to 32 50 and 63 100 and 140 10 to 32 50 and 63 100 and 140 Type of contacts N/O + N/C (1) N/O + N/O Reference VZ VZ VZ VZ VZ VZ VZ 02 01 0 1 2 3 4 Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.050 0.100 0.250 0.050 0.100 0.250 Weight kg 0.050 0.050
2
580595
VZ 0
VZ 11
Neutral pole modules with early make and late break contacts Earthing modules
VZ 11 VZ 12 VZ 13 VZ 14 VZ 15 VZ 16 Reference VZ 7 VZ 20
580596
Description VZ 15 VZ 20 Auxiliary contact block modules with 2 auxiliary contacts
Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body

1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
VZ 7 or VZ 20 or VZ 11 or VZ 12 or VZ 14 or VZ 15 or VZ 0p/VZ 0 to VZ 4 + V4 + to + + V0 + + V0p + VZ 7 or VZ 20 or VZ 11 or VZ 12 or VZ 14 or VZ 15 or + VZ 0 p/VZ 0 to VZ 4
2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body

VZ 0p VZ 0 VZ 1 VZ 2 VZ 3 VZ 4 + + + + + + VZ 0p + VZ 0 VZ 1 VZ 2 VZ 3 VZ 4 + + + + + V0p V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 + VZ 0 p + + + + + + VZ 0 VZ 1 VZ 2 VZ 3 VZ 4 + + + + + VZ 7 VZ 7 VZ 7 VZ 7 VZ 7 VZ 7 or or or or or or VZ 20 VZ 20 VZ 20 VZ 20 VZ 20 VZ 20 or or or or or or VZ 11 VZ 11 VZ 11 VZ 11 VZ 12 VZ 12 or or or or or or VZ 14 VZ 14 VZ 14 VZ 14 VZ 15 VZ 15
Note: The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules. Maximum of 3 main pole modules per switch body. (1) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts
Schemes : page 2/9
2/6
Enclosed starters
Add-on modules
580597
Add-on modules for enclosures VCFN 12GE and 20GE

Description Main pole modules Rating A 10 16 Neutral pole module with early make and late break contacts Earthing module Description Auxiliary contact block modules 10 and 16 Reference VZN 12 VZN 20 VZN 11 Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.020
VZN 11
10 and 16 Type of contacts 1 N/O late make contact
VZN 14 Reference VZN 05
0.016 Weight kg 0.020
580598
1 N/C early break contact
VZN 06
0.020
VZN 14

VZN 12 or VZN 20 + + VZN 12 or VZN 20 or VN 12 VZN 11 or or or VZN 05 or VZN 06 or VZN 05 or VZN 06 VZN 14
580599
VZN 05
VN 20
Schemes : page 2/9
2/7
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
Dimensions
VCFN 12GE to VCFN 40GE
2
106 82,5
Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom.
VCF or VBF 02GE to 4GE VCFX or VBFX GE1 to GE4
131
90
c c1
= a
VpF 02GE to VpF 2GE, V pFX GE1 (1) VpF 3GE and VpF 4GE (2) VpFX GE2 and VpFX GE4 (2) (1) Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom. (2) Cable glands: 2 x 16/21/29 P top and bottom.
a 90 150 150
b
b 146 170 170
c 85 106 106
c1 131 152 152
H 130 164 164
VCF or VBF 5GE and 6GE
126 191
190 220
Schemes : page 2/9
2/8
201 280
Schemes
Enclosed starters
Schemes
Switch disconnectors
Enclosed or switch bodies Main pole module Neutral pole module
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
Auxiliary contact blocks

VZ 7
13 21
6/T3
VZ 20
13 23
VZN 05
13
VZN 06
21 22
14
14
22
24
14
2/9
References

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV2 ME and accessories, for customer assembly
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME

For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 24508/3. 24512/3 and 24512/ 9. Starters consisting of a GV2 ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to standard IEC 60947-4-1.
GV2 ME ME ME 01 02 03 0.16 0.25 0.4 ME ME 04 05 0.63 1 ME 06 1.6 ME 07 2.5 ME 08 4 ME 10 6.3 ME 14 9 ME 16 13 ME 20 17 ME 21 21 ME 22 23
500277_1
Ithe in enclosure (A)
Enclosures for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME

Type Degree of protection Possible number of Reference side-mounting auxiliary contact blocks on GV2 ME LH side RH side 1 1 GV2 MC01 1 1 GV2 MC02 or GV2 MCK04 (1) IP 55 for 1 temperature < + 5 C IP 41 (front face) IP 41 (reduced flush mounting) IP 55 (front face) IP 55 (reduced flush mounting) 1 1 1 GV2 MC03 Weight
GV2 MC
Surface mounting , double insulated with protective conductor. Sealable cover
IP 41 IP 55
kg 0.290 0.300 0.420 0.300
500280_1
Flush mounting , with protective conductor
1 1 1 1
GV2 MP01 GV2 MP03 GV2 MP02 GV2 MP04
0.115 0.115 0.130 0.130
GV2 MP
500278_1
Front plate
Description For direct control, through a panel, of a chassis mounted GV2 ME IP 55 Reference GV2 CP21 Weight kg 0.800
Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)

GV2 CP Description Padlocking devices (2) for GV2 ME operator (padlocking is only possible in the O position)
500279_1
Sold in lots of 1 to 3 padlocks 1 4 to 8 mm
Unit reference GV2 V01
Weight kg 0.075
Mushroom head Stop pushbutton 40 mm, red
Spring return (2) Latching (2) IP 55
1 Key release. 1 key n 455 Turn to release 1 1
GV2 K011 GV2 K021 GV2 K031 GV2 K04 (3) GV2 E01 GV2 E02
0.052 0.160 0.115 0.120 0.012 0.012
Sealing kit GV2 K011
For enclosures and front plate
IP 55 IP 55 for < + 5 C
10 10
Neutral terminal Partition
100
AB1 VV635UBL
0.015
50
AB1 AC6BL
0.003
(1) Enclosure GV2 MCK04 is fitted with a GV2 K04 mushroom head Stop pushbutton as standard. (2) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. To be fitted with enclosure GV2 Mp01. (3) Padlockable in Off position using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.
2/10
References

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV3 ME and accessories, for customer assembly
812218

For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 24508/5 and 24512/5. GV3 ME40: operational current in enclosure limited to 30 A. Starters consisting of a GV3 ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to standard IEC 60947-4-1.

Application Type Motor Surface mounting circuit-breaker up to 30 A with or without accessories GV3 CE01 Degree of protection of enclosure IP 55 Reference GV3 CE01 Weight kg 2.000
Enclosure accessories
Description
812219
(to be ordered separately)

Sold in lots of 10 10 1 Unit reference GV1 EA01 GV1 EA02 GV1 V01 Weight kg 0.012 0.012 0.044
Sealing membrane (1)
For u 5 C For < 5 C (silicone)
IP 55 padlocking device for operators (when padlocked, the motor circuit is automatically in the Open (OFF) position) Stop Spring return pushbutton 40 mm, red Latching mushroom head (supplied with IP 55 sealing kit) (1) Spare part
1 Key release, key n 455 Turn to release 1 1
GV1 K01 GV1 K02 GV1 K03
0.052 0.095 0.052
GV1 V01
530080
GV1 K01
2/11
References

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV2 ME and accessories
Assembly of a safety enclosure
References
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 24508/3, 24512/2 and 24512/ 3. Starters consisting of a GV2 ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to standard IEC 60947-4-1.
GV2 ME ME ME 01 02 03 0.16 0.25 0.4 ME ME 04 05 0.63 1 ME 06 1.6 ME 07 2.5 ME 08 4 ME 10 6.3 ME 14 9 ME 16 13 ME 20 17 ME 21 21 ME 22 23
2
500277_1
Ithe in enclosure (A)

Type Degree of protection Possible number of Reference side-mounting auxiliary contact blocks on GV2 ME LH side RH side 1 1 GV2 MC01 1 GV2 MC02 or GV2 MCK04 (1) 1 GV2 MC03 Weight
GV2 MC
Surface IP 41 mounting, double IP 55 1 insulated with protective conductor. Sealable cover IP 55 for 1 temperature < + 5 C
kg 0.290 0.300 0.420 0.300
Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)

Description Padlocking devices (2 ) for GV2 ME operator (padlocking is only possible in the O position) Sold in Unit lots of reference 1 to 3 padlocks 4 1 GV2 V01 to 8 mm Weight kg 0.075
Mushroom Spring return (2) head Stop pushbutton Latching (2) 40 mm, red IP 55
500279_1
1 Key release, key n 1 455 Turn to 1 release 1 IP 55 for 10 temperature between + 5 C and + 40 C IP 55 for 10 temperature between - 20 C and + 40 C 100 50
GV2 K011 GV2 K021 GV2 K031 GV2 K04 (3) GV2 E01
0.052 0.160 0.115 0.120 0.012
Sealing kit
For enclosures and front plate
GV2 K011
GV2 E02
0.012
Neutral terminal Partition
AB1 VV635UBL AB1 AC6BL
0.015 0.003
Assembly of a safety enclosure (conforming to standards IEC 60974-4-1, IEC 60204 and IEC 60292)
Type of product Enclosure Circuit-breaker Page See above 3/44 Reference GV2 MCpp GV2 MEpp GV2 Apppp or GV2 AXppp Latching mushroom head Stop pushbutton GV2 K021 or GV2 K031 or GV2 K04 (1) Enclosure GV2 MCK04 is fitted with a GV2 K04 mushroom head Stop pushbutton as standard. (2) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. To be fitted with enclosure GV2 Mp01. (3) Padlockable in Off position using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks. (4) Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113. See above
Undervoltage trip or INRS trip (4) 3/53
2/12

2
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV2 ME and accessories
Surface mounting enclosures GV2 MC0p
(1)
=
147
84
93
(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit. Surface mounting enclosure GV2 MCK04
(1)
=
147
84 145,5
93
(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit.
Flush mounting enclosures GV2 MP0p (panel cut-out)

GV2 MP0p GV2 MGV2 MP01, MP02 GV2 MP03, MP04 Front plate GV2 CP21
71
130
130
9,5
127
140
21
= 117 133
1...6 12
GV2 MP01, MP02 MP03, MP04
11,5 7,5 118
= a
a 86
93,5 106,5
71 93
6,5
1...4 12
76 93
2/13
133
62
Characteristics, references

2
D.O.L. starters with manual control, with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW
Characteristics (1)
Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Operational voltage Ue Material IEC 60947-4, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947 GV2 LC: IP 547 GV NGC: IP 407 GV2 LC: 690 V GV NGC: 500 V Polycarbonate (2)
2
533740
References
Control by black rotary handle, padlockable in Off position (up to 3 padlocks with 8 shank, to be ordered separately)
Rating In Breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2 220/ 400/ 440 V 230 V 415 V kA kA kA 100 100 100 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 13 In Reference Weight
500 V kA 100
A 1.6
GV2 LC0206 (3)
kg 0.780
GV2 LC02pp
533741
2.5
100
100
100
100
13 In
GV2 LC0207 (3)
0.780
100
100
100
100
13 In
GV2 LC0208 (3)
0.780
6.3
100
100
100
100
13 In
GV2 LC0210 (3)
0.780
10 GV2 LC02pp 14
100
100
20
10
13 In
GV2 LC0214 (3)
0.780
100
50
20
10
13 In
GV2 LC0216 (3)
0.780
18
533742
100
50
20
10
13 In
GV2 LC0220 (3)
0.780
25
100
50
30
15
12 In
GV NGC0225
2.450
32
100
50
30
15
12 In
GV NGC0232
2.450
40
100
50
30
15
12 In
GV NGC0240
2.450
50
100
50
30
15
12 In
GV NGC0250
2.450
GV NGC02pp
63
100
50
30
15
12 In
GV NGC0263
2.450
Variants
Starters with control by red rotary handle on yellow background
Add the letter R to the references selected above. Example: GV2 LC0206 becomes GV2 LC0206R.
Enclosure without circuit-breaker, with rotary handle mounted on cover

533743
Description Black rotary handle
Rating A 1.618 2563 1.618 2563
Reference GV2 LC02 GV NGC02 GV2 LC02R GV NGC02R
Weight kg 0.300 0.550 0.300 0.550
Red rotary handle on yellow background
GV2 LC02
(1) Circuit-breaker characteristics: GV2 L: see pages 3/12 and 3/13. NG 125L : product marketed under the Merlin Gerin, brand, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) The following can be fitted by the customer: a GVAD or GVAM auxiliary contact block on the LH side and a GVAp trip on the RH side.
Scheme: page 2/15
2/14
Dimensions, scheme

2
D.O.L. starters with manual control, with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW
Dimensions
GV2 LC0206LC0220 GV NGC0225NGC0263
=
65
2
348 330
186,3
120 173
= 88
150
166
237
Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Enclosure type GV2 LC GV NGC At top ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 At bottom ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40
Scheme
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
167
2/15

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control (1)

2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 659: LE2 K IP 657: LE p D09 D35 IP 557: LE p D405 D955 Operation: - 5+ 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LE2 K and LE p D09 D35 Sheet steel: LE p D405 D955
Ambient air temperature Operating positions
2
533747
Material
References
Non-reversing starters
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW kW 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 15 22 25 30 30 33 18.5 30 37 37 37 37 22 37 45 45 55 45 25 45 45 45 55 45 Maximum Basic reference, current to be completed by adding I the the voltage code (3) up to A 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 95 LE1 LE1 LE1 LE1 LE1 LE1 LE1 LE1 LE1 LE1 D09pp D12pp D18pp D25pp D35pp D405pp D505pp D655pp D805pp D955pp Weight
LE1 D12pp
kg 0.920 0.920 1.015 1.015 4.320 4.820 4.850 4.850 5.140 5.440
Reversing starters
1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 25 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 2.2 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 45 3 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45 45 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55 55 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 30 33 37 45 45 6 9 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 95 LE2 K065pp LE2 K095pp LE2 D09pp (4) LE2 D09pp LE2 D12pp LE2 D18pp LE2 D25pp LE2 D35pp LE2 D405pp LE2 D505pp LE2 D655pp LE2 D805pp LE2 D955pp 1.080 1.080 2.100 2.100 2.100 2.410 2.570 4.100 5.270 5.470 5.470 6.700 7.000
533748
LE2 D12pp
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately, see pages 6/16 and 6/17. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz LE2 K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LE1, LE2 D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 2/19
2/16

D.O.L. starters for motor control (1) 2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device
533749
Description
Standard versions comprise: b For non-reversing starters: v 1 green Start button I, v 1 red Stop/Reset button O.
LE1 D12ppA04
b For reversing starters: v LE2 K: - 1 Start button A, - 1 Start button E, - 1 red Stop/Reset button. v LE2 D09D35: - 1 2-position spring return selector switch I-II, - 1 red Stop/Reset button O, v LE2 D405D955: - 1 blue Reset button R.
533750
LE1 D12ppA05
Variants (pre-assembled)
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE1 D09D955 LE2 D09D955 LE2 D405D955 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (2) A04
533751
1 green Start button I 1 green Start button II 1 red Stop/Reset button O 1 blue Reset button R LE1 D12ppA09 1 3-position stay put selector switch (I-O-II) (I: Automatic Start; O: Stop; II: Manual Start) 1 blue Reset button R 1 2-position stay put selector switch O-I (O: Stop; I: Manual Start) 1 blue Reset button R LE1 D12ppA13 1 3-position selector switch O-I spring return to centre position (I: Manual start; O: Stop, stay put) 1 blue Reset button R 1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on LE1 and LE2 D09 to D35, LE1 and LE2 D405 to D955 starters ordered with 222 V (M7), 230 V (P7) or 240 V (U7) control supply Mounting of an LC1 D09 or D12 contactor in an enclosure identical to LE1 D18 (3)
A11
LE1 D09D955 LE2 K06 and K09 LE2 D09D35 LE1 D09D35
A05
A09
533752
LE1 D09D35
A13
LE1 D09D35
A35
533753
LE1 D405D955 LE2 K06 and K09 LE2 D405D955
A59
LE1 D12ppA35
LE1 D09 LE1 D12 Application LE1 D405D955
Accessory
Description

Reference LA9 D09907 Weight kg 0.060
Start pushbutton latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) (1) See previous page. (2) Example: LE1 D09F7A04. (3) See dimensions see page 2/18.
Other versions
Possible combinations of 2 variants. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 2/19
2/17
Dimensions

D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device
Dimensions
LE1 D09 and D12 LE1 D09 and D12ppT LE1 D18D35 and LE2 D09D35 LE1 D405D655
166
150
201
183
2
c1 = = 88 = c1
= = 101
312
c1
105 181
Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05 Variant A09 Variant A13 Variant A35
c1 128.5 120 128.5 135 135 135
Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05 Variant A09 Variant A13 Variant A35
c1 LE1 D 153.5 145 153.5 160 160 160
LE2 D 160 145 153.5
Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05
c1 161 150 161
LE2 K06 and K09

19 120
146
165
84 175
LE1 D805, LE1 D955 and LE2 D405D655

=
150
LE2 D805 and D955

=
307
165
287
c1
c1 = 165 257
c1 LE1 D 176 165 176
225 367
Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05 Variant A11
LE2 D 176 165 176
c1 194 190 194

Type of enclosure LE1 LE1 LE2 LE1 LE1 LE2 D09 and D12 D18D35 and LE2 D09D35 D405 D405D655, LE2 D505 and D655 or LE2 D805 and D955 K Schemes : page 2/19 At top PG 1 x 13 and 1 x 13 and 1 x 13 and 2 x 13 and ISO 2 x 20 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 1 x 25 1 x 20 and 1 x 32 1 x 20 and 1 x 40 4 x 20 At bottom PG 2 x 13 or 2 x 16 2 x 16 or 2 x 21 1 x 13 and 2 x 21 1 x 13 and 2 x 29 1 x 13 and 2 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 ISO 2 x 20 2 x 20 or 2 x 1 x 20 and 2 1 x 20 and 2 1 x 20 and 2 4 x 20
195
1 1 1 2
x 21 x 29 x 36 x 16
25 x 25 x 32 x 40
2/18
195
Schemes

D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device
Schemes
LE1 D09D955
L1 L2 L3
LE1 D09D955
A
Variant A04 or A05

A
KM1
O
14
KM1
l KM1
A1
2221 13
O Remote control
A1
KM1
B
A2
B
KM1
A2
LE2 K06, K09

L1 L2 L3
LE2 K06, K09

A
Variant A05
A
R
O
KM1
KM2
KM1 KM2
Remote control
KM2
KM2 KM1
KM1 A1 KM2
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
LE2 D09D955
LE2 D09D35
LE2 D405D955, LE2 D09D955 with variants A04 or A05

A
R
L1
L2
L3
I S1
II
O Remote control
22
21
KM1
KM2
ll
KM1
KM2
KM2
KM1
KM2
A1
KM1
A1
KM2
A1
KM1
A1
KM1
A2 A2
KM2
B
KM1
A2 A2
A2
KM1
KM2
KM1
A1
KM2
Connections 220 V, 230 V, 240 V
LE2 K, LE1 and LE2 D09 and D12 LE1 and LE2 D18D955 All products LE1 and LE2 D09D35 LE2 K, LE1 and LE2 D405 and D955
A L3 L3 L3
B Neutral Neutral terminal L1
380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Direct connection
2/19

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control (1) 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 659: LE p K IP 657: LE p D09 D35 IP 557: LE p D406 D806 Operation: - 5+ 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LEp K and LEp D09 D35 Sheet steel: LE p D406 D806
2
533769
Material
References
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 230 V 400 V kW kW kW kW kW 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 2.2 4 4 4 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55 Maximum Fuses to be fitted current by the customer I the Size Type aM up to A 6 9 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 10 10 10 14 14 22 22 22 x 38 x 38 x 38 x 38 x 51 x 51 x 58 x 58 x 58 A 10 12 or 18.5 30 33 37 45 12 16 20 25 32 40 63 80 80 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) Weight
660 V 690 V kW
LE4 D12pp
LE4 K065pp LE4 K095pp LE4 D09pp (4) LE4 D09pp LE4 D12pp LE4 D18pp LE4 D25pp LE4 D35pp LE4 D406pp LE4 D506pp LE4 D656pp LE4 D806pp (5)
kg 1.450 1.450 1.960 1.960 1.960 2.200 2.200 5.190 5.770 6.440 6.670 7.100
533770
Reversing starters
1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 2.2 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 3 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55 18.5 30 33 37 45 6 9 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 10 10 10 14 14 22 22 22 x 38 x 38 x 38 x 38 x 51 x 51 x 58 x 58 x 58 10 12 or 12 16 20 25 32 40 63 80 80 LE8 K065pp LE8 K095pp LE8 D09pp (4) LE8 D09pp LE8 D12pp LE8 D18pp LE8 D25pp LE8 D35pp LE2 D406pp LE2 D506pp LE2 D656pp LE2 D806pp 1.600 1.600 3.550 3.550 3.550 3.700 4.670 5.800 14.170 14.700 14.770 16.000
LE8 D12pp
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately, see pages 6/16 and 6/17. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz LEp K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LEp D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (5) Supplied with 3 cable entries.
Schemes: page 2/23
2/20

D.O.L. starters for motor control (1) 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device
533771
Description
Standard versions comprise: b For non-reversing starters: v LE4 K and LE4 D09D656 - 1 green Start button I, - 1 red Stop/Reset button O. v LE4 D806 - no pushbuttons on cover b For reversing starters: v LE8 K : - 1 Start button A, - 1 Start button E, - 1 red Stop/Reset button. v LE8 D09D35 : - 1 2-position spring return selector switch I-II, - 1 red Stop/Reset button O, v LE2 D406 to D806: - no pushbuttons on cover.
Protection LE4 and LE8 K LE4 and LE8 D09D25 LE4 and LE2 D35D806 Power circuit 1 3-pole isolating device 1 3-pole isolating device 1 3-pole isolating device Control circuit None + 1 additional pole + 1 circuit-breaker GB2 CB08
LE4 D12ppA04
533772
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE4 D09D656 LE8 D09D35 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (2) A04
LE4 D12ppA05
1 green Start button I 1 green Start button II 1 red Stop/Reset button O
LE2 D406D806
A11
1 blue Reset button R
LE4 D09D806 LE8 K06 and K09 LE8 D09D35 LE2 D406D806
A05
1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on LE4 D18D806, LE8 D18D35 and LE4 D406D806 starters ordered with 220 V (M7), 230 V (P7) or 240 V (U7) control supply
LE4 K06 and K09 LE4 D09D806 LE8 K06 and K09 LE8 D09D35 LE2 D406D806
A59
Accessory
Description

Application LE4 D406D656 Reference LA9 D09907 Weight kg 0.060
Start pushbutton latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop)
(1) See previous page (2) Example: LE4 D09F7A04.
Other versions
Schemes: page 2/23
2/21
Dimensions

D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device
Dimensions
LE4 K06 and K09, LE8 K06 and K09
31
LE4 D09D35, LE8 D09D35

= 348
165
150
19 20 120 c1
84 175
(1)
186
Standard version Variant A05 (1) For LE8 only
c1 LE4 K 146
LE8 K 146 139
c1 LE4 D 175.5 167 175.5
LE8 D 182 167 175.5
LE4 D406D656
LE2 D406D806, LE4 D806

= a-75 = 31
c1
330
31
287
195
400 (1)
342,5
350
4xM8x25 = 202 c1 a-50 a a+57,5

a LE2 D406, D506, D656 300 LE2 D806 400 LE4 D806 400 (1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs. At top PG 1 1 1 2 Standard version Variant A05 Variant A11 c1 LE2 D LE4 D 218 218 218 218 218 ISO 2 x 20 2 x 32 2 x 20 1 x 20 1 x 20 1 x 20 4 x 20 or 2 x 25 or or 2 x 40 or 2 x 25 and 1 x 25 and 1 x 32 and 1 x 40 At bottom PG 1 1 1 2 ISO 2 x 20 2 x 32 2 x 20 1 x 20 1 x 20 1 x 20 4 x 20
c1
225 367
= 31
c1 201 190 201

Type of enclosure LE4 and LE8 D09D35 LE2 LE2 LE1 LE2 LE4 D09D35 D406 and LE4 D406 D506D656, LE4 D506 and D656 D806 and LE4 D806 K and LE8 K
325
x 13 and x 13 and x 13 and x 13 and
1 1 1 2
x 21 x 29 x 36 x 16
x 13 x 13 x 13 x 13
and and and and
2 2 2 2
x 21 x 29 x 36 x 16
or 2 x 25 or or 2 x 40 or 2 x 25 and 2 x 25 and 2 x 32 and 2 x 40
Schemes : page 2/23
2/22
Schemes

D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device
Schemes
LE4 K06, K09 LE4 D09D806
L1 L2 L3
LE4 K06, K09
LE4 D09D35
LE4 D406D656
LE4 D806, LE4 D09D656 with variant A04 or A05

A
A Q1 Q1 I KM1 O
A F1 Q1
Q1
F1
Q1
KM1
O I
18
Remote control
KM1
KM1
17
l 14 KM1
A2
A1
A1
KM1
A1
KM1
KM1
KM1
A2
LE8 K06, K09

L1 L2 L3
LE8 K06, K09

A Q1
Variant A05
A
Q1
O
Remote control
KM1
KM2
KM1 KM2
KM2
KM2 A1 KM1 A1 A1
KM1
A2
A2
A2
LE8 D09LE2 D806

L1 L2 L3
LE8 D09D35
A Q1 Q1
LE2 D406D806
A
F1
Q1
Q1
O
II
2 KM1
KM2
KM1
KM2
KM1
KM2
KM2
A1
KM1
A1
KM2
A1
KM1
A1
KM1
A2 A2
KM2
KM1
A2
14
S1
O Remote control ll
22 21
13
A2
KM1
KM2
KM1
A1
A1
A2
A2
13 22
21
KM2
KM2
A2
LE4 and LE8 K, LE4 and LE8 D09 and D12 LE4 D18D806, LE8 D18D35 and LE2 D406D806 All products LE4 and LE8 D09D35 LE4 and LE2 D406D806
A L3 L3 L3
2/23

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control 0.25 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal overload relay with 3 protected phases
Characteristics
(1)
IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947 IP 65 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as for the k contactors Self-extinguishing ABS
Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material
References
Non-reversing starters Starter LE1 M, combined with short-circuit protection components, provides type 1 or type 2 coordination, depending on the type of devices used.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 240 V 380 V 415 V 230 V 400 V kW kW kW kW 0.12 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.18 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 2.2 3 4 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 Setting range of thermal overload relay LR2 K (2) A 0.540.8 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 5.58 811.5 1014 1216 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LE1 M35pp05 LE1 M35pp06 LE1 M35pp07 LE1 M35pp08 LE1 M35pp10 LE1 M35pp12 LE1 M35pp14 LE1 M35pp16 LE1 M35pp21 LE1 M35pp22 Weight
533788
kg 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600
533789
0.25 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 LE1 M35pppp 3 3.7
Description
b v v v v v The standard version comprises: 1 TeSys contactor LC1 Kpp, 1 TeSys thermal overload relay LR2 K, 1 green Start button I, 1 red Stop/Reset button O/R, 1 yellow operating indicator.
b Control may be pulsed or maintained. b An earth terminal and a neutral terminal are provided on the bottom of the enclosure. b For safey applications, see enclosed starters: GV2 MC, LG1 K, LG1 D, LG7 K, LG7 D, LJ7 K, LG8 K and LJ8 K.
Variant
Starter without thermal overload relay LR2 K Delete the last 2 digits of the starter references selected above. Example: LE1 M35 pp
Replacement part
Description Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LC1 KppA80 Weight
Contactor
kg 0.180
(1) For characteristics of TeSys k contactor, see pages 6/8 and 6/9. For characteristics of TeSys thermal overload relay LR2 K, see pages 5/6 to 5/9. (2) Thermal overload relay fitted as standard. (3) The contactor coil is pre-wired between 2 phases of the power circuit. The codes indicated below therefore correspond to the power circuit voltage . Volts 24 220 230 240 380 400 415 a 50/60 Hz Code B7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 Example: 380/400 V 3-phase supply, 4 kW motor: LE1 M35Q716. Dimensions : page 2/25 Schemes : page 2/25
440 R7
2/24
Dimensions, schemes

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control 0.25 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal overload relay with 3 protected phases
Dimensions
LE1 M35 (1)
108 78
2
130 (5"1/8)
At bottom PG 2 x 13 to 2 x 21 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 Control by spring return pushbuttons
A 13 I

Enclosure type LE1 M At top PG 2 x 13 to 2 x 21 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25
(1) Can be mounted on machine panel or frame. Knock-outs for 4 x 13 P cable glands.
Schemes
LE1 M35
1/L1 3/L2
L1 L2 L3
Choice of type of control built into the product

Control by latching pushbuttons
5/L3
A A1
1 3 5 I
13
160
KM1
14
KM1
13
KM1
14
95
O/R
A2 96
2 4
14 A2
Reset/OR
O/R
A1
T1 T2 T3
Connection 220 V, 230 V, 240 V 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages
A L3 L3 Terminal 1
A1
KM1
H1
KM1
A2 H1
96
95
B Neutral L1 Terminal 2
2/25

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947 IP 55 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as for the model k contactors Polycarbonate (1) Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 230 V 400/ 440 V 500 V 690 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW 0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 0.25 0.55 0.55 0.55 1.1 0.75 0.37 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 2.2 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 1.5 Setting range of thermal trips A 11.6 Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth A 22.5 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Weight
References
533797
LE1 GVME06Kpp
kg 1.210
533798
1.62.5
33.5
LE1 GVME07Kpp
1.210
0.55 0.75 1.1
2.2 3 4
2.54
51
LE1 GVME08Kpp
1.210
2.2 3 4
46.3
78
LE1 GVME10Kpp
1.210
1.5 2.2 LE1 GVMEppKpp 2.2 3
3 4 5.5
4 5.5 7.5
5.5 7.5 9 11
610
138
LE1 GVME14Kpp
1.210
5.5 7.5
914
170
LE1 GVME16Kpp
1.210
Variants
533799
Description
Neutral terminal Description Enclosure without starter, with sealing kit fitted (references of combination motor starters for customer assembly, see pages 24520/2 and 24520/3) Description Padlocking device (4) 1 to 3 padlocks for GV2 ME operator (padlocking 4 to 8 mm is only possible in the O position) Mushroom Spring return (4) head Stop pushbutton Latching (4) Key release, 40 mm, IP 55 key n 455 red Turn to release Sealing kit Sold in lots of 1
Suffix to be added Weight to the starter kg reference (3) A59 Reference LE1 GVMEK Weight kg 0.740
LE1 GVMEK
Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Unit reference GV2 V01 Weight kg 0.075
1 1 1 1 10
GV2 K011 GV2 K021 GV2 K031 GV2 K04 (5) GV2 E01
0.052 0.160 0.115 0.120 0.012
IP 55 for temperature between + 5C and + 40C IP 55 for 10 GV2 E02 0.012 temperature between - 20C and + 40C (1) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (2) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz Item B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) Example: LE1 GVME06KF7A59. (4) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. (5) Padlockable in position "O" using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.
Schemes : page 2/27
2/26
Dimensions, schemes

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor
Dimensions
LE1 GVMEK
183
201
2
= 101 =
86 94

Enclosure type LE1 GV At top ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 At bottom ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25
Schemes
LE1 GVMEK
A
L1 L2 L3
Q1
Q1
External control I
KM1
KM1
KM1
Connections 220 V, 230 V, 240 V 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages
A L3 L3 Terminal 1
A2
A1
B Neutral L1 Terminal 2
2/27

2
Star-delta starters 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device (1)
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 659: LE3 K IP 657: LE3 D09D35 IP 557: LE3 D405D150 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LE3 K and LE3 D09D35 Sheet steel: LE3 D405D150
Material
References
Maximum operating rate: LE3 K: 12 starts/hour and LE3-D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds. LE3 D: an LAD S2 timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at the moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.
533804
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage - delta connection 220 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW kW 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 or 5.5 11 LE3 D12pp 15 18.5 30 37 63 75 30 37 55 75 110 132 30 37 59 75 110 132 30 37 59 75 110 147 11 18.5 11 22 11 22
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LE3 K065pp LE3 K095pp LE3 D09pp (4) LE3 D12pp LE3 D18pp LE3 D35pp LE3 D405pp LE3 D505pp LE3 D805pp LE3 D115pp LE3 D150pp
Weight
kg 1.460 1.460 3.650 3.650 3.750 5.160 8.160 8.150 14.000 24.500 24.500
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/16 and 6/17. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz LE3 K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 LE3 D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 2/31
2/28

Star-delta starters 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device
533805
Description
The standard version comprises: b LE3 K and LE3 D09D35: v 1 green Start button I, v 1 red Stop/Reset button O. b LE3 D405D150: v no pushbuttons on cover.
Description LE3 D12ppA04 No pushbuttons on cover Application LE3 D09D35 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (1) A04
533806
1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O
LE3 D405D150
A06
LE3 D09D805
A05
1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on starters LE3 D115 and D150
LE3 K065 and K095 A59 LE3 D09D805
Mechanical interlock Fitted as standard on starters LE3 K and LE3 D09D35 LE3 D12ppA05 (1) Example: LE3 D09F7A04
LE3 D405 to D150
A64
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/31
2/29
Dimensions

Dimensions
LE3 K065, K095
19 120
LE3 D09D35
=
165
150
348
146
84 175
186
c1 175.5 167 175.5
LE3 D405 and D505
LE3 D805D150
= a - 75 =
c1
330
287
195
b + 57,5
c1
225 367
= = c1 c1 + 15,5 a - 50 a a + 57,5
LE3 a D805 400 D1155 500 D1505 500 (1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs. At top PG 1 x 29 1 x 36 1 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 b 400 600 600 LE3 Standard version Variant A05 Variant A06 c1 D805 202 218 218
c1 190 194 194
b - 50
b (1)
b - 75
D115, D150 252 268

Type of enclosure LE3 D09D35 LE3 D405 LE3 D505 LE3 D805 LE3 K ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 1 x 32 1 x 40 1 x 40 4 x 20 At bottom PG 1 2 1 2 2 x 29, x 13 and 2 x 21 x 36, x 13 and 2 x 29 x 13 and 3 x 36 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 1 x 32, 2 x 20 and 2 x 25 1 x 40, 2 x 20 and 2 x 32 2 x 20 and 3 x 40 4 x 20
2 x 13 and 2 x 16
Schemes : page 2/31
2/30
Schemes

Schemes
LE3 K065 and K095
L1 L2 L3
A
W1 U1 V1
KM2
KM3
KM1
I
W2 U2 V2
KM2 KM1
2
KM3
A1
W1
U1
V1
KM3
KM1
T
A1 A1 A1
W2
U2
V2
T
A2
KM1
A2 A2
KM2
A2
LE3 D09D805
L1 L2 L3
LE3 D09D35
A
U1
V1
W1
KM2
KM3
KM1
I
W2 U2 V2
KM2
U1
V1
W1
KM1
18
17
KM2
KM3
A1 A1
W2
A1
A1
A1
U2
V2
KM1
A2
KM2
A2
KM3
A2
KM1
A2
KM2
A2
KM3
Note : in accordance with current installation regulations, short-circuit protection must be provided by fuses or a circuit-breaker.
LE3 D115 and D150

L1 L2 L3
A
U1
18
17
KM2
KM3
KM1
V1
W1
Remote control l
KM1 KM1
KM2
W1
W2
U2
V2
U1
V1
KM1 KM2 KM3

KM2
A1 A1
KA1
A1
W2
U2
V2
F2
B
KM1
A2
A1
KM2
A2
KA1
A2
KM3
A2
LD09 and D12 LE3 D18 to D150 All products LE3 D09D35 LE3 K and LE3 D405D150
A L3 L3 L3
A2
A1
Y
KM2
LE3 D405D805
A
Remote control I
KM2
KM1
KM2
KM2
KM1
KM3
KM1
2/31

2
Star-delta starters (1) 7.5 to 75 kW with isolating device
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 657: LE6 D09D18 IP 557: LE3 D326D806 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LE6 D Sheet steel: LE3 D
Material
References
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds. An LA2 DS2 timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at the moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors. Mains voltage - Delta connection 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 400 V kW kW kW kW 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 5.5 11 15 18.5 LE6 D12pp 30 37 11 18.5 30 37 55 75 11 22 30 37 59 75 11 22 30 37 59 75 Fuses to be fitted Basic reference, by the customer to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) Size Type aM A 20 25 40 63 80 125 160 Weight
533823
10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 0
LE6 D09pp LE6 D12pp LE6 D18pp LE3 D326pp LE3 D406pp LE3 D506pp LE3 D806pp
kg 3.900 3.900 4.850 7.650 16.900 17.000 27.500
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/16 and 6/17. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes: page 2/35
2/32

Star-delta starters 7.5 to 75 kW, with isolating device
533824
Description
The standard version comprises: b LE6 D09D18: v 1 green Start button I, v 1 red Stop/Reset button O. b LE3 D326D806: v no pushbuttons on cover
Protection LE6 D09 and D12 LE6 D18LE3 D806 LE6 D12ppA04 Power circuit 1 3-pole isolating device 1 3-pole isolating device Control circuit + 1 additional pole + 1 circuit-breaker GB2 CB08
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE6 D09D18 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (1) A04
533824
LE3 D326D806
A06
LE6 D09LE3 D806
A05
1 neutral terminal
LE6 D09LE3 D806
A59
LE6 D12ppA05
Mechanical interlock Fitted as standard on starters LE6 D09D18 (1) Example: LE6 D09F7A04.
LE3 D326D806
A64
Schemes: page 2/35
2/33
Dimensions

Dimensions
LE6 D09D18 LE3 D326
348
330
367
c1
= 186
c1 175.5 167 175.5
31
190
195 287
= 31
LE3 D406D806
= a-75 = 31
b+57,5
b (1)
b-50
4xM8x25
c1 a-50 a a+57,5
(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs. LE3 D406, D506 D806 a 400 500 b 500 700 c1 218 269

Type of enclosure LE6 D09D18 LE3 D326 LE3 D406 LE3 D506 LE3 D806 At top PG 1 x 21 1 x 29 1 x 36 1 x 36 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 1 x 32 1 x 32 1 x 40 1 x 40 At bottom PG 2 x 13, 2 x 16 and 1 x 21 2 x 13, 2 x 21 and 1 x 29 2 x 13, 2 x 29 and 1 x 36 2 x 13 and 3 x 36 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 2 x 20, 2 x 25 and 1 x 32 2 x 20, 2 x 25 and 1 x 32 1 x 40, 2 x 20 and 2 x 32 2 x 20 and 3 x 40
Schemes : page 2/35
2/34
b-75
225
Schemes

Schemes
LE6 D09D18
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3
A Q1 Q1
Q1
2 4 6
U1
V1
W1
O
3 3 5 5 3 1 1 1 5
2
KM2 KM1
KM2
2 4
KM3
6 6 2 4 2 4
KM1
U1
V1
W1
W2
U2
V2
KM2
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end)
KM2
KM3
A1 A1
KM1
A1
W2
U2
V2
KM1
A2
KM2
A2
KM3
A2
LE3 D326D806
3/L2 5/L3
1/L1
A F1 Q1
Q1
2 4 6
U1
V1
W1
KM2
2 4
KM3
6 2 4
KM1
W2
U2
V2
13 22
KM2
S1 Remote control
14
KM1 KM2
U1
V1
W1
21
KM2
A2
A2
LE6 D09 and D12 LE6 D18LE3 D806 All products LE6 D09D18 LE3 D326D806
A L3 L3 L3
A2
W2
U2
V2
KM3
KM1
A1
A1
KM1
KM2
KM3
A1
2/35
References

Replacement parts for starters without isolating device
500118_1
Heads for Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons

Description Flush, green I (1) For use on LE1 D09...D35 Unit reference ZB5 AA331 Weight kg 0.018
Projecting, red O (1) ZB5 AA331
LE1 D09...D35
ZB5 AL432
0.019
500120_1
Adaptation kit for head ZB5 AL432
LE1 D09 and D12
LAD 9091
0.002
LE1 D18...D35
LAD 91810
0.003
ZB5 AL432
Heads for Reset pushbuttons

Flush, blue R (2) LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AA0 0.022
500117_1
+ ZBA 639 (3)
0.001
Adaptation kit for head ZB5 AA0 + ZBA 639
LE1 D09 and D12
LAD 9092
0.002
LE1 or LE2 D18...D35 LAD 9091 LE3, LE6, LE4 or LE8 D09...D35
500119_1
LAD 91810
0.003
LAD 9T4
0.004
Heads for selector switches

3-position stay put LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AD3 0.024
ZB5 ADp 2-position stay put

500121_1
LE1 D09...D35
ZB5 AD2
0.024
3-position spring return to centre
LE1 D09...D35
ZB5 AD5
0.024
Contact blocks
1 N/O spring return ZEN L1111 1 N/C spring return
500122_1
LE1 D09...D35
ZEN L1111
0.010
LE1 D09...D35
ZEN L1121
0.010
Mounting for contact block
LE1 D09 and D12
LAD 90909
0.008
LEp D18...D35 (4)
LAD 91809
0.014
LAD 91809
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Remember to order adaptation kit LAD 9091 or LAD 91810, depending on size. Remember to order adaptation kit LAD 9092. Sold in lots of 10. LE1, LE2, LE3, LE4, LE6 or LE8.
2/36

Replacement parts for starters without isolating device
810175
Empty enclosures for D.O.L. starters without isolating device

Designed for use with LE1 D09 and D12 Head(s) mounted on cover Without Reference DE1 DS1A04 Weight kg 0.300
2
1 flush blue head R DE1 DS1A05 0.300 DE1 DS1A04
810176
1 flush green head I 1 projecting red head O
DE1 DS1
0.300
1 flush blue head R 1 switch
DE1 DS1A13
0.300
DE1 DS1A05
810173
LE1 D18...D35
Without
DE1 DS2A04
0.500
1 flush blue head R
DE1 DS2A05
0.500
DE1 DS1
810178
1 flush green head I 1 projecting red head O
DE1 DS2
0.500
1 flush blue head R 1 switch
DE1 DS2A13
0.500
DE1 DS1A13
2/37
References
Enclosed starters
Star-delta starters (1) 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device
533866
Star-delta starters
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage - delta connection 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW kW 90 160 160 185 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) LE3 F185pp Weight
kg 31.400
100
200
200
220
LE3 F225pp
33.000
110
533867
220
220
250
LE3 F265pp
50.800
160
280
280
315
LE3 F330pp
80.000
185
315
355
375
LE3 F400pp
82.000
Specifications
Enclosure LE3 F185F400 Metal, degree of protection IP 559
No pushbuttons on cover
LE3 F185F400
Connections LE3 F ppppp
LE3 F185F400 Pre-wired power and control circuit connections
Description For use on LE3 F185F400 Suffix to be added to the starter reference(4) A06
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/28 and 6/29. (2) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 48 110 220/230 230 240 380/400 400 415 50/60 Hz E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 For other voltages, see pages 5/118 to 5/125. (3) LC1 F185 and F225: contactors fitted with LX9 F coils, LC1 F265F400: contactors fitted with LX1 F coils. (4) Example: LE3 F185M7A06.
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/39
2/38
Dimensions, schemes
Enclosed starters
2
Star-delta starters 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device
Dimensions
LE3 Fppp
= a-75 =
b+57,5
b (1)
b-50
4xM8x25
c c1
a-50 a a+57,5
LE3 a F185, F225 600 F265 700 F330, F400 800 (1) + 14 mm with blanking
b (1) 700 900 1000 plugs.
c 303 303 403
c1 319 319 419
Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands Type of enclosure At top LE3 F185, F225 2 x 48 P LE3 F265400
b-75
At bottom 2 x 13 P and 4 x 48 P
Schemes
LE3 Fppp
2 L1 L2 L3 4 6 F1 KM3:5 F1 95 U1 V1 W1 3 3 5 5 3 1 1 1 5 O
Remote control
W2
U2
V2
13
KM2 53 54
14
53 (13)
KM2
KM3
KM1
22
21 96
KM1 U1 V1 W1
KM1 62 67
55
54 (14)
61
KM2 61 56
KM2 68
KA1 14 KM3 A2 A2 A1
W2
U2
V2
KM3 A1 62 A1 A1
A2
KM3:1
Note : in accordance with current installation regulations, each starter must be provided with short-circuit protection by fuses or a circuit-breaker.
A2
F2
KM1
KM2
KA1
13
2/39
References
Enclosed starters
Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device
References
Operational Minimum current c.s.a. of up to phase conductors A 16
533871
Fuses to be fitted separately aM A gG A 16
For use with relay LR2 D or kit LA9 D (to be ordered separately) LA9 D1275 (4)
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LE1 D123pp
Weight
mm2 2.5
kg 0.920
2
LE1 D123
17.5
1.5
20
LR2 D1321 (2)
LE1 D123pp
0.920
24
2.5
25
LR2 D1322 (2)
LE1 D255pp
1.015
32
32
LA9 D0975 (4)
LE1 D255pp
1.015
50
10
50
LE1 D405ppA04 (5) LE1 D405pp
4.820
533872
57
10
63
LR2 D3359 (2)
4.820
63
16
63
LE1 D655ppA04 (5) LE1 D655pp
4.850
76
16
80
LR2 D3363 (2)
4.850
90
25
100
LR2 D3365 (2)
LE1 D805pp
5.140
100 LE1 D405
35
100
LE1 D805ppA04 (5)
5.140
Specifications
Enclosure LE1 D12 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 659
LE1 D25
Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557
LE1 D40...D80
Metal, degree of protection IP 559
Control (2 pushbuttons mounted on enclosure cover) No pushbuttons on cover
LE1 D12D80
LE1 DpppppA04
Connections
LE1 D12D80
Pre-wired control circuit connections
(1) 3-phase 220/230 V, 240 V, 380/400 V or 415 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. (3) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7 ). (4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 Dpp75. (5) Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.
Schemes : page 2/43
2/40
Enclosed starters
Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE1 D12 and D25 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (3) A04
LE1 D12D80
A05
1 green Start button I and 1 red Stop button "O with 1 N/C contact (for distribution circuits without thermal overload relay) 1 2-position selector switch "O-I (O: Stop; I: Manual Start) 1 blue Reset button R Knock-outs for 4 x 16 mm plastic cable glands (instead of 4 x 13 mm plastic glands)
LE1 D12 and D25
A07
LE1 D12
A13
LE1 D12
A20
1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits)
LE1 D12D80
A59
Accessories (for customer assembly)

Description Start pushbutton latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) For use on LE1 D25D65 Reference LA9 D09907 Weight kg 0.060
Kits to provide Stop function without thermal overload relay fitted
LE1 D12
LA9 D1275
0.040
LE1 D25
LA9 D0975
0.020
Miniature control circuit fuse holder size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V Fuse supplied
LE1 D12
LA9 D931
0.040
LE1 D25
LA9 D941
0.025
Pilot light with neon bulb, red lens and locking ring
110 V
LE1 D12 and D25
LA9 D924
0.020
220 V
LE1 D12 and D25
LA9 D925
0.020
380, 415 V
LE1 D12 and D25
LA9 D926
0.020
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts, please consult your Regional Sales Office
LE1 D12 D80
LA1 DNpp
0.030
(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. Example: LE1 D123M7A04.
. Other versions Possible combinations of 2 variants. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 2/43
2/41
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
D.O.L. starters and equipment, without isolating device
Dimensions
LE1 D123 LE1 D255
166
150
2
120 140
88
142
101
LE1 D405, D655

=
LE1 D805
= =
135
185
165
312
195
307
150 161 (1)
105 181
165 c1
165 257
(1) 150 for LE1 DpppppA04 (without pushbuttons).

Type of enclosure LE1 D123 LE1 D255 LE1 D405 and LE1 D655 LE1 D805 At top 2 x 13 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P At bottom 2 x 13 P 2 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 36 P
Schemes : page 2/43
2/42
165
Schemes
Enclosed starters
D.O.L. starters and equipment, without isolating device
Schemes
D.O.L. starters and equipment for control in category AC-1
LE1 D123D805, LE1 DpppppA04
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LE1 D123
KM1/5 95 96
KM1 2 4 6
O
14
KM1 13 13 KM1 A2 O A1
Remote control
N W U V KM1/1
LE1 D255D805
KM1/5 95
LE1 DpppppA04, LE1 DpppppA05

KM1/5 95
14
O 18 KM1 17 13 14
13 22
21 96
96
14
KM1 A2 N KM1/1
KM1/1
KM1 A2
A1
13
A1
KM1
14
2/43
References
Enclosed starters
Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1 (1) (2), with isolating device
533903
References
Operational current up to A 16 Minimum c.s.a. of phase conductors mm2 2.5 Fuses to be fitted by the customer Size Type aM gG A A 10 x 38 16 For use with relay LR2 D or kit LA9 D (to be ordered separately) Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LE4 D126pp Weight
LA9 D0975 (4)
kg 1.960
17.5 LE4 D126 20
1.5
10 x 38
20
LR2 D1321 (2)
LE4 D126pp
1.960
2.5
10 x 38
20
LA9 D0975 (4)
LE4 D256pp
2.200
22
533904
2.5
10 x 38
25
LR2 D1322 (2)
LE4 D256pp
2.200
40
10
14 x 51
40
LE4 D406ppA04 (5)
5.770
45
10
14 x 51
50
LR2 D3357 (2)
LE4 D406pp
5.770
63 LE4 D406 76
16
22 x 58
63
LE4 D656ppA04 (5)
6.670
16
22 x 58
80
LR2 D3363 (2)
LE4 D656pp
6.670
90
25
22 x 58
100
LR2 D3365 (2)
LE4 D806pp (5)
7.100
100
35
22 x 58
100
LE4 D806pp (5)
7.100
Specifications
Enclosure LE4 D12 and D25 LE4 D40D80 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557 Metal, degree of protection IP 559
Control (2 pushbuttons mounted on enclosure cover)
LE4 D12D65
No pushbuttons on cover
LE4 Dppppp A04 LE4 D80 LE4 D12 and D25 LE4 D40D80
Isolating device with external operator
1 3-pole isolator + 1 additional pole 1 3-pole isolator and 1 circuit breaker GB2 CB08
Connections
LE4 D12D80
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections
(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. (3) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7 ) or 380/400 V (code Q7). (4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 D0975. (5) Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.
Schemes : page 2/46
2/44
Enclosed starters
Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1 (1) (2), with isolating device
Description No pushbuttons on cover For use on LE4 D12 and D25 Suffix to be added to the starter reference(3) A04
LE4 D12D80
A05
1 green Start button I and 1 red Stop button O with 1 N/C contact (for distribution circuits without thermal overload relay) 1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits)
LE4 D12 and D25
A07
LE4 D12D80
A59
Accessories (for customer assembly)

Description Start button latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) Kit to provide Stop function without thermal overload relay fitted For use on LE4 D12D65 Reference LA9 D09907 Weight kg 0.060
LE4 D12 and D25
LA9 D0975
0.020
Miniature control circuit fuse holder size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V Fuse supplied Pilot light with neon bulb, red lens and locking ring 110 V
LE4 D12 and D25
LA9 D941
0.025
LE4 D12 and D25
LA9 D924
0.020
220 V
LE4 D12 and D25
LA9 D925
0.020
380, 415 V
LE4 D12 and D25
LA9 D926
0.020
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts, please consult your Regional Sales Office
LE4 D12D80
LA1 DNpp
0.030
(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. (3) Example: LE4 D126M7A04.
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/47
2/45
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
D.O.L. starters and equipment, with isolating device
Dimensions
LE4 D126, D256 LE4 D406, D656
2
c c1
280
260
= 122
c c1 (1)
G a
= 31
31
LE4 D126 D256
c 132 144
c1 139 151
(1) c1 = c for LE4 DpppppA04 (without pushbuttons).
LE4 D806
= a-75 = 31
b+57,5
b (1)
b-50
4xM8x25 =
c c1
a-50 a a+57,5
(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.

Type of enclosure LE4 D126 LE4 D256 LE4 D406 LE4 D656 LE4 D806 At top 2 x 13 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 21 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P At bottom 2 x 13 P 2 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 21 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 36 P
Schemes : page 2/47
2/46
b-75
Schemes
Enclosed starters
D.O.L. starters and equipment, with isolating device
Schemes
D.O.L. starters and equipment for control in category AC-1
LE4 D126D806, LE4 DpppppA04
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LE4 D126 and D256

Q1/2 0 Q1 9 Q1 13 14
Q1 4 2 6
O KM1 18 2 4 6 l 17 1 3 5 KM1 13 KM1 A2 13 F1 Q1 95

Remote control
N 4 2 6 W U Q1/6
LE4 D406 and D656

Q1/2 F1 13
LE4 D806, LE4 DpppppA04 and DpppppA05

Q1/2 14
Q1 14
A1
14
96
95
95
22
O 18 14
96
21
96
13
l 17
KM1 13
KM1
14
A1
N Q1/6
KM1 A2
N Q1/1
KM1 A1
A2
13
14
2/47
References
Enclosed starters
integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers, for customer assembly
Empty metal enclosures
Type of enclosure Degree of protection IP 54 with drillings for door interlock mechanism (interlock not supplied), for customer assembly (1) For use on integral LD1, LD3 or LD5 LB Reference DE1 LT615
533912
Weight kg 2.110
LD1 or LD4 LC
DE1 LT215
2.110
LD5 LC
DE1 LT225
2.710
LD1 or LD4 LD
DE1 LT315
3.510

Type Non-adjustable DE1 LT615 For use on enclosure DE1 LT615 Colour of knob Red Black Reference LA9 LB320 LA9 LB321 Weight kg 0.200 0.200
DE1 LT215
Red Black
LA9 LC320 LA9 LC321
0.200 0.200
533912
DE1 LT225
Red Black
LA9 LC520 LA9 LC521
0.200 0.200
DE1 LT315 (LD1)
Red Black
LA9 LC320 LA9 LC321
0.200 0.200
DE1 LT315 (LD4)
Red Black
LA9 LC520 LA9 LC521
0.200 0.200
Separate component
Description Kit for padlockable knob on LD1 LC For use on For converting a black, non-padlockable control knob to a padlockable knob Reference LA9 LC393 Weight kg 0.100
DE1 LT215
(1) Enclosures supplied with drillings and fitted with removable blanking plugs, for addition of cable glands (to be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see page 2/50.
2/48
Enclosed starters
integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers, for customer assembly
Empty insulated enclosures
Type of enclosure Degree of protection IP 30 with rectangular cut-out to suit fascia of the contactor breaker Degree of protection IP 54 with drillings for door interlock mechanism (interlock not supplied), for customer assembly Degree of protection IP 30 with rectangular cut-out to suit fascia of the contactor breaker For use on integral LD1 LB Reference DE1 LB001
533913
Weight kg 0.750
LD1 LB
DE1 LB005
0.750
2
LD1 or LD4 LCp30 DE1 LC001 1.370
DE1 LC001
2/49
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
Enclosures
Metal enclosures, degree of protection IP 54

DE1 LT215, LT615 DE1 LT225, LT315
DE1 LT315 312 195
2
69 150
DE1 LT225 = = = 105 181

DE1 LT225 LT315 a 257 287 b 307 367 c 165 190
69
G a
G 165 192
H 165 225
Number of blanked-off cable entries for addition of cable glands

DE1 LT215 LT225 LT315 LT615 At top 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 bottom 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Cable min 10 14 10 14 10 24 10 14 max 12 18 12 18 12 30 12 18 For cable gland N Type 13 13M 21 21M 13 13M 21 21M 13 13M 36 36M 13 13M 21 21M
Insulated enclosures
DE1 LB001 DE1 LB005
104,75 183 8,5 = 109 =
201
145
183
= 109
145
DE1 LC001
123
114
183
280
= 122
2/50
260
201
Mounting of accessories
Enclosed starters
Integral 18
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanism LA9 LB32p
For mounting on LD1 LB030 + LBp LB03P pp and LD5 LB130 + LBp LB03P pp Door drillings
(1)
= = 54
148,5
65
= = 54
54
134
(1) Thickness: 5 mm max
Integral 32
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC32p and LA9 LC52p
For mounting on LD4 LCp30 and LCp40, LD5 LCp30 LD4 LCp30 Door drillings LD4 LCp40 LD5 LCp30
(1)
= =
182 = = 80
65
80
80
80
80
54
54
135
= 19 = = = 66
= 38 =
52 33 85
85 99 132
= 33
Integral 63
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p
For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30 LD4 LDp30 Door drillings LD5 LDp30
(1)
= = 275 = = 54 54
105
105
243
65
54
172 (LD4) 174 (LD5)
105
= 28 =
45 59 63 181 59
= 90
105
105
54
2/51
Characteristics
Enclosed starters
Type Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Electrical durability, AC-43 at 415 V Mechanical durability at Uc Maximum operating rate a at ambient temperature c With converter y 55 C
A V
integral 32 3 and 4 32 in AC-43 690 1.5 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles 3600 operating cycles/hour 600 operating cycles/hour
integral 63 3 63 in AC-3 690 1.2 million operating cycles 5 million operating cycles 3600 operating cycles/hour 600 operating cycles/hour
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC: 60947-1, 60047-2, 60947-3, 60947-4-1, 60947-6-2 VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660 BS: 5424, 4752, 4941 NEN, NBN ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL, NEMKO, NKK, VE, RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS, PTB, SEMKO TH TH - 25+ 60 - 20+ 60 - 40+ 80 - 40+ 80 - 25+ 50 - 25+ 50 - 25+ 70 - 25+ 70 Energised state: 3 gn Energised state: 3 gn De-energised state: 3 gn De-energised state: 3 gn Energised state: 8 gn Energised state: 8 gn De-energised state: 8 gn De-energised state: 8 gn IP 20B IP 20B Protection against direct finger contact Protection against direct finger contact Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and the requirement of 22-12-81 (JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982) and conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072 3000 3000
Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device
a c (1)
Operation Storage Operation Storage
C C C C
Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration Shock resistance Permissible acceleration Degree of protection Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating positions (without derating)
5100 Hz Impulse duration: 11 ms Conforming to IEC 144 and 529 Conforming to VDE 0106
From fixing plane (fore-aft tilt)
From main axis (left-right tilt)
From main axis (left-right tilt)

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Voltage limits at y 55 C Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz a 60 Hz c With converter Operating Drop-out a Inrush Sealed c (1) Inrush Sealed a 50 Hz a "C" 50/60 Hz "O" c (1) "C" O V V V 21660 21600 24, 48, 110 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.7 Uc 160 (50 Hz), 185 (60 Hz) 12 (50 or 60 Hz) 250 for 50 ms 4 4 (50 Hz) 5 (60 Hz) 925 720 2535 1020 24660 24600 24, 48, 110 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.7 Uc 375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz) 25 (50 or 60 Hz) 300 for 50 ms 8 8 (50 Hz) 11 (60 Hz) 1235 720 2540 1525
(1) With converter (2) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
Schemes : page 2/61
2/52
Enclosed starters
Type Rated thermal current (Ith) Frequency limits of the operational current Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Heat dissipation in the power circuits of the contactor breaker and its protection module Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 y 40 C A Hz Conforming to IEC 60947-4 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Operational current Power per pole, hot state kV V A W integral 32 32 4060 8 690 1.6 2.5 1.6 1.8 integral 63 63 4060 8 690 25 4.4
4 1.8
6.3 2
10 2
16 3.4
25
32
32 5
40 5.8
50 7
63 9
4.8 6
I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4 A I peak conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA Operational voltage V
Conforming to IEC 60947-6-2 ensuring continuity of service
Total breaking time Thermal stress limit Cabling
Tightening torque
12 x Ith (1) 12 or 15 x Ith (1) 105 105 220/ 380/ 440 480/ 600/ 220/ 380/ 440 480/ 600/ 240 415 525 690 240 415 525 690 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.8 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 Value of cos kA rms 50 50 50 (2) 20 5 (3) 50 50 40 35 10 Icu (O-t CO) kA rms 50 50 35 (2) 20 5 50 50 40 35 10 Ics (O-t-CO-t-CO) kA rms 50 50 50 15 4 50 50 50 30 10 Icu = Ics (O-t-CO-t-rCO) O : breaking short-circuit current (open) t : time CO : closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open) (manual) rCO : closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (remote control) ms 4 4 100 x 103 300 x 103 With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz A2s Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a. Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a. 1 x 10 or 2 x 6 1x1 1 x 50 or 2 x 35 1x6 Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1x1 2 x 25 1x6 Flexible cable with cable end mm 2 mm 2 1 x 10 or 2 x 6 1x1 1 x 50 1x6 Solid cable N.m 2 6

Module type Protection Standard motors, frequent starting, distribution circuits Conforming to standards Number of poles Number of protected poles Rated operational voltage Maximum continuous current Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping class Instantaneous trip current setting range Tripping tolerance LB1 LC03M Standard motors LB6 LC03M Frequent starting LB1 LCppL Distribution circuits LB1 LD03P Standard motors NF C 63-650 3 3 690 1363 10/13... 45/63 With LB1 LD03M Standard motors LB6 LD03P Frequent starting LB1 LD03L Distribution circuits
Thermal protection
V A A C
IEC 60947-4 type 2 (Iq = 50 kA) and 63-650 63-650 63-120 3 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 4 690 690 690 0.432 0.432 1032 0.25/0.40 6.3/10... 23/32 23/32 - 20+ 60 With Without Without 10 612 (4) 20 % 612 36
63-650 3 3 690 1363 10/13... 45/63 With
63-650 3 3 690 1363
63-120 3 3 690 1363 10/13... 45/63 Without 36
Without 612
Irth max.
20 20 Fixed at 15 612 (4)

Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking V Operating cycles IEC 60947, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, VDE 0113 690 10 000 1, 2 or 3 padlocks (shank 8 mm max. and 5 mm min.). When flush mounting, interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible.
(1) Above this value, the breaker trips. (2) Conforming to BS 4752: 36 kA cycle P2, 50 kA cycle P1. (3) Cos 0.7. (4) Usual setting range 910 Irth max.
Schemes : page 2/61
2/53
References
Enclosed starters
Enclosures
533933
Empty metal enclosures

For use on Degree of protection IP 54 (1) integral 32 with drillings for door interlock mechanism (interlock not supplied). For customer assembly Type of enclosure Reference LD4 DE1 LT215 Weight kg 2.110
LD5
DE1 LT225
2.710
2
integral 63 LD4 DE1 LT315 3.510
(1) Enclosures supplied with drillings and fitted with removable blanking plugs, for addition of cable glands (to be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see page 2/60. DE1 LT215
2/54
References
Enclosed starters

Type Non-adjustable
(IP 54)
Colour of knob Red Reference LA9 LC320 Weight kg 0.200
For use on enclosure DE1 LT215
DE1 LT225 or DE1 LT315
Red
LA9 LC520
0.200
2/55
References
Enclosed starters
integral 32 and 63 contactor breakers for control and protection of motors
533934

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Operational current Breaking capacity (Iq) for Ue y 415 V kA Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight
kg

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop
2
LD4 LC030p
7.5
15
15
18.5
25
32
50
LD4 LC030p
1.450
15
30 33
33
37
55
63
50
LD4 LD030p
3.800
533935

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Operational current Breaking capacity (Iq) for Ue y 415 V kA Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight
kg

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 7.5 LD5 LC030p LD5 LD030p (4) 15 15 18.5 25 32 50 LD5 LC030p (4) 2.800
15
30 33
33
37
55
63
50
7.600
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see page opposite. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380/ 415 440 480 500 600 400 50 Hz LDp LC, LD B D E F M M U Q N N S 60 Hz LDp LC LDp LD c (3) LDp LC, LD BC BC BD CC CC D CE ED FC K FD FC FC MC LC MC/ PU7 MC MC MC Q UX Q Q S S
660 Y
(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing contactor breakers). (4) It is essential to provide electrical locking for reversing contactor breakers integral 32.
Schemes : page 2/61
2/56
References
Enclosed starters
integral 32 and 63 contactor breakers
Motor protection modules (for customer assembly)
533936
Thermal-magnetic protection, compensated and differential for normal starting motors

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 400 V 440 V 480/ 600/ 240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 0.06 g 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 g g g g 1.1 1.5 2.2 4 7.5 11 15 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 g g 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 4 7.5 11 15 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 7.5 11 15 18.5 25 33 40 g g 0.37 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.7 5.5 10 15 18.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 25 33 40 10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55 g g 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 7.5 11 18.5 25 10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55 Thermal setting range (Irth min. to Irth max.) A 10...13 13...18 18...25 23...32 28...40 35...50 45...63 0.25...0.4 0.4...0.63 0.63...1 1...1.6 1.6...2.5 2.5...4 4...6.3 6.3...10 10...16 16...25 23...32 10...13 13...18 18...25 23...32 28...40 35...50 45...63 Thermal setting range (Irth min. to Irth max.) A Magnetic Reference setting range (6...12 Irth max) A 2.4...4.8 3.8...7.6 6...12 9.5...19 15...30 24...48 38...76 60...120 95...190 150...300 190...380 78...156 108...216 150...300 190...380 240...480 300...600 380...760 LB1 LD03P16 LB1 LD03P21 LB1 LD03P22 LB1 LD03P53 LB1 LD03P55 LB1 LD03P57 LB1 LD03P61 LB1 LC03M03 LB1 LC03M04 LB1 LC03M05 LB1 LC03M06 LB1 LC03M07 LB1 LC03M08 LB1 LC03M10 LB1 LC03M13 LB1 LC03M17 LB1 LC03M22 LB1 LC03M53 LB1 LD03M16 LB1 LD03M21 LB1 LD03M22 LB1 LD03M53 LB1 LD03M55 LB1 LD03M57 LB1 LD03M61 Weight
LB1 LC03Mpp
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 Weight
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max. for mounting on integral 32
533936
Magnetic only protection, for frequent starting motors

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 400 V 440 V 480/ 600/ 240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 Magnetic Reference setting range (6...12 Irth max) A LB6 LC03M06 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 4 7.5 11 15 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.7 5.5 10 15 18.5 1.1 1.5 3 4 7.5 11 18.5 25 9.5...19 15...30 24...48 38...76 60120 LB6 LC03M17 7.5 11 15 95...190 150...300 190...380 78...156 108...216 150...300 190...380 240...480 300...600 380...760 LB6 LC03M22 LB6 LC03M53 LB6 LD03M16 LB6 LD03M21 LB6 LD03M22 LB6 LD03M53 LB6 LD03M55 LB6 LD03M57 LB6 LD03M61 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 LB6 LC03M07 LB6 LC03M08 LB6 LC03M10 LB6 LC03M13
LB6 LC03Mpp
kg 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max, for mounting on integral 32

g 1.1 1.5 2.2 4

3 5.5 5.5 4 9 9 5.5 11 11 7.5 15 15 9 22 22 11 25 25 15 33 33 g There are no standard power 7.5 10 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22 25 33 33 45 40 55 ratings for these motors.
Schemes : page 2/61
2/57
References
Enclosed starters
integral 32 and 63 contactor breakers for control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1
533937
3 and 4-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Rated thermal current Ith y 40 C A Maximum operational current AC-1 y 40 C A Maximum operational voltage V Breaking capacity Iq for Ue y 415 V kA Number of poles Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight
kg

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop
2
LD4 LC040p
32
32
690
50
3 4
1.450 1.780
63
63
690
50
LD4 LD030p
3.800
Protection modules (for customer assembly)

Thermal setting range (Irth min. to Irth max.) A For integral 32 6.3...10 Magnetic setting range (3...6 Irth max) A Number of poles Number of protected poles Reference Weight
kg
533937
30...60
3 4
3 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3
LB1 LC03L13 LB1 LC04L13 LB1 LC05L13 LB1 LC03L17 LB1 LC04L17 LB1 LC05L17 LB1 LC03L22 LB1 LC04L22 LB1 LC05L22 LB1 LC03L53 LB1 LC04L53 LB1 LC05L53
0.400 0.500 0.500 0.400 0.500 0.500 0.400 0.500 0.500 0.400 0.500 0.500
LB1 LD03Lpp
10...16
48...95
3 4
16...25
75...150
3 4
23...32
95...190
3 4
For integral 63 10...13 13...18 18...25 23...32 28...40 35...50 45...63 39...78 54...108 75...150 95...190 120...240 150...300 190...380 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 LB1 LD03L16 LB1 LD03L21 LB1 LD03L22 LB1 LD03L53 LB1 LD03L55 LB1 LD03L57 LB1 LD03L61 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380/ 415 440 400 50 Hz LDp LC, LD B D E F M M U Q N N 60 Hz LDp LC LDp LD c (3) LDp LC, LD BC BC BD CC CC D CE ED FC K FD FC FC MC LC MC MC MC MC Q UX
480 Q Q
500 S
600 S S
660 Y
(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.
Schemes : page 2/61
2/58
References
Enclosed starters
Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories
533939
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20)

For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Composition Reference Weight
LD4 or LD5 Mounted on RH side integral + LA1 LC030
1 block of 6 instantaneous contacts comprising: 3 signalling contacts contactor state 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit 1 signalling contact tripped 1 signalling contact control knob in any position other than Auto
LA1 LC010 2 1 1 1 1
kg 0.280
2
LA1 LC012 0.220
1 block of 5 instantaneous contacts comprising: 3 signalling contacts contactor state 2 1 signalling contact tripped 1 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit 1
533940
Isolating blocks
For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Composition Reference Weight
LD4 Mounted on LH side integral + LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC070p
1 control circuit isolating block (1 or 2 blocks per unit)
LA1 LC030
kg 0.035
LD5 Mounted on LH side
1 control circuit isolating block
LA1 LC031
0.100
Electrical tripping devices

For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Function Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (1) Weight
LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 add-on block
533941
1 undervoltage trip
Time delay LA1 LC070 p 0.2 s Instantaneous LA1 LC072 p Instantaneous LA1 LC071 p
kg 0.150 0.150 0.150
or 1 shunt trip
Remote electrical reset devices

For use on LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 add-on block integral + LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p Type and number of blocks per unit 1 remote electrical reset block Control voltage 24 V 50/60 Hz 42 V 50 Hz 48 V 50/60 Hz 100/127 V 50/60 Hz 200/240V 50/60 Hz Reference LA1 LC052B Weight kg 0.320
LA1 LC052E
0.320
LA1 LC052F
0.320
LA1 LC052M
0.320
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/ 400 50 Hz B E F M U Q 60 Hz B E F F M M Q
415 N
440 N N
Schemes : page 2/61
2/59
Dimensions, schemes
Enclosed starters
2

Enclosures
Dimensions
Metal enclosures, degree of protection IP 54
DE1 LT215 DE1 LT225, LT315
Insulated enclosure
DE1 LC001
= = =
= =
123
280
69
= 105 a
= a = = G = 183 122
Number of blanked-off cable entries

DE1 LT215 DE1 LT215 LT225 LT315 a 181 257 287 b 312 307 367 c 150 165 190 G 105 165 195 H 195 165 225 LT225 LT315 At top 2 1 1 1 1 1 bottom 1 2 2 2 2 2 Cable min 10 14 10 14 10 24 max 12 18 12 18 12 30 For cable N 13 21 13 21 13 36 gland Type 13M 21M 13M 21M 13M 36M
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanism LA9 LC52p

integral 32, for mounting on LD4 LC030 and LC040, LD5 LC030 LD4 LC030 LD4 LC040 LD5 LC030 integral 63, for mounting on LD4 LD030 and LD5 LD030 LD4 LD030 LD5 LD030
thickness 5 mm max thickness 5 mm max
114
DE1 LT225 =
260
195
DE1 LT315 H
2x5,5
Door drillings
105
105 275
182
65
243
65
= = 54
105
54
135
= 19 = = = 66
= 38 = 52 33 85
85 = 99 33 132
54
172 (LD4) 174 (LD5)
= 28 = = = 90
105
45 59 63 181 59
Schemes
Contactor breakers with protection module LB p
integral 32 LD4 LC0p0 + LB1 LC0pp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 N1
LB6 LC03M
integral 63 LD4 LD030 + LB1 LD03p

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
105
80
80
80
80
LB6 LD03M
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A1
A1
A2
Q1
A2
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
4/T2
2/60
6/T3
6/T3
N2
6/T3
= = 54
80
Schemes
Enclosed starters
Schemes (continued)
Reversing contactor breakers with protection module LBp
integral 32 LD5 LC030 + LB1 LC03M
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
integral 63 LD5 LD030 + LB1 LD03M or P

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A1
A2
A1
A2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A2
A1
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
LB6 LC03M
LB6 LD03M
Add-on blocks, integral 32 and 63

For contactor breaker LD4 and reversing contactor breaker LD5 Mounted on RH side
Breaker
6/T3
6/T3
A2
A1
For contactor breaker LD4 Mounted on LH side
LA1 LC010 13 23 31
LA1 LC012 13 23 31
LA1 LC020 13 23 31
LA1 LC025 13 23 31
LA1 LC001 41 53
LA1 LC030 (64) (63) 54 53
Isolator
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
42
54
96
98
98
Trip signalling
1 or 2 LA1 LC030
98
95
95
95
06
08
16
Control knob position signalling
For reversing contactor breaker LD5 Mounted on LH side

LA1 LC031 53 63
Isolator
15
18
Auto
+0
05
05
08
Tripping devices (1) for LD4, LD5 LA1 LC071 LA1 LC070, LC072
C1 D1
95
96
Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD4, LD5 LA1 LC052p
Auto Trip + RESET
U< C2 D2
54
64
B4 B2 B3
B1
(1) For contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers already fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 instantaneous auxiliary contact block.
2/61
References
Enclosed starters
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)
533963
Non-reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 230 V 415 V kW kW 0.06 LG7 K06 0.06 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 9 Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips 440 V kW 0.06 0.12 0.18 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 9 9 A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 Dust & damp protected starter Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) LG7 K06pp02 LG7 K06pp03 LG7 K06pp04 LG7 K06pp05 LG7 K06pp06 LG7 K06pp07 LG7 K06pp08 LG7 K06pp10 LG7 K09pp14 LG7 D12pp16 LG7 D18pp20 LG7 D18pp21 Weight
kg 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.450 1.600 1.630 1.630
533964
0.75 1.1 1.5 3 4 LG7 D12 with padlocking facility fitted as standard 4
Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG7 K09, b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (3), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases. For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.
Variants (pre-assembled) See page 2/65.

(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
LG7 K
Volts a 12 50/60 Hz Code J7 24 B7 36 C7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 127 FC7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 230/ 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 400/ 415 N7 440 R7 500 S7 660/ 690 Y7
LG7 D
Volts a 24 50/60 Hz Code B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7
(3) LG7 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LG7 K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Other versions
Starters for voltages other than those indicated above. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 2/67
2/62
Enclosed starters
533965
Non-reversing starters (with rotary operator for control of isolation)

Enclosure cannot be opened when energised in position I.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 230 V 415 V kW kW 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.5 3 4 4 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 9 Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips 440 V kW 0.06 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 9 9 A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 Dust & damp protected starter Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) LG1 K065 pp02 LG1 K065 pp03 LG1 K065 pp04 LG1 K065 pp05 LG1 K065 pp06 LG1 K065 pp07 LG1 K065 pp08 LG1 K065 pp10 LG1 K095 pp14 LG1 D122 pp16 LG1 D182 pp20 LG1 D182 pp21 Weight
LG1 K
kg 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 1.120 1.270 1.290 1.290
Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation, b lockable Emergency Stop (red/yellow switch disconnector), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases. For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.

(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
LG1 K
Volts a 12 50/60 Hz Code J7 24 B7 36 C7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 127 FC7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 230/ 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 400/ 415 N7 440 R7 500 S7 660/ 690 Y7
LG1 D
Volts a 24 50/60 Hz Code B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/67
2/63
Enclosed starters
533966
Reversing starters
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 230 V 415 V kW kW 0.06 LG8 K06 0.06 0.09
(with pushbutton control of isolation)

Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips 440 V kW 0.06 A 0.160.25 Dust & damp protected starter Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) LG8 K06pp02 Weight
kg 1.640
0.12
0.250.40
LG8 K06pp03
1.640
0.18
0.18
0.400.63
LG8 K06pp04
1.640
0.12
0.25
0.25
0.631
LG8 K06pp05
1.640
0.25
0.55
0.55
11.6
LG8 K06pp06
1.640
0.37
0.75
1.1
1.62.5
LG8 K06pp07
1.640
0.75
1.5
1.5
2.54
LG8 K06pp08
1.640
533967
1.1
2.2
46.3
LG8 K06pp10
1.640
1.5
610
LG8 K09pp14
1.640
5.5
5.5
914
LG8 K12pp16
1.640
LG8 K09 with padlocking facility fitted as standard
Specifications of reversing starters Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG8 K09, b Emergency stop (3), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b control by selector switch 1-2, position non maintained, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases. For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.

(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts a 12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/ 50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690 Code J7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Y7 (3) LG8 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LG8 K09: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Other versions
Starters for higher power ratings. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 2/67
2/64
Enclosed starters
Variants
Description With Emergency Stop No control pushbuttons Application LG1, LG7, LG8 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (2) A04
With Emergency Stop 2 pushbuttons with arrows A and E (latching) 1 Stop button O Without Emergency Stop 2 pushbuttons with arrows A and E (non latching) Without Emergency Stop With Emergency Stop, mushroom head
LG8 K06
A10
LG8
A14
LG1
A37
Without Emergency Stop (when the Emergency Stop is on the machine)
LG7, LG8
A39
With padlocking facility (fitted as standard as from LG1 K09 or LG7 K09) 1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on starters ordered for use on 240 V (U7) supply Short-circuit signalling block
LG1 K06, LG7 K06 LG1, LG7, LG8
A29 A59
LG7
A12
Vacuum valve for compressor
LG7 D
A40
Without circuit-breaker
LG1, LG7, LG8
(3)
Possible combinations of variants for the selected starter type (4)

Starter type LG1 K LG7 K06 LG7 K09 LG7 D12 LG8 K06 A04 A10 A12 A14 A29 A37 (5) A39 A40 A59
LG8 K09
Combination possible
Combination not possible
(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Example: LG7 D12M716A04 . (3) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LG1 K065pp08 becomes LG1 K065pp. (4) Example: LG8 K095ppA04A39A59. (5) LG1 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LG1 K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
2/65
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
Starters without isolator

LG1 K06, K09 LG1 D12, D18 LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18 LG8 K06, K09, K12
120
(1)
2
120 165 84 175
(2)
150
146 (2) 177 (1) 84 175
(1) Emergency Stop for starters < 3 kW (2) Emergency Stop for starters u 3 kW (3) Only for LG7 At top 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
150
165

Type of enclosure LG1 K and LG1 D LG7 K and LG7 D LG8 K At bottom 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
Schemes : page 2/67
2/66
165
(3)
Schemes
Enclosed starters
D.O.L. starters
LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18
L3 L2 L1
LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18 380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7 220/230 V, code M7
Ph
Q1 2 T3 4 T2 6 T1
KM1/1
Q2
KM1 14
S1 14
13
5 5
1 1
3 3
S2 12
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
KM1 KM1/5 N A1
LG7 K06
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3
LG7 K09, D12, D18
A2
KM1
11
13
LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18 380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7 220/230 V, code M7
D1 D2 Ph KM1/1 13 13 S1 14 21 12 11 E1 E2 S1 21 KM1 22 S2 14 KM2 A1 53 KM1 KM2 KM2 22 13
1/L1
3/L2
Q1 Q1
5/L3
KM1 2 4 6 14 2 4 6 1 3 5 F1 S2 E1 E2 12 KM1 KM1/5 N A1

KM1
KM1 2 4 6 U1 2 V1 4 W1 6
Reversing starters
LG8 K06
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
W1
U1
V1
LG8 K09, K12
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LG8 K06, K09, K12 380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7 220/230 V, code M7
D1 D2 Ph
Q1 Q1
KM2/5
54
KM1
KM2
S2 14
KM1 A1 53
A2
KM2/1 N
2/67
A2
54
10
02
13
KM1
KM2
A2
11
References
Enclosed starters
533981
Non-reversing starters with integral transformer

Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply
(with pushbutton control of isolator function)
LJ7 K
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50 Hz in category AC-3 380/400 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4
Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610
Dust and damp protected starter Reference (1) LJ7 K06Q702 LJ7 K06Q703 LJ7 K06Q704 LJ7 K06Q705 LJ7 K06Q706 LJ7 K06Q707 LJ7 K06Q708 LJ7 K06Q710 LJ7 K09Q714
Weight
kg 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270
Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard on LJ7 K09, b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (2), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA.
Variants (3)
Description With Emergency Stop No control pushbuttons Without Emergency Stop LJ7 (when the Emergency Stop is on the machine) With padlocking facility LJ7 K06 (fitted as standard on LJ7 K09) Without circuit-breaker LJ7 For use on LJ7 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (4) A04 A39 A29 (5)
(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected, it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme). (2) LJ7 K06 (P y 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LJ7 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/400 V 50 Hz. (3) Possible combination of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ7 K06. Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04A29A39. Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ7 K09Q714A04A39. (4) Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04. (5) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ7 K06Q702 becomes LJ7 K06Q7 .
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/71
2/68
Enclosed starters
533982
Reversing starters with integral transformer

Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply
(with pushbutton control of isolator function) LJ8 K Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50 Hz in category AC-3 380/400 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 Dust and damp protected starter Reference (1) LJ8 K06Q702 LJ8 K06Q703 LJ8 K06Q704 LJ8 K06Q705 LJ8 K06Q706 LJ8 K06Q707 LJ8 K06Q708 LJ8 K06Q710 LJ8 K09Q714 Weight
kg 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650
Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard on LJ8 K09, b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (2), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA.
Variants (3)
Description With Emergency Stop No control pushbuttons Without Emergency Stop LJ8 (when the Emergency Stop is on the machine) With padlocking facility LJ8 K06 (fitted as standard on LJ8 K09) Without circuit-breaker LJ8 For use on LJ8 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (4) A04 A39 A29 (5)
(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected, it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme). (2) LJ8 K06 (P y 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LJ8 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/400 V 50 Hz. (3) Possible combination of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ8 K06. Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04A29A39. Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ8 K09. Example : LJ8 K09Q714A04A39. (4) Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04 . (5) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ8 K06Q702 becomes LJ8 K06Q7.
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/71
2/69
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
Dimensions
LJ7 K06, LJ8 K06
120
150
2
177 84 175
LJ7 K09, LJ8 K09

120
150
146
84 175
Cut-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands at the top and at the bottom 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P.
2/70
165
165
Schemes
Enclosed starters
Schemes
LJ7 K06
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 1
LJ7 K09
1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
4A KM1/1 F1 4A
KM1/1
F1
D1
D2
Q1
Q1 T1
X1
X1
13 1
13
13 1
T1 5 6 1 2 3 4
2
14 13
1 2
3 4
11 14
KM1 U1 2 V1 4 W1 6
KM1
U1 2 V1 4 W1 6
F1
E1 E2
KM1/5
KM1/5
S2
S2
A1 12
KM1
A2
Reversing starters
LJ8 K06
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
F1 KM2/5
S1 12
Q1
21
11
KM2 22 T1 1 3 5 2 4 6
KM1 22
KM1
KM2
400/24 V S2 25 VA
54
24
14
KM1 53
S2
KM2 53
KM2/1
A1
KM1 A2 A2
A1
54
10
23
02
13
21
KM2
LJ8 K09
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
D1
D2
F1 KM2/5
S1 12
Q1
21
11
KM2 E1 E2 22 2 4 6 T1
KM1 22
KM1
KM2
400/24 V S2 25 VA
54
24
14
KM1 53
S2
KM2 53
KM2/1
A1
KM1 A2 A2
A1
54
10
23
02
13
21
KM2
A2
KM1
A1 12
11 14
400/24 V 25 VA
5 6
KM1 S1
KM1 S1
400/24 V 25 VA
14
2/71
Selection guide
Soft starters for asynchronous motors
Applications
Starting simple machines
Soft starting and deceleration of simple machines
Power range for 5060 Hz supply (kW) Single phase 110230 V (kW) 3-phase 200240 V (kW) 3-phase 200480 V (kW) 3-phase 230415 V (kW) 3-phase 208690 V (kW) 3-phase 230690 V (kW) 3-phase 380415 V (kW) 3-phase 400 V (kW) Drive Output frequency Type of control Transient overtorque
0.3711 0.372.2 0.3711
0.7575 0.757.5 7.575 1.515 2245
Functions Number of functions Number of preset speeds Number Analog inputs of I/O Logic inputs Analog outputs Logic outputs Relay outputs Communication Integrated Available as an option
1 Combined with TeSys U controller-starter
Standards and certifications
IEC/EN 60947-4/2 e, UL, CSA, C-Tick, CCC, GOST
References
ATS 01N1ppFT
ATS 01N2pppp
Pages
Please consult our catalogue Soft starters and variable speed drives.
2/72
2 2
Soft starting and deceleration of pumping and ventilation machines
3900 3710 TCS (Torque Control System) 3900
36 1 PTC probe 4 1 2 3 Modbus Fipio, Profibus DP, DeviceNet, Ethernet TCP/IP
IEC/EN 60947-4-2, EMC class A and B e, UL, CSA, DNV, C-Tick, NOM, CCC, CCIB, GOST
ATS 48pppQ
ATS 48pppY
Please consult our catalogue Soft starters and variable speed drives.
2/73
Selection guide
Enclosed starters
Starters for AS-Interface cabling system
Applications
D.O.L. starters, reversing or non-reversing
Composition
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker Contactor or contactor pair AS-Interface module LA9 Z32811
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker Low consumption contactor or contactor pair Electronic control device
Operator
Rotary knob
Degree of protection
IP 55
Enclosure
Insulated
Sensor connection
With
With, and local/line control
Without
With
Contactors
Non-reversing Reversing
LF7 PppD LF8 PppD
LF7 PppDA79 LF8 PppDA79
LF1 PppD LF2 PppD
Pages
2/88 and 2/89
2/86 and 2/87
2/74
Pushbuttons
IP 65
IP 55
Metal
Insulated
Metal
With
Without
With
With
LF1 MPppD LF2 MPppD
LF1 MPppDA79 LF2 MPppDA79
LF1 MppD LF2 MppD
LF1 M ppDA78 LF2 M ppDA78
LF1 MppDA79 LF2 MppDA79
LF1 MMppD LF2 MMppD
LF1 MM ppDA79 LF2 MM ppDA79
2/75
Presentation
Enclosed starters
Presentation
LF7 and LF8 starters These are the entry level models in our range of starters which communicate on the AS-Interface. These starters incorporate interface module LA9 Z32811 and are subdivided according to the different power connection methods (cable gland or Harting plug-in connectors) and Local/AS-Interface remote operating modes. These economical devices provide a simple and effective solution for building decentralised motor starters as near as possible to the motor.
LF1 and LF2 starters These complete, intelligent starters incorporate pre-programmed functions and a fault-management function. They are available in insulated or metal enclosures to suit different environments. When fitted with Harting plug-in connectors (variant A74), they drastically reduce setting-up times, thereby increasing the availability of machines.
Decentralisation of machine starters

These enclosed starters which communicate on AS-Interface are pre-assembled and ready-to-use with a minimum of cabling. They are designed for building decentralised electrical installations, i.e. the starters are installed as near as possible to the motors they are to control. The decentralisation of the starters provides obvious advantages regarding power distribution to machines not grouped together, for example: motors driving a conveyor system. Traditional installation
Equipment floor-standing enclosure
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker Programmable controller with its inputs/outputs Contactor + thermal overload relay
Decentralised installation
Distribution enclosure
AS-Interface
Power
M
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker Programmable controller AS-Interface starter
Power is distributed either by prefabricated trunking or by cable. These starters incorporate all the functions necessary for the management of motors (control, protection, isolation, etc.), and comprise: - a thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker, - a low consumption contactor (non reversing) or contactor pair (reversing), - an electronic control device or, for LF7 and LF8, an AS-Interface module, LA9 Z32811. Designed primarily for use with 3-phase a.c. motors, they can nevertheless be used with single-phase or d.c. motors. In these applications, the 3 phases of the internal circuit-breaker should be wired in series (each phase sensing the same current) in order to avoid tripping due to an assumed phase failure.
Connections : pages 2/100 and 2/101
2/76
Description
Enclosed starters
Connection by cable gland

1 2 3
565204
4
565205
1 2 3
5 6 7
11
10 9
11
10 9
1 Yellow LED, illuminated when motor running. 2 Red LED illuminated when there is a motor fault (overload or short-circuit) or an internal fault in the starter, or in the event of a communication fault. 3 Green LED illuminated (steady light) when the AS-Interface line is powered and 13 flashing when information to the starter is being transmitted via the AS-Interface 12 line. 4 Knock-out for cable gland (included for auxiliary supply, power extension or output control relay cabling, if required). 6 5 Disconnect rotary control knob. 7 Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped. 6 Local/AS-Interface key switch (variant A79). 7 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF2). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running (variant A79). Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF1) . Function: Pulsed operation (variant A79). 8 Cable gland for power supply cable. 9 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective cap) (variants A78 and A79). 10 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply, if required. 11 Cable gland for motor cabling. 12 Reset pushbutton. 13 Stop pushbutton.
1 2 3 8 4
565206
5
565207
1 2 3 8 4 14 15
13 12
11 9 10
13 12
11 9 10
1 23
565208
7
565209
1 23
4 14 15
Connection by plug-in connectors (variant A74) 1 Yellow LED, illuminated when motor running. 2 Red LED illuminated when there is a motor fault (overload or short-circuit) or an internal fault in the starter, or in the event of a communication fault. 3 Green LED illuminated (steady light) when the AS-Interface line is powered and flashing when information to the starter is being transmitted via the AS-Interface line. 4 Knock-out for cable gland (included) for auxiliary supply cabling, if required. 5 Male connector for incoming power supply to motor starter (2) 6 Disconnect rotary control knob. Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped. 7 Female connector for power supply to the next motor starter (2) 8 Local/AS-Interface key switch (variant A79). 9 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF2). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running (variant A79). Pushbutton: for non-reversing starters (LF1). Function: Pulsed operation (variant A79). 10 Female connector for power supply to motor (2). 11 Knock-out for cable gland (included) for output control relay. 12 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective cap) (variants A78 and A79). 13 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply, if required. 14 Stop pushbutton. 15 Reset pushbutton.
(1) Extension cables: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Harting plug-in connector to be fitted to cable (not included, see page 2/101).
13 12 8 11
9 10
13 12 8 11
9 10
2/77
Functions
Enclosed starters
Auxiliary supply
AS-Interface c 24 V auxiliary supply Control-command and contactor supply Control-command supply Contactor supply
2
Power supply
LF1 and LF2 starters do not require an auxiliary supply to operate the contactors, since that provided by the AS-Interface line (yellow cable) is sufficient. Again, this reduces the cabling required. However, depending on the application, it is possible to supply the contactor coils by an external c 24 V source. Selection is made by repositioning a jumper within the starter. A c 24 V supply is necessary for LF7 and LF8 starters. Prospective current consumptions are listed on page 2/85.
Motor command-control
The functions provided by this range of starters are: - motor control and status monitoring via AS-Interface, - D.O.L. starting (non-reversing or reversing), - overload protection of the motor, - short-circuit protection of the motor and its power supply cabling.
11427
Starters with rotary control knob These starters provide the following functions: - load break switch-disconnector with padlockable control knob, - IP 55 degree of protection, double insulation. Opening of the enclosure is mechanically inhibited whilst the starter is switched on or whilst in the off position and padlocked. The rotary control knob has 3 positions: 0: switch-disconnector opened manually, I: switch-disconnector closed, Trip: switch-disconnector tripped.
11429
Starters with pushbutton control These starters provide the following functions: - pushbutton resetting of the protection device, - pushbutton stop, - IP 65 degree of protection, double insulation.
2/78
Enclosed starters
Local control
Stop and reset functions are possible from the front of the enclosure. The stop command is achieved by actuating the internal circuit-breaker, which provides the switch-disconnector function. Depending on the type of starter, stopping is controlled by either: - a rotary control knob, or - a stop pushbutton (black) (1). In the event of an overload, resetting of the internal thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker is possible after the motor has cooled down. Depending on the type of starter, resetting is controlled by either: - a rotary control knob, or - a reset pushbutton (blue) (1).
11423
Integral local/AS-Interface control (variant A79) This starter variant is fitted with a 2-position local/AS-Interface switch which, depending on the position of the switch, allows the following functions: b AS-Interface: the PLC controls the motor starter. b Local: local Start/Stop commands override instructions from the PLC. b 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starters (LF2, LF8). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running. Pushbutton for non-reversing starters (LF1, LF7). Function: Pulsed operation. Control via a control station
AS-Interface Message 2 Message 1
Power supply
It is possible to achieve manual local start control from a pushbutton control station connected to AS-Interface. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. Actuation of the pushbutton is transmitted to the programmable controller (message 1) which passes it on to the starter (message 2).
(1) Only a rotary control knob is available for starters LF7 and LF8.
2/79
Enclosed starters
Local signalling
Visual indication of the various operating states is provided by LEDs (3 LEDs for LF1/LF2 and 1 LED for LF7/LF8) located on the enclosure cover.
Safety
The starter features continual self-checking to ensure correct operation. External safety functions are not processed by the starter.
Emergency stop and machine safety wiring must follow standard safety practice and be hard-wired, using electromechanical devices in the approved way. These functions must not be handled by communication bus systems (EN 60204 9.2.5.4). Protection against sudden restarting, after an accidental power supply failure, must be provided by a safety device separate from the starter. The starter control (rotary knob or pushbutton) does not provide the Emergency Stop function if the machine is fitted with other actuators. The control operators on the starter are therefore coloured black, in accordance with standard EN 60204 10.2.1. Starters with rotary control knob may be padlocked in the ON position, since this control does not provide an Emergency Stop function.
Loss of control (LF1, LF2 only) When communication is interrupted, the starter is no longer controlled by the PLC. In this case, it can be configured to adopt the following fallback conditions: - motor set to stop (applications: potentially dangerous movements), - motor set to run in direction 1 (forward) (applications: fans, pumps), - or motor continues to run as it was immediately prior to loss of control (application: suction grippers).
The fallback configuration is set via AS-Interface. The default configuration is with the motor set to stop.
Output control relay (LF1, LF2 only) This relay incorporates a C/O contact, which may be used to control an indicator lamp, solenoid valve, etc. (24 V, 1 A), via AS-Interface.
AS-Interface
2/80
Enclosed starters
Starters with sensor connected

Two 3-wire PNP sensors (50 mA max) or 2-wire limit switches can be connected directly to the starter. The information supplied by the sensor/limit switch is fed back via AS-Interface. In addition, for LF1 and LF2 starters only, the sensor signal can be processed locally to achieve a Reflex motor stop. This function is selected by means of micro switches. 127 other selections are reserved for future applications. Reflex stop (LF1, LF2 only) There are two types of Reflex stop function: b Reflex stop function n 1 Sensor n 1 directly controls stopping of the motor. After a new start instruction, the motor restarts (stop instruction then start instruction). A Reflex stop makes it possible to achieve precise and repetitive positioning, independently of the AS-Interface and PLC cycle times. For reversing starters, sensor n 1 acts on both running directions. Sensor n 2 does not affect Reflex operation.
Sensor 2 AS-Interface Rev
Sensor 1
Forw
Time
Instruction from AS-Interface Motor controlled by the starter Information from sensor 1 = component present
b Reflex stop function n 2 Sensor n 1 controls stopping of the motor when it is running in the forward direction. Sensor n 2 controls stopping of the motor when it is running in reverse direction. A new start instruction (stop instruction then start instruction) causes restarting of the motor even if a component is still detected. Sensor n 2 does not affect forward running. Sensor n 1 does not affect reverse running.
2/81
Characteristics
Enclosed starters
Environment
Starter type Conforming to standards LF1, LF2 IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1, IEC 60439-1, IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1) Standard version Starters with rotary control knob Starters with pushbutton control C Storage C Operation Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane m TC IP 55 IP 65 - 40+ 80 - 5+ 40 2000 LF7, LF8
Product certifications Protective treatment
AS-Interface N 18601 TH IP 55 - 40+ 85 - 10+ 40
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature around the device conforming to IEC 60439-1 Maximum operating altitude Operating positions without derating
30
30
90
90
Flame resistance of equipment Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Vibration resistance 5150 Hz conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Safe separation of circuits
Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 60536 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Insulated enclosures Metal enclosures Insulated enclosures Metal enclosures Insulated enclosures
960 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
Immunity to non-dissipating shockwave (Uimp) Material and colour of enclosure base Material and colour of enclosure cover Resistance to chemical agents
kV
6: power 6: power 2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor Polycarbonate impregnated with 20 % glass fibre, black throughout Sheet steel, RAL 7032 Polycarbonate impregnated with 20% glass fibre, grey RAL 7032 throughout Sheet steel, RAL 7032 Avoid allowing this material to come into contact with: strong bases (certain detergents), aromatic hydrocarbons, alcohol, chlorine solvents, ketones.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock wave Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 kV kV kV 8: in open air (level 3) 4: in indirect mode (level 2) 2: power, AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor (level 3) 4/2: power (level 4) 2/0.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor (level 2) 10 10 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs
Immunity to conducted radio-frequency disturbance Immunity to radiated radio-frequency disturbance Radio-conducted and radio-radiated rejection
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 ENV 50 141 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204 (GSM) ENV 55 011/CISPR11 (G1)
V/m V/m
Class B
Class A
(1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference.
Functions : pages 2/78 to 2/81
2/82
Enclosed starters
Connection
Starter type Power supply cabling Screw clamp terminals Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (1) Clamping capacity mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m mm LF1, LF7 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1.7 10 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 0.8 10 Min. 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7 8 10 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 15 Max. 2x4 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 0.8 15 Max. 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.7 13 15 LF2, LF8 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1.7 10 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 0.8 10 Min. 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7 8 10 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 15 Max. 1x4 1x4 1 x 2.5 0.8 15 Max. 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.7 13 15
Cable gland (Pg 16) Motor cabling Screw clamp terminals
Cable gland (Pg 16) Auxiliary 24 V supply and output control relay cabling
Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (1) Clamping capacity
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m mm
Terminal block Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (2) Cable gland Clamping capacity Pg 13 (included) Pg 16
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m mm mm
Pole electrical characteristics

Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 (circuit-breaker) Conforming to 947-4-1 (motor starter) Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to 230/240 V IEC 60947-2 400/415 V Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2 C.O.: closing, opening In category AC-3 Maximum operating rate A AC-3 V V Hz kA kA 415 415 50/60 > 100 > 100 Yes
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational frequency Breaking capacity (Ics and Icu) Sensitivity to phase failure
Circuit-breaker characteristics (manual operation)

Mechanical durability Electrical durability Service class C.O. C.O. C.O./h 100 000 100 000 25
Circuit-breaker characteristics (automatic operation)

Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability Electrical durability In operating cycles per hour In millions of operating cycles In category AC-3 to 8.5 A 3600 30 800 000 5
Other characteristics
Starters with rotary control knob Starters with pushbutton control Non-reversing starters Reversing starters Circuit-breaker type GV2 P Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME - LF1, LF2 only Contactor LP4 K09015BW3 Reversing contactor LP5 K09015BW3 See pages 3/6 to 3/9 See pages 3/6 to 3/9 See pages 5/8 to 5/11 See pages 5/8 to 5/11 (1) Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver 5.5. (2) Flat screwdriver 3.5.
2/83
Enclosed starters
Sensor inputs
Starter type Connection Nominal input values Voltage Maximum current available per sensor Sensor supply (including ripple) At state 1 Voltage Current At state 0 Voltage Current V mA V V mA V mA k ms ms LF1, LF2 (A78 and A79) M12 c 24 50 1930 c >12.6 > 4.9 c <5 < 2.1 >2 7 9.8 2 2-wire/3-wire None Resistive for PNP type sensor LF7, LF8 (A78) M12 c 24 7 2 2-wire
Input value limits
Input impedance Filtering time Maximum number of sensors Proximity sensor compatibility Isolation with respect to the AS-Interface line Input type Typical Maximum
Output control relay

Operating voltage limit Thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Service life Resistive on an a 24 V load load AC-12 Inductive load AC-14 Service life Resistive on a c 24 V load load DC-12 Resistive load DC-3 Response time Contact type Built-in protection
(for starters LF1 and LF2 with variants A78 and A79)
a.c. supply d.c. supply Millions of operating cycles V V A 24 24 5 0.1 (1) in 5 A current, 1 (2) in 1 A current. 0.5 (2) in 1 A current, 1 (2) in 0.5 A current, 5 (3) in 0.25 A current. 0.1 (1) in 5 A current, 0.2 (1) in 2 A current. 0.5 (2) in 1 A current, > 1 (3) in 0.25 A current. ms ms < 10 < 10 C/O
Latching Unlatching
Isolation
Against overloads None, a quick-blow fuse must be fitted and short-circuits Protected against overvoltages generated by switching the coils of preactuators Against a.c. or d.c. inductive overloads rms voltage between output V 1500, 50/60 Hz for 60 s and earth or between output and internal logic Insulation resistance between m > 1000 output terminals and AS-Interface (1) 0.2 of an operation (C/O) per second. (2) 0.5 of an operation (C/O) per second. (3) 1 operation (C/O) per second.
2/84
Enclosed starters
Consumption
Starter type Product configured Product configured for for supply from the supply from an AS-Interface line auxiliary c 24 V supply LF1 LF2 LF1 LF2 LF7 90 mA 80 mA 90 mA 8 mA De-energised 80 mA 190 mA 200 mA 80 mA 90 mA Inrush 110 mA 120 mA 80 mA 90 mA 12 mA Sealed With sensor Sensor consumption (50 mA max) + 15 mA (signal = 1) 25 mA Relay De-energised Inrush Energised 0 110 mA 30 mA 0 110 mA 30 mA 0 750 mA 750 mA
Current consumption
From the AS-Interface line
LF8 8 mA 12 mA
2
0 750 mA 750 mA
From the auxiliary c 24 V supply
Data exchange characteristics

AS-Interface profile Data bits (commands) Bit value Command D0 (O) Command D1 (O) Command D2 (O) Command D3 (O) Data bits (status) Bit value Status D0 (I) Status D1 (I) Status D2 (I) Status D3 (I) Parameter bits Bit value Parameter P0 Parameter P1 Parameter P2 Parameter P3 7.D (3) =0 =1 7F For commands, please refer to the LF7 and LF8 starter schemes on page 2/96.
Stop - forward running Start - forward running Stop - reverse running Start - reverse running (2) Deactivation of Activation of control relay control relay Not Used Not Used =0 Not ready or fault Stopped Sensor 1 signal absent (1) Sensor 2 signal absent (1) =0 Maintain operational state Fallback condition Start Not used =1 Ready Running Sensor 1 signal present (1) Sensor 2 signal present (1) = 1 (default value) Assume fallback condition Fallback condition Stop Not used Not used Not used Not used For states, please refer to the LF7 and LF8 starter schemes on page 2/96.
Reflex function Reflex function Not used inhibited enabled (1) Only applicable to starters with sensors (variants A78 and A79). (2) Only on LF2 or LF8. (3) Please consult the users guide supplied with the product.
2/85
Enclosed starters
2

Models LF1 P and LF2 P
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Conforming to IEC 60529 Operation IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1) IP 55 - 5 to + 40 C Same as for the contactors LFp P: polycarbonate (2). LF p MP: sheet steel
2
11427
Starters in insulated enclosures

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 Circuit-breaker adjustment range of thermal trips A Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF1 P00D (4) LF1 P02D LF1 P03D LF1 P04D LF1 P05D LF1 P06D LF1 P07D LF1 P08D LF1 P10D LF1 P14D LF1 P16D Starter Reference Weight kg 1.020 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350
Non-reversing starters with rotary control knob, with blue handle on black background (3)
LF1 PppD
11427
Reversing starters with rotary control knob, with blue handle on black background (3)
Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF2 P00D (4) LF2 P02D LF2 P03D LF2 P04D LF2 P05D LF2 P06D LF2 P07D LF2 P08D LF2 P10D LF2 P14D LF2 P16D 1.020 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600
LF1 PppDA78
11432
LF2 PppDA79A74
Starters in metal enclosures

Add the letter M after LF1 or LF2 in the references selected above. Example: LF1 P02D becomes LF1 MP02D. To order a starter that conforms to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 n 14, add a letter M after LF1 or LF2 and the letter U at the end of the references selected above. Example: LF1 P02D becomes LF1 MP02DU. Metal enclosures are fitted, as standard, with connections for 2 sensors.
Description
11431
For mounting on
LF2 MPppDA74A79
With HARTING connectors (6) Insulated or metal enclosure With connections for 2 sensors Insulated enclosure With connections for 2 sensors Insulated enclosure and local/AS-Interface control With local/AS-Interface control Metal enclosure A79 (1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference. (2) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) On metal enclosures only, to order an Emergency Stop rotary control knob with red handle on yellow background, add the letter R to the end of the reference. Example: LF1 MP02DR. (4) Supplied without circuit-breaker GV2 P. (5) Example: LF1 P02DA79A74. (6) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/101). Schemes : pages 2/97 and 2/99
Suffix to be added to the starter reference (5) A74 A78 A79
2/86
Characteristics, references (continued)
Enclosed starters
2

Models LF1 M and LF2 M
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Insulated enclosure Metal enclosure Operation IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1) IP 65 IP 55 - 5 to + 40 C Same as for the contactors LF p M: polycarbonate (2). LF p MM: sheet steel

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW
11429
400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
Circuit-breaker Adjustment range of thermal trips A Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914
Starter Reference
2
Weight kg
Non-reversing starters with pushbutton control

0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 LF1 LF1 LF1 LF1 M00D (3) M02D M03D M04D 1.000 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300
LF1 M05D LF1 M06D LF1 M07D LF1 M08D LF1 M10D LF1 M14D LF1 M16D
LF1 MppD
11426
Reversing starters with pushbutton control

Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF2 LF2 LF2 LF2 M00D (3) M02D M03D M04D 1.000 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550
LF1 MppDA78
11425
LF2 M05D LF2 M06D LF2 M07D LF2 M08D LF2 M10D LF2 M14D LF2 M16D
LF1 MppDA79
Starters in metal enclosures

Add the letter M after LF1 or LF2 in the references selected above. Example: LF1 M02D becomes LF1 MM02D. To order a starter that conforms to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 n 14, add a letter M after LF1 or LF2 and the letter U at the end of the references selected above. Example: LF1 M02D becomes LF1 MM02DU. Metal enclosures are fitted, as standard, with connections for 2 sensors.
Description
11432
For mounting on
LF2 MMppDA79A74 Dimensions : pages 2/92 to 2/95
With HARTING connectors (5) Insulated or metal enclosure With connections for 2 sensors Insulated enclosure With connections for 2 sensors and Insulated enclosure local/AS-Interface control With local/AS-Interface control Metal enclosure A79 (1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference. (2) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Supplied without GV2 ME motor circuit-breaker. (4) Example: LF1 M02DA79A74. (5) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/101). Schemes : pages 2/97 and 2/99
Suffix to be added to the starter reference (4) A74 A78 A79
2/87
Enclosed starters
2

Model LF7 P
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Operating positions Conforming to IEC 60529 Operation IP 55 - 10 to + 40 C Same as for the contactors Polycarbonate (1)
Material

Non-reversing starters with rotary control knob, with red handle on yellow background
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
11637
Circuit-breaker Adjustment range of thermal trips A Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914
Starter Reference
Weight kg 1.020 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350
LF7 P00D (2) LF7 P02D LF7 P03D LF7 P04D LF7 P05D LF7 P06D LF7 P07D LF7 P08D LF7 P10D LF7 P14D LF7 P16D
LF7 PppD
11633
LF7 PppDA74
Description With HARTING connectors (4) Suffix to be added to the starter reference (3) A74
With local/AS-Interface control (5)
A79
(1) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (2) Supplied without GV2 P motor circuit-breaker. (3) Example: LF1 P02DA79A74. (4) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/101). (5) LF7 enclosures are fitted, as standard, with connections for 2 sensors (2-wire only).
2/88
Enclosed starters
2

Model LF8 P
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Conforming to IEC 60529 Operation IP 55 - 10 to + 40 C Same as for the contactors Polycarbonate (1)
2
Circuit-breaker Adjustment range of thermal trips A Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 Starter Reference Weight kg 1.020 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600

Reversing starters with rotary control knob, with red handle on yellow background
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
11637
LF8 P00D (2) LF8 P02D LF8 P03D LF8 P04D LF8 P05D LF8 P06D LF8 P07D LF8 P08D LF8 P10D LF8 P14D LF8 P16D
LF8 PppDA78
11633
LF2 PppDA78A74
Description With HARTING connectors (4) Suffix to be added to the starter reference (3) A74
With connection for 2 sensors (2-wire only)
A78
With local/AS-Interface control
A79
(1) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (2) Supplied without GV2 P motor circuit-breaker. (3) Example: LF8 P02DA79A74. (4) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/101).
2/89
Enclosed starters
Insulated enclosures LF1, LF2, LF7, LF8

Power extension (daisy-chaining) Terminal
LA9 LFF
LA9 LFF
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFC
LA9 LFT
Metal enclosures LF1, LF2
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFMM
LA9 LFFM40
2/90
Enclosed starters
Accessories for insulated enclosures with variant A74

Presentation In order to reduce setting-up times and to simplify maintenance, variant A74 LF starters are fitted with Harting plug-in connectors. These starters are designed to allow 2 types of connection topology.
Connection using tap links
LF LF
This configuration avoids having to switch off the power supply when replacing or adding one or more starters. Although machine availability is increased, a larger number of power connections is required: 4 per starter.
Connection using power extension (daisychaining)
The number of power connections per starter is halved, but continuity of service is no longer assured if any of the upstream starters are disconnected or removed. With LF LF this type of installation, special precautions must be taken because removal of a starter at the head of the power supply line de-energises all the remaining starters on that line. For safety reasons therefore, starters must not be removed under load (prohibited by standard EN60204 above 3kW/400V). The 2 connection kits and accessories shown below have been designed to facilitate setting up of power extension configurations by the user.
Connection kit (depending on enclosure application)

Enclosure Capacity application mm2 Power 3-pole extension 1.5 or 2.5 Kit contents For Reference mounting on IP 55 LA9 LFC enclosures LF1, LF2, LF7, LF8 IP 55 LA9 LFT enclosures LF1, LF2, LF7, LF8 Weight kg 0.150
Terminal
3-pole 1.5 or 2.5
1 female connector 2 male connectors and corresponding power sockets (1) 1 female connector 1 male connector, 1 blanking plug and corresponding power sockets (1)
0.110
Crimping contacts
Type Male Capacity mm2 1.5 2.5 Female 1.5 2.5 Sold in lots of 100 100 100 100 Unit reference LA9 LFM15 LA9 LFM25 LA9 LFF15 LA9 LFF25 Weight kg 0.120 0.120 0.160 0.150
Accessories for metal enclosures with variant A74

Connection kit
For connector Input Kit contents 1 metal cover 2 size 16 cable glands 1 blanking plug 1 female power socket (3P + earth) 4 female crimping contacts (2) 1 metal cover 1 size 16 cable gland 1 female power socket (3P + earth) (1) Capacity mm2 1.5 2.5 Thermal current A 10 10 For Reference mounting on Metal enclosures LF1, LF2 LA9 LFFM40 Weight kg 0.260
Output to motor
Metal enclosures LF1, LF2
LA9 LFMM
0.060
Crimping contacts
Type Voltage Sold in lots of V 400 100 400 100 Unit reference LA9 LFM15 LA9 LFM25 Weight kg 0.120 0.120
Male
(1) Crimping contacts to be ordered separately. (2) For flexible cable, 4 mm2 maximum, Ith: 16 A, Us: 400 V.
2/91
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
Models LF1 P, LF2 P, LF7 P and LF8 P
Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob

With cable glands LFp PppD With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) LFp PppDA74
175 120 4x5,3
175 84
175 120 4x5,3
175 84
47
2
150 165 150 165 18 165 18 47 150 165 18 47
(1)
30
(1)
With cable glands Incorporating sensor variant (A78) LFp PppDA78
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor variant (A78) LFp PppDA78A74
175 120 4x5,3
175 84
175 120 4x5,3
175 84
150
165
(1)
(2)
30
(1)
(2)
With cable glands Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFp PppDA79
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFp PppDA79A74
175 120 4x5,3
175 84
175 120 4x5,3
175 84
150
(1)
(2)
30
165
(1)
(2)
Knock-outs for cable gland From above 2 x Pg16 and 2 x Pg13 From below 1 x Pg16 (1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.
2/92
150
Enclosed starters
Models LF1 M and LF2 M
Non-reversing and reversing starters with pushbutton control

With cable glands LF p MppD
140 120 4x5,3 175 84
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) LFp MppDA74

140 120 175 84 47
4x5,3
150
30
150 165
(1)
(1)
With cable glands Incorporating sensor variant (A78) LF p MppDA78

140 120 4x5,3 175 84
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor variant (A78) LFp MppDA78A74
140 120 4x5,3 175 84 47
150
30
150 165
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
With cable glands Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LF p MppDA79
165 120 4x5,3 175 84
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFp MppDA79A74
165 120 4x5,3 175 84 47
150
30
150 165
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Knock-outs for cable gland From above 2 x Pg16 and 2 x Pg13 From below 1 x Pg16 (1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.
2/93
18
165
18
165
18
165
Enclosed starters
Starters for AS-Interface cabling systems
Models LF1 MP and LF2 MP
Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob

With cable glands LFp MPppD With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) LFp MP ppDA74
179 125 7
219 175 8,5
179 125 7
219 175 8,5
60
2
199 230 245 199 13
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor variant (A78) LFp MP ppDA78A74
230 230 230
13
With cable glands Incorporating sensor variant (A78) LFp MPppDA78
(1)
(1)
179 125 7
219 175 8,5
179 125 7
219 175 8,5
60
199
230
245
199 13
13
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
With cable glands Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFp MPppDA79
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFp MP ppDA79A74
179 125 7
219 175 8,5
179 125 7
219 175 8,5
60
199 13
199
230
13
(1)
(2)
245
(1)
(2)
Knock-outs for cable Standard enclosure Enclosure with variant gland A74 From above 3 x Pg16 1 x Pg16 From below 2 x Pg16 1 x Pg16 (1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.
2/94
245
245
245
Enclosed starters
Models LF1 MM and LF2 MM
Non-reversing and reversing starters with pushbutton control

With cable glands LF p MMppD With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) LFp MMppDA74
145 125 7
219 175 8,5
145 125 7
219 175 8,5
60
2
199 230 245 199 13
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor variant (A78) LFp MMppDA78A74
230 230 230
13
With cable glands Incorporating sensor variant (A78) LF p MMppDA78
(1)
(1)
145 125 7
219 175 8,5
145 125 7
219 175 8,5
60
199 13
199
230
13
(1)
(2)
245
(1)
(2)
With cable glands Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LF p MMppDA79
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFp MMppDA79A74
169 125 7
219 175 8,5
169 125 7
219 175 8,5
60
199
230
245
199 13
13
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Knock-outs for cable Standard enclosure Enclosure with variant gland A74 From above 3 x Pg16 1 x Pg16 From below 2 x Pg16 1 x Pg16 (1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.
2/95
245
245
245
Schemes
Enclosed starters
Models LF7 and LF8
Non-reversing starters LF7

LF7
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LA9 Z32811 (7F)

IN2 X3, 2 IN3 X3, 3 IN4 X3, 4 IN + X3, 5 M X3, 6 OUT 1 X3, 7
Q A2 A1 23 KM 24
IN1 X3, 1
2 5
22 14
KM 21
Q 13
LF7 with variant A79

24 V
KM
IN1 X3, 1
IN2 X3, 2
IN3 X3, 3
IN4 X3, 4
IN + X3, 5
M X3, 6
OUT 1 X3, 7
LA9 Z32811 (7F)
AS-i + AS-i
0V 24 V
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
24 V 0V 2 3 5 1
22
Local
1
line
14
KM 21
Q 13
Q A1 23 KM A2
Reversing starters LF8

LF8 without variant and LF8 with variant A79
24 V 24 V 0V
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
IN1 X3, 1
IN2 X3, 2
IN3 X3, 3
IN4 X3, 4
IN + X3, 5
M X3, 6
OUT 1 X3, 7
OUT 2 X3, 8
LA9 Z32811 (7F)
24
AS-i + AS-i
Q 22 22 14
24 V 0V
Q 13
Local line
KM1 21
KM2 21
II 0 I
62
24
61
23
A1 KM1 A2
A1 KM2 A2
KM1
KM2

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
LA9 Z32811 (7F)

IN1 X3, 1 IN2 X3, 2 IN3 X3, 3 IN4 X3, 4 IN + X3, 5 M X3, 6 OUT 1 X3, 7 OUT 2 X3, 8
A1 KM2 A2 61 KM1 62
2
M 22 22 14
3 5
24
23
KM1 21
KM2 21
Q 13
A1 KM1
A2
2/96
61
KM2
62
61
KM2
KM1
62
Schemes (continued)
Enclosed starters
Models LF1 and LF2
Non-reversing starters LF1

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 M12 AS-i AS-i AS-i +
24 V ext
Q 24 V AS-i AS-i AS-i +
GV2
GV2 open GV2 tripped K1 auxiliary Local/AS-I
GV2
KM
AS-i
0 V ext.
Local/line
I
Signal sensor 1 Signal sensor 2
GV2
Forward running
KM
Economy resistor
KM
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
0 V AS-i
K3 M NO COM NC
AS-i
24 V ext.
M12 sensor Insulated enclosure with variant A78 + Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79
Reversing starters LF2

M12 AS-i 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 AS-i AS-i +
24 V ext.
GV2 24 V AS-i AS-i + AS-i

GV2 open GV2 tripped
GV2 KM1 KM2
AS-i
0 V ext.
KM1 KM2
Local/line
Local/line
GV2
Signal sensor 1 Signal sensor 2 Forward running Reverse running
102
KM1
KM2
KM1
Economy resistor
KM2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
0 V AS-i
K3 NO COM NC
AS-i
24 V ext.
M12 sensor Insulated enclosure with variant A78 + Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79
2/97
Recommended application schemes

2
Enclosed starters
Models LF1, LF2, LF7 and LF8
Non-reversing and reversing starters without sensor and without an auxiliary supply
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
1L1
3L2
5L3
1L1
3L2
AS-Interface line
Non-reversing and reversing starters with 2 sensors, an auxiliary supply and a control relay
J5
J5+
5L3
J2 COM
2T1
4T2
6T3
2T1
4T2
6T3
1L1
3L2
5L3
1L1
3L2
AS-Interface line
24 V
2/98
5L3
J2 NO
J2 NC
Recommended application schemes

(continued)
2
Enclosed starters
Models LF1 and LF2
Connections on enclosures (LF1, LF2 only)

M12 male connector for AS-Interface and c 24 V auxiliary supply
24 V 4 3 AS-i
AS-i +
0V
2
Sensor M12 female connector (for starters LF1 and LF2, only applicable to starters with sensor variants A78 and A79) Limit switch 2-wire PNP type sensor 3-wire PNP type sensor
3 5 2
4
Sensor 1
3 5 2
Sensor 2
Sensor 1
3 5 2
Sensor 2
Sensor 1
+ +
+ +
Sensor 2
2/99
Connections
Enclosed starters
Starters in enclosures with cable glands
4
M
5 8 8
1 Junction box 2 Incoming power 3 Power extension 4 XZ LC1220C1 : splitter block 5 XZ CR1511040Ap: extension 6 XZ CB1pp02 : flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply 7 XZ CG01403D: tap link for two cables 8 XZ CB1pp01 : flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface 9 XZ CG01205D: tap link for one cable
2/100
Connections (continued)
Enclosed starters
Starters in insulated enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors

3 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Incoming power Power extension Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank) XZ LC1220C1: splitter block XZ CR1511040Ap: extension XZ CB1pp02: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply XZ CG01403D: tap link for two cables XZ CB1pp01: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface XZ CG01205D: tap link for one cable
Configuration of HARTING connectors to be fitted on cables (to be ordered separately)

4
Straight cover Number and HARTING reference for incoming power for power extension female connector and motor connection male connectors 1 x 09-20-003-0420 2 x 09-20-003-0420 1 x 09-12-005-3001 3 x 09-33-000-6202 2 x 09-12-005-3101 8 x 09-33-000-6102 1 x 09-20-003-5408
8 8 5
Male insert 6-way, 400 V Female insert 6-way, 400 V Male contacts 2.5 mm2 Female contacts 2.5 mm2 Plug for the last socket
Starters in metal enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Incoming power Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank) XZ LC122C1: splitter block XZ CR1511040Ap: extension XZ CB1pp02p: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply XZ CG1403D: tap link for two cables XZ CB1pp01p: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface XZ CG01205D: tap link for one cable
Configuration of HARTING connectors to be fitted on cables (to be ordered separately)

Number and HARTING reference for incoming power for power extension female connector and motor connection male connectors 1 x 09-30-006-442 (1) 2 x 09-20-003-1440 1 x 09-30-006-443 (2) 2 x 09-12-005-3101 1 x 09-33-006-2702 3 x 09-33-000-6207 5 x 09-33-000-6102
3
Straight cover Male insert 6-way, 400 V Female insert 6-way, 400 V Male contacts 2.5 mm2 Female contacts 2.5 mm2 (1) PG21. (2) PG29.
7 7 4
2/101
Presentation
D.O.L. starters
Presentation
AS-interface modules LA9 Z32810 and LA9 Z32811 allow motor starters to be monitored and controlled by AS-Interface. These products are in addition to the AS-Interface enclosed starter range, LF1 and LF2, LF7 and LF8. The module sizes offered are: 2 inputs/1 output or 4 inputs/2 outputs. These products can be mounted in two ways: b on 5 rail, b on LA9 Zppp adapters for use with busbar systems.
565188 565189
AS-I PWR
AS-I PWR
Inputs/outputs are connected to a built-in, flexible terminal type connector, so reducing installation time. The AS-Interface line is connected to the module by the yellow connector. The external c 24 V supply to the module outputs is connected to the black connector. With this supply method, it is possible to make the output states subject to external safety conditions (Emergency stop, safety overtravel, etc.).
Characteristics: page 2/104
Dimensions, scheme : pages 2/106 and 2/107
2/102
D.O.L. starters
Fields of application
The various module sizes allow control of: - non-reversing starters, - reversing starters, - 2-speed starters for motors with separate windings. The outputs, supplied by the separate auxiliary voltage, can simultaneously switch a current of 0.5 A at c 24 V and can therefore switch the following contactors: - LP1, LP4 K06 ... K12, - LC1 D09 to D32.
Composition
565190
AS-Interface module 1 AS-Interface green/red LED indicator: - red: no communication with the Master. The outputs are switched off, - green: communication OK, outputs OK, - red/yellow flashing: module has no address (assign an address between 1 and 31), - off: no power supply to AS-Interface. 2 Green PWR LED: - LED on: auxiliary power supply ON, - LED off: auxiliary power supply OFF.
1
AS-I PWR
Dimensions, schemes: pages 2/106 and 2/107
2/103
Characteristics
D.O.L. starters
General system environment

Interface type Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Flame resistance Resistance to external mechanical impact Vibration resistance Immunity to non-dissipating shockwave (Uimp) Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock wave Immunity to conducted radio-frequency interference Immunity to radiated radio-frequency interference Radio-conducted and radio-radiated rejection AS-Interface supply Cabling c.s.a., AS-Interface Cabling c.s.a., 24 V Cabling c.s.a., input/output LA9 Z32810 AS-Interface N 18701 TH IP 20 - 40+ 85 - 10+ 55 2000 960 15 gn 2 gn kV kV kV kV V/m V/m 2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 8: in open air (level 3) 4: in indirect mode (level 2) 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 10 10 LA9 Z32811 AS-Interface N 18601
Conforming to IEC 60539 Storage, conforming to IEC 60539 Operation Without derating Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 1/2 sine wave, 11ms conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 5150 Hz conforming to 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 level 4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 ENV 50 141 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204 (GSM) ENV 55 011/CISPR (G1)
C C m C
Class A V mm2 mm2 mm2 mA m A A 29.5-31.6 2 x 0.50.75 2 x 0.50.75 0.082.5; AWG2812 7 100 % 0.4 0.5 2 100 % Yes Yes
Flexible cable Flexible cable Flexible cage terminal and flexible cable
Input current Coincidence of inputs Maximum length of wires to switching components Maximum current of outputs c 13/14, (24 V) Thermal current Ith Coincidence of outputs Short-circuit protection By flywheel diode Outputs switched off Watchdog in event of interference on the AS-Interface line AS-Interface profile Number of I/O Current consumption On AS-Interface On/OFF Data bits Status Command D0 (O) D1 (O) D2 (O) D3 (O) Status D0 (I) D1 (I) D2 (I) D3 (I) Parameters P0P3
mA Out 1 Out 2 Out 3 Out 4 In 1 In 2 In 3 In 4
3F 2 inputs/1 output 812 0 Off Not used Not used Not used Absent Absent Not used Not used Not used
1 On
7F 4 inputs/2 outputs 812 0 Off Off
1 On On
Present Present
Absent Absent Absent Absent
Present Present Present Present
Dimensions, schemes : pages 2/106 and 2/107
2/104
References
D.O.L. starters
AS-Interface modules (1) (2)

No. of Number channels of inputs 3 2 Number Output of outputs voltage V 1 c 24 Current Reference per output A 0.5 LA9 Z32810 Weight kg 0.070
c 24
0.5
LA9 Z32811
0.070
Accessories
Description Busbar system mm 40 or 60 Width mm 45 Reference Weight kg 0.044
2
LA9 Z32744
Modules without electrical connection, for use with all LA9 Z pp adapters
54
LA9 Z32745
0.051
Module with PE + N polarity and 5-way connector
40
45
LA9 Z32740
0.091
54
LA9 Z32741
0.098
60
45
LA9 Z32742
0.085
54
LA9 Z32743
0.092
Replacement connectors and adapter cable

Description Colour Insulation Displacement Yellow Connector (IDC) for AS-Interface Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) for auxiliary supply Description Black Sold in lots of 5 Unit reference LA9 Z32825 Weight kg 0.100
LA9 Z32826
0.100
Cable length m 0.5
Reference
Weight kg 0.070
Adapter cable for connection to addressing terminal XZ MC11
XZ MG12
(1) User's Manual to be ordered separately, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Supplied with connectors LA9 Z32825 and LA9 Z32826.
2/105
D.O.L. starters
2
Dimensions
LA9 Z3281 p
2
86 45
Mounting on modules
LA9 Z32742, LA9 Z32743
60 mm busbar system
LA9 Z32740, LA9 Z32741

40 mm busbar system Common front face view
65
69,5
40 80 80 120 125,5 115
135,5
30 a
LA9 Z32740, Z32742 Z32741, Z32743
a 45 54
LA9 Z32745
40 or 60 mm busbar system
LA9 Z32744
Common front face view
80
40 135,5 125,5 80
LA9 Z32745 Z32744
a 54 45
2/106
Schemes
D.O.L. starters
Schemes
D.O.L. starter, non-reversing
1 motor 2 motors
LA9 Z32810
IN1 X3, 1 IN2 X3, 2 IN3 X3, 3
LA9 Z32811
IN4 X3, 4 IN + X3, 5 M X3, 6 OUT1 X3, 7 OUT2 X3, 8
IN1 X3, 1
IN2 X3, 2
IN + X3, 3
M X4, 4
OUT1 X4, 2
Q Q KM
KM1
KM
KM2
Q1
Q2
Q1
Q2
KM1
KM2
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2 4/T2 V
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Q1
Q2
KM
KM1
KM2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
M1
M2
D.O.L. starter, reversing

LA9 Z32811
IN1 X3, 1 IN2 X3, 2 IN3 X3, 3 IN4 X3, 4 IN + X3, 5 M X3, 6 OUT1 X3, 7 OUT2 X3, 8
KM1
KM2
KM2 KM1
KM1 KM2
1/L1
3/L2
KM1
5/L3
KM2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
6/T3
5/L3
2/107
Contents
3 - Protection components Motor circuit-breakers
TeSys protection components for the motor protection Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 3/2 b General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6 b GV2 ME and GV2 P v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/8 v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/22 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/45 v Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/62
b GV3 ME v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/10 v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/26 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/47 v Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/65 b GV7 R v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/11 v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/29 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/48 v Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/65 b GV2 RT v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6 v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/34 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/49 v Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/64 b Accessories v For circuit-breakers GV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/59 v For circuit-breakers GV3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/55 v For circuit-breakers GV7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/57 and 3/61
Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 3/4 b GV2 LE and GV2 L v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/12 v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/35 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/50 v Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/70 b GK3 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/14 v Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/41 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/51 v Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/72 b Accessories v For circuit-breakers GV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 3/53 and 3/59 v For circuit-breakers GK3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/55
3/0
Contents

3/0
Contents

3/0
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers for the protection of control circuits, solenoid valves and transformers
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/74 b Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment control circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/76 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/77 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/80 v Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/81
3/1
Selection guide
TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers
Applications
Protection of motors
Tripping threshold on short-circuit
13 In on average
Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V
Up to 15 kW
Up to 37 kW
Operational current at 415 V
0.132 A
180 A
Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2
10100 kA
35100 kA
Door interlock mechanism
Without
With
Without
Circuit-breaker type
GV2 ME
GV2 P
GV3 ME
Pages
3/45 and 3/46
3/45
3/47
3/2
Protection of motors with high current peak on starting
20 In on average
7.5110 kW
Up to 11 kW
12220 A
0.2523 A
35 and 36 kA
70 kA
15100 kA
With
With
GV7 RE
GV7 RS
GV2 RT
3/48
3/49
3/3
Selection guide

Applications
Protection of motors Magnetic circuit-breakers provide short-circuit protection. They must be combined with thermal overload relays to provide motor overload protection.
13 In on average
Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V
Up to 15 kW
Operational current at 415 V
0.432 A
Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2
10100 kA
35100 kA
Door interlock mechanism
With
Device type
GV2 LE
GV2 L
Pages
3/50
3/4
614 In
813 In
6.312.5 In
1137 kW
0.37250 kW
4080 A
1.5500 A
35 and 50 kA
25.7 and 150 kA
35.7150 kA
45.7150 kA
GK3 EF
NS 80
NS 100 to NS 250
NS 400 and NS 630
3/51
Please consult the Merlin Gerin catalogue - Low Voltage Distribution
3/5
Characteristics

Environment
Circuit-breaker type Conforming to standards GV2 ME GV2 P IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, EN 60204, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14, NF C 63-650, 63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660 GV3 ME IEC 60947-2, 60947-4-1, NF EN, BS EN, DIN EN 60 947. GV7 R IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, EN 60947-1, 60947-2, EN 60947-4-1, NF C 63-650, NF C 63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660 DNV, UL
Protective treatment Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Openmounted In enclosure
CSA, CEBEC, GOST, TSE, UL, BV, GL, LROS , DNV, PTB, EZU, SETI, RINA, TH IP 20 GV2 Mp01: IP 41 GV2 Mp02: IP 55 30 gn -11 ms 5 gn (5150 Hz) C C C C C C m - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 960 2000 Yes J
CSA, UL, PTB, EZU, GOST, TSE, DNV, LROS, GL, BV, RINA
CSA, UL, LROS
TC IP 20 GV3 CE01: IP 55 22 gn -20 ms 2.5 gn (025 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 60 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 960 3000
TC IP 405 with terminal shields 30 gn -11 ms 2.5 gn (25 Hz) - 55+ 95 - 25 + 70 - 25 + 55 (1) 960 2000 Yes 0.5
Shock resistance conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Vibration resistance conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Ambient air temperature Storage Operation
Openmounted In enclosure Openmounted In enclosure
Temperature compensation
Flame resistance conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Maximum operating altitude Suitable for isolation conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6 Resistance to mechanical impact Sensitivity to phase failure
0.5 0.5 0.5 In enclosure: 6 Yes, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2
Technical characteristics
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V V V Hz kV W C.O. 440 V In/2 440 V In C.O. C.O. C.O./h A A AC-3 690 690 600 50/60 6 2.5 100 000 100 000 25 0.16 0.16 32 32 Continuous duty 0.40 23 GV2 P GV2 RT GV3 GV3 GV3 ME06 ME40 ME80 ME25 ME63 A AC-3 690 690 600 (B600) 50/60 6 3 6 8 30 000 30 000 GV7 Rp20... Rp100 A AC-3 690 750 600 50/60 8 5 50 000 50 000 30 000 25 40 63 80 12 100 150 220 8.7 40 000 40 000 20 000 14.5 20 000 20 000 10 000 GV7 Rp150 GV7 Rp220
Utilisation category
Rated operational voltage (Ue) conforming to IEC 60947-2 Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-2 (Ui) Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, UL 508 Rated operational frequency conforming to IEC 60947-2 Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) conforming to IEC 60947-2 Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical durability (C.O.: Closing - Opening) Electrical durability for AC-3 duty
100 000 50 000 100 000 50 000 25 1.6 25
Duty class (maximum operating rate) Maximum conventional rated thermal current (Ith) conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Rated duty conforming to IEC 947-4-1
(1) For operation up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Office. References : pages 3/44 to 3/49 Dimensions : pages 3/62 to 3/67 Schemes : pages 3/68 and 3/69
3/6

Mounting characteristics
Operating position Without derating, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Side view GV3 ME: preferably vertical
Front view
Connection characteristics
Circuit-breaker type Connection to screw clamp terminals Number of conductors and c.s.a. Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Connection to spring terminals Number of conductors and c.s.a. Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Connection to bars, cables with lugs or bare cables mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m mm 2 mm 2 GV2 ME Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 1.7 2 x 1 (1) Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 2x6 GV2 P Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 1.7 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 GV3 ME06ME20 Min. Max. 2x1 2x6 2x1 2x1 1.7 2x6 2x4 1.7 GV3 ME25ME80 Min. Max. 1 x 2.5 1 x 35 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 5 2 x 16 2 x 16 5
2 x 1.5 (1) 2 x 4
Circuit-breaker type Pitch
Without spreaders With spreaders
mm mm mm mm mm
GV7 Rp20...Rp100 35 45 y6 y 25 y 10 M6
GV7 Rp150 35 45 y6 y 25 y 10 M8 15 20 1.5...95 15
GV7 Rp220 35 45 y6 y 25 y 10 M8 15 20 1.5...185 15
Bars or cables with lugs
e L d
Screws Tightening torque Bare cables (copper or aluminium) with connectors Height (h) C.s.a. Tightening torque N.m mm mm 2 N.m
10 20 1.5...95 15
(1) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended.
3/7
Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME and GV2 P
Breaking capacity of GV2 ME and GV2 P

Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME 01 07 08 to 06 0.1 2.5 4 to 1.6 g g g g g g 10 14 16 20 21 & 22 23 & 25 50 32 GV2 P 01 07 08 to 06 0.1 2.5 4 to 1.6 g g g g g 10 14 16 20 21 & 22 23 & 25 g g 32
Rating
6.3 10
14
18
32
6.3 10
14
18
32
Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2
230/240 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g
g g
g g
g g
50
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
100 100 g
400/415 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
15 50
15 50
15 40
10 50
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
50 50
50 50
50 50
440 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g
g g
g g
50
15
8 50
6 50
6 50
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
50 75
20 75
20 75
20 75
100 100 50
500 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g
g g
g g
50
10
6 75
4 75
4 75
g g
g g
g g
g g
50
42
10 75
10 75
10 75
100 100 75
100 75
690 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g
3 75
3 75
3 75
3 75
3 75
3 75
3 75
3 75
g g
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Associated fuses (if required) if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2
230/240 V
aM gG
A A
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
80
80 g
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
100 100 g
400/415 V
aM gG
A A
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
63 80
63 80
80
80
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
100 100 100 125 125 125
100 100 g
440 V
aM gG
A A
g g
g g
g g
50 63
50 63
50 63
50 63
63 80
63 80
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
50 63
63 80
80
80
100 100
500 V
aM gG
A A
g g
g g
g g
50 63
50 63
50 63
50 63
50 63
50 63
g g
g g
g g
g g
50 63
50 63
50 63
50 63
50 63
690 V
aM gG
A A
g g
16 20
25 32
32 40
32 40
40 50
40 50
40 50
40 50
g g
20 25
25 32
40 50
40 50
50 63
50 63
50 63
50 63
g > 100 kA.

(1) As % of Icu.
R e fe re n c e s : p a g e s 3 /4 4 to 3 /4 9
D im e n s io n s : p a g e s 3 /6 2 to 3 /6 7
S chem es : p a g e s 3 /6 8 a n d 3 /6 9
3/8

Breaking capacity of GV2 ME and GV2 P (used in association with current limiter GV1 L3)
Circuit-breaker type Rating A GV2 ME 01 to 06 07 0.1 to 2.5 1.6 g g kA g g kA g g kA g g g g g g g g g g 08 4 10 6.3 14 10 16 14 20 18 21 23 22 25 32 32
230/240 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g g g g g g g
g g g g g g g g
g g g g g g 50 100
g g 100 50 50 75 42 100
g g 100 50 20 75 10 75
g g 100 40 20 75 10 75
g g 100 40 20 75 10 75
g g 100 40 20 75 10 75
400/415 V
Icu Ics % (1)
440 V
Icu Ics % (1)
500 V
Icu Ics % (1)
Circuit-breaker type Rating A
GV2 P 01 to 06 07 0.1 to 2.5 1.6 g g g g g g g g g g 50
08 4
10 6.3
14 10
16 14
20 18
21 23
22 25
32 32
230/240 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g g g g g g g 50
g g g g g g g g 50
g g g g g g 100 50 50
g g g g 100 50 100 50 50
g g g g 100 50 100 50 50
g g g g 100 50 100 50 50
g g g g 100 50 100 50 50
g g g g 100 50 100 50 50
400/415 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g
440 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g
500 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g
690 V (3)
Icu = Ics
kA
Circuit-breaker type Rating A
GV2 ME 01 to 06 07 0.1 2.5 to 1.6 p p p p p p p p
08 4
10 6.3
14 10
16 14
20 18
21 23
22 25
32 32
Cable protection against thermal Minimum c.s.a. 1 mm2 stress in the event of short-circuit protected (PVC insulated copper cables) at 40 C 1.5 mm2 at Isc max. 2.5 mm2 46 mm2
p p p p
y 10 kA y 6 kA (2) y 20 kA y 10 kA (2) p p p p p p
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2) (2) p
g > 100 kA p Cable c.s.a. protected

(1) As % of Icu (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected (3) With limiter LA9 LB920
3/9
Characteristics

Breaking capacity of GV3 ME

Circuit-breaker type Rating A GV3 ME 06 & 07 08 1.6 & 2.5 4 10 6 14 10 20 16 25 25 40 40 63 63 80 80
230/240 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
100 100
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 4 100
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 4 100
100 100 100 100 25 100 8 100 4 100
100 100 100 50 25 60 8 100 4 100
100 100 100 50 25 60 8 100 4 100
100 100 35 50 25 60 8 75 4 75
100 100 35 50 25 60 8 75 4 75
100 100 15 50 10 60 4 100 2 100
400/415 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
100 100
440 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
100 100
500 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
100 100
690 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
100 100
Associated fuses, if required if lsc > breaking capacity Icu
230/240 V
aM gG
A A A A A A A A A A
g g g g g g g g g g
g g g g g g g g 40 50
g g g g g g g g 50 63
g g g g 125 160 80 100 80 100
g g g g 160 200 100 125 100 125
g g g g 200 250 125 160 125 160
g g 250 315 250 315 160 200 160 200
g g 315 400 315 400 200 250 200 250
g g 315 400 315 400 200 250 200 250
400/415 V
aM gG
440 V
aM gG
500 V
aM gG
690 V
aM gG
g Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc. (1) As % of Icu.
3/10
Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R
Breaking capacity of GV7 R

Circuit-breaker type Rating A GV7 RE20RE100 RS20RS100 1220 to 60100 RE150 90150 RS150 90150 RE220 132220 RS220 132220
230/240 V
lcu Ics % (1)
kA
85 100
100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100
85 100 35 100 35 100 30 100 8 100
100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100
85 100 35 100 35 100 30 100 8 100
100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100
400/415 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
36 100
440 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
36 100
500 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
18 100
690 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
8 100
Cable protection against thermal stress in the event of short-circuit (PVC insulated copper cables)
Minimum c.s.a. 4 mm 2 protected at 40 C 6 mm 2 at Isc max. 1050 mm2
y 6 kA p p
y 6 kA y 25 kA p
(2) (2) p
(2) (2) p
(2) (2) p
(2) (2) p
p Cable c.s.a. protected.

(1) As % of Icu. (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected.
3/11
Characteristics

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 LE and GV2 L
Environment
Type Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Shock resistance Vibration resistance Ambient air temperature Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Storage Operation Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 C C C m GV2 LE GV2 L IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, EN 60204, NF C 63-650, NF C63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660, UL 1077. UL, CSA BV, GL, LROS, DNV, RINA, UL, CSA TH TH 30 gn 5 gn (5 to 150 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 2000 30 gn 5 gn (5 to 150 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 2000
Maximum operating altitude Operating position
Cabling Number of conductors and c.s.a.
Solid cable
mm2
Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 Yes
Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1
Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 Yes 1.7 0.5 A AC-3 690 690 50/60 6 1.8 100 000 100 000 40 Continuous duty
Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end Suitable for isolation Tightening torque Resistance to mechanical impact Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational frequency Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V V Hz kV W C.O. For AC-3 duty C.O. C.O./h Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6 N.m J mm2
1.7 0.5 A AC-3 690 690 50/60 6 1.8 100 000 100 000 40 Continuous duty
Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC 60947-2 voltage (U imp) Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical durability (C.O. : Closing - Opening) Electrical durability Duty class (maximum operating rate) Rated duty
Schemes : page 3/73
3/12

Breaking capacity of GV2 LE and GV2 L

Type GV2 LE 03 07 08 10 14 to 06 0.4 2.5 4 6,3 10 to 1.6 g g g g g g kA g g kA g g kA g g kA g g A A A A A A A A A A kA kA g g g g g g g g g g p p p p g g g g g g g 3 g g g g g g g 3 g g g 50 g g g 15 16 20 22 32 GV2 L 03 07 08 to 06 0.4 2.5 4 to 1 g g g g g g g g g g 4 g g g g g g g 4 10 14 16 20 22 32
Rating
14 18 25
32
6,3 10
14
18
25
32
230/240 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
g g
g g
50
50
g g g g g g g g 4
g g g g 20 75 10
g g 50 50 20 75 10
g g 50 50 20 75 10 75 4
50
50
100 100 g 10 50 6 50 4 75 3 75 80 g g g g g g g g g
100 100 50 50 20 75 10 75 4 50 50 20 75 10 75 4
400/415 V
Icu Ics % (1)
15 15 15 50 50 40 8 8 6
440 V
Icu Ics % (1)
100 100 50 50 50 50 10 6 6 4
500 V
Icu Ics % (1)
100 100 75 75 75 3 3 75 g g g g 50 63 50 63 32 40 3 3 3
100 75 4 4
690 V
Icu Ics % (1)
75 75 75 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50 63 50 63
75 75 75 g g g g 80
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 g g g g g g g g 20 25 p p p p g g g g g g g g 25 32 p p p p g g g g g g g g 40 50 g g g g 50 63 50 63 40 50 g g 80 g g 100 100 125 125
Associated fuses (if required) if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2 amendment 1
230/240 V
aM gG
100 100 g 80 g
400/415 V
aM gG
63 63 80
100 100 100
80 80 100 100 g 50 50 63 63 63 80 50 50 50 63 63 63 40 40 40 50 50 50 63 80 50 63 40 50 g g g g g g
100 125 125 125 63 80 50 63 50 63 80 80 80
440 V
aM gG
100 100 100 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63
500 V
aM gG
690 V
aM gG
16 25 32 20 32 40 p p p p p p p p
Cable protection against thermal 1 mm 2 stress in the event of short-circuit (PVC insulated copper cables) 1.5 mm2 Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 C and at Isc max. 2.5 mm2 46 mm2
y 10 y 6 (2) (2) (2) (2) p y 20 y 10 (2) (2) (2) (2) p p p p p p p p p p p (2) p p p
y 10 y 6 (2) (2) (2) (2) y 20 y 10 (2) (2) (2) (2) p p p p p p p p p p (2) p
g > 100 kA pCable c.s.a. protected

(1) As % of Icu (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected
Schemes : page 3/73
3/13
Characteristics

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GK3
Environment
Conforming to standards Protective treatment Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Flame resistance Ambient air temperature Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Storage Operation IEC 60947-2. EN 60-204 TC GK3 EF basic unit: IP 20 22 gn for 20 ms 2.5 gn (025 Hz) Conforms for 960 C C C m - 40+ 80 - 20 + 70 open-mounted 3000 Any Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Suitable for isolation mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 1 x 2.5 to 35 conductor 1 x 2.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 2.5 to 16 conductors 1 x 2.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 2.5 to 16 conductors 5 Yes, conforming to IEC 60947-17-1-6
Maximum operating altitude Operating position Cabling
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational frequency Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V kV V Hz C.O. C.O. C.O./h 750 10 690 5060 1500 20 000 40 About 13 times the rating of the GK3 EF selected (non adjustable threshold) Conforming to IEC 60947-2 A
Electrical durability for AC-23/400 V duty (C.O.: Closing - Opening) Mechanical durability Maximum operating rate Operating threshold of magnetic trips Utilisation category
Schemes : page 3/73
3/14

Type Breaking capacity of the circuit-breaker only or of the circuit-breaker combined with a thermal overload relay
230/240 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
GK3 EF40 100 20
GK3 EF65 50 40 35 25 25 30 15 30 6 50 200 315 200 250 160 250 160 200 125 160
GK3 EF80 50 40 35 25 25 30 15 30 6 50 200 315 200 250 160 250 160 200 125 160
400/415 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
50 30
440 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
30 30
500 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
20 30
690 V
Icu Ics % (1)
kA
6 60
Associated fuses (if required) for use with circuit-breaker only or circuit-breaker combined with a thermal overload relay if lsc > breaking capacity
230/240 V
aM gG
A A A A A A A A A A
160 250 160 200 160 200 125 160 100 125
400/415 V
aM gG
440 V
aM gG
500 V
aM gG
690 V
aM gG
Use of circuit-breakers without fuses
Minimum cable length (in metres) limiting the maximum short-circuit current to 35 kA maximum, so enabling breakers GK3 EF to be used without fuses mm 2 50 kA 45 kA 40 kA 37 kA m m m m y 25 5 5 5 5 35 6 5 5 5 50 8 7 5 5 70 10 8 5 5 95 13 10 8 5 120 15 12 9 5
Cable c.s.a. Isc (rms) 3-phase, incoming (Ue = 400 V)
(1) As % of Icu
Schemes : page 3/73
3/15
Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2
Auxiliary contacts
Type of contacts Rated insulation voltage (Ui) (associated insulation coordination) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V
Instantaneous auxiliary GV AN, GV AD 690 600 6 5 100 000 AC-15/100 000 C.O.
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14 V and UL 508 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 A Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14 A and UL 508 C.O.
Fault signalling Instantaneous GV AD, GV AM11 (1) auxiliary GV AE 690 250 (690 in relation to main circuit) 300 300 2.5 1 1000 AC-14/1000 C.O. 48 48 2.5 1 100 000 AC-15/100 000 C.O. 48 60 110 230 127 240 120 120 1.27 2.4 0.5
Mechanical durability (C.O. : Closing - Opening) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power, normal conditions Occasional breaking and making capacities, abnormal conditions Rated operational current (Ie) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 d.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power, normal conditions Occasional breaking and making capacities, abnormal conditions Rated operational current (Ie) Low level switching reliability of contact Minimum operational conditions d.c. operation Short-circuit protection Cabling, screw clamp terminals Number of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque
V VA kVA A
48
110 230 380 440 500 690 24 127 240 415 300 500 720 850 650 500 400 36 3 6 7 4.5 13 3.3 15 2.2 13 1.5 12 1 9 0.6
110 230 24 127 240 72 72 48
0.22 0.3 1.5 1
0.45 0.45 0.48 0.6 0.5 0.3 2
1.25 1
DC-13/100 000 C.O. V W W A 24 110 240 (2) 140 240 180 140 120 240 360 240 210 180 6 5 3 1.3 0.5 48 60
DC-13/1000 C.O. 24 24 48 15 60 9 50
DC-13/100 000 C.O. 24 24 48 15 60 9 50
100 50 1 0.3
100 50 1 0.3
0.15
0.15
V mA
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
GV A: number of failures for n million operating cycles (17 V-5 mA): = 10-6 17 5 By GB2 CBpp circuit-breaker (rating according to operational GB2 CB06 or current for Ue y 415 V) or by gG fuse 10 A max gG fuse, 10 A max 1 2 12.5 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 1.4 max 1.4 max GV AN only 0.752.5
0
Cabling, spring terminals Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Operation of instantaneous auxiliary contacts
Power pole
0.752.5
1
0.751.5 Operation of fault signalling contacts
F F F O F O F F F O F O
GV AM11 Change of state following tripping on short-circuit. GV AD10pp and GV AD01pp Change of state following tripping on short-circuit. overload or undervoltage.
(1) For application example of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact, see page 3/68. (2) Add an RC circuit type LA4 D to the load terminals, see page 24511/5.
3/16
Characteristics

Auxiliary contacts
Type of contacts Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts GV3 A01A07 690 600 (B600) 6 5 (B600) 100 000 48 110 220 380 127 240 415 AC-11/100 000 C.O. 350 500 4 6 24 12 4.5 48 800 20 3.5 60 850 20 2.2 110 440 500 690
Fault signalling contacts GV3 A08 and A09 690 600 (B600) 6 5 (B600) 1000 48 110 220 380 127 240 415 AC-11/1000 C.O. 240 460 2.4 5 24 8 3.6 48 800 12 3.5 60 850 15 2.2 110 440 500 690
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith)
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, V UL 508 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 A Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, A UL 508 C.O. Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power V
Mechanical durability (C.O.: Closing - Opening) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a.c. operation
VA Occasional breaking and making kVA capacities A Operational current (Ie) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 d.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power V
700 15 1.5 220
700 15 1.5
400 10 0.6
450 12 1 220
450 12 1
200 8 0.3
DC-11/100 000 C.O. W 180 240 240 360 6 5 180 240 3 140 210 1.3 120 180 0.5
DC-11/1000 C.O. 120 120 180 180 5 2.5 90 135 1.5 70 105 0.7 60 90 0.3
Occasional breaking and making capacities Operational current (Ie) Short-circuit protection Cabling Number of conductors Solid cable
W A
By GB2 CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max 1 mm 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 GV3 A08 and A09 change state following tripping on short-circuit or overload
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 Flexible cable with cable end Contact operation mm 2
0
Power pole
GV3 A01, A07 O F GV3 A02 F F O F F F F F F F

GV3 A03
GV3 A05
GV3 A06
3/17
Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7
Auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contact characteristics

Type of contacts Rated insulation voltage (Ui) (associated insulation coordination) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Mechanical durability (C.O.: Closing - Opening) Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a.c. operation Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V GV7 AE11 690 GV7 AB11 690
A C.O.
6 50 000 AC-12 or AC-15. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 230/ 380/ 440 240 415 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 4 3 3
6 50 000 AC-12 or AC-15. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 230/ 380/ 440 240 415 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 3 2.5 2.5
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational current (Ie)
V AC-12 AC-15 A A
690 6 0.1
690 5 0.1
Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 d.c. operation
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational current (Ie)
V DC-12 DC-14 A A V mA
DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 2.5 1 17 5 2.5 0.2 0.8 0.5
250 0.3
DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 2 2 0.1 0.5 0.25
250
0.03 0.5 12 5
Minimum operational conditions d.c. operation Short-circuit protection Cabling Solid cable
mm2
By GB2 CBpp circuit-breaker (rating according to operational current for Ue y 415 V) or gG fuse, 10 A max. 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end mm2
3/18
Characteristics

Characteristics of Start-Stop and fault signalling contacts

Rated insulation Conforming to IEC 60947-1 voltage (Ui) Rated operational Conforming to IEC 60947-1 voltage (Ue) Conventional thermal Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 current (Ith) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Rated operational voltage (Ue) a.c. operation (C.O.: Closing - Opening) Operational power Occasional breaking and making capacities Rated operational current (Ie) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Rated operational voltage (Ue) d.c. operation (C.O.: Closing - Opening) Operational power Occasional breaking and making capacities Rated operational current (Ie) Short-circuit protection Cabling Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Solid cable mm 2 V V A 500 500 6 AC-15. 20 000 C.O. 48 110/127 360 4000 6 500 12 000 4.5
V VA VA A
220/240 800 20 000 3.5
380/415 850 20 000 2.2
440 700 15 000 1.5
500 700 15 000 1.5
V W W A
DC-13. 1000 C.O. 24 48 180 240 6 240 280 5
60 180 240 3
110 140 210 1.3
220 120 180 0.5
By GB2 CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max 1 x 14 conductor 1 x 2.5 conductor 1 x 12.5 conductor or 2 x 12.5 conductors 0.8
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm 2 N.m
3/19
Characteristics

Electric trips
Characteristics of electric trips

Type of circuit-breaker Type of trip Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V GV2 ME, GV2 P GV AU GV AX (1) GV AS 690 500 690 600 600 0.7 1.1 Un 0.75 0.2 Un 14 10.5 5 1.6 GV3 ME GV3 B 690 GV3 D 690 GV7 R GV7 AU 690 GV7 AS 690 600 0.7 1.1 Un 0.2 0.75 Ue
Operational voltage Drop-out voltage Inrush consumption
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, V UL 508 V Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V a c VA W VA W
600 (B600) 600 (B600) 600 0.81.1 Un 0.70.35 Un 12 7 7 2.5 0.85 1.1 Un 0.35 0.7 Ue < 10 <5 <5 <5
0.851.1 Un 0.70.35 Un 12 8 3.5 1.1
Sealed consumption
a c
3
Operating time On-load factor Cabling Number of conductors Solid cable
Conforming to IEC 60947-1 ms
From the moment the voltage reaches its operational value until opening of the circuit-breaker. 1015 10 15 < 50 100 % 1 or 2 100 % 1 or 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 1.2 100 % 1 1.5 1.5 1 1.2
mm2
12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 1.4 max 100 000
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Mechanical durability (C.O.: Closing - Opening) mm2 N.m C.O.
50 % of the mechanical durability of the circuit-breaker (1) Wiring scheme of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME only, see page 3/68.
3/20
Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2
Accessories
Characteristics of 3-pole busbars GV2 Gppp

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Permissible peak current ( I peak) Permissible thermal limit (I2 t) Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 V A kA kA2 s Conforming to IEC 60529 690 63 11 104 IP 20
Characteristics of terminal blocks GV2 G05 and GV1 G09

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Degree of protection Cabling Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 60529 Solid cable mm 2 V A 690 63 IP 20 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 10 conductors 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 2.5 to 10 conductors 1 x 1.5 to 16 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 4 conductors 2.2 1.7
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Connector Screw clamp mm 2 N.m N.m
Characteristics of current limiters (GV2 ME and GV2 P)

Type Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Operating threshold Cabling Solid cable mm 2 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 rms current V A A GV1 L3 690 63 1500 (non adjustable threshold) 1 conductor 1.525 1.525 1.516 2.2 2 conductors 1.510 2.510 1.5 4 LA9 LB920 690 63 1000 (non adjustable threshold) 1 conductor 1.525 1.525 1.516 2 conductors 1.510 1.510 1.5 4
Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm 2 N.m
3/21
Curves

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 ME and GV2 P

Average operating time at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current:
Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
1
10
2 3
0,1
0,01
0,001
1,5
10
100
1 3 poles from cold state 2 2 poles from cold state 3 3 poles from hot state
Schemes : page 3/68
3/22
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 ME and GV2 P (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Limited peak current (kA)
100
1
=0 .25
0. 3
2 3 4 5 6
10
0.7
0.
7 8
0.
0.
9
= co s 0.9 5
10
11
0,1 0,1
10
15 (12)
100 Prospective Isc (kA)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Maximum peak current 24-32 A 20-25 A 17-23 A 13-18 A 9-14 A 6-10 A 4-6.3 A 2.5-4 A 1.6-2.5 A 1-1.6 A Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 ME (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings)
Schemes : page 3/68
3/23
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 ME

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
100 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
10
9
1
10
0,1
0,01 0,1
10
1 24-32 A 2 20-25 A 3 17-23 A 4 13-18 A 5 9-14 A 6 6-10 A 7 4-6.3 A 8 2.5-4 A 9 1.6-2.5 A 10 1-1.6 A
Schemes : page 3/68
3/24
Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 P
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 P

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I 2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
100
1 2 3 4 5 6
10
3
7
0,1
0,01 0,1
10
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24 -32 A 20-25 A 17-23 A 13-18 A 9-14 A 6-10 A 4-6.3 A 2.5-4 A 1.6-2.5 A 1-1.6 A
Schemes : page 3/68
3/25
Curves

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves

Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
1
10
2 4
0,1
0,01
0,001
10
100
1 2 3 4
3 poles from 3 poles from 3 poles from 3 poles from
cold state, 1.616 A rating hot state, 1.616 A rating cold state, 2580 A rating hot state, 2580 A rating
Schemes : page 3/69
3/26
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)

100
1
=0 .25
2
0. 3 =
3 4
0.
10
5 6 7
0. 8
0.7
8
9 = 0.
10
11
0,1 0,1
10
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Maximum peak current 56-80 A 40-63 A 25-40 A 16-25 A 10-16 A 6-10 A 4-6 A 2.5-4 A 1.6-2.5 A 1-1.6 A
Schemes : page 3/69
3/27
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
100
3
10
1 2 3 4 5
0,1 0,1
10
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
56 -80 A 40-63 A 25-40 A 16-25 A 10-16 A 6-10 A 4-6 A 2.5-4 A 1.6-2.5 A
Schemes : page 3/69
3/28
Curves

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV7 R

Time (s)
10 000 5000
2000 1000 500
200 100 50
20 10 5
1
2 1 0,5
3
0,2 0,1 0,05
0,02 0,01 0,005
0,002 0,001 1 1,12 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100

1 Cold state curve 2 Cold state curve 3 1214 Ir In the event of total phase failure, tripping occurs after 4 s 20 %
Schemes : page 3/69
3/29
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 3 GV7 RE100
100 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
1 2
10 8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
For GV7 RS only

1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 3 GV7 RS100
100 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
1 2
10 8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
Schemes : page 3/69
3/30
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Thermal limit Sum of I 2dt = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
Sum of I2dt (A 2s)
107
1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 3 GV7 RE100
5x10
3x106 2x106
106
3
1 2 3
5x10 3x10
2x105
10
5x10
3x104 2x10
4
10
20
30
40
50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
For GV7 RS only

Sum of I2dt (A 2s)
107
1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 3 GV7 RS100
5x10
3x106 2x106
106
1
5x10 3x10
5
2 3
2x105
105
5x104 3x104 2x104 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100

Schemes : page 3/69
3/31
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)

Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
50 40
1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 and GV7 RE100
30
20
1 2
10
8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)
For GV7 RS only

50 40
1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 and GV7 RS100
30
20
1 2
10
8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)
Schemes : page 3/69
3/32
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)

Thermal stress limit Sum of I 2dt = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
Sum of I2dt (A 2s)
3x106
1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 and GV7 RE100
2x10
106
3
1 2
5x10
3x105
2x105
105 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)
For GV7 RS only

Sum of I2dt (A 2s)
3x106
1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 and GV7 RS100
2x106
106
5x105
1 2
3x105
2x105
105 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)
Schemes : page 3/69
3/33
Curves

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 RT
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 RT

Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
3
10
2 1
0,1
0,01
0,001 1 10 100
k x Ir
Schemes : page 3/68
3/34
Curves

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV2 LE
Tripping curves for GV2 L or GV2 LE combined with thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
Average operating time at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current
Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
3
1 2 3
10
0,1
0,01
0,001 1 10 100
Schemes : page 3/73
3/35
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE only (3-phase 400/415 V)
100
1
= 0.2 5
3
0. 5 =
0.
2 3 4 5 6
10
0.
7 8 9
0.9
0.
10
0,1 0,1
co
=0
1
.95
10
15
100
11
1 Maximum peak current 2 32 A 3 25 A 4 18 A 5 14 A 6 10 A 7 6.3 A 8 4A 9 2.5 A 10 1.6 A 11 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).
Schemes : page 3/73
3/36
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K (3-phase 400/415 V)
100
1
.25 =0
0. 3
2 3
4 5
10
0.
0.7
0.
6 7
0.
8
0.9 co s = 5
10
0,1 0,1
10
15
100
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Maximum peak current 32 A 25 A 18 A 14 A 10 A 6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).
Schemes : page 3/73
3/37
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 LE only

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
100
2 3 4 5 6
10
8
1
0,1
0,01 0,1
10
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
32 A 25 A 18 A 14 A 10 A 6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A
Schemes : page 3/73
3/38
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L only

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I 2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
100
1 2 3 4 5 6
10
3
7 8
0,1
0,01 0,1
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
25 A and 32 A 18 A 14 A 10 A 6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A
Schemes : page 3/73
3/39
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
100
2 1 3 4 5 6
10
0,1
10
0,01 0,1
10
15
1 32 A (GV2 LE32) 2 25 A and 32 A (GV2 L32) 3 18 A 4 14 A 5 10 A 6 6.3 A 7 4A 8 2.5 A 9 1.6 A 10 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).
Schemes : page 3/73
3/40
Curves

Tripping curves for GK3 combined with thermal overload relay LRD 33
Average operating time at 20 C without prior current flow
Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
A 1 2 3
10
0,1
0,01
0,001 1 10 100
1 3 poles from cold state 2 2 poles from cold state 3 3 poles from hot state A Thermal overload relay protection zone B GK3 protection zone
Schemes : page 2457/5
3/41
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit for GK3 only

(3-phase 400/415 V)
100
3
10
2 3 4
0,1 0,1
10
100
1 2 3 4
Maximum peak current 80 A 65 A 40 A
Schemes : page 3/73
3/42
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GK3 only

Thermal limit in A2s Sum of I 2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (A 2s)
1000
1 2 3
100
10
1 0,1
10
100
1 80 A 2 65 A 3 40 A
Schemes : page 3/73
3/43
Presentation

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2, GV3 and GV7
1 O 2 4 I 1 2 4
GV2 ME, GV2 P, GV3 ME and GV7 R motor circuit-breakers are 3-pole thermalmagnetic circuit-breakers specifically designed for the control and protection of motors , conforming to standards IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60947-4-1
Connection
These circuit-breakers are designed for connection by screw clamp terminals. Circuit-breaker GV2 ME can be supplied with spring terminal connections. These ensure secure, permanent and durable clamping that is resistant to harsh environments, vibration and impact and is even more effective when conductors without cable ends are used. Each connection can take two independent conductors.
GV2 ME
GV3 ME
1 3 O 2 3 1
Operation
Control is manual and local when the motor circuit-breaker is used on its own. Control is automatic and remote when it is associated with a contactor. GV2 ME and GV3 ME Pushbutton control. Energisation is controlled manually by operating the Start button I 1. De-energisation is controlled manually by operating the Stop button O 2, or automatically by the thermal-magnetic protection elements or by a voltage trip attachment. GV2 P Control by rotary knob. GV7 R Control by rocker lever. Energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position I 1. De-energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position O 2. De-energisation due to a fault automatically places the knob or rocker lever in the Trip position 3. Re-energisation is possible only after having returned the knob or rocker switch to position O.
3
GV2 P
2 4
GV7 R
533886
533887
Protection of motors and personnel

GV2 ME with screw clamp connections
GV2 ME with spring terminal connections

533889
Motor protection is provided by the thermal-magnetic protection elements incorporated in the motor circuit-breaker. The magnetic elements (short-circuit protection) have a non-adjustable tripping threshold, which is equal to about 13 times the maximum setting current of the thermal trips. The thermal elements (overload protection) include automatic compensation for ambient temperature variations. The rated operational current of the motor is displayed by means of a graduated knob 4. Personnel protection is also provided. All live parts are protected against direct finger contact. The addition of an undervoltage trip allows the circuit-breaker to be de-energised in the event of an undervoltage condition. The user is therefore protected against sudden starting of the machine when normal voltage is restored, since the Start button I has to be pressed to restart the motor.
533888
GV2 P
GV3 ME
533890
With the addition of a shunt trip, de-energisation of the unit can be remotely controlled. The operators on both open-mounted and enclosed motor circuit-breakers can be locked in the Stop position O by up to 3 padlocks. Because they are suitable for isolation, these circuit-breakers, in the open position, provide an adequate isolation distance and indicate the actual position of the moving contacts by the position of the operators.
Special features
GV7 R
These motor circuit-breakers are easily installed in any configuration thanks to their universal fixing arrangement: screw fixing or clip-on mounting on symmetrical, asymmetrical or combination rails.
Dimensions : pages 3/62 to 3/67 Schemes : pages 3/68 and 3/69
3/44
References

533895
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME and GV2 P with screw clamp terminals
GV2 ME: pushbutton control, GV2 P: control by rotary knob
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V 690 V P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) P Icu kW kA % kW kA % kW kA GV2 ME 0.06 g 0.09 g 0.12 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50 g 50 50 40 50 40 50 50 50 g g g g g g g g g 100 g 100 100 100 100 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 Setting range of thermal trips (2) A 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 11.6 11.6 1.62.5 1.62.5 2.54 2.54 2.54 2.54 46.3 46.3 610 610 610 610 914 914 914 914 1318 1318 1723 1723 2025 2025 2432 2432 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 1.5 or g g g g 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 2.4 or 5 or 0.37 g 8 or 0.18 g 0.25 g 0.37 g 0.55 g 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 3 4 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 g g g g g g g g g g g g 15 g 15 50 15 50 15 50 10 35 8 or 0.55 g 13 or 0.37 g 0.55 g 0.75 g 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 3 4 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 g g g g g g 50 g 10 50 10 50 6 42 6 10 4 10 4 10 4 10 22.5 or 0.75 g 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 3 4 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22 22 g 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 4 3 4 3 4 22.5 or GV2 P 22.5 or 33.5 33.5 51 51 51 51 78 78 138 138 138 138 170 170 170 170 223 223 327 327 327 327 416 416 Reference Weight
Ics (1) %
GV2 ME01 GV2 P01 GV2 ME02 GV2 P02 GV2 ME03 GV2 P03 GV2 ME04 GV2 P04 GV2 ME04 GV2 P04 GV2 ME05 GV2 P05 GV2 ME06 GV2 P06 GV2 ME06 GV2 P06 GV2 ME06 GV2 P06 GV2 ME07 GV2 P07 GV2 ME08 GV2 P08 GV2 ME08 GV2 P08 GV2 ME10 GV2 P10 GV2 ME14 GV2 P14 GV2 ME14 GV2 P14 GV2 ME16 GV2 P16 GV2 ME16 GV2 P16 GV2 ME20 GV2 P20 GV2 ME21 GV2 P21 GV2 ME22 (3) GV2 P22 GV2 ME32 GV2 P32
kg 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350 0.260 0.350
533896
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME with lugs

To order termal magnetic circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected above. Example: GV2 ME08 becomes GV2 ME086.
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME with built-in auxiliary contact block

With instantaneous auxiliary contact block (composition, see page 3/53): b GV AE1, add suffix AE1TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2 ME01AE1TQ. b GV AE11, add suffix AE11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2 ME01AE11TQ . b GV AN11, add suffix AN11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2 ME01AN11TQ. These circuit-breakers with built-in contact block are sold in lots of 20 units in a single pack.
(1) As % of Icu. (2) For use of GV2 ME in an enclosure, see page 2/10. (3) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2 MC or MP, please consult your Regional Sales Office. g > 100 kA.
Schemes : page 3/68
3/45
References

533897
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME with spring terminal connections

Pushbutton control
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V P Icu Ics (2) P Icu Ics (2) kW kA % kW kA % Setting range of thermal trips A 0.10.16 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 1.5 Reference
(1)
Weight
GV2 ME013
kg 0.280
GV2 MEpp3
0.06
0.160.25
2.4
GV2 ME023
0.280
0.09
0.250.40
GV2 ME033
0.280
0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75
g g g g g g g
g g g g g g g
0.400.63
GV2 ME043
0.280
0.37
0.631
13
GV2 ME053
0.280
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1
g g g g
g g g g
11.6
22.5
GV2 ME063
0.280
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME073
0.280
1.1 1.5 2.2
g g g
g g g
1.5 2.2 3
g g 50
g g 100
2.54
51
GV2 ME083
0.280
46.3
78
GV2 ME103
0.280
3 4 5.5
g g 15
g g 50
4 5.5 7.5
10 10 6
100 100 75
610
138
GV2 ME143
0.280
914
170
GV2 ME163
0.280
7.5
15
50
75
1318
223
GV2 ME203
0.280
9 11 11
15 15 15
40 40 40
11
75
1723
327
GV2 ME213
0.260
15
75
2025
327
GV2 ME223
0.260
Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Mounting Front Maximum number 1 Type of contacts N/O + N/C Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference GV AE113 Weight kg 0.030
N/O + N/O
10
GV AE203
0.030
LH side
N/O + N/C
GV AN113
0.060
N/O + N/O
GV AN203
0,060
Accessory
Description LA9 D99 Cable end reducer Application For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2 Sold in lots of 20 Unit reference LA9 D99 Weight kg
(1) For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm 2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended. (2) As % of Icu. g > 100 kA.
Schemes : page 3/68
3/46
References

533899
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV3 ME with screw clamp terminals

Pushbutton control
Standard power ratings of 3-phase 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V P Icu Ics (1) P Icu kW kA % kW kA 0.37 100 100 0.37 100 0.55 100 100 0.55 100 0.75 100 0.75 100 100 1.1 100 motors 660/690 V P Icu kW kA 0.75 100 1.1 100 1.5 100 Setting range of thermal trips A 11.6 Reference Weight
Ics (1) % 100 100 100 100
Ics (1) % 100 100 100
GV3 ME06
kg 0.600
1.62.5
GV3 ME07
0.600
GV3 ME20
1.1 1.5 2.2
100 100 100
100 100 100
1.5 2.2 3
100 100 100
100 100 100
2.2 3 4
4 4 4
100 100 100
2.54
GV3 ME08
0.600
46
GV3 ME10
0.600
3 4 7.5
100 100 100
100 100 50
4 5.5 9
8 8 8
100 100 100
5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2
100 100 100 100 100 100 75 75 75 75 100
610
GV3 ME14
0.600
1016
GV3 ME20
0.600
9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
100 100 35 35 35 35 15
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
8 8 8 8 8 8 4
100 100 75 75 75 75 100
1625
GV3 ME25
0.600
2540
GV3 ME40 (2)
0.700
4063
GV3 ME63 (2)
0.700
5680
GV3 ME80 (2)
0.700
(1) As % of Icu. (2) Recommended for use in association with a contactor.
Schemes : page 3/69
3/47
References

533900
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp terminals

Control by rocker lever
Standard power ratings of 3-phase 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V P Icu Ics (1) P Icu kW kA % kW kA 7.5 36 100 9 18 9 36 100 11 18 GV7 RE 7.5 9 9 11 70 70 36 36 70 70 36 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 9 11 11 15 11 15 18.5 22 18.5 50 50 18 18 50 50 18 18 50 motors 660/690 V P Icu kW kA 11 8 15 8 11 15 15 18.5 15 18.5 22 10 10 8 8 10 10 8 Setting range of thermal trips A 1220 Reference Weight
Ics (1) % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Ics (1) % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
GV7 RE20
kg 2.010
1220
GV7 RS20
2.010
1525
GV7 RE25
2.010
533901
9 11 18.5
1525
GV7 RS25
2.010
2540
GV7 RE40
2.010
18.5
70
100
22
10
100
2540
GV7 RS40
2.010
22
36
100
30
18
100
30
100
3050
GV7 RE50
2.015
22 GV7 RS 37
70
100
30
50
100
30
10
100
3050
GV7 RS50
2.015
36
100
45 55 45 55
18 18 50 50 18
100 100 100 100 100
55
100
4880
GV7 RE80
2.040
37
70
100
55
10
100
4880
GV7 RS80
2.040
45
36
100
75
100
60100
GV7 RE100
2.040
45
70
100
50
100
75
10
100
60100
GV7 RS100
2.040
55 75 55 75 90 110 90 110
35 35 70 70 35 35 70 70
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
75 90 75 90 110 132 160 110 132 160
30 30 50 50 30 30 30 50 50 50
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
90 110 90 110 160 200 160 200
8 8 10 10 8 8 10 10
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
90150
GV7 RE150
2.020
90150
GV7 RS150
2.020
132220
GV7 RE220
2.350
132220
GV7 RS220
2.350
(1) As % of Icu.
Schemes : page 3/69
3/48
References

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 RT
533902
For motors with high current peak on starting

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 440 V 500 V 690 V 230 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18 0.37 0.18 0.09 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.12 0.37 0.37 0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 0.25 0.55 0.55 0.55 1.1 0.75 0.37 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.5 1.1 0.55 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 1.1 2.2 2.2 3 4 3 1.5 3 4 4 5.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 2.2 5.5 5.5 7.5 9 3 7.5 11 4 7.5 7.5 9 15 9 5.5 9 11 11 18.5 11 Setting range of thermal trips A 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 8 13 22 33 Reference Weight
GV2 RT03 GV2 RT04 GV2 RT05 GV2 RT06
kg 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350
GV2 RT
1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723
51 78 138 200 280 400 400
GV2 RT07 GV2 RT08 GV2 RT10 GV2 RT14 GV2 RT16 GV2 RT20 GV2 RT21
0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350
For primaries of 3-phase transformers

Standard power ratings 230/240 V 400/415 V 440 V kW kW kW 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 500 V kW 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 690 V kW 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 12.5 10 Setting range of thermal trips A 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 8 13 22 33 51 78 138 Reference Weight
GV2 RT03 GV2 RT04 GV2 RT05 GV2 RT06 GV2 RT07 GV2 RT08 GV2 RT10
kg 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350
4 5 6.3 10
5 6.3 10 12.5
610 914 1318
200 280 400
GV2 RT14 GV2 RT16 GV2 RT20
0.350 0.350 0.350
Accessory (1)
Description Padlockable external operator (IP 54) black handle, blue legend plate Reference GV2 AP03 Weight kg 0.280
(1) Other accessories such as mounting, cabling and marking accessories are identical to those used for GV2 ME motor circuitbreakers, see page 3/59.
Schemes : page 3/68
3/49
References

Magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 LE and GV2 L with screw clamp terminals

534101
GV2 LE: control by rocker lever, GV2 L: control by rotary knob

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V P Icu Ics (1) P Icu kW kA 0.06 g 0.09 g 0.12 g GV2 LE 0.18 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 100 g 100 100 100 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 g g g 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100 0.63 1 1 1 1 1.6 1.6 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 4 6.3 6.3 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 14 14 18 18 25 25 25 25 32 32 8 or 13 or 13 or 0.75 g 1.1 1.5 1.5 3 3 4 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22 22 g 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 13 or 0.37 g 0.55 g 0.37 g 0.55 g 0.75 g 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 3 4 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 g g g g g 50 g 10 10 10 6 10 6 10 4 10 4 10 4 10 13 or 22.5 or 22.5 or GV2 L 0.75 g 0.75 g 1.1 g 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 3 4 g g g g g g g 33.5 33.5 33.5 or 51 51 51 or 78 78 138 138 138 or 5.5 15 50 5.5 50 50 7.5 15 50 7.5 50 50 9 15 40 9 50 50 11 15 40 11 50 50 15 10 50 15 35 50 (1) As % of Icu. g > 100 kA. 138 138 170 170 170 170 223 223 327 327 327 327 416 416 g g g kW kA Magnetic protection rating 690 V Ics (1) P Icu kW kA Ics (1) A 0.4 0.4 0.63 A 5 5 or 0.37 g g 8 or Tripping current Id 20 % Use in Reference association with thermal overload relay LR2 K0302 LR2 K0304 LRD 03 LR2 K0304 LRD 04 LR2 K0305 LRD 04 LR2 K0305 LRD 05 LR2 K0306 LRD 05 LR2 K0306 LRD 06 LR2 K0306 LRD 05 LR2 K0307 LRD 06 LR2 K0307 LRD 06 LR2 K0308 LRD 07 LR2 K0308 LRD 08 LR2 K0310 LRD 08 LR2 K0312 LRD 08 LR2 K0312 LRD 10 LR2 K0314 LRD 12 LR2 K0316 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 16 LR2 K0321 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 32 GV2 LE03 GV2 LE03 GV2 L03 GV2 LE04 GV2 L04 GV2 LE04 GV2 L04 GV2 LE05 GV2 L05 GV2 LE05 GV2 L05 GV2 LE05 GV2 L05 GV2 LE05 GV2 L05 GV2 LE06 GV2 L06 GV2 LE06 GV2 L06 GV2 LE07 GV2 L07 GV2 LE07 GV2 L07 GV2 LE08 GV2 L08 GV2 LE08 GV2 L08 GV2 LE10 GV2 L10 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 LE16 GV2 L16 GV2 LE16 GV2 L16 GV2 LE20 GV2 L20 GV2 LE22 GV2 L22 GV2 LE22 GV2 L22 GV2 LE32 GV2 L32 Weight
3
534102
0.55 g
0.25 g
kg 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330
Schemes : page 3/73
3/50
References

534103
Magnetic circuit-breakers GK3 with screw clamp connections

Control by rotary knob
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V P Icu Ics (1) P Icu kW kA kW kA 15 50 30 18.5 20 Associated Contactor minimum size Ics (1) Reference LC1 D32 equipment Thermal overload relay Reference LRD 32 Circuit-breaker Short-circuit protection Rating (1) A 40 Reference GK3 EF40 Weight kg 0.710
690 Ics (1) P kW 30
V Icu kA
GK3 EF
22
60
LC1 D40
LRD 3353
40
GK3 EF40
0.710
18.5 50
30
22
20
30
30
60
LC1 D40
LRD 3355
40
GK3 EF40
0.710
22
35
25
30
15
30
LC1 D50
LRD 3357
65
GK3 EF65
0.790
37
50
LC1 D65
LRD 3357
65
GK3 EF65
0.790
30
35
25
37
15
30
LC1 D65
LRD 3359
65
GK3 EF65
0.790
30
35
25
37
15
30
LC1 D65
LRD 3361
65
GK3 EF65
0.790
45
50
LC1 D80
LRD 3359
65
GK3 EF65
0.790
37
35
25
45
15
30
LC1 D80
LRD 3361
80
GK3 EF80
0.795
37
35
25
55
15
30
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
80
GK3 EF80
0.795
(1) Associated current limiter or fuses, where required. See characteristics page 3/15.
Schemes : page 3/73
3/51
GV2 AK00
GV1 L3
3
GV2 ME
GV AX
GV AD GV AM11
GV AU
GV2 P
GV AM11
GV AS
GV2 L
GV AE11, AE20
GV AN GV AN GV AE1 GV2 LE GV AE1
3/52
References

Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuitbreakers GV2 with screw clamp connections
Accessories
Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Mounting Front (1) Maximum number 1 Type of contacts N/O or N/C (2) N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O (fault) + N/O + N/C N/C (fault) + N/O + N/C C/O common point Sold in lots of 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit reference GV AE1 GV AE11 GV AE20 GV AN11 GV AN20 GV AD1010 GV AD1001 GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AM11 Weight kg 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.050 0.050 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.045
Side (LH) Fault signalling contact + instantaneous auxiliary contact Side (3) (LH)
2 1
Short-circuit signalling contact
Side (LH)
Electric trips
Mounting Voltage Reference Weight kg 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105
Undervoltage or shunt trips (4)

Side (1 block on RH side of circuit-breaker) 24 V 48 V 100 V 100110 V 110115 V 120127 V 127 V 200 V 200220 V 220240 V 380400 V 415440 V 415 V 440 V 480 V 500 V 600 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz GV Ap025 GV Ap026 GV Ap055 GV Ap056 GV Ap107 GV Ap107 GV Ap115 GV Ap116 GV Ap125 GV Ap115 GV Ap207 GV Ap207 GV Ap225 GV Ap226 GV Ap385 GV Ap386 GV Ap415 GV Ap416 GV Ap385 GV A p415 GV Ap505 GV Ap505
Undervoltage trip, INRS (can only be mounted on GV2 ME) Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113
Side (1 block on RH side of circuit-breaker GV2 ME) 110115 V 127 V 220240 V 380400 V 415440 V 440 V 50 60 60 50 60 50 60 50 60 Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz GV AX115 GV AX116 GV AX115 GV AX225 GV AX226 GV AX385 GV AX386 GV AX415 GV AX385 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110

Description Visible isolation block (5) Limiters Mounting Front (1) At top (GV2 ME and GV2 P) Independent Maximum number 1 1 1 Reference GV2 AK00 GV1 L3 LA9 LB920 Weight kg 0.150 0.130 0.320
LA9 LB920
(1) Mounting of a GV AE contact block or a GV2 AK00 visible isolation block on GV2 P and GV2 L (2) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted. (3) The GV AD is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker. (4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV AU025. To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV AS025. (5) Visible isolation of the 3 poles upstream of circuit-breaker GV2 P and GV2 L.
Characteristics : pages 3/16, 3/20 and 3/21
3/53
3
GV3 A01...A07
GV3 A08 GV3 A09
3/54
References

Motor circuit-breakers, thermal-magnetic GV3 ME and magnetic GK3 with screw clamp connections
Accessories
For thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 ME

Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (1 per circuit-breaker) Type of standard early break contacts N/C + N/O N/O + N/O N/C + N/O + N/O N/O + N/O + N/O N/O + N/O + 2 volt-free terminals N/C + N/O + 2 volt-free terminals N/C N/O Reference GV3 GV3 GV3 GV3 GV3 GV3 A01 A02 A03 A05 A06 A07 Weight kg 0.060 0.060 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.030 0.030
Fault signalling contacts (1)
GV3 A08 GV3 A09
Electric trips
Description Udervoltage trips (1) Voltages 50 Hz 110, 120, 127 V 220, 240 V 380, 415 V 110, 120, 127 V 220, 240 V 380, 415 V Reference 60 Hz 120, 127 V 277 V 440 V, 480 V 120, 127 V 277 V 440 V, 480 V GV3 B11 GV3 B22 GV3 B38 GV3 D11 GV3 D22 GV3 D38 Weight kg 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
Shunt trips (1)
Accessory
Description Padlocking device, for locking the start button (on open-mounted product) Sold in lots of 5 Unit reference GV1 V02 Weight kg 0.010
For magnetic circuit-breakers GK3

Contact blocks
Description Auxiliary contact blocks for On-Off signalling and control circuit test function (1 or 2 blocks per device) mounted on RH side of GK3 EF Instantaneous fault signalling contact blocks (1 or 2 blocks per device) mounted on LH side of GK3 EF Composition N/O N/O + N/O N/C + N/O N/O N/O + N/O N/C + N/O Reference GK2 AX10 GK2 AX20 GK2 AX50 GK2 AX12 GK2 AX22 GK2 AX52 Weight kg 0.025 0.031 0.031 0.025 0.031 0.031
Accessories
Description Padlocking device for padlocking the operator, using up to 3 padlocks (padlocks not supplied) Reference GK3 AV01 Weight kg 0.020
External operator for mounting on the enclosure door. GK3 AP03 Red 40 pushbutton on yellow plate. Can be locked in position "O" by means of up to 3 padlocks, with door locked in position "I" and door locked in position "O" when padlocked.
0.300
(1) 1 voltage trip OR 1 fault signalling contact to be fitted inside the motor circuit-breaker.
Other versions
24 to 690 V, 50 or 60 Hz voltage trips for circuit-breakers GV3 ME. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
3/55
3 2 1
GV7 AE11, AB11
GV7 RE, RS
GV7 AU, AS
3/56
References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp connections
Accessories
Add-on auxiliary contacts

They allow remote indication of the circuit-breaker contact states. They can be used for signalling, electrical locking, relaying, etc. Two versions are available: standard and low level. They include a terminal block and the auxiliary circuits leave the circuit-breaker through a hole provided for this purpose. They perform the following functions, depending on where they are located in the circuit-breaker:
Location 1 and/or 4 2 Function C/O contact Trip indication Application Indicates the position of the circuit-breaker poles Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an overload, a short-circuit, a differential fault or the operation of a voltage trip (undervoltage or shunt trip) or of the push to trip test button. It resets when the circuit-breaker is reset. Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an overload, a short-circuit or a differential fault. It resets when the circuit-breaker is reset. Reference GV7 AE11 GV7 AB11 Weight kg 0.015 0.015
Electrical fault indication
Type Standard Low level
Fault discrimination devices

They make it possible to: b either differentiate a thermal fault from a magnetic fault, b or open the contactor only in the event of a thermal fault.
Voltage a 24...48 and c 2472 V z 110240 V Reference GV7 AD111 (1) GV7 AD112 (1) Weight kg 0.100 0.100
Electric trips
These allow the circuit-breaker to be tripped via an electrical control signal. b Undervoltage trip GV7 AU v Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage drops below the tripping threshold, which is between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage. v Circuit-breaker closing is only possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage. Circuit-breaker tripping by a GV7 AU trip meets the requirements of IEC 60947-2. b Shunt trip GV7 AS Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 times the rated voltage. b Operation (GV7 AU or GV7 AS) v When the circuit-breaker has been tripped by a GV7 AU or AS, it must be reset either locally or by remote control. (For remote control, please consult your Regional Sales Office). v Tripping has priority over manual closing: if a tripping instruction is present, manual action does not result in closing, even temporarily, of the contacts. v Durability: 50 % of the mechanical durability of the circuit-breaker.
Type Undervoltage trip Voltage 48 V, 50/60 Hz 110130 V, 50/60 Hz 200240 V, 50/60 Hz 380440 V, 50/60 Hz 525 V, 50 Hz 48 V, 50/60 Hz 110130 V, 50/60 Hz 200240 V, 50/60 Hz 380440 V, 50/60 Hz 525 V, 50 Hz Reference GV7 GV7 GV7 GV7 GV7 GV7 GV7 GV7 GV7 GV7 AU055 AU107 AU207 AU387 AU525 AS055 AS107 AS207 AS387 AS525 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) Weight kg 0.105 0.110 0.110 0.105 0.100 0.105 0.110 0.110 0.105 0.100
Shunt trip
(1) For mounting of a GV7 AD or a GV7 AU or AS.
Characteristics : pages 3/16, 3/20 and 3/21
Schemes : page 3/69
3/57
TRIP
T RESE
3/58
References

Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 with screw clamp connections
Accessories
Accessories
Description Adapter plates Application For mounting a GV2 ME or GV2 LE by screw fixing For mounting a GV2 ME or GV2 P and contactor LC1 D09D38 with front faces aligned 7.5 mm Between GV2 and contactor LC1 K or LP1 K Between GV2 and contactor LC1 D09D38 Between GV2 mounted on LAD 311 and contactor LC1 D09D38 With 3-pole connection for mounting a GV2 and a contactor LC1 D09D25 Application 2 tap-offs Sold in lots of 10 1 Unit reference GV2 AF02 LAD 311 Weight kg 0.021 0.040
Height compensation plate Combination blocks
10 10 10 10
GV1 F03 GV2 AF01 GV2 AF3 GV2 AF4
0.003 0.020 0.016 0.016
Motor starter adapter plate
GK2 AF01
0.120
Description Sets of 3-pole busbars 63 A
3 tap-offs 4 tap-offs
5 tap-offs Description Protective end cover Terminal block for supply to one or more GV2 G busbar sets Cover for terminal block Flexible 3-pole connection for connecting a GV2 to a contactor LC1-D09D25 Application For unused busbar outlets Connection from the top Can be fitted with current limiter GV1 L3 (GV2 ME and GV2 P) For mounting in modular panels Centre distance between mounting rails: 100120 mm
Pitch mm 45 54 72 45 54 45 54 72 54 Sold in lots of 5 1 1
Reference GV2 GV2 GV2 GV2 GV2 GV2 GV2 GV2 GV2 G245 G254 G272 G345 G354 G445 G454 G472 G554
Weight kg 0.036 0.038 0.042 0.058 0.060 0.077 0.085 0.094 0.100 Weight kg 0.005 0.040 0.115
Unit reference GV1 G10 GV1 G09 GV2 G05
10 10
LA9 E07 GV1 G02
0.005 0.013
Set of connections upstream/downstream Clip-in marker holders (supplied with each circuit-breaker)
For connecting GV2 ME to a printed circuit board
10
GV2 GA01
0.045
For GV2 P, GV2 L, GV2 LE and GV2 RT (8 x 22 mm)
100
LA9 D92
0.001
Padlockable external operators

Description For GV2 P and GV2 L (150 to 290 mm) Padlocking in On and Off position Black handle, blue legend plate, IP 54 Padlocking in Off position Red handle, yellow legend plate, IP 54 Padlocking in On and Off position Black handle, blue legend plate, IP 54 Reference GV2 AP01 GV2 AP02 Weight kg 0.200 0.200
For GV2 LE
GV2 AP03
0.280
Padlocking device
Description For all GV2 devices For use with up to 4 padlocks (not supplied), 6 mm shank max. Reference GV2 V03 Weight kg 0.092
3/59
ON
ON
OFF
GV7 AP04
O
OFF
ON
GV7 AP01, AP02
GV7 RE, RS GV7 AP03
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
GV7 AP05
GV7 AC04
GV7 AC01
GV7 V01
GV7 RE, RS
GV7 AC04
GV7 AC03
GV7 AC01
3/60
References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp connections
Accessories
Cabling accessories
Description Application For contactor Sold in lots of 3 3 1 Unit reference GV7 AC021 GV7 AC022 GV7 AC03 Weight kg 0.300 0.350 0.180
Clip-on connectors for GV7 R
Up to 150 A, 1.595 mm2 Up to 220 A, 1.5185 mm2
Spreader 3-pole (1) Terminal shields IP 405 (1) Phase barriers Insulating screens Kit for combination with contactor (2)
To increase the pitch to 45 mm
Supplied with sealing accessory Safety accessories used when fitting of shields is impossible Ensure insulation between the connections and the backplate Allowing link between the circuit-breaker and the contactor. The cover provides protection against direct finger contact.
GV7 AC01
0.125
LC1 F115F185
2 2 1
GV7 AC04 GV7 AC05 GV7 AC06 GV7 AC07 GV7 AC08
0.075 0.075 0.550 0.550 0.550
LC1 F225 and F265 1 LC1 D115 and D150 1
Direct rotary handle

Replaces the circuit-breaker front cover; secured by screws. It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in the "O" (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). A conversion accessory allows the direct rotary handle to be mounted on the enclosure door. In this case, the door cannot be opened if the circuit-breaker is in the ON position. Circuit-breaker closing is inhibited if the enclosure door is open.
Description Direct rotary handle Type Black handle, black legend plate Red handle, yellow legend plate Adapter plate (3) Four mounting direct rotary handle on enclosure door Degree of protection IP 40 IP 40 IP 43 Reference GV7 AP03 GV7 AP04 GV7 AP05 Weight kg 0.205 0.205 0.100
Extended rotary handle

Allows a circuit-breaker installed in the back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. It comprises: b a unit which replaces the circuit-breaker front cover; secured by screws, b an assembly (handle and front plate) to be fitted on the enclosure door, b an extension shaft which must be adjusted (distance between the mounting surface and the door: 185 mm minimum, 600 mm maximum). It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in the "O" (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). This prevents the enclosure door from being opened.
Description Extended rotary handle Type Black handle, black legend plate Red handle, yellow legend plate Degree of protection IP 55 IP 55 Reference GV7 AP01 GV7 AP02 Weight kg 0.775 0.775
Locking device
Allows circuit-breakers not fitted with a rotary handle to be locked in the "O" (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).
Description Locking device Application For circuit-breaker not fitted with a rotary handle Reference GV7 V01 Weight kg 0.100
(1) Terminal shields cannot be used together with spreaders. (2) The kit comprises links, a protective shield and a depth adjustable metal bracket for the breaker. (3) This conversion accessory makes it impossible to open the door if the device is closed and prevents the device from being closed if the door is open.
Schemes : page 3/69
3/61

3
GV2 ME
GV AX
GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS, AX

Block GV AD, AM, AN Block GV AU, AS, AX
GV AE
X1
11
67,2
15
10
15,7
X1
46
44,5
45
16
9,3
9,3 81(1)
18
b GV2 MEpp 89 GV2 MEpp3 101 (1) Maximum X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V
GV2 P
GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS

Block GV AD, AM, AN Block GV AU, AS
GV2 AK00
14 98 32
X1
89
45
44,5
15
X2
26
50 82
61
9,3
9,3 81(1)
18 44,5
(1) Maximum X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V X2 = 40 mm
Mounting of GV2 ME
On 35 mm 5 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02 AM1 PA On pre-slotted mounting plate On mounting rails DZ5 MB201
4,2
AF1 EA4
15
35
50/60
50/60
c
c = 78.5 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) c = 86 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)
80
35 35 GV2 AF02 DZ5 ME8 DZ5 MB201
Mounting of GV2 P
On rail AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15) On panel On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA Adapter plate GK2 AF01
AF1 EA4
35 5
55
44,5
135
84
84
45
44,5
45
106
13,5
13,5
24
9,5
35
54
Schemes : page 3/68
3/62
105 5
50 60

3
GV2 AF01
Combination GV2 ME + k contactor
GV2 AF3
Combination GV2 ME + TeSys d contactor Combination GV2 P + TeSys d contactor
152
79
45 c1 c 45 c1 c d1 d
GV2 P + b c1 c d1 d LC1 D09D18 177.4 88.6 94.1 91 96.8
45
GV2 ME + b c1 c
LC1 D09D18 176.4 88.65 94.15
LC1 D25 & D32 186.8 94.95 100.45
LC1 D25 & D32 187.8 94.95 100.45 91 96.8
GV2 AF4 + LAD 31

Combination GV2 ME + TeSys d contactor Combination GV2 P + TeSys d contactor
GV2 ME + GV1 L3 (current limiter)
40
X1
77
X1
44,5
c1 c d1 d
GV2-ME + b c1 c d1 d LC2 D09D18 188.6 92.7 98.2 98.3 103.8
45
c1 c
45
X1 = 10 mm for Ue = 230 V or 30 mm for 230 V < Ue y 690 V
7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03

39 13 35
Door cut-out
LC2 D25 and D32 199 99 104.5 98.3 103.8
GV2 P + b c1 c
LC2 D09D18 169.1 116.8 122.3
LC2 D25 & D32 199.5 116.8 122.3
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP01 or GV2 AP02 for GV2 P
=
65
45
89
=
1,5...5 53 135284 5,2 = =
= 54
Schemes : page 3/68
3/63
54
129

3
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME, GV2 P, GV2 RT
Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05
a 3 l p
GV2 G445 (4 x 45 mm) GV2 G454 (4 x 54 mm) GV2 G472 (4 x 72 mm) l 179 206 260 a 5 224 260 332 p 45 54 72
18
63
45
Number of tap-offs GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G472
6 269 314 404
7 314 368 476
8 359 422 548
Sets of busbars GV2 G ppp with terminal block GV1 G09
Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 G272

l
GV2 G245 (2 x 45 mm) GV2 G254 (2 x 54 mm) GV2 G272 (2 x 72 mm) l 89 98 116
Sets of busbars GV2 G554

260
30
GV1 G09
Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354

l
GV2 G345 (3 x 45 mm) GV2 G354 (3 x 54 mm) l 134 152
Dimensions of GV2 RT
X1 12,5 66
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03

12,3 =
89
X1
7,5
16
44
44,5 53
45
65
1,5...5 133282 6 = =
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue < 690 V
Mounting of GV2 RT
On 35 mm 7 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02 On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA On mounting rails DZ5 MB
4,2 44,5
13
AF1 EA4
15
35
50/60
50/60
44,5
c
c = 80 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) c = 88 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)
84,5
35
35 GV2 AF02
DZ5 ME8 DZ5 MB201
Schemes : page 3/68
3/64
50 60

3
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 ME and GV7 R
Motor circuit-breakers GV3 ME

4,5 X1 17,3
Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201
(1)
100110
113
X1 Electrical clearance (ISC max) 40 mm for Ue < 500 V, 50 mm for Ue < 690 V (1) Block GV3 A01A07
X1
22
77,5
5,5
120
70,4
122,5
Mounting
On panel On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA
3
100110
= 113 20 20 61,2 21,2 113 20 AF1 EA4
Motor circuit-breakers GV7 R
100110
Motor circuit-breakers with terminal shields or phase barriers GV7 R + GV7 AC01 or AC04
35 = = = =
= 321 = 357
161
125
161 =
81 86 111 (1)
(1) 126 for GV7 Rp220 (2) Phase barriers: GV7 AC04
= 105
(2)
81
(3) Terminal shields: GV7 AC01
(3)
Combination of GV7 R and LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p

c a
a b c GV7 R + LC1 F115 or 119 334 181 F150 + GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F185 + 119 338 188 GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F225 + 131 358 188 GV7 AC07 GV7 R + LC1 F265 + 131 364 215 GV7 AC07 Minimum distance between 2 circuit-breakers mounted side-by-side = 0

x2
x1
x1
x2
Painted or insulated metal plate, insulation or insulated bar Bare U y 440 V metal 440 V < U < 600 V plate U u 600 V Characteristics : pages 3/6 to 3/21 References : pages 3/47 to 3/48 Schemes : page 3/69
x1 0
x2 30
5 10 20
35 35 35
3/65
Mounting

Panel mounting
Mounting on 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB201

DZ5 ME5 = 125
135
35
35
35
15
35
Flush-mounting
3
47
1 circuit-breaker GV7 R
125
n circuit-breakers GV7 R side-by-side
76
108
=
G 85 85 85 85 85 H 120 120 120 120 120
29
88
== 29
83
= 108
Combination of GV7 R and LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p

G
GV7 GV7 GV7 GV7 GV7
R+ R+ R+ R+ R+
LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
F115 F150 F165 F225 F265
+ GV7 AC06 + GV7 AC06 + GV7 AC06 + GV7 AC07 + GV7 AC07
E 44 46 48 57 60
Schemes : page 3/69
3/66
108

3
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7
Spreaders GV7 AC03

114 45 45
Cabling
Smooth terminals Connectors
Z
10,5 a Z 19 Z
30
41
X
70 70
GV7 Rp40Rp150 GV7 Rp220
a 19.5 21.5
Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03, GV7 AP04

Flush-mounting
3
47
I
45 73 76 89
121 155
55 91
36
28
=
97
Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03 or GV7 AP04 with conversion accessory GV7 AP05
Front face cut-out Enclosure viewed from top
9,25 h
120
59
41
100
Door cut-outs require a minimum distance between the centre of the circuit-breaker and the door hinge point u 100 + (h x 5).
125 2
69 120
51
= 100
e = 1 to 3 max
Extended rotary handle GV7 AP01, GV7 AP02

9,25 60 I
60 l = 75
l: 185 min, 600 max The shaft of the extended rotary handle GV7 AP01 or GV7 AP022 must be cut to length: l 126 mm.
Schemes : page 3/69
75
29
3/67
Schemes

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME, GV2 P and GV2 RT
GV2 MEpp and GV2 RT

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
GV2 Ppp
1/L1 3/L2 4/T2 5/L3 6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Current limiter
GV1 L3
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

GV AE1
or
2/T1
GV AE11
GV AE20
11
13
13
21
13 14
E2 E1
14
12
14
22
Side mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AD1010 GV AD1001
95
53
95
51
97
97
53
98
96
96
52
98

GV AN11
(61) 31 43 (73)
54
Short-circuit signalling contacts

GV AM11
GV AN20
(63) 33 43 (73)
(62) 32
44 (74)
(64) 34
44 (74)
Voltage trips
GV AUppp GV AS ppp GV AXppp
D1 D2
D1
D2
C2
C1
E1
Use of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact

GV AM11 GV AD10pp
Connection of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME only
10Agl max
E2
1/L1
05
08 06
3/L2
54
5/L3
D1
Trip signalling
2/T1
4/T2
3/68
6/T3
N/C or N/O Start-Stop contact
D2
52
51
24
23
Schemes

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 ME and GV7 R
Motor circuit-breakers
GV3 ME
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3

GV3 A01
13 21
GV3 A02
13 23
GV3 A03
13 23 31
GV3 A05
13 23 33
GV3 A06
13 23 33
GV3 A07
23 24 13 31 32
14
24
32
14
24
34
14
24
14
22
14
2/T1
Fault signalling contacts

GV3 A08
95
4/T2
6/T3
Voltage trips
GV3 A09
97
GV3 B
D1
24
GV3 D
34
14
U
D2 C2
Motor circuit-breakers
GV7 R
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3
96
98
Add-on auxiliary contacts according to their location (1)

GV7 AE11, GV7 AB11 Location 1 Location 2 C/O contact Trip indication Location 3 Electrical fault indication
82 84
C1
Location 4 C/O contact
12
92
14
94
11
91
81
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A self-adhesive label, supplied with the contact, can be affixed to the front face of the circuitbreaker to allow personalised marking according to the function of the contact or contacts. (1) See pages 3/18 and 3/57. GV7 ASppp
C1
Electric trips
GV7 AUppp
D1
GV7 AD111, AD112
97
50 ms
D4
C2
Recommended application schemes GV7 AD111, AD112

Fault indication Contactor opening on overload
98
97
97
KA1 14
13
50 ms
50 ms
Reset
98
98
23
Reset
KA1 A1 22 A1 B1
24
A2
Associated components KA1: CA2 KN or CAD N
Associated components KA1: CAD N + LA6 DK10 or RHK KM1: LC1 D or LC1 F
A2
KA1
Overload fault
KA1
KM1
21
21
24
22
3/69

3
GV2 L

GV2 AK00
14 98
X1
89
45
15
82
X2
26
50
44,5
61
9,3
9,3 81 (1)
(1) Maximum
18 44,5
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V. X2 = 40 mm.
Mounting of GV2 L
On rail AM1 DE200, AM1 ED200 (35 x 15) On panel On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA
Adapter plate GK2 AF01
AF1 EA4
35
32 55 5
5,5 45
84
84
44,5
45
106
13,5
13,5
24
9,5
35
54
7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03
13
35
GV2 LE
39

GV AE
X1
15
10
89
45
12,5
X1
7,5
16
44 66
44,5
9,3
9,3 81 (1)
18
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V.
(1) Maximum On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA On rails DZ5 MB201
Mounting of GV2 LE
On 35 mm 7 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02
AF1 EA4
44,5
15
35
44,5
50/60
50/60
c
c = 80 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) and 88 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15) Characteristics : pages 3/6 to 3/21
84,5
4,2 35
35 GV2 AF02 DZ5 ME8 DZ5 MB201
Schemes : page 3/73
3/70
50 60
1055
44,5
135

3
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP01 or GV2 AP02 for GV2 L
65
1,5...5 53 135284 6 5,2 = =
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03 for GV2 LE

12,3
65
1,5...5 53 133282 6 = =
Door cut-out
4x3,5 43
13
= = 54 =
Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05
a 3 18 l p
63
45
GV2 G445 (4 x 45 mm) GV2 G454 (4 x 54 mm) GV2 G472 (4 x 72 mm)
l 179 206 260 a 5 224 260 332
=
p 45 54 72 Number of tap-offs GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G472 6 269 314 404
54
7 314 368 476
8 359 422 548
Schemes : page 3/73
3/71

3
Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L, GV2 LE and GK3
Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09

GV1 G09
30
Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 GR272

l
GV2 G245 (2 x 45 mm) GV2 G254 (2 x 54 mm) GV2 G272 (2 x 72 mm)
l 89 98 116
Set of busbars GV2 G554

260
Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354

l
3
GV2 G345 (3 x 45 mm) GV2 G354 (3 x 54 mm) l 134 152
GK3 EF
X1
GK3 EF + 4 GK2 AX
38 28
105
120
45
80
15
70
4,5
X1
Number of GK2 AX 0 1 2 66 74.8 83.5
3 92.5
4 101
X1 Electrical clearance, 40 mm for Ue y 690 V.
Mounting
On mounting rail AM1 EDpp or AM1 Dpppp On panel
4x4,5
115,5
115,5
20
Mounting of external operator GK3 AP03
Door cut-out
4x3,5 43
65
120
105
1,55 53
= 54
(1)
(1) 150 min, 305 max. with operating shaft, 97 without operating shaft
Schemes : page 3/73
3/72
54
Schemes

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L, GV2 LE and GK3
GV2 Lpp
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3
GV2 LEpp
3/L2 4/T2 1/L1 5/L3 6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

GV AE1
OR
GV AE11
21
GV AE20
13
13
13
11
23
2/T1
14
Side mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AD1010 GV AD1001
95
53
12
14
22
14 51
95
97
24 53
97 98
96
96
52
98
54
54

GV AN11
(61) 31 43 (73)
Short-circuit signalling contacts

GV AM11
GV AN20
(63) 33 43 (73)
(62) 32
44 (74)
(64) 34
44 (74)
Voltage trips
GV AUppp GV ASppp
D1
D2
Motor circuit-breakers GK3 EF

1 3 5
Start-Stop signalling contact blocks

GK2 AX10
13
GK2 AX20
13 23
C2
C1
GK2 AX50
13 21
14
05
08 06
14
14
Fault signalling contact blocks

GK2 AX12
97
GK2 AX22
97 07
24
GK2 AX52
97 05
98
98
08
98
06
22
52
51
3/73
Selection guide
Protection components
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers for the protection of control circuits, solenoid valves and transformers
Applications
Protection of industrial equipment control circuits and of single-phase loads
57 In
1216 In
Operational current
0.5 and 1 A
0.520 A
Maximum operational voltage
415 V
250 V
Number of poles
1 + neutral
Breaking capacity (Icu) conforming to IEC 60947-2
50 kA at 415 V
1.550 kA at 415 V
1.550 kA at 250 V
Device type
GB2 CS
GB2 CB
GB2 CD
Pages
3/81
3/80
3/80
3/74
Protection of transformers
Single-phase y 5000 VA/415 V Primary
3-phase y 10 kVA/415 V Secondary
About 20 In
0.2523 A
415 V
690 V
1 + neutral
1.550 kA at 415 V
1.550 kA at 250 V
15100 kA at 415 V
GB2 DB
GB2 DB
GB2 CD
GV2 RT
3/80
3/80
3/80
3/49
3/75
Presentation, selection
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment control circuits
Presentation
GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers protect and isolate the control circuits of industrial equipment with contactor coils, transformers. They protect and isolate single-phase auxiliary circuits such as solenoid valves, electro-brakes, battery chargers, supplied from the control circuit voltage. GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB 12 ratings are available, from 0.5 to 20 A, in single-pole (GB2 CB), single-pole + neutral (GB2 CD) and 2-pole (GB2 DB) versions. They have a magnetic tripping threshold set at between 12 and 16 In to withstand the current peaks generated by many industrial components. GB2 CS 2 ratings are available, 0.5 and 1 A, in single-pole version. The magnetic tripping threshold is set between 5 and 7 In.
Functions, installation Clip-on fixing onto all types of 35 mm 5 rails, on 4 rails and on Telequick mounting plates. Upstream and downstream marking by means of AB1 clip-in markers. Clear indication of I and O positions on the operator. Tamper-proof device which requires no special maintenance (fixed magnetic and thermal tripping thresholds).
Selection for the protection of circuits supplied by transformers

Single-phase transformers. Magnetising peak: 20 In. Operation of magnetic trips: 13 In.
Power VA 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 Primary (1) 220/240 V 380/415 V GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB08 GB2 DB10 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB21 GB2 DB22 GB2 DB22 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB08 GB2 DB09 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB21 GB2 DB22 Secondary 24 V 48 V GB2 CD07 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD10 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD22 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD09 GB2 CD12 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD21
110 V GB2 CD05 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD09 GB2 CD12 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD22
220 V GB2 CD05 GB2 CD05 GB2 CD05 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD10 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD20 GB2 CD21 GB2 CD22
(1) If the breaking capacity of the GB2 is insufficient, use a GV2 RT with 2 poles connected in series, see page 3/49.
Schemes : page 3/81
3/76
Characteristics
Circuit-breaker type
GB2 CB
GB2 CD
GB2 DB
GB2 CS
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Ambient air temperature around the device Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating position IEC 60947-1, 947-2, EN 60947-1, 60947-2 CSA, NEMKO, UL NEMKO, UL TC IP 20 22 gn for 20 ms 5 gn (5110 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 3000
Conforming Conforming Conforming Storage Operation Conforming
to IEC 60529 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-6 C C C m
to IEC 60695-2-1
In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
3
GB2 CB,CD, CS Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm 2 mm 2 N.m Minimum c.s.a. 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.75 1.2 GB2 DB Maximum c.s.a. 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5
Utilisation category Rated operational voltage (Ue) Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to CSA C22-2 Nr 14 and UL 1077 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V V Hz kV W C.O. C A 415 (1) 277 50/60 4 2 8000 - 20 - 10 0 A 250 50/60 4 2 8000 + 10 + 20 1 A 415 277 50/60 4 2 8000 + 30 0.95 1216 In + 40 0.90 A 415 (1) 50/60 4 1.9 8000 + 50 0.85 57 In + 60 0.80
Rated operational frequency Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical and C.O.: Closing - Opening electrical durability Operational current According to the permissible correction coefficient ambient temperature (a or c) Correction coefficient Tripping threshold Of the magnetic trips
1.2 1.15 1216 In
1.1 1.05 1216 In
(1) One GB2 circuit-breaker on each live conductor.
Tripping curves
Average operating time at 20 C without prior current flow (cold state) GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB GB2 CS
120 60 20 10 5 2 1 20 10 5 2 1 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8 1,5 10 100 x In 120 60 20 10 5 2 1 20 10 5 2 1 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8 1,5 10 100 x In
Minutes
Seconds
Milliseconds
Presentation, selection : page 3/76
Milliseconds
Seconds
Minutes
Schemes : page 3/81
3/77
Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) aM gG aM gG aM gG A kA
GB2 CB05 CB06 CB07 CB08 CB09 CB10 CB12 CB14 CB16 CB20 CB21 CB22 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 50 100 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 50 50 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 15 50 15 25 15 25 20 25 16 25 16 25 10 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 6 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 3 75 2 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63
230/240 V
kA
400/415 V
kA
Associated fuses, if required 110 V if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2
A A A A A A
3
Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz
230/240 V
400/415 V
A 110 V Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) aM gG aM gG kA
GB2 CD05 CD06 CD07 CD08 CD09 CD10 CD12 CD14 CD16 CD20 CD21 CD22 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 50 100 50 25 g g g g 50 50 50 25 g g g g 15 50 15 25 20 25 16 25 10 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 6 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 3 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63
230/ 240 V
kA
Associated fuses, if required 110 V if lsc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V
A A A A
Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V lcu Ics % (1) lcu Ics % (1) lcu Ics % (1) aM gG aM gG aM gG A kA
GB2 DB05 DB06 DB07 DB08 DB09 DB10 DB12 DB14 DB16 DB20 DB21 DB22 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 50 100 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 50 50 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 15 50 15 25 15 25 20 25 16 25 16 25 10 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 6 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 3 75 2 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 1.5 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 75 75 63 80 50 63 50 63
230/240 V
kA
400/415 V
kA
Associated fuses, if required 110 V if lsc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V
A A A A A A
400/415 V
g Fuse not required. Breaking capacity Icu > lsc.
(1) As % of Icu.
Schemes : page 3/81
3/78
Circuit-breaker type Breaking capacity (lcu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 c Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 c DC-12 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V kA kA A A A A
GB2 pp05 pp06 pp07 pp08 pp09 pp10 pp12 pp14 pp16 pp20 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 GB2 CS05 0.5 50 100 50 25 50 25 1.5 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 31 39 52 78 130 200 110 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 230 365 460 610 910 1520 2400 230 230 290 390 580 970 1500 230 46 60 80 120 190 310 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 12 12 12
pp21 1.5 16 16 16
pp22 1.5 20 20 20
DC-13
Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V lcu lcs % (1) A kA
CS06 1 50 100 50 25 50 25 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 48 6 8 10 15 26 41 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 85 110 145 220 360 580 110 56 70 95 140 230 375 110 13 17 22 34 56 90 230 230 290 380 570 950 1500 230 230 290 380 570 950 1500 230 100 130 170 250 420 680
230/240 V lcu lcs % (1) 400/415 V lcu (2) lcs % (1) Breaking capacity (lcu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 c Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 c DC-12 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V
kA
kA
kA kA A A A A V m m m m m m V m m m m m m V m m m m m m
DC-13
Maximum permissible line length for star-delta starting (length of cable containing 2 or more conductors)
With contactors LCp D09 D18
Operational voltage C.s.a. 060 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2
With contactors LCp D25D32
Operational voltage C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2
With contactors LCp D40D80
Operational voltage C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2
(1) As % of Icu. (2) One GB2 CS circuit-breaker on each live conductor. (3) Use relays.
Schemes : page 3/81
3/79
References
534268
Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 12 to 16 In

Single-pole
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 52 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
GB2 CBpp
3
534269
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
GB2 CB05 GB2 CB06 GB2 CB07 GB2 CB08 GB2 CB09 GB2 CB10 GB2 CB12 GB2 CB14 GB2 CB16 GB2 CB20 GB2 CB21 GB2 CB22
kg 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
Single-pole + neutral
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 52 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
GB2 CDpp
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
GB2 CD05 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD09 GB2 CD10 GB2 CD12 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD20 GB2 CD21 GB2 CD22
kg 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
534270
2-pole
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1. Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 50 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
GB2 DBpp
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GB2 DB05 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB08 GB2 DB09 GB2 DB10 GB2 DB12 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB16 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB21 GB2 DB22
kg 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115
Schemes : page 3/81
3/80
References (continued), dimensions, schemes
3
Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 5 to 7 In

Single-pole
534271
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5
Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 3.3
Sold in lots of
Unit reference
Weight
GB2 CS05
kg 0.055
GB2 CS06
0.055
GB2 CSpp (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1.
3
Description Sold in lots of 1 Unit reference GB2 G210 Weight kg 0.100
Accessories for circuit-breakers GB2 CB, DB and CS
Busbar set for supply to 10 GB2 DB or 20 GB2 CB or GB2 CS with 2 connectors
Supply connector
10
GB2 G01
Dimensions
GB2 CBpp, GB2 CDpp, GB2 CSpp GB2 DBpp
74
82 82 75 79 67
15
85 85 78 82 70
30
Marking: up to twelve AB1 R clip-in markers.
Schemes
GB2 CBpp GB2 CDpp
3/L2 (13)
GB2 DBpp
1/L1 3/L2
GB2 CSpp
1/L1
4/T2 (14)
1/L1
2/T1
2/T1
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
1/L1
74
3/81
Contents
4 - Protection components Fuse protection
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 4/2 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4 b Complete units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/8 b Switch bodies and add-on modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/9 b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 4/11 and 4/17 b Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/22
VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 4/2 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4 b Complete units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/12
b Switch bodies, add-on modules and auxiliary contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14 b Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/17 b Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/24
Fuse carriers for the protection of control circuits or transformers

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 4/26 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/28 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/29 b Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/30
Fuse carriers for motor protection

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 4/26 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/33 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/34 b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/35 b Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/38
Switch-disconnector-fuses for motor or variable speed drive protection

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 4/40 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/44 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/48 b Auxiliary and signalling contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/51 b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/53 b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/58 b Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards, 30 to 800 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/64
4/0
Cartridge fuses for protection of equipment with current peaks

b Type aM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/66 b Type gG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/68
4/1
Selection guide
Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors
Applications
Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for onload making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors. Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible to padlock the handles in the open position.
4
Switch type Mini-VARIO for standard applications VARIO for high performance applications Thermal current Operational current AC-23 A at 400 Volts 12 A 8.1 A 20 A 11 A 12 A 8.1 A 20 A 11 A 25 A 14.5 A
Number of poles Number of auxiliary contacts
35 1 or 2
36 14
Switch fixing From the front From the back
Screw fixing, 1 or 4 holes Fixing: 1 x 22.5 hole or 4 x 5.5 screws Clip-on mounting on 7 rail Clip-on mounting on 7 rail or screw fixing
Reversible terminal blocks
Yes
Door mounting, direct operator Mounting at back of enclosure, indirect operator with door interlock
Yes Yes
Enclosure reference
VpDN 12 VCFN 12GE
VpDN 20 VCFN 20GE
VpD 02 VpF 02 VpF 02GE
VpD 01 VpF 01 VpF 01GE
VpD 0 VpF 0 VpF 0GE
Product reference
Pages
2/4 and 4/8
4/12 and 4/13
4/2
Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors. Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible to padlock the handles in the open position.
4
VARIO for high performance applications 32 A 21.8 A 40 A 29 A 63 A 41.5 A 80 A 57 A 125 A 68.5 A 175 A 83 A
36 14
3 + N + PE
Screw fixing, 1 or 4 holes Fixing: 1 x 22.5 hole or 4 x 5.5 screws Clip-on mounting on 7 rail or screw fixing
Fixing 4 x 5.5 screws Screw fixing
Yes
Yes Yes
VpD 1 VpF 1 VpF 1GE
V pD 2 V pF 2 VpF 2GE
V pF 3 VpF 3GE
V pF 4 VpF 4GE
V pF 5 VpF 5GE
V pF 6 VpF 6GE
2/4 and 4/8 and 4/13
4/3
Characteristics
Safety solutions using Preventa

Characteristics
Environment
Switch type (bare type) Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection with protection shroud Ambient air temperature Flame resistance Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11ms conforming to IEC60068-2-27 Vibration resistance 10150 Hz conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 C C gn VN 12 V02 VZN 12 VZ 02 IEC 60947-3 UL, CSA, GL TC IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529 VN 20 VZN 20 V01 VZ 01 V0 VZ 0 VVD 0 VVE 0 V1 VZ 1 VVD 1 VVE 1
- 20+ 50 960 conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 15 30 15 30
gn
Electrical characteristics, a.c. operation
Switch type (bare type) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conventional thermal currents in free air (lth) and rated uninterrupted (lu) Conventional thermal current in enclosure (lthe) Rated operational power and current AC-21A/22A AC-23A 230690 V 230 V 240 V 400 V 415 V 500 V 690 V Rated operational power AC -3 230/240 V 400/415 V 500 V 690 V Intermittent duty class Characteristics Rated making capacity in normal operating AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) conditions Rated breaking capacity AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) Short-circuit characteristics Permissible rms short time rating (Icw) A/ 400 V A/ 400 V V kV A
VN 12 VZN 12 690 6 12
V02 VZ 02
VN 20 VZN 20
V01 VZ 01
V0 VZ 0
VVD 0 VVE 0
V1 VZ 1
VVD 1 VVE 1
6 20
8 25 32
A A A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW kW kW kW kW
10 12 10.6/3 10.6/3 8.1/4 8.1/4 8.9/5.5 8.6/7.5 1.5 3 4 4 30 120 5.5
16 20 14/4 14/4 11/5.5 11/5.5 11.9/7.5 12.3/11 3 4 5.5 7.5
20 25 19.7/5.5 19.9/5.5 14.5/7.5 14/7.5 16.7/11 17.5/15 4 5.5 7.5 11
25 32
18.9/5.5 21.8/11 21/11
7.5
200
250
320
120
200
250
A/ 140 400V/1 s kA/ 400 V kA/ 400 V A 0.5
300
140
300
384
Rated making capacity under short-circuit conditions (Icm) I peak Rated conditional short-circuit current (I rms) with aM/gG fuses
0.5
10
10
12
20
25
35
4/4
Characteristics
Environment
V2 VZ 2 IEC 60947-3 UL, CSA, GL TC IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529 VVD 2 VVE 2 V3 VZ 3 VVD 3 VVE 3 V4 VZ 4 VVD 4 VVE 4 V5 V6 VZ7 VZ2 0 IEC 60947-5 VZN 05 VZN 06
- 20+ 50 960 conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 30
V2 VZ 2 690 8 40
VVD 2 VVE 2
V3 VZ 3
VVD 3 VVE 3
V4 VZ 4
VVD 4 VVE 4
V5
V6
VZ7 VZ2 0
VZN 05 VZN 06
6 63 80 125 175 12 6
32 40 25.8/7.5 24.8/7.5 29/15 28/15 28.5/18.5 17.5/15 5.5 11 15 11 30 400
50 63 50.3/15 48.2/15 41.5/22 40/22 44/30 25/22 11 18.5 22 18.5
63 80 61.2/18.5 58.5/18.5 57/30 55/30 54/37 33/30 15 22 30
100 125 71.9/22 68/22 68.5/37 66/37 64.5/45 42/37 22 30 37 30
140 160 96.6/30 92.7/30 83/45 80/45 79/55 49/45 30 37 45 37
10 le/AC-15 6A 6A 4A 4A 2A 1A
630
800
1250
1750
320
500
640
1000
1400
480
756
960
1500
2100
2.1
2.8
10
50
63
80
125
200
16
1.6
4/5
Safety solutions using Preventa

Characteristics
Electrical characteristics, d.c. operation
Switch type (bare type) Rated 24 V operational current DC-1 (L/R = 1ms) 48 V 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A VN 12 VZN 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 1.5 8 12 1.5 7 10 0.6 3 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 10 12 12 1.5 3 12 0.4 1.4 1 0.3 0.4 1.2 V02 VZ 02 VN 20 VZN 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 2 10 20 2 8 14 0.7 4 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 14 20 20 2 4 20 0.5 1.5 2 0.4 0.6 2.4 V01 VZ 01 V0 VZ 0 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 9 12 25 2.5 10 16 0.8 6 12 25 25 25 25 25 25 16 25 25 2.5 5 25 0.5 1.5 3 0.5 0.8 1.6 VVD 0 VVE 0 V1 VZ 1 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 10 16 32 3 12 20 1 8 16 32 32 32 32 32 32 20 32 32 3 6 32 0.8 2 4 0.8 1 2 VVD 1 VVE 1
60 V
110 V
220 V
250 V
Rated 24 V operational current DC-2 to DC-5 (L/R = 1ms) 48 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
250 V
Switch type (bare type) Mechanical durability (millions of operating cycles) Electrical durability in cat. AC-21 (millions of operating cycles) Electrical durability in cat. DC-1 to 5 (operating cycles) Suitable for isolation Cabling Flexible cable + cable end Solid cable Tightening torque mm2 mm2 N.m VN 12 VZN 12 0.05 0.05 V02 VZ 02 0.1 0.1 VN 20 VZN 20 0.05 0.05 V01 VZ 01 0.1 0.1 V0 VZ 0 VVD 0 VVE 0 V1 VZ 1 VVD 1 VVE 1
30 000 Yes 4 4 0.7 6 10 2.1 4 4 0.7 6 10 2.1
4/6
V2 VZ 2 40 40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 12 20 40 4 14 25 2 12 20 40 40 40 40 40 40 25 40 40 5 8 40 1 3 7 1 2 6
VVD 2 VVE 2
V3 VZ 3 63 63 63 63 63 63 40 63 63 20 63 63 6 25 30 4 20 30 63 63 63 63 63 63 40 63 63 6 10 50 1.5 4 10 1.2 3 8
VVD 3 VVE 3
V4 VZ 4 80 80 80 80 80 80 50 80 80 25 80 80 8 30 40 5 25 40 80 80 80 80 80 80 50 80 80 8 20 63 2 6 15 1.5 6 10
VVD 4 VVE 4
V5 125 125 125 125 125 125 60 125 125 30 125 125 12 40 80 3 30 50 125 125 125 125 125 125 60 125 125 10 22 70 2.2 7 16 1.6 7 12
V6 175 175 175 175 175 175 70 175 175 12 175 175 15 50 100 10 40 61 175 175 175 175 175 175 70 175 175 12 24 80 2.4 8 13 1.8 8 14
VZ7 VZ2 0 8 (le/DC-11) 8 (le/DC-11) 4 (le/DC-11) 2 (le/DC-11) 1 (le/DC-11) 0.8 (le/DC-11)
VZN 05 VZN 06
V2 VZ 2 0.1 0.1
VVD 2 VVE 2
V3 VZ 3 0.03 0.03
VVD 3 VVE 3
V4 VZ 4
VVD 4 VVE 4
V5
V6
VZ7 VZ2 0 0.1 0.1 (AC-15)
VZN 05 VZN 06 0.05 0.05
30 000 Yes 6 10 2.1 16 25 4 70 95 22.6
30 000 (DC-11) 2 x 0.751.5 2 x 12.5 0.7
4/7
References
Complete units
b b b b
3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 20 A Marking on operator . Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). Degree of protection IP 65.
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for door mounting

Operator Handle
580541
lth Front plate Fixing mm mm Yellow 22.5 60 x 60 A 12
Reference
Weight kg 0.177
Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
VCDN 12
20
VCDN 20
0.177
VCDN 20
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting at back of an enclosure (1)
Operator Handle Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) lth Front plate Fixing mm mm Yellow 22.5 60 x 60 A 12 Reference Weight kg 0.334
VCCDN 12
4
580542
20
VCCDN 20
0.334
Main switch disconnectors for door mounting

Operator Handle Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) lth Front plate Fixing mm mm Black 22.5 60 x 60 A 12 Reference Weight kg 0.177
VBDN 12
20 VCCDN 20
VBDN 20
0.177
(1) Switches supplied with a shaft extension VZN 17 and a door interlock plate KZ 32 (see page 4/11)
580543
VBDN 20
Schemes : page 4/17
4/8
Switch bodies, add-on modules
812801
Switch bodies
Description 3-pole switch disconnectors Rating A 12 Reference VN 12 Weight kg 0.110
20
VN 20
0.110
VN 20
Add-on modules
Description Main pole modules Rating A 12 Reference VZN 12 Weight kg 0.020
580586
20
VZN 20
0.020
Neutral pole module with early make and late break contacts VZN 11 Earthing module
12 and 20
VZN 11
0.020
12 and 20
VZN 14
0.016
580587
Auxiliary contact block modules
1 N/O late make contact
VZN 05
0.020
1 N/C early break contact
VZN 06
0.020
Input terminal protection shrouds
For add-on pole modules or VZN 26 auxiliary contact block modules (single-pole shroud) For switch bodies (3-pole shroud) VZN 08
0.004
VZN 14
0.007
580588

VZN 12 or VZN 20 + VN 12 or or VN 20 VZN 05 or VZN 06 + VZN 12 or VZN 20 or VZN 11 or VZN 05 or VZN 06 + VZN 14
VZN 05
812805
VZN 26
812806
VZN 08
Schemes : page 4/17
4/9
Presentation
Operators and accessories
KCC 1YZ
VZN 14 VZN pp
VZN pp
VN 12, VN 20
VZN 17, VZN 30
4
KCD 1PZ
KZ 32, KZ 83
KAD 1PZ
4/10
References
b b b b b
Degree of protection IP 65. Marking on operator . Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). Operator fixing by 1 22.5 hole; for other operators see pages 4/17 and 4/19. For other accessories and empty enclosures, see pages 4/20, 4/21 and 2/5.
Operators for main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors

Handle Red, padlockable with 1 padlock ( 4 to 6) Front plate mm Yellow 45 x 45 Reference KCC 1YZ Weight kg 0.050
Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
Yellow 60 x 60
KCD 1PZ
0.084
Operators for main switch disconnectors

Handle Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Front plate mm Black 60 x 60 Reference KAD 1PZ Weight kg 0.084
Accessories for door interlocking

For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in addition to a direct operator
Description Front plate mm Distance enclosure back/door mm 300330 Sold in Unit lots of reference Weight
Shaft extensions
VZN 17
kg 0.100
400430
VZN 30
0.130
Door interlock plate
45 x 45 or 60 x 60
KZ 32
0.170
Plate for door mounting
45 x 45 or 60 x 60
KZ 83
0.205
Schemes : page 4/17
4/11
References
Complete units
b b b b
580529
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for door mounting

Handle VCF 0 Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Front plate mm Yellow 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175 Reference VCD 02 VCD 01 VCD 0 VCD 1 VCD 2 VCF 02 VCF 01 VCF 0 VCF 1 VCF 2 VCF 3 VCF 4 VCF 5 VCF 6 Weight kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560 1.200 1.200
580530
4 screws
Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
Yellow 90 x 90
4 screws
VCF 5
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting at back of an enclosure (1)
Handle Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Front plate mm Yellow 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175 Reference VCCD VCCD VCCD VCCD VCCD VCCF VCCF VCCF VCCF VCCF VCCF VCCF 02 01 0 1 2 02 01 0 1 2 3 4 Weight kg 0.392 0.392 0.392 0.392 0.392 0.527 0.527 0.527 0.527 0.527 0.440 0.680 1.320 1.320
4 screws
580531
Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) VCCF 0
Yellow 90 x 90
4 screws
VCCF 5 VCCF 6
(1) Unit supplied with a shaft extension VZN 17 and a door interlock plate KZ 32 or KZ 74 (see page 4/20).
Schemes : page 4/25
4/12
Complete units
b b b b
Main switch disconnectors for door mounting

Handle
580532
Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
Front plate mm Black 60 x 60
Fixing 22.5
Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175
Reference VBD VBD VBD VBD VBD VBF VBF VBF VBF VBF VBF VBF 02 01 0 1 2 02 01 0 1 2 3 4
Weight kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560 1.200 1.200
4 screws
VBD 0
Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
580533
Black 90 x 90
4 screws
VBF 5 VBF 6
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards
Handle Red, padlockable with 1 padlock ( 4 to 6) Front plate mm Yellow 45 x 45 Rating A 25 32 40 63 80 Reference VVE 0 VVE 1 VVE 2 VVE 3 VVE 4 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.530 0.530
VBF 4
580534
Main switch disconnectors

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards
Handle Black, not padlockable Front plate mm Black 45 x 45 Rating A 25 32 40 63 80 Reference VVD 0 VVD 1 VVD 2 VVD 3 VVD 4 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560
VVE 1
Schemes : page 4/25
4/13
Switch bodies, add-on modules, auxiliary contacts
(for customer assembly) Switch bodies
Description 3-pole switch disconnectors (1) Rating A 12 20 25 32 Reference V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6
580535
Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.500 0.500 0.900 0.900
V0 40 63 80
580536
125 175
Add-on modules
Description
4
V5
Main pole modules
Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 63
Reference VZ 02 VZ 01 VZ 0 VZ 1 VZ 2 VZ 3 VZ 4 VZ 11 VZ 12 VZ 13 VZ 14 VZ 15 VZ 16
Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.050 0.100 0.250 0.050 0.100 0.250
580537
580538
80 Neutral pole modules with early make and late break contacts (1) 12 to 40 63 to 80 125 and 175 Earthing modules 12 to 40 63 and 80 125 and 175
VZ 0
VZ 11
580539
580540
Auxiliary contact block modules

Description Auxiliary contact block modules with 2 auxiliary contacts Type N/O + N/C (2) N/O + N/O Reference VZ 7 VZ 20 Weight kg 0.050 0.050
VZ 15
VZ 20
(1) Protection shrouds are available if required: see page 4/20. (2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts
Schemes : page 4/25
4/14
Switch bodies, add-on modules, auxiliary contacts
(for customer assembly) Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body
1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
VZ 7 or VZ 20 or VZ 11 or VZ 12 or VZ 14 or VZ 15 or VZ 0p/VZ 0 to VZ 4 + + + V0 + + V0p + VZ 7 or VZ 20 or VZ 11 or VZ 12 or + VZ 14 or VZ 15 or + VZ 0p/VZ 0 to VZ 4 VZ 7 or VZ 20 or VZ 13 or VZ 16 + + + V6 V4 or VZ 16 + or + + VZ 7 or + VZ 20 or + VZ 13
V5
to
2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body

VZ 0p VZ 0 VZ 1 VZ 2 VZ 3 VZ 4 + + + + + + VZ 0p + VZ 0 VZ 1 VZ 2 VZ 3 VZ 4 + + + + + V0p V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 + VZ 0p + + + + + + VZ 0 VZ 1 VZ 2 VZ 3 VZ 4 + + + + + VZ 7 VZ 7 VZ 7 VZ 7 VZ 7 VZ 7 or or or or or or VZ 20 VZ 20 VZ 20 VZ 20 VZ 20 VZ 20 or or or or or or VZ 11 VZ 11 VZ 11 VZ 11 VZ 12 VZ 12 or or or or or or VZ 14 VZ 14 VZ 14 VZ 14 VZ 15 VZ 15
Nota : The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules. Maximum of 3 main pole modules per switch body.
Schemes : page 4/25
4/15
Presentation
Operators, handles and front plates
KAp 1BZ VN 12, VN 20 V02V2 KCp 1YZ VZN 17, VZN 30 KCp 1LZ
KZ 32, KZ 83 KDp 1PZ V3, V4 KCp 1PZ KAp 1PZ
KBp 1PZ
4
VZ 18, VZ 31 KAF 2PZ KCF 2PZ
KZ 81 V5, V6 KBF 2PZ VZ 18, VZ 31 KDF 2PZ
KZ 74
KBF 3PZ
KDF 3PZ
KAF 3PZ
KCF 3PZ
4/16
References
b Marking on operator . b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). b Degree of protection IP 65.
Handles and front plates for main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors
For switch body Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 45 x 45 Fixing 22.5 4 screws KCC 1YZ KCE 1YZ kg 0.050 0.040 Weight
VN 12, VN 20 V02V2
Red, padlockable with 1 padlock ( 4 to 6) Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
Yellow 60 x 60
22.5 4 screws
KCD 1PZ KCF 1PZ
0.082 0.075
V3 and V4
Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
Yellow 60 x 60
4 screws
KCF 2PZ
0.070
4
Yellow 90 x 90 4 screws KCF 3PZ (1) 0.160
V5 and V6
Handles and front plates for main switch disconnectors

For switch body Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Black 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 4 screws KAD 1PZ KAF 1PZ kg 0.082 0.075 Weight
VN 12, VN 20 V02V2
Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Black, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
V3 and V4
Black 60 x 60
4 screws
KAF 2PZ
0.070
V5 and V6
Black 90 x 90
4 screws
KAF 3PZ (1)
0.160
(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ 106 must be ordered separately (see page 4/20).
4/17
KAp 1BZ VN 12, VN 20 V02V2 KCp 1YZ VZN 17, VZN 30 KCp 1LZ
KZ 32, KZ 83 KDp 1PZ V3, V4 KCp 1PZ KAp 1PZ
KBp 1PZ
4
VZ 18, VZ 31 KAF 2PZ KCF 2PZ
KZ 81 V5, V6 KBF 2PZ VZ 18, VZ 31 KDF 2PZ
KZ 74
KBF 3PZ
KDF 3PZ
KAF 3PZ
KCF 3PZ
4/18
b Marking on operator . b Degree of protection IP 65.
Handles and front plates for Emergency stop switch disconnectors

For switch body Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 45 x 45 Fixing 22.5 4 screws Yellow 60 x 60 22.5 4 screws V3 and V4 Red, long, not padlockable Red, long, not padlockable Yellow 60 x 60 4 screws KCC 1LZ KCE 1LZ KDD 1PZ KDF 1PZ KDF 2PZ kg 0.050 0.040 0.082 0.075 0.070 Weight
VN 12, VN 20 V02V2
Red, not padlockable
V5 and V6
Yellow 90 x 90
4 screws
KDF 3PZ (1)
0.160
Handles and front plates for switch disconnectors

For switch body Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Black 45 x 45 Fixing 22.5 4 screws Black 60 x 60 22.5 4 screws V3 and V4 Black, not padlockable Black, not padlockable Black 60 x 60 4 screws KAC 1BZ KAE 1BZ KBD 1PZ KBF 1PZ KBF 2PZ kg 0.050 0.040 0.055 0.045 0.070 Weight
VN 12, VN 20 V02V2
Black, not padlockable
V5 and V6
Black 90 x 90
4 screws
KBF 3PZ (1)
0.160
(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ 106 must be ordered separately (see next page).
4/19
Accessories
Input terminal protection shrouds

Description
580583
For switch bodies (3-pole shroud)
For use on V02V2 V3 and V4
Reference VZ 8 VZ 9 VZ 10 VZ 26 VZ 27 VZ 28 VZ 29
Weight kg 0.015 0.020 0.060 0.005 0.007 0.020 0.005
VZ 8 For add-on pole modules (single-pole shroud)

580584
V5 and V6 VZ 02VZ 2, VZ 11, VZ 14 VZ 3, VZ 4, VZ 12, VZ 15 VZ 13, VZ 16
VZ 26
For contact blocks with 2 auxiliary contacts
Components for door interlocking

For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in addition to a direct operator
Description Distance Sold in enc.back/door lots of mm VN 12, VN 20 300330 1 V02V2 400430 1 V02V2
580526
For use on
Unit reference VZN 17 (1) VZN 30 (1) VZ 17 VZ 30 VZ 18 VZ 31 VZ 18 VZ 31 KZ 32 KZ 74 Unit reference KZ 83
Weight kg 0.100 0.130 0.075 0.125 0.170 0.215 0.170 0.215 0.177 0.020 Weight kg 0.205
Shaft extensions
300330 400430
1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 Sold in lots of 5
V3 and V4
300320 400420
VZ 18 V5 and V6 330350 430450 Door interlock plates VN 12, VN 20 V02V2 V3V6 Front plate dimensions mm VN 12, VN 20 45 x 45 or V02V2 60 x 60 V3V6 V3 and V4 60 x 60 or 90 x 90 90 x 90 For use on
580585
Description
KZ 32
Plates for door mounting of handles with 4 screw fixing Adapter plate for switch disconnectors
5 5
KZ 81 KZ 106
0.010 0.075
580527
(1) Can be used with V02 to V2 switches.
KZ 81
4/20
Accessories
Accessories for operators

Description For use on Front plate dimensions mm 45 x 45 Sold in lots of 5 Unit reference KZ 13 Weight kg 0.060
Legend Front plate holder with silver coloured blank legend plate
812783
60 x 60
KZ 15
0.065
90 x 90
KZ 103
0.070
KZ 15
Legend holders without legend plate
Front plate
45 x 45
20
KZ 14
0.060
60 x 60
10
KZ 16
0.065
90 x 90
KZ 101
0.070
Silver coloured blank legend plates for engraving by customer
KZ 14
20
KZ 76
0.020
580528
KZ 16
10
KZ 77
0.010
KZ 101 KZ 67
KZ 100
0.005
Seals
VN 12, VN 20
45 x 45
KZ 65
0.037
V02V2
60 x 60
KZ 66
0.033
V3 and V4
60 x 60
KZ 62
0.033
V3V6
90 x 90
KZ 67
0.064
812785
Tightening tool
For operators with 22.5 fixing
Z01
0.050
Z01
4/21
4
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 and 20 A
Dimensions
Switch bodies VN 12, VN 20 Add-on modules VZN 12, VZN 20 Add-on modules VZN 11, VZN 14 VZN 05 and VZN 06
46,5
45,5
62
48 56
39
12
39
12
Mounting
Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door
VN 12, VN 20 Single hole fixing
22,5 44 74,5
VN 12, VN 20 4 screw fixing 45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate
1,5...6 13
12,7
1,5...6
36
44
62,5
36
48
4/22
48
45,5
Mounting (continued), schemes
4
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 and 20 A
Mounting (continued)
Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure with shaft extension VZN 17 or VZN 30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail)
VN 12, VN 20 Single hole fixing 4 screw fixing
1,5...6
1,5...6
Shaft extension
VN 12, VN 20
VZN 17 VZN 30
Distance (e) enclosure back/door mm 300330 400430
Schemes
Switch body VN 12, VN 20
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
4
Neutral pole module VZN 11 Auxiliary contact blocks VZN 05
13
Main pole module VZN 12, VZN 20
VZN 06
21 22
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
14
4/23
4
VARIO switch disconnectors,12 to 175 A
Dimensions
Switch bodies VOp, V0 to V2 Switch bodies V3 to V6
60
55 = H c G a
a V3, V4 60 V5, V6 90 Add-on modules VZ 7, VZ 20 b 83 125 c 65 90 G 48 68 H 48 68 5.5 5.5
74
Add-on modules VZ 02 to VZ 4 and VZ 11 to VZ 16
48,5
20
VZ VZ VZ VZ
02 and VZ 01, 0 to VZ 2, VZ 11, VZ 14 3, VZ 4, VZ 12, VZ 15 13, VZ 16
a 60 90 30
b 83 125 125
c 65 90 63
Mounting
Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door
Single hole fixing V0p, V0 to V4 4 screw fixing V0p, V0 to V4 4 screw fixing 4 screw fixing 45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate V0p, V0 to V2 V0p, V0 to V4
65
1,5...6 12,7 3
1,5...6
1,5...6
22,5 44 72 44 c
c 60 65
36 37 c
36
48
V0p, V0 to V2 V3, V4 V5 and V6. 4 screw fixing
90 x 90 front plate
1,5...6
94
68
65
Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/7 References : pages 4/8 to 4/21 Schemes : page 4/25
90
4/24
68
48
Mounting (continued), schemes
4
VARIO switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A
Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure
4 screw fixing V0p, V0 to V2 with shaft extension VZ 17 or VZ 30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail possible for V0p to V2) Single hole fixing V3 to V4 with shaft extension VZ 18 or VZ 31 V5 and V6 with shaft extension VZ 18 or VZ 31
1,5...6
1,5...6
1,5...6
94
30
Shaft extension
V02 and V01 V0 to V2 V3 and V4
VZ VZ VZ VZ
17 30 18 31
Distance (e) enc.back/door mm 300330 400430 300320 400420
Shaft extension V5 and V6 VZ 18 VZ 31
2 2 2 2
x 4.2 x 4.2 x5 x5
15 15 20 20
Distance (e) enc.back/door mm 300350 430450
100
60
Switch disconnectors for modular distribution boards

VVp 0 to VVp 2 VVp 3 to VV p 4
5,5 68 106
45 110
5,5 72
60
Schemes
Switch body
V02 and V01 V0 to V6
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Main pole module

VZ 02 and VZ 01 VZ 0 to VZ 4
Neutral pole module

VZ 11 to VZ 13

VZ 7 VZ 20
13
21
45 83
45 74
13 14
14
22
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Schemes : page 4/25
24
23
4/25
Selection guide
Fuse protection
Applications
Protection of control circuits or transformers
Breaking under load
Fuse type
NF C or DIN
Cartridge fuses
1125 A
Device type
Fuse carriers
References
DF6, GK1 C, D, E, F
Pages
4/29
4/26
Motor protection
Protection of motors or variable speed drives
Yes, only if combined with a contactor
Yes
NF C or DIN
NF C, DIN, BS or UL
1125 A
11250 A
Fuse carriers
Switch-disconnector-fuses
LS1, GK1 E, GK1 F (without fuses)
GS1
4/34
4/40 and 4/41
4/27
Characteristics
Fuse carriers
Fuse carrier type
DF6 AB08
GK1 C
DF6 AB10
GK1 D
GK1 E
GK1 F
Environment
Conforming to standards NF C 61-201 IEC 60947-3 Protective treatment Ambient air temperature for operation with tubular links without derating Maximum tilt in relation to normal vertical mounting plane C TC - 50+70 23 NF C 61-201
Fuse size Rated operational voltage with tubular links, a.c. supply Maximum continuous current (for ambient air temperature y 40 C) (1) With tubular links With aM cartridge fuses V 8.5 x 31.5 480 8.5 x 31.5 480 10 x 38 690 10 x 38 690 14 x 51 690 22 x 58 690
A A A
20 10 20
20 10 20
32 25 30
32 25 30
50 50 40
125 125 100
With gG cartridge fuses Permissible short-circuit current (with tubular links) Maximum peak value (dynamic stress) Short-time rating (rms value cos = 0.35) Duration Cabling Maximum c.s.a. (without cable end) Number of conductors Flexible cable Solid cable Tightening torque
kA kA
8 4
8 4
8 4
8 4
8 4
8 4
ms
100
100
100
100
100
100
1 mm2 mm2 Nm 10 10 1.2
2 6 6
1 10 10 1.2
2 6 6
1 10 10 1.2
2 6 6
1 10 10 1.2
2 6 6
1 25 25 2
2 10 10
1 35 50 2
2 16 25
(1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 40 C, apply a derating coefficient equivalent to 120 ambient temperature ---------------------------------------------------------------------80
Dimensions, mounting : pages 4/30 and 4/31
Schemes : page 4/31
4/28
References
Fuse carriers
533517
533518
Fuse carriers
Rated thermal current A 20 GK1 CF
(1)
Composition Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
Size of cartridge fuse or link 8.5 x 31.5
DF6 N10
533519
533520
1P 1N 3 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1N 3 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1N 3 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1N 3 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2)
12 12 6 6 4 3 12 12 6 6 4 3 12 12 6 6 4 3 12 12 6 6 4 3
DF6 AB08 DF6 N10 GK1 CC GK1 CD GK1 CF GK1 CH DF6 AB10 DF6 N10 GK1 DC GK1 DD GK1 DF GK1 DH GK1 GK1 GK1 GK1 GK1 GK1 GK1 GK1 GK1 GK1 GK1 GK1 EB EN EC ED EF EH FB FN FC FD FF FH
kg 0.070 0.080 0.152 0.142 0.213 0.294 0.070 0.080 0.152 0.142 0.213 0.294 0.130 0.140 0.273 0.263 0.394 0.536 0.230 0.250 0.480 0.460 0.690 0.940
32
10 x 38
DF6 AB10
GK1 DN 50 14 x 51
533521
533522
125
22 x 58
GK1 EN
GK1 EF
Blown fuse indicators (neon)

For use on fuse carriers GK1 AS DF6, GK1 C, D and E Operational Sold in voltage lots of V 80400 10 Unit reference GK1 AS Weight kg 0.003
Fuse carrier assembly strips

Fuse carriers to be assembled Type DF6 Number 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
(3)
Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Unit reference GK1 AP2 GK1 AP3 GK1 AP4 GK1 AP3 GK1 AP5 GK1 AP6 GK1 AP4 GK1 AP6 GK1 AP9 Weight kg 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.004 0.006 0.004 0.006 0.007
GK1 APp
GK1 E
GK1 F
Detail of assembly clip mounting
(1) Each pole can be marked. A groove is provided on the control lever for this purpose. Marking by means of AR1 Mp01 markers using positioning tool AT1 PA3. (2) N: neutral pole fitted with a locked tubular link as standard. (3) Strips are supplied with all the clips needed for assembling the fuse carriers together.
Schemes : page 4/31
4/29
4
Fuse carriers
Modular fuse carriers 20 A and 32 A
Mounting on rail AM1 DP200 DF6 AB, DF6 N10 GK1 pC, GK1 pD GK1 pF GK1 pH
36,5 81
38 a 7,5
a 60.5 64
17,5
2x17,5
3x17,5
4x17,5
1 pole 2, 3, 4 poles
Modular fuse carriers 50 A

Mounting on rail AM1 DP200 GK1 EB, GK1 EN GK1 EC, GK1 ED GK1 EF GK1 EH
40,5 95
45 a 7,5
1,5x17,5
3x17,5
4,5x17,5
6x17,5
1 pole 2, 3, 4 poles
a 78.5 82

Mounting on rail AM1 ED GK1 FB, GK1 FN GK1 FC, GK1 FD GK1 FF GK1 FH
47 120
44 a 15
2x17,5
4x17,5
6x17,5
8x17,5
GK1 FB, FN GK1 FC, FD, GK1 FF, FH
a 78.5 82
Schemes : page 4/31
4/30
Mounting, schemes
4
Fuse carriers
Mounting
Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1PA GK1 FB, FN GK1 FC, FD, FF, FH
AF1 EA4
AF1 EA4
50 88
26
100/110
a a1
GK1 a a1
FC 35 61
FD 35 61
100/110
FF 70 96
FH 105 131
Schemes
Modular fuse carriers
DF6 ABp DF6 N GK1 pC
N 1
4
3 4
GK1 pD
1 2
GK1 pF
1 3 5
GK1 pH
N 1 3 5
GK1 pB
GK1 pN
4/31
Selection
Fuse carriers
Operation: safety
The fuse carrier performs two basic functions: b it isolates the downstream circuit by means of a visible break and wide opening contacts, b it holds the cartridge fuses designed to protect the installation against shortcircuits. The type of cartridge fuse needed to protect the circuit must be determined before selecting the fuse carrier.
Cartridge fuse selection (type, rating, size)

Type
Application Solution b Motor protection. b Transformer protection. b aM type fuses. These fuses are designed to withstand high current peaks of a very short duration. They must be combined with a thermal overload relay coupled with a contactor. b Lighting circuit protection. b Supply line protection. b Furnace protection. b gG type fuses, which are more widely used but whose limiting capacity is weaker than that of aM type fuses.
Application
Solution
Rating
gG fuses aM fuses See standard NF C 15-100. Table 53 A paragraph 532-2-1 and table 52 C paragraph 523-1. Motors Motors Cartridge fuses 3 x 220 V 3 x 400 V type aM P in P in Size Rating kW A kW A A 9 32 15 28.5 10 x 38 32 11 39 22 44 14 x 51 50 22 75 37 73 22 x 58 80 30 103 55 105 22 x 58 125
Fuse carrier
LS1 D32 GK1 EK GK1 FK GK1 FK
Size
Use the fuse characteristics table opposite to select the correct fuse size according to: b the nominal current of the circuit to be protected, b the operational voltage.
Fuse carrier selection

Application Solution Isolation of a circuit for safety reasons only. The fuse carrier may be fitted with links. The maximum permissible current is indicated in the pole characteristics table opposite. Isolation of a circuit and its protection against short-circuits. Select a fuse carrier according to: b the type of cartridge fuse required, b the maximum permissible current in the fuse carrier poles (see pole characteristics table opposite). If the operational current is greater than the maximum permissible current in the poles of the fuse carrier corresponding to the cartridge fuse size selected, select the fuse carrier the next size up. The safety provided by using a fuse carrier can be increased by adding a padlocking device with up to three padlocks.
Application Solution
Recommendations for use

The fuse carrier conforms to utilisation category AC-21A/22A of standard IEC 60947-3. It is therefore recommended that the fuse carrier early break auxiliary contacts always be inserted in the coil circuit of the contactor with which it is in series. If the fuse carrier is not associated with a contactor, it is essential to ensure that it will be operated off-load.
Schemes : page 4/39
4/32
Characteristics
Fuse carriers
Fuse carrier type
LS1 D32 NF EN 60947-3 IEC 60947-3 p p BV, UR TH C - 50+ 70 23
LS1 D323
GK1 Ep p p TC - 50+ 70 23
GK1 Fp p p TC - 50+ 70 23
Environment
Product certifications Protective treatment Ambient air temperature for operation with links without derating Maximum tilt in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Fuse size Rated operational voltage with links. a.c. supply Maximum continuous current at ambient temperature y 40 C (1) (Min. cable /Ie) With tubular links With aM fuses With gG fuses V 10 x 38 690 10 x 38 690 14 x 51 690 22 x 58 690
mm 2/A 6/32 or 4/25 or 2.5/16 mm 2/A 6/32 or 4/22 or 2.5/20 mm 2/A 4/25 or 2.5/20 or 1.5/16 V A a 250. c 60 2.5
4/25 or 2.5/16 4/25 or 2.5/20 2.5/20 or 1.5/16
10/50 or 6/40 10/50 or 6/35 10/40 or 6/32
35/125 or 25/100 35/125 or 25/100 25/100 or 16/80
Early break contact characteristics

Rated operational voltage Conventional thermal current a 250. c 60 2.5 a 500. c 440 6 a 500. c 220 6
Cartridge fuse characteristics

Fuse size Type aM a 400 V a 500 V a 660 V a 400 V a 500 V a 660 V A A A A A A W 10 x 38 32 (2) 20 25 (2) 25 3 10 x 38 25 20 25 25 3 14 x 51 50 40 25 40 40 25 8.5 22 x 58 125 80 50 100 80 50 18
Type gG
Maximum power dissipated by fuse
Cabling
Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
Number and c.s.a. of conductors mm 2 Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 mm 2 Flexible cable with cable end Connection Tightening torque Nm Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 Min. Max. Min. 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 Connector 2 Max. 1 x 25 1 x 25 1 x 16 Min. 1 x 16 1 x 16 1 x 16 Connector 2 Max. 1 x 70 1 x 50 1 x 25
Screw clamp terminals 1.7
Connection by spring terminals

Number and c.s.a. of conductors mm 2 Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. 2 x 1 (3) 2 x 4 2 x 1.5 2x4 (3) (1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 55 C, apply a derating coefficient equivalent to 120 ambient temperature -----------------------------------------------------------------------80 (2) These values are for fuse carriers mounted side by side with a gap of 10 mm between them or mounted with sets of busbars GV2 p54 . If mounted side by side without a gap, use the following fuse sizes: aM fuse: 25 A and gG fuse: 20 A. (3) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended. Min. Max.
Selection : page 4/32
Schemes : page 4/39
4/33
References
Fuse carriers
500504_1
3-pole basic blocks

Rating Cartridge fuse size 10 x 38 Number of early break contacts (1) (4) Single-phase protection device (2) Without Reference (3) Weight kg LS1 D323 0.270
Connection by spring terminals

25 A

32 A 50 A LS1 D323 2
500503_1
10 x 38 14 x 51
(4) 1
Without Without With Without With
LS1 D32 GK1 EK GK1 EV GK1 ES GK1 EW GK1 FK GK1 FV GK1 FS GK1 FW
0.300 0.430 0.470 0.470 0.510 0.860 0.900 0.900 0.940
125 A
22 x 58
Without With
Without With
4
4-pole basic blocks
LS1 D32
812882

32 A 50 A 10 x 38 14 x 51 (4) 1 Without Without With 2 Without With 125 A 22 x 58 1 Without With LS1 D32 + LA8 D324 (5) GK1 EM GK1 EY GK1 ET GK1 EX GK1 FM GK1 FY GK1 FT GK1 FX 0.300 0.570 0.600 0.610 0.650 1.090 1.130 1.130 1.160
GK1 FK
500503_1
500505_1
Without With
Fuse carriers for the North American market

25 and 30 A basic blocks: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (1) With 1 or 2 early break contacts to be inserted in the contactor control circuit. (2) Fuse carriers with single-phase protection device must be fitted with striker fuses. (3) LS1 D: clips directly onto a 35 mm 5 rail or screw fixing. GK1: clips directly onto a 35 mm 5 rail or Telequick mounting plate. (4) Addition of add-on contact block, see page 4/35. (5) Can be mounted on left-hand or right-hand side of the basic block.
LS1 D32
+ LA8 D324
Schemes : page 4/39
4/34
References
Fuse carriers

Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (early break contacts) For use on LS1 D32 Mounting Front Maximum number 1 Type of contacts N/O + N/C N/O + N/O LS1 D323 Front 1 N/O + N/C N/O + N/O Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 Unit reference GV AE11 GV AE20 GV AE113 GV AE203 Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.030 0.030
Operators
For fuse carrier Rating Number of poles 3 or 4 For mounting on Right-hand side Left-hand side
810886
Reference
Weight kg 0.300 0.300
Side handles
125 A GK1 AP07 GK1 AP08
Front handles (1)

32 - 50 - 125 A GK1 FK + GK1 AP07 Fitted as standard
External handles
32 A 3 or 4 Right-hand side Left-hand side 50 A 3 or 4 Right-hand side Left-hand side 125 A 3 or 4 Right-hand side Left-hand side LS1 D32005 (2) LS1 D32006 GK1 AP05 GK1 AP06 GK1 AP07 GK1 AP08 0.200 0.200 0.180 0.180 0.300 0.300
Padlocking devices (3)

For fuse carrier Rating 32 A 50 A Reference Number of poles 3 or 4 3 Single-phase protection device Without Without With 4 Without With Weight kg 0.100 0.110 0.110 0.070
integral GK1 AV07 GK1 AV08 GK1 AV08 GK1 AV09
Links
Tubular links
For fuse carrier Rating 32 A 50 A 125 A Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 Sold in lots of 10 10 10 Unit reference DK1 CB92 (4) DK1 EB92 (5) DK1 FA92 (5) Weight kg 0.007 0.012 0.020
(1) Fitted as standard on 32, 50 and 125 A fuse carriers type GK1. (2) Reference LS1 D32005 replaces reference DK1 FB005. (3) For the 125 A rating, use side handles GK1 AP07 or GK1 AP08. (4) For use on a neutral circuit, the tubular link can be interlocked with special device LA8 D25906 (sold in lots of 10). (5) 50 and 125 A fuse carriers type GK1 are fitted with an interlocked neutral tubular link as standard.
Schemes : page 4/39
4/35
4/36
References
Accessories
Accessories for LS1 D32 (screw clamp terminals)

Description Plate for mounting Application LS1 D32 and contactor LC1 D09...D38 with front faces aligned Between LS1 D32 and contactor LC1 K or LP1 K Between LS1 D32 and contactor LC1 D09...D38 Between LS1 D32 mounted on LAD 311 and contactor LC1 D09...D38 Application 2 tap-offs Sold in lots of 1 Unit reference LAD 311 Weight kg 0.040
Combination blocks
10 10 10
GV2 AF01 GV2 AF3 GV2 AF4
0.020 0.016 0.016
Description Sets of 3-pole 63 A busbars
Pitch mm 45 54 72
Reference GV2 G245 GV2 G254 GV2 G272 GV2 G345 GV2 G354 GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G472 GV2 G554 Unit reference GV1 G10 GV1 G09 LA9 E07 GV2 V03
Weight kg 0.036 0.038 0.042 0.058 0.060 0.077 0.085 0.094 0.100 Weight kg 0.005 0.040 0.005 0.092
3 tap-offs
45 54
4 tap-offs
45 54 72
5 tap-offs Description Protective end cover Terminal blocks Connection from the top Cover for terminal block Padlocking device Application
54 Sold in lots of 5 1
For unused busbar outlets For supply to one or more GV2 G busbar sets For mounting in modular panels 10 For use with up to 4 padlocks 1 (not supplied) 6 mm shank max Application
Accessories for LS1 D323 (spring terminals)

Description Plate for mounting Reference LAD 311 LS1 D323 and contactor LC1 D09...D38 with front faces aligned Extension by LAD 32 p Number of starters 2 3 4 Description Assembly and power connection kit for LS1 D323 and LC1 D093...D323 Description Maximum capacity 16 mm2 Kit contents 1 LAD 311 plate for mounting LS1 D323 2 LAD 341 power connection modules - between LS1 D323 and power splitter box - between LS1 D323 and contactor Application Power supply to 1 or 2 power splitter boxes Connection of motor cables For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2 Sold in lots of 1 1 20 Weight kg 0.040
Description Power splitter box, 63 A
Reference LAD 322 LAD 323 LAD 324 Reference LAD 352
Weight kg 0.120 0.180 0.240 Weight kg 0.078
Upstream terminal block Downstream 16 mm2 terminal block Cable end reducer
Unit reference LAD 3B1 LAD 331 LAD 99
Weight kg 0.212 0.050
4/37
4
Fuse carriers
LS1 D32
Mounting on rail AM1 DP200 Panel mounting
LS1 D32 + LA8 D324

Mounting on rail AM1 DP200 Mounting of 4th pole
On left-hand side
On right-hand side
14,2
87
89
84
89
22,5 51,5 38,5 68,3
45
2x5 22,5
40 57
17,5
45
45
17,5
GK1 EK, EM, ES, ET, EV, EW, EX, EY

Mounting on rail AM1 DP200 Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM 1P
GK1 E + GK1 AV (padlocking device)
40,5
29,5
4
45 82
95
20,5
45
a1 7,5 a 7,5
7,5
45 82
53 98
45
4,5
4,5
a: with single-phase protection device. a1: without single-phase protection device.
External operator GK1 AP05 right-hand, GK1 AP06 left-hand Panel cut-out 5 a1 3P 88 97
GK1 EK EM ES ET EV EW EX EY
a 3P 106 115
4P 141 132
4P 114 123
15 15
70
70
8 13 110 f
f 29114 29114
30
External operator, RH or LH side GK1 EK, EM, ES, ET GK1 EV, EW, EX, EY Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1PA
GK1 Fp + GK1 AP07 (internal right-hand control)

Mounting on rail AM1 DE or ED
a 4 47
AF1 EA4
GK1 a 3P 4P 70 105 a1 3P 4P 96 131
44 82
6 15
7,5
a1 a
55 35
(1)
44 82
(1) Padlocking device (up to 3 padlocks)
a a1
Internal or external control GK1 AP07 RH, AP08LH Panel cut-out (for external control)
100/110
Fp
120
5
= = 12,5
4P 186 171 Characteristics : page 4/33 4P 156 171 References : pages 4/34 and 4/35
FK FM FS FT FV FW FX FY Selection : page 4/32
55
GK1
a 3P 136 151
a1 3P 121 136
== 8,5
==
55
8 25 110
f 35114 35114
30 f
External operator, RH or LH side GK1 FK, FM, FS, FT GK1 FV, FW, FX, FY Schemes : page 4/39
4/38
87
Schemes
Fuse carriers
Fuse carriers without single-phase protection device

3-pole LS1 D32, D323
1 3 5
LS1 D32, D323 + GV AE11p

13 21 1 3 5
LS1 D32, D323 + GV AE20p

13 23 1 3 5
GK1 EK
13
5
14
24
6
5 6
3
14
22
GK1 ES
13 23 1 3 5
GK1 FK
1 3 5
GK1 FS
1 3 5
4-pole LS1 D32 + LA8 D324

1 3 7 8
12
14
11
22
24
11
12
14
24
14
21
3-pole + Neutral GK1 EM

13 N 1 3 5
GK1 ET
13 23 N 1 3 5
GK1 FM
N 1 3 5
GK1 FT
N 1
14
12
14
14
24
14
11
12
14
11 22 14
24
Fuse carriers with single-phase protection device

3-pole GK1 EV
13 1 3 5
GK1 EW
13 23 1 3 5
GK1 FV
1 3 5
GK1 FW
1 3 5
12
11
22
21
24
14
14
24
12
14
96
96
11
98
98
96
96
95
95
98
3-pole + Neutral GK1 EY

13 N 1 3 5
GK1 EX
13 23 N 1 3 5
14
95
14
96
98
96
95
GK1 FY
N 1 3 5
GK1 FX
N 1 3 5
95
98
12
14
11
24
22
24
12
14
11
96
96
98
95
95
98
21
95
98
21
4/39
Selection guide
Switch-disconnector-fuses, 32 to 1250 A
Applications
GS1 switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking and making, safe isolation and They are used, in particular, on the incoming supply for control panels, for protecting and switching They provide simultaneous disconnection, together with all the other associated functions such as Their compact design means that they can also be fitted in small automation system equipment to
Fuse type
NF C or DIN
Rated thermal current (Ith)
32 A
50 A
63 A
100 A
125 A
160 A
250 A
400 A
630 A
1250 A
Number of poles
3 3 + Nc
3 or 4
Fuse size
10 x 38 14 x 51 T000
22 x 58 22 x 58 T0 T00 T00
T1
T2
T3
T4
Internal operator, packlockable External operator, padlockable and lockable
Front
Side
Side or front
Side or front
690 V
Rated operational current (Ie) at 400 V, AC-23A
32 A
50 A
63 A
100 A
125 A
160 A
250 A
400 A
630 A
1250 A
Rated breaking capacity at 400 V, AC-23B Rated making capacity at 400 V, AC-23B Rated rms conditional short circuit current at 400 V, with gG (gI) fuses Switch-disconnector-fuse type references
256 A 320 A 100 kA
400 A 500 A 100 kA
500 A 630 A 100 kA
800 A 1000 A 100 kA
1000 A 1250 A 100 kA
1280 A 1600 A 100 kA
2000 A 2500 A 100 kA
3200 A 4000 A 100 kA
5040 A 6300 A 100 kA
10 000 A 12 500 A 100 kA
GS1 DD
GS1 F
GS1 G
GS1 J
GS1 K or KK
GS1 L or LL
GS1 N
GS1 QQ
GS1 S
GS1 V
Pages
4/48 and 4/49
4/40
overcurrent protection. off main circuits (including Emergency stop). padlocking and interlocking. provide disconnect and protection functions on the incoming supply of equipment, generators or starters, including motors.
BS
32 A
63 A
100 A
160 A
200 A
250 A
315 A
400 A
630 A
800 A
1250 A
A1
A2-A3
A4 y 31 mm
A4-B1-B2
B1-B2
B1...B3
B1...B3
B1...B4
C1-C2
C1...C3
D1
Front Side or front
Side
Side or front
32 A
63 A
100 A
160 A
200 A
250 A
315 A
400 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
256 A 320 A 100 kA
500 A 630 A 100 kA
800 A 1000 A 100 kA
1280 A 1600 A 80 kA
1600 A 2000 A 100 kA
2000 A 2500 A 80 kA
2520 A 3150 A 80 kA
3200 A 4000 A 80 kA
5040 A 6300 A 100 kA
6400 A 8000 A 100 kA
10,000 A 8000 A 100 kA
GS1 DDB
GS1 GB
GS1 JB
GS1 LB or LLB
GS1 MMB
GS1 NB
GS1 PPB
GS1 QQB
GS1 SB
GS1 TB
GS1 VB
4/50
4/41
General
Functions Functions
Breaking b Quick break and quick tripping mechanism. b Breaking mechanism independent of fuses. b Utilisation categories AC-23/690 V and DC-23/500 V.
Isolation b Upstream and downstream breaking of fuses. Up to 630 A: NFC/DIN, up to 800 A: BS Upstream breaking of fuses for 1250 A. b GS1 AN auxiliary contacts. b Contacts forced open in the event of welding.
b Visible isolation distance between the open contacts.
Protection b Addition of gG (gl) fuses.
b Addition of aM fuses (associated with thermal overload relays).
b Addition of quick-blow fuses.
b Blown fuse detection device. b Conditional short-circuit withstand voltage of 100 kA for all ratings.
b Handles with padlocking facility. b Interlocking of handles by means of lock. b Door interlock in I position. b Fuse covers fitted as standard on all ratings. b IPXXB terminal blocks fitted as standard up to 63 A, available as an option on other ratings. Information and testing b Up to 10 auxiliary contacts. b Test facility with auxiliary contacts GS1 ANT and handles GS1 AHT.
Product overview
NF C and DIN fuses
BS fuses
Schemes : page 4/63
4/42
v Opening and closing independent of operator speed. v Quality and durability of mechanical and electrical lives. v Durable performance in severe duty applications.
v On-load making and breaking of resistive, inductive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits. v Direct switching of motors.
v Double break isolation of the power circuit and safe replacement of fuses.
v Total isolation of power and control circuits to ensure safety of persons and equipment.
v Control circuit isolation. v Fully apparent break (up to 315 A rating). Open position cannot be indicated unless all contacts are actually open.
v Safe opening and clear indication of Open state of switchdisconnector.
v Visible break (400 to 1250 A ratings).
v Protection of distribution circuits and power switching circuits without significant current peak. v Protection of motors.
v Type 2 coordination (Iq > 50 kA) for motor starters consisting of fuses, contactor, relay.
v Protection of electronic variable speed controllers and soft starters.
v Equivalence between the breaking capacity of the fuses and the ability of the switch-disconnector-fuse to withstand this maximum capacity.
v Protection against single-phasing. v Use in installations where very high short-circuit currents can develop.
v Protection against accidental contact.
v Protection of persons.
v Early break, Open and Closed position signalling, and blown fuse signalling. Accessories Handles v Internal or external. v Mounted on right-hand side. v Mounted on left-hand side. v Mounted on front with door interlock. v Padlockable with up to 3 padlocks. v Lockable. v Black / Black or Yellow / Red.
v Use in automation systems.
Contacts v Addition of up to 8 auxiliary contacts GS1 AN suitable for isolation. Reversibility of these contacts to convert an N/C contact into an N/O contact and vice versa. v Control circuit test facility, off-load, with auxiliary contacts GS1 ANT used in conjunction with handles GS1 AHT. v Two auxiliary early break and O and I position signalling contacts. v Auxiliary blown fuse signalling contacts.
Schemes : page 4/63
4/43
Characteristics
Switch-disconnector-fuses, 32 to 1250 A for use with NF C or DIN fuses
Type
GS1 DD Switch-disconnector-fuses Circuit-breakers
GS1 F
GS1 G
GS1 J
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Flame resistance conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 IEC 60947-3 and 5, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, NBN 63408 IEC 60269-1 and 2, NFC 63-210 and 63-211, VDE 0636-1, DIN 43620 ASEFA/LOVAG, KEMA, LROS, CEBEC TH 960 960 850
Body Fuse cover
C C
Rated thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Fuse size Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational power Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V a 500 V a 690 V Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V a 500 V a 690 V Cat. DC-23A/B (1) c 500 V (3) Short-circuit withstand I rms with protection by gG (gl) fuses Short-circuit making capacity I rms with protection by gG (gl) fuses Fuse ratings Rated breaking capacity I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B Rated making capacity I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B Mechanical durability Number of operating cycles Electrical durability Number of operating cycles Cat. AC/DC-23A/B (1) Cabling Cable c.s.a. min/max Bars min c.s.a./max width Tightening torque A V kV kW kW kW A A A A kA kA A A A 32 10 x 38 690 8 15 18.5 (2) 25 (2) 32 32 (2) 32 (2) 20 100 100 32 256 320 30 000 1500/300 2.5/16 3 50 14 x 51 750 8 25 33 45 50 50 50 40 100 100 50 400 500 10 000 1500 6/25 3.2 63 T000 750 8 33 45 55 63 63 63 40 100 100 63 500 630 10 000 1500 10/25 3.2 100 22 x 58 750 8 55 75 90 100 100 100 80 100 100 100 800 1000 10 000 1500 25/95 12
mm2 mm N.m
GS1 AM p11 and GS1 AM1 to AM4 early break and signalling contact characteristics
Rated thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15 Cat. DC-13 Durability Number of operating cycles Fuse protection gG Cabling A A A A mm 16 127 V 5; 230 V: 4; 400 /415 V: 3; 440 V: 2 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4 Mechanical: 1 000 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 30 000 6 max Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
GS1 AN and GS1 ANT signalling contact characteristics

Rated thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15 Cat. DC-13 Durability Number of operating cycles Protection by fuses gG Cabling Cable c.s.a. min/max A A A A mm2
(4)
20 230 V 10; 400/415 V: 8; 440 V: 6 48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1 Mechanical: 30 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 10 000 16 max Min: 1.5; max: 16
(1) Category A frequent operating cycles, category B infrequent operating cycles. (2) With tubular links. (3) 2 poles in series per phase. (4) Cannot be used on GS1 DD.
General : pages 4/42 and 4/43
Schemes : page 4/63
4/44
GS1 K
GS1 KK
GS1 L
GS1 LL
GS1 N
GS1 QQ
GS1 S
GS1 V
IEC 60947-3 and 5, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, NBN 63408 IEC 60269-1 and 2, NFC 63-210 and 63-211, VDE 0636-1, DIN 43620 ASEFA/LOVAG, KEMA, LROS, CEBEC TH 960 850
125 22 x 58 750 8 63 90 90 125 125 100 100 100 100 125 1000 1250 10 000 1000 35/95 12
125 T00 750 8 63 90 90 125 125 100 100 100 100 125 1000 1250 10 000 1000 35/95 12
160 T0 750 8 90 110 110 160 160 125 125/80 100 100 160 1280 1600 10 000 1000/200 50/95 12
160 T00 750 8 90 110 110 160 160 125 125/80 100 100 160 1280 1600 10 000 1000/200 50/95 12
250 T1 750 8 132 160 220 250 250 250 160 100 100 250 2000 2500 10 000 1000/200 95/240 25
400 T2 750 8 220 220 220/295 400 315/315 250/315 200/315 100/50 100/50 315/400 3200 4000 10 000 1000/200 185/240 /45 25
630 T3 1000 12 355 355 295/400 630 500 315/400 400/630 100 100 630 5040 6300 5000 1000/200 2 x 150 / 2 x 300 2 x 30 x 5 / 63 44
1250 T4 1000 12 710 670/710 600/750 1250 900/1000 630/800 800/1000 100 100 1250 10 000 12 500 5000 500/100 / 4 x 185 2 x 60 x 5 / 100 44
16 127 V: 5; 230 V: 4; 400 /415 V: 3; 440 V: 2 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4 Mechanical: 1 000 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 30 000 6 max Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
20 230 V: 10; 400 /415 V: 8; 440 V: 6 48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1 Mechanical: 30 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 10 000 16 max Min: 1.5; Max: 16
Schemes : page 4/63
4/45
Characteristics
Switch-disconnector-fuses, 32 to 1250 A for use with BS fuses
Type
GS1 DDB Switch-disconnector-fuses Circuit-breakers
GS1 GB
GS1 JB
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Flame resistance conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 IEC 60947-3 and 5, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, NBN 63408 IEC 60269-1 and 2, NFC 63-210 and 63-211, VDE 0636-1, DIN 43620 ASEFA/LOVAG, KEMA, pending: LROS TH 960 850
Body Fuse cover
C C
Rated thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Fuse size Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational power Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V a 500 V a 690 V Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V a 500 V a 690 V Cat. DC-23A/B (1) c 500 V (2) Short-circuit withstand I rms with protection by BS fuses Short-circuit making capacity I rms with protection by BS fuses Fuse ratings Rated breaking capacity I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B Rated making capacity I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B Mechanical durability Number of operating cycles Electrical durability Number of operating cycles Cat. AC/DC-23A/B (1) Cabling Cable c.s.a. min/max Bars min c.s.a./max width Tightening torque A V kV kW kW kW A A A A kA kA A A A 32 A1 690 8 15 18.5 25 32 32 32 20 80 80 32 256 320 30 000 1500/300 2.5/16 3 63 A2-A3 750 8 30 40 55 63 63 63 40 100 100 63 500 630 10 000 1500/300 10/25 3.2 100 A4 y 31 mm 750 8 51 63 90 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 1000 10 000 1500/300 25/95 12
mm2 mm N.m
GS1 AM p11 and GS1 AM1 to AM4 early break and signalling contact characteristics
Rated thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15 Cat. DC-13 Durability Number of operating cycles Fuse protection gG Cabling A A A A mm 16 127 V 5; 230 V: 4; 400 /415 V: 3; 440 V: 2 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4 Mechanical: 1 000 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 30 000 6 max Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
GS1 AN and GS1 ANT signalling contact characteristics

Rated thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15 Cat. DC-13 Durability Number of operating cycles Fuse protection gG Cabling Cable c.s.a. min/max A A A A mm2 20 230 V 10; 400/415 V: 8; 440 V: 6 48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1 Mechanical: 30 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 10 000 16 max Min: 1.5; max: 16
(1) Category A frequent operating cycles, category B infrequent operating cycles. (2) 2 poles in series per phase. (3) Fit switch-disconnector-fuses GS1 LB with B1 or B2 fuses and GS1 LLB with A4 fuses.
Schemes : page 4/63
4/46
GS1 LB or LLB (1) GS1 MMB
GS1 NB
GS1 PPB
GS1 QQB
GS1 SB
GS1 TB
GS1 VB
IEC 60947-3 and 5, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, NBN 63408 IEC 60269-1 and 2, NFC 63-210 and 63-211, VDE 0636-1, DIN 43620 ASEFA/LOVAG, KEMA, pending: LROS TH 960 850
160 A4, B1-B2 (3) 750 8 80 110 110 160 160 125 125 80 80 160 1280 1600 10 000 1000/200 50/95 12
200 B1-B2 750 8 100 140 150 200 200 160 125 80 80 200 1600 2000 10 000 1000/200 50/95 12
250 B1...B3 750 8 132 160 220 250 250 250 160 80 80 250 2000 2500 10 000 1000/200 95/240 25
315 B1...B3 750 8 132 160 220 250 250 250 160 80 55 315 2000 2500 10 000 1000/200 95/240 25
400 B1...B4 1000 12 220 400 220/295 400 315 250/315 200/315 80 80/50 400 3200 4000 8000 1000/200 185/240 / 40 25
630 C1-C2 1000 12 355 355 295/400 630 500 315/400 400/630 100 630 5040 6300 6000 1000/200 2 x 150 / 2 x 300 2 x 30 x 5 / 63 44
800 C1...C3 1000 12 450 450 600/750 800 630 630/800 800 100 800 6400 8000 6000 500/100 2 x 60 x 5 / 63 44
1250 D1 1000 12 560 560 600 1000 800 630 800/1000 100 1250 10 000 8000 6000 500/100 / 4 x 185 2 x 60 x 5 / 100 44
16 127 V: 5; 230 V: 4; 400 /415 V: 3; 440 V: 2 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4 Mechanical: 1 000 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 30 000 6 max Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
20 230 V: 10; 400 /415 V: 8; 440 V: 6 48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1 Mechanical: 30 000; electrical Cat. AC-15: 10 000 16 max Min: 1.5; max: 16
Schemes : page 4/63
4/47
References
532783
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with NF C or DIN fuses

Switch rating A 32 GS1 DD3 Fuse size Number of poles Reference Weight kg 0.510 0.540
For external operators mounted on RH or LH side, and front-mounted internal or external operators
10 x 38 3 3 + Nc (1) GS1 DD3 GS1 DD4
For internal or external operators mounted on right-hand side

50 63 100
532783
14 x 51 Size 000 (2) 22 x 58 22 x 58 Size 00
125
160 GS1 FD3
Size 0 Size 00
4
532785
250 400 630 1250
Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
GS1 FD3 GS1 FD4 GS1 GD3 GS1 GD4 GS1 JD3 GS1 JD4 GS1 KD3 GS1 KD4 GS1 KKD3 GS1 KKD4 GS1 LD3 GS1 LD4 GS1 LLD3 GS1 LLD4 GS1 ND3 GS1 ND4 GS1 QQD3 GS1 QQD4 GS1 SD3 GS1 SD4 GS1 VD3 GS1 VD4
0.900 1.100 1.100 1.400 1.700 2.100 1.700 2.100 1.700 2.100 2.200 2.800 1.700 2.100 3.500 4.500 4.700 6.600 16.500 20.500 27.500 34.500
For external operators mounted on left-hand side

50 GS1 ND4 63 100 125 14 x 51 Size 000 (2) 22 x 58 22 x 58 Size 00
532786
160
Size 0 Size 00
250 400 GS1 KKG3
Size 1 Size 2
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
GS1 FG3 GS1 FG4 GS1 GG3 GS1 GG4 GS1 JG3 GS1 JG4 GS1 KG3 GS1 KG4 GS1 KKG3 GS1 KKG4 GS1 LG3 GS1 LG4 GS1 LLG3 GS1 LLG4 GS1 NG3 GS1 NG4 GS1 QQG3 GS1 QQG4
0.900 1.100 1.100 1.400 1.700 2.100 1.700 2.100 1.700 2.100 2.200 2.800 1.700 2.100 3.500 4.500 4.700 6.600
(1) Nc = Switched neutral. (2) Compact fuses for German market.
Schemes : page 4/63
4/48
532787
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with NF C or DIN fuses

Switch rating A 50 GS1 K4 63 100 125 Fuse size Number of poles Reference Weight kg 1.200 1.400 1.400 1.700 2.000 2.400 2.000 2.400 2.000 2.400 2.500 3.100 2.000 2.400 3.800 4.800 4.500 6.800
For front-mounted external operators

14 x 51 Size 000 (1) 22 x 58 22 x 58 Size 00 160 Size 0 Size 00 250 400 Size 1 Size 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 GS1 F3 GS1 F4 GS1 G3 GS1 G4 GS1 J3 GS1 J4 GS1 K3 GS1 K4 GS1 KK3 GS1 KK4 GS1 L3 GS1 L4 GS1 LL3 GS1 LL4 GS1 N3 GS1 N4 GS1 QQ3 GS1 QQ4
For front-mounted internal and external operators

630 1250 Size 3 Size 4 3 4 3 4 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 S3 S4 V3 V4 16.500 20.500 27.500 34.500
(1) Compact fuses for German market.
Schemes : page 4/63
4/49
References
Switch-disconnector-fuses, 32 to 1250 A for use with BS fuses
532788
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with BS fuses

Switch rating A 32 Fuse size Number of poles Reference Weight kg 0.510 0.540
For external operators mounted on RH or LH side, and front-mounted internal or external operators
A1 3 3 + Nc (1) GS1 DDB3 GS1 DDB4
For internal or external operators mounted on right-hand side

63 GS1 DDB3 100 160 A4 y 31 mm A4 B1-B2 200
532789
A2-A3
B1-B2 B1...B3 B1...B3 B1...B4 C1-C2 C1...C3 D1
250 315
4
GS1 NBR3
400 630 800 1250
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 3+N 3 4
GS1 GBR3 GS1 GBR4 GS1 JBR3 GS1 JBR4 GS1 LLBR3 GS1 LLBR4 GS1 LBR3 GS1 LBR4 GS1 MMBR3 GS1 MMBR4 GS1 NBR3 GS1 NBR4 GS1 PPBR3 GS1 PPBR4 GS1 QQBR3 GS1 QQBR4 GS1 SBR3 GS1 SBR4 GS1 TBR3 GS1 TBR4 GS1 VBR3 GS1 VBR4
1.100 1.400 1.700 2.100 2.200 2.900 2.200 2.900 2.200 2.900 3.500 4.500 3.500 4.500 4.700 6.600 17.500 21.500 22.000 26.500 27.500 34.500

32 63
532790
A1 A2-A3 A4 y 31 mm A4 B1-B2
100 160
GS1 GB3
200 250 315 400
B1-B2 B1...B3 B1...B3 B1...B4
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
GS1 DB3 GS1 DB4 GS1 GB3 GS1 GB4 GS1 JB3 GS1 JB4 GS1 LLB3 GS1 LLB4 GS1 LB3 GS1 LB4 GS1 MMB3 GS1 MMB4 GS1 NB3 GS1 NB4 GS1 PPB3 GS1 PPB4 GS1 QQB3 GS1 QQB4
1.200 1.400 1.400 1.700 2.000 2.400 2.200 2.900 2.500 3.200 2.500 3.200 3.800 4.800 3.800 4.800 4.500 6.800
For front-mounted internal or external operators

630 800 1250 C1-C2 C1...C3 D1 3 4 3 3+N 3 4 GS1 SB3 GS1 SB4 GS1 TB3 GS1 TB4 GS1 VB3 GS1 VB4 17.500 21.500 22.000 26.500 27.500 34.500
(1) Nc = Switched neutral.
Schemes : page 4/63
4/50
References
Auxiliary and signalling contacts
532791
Auxiliary early break and/or O and I position signalling contacts

Switch rating A 32 Type of contact 1 1 1 2 N/O N/C C/O C/O Mounting Front (1) Front (1) Side (2) Side (2) Reference GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 AM110 AM101 AM111 AM211 Weight kg 0.015 0.015 0.060 0.070
GS1 AM1pp
Auxiliary early break and O and I position signalling contacts

Switch rating A 50...400 630...1250 50...400 630...1250 Type of contact 1 1 2 2 C/O C/O C/O C/O Reference GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 AM1 (3) AM3 AM2 (3) AM4 Weight kg 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050
532792
Auxiliary O and I position signalling contacts (4)

Switch rating A Type of contact Reference Weight kg 0.100 0.200
Standard contacts
50...400 GS1 AM1p11 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 N/C + 2 N/O GS1 AN11 (5) GS1 AN22 (5)
Contacts with test facility (6)

50...400 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 N/C + 2 N/O GS1 ANT11 GS1 ANT22 0.100 0.200
Auxiliary blown fuse signalling contacts for use with NF C and DIN fuses (7)
Type of contact
532793
1st C/O
Switch rating A 50 100 and 125 160 250 and 400 630 1250
Fuse size 14 x 51 22 x 58 T0 T1 and T2 T3 T4
Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Reference GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 AF1 AF1 AF23 AF24 AF33 AF34 AF43 AF44 AF63 AF64 AF73 AF74 AF AF AFF AFF
GS1 AM1
2nd C/O
50...400 630...1250
Weight kg 0.030 0.030 0.040 0.050 0.050 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020
532794
GS1 ANp
(1) For use with front or side-mounted external operator. (2) For use only with front-mounted internal operator. (3) Except for switch-disconnector-fuses with operator mounted on left-hand side. (4) Reversible add-on attachments for converting an N/C contact to an N/O contact and vice versa. (5) For switch-disconnector-fuses with external operator mounted on left-hand side, add suffix G to the reference. Example: GS1 AN11G. (6) Provides Test function only with handles GS1 AHT ppp. (7) BS fuses are not available with striker.
Schemes : page 4/63
4/51
GS1 AH310...340
GS1 AH210...240
50...400A
GS1 AH01, AH02
630...1250A
GS1 AH250 GS1 AH260
GS1 AH030
(1) See page 4/56
4/52
References
Side-mounted operators
Side-mounted operators
Switch rating A 50 and 63 100...400 630...1250 Type of operator Colour of handle/front plate Reference Weight kg 0.050 0.090 0.300
Handles for internal operators mounted on right-hand side, padlockable

Lockable (1) in "O" position Black/ Black/ Black/ GS1 AH01 GS1 AH02 GS1 AH030
Handles for external operators mounted on right-hand side, padlockable, IP 65

32 50 and 63 100...400 630...1250 Black/Black Red/Yellow Lockable (2) in "O" position Black/Black Red/Yellow Lockable (2) in "O" position Black/Black Red/Yellow Lockable (1) or (3) in "O" position Black/Black Red/Yellow GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 AH101 AH102 AH210 AH220 AH230 AH240 AH250 AH260 0.160 0.160 0.320 0.320 0.350 0.350 0.600 0.600
Handles for external operators mounted on left-hand side, padlockable, IP 65 (4)

32 50 and 63 100...400 Lockable (2) in "O" position Lockable (2) in "O" position Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 AH311 AH321 AH310 AH320 AH330 AH340 0.160 0.160 0.320 0.320 0.350 0.350
(1) Lockable with device GS1 AX11 to be ordered separately. (2) Lockable with device GS1 AX31 to be ordered separately. (3) Lockable with device GS1 AX21 to be ordered separately. (4) For switch-disconnector-fuses with NF C and DIN fuses.
Schemes : page 4/63
4/53
32A GS1 AH103 GS1 AH101
50...400A
GS1 AH110...140
GS1 AH150...160
630...1250A
GS1 AH040
(1) See page 4/56
4/54
References
Front-mounted operators
Front-mounted operators
Switch rating A 32 630...1250 Type of operator Colour of handle/front plate Reference Weight kg 0.045 0.600
Handles for front-mounted internal operators, padlockable

Black/ Lockable (1) or (2) in "O" position Black/ GS1 AH103 GS1 AH040
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable, IP 65. Door interlock in I position (4)
32 50 and 63 100...400 630...1250 Lockable (3) in "O" position Lockable (3) in "O" position Lockable (1) in "O" position Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 AH101 AH102 AH110 AH120 AH130 AH140 AH150 AH160 0.160 0.160 0.320 0.320 0.350 0.350 0.700 0.700
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable, with test facility IP 65. Door interlock in I position (4)
50 and 63 100...400 Lockable (3) in "O" position Lockable (3) in "O" position Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 AHT110 AHT120 AHT130 AHT140 0.320 0.320 0.350 0.350
(1) Lockable with device GS1 AX11 to be ordered separately. (2) Lockable with device GS1 AX21 to be ordered separately. (3) Lockable with device GS1 AX31 to be ordered separately. (4) Door interlock can be overridden with a tool on ratings up to 400 A.
Schemes : page 4/63
4/55
References
Accessories
532797
Shaft extensions for external operators

Switch rating A 32 50400 630...1250 GS1 AXpp Operator Type length mm Side or front-mounted 200 Side-mounted 200 Front-mounted 320 Side-mounted 200 Front-mounted 200 Shaft cross section mm 5x5 10 x 10 10 x 10 15 x 15 15 x 15 Reference Weight kg 0.105 0.050 0.200 0.500 0.450
GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1
AE9 AE1 AE2 AE5 AE6
Kits for handle locking devices

Switch rating A 50...400 630...1250 Type of operator External Side or front-mounted Internal or external Side or front-mounted Internal Front-mounted Key description Ronis EL11AP Ronis 1104 Ronis EL11AP Reference GS1 AX31 GS1 AX11 GS1 AX21 Weight kg 0.400 0.020 0.200
Cage terminals for connection of bare cables (without lug)

Switch rating A 100...160 250 Number of poles 3 4 3 4 Reference GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 AW33 AW34 AW43 AW44 Weight kg 0.070 0.090 0.013 0.017
Schemes : page 4/63
4/56
Accessories
Terminal covers for upstream or downstream connector plates

Switch rating A 50 and 63 100...160 200400 630 Number of poles 3 or 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 Reference (1) GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 Weight kg 0.100 0.100 0.250 0.300 0.400 0.500
AP33 AP34 AP43 AP44 AP63 AP64
Terminal covers for upstream connector plates

Switch rating A 800 1250 Number of poles 3 4 3 4 Reference GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 AP73 AP74 AP83 AP84 Weight kg 0.400 0.500 0.300 0.400
Fuse cover locking devices (2)

Switch rating A 50 63 100...160 160 Fuse size 14 x 51 and A1 T00C and A2-A3 22 x 58, T00 and A4 T0 B1-B2 250 T1 B1...B3 400 T2 and B1...B4 Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 Reference (1) GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 Weight kg 0.010 0.010 0.050 0.050 0.150 0.180 0.060 0.060 0.180 0.220 0.180 0.220
AV1 AV2 AV33 AV34 AV43 AV44 AV53 AV54 AV63 AV64 AV73 AV74
(1) Fitted as standard on these switch-disconnector-fuses. (2) For switch-disconnector-fuses fitted with internal or external operators mounted on right-hand side.
Schemes : page 4/63
4/57
Dimensions
GS1 DD (32 A)
Front-mounted internal operator
98 96 44 19 6 37,5 15 35
fix. 79,5
45
65 84
98
21,5 21,5
5,2 17
GS1 DD (32 A)
Front-mounted external operator
14
Accessories
GS1 AM p11
46,5
105 mini 130 (1) 155 (2) 35
37,5
15
65
64
18
14
90 I
(1) With 1 or 2 GS1 AM1pp (2) With 3 or 4 GS1 AM1pp External RH side-mounted operator
GS1 AM1pp
I mini 36 46,5 19 6 90 65
O = 64 9 24 24 65
Door cut-out
For external front-mounted and LH side-mounted operator Fixing by 2 4 screws Fixing by M22 nut For external RH side-mounted operator Fixing by 2 4 screws Fixing by M22 nut
90 2 4,5 31 22,5 3
50
O 12,7
50
3
90
Schemes : page 4/63
4/58
12,7
I
2 4,5 31 22,5
GS1 F (50 A), G and GB (63 A)

Side-mounted internal operator
GS1 J or JB (100 A), K (125 A)

134 c 26 P P
106,5
(1)
18
36 36 38
120,5
144
106
144
127
24 31
a 114 141 129 161 129 161 c 87 87 116.5 116.5 92.5 92.5 G 27 54 32 64 32 64
J G a
J 29 29 34 34 34 34
J1 53 38 36 19
J1 58 58 63 63 63 63 P 27 27 32 32 32 32
31 173
GS1 F GS1 G GS1 GB
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
141
(2)
(1) Terminal cover (2) 3P: 148, 4P: 184
GS1 F (50 A), G and GB (63 A)

Side-mounted external operator
GS1 J or JB (100 A), K (125 A)

162
53
(1)
70
70,5
31
106
127
126,5
(1) GS1 F: min 60, max 68. GS1 G and GB: min 65, max 73. Without shaft extension
31
36
(1)
70
(1) Min 69, max 77, without shaft extension.
GS1 F (50 A), G and GB (63 A)

GS1 J or JB (100 A), K (125 A)

70
(1)
(2) 36,5
70
(1)
36
65,5 36,5
70,5
106
(1) GS1 F: min 94, max 165. GS1 G: min 124, max 165. GS1 GB: min 100, max 165. (2) GS1 F: 57.5 ; GS1 G and GB: 62.5.
(1) Min 114, max 165.
GS1
External front and side-mounted operator Door cut-out
50
50
126,5
Schemes : page 4/63
127
4/59
GS1 KK (125 A), L, LL, LB and LLB (160 A)

GS1 MMB (200 A), N or NB (250 A), PPB (315 A) and QQ (400 A)
173 c
c
(1)
53 P P
(1)
75
162
141
b1
53
19,5 31
a 190 240 148 184 190 240 c 136.5 136.5 126.5 126.5 123 123 G 50 100 36 72 50 100
G a
H 140 140 127 127 140 140
J1
31
J 50 50 38 38 50 50 J1 90 90 74 112 90 90 P 50 50 36 36 50 50
G a
J1
173
a 250 310 271 337 b 195 195 205 205 b1 166 166 174 174 c 146 146 149 149 G 60 120 60 132
GS1 L
3P 4P GS1 KK, LL 3P 4P GS1 LB, LLB 3P 4P (1) Terminal cover.
GS1 MMB, N, NB 3P 4P GS1 QQ, PPB 3P 4P (1) Terminal cover.
H 162 162 172 172
J 60 60 66 66
J1 130 130 139 139
P 60 60 66 66

GS1 L = 174 GS1 KK/LL = 141
126,5 GS1 KK/LL = 189 GS1 L = 229
31
(1)
70
GS1 N =185 GS1 QQ = 200
126,5
31
(1)
70
GS1 N = 251 GS1 QQ = 260

(1) GS1 KK or LL: min 69, max 77. GS1 L, LB, LLB, MB: min 83, max 91. Without shaft extension (1) Min 124, max 132. Without shaft extension.

70
(1)
(2)
36,5
70
(2)
(1)
36,5
126,5
(1) GS1 KK, LL: min 134, max 165. GS1 L: min 144, max 165. GS1 LB, LLB: min 130, max 165. (2) GS1 KK, L and LL: 66,5. GS1 LB, LLB: 80.5 . General : pages 4/42 and 4/43 Characteristics : pages 4/44 to 4/47
(1) GS1 MMB, N (3P): 90.5. GS1 MMB, N (4P): 114.5. GS1 PPB, QQ: 121. (2) Min 154, max 225. References : pages 4/48 to 4/57 Schemes : page 4/63
4/60
126,5
75
19,5
GS1 S (630 A) and GS1 TB (800 A)

Side-mounted internal operator Side-mounted external operator
a1 279,5 190 85 M J 50 250 76
(1)
250
7 72 268
a 421.5 501.5 421.5 501.5 a1 345.5 425.5 345.5 425.5 b 300 300 320 320 b1 85 85 65 65
b1 M
b 260
R 80 80 80 a
J 19.5 99.5 19.5 99.5
44,5
150
143 (2)
96
21
GS1 S GS1 TB
3P 4P 3P 4P
M 20 20 30 30
R 45.5 34.5 45.5 34.5
(1) Terminal cover. (2) Without shaft extension. Minimum length with shaft extension 143 + 27.
4
GS1 V (1250 A)
190 7
89,5 106 16
a1 G 250 74 76
(1)
183
9 187 330
a 522 641
72
363 250
43 120
120 a
120 62
143 (2)
96 21
GS1 V
3P 4P
a1 437 557
G 345 465
(1) Protective screen for connector plates. (2) Without shaft extension. Minimum length with shaft extension: 143 + 27.
GS1 S (630 A) and GS1 V (1250 A)

Side-mounted external operator Door cut-out
GS1 V (1250 A)
Connector plate
50
25
50
25 = =
(1)
(1) Upstream connector plate: 80, downstream connector plate: 65.
Schemes : page 4/63
4/61
GS1 S (630 A) and GS1 TB (800 A)

Front-mounted internal operator Front-mounted external operator
a1 J 268 250 38,5 76
(1)
85 M1
50
250
b1
7 72 348
a 470 550 470 550 a1 345.5 425.5 345.5 425.5 b 300 300 320 320
M1
21 96
341440 (2) 276 (3)
R 80 80 80 a R1
156
GS1 S
GS1 TB
3P 4P 3P 4P
b1 85 85 65 65
J 19.5 99.5 19.5 99.5
M 260 260 267 267
M1 20 20 26.5 26.5
R 45.5 34.5
R1 44.5 44.5
(1) Terminal cover (2) Without shaft extension. Minimum length with shaft extension: add 27 (3) Shortened shaft
GS1 V (1250 A)
Front-mounted internal operator Front-mounted external operator
330 106 7 16
a1 G 250 74 76 38,5
183
363
190
(1)
433
9 187 21 96 416481 (2)
72
250
43 120
120
120 a
150 62 181,5
GS1 V a a1 3P 561 437 4P 681 557 (1) Protective screen, front-mounted (fitted as standard) (2) Without shaft extension. Minimum length with shaft extension: add 27. G 345 465 Note : For switch-disconnector-fuses GS1 S (630 A) and GS1 V (1250 A) with external operator, see page 4/61 for the door cut-out and connector plate. General : pages 4/42 and 4/43 Characteristics : pages 4/44 to 4/47 References : pages 4/48 to 4/57 Schemes : page 4/63
4/62
Schemes
3-pole GS1
32 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
50 to 1250 A
1/L1 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 5/L3 5/L3 6/T3 6/T3 8/T3 7/L3
2/T1
4/T2
4-pole GS1
32 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 7/L3
6/T3
2/T1
1/L1
2/T1
50 to 1250 A
4/T2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Auxiliary contacts
GS1 AM110
3
8/T3
4
GS1 AM211
12 14 22 24 21
GS1 AM101
1
GS1 AM111
12 14
GS1 AF 1 C/O
2 4
1 N/C + 1 N/O
13 21
14
22
11
11
4/63
References
4 0
Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market conforming to UL and CSA standards, 30 to 800 A
All GS1 switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market are certified UL98 and CSA 22.2 N 4.
105847
Compact switch-disconnector-fuse bodies

Switch rating A 30 Fuse size Number of poles Reference Weight kg CC J 3 3 GS1 DDU3 GS1 DU3 0.510 0.610
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable, IP 65

GS1 DDU3 Switch rating A 30 Colour of handle/front plate Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow (1) (1) (2) (2) Reference Weight kg 0.160 0.160 0.320 0.320
GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1
AH101 AH102 AH110 AH120
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable, with TEST facility, IP 65
Switch rating A 30
Colour of handle/front plate Black/Black Red/Yellow (2) (2)
Reference
Weight kg 0.320 0.320
GS1 AHT110 GS1 AHT120
Shaft extensions for front-mounted external operators

Switch rating A 30 Length mm 320 400 320 400 Shaft cross section mm 5x5 5x5 5x5 5x5 Reference Weight kg 0.170 0.240 0.170 0.240
GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1
AE7 AE71 AE8 AE81
(1) For use in conjunction with shaft extension GS1 AE7 or GS1 AE71, to be ordered separately. (2) For use in conjunction with shaft extension GS1 AE8 or GS1 AE81, to be ordered separately.
4/64
4 0
Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market conforming to UL and CSA standards, 30 to 800 A
Switch-disconnector-fuse bodies
Switch rating A 30 60 100 200 400 Fuse size Number of poles Reference Weight kg CC J J J J J 3 3 3 3 3 3 GS1 EEU3 GS1 EU3 GS1 GU3 GS1 JU3 GS1 MU3 GS1 QU3 1.200 2.000 1.400 2.000 3.800 4.500
For front-mounted internal and external operators

600 800 J L 3 3 GS1 SU3 GS1 TU3 16.000 16.000
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable, IP 65

Switch rating A 3060 100400 600 and 800 Colour of handle/front plate Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow Reference Weight kg 0.320 0.320 0.350 0.350 0.700 0.700
GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1
AH110 AH120 AH130 AH140 AH150 AH160
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable, with TEST facility, IP 65

Switch rating A 3060 100400 600 and 800 Colour of handle/front plate Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow Black/Black Red/Yellow Reference Weight kg 0.320 0.320 0.350 0.350 0.700 0.700
GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1
AHT110 AHT120 AHT130 AHT140 AHT150 AHT160
Shaft extensions for front-mounted external operators

Switch rating A 30400 600 and 800 Length mm 320 400 200 400 Shaft cross section mm 10 x 10 10 x 10 15 x 15 15 x 15 Reference Weight kg 0.200 0.250 0.450 0.900
GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1
AE2 AE21 AE6 AE61
4/65
References
Cartridge fuses type aM
For protection of equipment with current peaks
Fuse type
Maximum rated voltage V a 400
Rating
Sold in lots of
812889
Cylindrical 8.5 x 31.5 DF2 CAppp
A 1 2 4 6 8 10 0.16 0.25 0.50 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 0.25 0.50 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 4 6 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Fuses without striker Unit Weight reference kg DF2 BA0100 0.010 DF2 BA0200 0.010 DF2 BA0400 0.010 DF2 BA0600 0.010 DF2 BA0800 0.010 DF2 BA1000 0.010 DF2 CA001 DF2 CA002 DF2 CA005 DF2 CA01 DF2 CA02 DF2 CA04 DF2 CA06 DF2 CA08 DF2 CA10 DF2 CA12 DF2 CA16 DF2 CA20 DF2 CA25 DF2 CA32 DF2 EA002 DF2 EA005 DF2 EA01 DF2 EA02 DF2 EA04 DF2 EA06 DF2 EA08 DF2 EA10 DF2 EA12 DF2 EA16 DF2 EA20 DF2 EA25 DF2 EA32 DF2 EA40 DF2 EA50 DF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 FA04 FA06 FA08 FA10 FA16 FA20 FA25 FA32 FA40 FA50 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Fuses with striker Unit Weight reference kg DF3 EA02 DF3 EA04 DF3 EA06 DF3 EA08 DF3 EA10 DF3 EA12 DF3 EA16 DF3 EA20 DF3 EA25 DF3 EA32 DF3 EA40 DF3 EA50 DF3 DF3 DF3 DF3 DF3 DF3 DF3 DF3 DF3 DF3 FA04 FA06 FA08 FA10 FA16 FA20 FA25 FA32 FA40 FA50 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Cylindrical 10 x 38
a 500
812888
DF2 EA ppp
4
Cylindrical 14 x 51
812890
a 400
a 690
a 500 DF3 EA pp
812887
a 400 Cylindrical 22 x 58 a 690
DF2 FApp
812891
a 500
DF2 FA63 DF2 FA80 DF2 FA100 DF2 FA125
DF3 FA63 DF3 FA80 DF3 FA100 DF3 FA125
DF3 FApp
a 400
4/66
Cartridge fuses type aM
For protection of equipment with current peaks
Fuse type
Rating
Sold in lots of
533330
Blade size 00
DF2 GApppp
A 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 160 200 250 315 250 315 400 500 400 500 630 630 800 1000 1250
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1
Fuses without striker Unit Weight reference kg DF2 FGA16 0.160 DF2 FGA20 0.160 DF2 FGA25 0.160 DF2 FGA32 0.160 DF2 FGA40 0.160 DF2 FGA50 0.160 DF2 FGA63 0.160 DF2 FGA80 0.160 DF2 FGA100 0.160 DF2 FGA125 DF2 GA1051 DF2 GA1061 DF2 GA1081 DF2 GA1101 DF2 GA1121 DF2 GA1161 DF2 GA1201 DF2 HA1161 DF2 HA1201 DF2 HA1251 DF2 HA1311 DF2 JA1251 DF2 JA1311 DF2 JA1401 DF2 JA1501 DF2 KA1401 DF2 KA1501 DF2 KA1631 DF2 LA1631 DF2 LA1801 DF2 LA1101 DF2 LA1251 0.160 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.850 0.850 0.850 1.900 1.900 1.900 1.900
Fuses with striker Unit Weight reference kg DF4 GA1121 DF4 GA1161 DF4 GA1201 DF4 HA1201 DF4 HA1251 DF4 HA1311 DF4 JA1311 DF4 JA1401 DF4 JA1501 DF4 KA1501 DF4 KA1631 DF4 LA1631 DF4 LA1801 DF4 LA1101 DF4 LA1251 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.850 0.850 1.900 1.900 1.900 1.900
a 400 Blade size 0 a 500
533331
DF4 GApppp
Blade size 1
a 500
Blade size 2
a 500
Blade size 3
533332
a 500
Blade size 4
a 500
DF2 JApppp
a 400
4/67
References
Cartridge fuses type gG
For protection of circuits without significant current peaks
Fuse type
Rating
Sold in lots of
812897
Cylindrical 8.5 x 31.5 DF2 CNpp
812896
A 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 10 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Fuses without striker Unit Weight reference kg DF2 BN0100 0.010 DF2 BN0200 0.010 DF2 BN0400 0.010 DF2 BN0600 0.010 DF2 BN0800 0.010 DF2 BN1000 0.010 DF2 BN1200 0.010 DF2 BN1600 0.010 DF2 BN2000 0.010 DF2 CN02 DF2 CN04 DF2 CN06 DF2 CN08 DF2 CN10 DF2 CN12 DF2 CN16 DF2 CN20 DF2 CN25 DF2 CN32 DF2 EN04 DF2 EN06 DF2 EN10 DF2 EN16 DF2 EN20 DF2 EN25 DF2 EN32 DF2 EN40 DF2 EN50 DF2 FN10 DF2 FN20 DF2 FN25 DF2 FN32 DF2 FN40 DF2 FN50 DF2 FN63 DF2 FN80 DF2 FN100 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Fuses with striker Unit Weight reference kg DF3 EN04 DF3 EN06 DF3 EN10 DF3 EN16 DF3 EN20 DF3 EN25 DF3 EN32 DF3 EN40 DF3 FN10 DF3 FN20 DF3 FN25 DF3 FN32 DF3 FN40 DF3 FN50 DF3 FN63 DF3 FN80 DF3 FN100 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
DF2 ENpp
Cylindrical 10 x 38
a 500
812898
a 400 DF3 ENpp Cylindrical 14 x 51 a 500
812895
DF2 FNpp Cylindrical 22 x 58 a 690
812899
a 500 DF3 FNpp
4/68
Cartridge fuses type gG
For protection of circuits without significant current peaks
Fuse type
Rating
Sold in lots of
533333
Blade size 00
DF2 GNpppp
A 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
Fuses without striker Unit Weight reference kg DF2 FGN10 0.160 DF2 FGN16 0.160 DF2 FGN20 0.160 DF2 FGN25 0.160 DF2 FGN32 0.160 DF2 FGN40 0.160 DF2 FGN50 0.160 DF2 FGN63 0.160 DF2 FGN80 0.160 DF2 FGN100 0.160 DF2 FGN125 0.160 DF2 FGN160 0.160 DF2 GN1051 DF2 GN1061 DF2 GN1081 DF2 GN1101 DF2 GN1121 DF2 GN1161 DF2 HN1161 DF2 HN1201 DF2 HN1251 DF2 JN1251 DF2 JN1311 DF2 JN1401 DF2 KN1501 DF2 KN1631 DF2 LN1801 DF2 LN1101 DF2 LN1251 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.850 0.850 1.900 1.900 1.900
Fuses with striker Unit Weight reference kg DF4 GN1121 DF4 GN1161 DF4 HN1201 DF4 HN1251 DF4 JN1311 DF4 JN1401 DF4 KN1501 DF4 KN1631 DF4 LN1801 DF4 LN1101 DF4 LN1251 0.230 0.230 0.400 0.400 0.560 0.560 0.850 0.850 1.900 1.900 1.900
533334
Blade size 0
a 500
DF4 GNpppp Blade size 1 a 500
Blade size 2
533335
a500
Blade size 3 Blade size 4 DF2 JNpppp
a 500
a 500
4/69
Contents
5 - Contactors
Selection guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 5/2 b General, selection of TeSys contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/156
TeSys k contactors and reversing contactors

b Contactors v 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4 . . . . . . . . page 5/10 v 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/11 v 20 A in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/12 b reversing contactors v 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4 . . . . . . . . page 5/14 v 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/15 v 20 A in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/16 b Auxiliary contact blocks, suppressor modules and accessories . . . . . . . page 5/19
Mini-contactors types LC1 SK and LP1 SK

b For motor in categories AC-3 and AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/30 b Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks and coil suppressor modules . . page 5/31
Mini-contactors type LC1 SKGC

b For use in modular panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/38
b Suppressor modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/39
TeSys d contactors and reversing contactors

Selection guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 5/42 b Contactors for motor control v Up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/58 v Up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/59 v From 25 to 200 A, in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/60 b Reversing contactors for motor control v Up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/62 v Up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/63 v From 20 to 200 A, in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/64 b Component parts for assembling reversing contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/66 b Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks and suppressor modules . . . . . . page 5/69 b Coils for TeSys d contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/76
TeSys contactors for switching 3-phase capacitor banks

b Contactors used for power factor correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/90
TeSys LCp F contactors and reversing contactors

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 5/92 b Contactors v 115 to 800 A, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/102 v 200 to 1600 A, in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/103
5/0
b Reversing contactors v 115 to 265 A in category AC-3, costumer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/104 v 200 to 350 A in category AC-1, customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/105 v Components for assembling reversing contactors . . . . . pages 5/106 and 5/116 v Instantaneous contact blocks and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/111 b Coils for contactors TeSys LCp F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/118
High power changeover contactor pairs for distribution

b For customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/138
Capacitive delayed opening devices

b For contactors TeSys LC1 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/142 b For contactors TeSys LC1 F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/143
TeSys LC1 B contactors

b 750 to 1800 A, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/146 b 800 to 2750 A in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 5/146 and 5/147 b Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/148 b Replacement coils and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/150
Contactors for the North American market

b 20 to 200 A, conforming to standards UL and CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/192 b 200 to 1350 A, conforming to standards UL and CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/193
Variable composition standard and high performance contactors

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/194 b Type CV1 B from 80 to 1000 A and CV3 B from 80 to 500 A . . . . . . . page 5/196
3-pole vacuum contactors and reversing contactors

b Types LC1 V and CV2 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/200
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 F and CR1 B

b General and selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/208 b Contactors and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/218 b Components for assembling reversing contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/220 b Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/222 b Accessories and replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/226
Modular equipment
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/236 b Standard contactors, type GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/238 b Impulse relays, type GF 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/250 b Dual tariff contactors, type GY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/256
5/1
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
Applications
Equipment based on standard contactors
Equipment requiring low consumption contactors which can be switched directly from solid state outputs
Rated operational current
AC-3 AC-1
6A 12 A
6...16 A 20 A
9150 A 25200 A
115800 A
7501800 A
6...12 A 20 A
925 A 2040 A
2001600 A 8002750 A
Rated operational voltage
690 V
690 V
690 V
1000 V
1000 V
690 V
690 V
Number of poles
2 or 3
3 or 4
3 or 4
2, 3 or 4
14
3 or 4
Contactor type references
LC1 SK LP1 SK
LC1 K LC7 K LP1 K
LC1 D
LC1 F
LC1 B
LP4 K
LC1 D
Pages
5/4 and 5/5
5/42 and 5/43
5/92 and 5/93
5/11
5/44 and 5/45
5/2
Equipment requiring magnetic latching contactors
Motors, resistive circuits, rotor short-circuiting devices, electro lifting magnets, hoisting, mines, c motors, high operating rates. Variable composition bar mounted contactors.
Induction heating, heating of metal or of a metal part in a channel or crucible furnace by induction of a.c. currents. Contactors for induction heating applications
Applications conforming to NATO specifications and references. Shockproof contactors
Protection of reversing variable speed controllers for d.c. motors. Fast acting contactors.
1501800 A 2502750 A
80...1800 A 802750 A
8016 300 A
12630 A 25850 A
1000 V
a 1000 V c 440 or 1500 V 16
3000 V
690 V or 1000 V
a 1000 V c 1050 V 2 or 4
14
18
3 or 4
CR1 F CR1 B
CVp
CEp CSp CG p
LC1 DpG LP1 DpG LC1 FGppp
CR3 pB
5/218 to 5/227
5/194 and 5/195
Please consult your Regional Sales Office
5/3
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
From 6 to 16 A
Applications
Simple automation systems
Ie max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) Ie AC-1 ( y 40 C)
6A 12 A
6A
690 V
Number of poles
2 or 3
Rated operational power in category AC-3
220/240 V 380/400 V 415/440 V 500 V 660/690 V
1.1 kW 2.2 kW 2.2 kW
1.5 kW 2.2 kW 2.2/3 kW 3 kW 3 kW
5
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks
1000 V
Front Side Front time delay Front dust and damp protected
Up to 2 N/C or N/O
Up to 4 N/C or N/O 1 N/C
Associated manual-auto thermal overload relays
Class 10 A Class 20 A
0.1116 A
Suppressor modules
Varistor or diode
Varistor, diode + Zener diode or RC circuit
a c
LC1 SK LP1 SK
LC1 or LC7 K06 LP1 K06
Reversing contactor with mechanical interlock type references
a c
Pages
Contactors Reversing contactors
5/30 and 5/31
5/10 to 5/13 5/14 to 5/17
5/4
9A 20 A
12 A
16 A
3 or 4
2.2 kW 4 kW 4 kW 4 kW 4 kW
3 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW 4 kW 4 kW
3 kW 7.5 kW 7.5 kW 5.5 kW 4 kW
LC1 K16
LC2 K16
5/5
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Environment characteristics
Conforming to standards Product certifications Operating positions LCp and LPp K06 to K12 IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424 UL, CSA Vertical axis Horizontal axis
90
90
180
Without derating Connection Screw clamp terminals Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.34 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.75 2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35 4 mm x 35 microns N.m 0.81.3
90
Without derating Max. 2x4 2x4
Spring terminals
Faston connectors
Solid conductor Flexible conductor without cable end Flexible conductor with cable end Solid conductor Flexible conductor without cable end Clip
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm
Possible positions for LCp K only. Contactor pull-in voltage: 0.85 Uc Max. to IEC 60947 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
90
1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5
Solder pins for With locating device between printed circuit board power and control circuits Tightening torque Philips head n 2 and 6 Terminal referencing Conforming to standards EN 50005 and EN 50012 Conforming to IEC 60947 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C Conforming to BS 5424, NF C 20-040 Conforming to CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508 Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Vibration resistance 5 ... 300 Hz Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60068 (DIN 50016) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Without derating Contactor open Contactor closed Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to NF F 16-101 and 16-102 Contactor open Contactor closed Safe separation of circuits Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 60536
Up to 5 contacts, depending on model V V V V kV 690 750 690 600 8 TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct finger contact C C m - 50+ 80 - 25+ 50 2000 2 gn 4 gn Self-extinguishing materials V1 Conforming to requirement 2 On X axis: 6 gn On Y and Z axes: 10 gn On X axis: 10 gn On Y and Z axes: 15 gn SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms)
5/6
TeSys contactors
Type LCp or LPp Conventional thermal For ambient temperature current (Ith) y 50 C Rated operational frequency Frequency limits of the operational current Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated making capacity I rms conforming to NF C 63 110 and IEC 60947 Rated breaking capacity I rms conforming 220/230 V to NF C 63 110 380/400 V and IEC 60947 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V Permissible short time rating In free air for a 1s time t from cold 5 s state ( y 50 C) 10 s 30 s 1 min 3 min u 15 min gG fuse U y 440 V (aM fuse, see page 22009/2) At Ith and 50 Hz Maximum rated operational current for a temperature y 50 C Maximum rated operational current for a temperature y 70 C Rated operational current limits in relation to the on-load factor and operating frequency A Hz Hz V A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A m A A K06 20 50/60 Up to 400 690 110 110 110 110 110 80 70 90 85 80 60 45 40 20 25 3 20 16 for Ue only On-load factor 300 operating cycles/hour 120 operating cycles/hour 30 operating cycles/hour 90 % 13 15 19 60 % 15 18 20 30 % 18 19 20 K09 K12 K16
110 110 110 110 110 80 70 90 85 80 60 45 40 20
144 110 80 70 115 105 100 75 55 50 25
160 110 80 70 115 105 100 75 55 50 25
Short-circuit protection Average impedance per pole Use in category AC-1 resistive circuits, heating, lighting (Ue y 440 V)
A A A
Increase in rated operational current by paralleling of poles
Apply the following coefficients to the above currents; these coefficients take into account an often unbalanced distribution of current between the poles 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.60 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.80 kW kW kW kW kW kW kW 0.37 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 3 3 Op. cycles/h Power 0.55 1.1 2.2 4 4 4 4 3 5.5 5.5/4 (480) 4 4 600 100 % 4 7.5 5.5/4 (480) 4 4 900 75 % 1200 50 %
Use in category AC-3 squirrel cage motors
Operational power according to the voltage. Voltage 50 or 60 Hz
115 V single-ph. 220 V single-ph. 220/230 V 3-ph. 380/415 V 3-ph. 440/480 V 3-ph. 500/600 V 3-ph. 660/690 V 3-ph.
Maximum operating rate (in operating cycles/hour in relation to % of rated power)
5/7
TeSys contactors

Type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits (y 50 C) single voltage coil Operation Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Inrush Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil energisation and: - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and: - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts Maximum immunity to microbreaks Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil In millions of operating cycles c coil Wide range coil, Low consumption W V LC1 LC2 a 12690 (1) 0.81.15 Uc (2) u 0.20 Uc 30 VA 4.5 VA 1.3 LC7 LC8 a 24240 (1) 0.851.1 Uc u 0.10 Uc 3 VA 3 VA 3 LP1 LP2 c 12250 (1) 0.81.15 Uc u 0.10 Uc 3W 3W 3 LP4 LP5 c 12120 0.71.30 Uc u 0.10 Uc 1.8 W 1.8 W 1.8
ms ms ms ms ms
515 1020 1020 1525 2 3600 10
2535 3040 30 40 2 3600 10
2535 3040 10 15 2 3600 10
2535 3040 1020 1525 2 3600 30
(1) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4 KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4 KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/20. (2) LC1 K16: 0.851.15 Uc.
5/8
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact characteristics of contactors and instantaneous contact blocks

Number of auxiliary contacts On LCp K or LP p K 3-pole On LA1 K Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to BS 5424 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to VDE 0110 group C Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 For ambient temperature y 50 C V V V V V A Hz U min (DIN 19 240) I min Conforming to IEC 60947 and VDE 0660, gG fuse Conforming to I rms IEC 60947 Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms V mA A A A A A M 1 2 or 4 690 690 690 750 600 10 Up to 400 17 5 10 110 80 90 110 > 10
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating
Insulation resistance Non-overlap distance
LA1 K: linked contacts mm 0.5 (see schemes pages 5/23 and 5/25) conforming to INRS, BIA and CNA specifications Operational power of contacts a.c. supply, category AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13 conforming to IEC 60947 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant power broken (cos 0.4). increasing with the load. 110/ 127 240 86 36 5000 220/ 380/ 600/ 230 400 440 690 440 800 880 1200 158 288 317 500 66 120 132 200 10 000 14 000 13 000 9000
1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity
V VA VA VA VA
24 48 17 7 1000
48 96 34 14 2050
V W W W W
24 120 55 15 720
48 80 38 11 600
110 60 30 9 400
220 52 28 8 300
440 51 26 7 230
600 50 25 6 200
Power broken in VA
Power broken in W
1 Breaking limit of contacts valid 16 000 for: 10 000 - maximum of 50 operating 8000 cycles at 10 s intervals 6000 5000 (power broken = making 4000 current x cos 0.7). 3000 2 Electrical durability of contacts 2000 for: - 1 million operating cycles (2a) 1000 - 3 million operating cycles (2b) 800 - 10 million operating cycles (2c). 600 500 3 Breaking limit of contacts valid 400 300 for: 200 - maximum of 20 operating cycles at 10 s intervals with current 100 passing for 0.5 s per operating 80 cycle. 60 4 Thermal limit. 40
24 48
1000 700
1
250
500
3
300 200 100 80 60 50 40 30 20
200 140 100
2a 2b
2a
50
2c 2b 2c
20 110 120 220 380 500 440 690 V 12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V 10 8 6
5/9
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors for motor control, 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4
Control circuit: a.c.
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/160 to 5/163 and 5/166 to 5/169. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/18 to 5/21.
106151_1
3-pole contactors for standard applications

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 230 V LC1 K0910pp kW 1.5
106153_1
380 V 415 V kW 2.2 4 5.5 7.5
440/500 V 660/690 V kW 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440)
Rated operational current in category AC-3 440 V up to A 6 9 12 16
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) (2)
Weight
kg 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 K0610pp K0601pp K0910pp K0901pp K1210pp K1201pp K1610pp K1601pp 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180
Screw clamp connections
2.2 3 4
Spring terminal connections

For 6 to 12 A ratings only, in the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 K0610pp becomes LC1 K06103pp. LC1 K09103pp
Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 K0610pp becomes LC1 K06107pp.
106158_1
Solder pins for printed circuit boards

3-pole silent contactors

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc. Coil with rectifier incorporated, suppressor fitted as standard.

LC1 K09107pp 1.5 2.2
106152_1
2.2 4 5.5
3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440)
6 9 12
1 1 1
1 1 1
LC7 LC7 LC7 LC7 LC7 LC7
K0610pp K0601pp K0910pp K0901pp K1210pp K1201pp
0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC7 K0610pp becomes LC7 K06107pp.

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LC7 K0610pp becomes LC7 K06105pp. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): a.c. supply Contactors LC1 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240 50/60 Hz J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690 50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72. Contactors LC7 K (0.851.1 Uc) Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4 KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4 KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/20.
LC1 K09105 pp
106162_1
LC7 K0910pp
Selection : pages 5/160 and 5/169
Schemes : page 5/23
5/10
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4
Control circuit: d.c. or low consumption
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/160 to 5/163 and 5/166 to 5/169. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/18 to 5/21.
106155_1
3-pole contactors, d.c. supply

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 230 V kW 1.5
106157_1
LP1 K0910pp
380 V 415 V kW 2.2 4 5.5
440/500 V 660/690 V kW 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440)
Rated operational current in category AC-3 440 V up to A 6 9 12
Weight
kg 1 1 1 1 1 1 LP1 LP1 LP1 LP1 LP1 LP1 K0610 pp K0601 pp K0910 pp K0901 pp K1210 pp K1201 pp 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225
2.2 3

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code. Example: LP1 K0610pp becomes LP1 K06103pp.

LP1 K09103pp In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LP1 K0610pp becomes LP1 K06107pp.

106156_1
3-pole low consumption contactors

Compatible with programmable controller outputs. LED indicator incorporated (except models LP4 KppppFW3 and LP4 KppppGW3). Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor fitted as standard, consumption 1.8 W.

1.5 LP1 K09107pp 2.2 3 4 5.5 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 9 12 2.2 3 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 LP4 LP4 LP4 LP4 LP4 LP4 K0610 pp K0601 pp K0910 pp K0901 pp K1210 pp K1201 pp 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235
106159_1


In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LP4 K0610pp becomes LP4 K06107pp. LP1 K09105pp

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LP4 K0610pp becomes LP4 K06105pp. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): d.c. supply (contactors LP1 K: 0.8 1.15 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3
106160_1
230 240 250 MPD MUD UD
Low consumption (contactors LP4 K: 0.7 130 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3 (2) For LP1 K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop. LP4 K0910pp
Schemes : page 5/23
5/11
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/164 and 5/161. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/18 to 5/21.
106150_1
3 or 4-pole contactors for standard applications (1)

Non-inductive loads Category AC-1 Maximum current at y 50 C A Number of poles Instantaneous Basic reference, auxiliary contacts to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) Weight
kg 3 3 4 2 1 1 LC1 or LC1 LC1 or LC1 LC1 or LC1 LC1 K0910pp K1210pp K0901pp K1201pp K09004pp K12004pp K09008pp 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180

LC1 K09004pp 20
106153_1


In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 K0910pp becomes LC1 K09107pp. LC1 K09103pp

5
106158_1
3 or 4-pole silent contactors (1)


20 3 3 4 LC1 K09107pp 2 2 1 1 LC7 or LC7 LC7 or LC7 LC7 or LC7 LC7 K0910pp K1210pp K0901pp K1201pp K09004pp K12004pp K09008pp 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225

106163_1

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LC7 K0910pp becomes LC7 K09105pp. (1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/164. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): a.c. supply Contactors LC1 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240 50/60 Hz J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690 50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72. Contactors LC7 K (0.81.1 Uc) Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (3) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4 KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4 KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/20.
LC1 K09004pp
Schemes : page 5/23
5/12
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/164 and 5/165. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/18 to 5/21.
106154_1
3 and 4-pole contactors, d.c. supply (1)

Non-inductive loads Category AC-1 Maximum current at y 50 C A Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) Weight
kg 3 3 4 2 1 1 LP1 or LP1 LP1 or LP1 LP1 or LP1 LP1 K0910pp K1210pp K0901pp K1201pp K09004pp K12004pp K09008pp 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225

20 LC1 K09004 pp
106157_1


In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LP1 K0910pp becomes LP1 K09107pp. LC1 K09103 pp

3 or 4-pole low consumption contactors (1)

106156_1

20 3 3 LC1 K09105pp 4 2 2 1 1 LP4 or LP4 LP4 or LP4 LP4 or LP4 LP4 K0910ppp K1210ppp K0901ppp K1201ppp K09004ppp K12004ppp K09008ppp 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235

106151_1


In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LP4 K0910pp becomes LP4 K09105pp. (1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/164. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): d.c. supply (contactors LP1 K: 0.8 1.15 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD MPD MUD UD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3. Low consumption (contactors LP4 K: 0.7 130 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3 (3) For LP1 K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
LC1 K09004pp
Schemes : page 5/23
5/13
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/160 to 5/163 and 5/166 to 5/169. Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/18 to 5/21.
3-pole reversing contactors for standard applications

565010
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 230 V kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 380 V 415 V kW 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 440/500 V 660/690 V kW 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440)
Rated operational current in category AC-3 440V up to A 6 9 12 16
Weight
kg 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC2 K0610pp LC2 K0601pp LC2 K0910pp LC2 K0901pp LC2 K1210pp LC2 K1201pp LC2 K1610pp LC2 K1601pp 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390

LC2 K0910pp
565011

For 6 to 12 A ratings only, in the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code. Example: LC2 K0610pp becomes LC2 K06103pp.

LC2 K09105pp

3-pole silent reversing contactors


1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 6 9 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC8 K0610pp LC8 K0601pp LC8 K0910pp LC8 K0901pp LC8 K1210pp LC8 K1201pp 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480


In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LC8 K0610pp becomes LC8 K06105pp. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): a.c. supply Reversing contactors LC2 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240 50/60 Hz J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690 50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 Reversing contactors LC8 K (0.81.1 Uc) Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4 KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4 KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/20.
Schemes : page 5/25
5/14
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/160 to 5/163 and 5/166 to 5/169. Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/18 to 5/21.
3-pole reversing contactors, d.c. supply

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 230 V kW 1.5 2.2 3 380 V 415 V kW 2.2 4 5.5 440/500 V 660/690 V kW 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) Rated operational current in category AC-3 440V up to A 6 9 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 LP2 LP2 LP2 LP2 LP2 LP2 K0610 pp K0601 pp K0910 pp K0901 pp K1210 pp K1201 pp Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) (2) Weight
kg 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480



3-pole low consumption reversing contactors

Compatible with programmable controller outputs. LED indicator incorporated (except models LP5-K ppppFW3 and LP5-KppppGW3). Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor fitted as standard, consumption 1.8 W.

1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 6 9 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 K0610 pp K0601 pp K0910 pp K0901 pp K1210 pp K1201 pp 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490



In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LP5 K0610pp becomes LP5 K06105pp. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): d.c. supply Reversing contactors LP2 K (0.81.15 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3 .
230 240 250 MPD MUD UD
Low consumption Reversing contactors LP5 K (0.71.30 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3 (2) For LP2 K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop. Selection : pages 5/160 to 5/169 Characteristics : pages 5/6 to 5/9 Dimensions : page 5/24 Schemes : page 5/25
5/15
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A
Warning: reversing contactors LC2 K0910pp and LC2 K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard. Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/164 and 5/165. Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/18 to 5/21.
565012
3 or 4-pole reversing contactors for standard applications (1)

Non-inductive loads Category AC-1 Maximum current at y 50 C LC2 K0910pp A kg 3 3 4
565013
Number of poles
Weight

20 1 or 1 or or LC2 K0910pp LC2 K1210pp LC2 K0901pp LC2 K1201pp LC2 K09004 pp LC2 K12004 pp 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.380 0.380


In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC2 K0910pp becomes LC2 K09107pp. LC2 K09105pp
3 or 4-pole silent reversing contactors (1)


565014
20
3 3 4
or 1 or or
LC8 K0910pp LC8 K1210pp LC8 K0901pp LC8 K1201pp LC8 K09004 pp LC8 K12004 pp
0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.470 0.470

LC2 K09004pp In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC8 K0910pp becomes LC8 K09107pp.

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LC8 K0910pp becomes LC8 K09105pp. (1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/164. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): a.c. supply Reversing contactors LC2 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240 50/60 Hz J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690 50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72. Reversing contactors LC8 K (0.81.1 Uc) Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (3) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4 KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4 KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/20.
Schemes : page 5/25
5/16
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A
Warning: reversing contactors LP2 K0910pp and LP2 K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard. Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/164 and 5/165. Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/18 to 5/21.
3 or 4-pole reversing contactors, d.c. supply (1)

Non-inductive loads Category AC-1 Maximum current at y 50 C Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) Weight
kg 3 3 4 1 or 1 or or LP2 LP2 LP2 LP2 LP2 LP2 K0910pp K1210pp K0901pp K1201pp K09004pp K12004pp 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480

20



3 or 4-pole low consumption reversing contactors (1)


20 3 3 4 1 or 1 or or LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 K0910ppp K1210ppp K0901ppp K1201ppp K09004ppp K12004ppp 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490



In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LP5 K0910pp becomes LP5 K09105pp. (1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/164. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): d.c. supply (reversing contactors LP2 K: 0.81.15 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD MPD MUD UD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3. Low consumption (reversing contactors LP5 K: 0.7 130 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3 (3) For LP2 K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
Schemes : page 5/25
5/17
Presentation
TeSys contactors
LC1, LC7, LP1 K
LP4
LC1, LC7, LP1 K
LP4
LC1, LP1 K LP4
LC1, LC7, LP1 K
5/18
References
TeSys contactors
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

Recommended for standard applications. Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
Connection For use on contactors Composition Reference Weight
kg Screw clamp terminals All products with screw clamp terminals 2 1 All products with screw clamp terminals 4 except low consumption 3 2 1 All products with spring terminals 2 1 All products with spring terminals 4 except low consumption 3 2 1 All products with Faston connectors 2 1 All products with Faston connectors 4 except low consumption 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 LA1 KN20 LA1 KN02 LA1 KN11 LA1 KN40 LA1 KN31 LA1 KN22 LA1 KN13 LA1 KN04 LA1 KN203 LA1 KN023 LA1 KN113 LA1 KN403 LA1 KN313 LA1 KN223 LA1 KN133 LA1 KN043 LA1 KN207 LA1 KN027 LA1 KN117 LA1 KN407 LA1 KN317 LA1 KN227 LA1 KN137 LA1 KN047 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Spring terminals
With terminal referencing to standard EN 50012. Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
Screw clamp terminals with referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 All 3-pole + N/O products with screw clamp terminals except LP4 and LP5 K12 All 3-pole + N/O products with screw clamp terminals except LP4 or LP5 K06, K09 and K12 All 4-pole products with screw clamp terminals except LP4 or LP5 K12 All 4-pole products with screw clamp terminals except LP4 or LP5 K09 and K12 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 LA1 KN02M LA1 KN11M LA1 KN31M LA1 KN22M LA1 KN13M LA1 KN11P 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
LA1 KN22P
0.045
Electronic time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Relay output with common point changeover contact, a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum. Control voltage 0.851.1 Uc. Maximum switching capacity 250 VA or 150 W. Operating temperature -10+ 60 C. Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period, 0.5 s after the time delay period.
Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor

Voltage Type Timing range Composition Reference Weight
V a or c 2448 a 110240
s On-delay 130 On-delay 130
1 1
LA2 KT2E LA2 KT2U
kg 0.040 0.040
5/19
References
TeSys contactors
Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator
References
565018
Mounting and connection
Type
For voltages
Sold in lots of 5
Unit reference LA4 KE1B
Weight kg 0.010
Clip-on fixing on the front Varistor (1) of contactors LC1 and LP1, with locating device. No tools required.
a and c 1224 V
a and c 3248 V
LA4 KE1E
0.010
a and c 50129 V
LA4 KE1FC
0.010
a and c 130250 V 5
LA4 KE1UG
0.010
LA4 Kppp
Diode + Zener diode (2) c 1224 V
LA4 KC1B
0.010
c 3248 V
LA4 KC1E
0.010
RC (3)
a 110250 V
LA4 KA1U
0.010
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Polarised component. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (3) Protection by limiting the transient voltage to 3 Uc max. and limitation of the oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
5/20
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories
565019
Mounting and marking accessories

Description Application Sold in lots of Clip-on 1 Unit reference LA9 D973 Weight kg 0.025
Mounting plates (1)
For fixing on 1 4 rail
For fixing on 2 4 rails
110/120 mm fixing centres Onto front of contactor
10
DX1 AP25
0.065
Marker holder
Clip-on
100
LA9 D90
0.001
Clip-in markers
4 maximum per contactor
Strips of 10 identical numbers 09 Strips of 10 identical letters AZ
25
AB1 Pp (2)
0.002
25
AB1 Gp (2)
0.002
DX1 AP25
565020
Description Application Sold in lots of With screw clamps 4 Unit preference LA9 E01 Weight kg 0.010
Paralleling links
For 2 poles
For 4 poles
With screw clamps
LA9 E02
0.015
Set of 6 power connections
For 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
For contactors with screw clamp terminals
100
LA9 K0969
0.010
5
100 LA9 K0970 0.010
Set of 4 power connections LA9 E01
For contactors with screw clamp terminals
(1) Order 1 mounting plate for fixing a contactor and 2 mounting plates for fixing a reversing contactor. (2) Complete the reference by replacing the dot with the required character.
5/21
TeSys contactors
5
TeSys k contactors
Contactors
LC1 K, LC7 K, LP1 K, LP4 K On panel On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
LA1 K
=
4x4
58
50
58
35
57
35 45
57
45
LA9 D973 On one asymmetrical rail DZ5 MB with clip-on mounting plates
DX1 AP25
DZ5 ME5 5
120
57
21
35 45
57
On printed circuit board
27
45
8,65
= = =
A1
58
50
10x1,6
45
A2
Electronic time delay contact blocks

LA2 KT On contactor
53
LA2 KT
38
38 38 57
Suppressor modules
LA4 Kp On contactor LC1 K or LP1 K
25
27
22
6 22 57
Schemes : page 5/23
5/22
58
58
110
50
Schemes
TeSys contactors
TeSys k reversing contactors
3-pole contactors
3 P + N/O
3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 7/L4
With integral suppression device

LC7 K 3 P + N/C
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 21/NC
LP4 K
A1
A2
A1
A2
T1/2
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T4/8
T2/4
T3/6
22
A2
4-pole contactors
4P
3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 7/L4 A1

LC7 K 2 P N/O + 2 P N/C
R1 R3 1 A1 3
LP4 K
A2
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T4/8
A2
R2
R4
A2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 K

LA1 KN20, KN207, KN203 2 N/O
53/NO 63/NO
LA1 KN02, KN027, KN023 2 N/C

51/NC 61/NC
LA1 KN11, KN117, KN113 1 N/O + 1 N/C

53/NO 61/NC
52
54
64
62
54
62
A2
+A1
A1
A2
+A1
A1
LA1 KN40, KN407, KN403 4 N/O

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
LA1 KN31, KN317, KN313 3 N/O + 1 N/C

53/NO 73/NO 83/NO 61/NC
LA1 KN22, KN227, KN223 2 N/O + 2 N/C

53/NO 83/NO 61/NC 71/NC
LA1 KN13, KN137, KN133 1 N/O + 3 N/C

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
LA1 KN04, KN047, KN043 4 N/C

51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
84
52
62
72
42 41/NC
54
64
74
62
74
54
62
72
54
84
54
62
72
Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012

LA1 KN02M 2 N/C
21/NC 31/NC
LA1 KN11M 1 N/O + 1 N/C

33/NO 21/NC
LA1 KN31M 3 N/O + 1 N/C

33/NO 43/NO 53/NO 21/NC
84
LA1 KN22M 2 N/O + 2 N/C

43/NO 53/NO 21/NC 31/NC
82
LA1 KN13M 1 N/O + 3 N/C

53/NO 54 21/NC 31/NC
22
34
22
32
44
54
22
22
34
44
22
LA1 KN11P 1 N/O + 1 N/C

13/NO 21/NC
32
LA1 KN22P 2 N/O + 2 N/C

13/NO 43/NO 21/NC 31/NC
22
14
32
14

LA2 KT 1 C/O
A1
16 18
Suppressor modules
LA4 KC LA4 KE
A2
15
22
44
54
32
82
5/23
TeSys contactors
5
Reversing contactors
LC2 K, LC8 K, LP2 K, LP5 K On panel On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
LA1 K
8x4 = 58
35
57
80 90
58
50
57
90
2 x LA9 D973 2 x DX1 AP25 On one asymmetrical mounting rail DZ5 MB with 2 clip-on mounting plates LA9 D973 or on 2 mounting plates DX1 AP25.
DZ5 ME5 5
57
21
35 90
5
On printed circuit board for reversing contactors or 2 contactors mounted side by side
57
27
120
90
8,65
===
===
8,65
A1 58 A2
A1 50 A2 53
45
45
20x1,6

LA2 KT On reversing contactors
LA2 KT
27
38
38 38 57
Suppressor modules
LA4 Kp On reversing contactors LC2 K or LP2 K
25
22
6 22 57
Schemes : page 5/25
5/24
58
58
110
50
Schemes
TeSys contactors
3-pole reversing contactors

With screw clamp connections 3 P + N/O

LC8 K 3 P + N/C LP5 K
5/L3
3/L2
3/L2
3/L2
5/L3
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
1/L1
1/L1
13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
1/L1
5/L3
A1
A1
A1
21/NC
A2
A2
A2
T3/6
T3/6
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
A2
14
14
22
22
A1
A1
With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed circuit board) 3 P + N/O 3 P + N/C
5/L3 3/L2 3/L2 3/L2 5/L3 5/L3 3/L2 1/L1 1/L1 1/L1 13/NO 13/NO 21/NC 1/L1 5/L3 21/NC
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
T3/6
T3/6
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
4-pole reversing contactors

With screw clamp connections 4P
1N 1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 2N
T2/4
T3/6
A2
14
14
22
22
A1
Integral suppression device

With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed circuit board) 4P LC8 K LP5 K
+A1
A1
A2
A2
+A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
A1
A2
L1
L2
L3
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 K

Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 LA1 KN20, KN207, KN203 2 N/O
53/NO 63/NO
LA1 KN02, KN027, KN023 2 N/C

51/NC 61/NC
LA1 KN11, KN117, KN113 1 N/O + 1 N/C

53/NO 61/NC
LA KN02M 2 N/C
21/NC 31/NC
LA1 KN11M 1 N/O + 1 N/C

33/NO 21/NC
LA1 KN11P 1 N/O + 1 N/C

13/NO 21/NC 22
52
54
64
62
22
62
32
22
LA1 KN40, KN407, KN403 4 N/O

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
LA1 KN31, KN317, KN313 3 N/O + 1 N/C

53/NO 73/NO 83/NO 61/NC
LA1 KN22, KN227, KN223 2 N/O + 2 N/C

53/NO 83/NO 61/NC 71/NC
54
LA KN13, KN137, KN133 LA1 KN04, KN047, KN043 1 N/O + 3 N/C 4 N/C
53/NO 51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC 81/NC
54
64
74
84
52
62
34
72
54
62
72
84
54
62
72
62
54
74

LA2 KT 1 C/O
A1
16 18
84
Suppressor modules
LA4 KC LA4 KE
A2
15
+
Characteristics : pages 5/6 to 5/9 References : pages 5/14 to 5/19 Dimensions : page 5/24
82
82
14
A2
5/25
Characteristics
Contactors
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to 60947, VDE 0110 gr C,BS 5424, CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508 V 690
Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068 (DIN 50015) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Maximum operating altitude Operating position Without derating C C m
IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424 UL, CSA TC (Klimafest, Climateproof)
Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device
Protection against direct finger contact - 50+ 70 - 20+ 50 2000 Vertical axis Horizontal axis
Without derating
Without derating Max 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
Cabling, screw clamp terminals Solid conductor mm2
Min 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 0.8 Conforming to standards En 50005
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Terminal referencing Pozidriv n 1 head mm2 N.m
References: pages 5/30 and 5/31
Schemes: page 5/33
5/26
Contactors
Conventional thermal current For ambient temperature (Ith) y 55 C Rated operational frequency Frequency limits of the operational current Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated making capacity I rms conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947 A 12
Hz Hz V A
50/60 Up to 400 690 66
Rated breaking capacity (for Ue y 400 V) Short time rating
Conforming to NF C 63-110 and A IEC 60947 (I rms) In free air for a time t from cold state ( y 55 C) gl fuse U y 440 V At Ith and 50 Hz A
52
50
Short-circuit protection Average impedance per pole
A m
16 4
Maximum rated operational current For a temperature AC-3 (1) y 55 C (Ue y 400 V) AC-1 Utilisation in category AC-1 resistive circuits, heating, lighting (Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Increase in operational current by paralleling of poles
A A A
6 12 20
Auxiliary contact characteristics of add-on blocks

Up to V 690
Conforming to IEC 60947, BS 5424, VDE 0110 group C, CSA C 22-2 n 14
690
Conventional thermal current For ambiant temperature (Ith) y 55 C Frequency of operational current Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 and VDE 0660, gl fuse
10
Hz
Up to 400
10
Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC 60947

a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current (cos 0.4). 110/ 220/ 380/ V 24 48 127 230 400 440 VA 48 96 240 440 800 880 VA 17 34 86 158 288 317 VA 7 14 36 66 120 132 VA 1000 2050 5000 10000 14000 13000 (1) For LC1 contactors. d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid up to 1200 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230
1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity
Schemes: page 5/33
5/27
Contactors

Type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( y 55 C) For operation For drop-out Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc Inrush Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil opening of the N/C contacts energisation and closing of the N/O contacts Between coil deenergisation and opening of the N/O contacts closing of the N/C contacts Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour 50/60 Hz coil c coil W V LC1 SK06 a 24400 0.851.1 Uc u 0.20 Uc 16 VA 4.2 VA 1.4 LP1 SK06 c 1272 0.851.1 Uc u 0.10 Uc 2.2 W 2.2 W 2.2
ms ms ms ms
816 714 68 810 1200 10
1018 812 46 68 1200 10
Schemes: page 5/33
5/28
Contactor selection guide according to required electrical durability
Contactors
5
Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
2 1,5 1,2 1 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 2 220/380/415 V 500 V 220/230 V 380/400 V 415 V
Current broken in A
2,5 2 1,1 1,1
3 2,5 3
4 1,1 1,5 1,5
5 4 2,2 2,2
6 5 1,5 3 3
7 6
9 7
A A
0,55 0,75
2,2 kW 4 kW 4 kW
only up to 415 V

Control of resistive circuits (cos u 0.95). The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,15 0,1 2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 30 40
Current broken in A
Schemes : page 5/33
5/29
References
Contactors
b Width of contactor 27 mm. b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail. b Screw clamp terminals.

812717
Mini-contactors for motor in category AC-3

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 (1) 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 415 V 690 V Rated operational voltage in AC-3 up to 400 V Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Weight
kW 1.1 LC1 SK06
kW 2.2
kW 2.2
A 6
LC1 SK0600pp
kg 0.132
Mini-contactors for motor in category AC-1

Non inductive loads maximum current ( y 55 C) utilisation category AC-1 Control circuit supply Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Weight
A 12
812716
a.c. d.c.
2 2
LC1 SK0600pp LP1 SK0600pp
kg 0.132 0.132
Add-on block with 1 power pole (for 3-phase circuits)

For use on contactor Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Reference Weight kg
5
LA1 SK10 LC1 SK06 clip-on front mounting 1 1 Nota : Auxiliary contact blocks and coil suppressor module, see next page. (1) For use in AC-3 category and 3-phase circuits, an LA1 SKpp auxiliary contact block should be ordered separately for mounting on the contactor. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (variable delivery times, please consult your Regional Sales Office): 1 1 LA1 SK10 LA1 SK01 0.022 0.022
Mini-contactors LC1 SK
Volts a 50/60 Hz Code 24 B7 12 JD 48 E7 24 BD 110 F7 36 CD 120 G7 48 ED 220 M7 72 SD 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7
Mini-contactors LP1 SK
Volts c Code
Schemes: page 5/33
5/30
References
Contactors
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor modules
812720

Clip-on front mounting
For use on contactor Maximum number of blocks per contactor 1 Composition Reference Weight
kg LC1 SK06 LA1 SK11 1 2 1 LA1 SK02 LA1 SK11 0.022 0.022 2 LA1 SK20 0.022
Coil suppressor modules

812721
Clip-on fixing and electrical connection on right-hand side, without use of tools
For use on contactors Type For voltages Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
LA4 SKp1p
kg a and c 10 LA4 SKE1E 0.003 24 V48 V a and c 10 LA4 SKE1U 0.003 110 V250 V Diode (2) c 10 LA4 SKC1U 0.003 24 V250 V (1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). LC1 SK06 and Varistor (1) LP1 SK06
Schemes: page 5/33
5/31
Contactors
Dimensions
Mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1 SK06
84,5 55,5 27
LA1 SK (1)
LA4 SK
3,5
(1) Only on LC1 SK06.
Mounting
Mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1 SK06 On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
55,5
27
56
56
Schemes: page 5/33
5/32
Schemes
Contactors
Schemes
2-pole mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1 SK06
1/L1 T1/2 3/L2 T2/4
1 pole + 1 N/O aux. LA1 SK10

13/NO 5/L3
A2
A1
Add-on power pole block

1 pole + 1 N/C aux. LA1 SK01
21/NC 22 5/L3 T3/6
2 N/O LA1 SK20

33/NO 43/NO
T3/6

2 N/C LA1 SK02
31/NC 41/NC
14
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1 SK11

33/NO 41/NC
34
44
34
32
42
42
5/33
Characteristics
Contactors
Mini-contactors type LC1 SKGC, for use in modular panels
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60068 (DIN 50015) Conforming to VDE 0106 Conforming to IEC 60947, VDE 0110 gr C, BS 5424, CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508 V 690
IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424 UL, CSA TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct finger contact
Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Operation Maximum operating altitude Operating position Without derating
C C m
- 50+ 70 - 20+ 50 2000 Vertical axis Horizontal axis
Without derating Cabling, connectors Min. 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 0.8
Without derating Max. 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
5
Tightening torque Terminal referencing
mm2 Solid conductor Flexible cable without cable end mm2 mm2 Flexible cable with cable end Pozidriv n 1 head N.m
Conforming to standards En 50005
Schemes : page 5/41
5/34
Contactors
Mini-contactor type Conventional For ambient temperature y 55 C thermal current (Ith) Rated operational frequency Frequency limit of the operational current Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity (for Ue y 400 V) Permissible short time rating Short-circuit protection Average impedance per pole Maximum rated operational current A Hz Hz V I rms conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947 Conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947 (I rms) In free air for a time t from cold state ( y 55 C) gl fuse U y 440 V At Ith and 50 Hz For temperature y 55 C AC-3 (Ue y 400 V) AC-1 A A LC1 SKGC2 20 50/60 up to 400 690 50 40 85 68 LC1 SKGC3 and LC1 SKGC4 20
A A m A A A
40 20 4 5 20 32
60 20 4 9 20 32
Use in category AC-1 resistive circuits, heating, lighting (Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Increase in rated operational current by paralleling of 2 poles
Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-contactors

Up to Conforming to IEC 60947, BS 5424, VDE 0110 group C, CSA C 22-2 n 14 For ambient temperature y 55 C V V 690 690
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency of the operational current Short-circuit protection
A Hz
10 Up to 400
A 10 Conforming to IEC 60947 and VDE 0660, gl fuse a.c. supply, category AC-15 Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC 60947 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4). V 1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity VA VA VA VA 24 48 17 7 1000 48 96 34 14 2050 110/ 127 240 86 36 5000 220/ 230 440 158 66 10000 380/ 400 800 288 120 14000 440 880 317 132 13000
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230
Schemes : page 5/41
5/35
Contactors

Mini-contactor type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( y 55 C) V LC1 SKGC2 a 24400 LC1 SKGC3 and LC1 SKGC4
Operation For drop-out
0.851.1 Uc 0.20 Uc
Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc Inrush Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil opening of the N/C contacts energisation and closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability at Uc in millions of operating cycles opening of the N/O contacts closing of the N/C contacts In operating cycles per hour 50/60 Hz coil
VA VA W
16 4.2 1.4
23 4.9 1.5
ms ms ms ms
816 714 68 810 1200 10
Schemes : page 5/41
5/36
Contactor selection according to required electrical durability

Contactors
5
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current of the motor.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
1
2 1,5 1,2 1 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 2 220/380/415 V 500 V 220/230 V 380/400 V 415 V 2,5 2 1,1 1,1 3 2,5
4 3 1,1 1,5 1,5
5 4 2,2 2,2
6 5 1,5 3 3
7 6
9 7
A A
0,55 0,75
2,2 kW 4 kW 4 kW
Current broken in A
1 LC1 SKGC2 2 LC1 SKGC3 and SKGC4 - - - - - only up to 415 V

Control of resistive circuits (cos u 0.95). The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,15 0,1 2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 30 40 Current broken in A
Schemes : page 5/41
5/37
References
Contactors
b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or fixing by four 4 screws, except for LC1 SKGC200. b Connection by connectors. b Mini-contactor fitted with transparent, sealable protective cover to prevent front face access.
812737
Mini-contactors, width 27 mm
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 415 V 690 V kW kW kW Rated operational current in AC-3 up to 400 V A 5 Non inductive No. of poles loads category AC-1 maximum current y 50 C A 2 20 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
LC1 SKGC200pp
kg 0.132
LC1 SKGC200
530081
Mini-contactors, width 45 mm
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 415 V 690 V kW 1.1 kW 4 kW 4 Rated operational current in AC-3 up to 400 V A 9 Non inductive No. of poles loads category AC-1 maximum current y 50 C A 3 1 20 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
LC1 SKGC310pp
kg 0.175
LC1 SKGC400
LC1 SKGC301pp
0.175
LC1 SKGC400pp
0.175
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office) Volts a 24 48 110 120 220 230 240 50/60 Hz Code B7 E7 F7 G7 M7 P7 U7
380 Q7
400 V7
Schemes : page 5/41
5/38
References
Contactors
Suppressor modules
812739
Suppressor modules
Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor
For use on contactors LC1 SKGC LA4 SK p1p Type Varistor (1) For voltages a and c 2448 V Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference LA4 SKE1E Weight kg 0.003
a and c 110250 V
10
LA4 SKE1U
0.003
Diode (2)
c 24250 V
10
LA4 SKC1U
0.003
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
Schemes : page 5/41
5/39
Contactors
5
Dimensions
Mini-contactors LC1 SKGC2
Mounting
On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
55,5
27
55,5
27
LA4 SK
3,5
Dimensions
Mini-contactors LC1 SKGC3 and SKGC4
56
Mounting
On panel On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
56
56
45
56
45
48-50
LA4 SK
58
34-35
Schemes : page 5/41
5/40
58
Schemes
Contactors
LC1 SKGC2
1/L1 T1/2 3/L2 T2/4
A2
A1
LC1 SKGC310
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13/NO
LC1 SKGC301
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 T3/6 21/NC 22
A1
A2
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
A2
14
A1
T1/2
LC1 SKGC400
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 7/L4
A1
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T4/8
A2
5/41
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
TeSys d
Applications
All types of automation system
Rated operational current le max. AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) le AC-1 ( y 60 C) 9A 20/25 A 12 A 18 A 25/32 A 25 A 25/40 A 32 A 50 A 38 A
690 V
Number of poles
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
Rated operational power in AC-3
5
Auxiliary contacts
220/240 380/400 415/440 500 V 660/690 1000 V
V V V V
2.2 kW 4 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
3 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 7.5 kW
4 kW 7.5 kW 9 kW 10 kW 10 kW
5.5 kW 11 kW 11 kW 15 kW 15 kW
7.5 kW 15 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
9 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to 1 N/O + 1 N/ C time delay and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals
Thermal overload relays manual-auto compatible
Class 10 A Class 20
0.1010 A 2.510 A
0.1013 A 2.513 A
0.1018 A 2.518 A
0.1032 A 2.532 A
0.1038 A
0.1038 A
Suppressor modules (c and low consumption contactors have built-in suppression as standard)
Varistor Diode RC circuit Bidirectional peak limiting diode Relay Relay + override function Solid state a or c 3-pole a 4-pole c 4-pole
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
Interfaces
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
LC1 D09 LC1 DT20/ LC1 D098 LC2 D09 LC2 D09 LC2 DT20 LC2 DT20
5/58 to 5/61 5/62 to 5/65
LC1 D32 LC2 D32 LC2 D32
LC1 D38 LC2 D38 LC2 D38
Reversing contactor type references
a 3-pole c 3-pole a 4-pole c 4-pole
Pages
5/42
5 5
40 A 60 A
50 A 80 A
65 A
80 A 125 A
95 A
115 A 200 A
150 A
1000 V on a supply, 690 V on c supply
11 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 22 kW 30 kW 22 kW
15 kW 22 kW 25/30 kW 30 kW 33 kW 30 kW
18.5 kW 30 kW 37 kW 37 kW 37 kW 37 kW
22 37 45 55 45 45
kW kW kW kW kW kW
25 45 45 55 45 45
kW kW kW kW kW kW
30 55 59 75 80 75
kW kW kW kW kW kW
40 kW 75 kW 80 kW 90 kW 100 kW 90 kW
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to 1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals
1750 A 1740 A
1770 A 1765 A
1780 A 1770 A
17104 A 1780 A
17104 A
60150 A 60150 A
60150 A 60150 A
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p
p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p
LC1 D40 LC1 D40 LP1 D40 LC2 D40 LC2 D40
LC1 D50 LC2 D50
LC1 D95 LC2 D95
LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC2 D115 LC2 D115
LC1 D150 LC2 D150
5/43
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
TeSys d, low consumption
Applications
Automation systems
Rated operational current le max. AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) le AC-1 ( y 60 C) 9A 20/25 A 12 A 20/25 A 18 A 25/32 A
690 V
Number of poles
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
Rated operational power in AC-3
220/240 V 380/400 V 415/440 V
2.2 kW 4 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
3 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 7.5 kW
4 kW 7.5 kW 9 kW 10 kW 10 kW
500 V 660/690 V
Coil consumption Operating ranges
2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V) 0.71.25 Uc
Operating time at 20 C and at Uc
Closing Opening
70 ms 25 ms
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O instantaneous standard contacts Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode
Interference suppression
Contactor type 3-pole 4-pole Reversing contactor type 3-pole 4-pole Pages Contactors Reversing contactors
LC1 D09 LC1 DT20/D098
LC1 D12 LC1 DT25/D128
LC1D18 LC1 DT32/D188
LC2 D09 LC2 DT20

5/58 to 5/61 5/62 to 5/65
LC2 D12 LC2 DT25
LC2 D18 LC2 DT32
5/44
5 5
25 A 25/40 A
32 A 50 A
38 A 50 A
3 or 4
5.5 kW 11 kW 11 kW 15 kW 15 kW
7.5 kW 15 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
9 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V) 0.71.25 Uc
70 ms 25 ms
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O instantaneous standard contacts Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode
LC1 D25 LC1 DT40/D258
LC1 D32
LC1 D38
LC2 D25 LC2 DT40
LC2 D32
LC2 D38
5/45
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
TeSys d
Contactor type
LC1
D09D18 D25D38 D40 DT20 and DT25 DT32 and DT40 690 1000
D50D95
D115 and D150
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, V overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 V Conforming to UL, CSA Conforming to IEC 60947 kV
600 6 8
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards
IEC 60947-1, 60947-4-1, NFC 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424, JEM 1038. EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1. GL, DNV, PTB, RINA UL, CSA Complies with SNCF, Sichere Trennung recommendations Conforming to VDE 0106 part 101 and A1 (draft 2/89) Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 60529 Power connection Coil connection Conforming to IEC 60068 Storage Operation Permissible C C C m V 400
Separation insulation
Degree of protection (1) (front face only)
Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X TH - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70, for operation at Uc 3000 a /c
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions (2)
Without derating Without derating in the following positions
30
30
180
Positions that are not permissible
For c contactors LC1 D09 to D38
Flame resistance
Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed
V1 960 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 8 gn 15 gn 8 gn 10 gn 8 gn 10 gn 6 gn 15 gn
Shock resistance (3) 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance (3) 5300 Hz
4 gn
4 gn
90
90
3 gn
180
4 gn
(1) Protection provided for the cabling c.s.a.'s indicated on the next page and for connection by cable. (2) For other operating positions, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) Without change of contact states, in the most unfavourable direction (coil energised at Ue).
5/46
TeSys contactors
TeSys d
Contactor type
LC1
D09 and D12 D18 DT20 and (3P) DT25
D25 (3P)
D32 D38 D18 and D25 D40 (4P) DT32 and DT40
D50 and D80 and D115 and D150 D65 D95
Power circuit connections

Connection by cable
Tightening torque Screw clamp terminals Connector 2 inputs 1.510 1.56 16 14 1.56 1.56 N 2 6 2.5 2.510 2.510 110 1.56 1.510 2.510 N 2 6 2.5 2.510 2.510 2.510 2.510 2.516 2.516 N 2 6 1.8 Screw clamp terminals 2.525 2.516 2.525 2.510 2.525 2.516 6 8 5 Connector 1 input 2.525 2.516 2.525 2.510 2.525 2.516 6 8 5 450 425 450 416 450 425 6 8 4 9 Connector 2 inputs 10120 10120 + 1050 10120 10120 + 1050 10120 10120 + 1050 4 12
Flexible cable without cable end
1 conductor 2 conductors Flexible cable 1 conductor with cable end 2 conductors Solid cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Screwdriver Philips Flat screwdriver Key for hexagonal headed screw Tightening torque
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2
N.m
14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7
1.56 1.56 16 14 1.56 1.56 N 2 6 1.7
Spring terminal connections (1)

Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors mm 2 mm 2 2.5 (4: DT25) 2.5 (except DT25) 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 4 4 4 4 4 4 10
Connection by bars or lugs

Bar cross-section Lug external of screw Screwdriver mm mm 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 10 M4 N 2 6 2.5 10 M4 N 2 6 2.5 8 (2) M3.5 N 2 6 1.8 13 M5 N 2 8 5 16 M6 N 3 8 5 3 x 16 17 M6 8 10 9 5 x 25 25 M8 13 12
Philips Flat screwdriver Key for hexagonal headed screw N.m Tightening torque
Control circuit connections

Connection via cable (tightening via screw clamps)
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors Philips Flat screwdriver mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 12.5 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.2 14 14 12.5 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.2 14 14 12.5 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.2 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 N 2 6 1.2
N.m
Spring terminal connections (1)

Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors mm 2 mm 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Connection by bars or lugs

Lug external of screw Screwdriver Tightening torque mm mm Philips Flat screwdriver N.m 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.2 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.2 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.2 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.2
(1) If cable ends are used, choose the next size down (example: for 2.5 mm2, use 1.5 mm2 ) and square crimp the cable ends using a special tool. (2) To connect cables with a c.s.a. > 4mm2 and up to 10 mm2, it is essential to use special connectors, sold in bags of 100 (reference: LAD 96180).
5/47
TeSys contactors
TeSys d
Contactor type
LC1
D09 (3P) A A V Hz A 9 25 (1) 690
DT20 D098
D12 (3P) 12 25 (1) 690
DT25 D128
D18 (3P) 18 32 (1) 690
DT32 D188
D25 (3P) 25 40 (1) 690
DT40 D258
Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue y 440 V) In AC-3, y 60 C In AC-1, y 60 C Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to Frequency limits Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated making capacity (440 V) Rated breaking capacity (440 V) Permissible short time rating No current flowing for preceding 15 minutes with y 40 C Protection by fuses against short-circuits (U y 690 V) Average impedance per pole Power dissipation per pole for the above operational currents Of the operating current y 60 C Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60947 For 1 s For 10 s For 1 min For 10 min Without thermal type 1 overload relay, gG fuse type 2 With thermal overload relay At Ith and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1 A A A A A A A m W W 20 25 32 40
25400 25 (1) 20 250 250
25400 25 (1) 25 250 250
25400 32 (1) 32 300 300
25400 40 (1) 40 450 450
210 210 240 380 105 105 145 240 61 61 84 120 30 30 40 50 25 40 50 63 20 25 35 40 See pages 6/16 and 6/17, for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated thermal overload relay 2.5 2.5 2.5 2 0.20 0.36 0.8 1.25 1.56 1.56 2.5 3.2
Control circuit characteristics, a.c. supply

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits 50 or 60 Hz coils 50/60 Hz coils 50/60 Hz V 12690
Operational Drop-out Operational
Drop-out a 50 Hz Inrush 50 Hz coil Cos 50/60 Hz coil Sealed 50 Hz coil Cos 50/60 Hz coil a 60 Hz Inrush 60 Hz coil Cos 50/60 Hz coil Sealed 60 Hz coil Cos 50/60 Hz coil Heat dissipation 50/60 Hz Operating time Closing "C" (2) Opening "O" Mechanical durability 50 or 60 Hz coil in millions of operating cycles 50/60 Hz coil on 50 Hz Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 60 C In operating cycles per hour
VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA W ms ms
0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C 0.30.6 Uc at 60 C 0.75 70 0.3 7 0.75 70 0.3 7.5 23 1222 419 15 3600
(1) Versions with spring terminal connections: 16 A for LC1 D093 and LC1 D123 (20 A possible with 2 x 2.5 mm 2 cables in parallel), 25 A for LC1 D183 to LC1 D323 (32 A possible for LC1 D183 connected with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel; 40 A possible for LC1 D253 and LC1 D323 connected with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel). (2) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
5/48
D32
D38
D40
D50
D65
D80
D95
D115
D150
32 50 (1) 690 25400 50 550 550
38 50 690 25400 50 550 550
40 60 1000 25400 60 800 800
50 80 1000 25400 80 900 900
65 80 1000 25400 80 1000 1000
80 125 1000 25400 125 1100 1100
95 125 1000 25400 125 1100 1100
115 200 1000 25400 200 1260 1100 1100 950 550 250 250 200
150 200 1000 25400 200 1660 1400 1400 1200 580 250 315 250
430 430 720 260 310 320 138 150 165 60 60 72 63 63 80 63 63 80 See pages 24514/2 and 24514/3, for aM or gG fuse 2 2 5 2 3 5 1.5 2.4 5.4
810 900 990 1100 400 520 640 800 208 260 320 400 84 110 135 135 100 160 200 200 100 125 160 160 ratings corresponding to the associated thermal overload relay 1.5 3.7 9.6 1 4.2 6.4 0.8 5.1 12.5 0.8 7.2 12.5
0.6 7.9 24
0.6 13.5 24
12690
24660
24500
0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C 0.30.6 Uc at 60 C 0.75 70 0.3 7 0.75 70 0.3 7.5 23 1222 419 15 3600
0.851.1 Uc at 55 C 0.30.6 Uc at 55 C 0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 55 C 0.30.6 Uc at 55 C 200 0.75 245 20 0.3 26 220 0.75 245 22 0.3 26 610 2026 2026 812 812 16 16 6 6 3600 3600
2026 812 16 6 3600
2035 620 10 4 3600
2035 620 10 4 3600
0.851.1 Uc at 55 C 0.30.5 Uc at 55 C 0.81.15 Uc on 50/60 Hz at 55 C 0.30.5 Uc at 55 C 300 0.8 0.9 280350 280350 22 0.3 0.9 218 218 300 0.8 0.9 280350 280350 22 0.3 0.9 218 218 38 34.5 2050 2035 620 4075 8 8 8 2400 1200
5/49
TeSys contactors
TeSys d
Contactor type
LC1 D09D38 LC1 DT20DT40 c Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Operational Standard coil Wide range coil Drop-out c Inrush Sealed Closing Opening "C" "O" V V V 12440 690 600 0.71.25 Uc at 60 C
LC1 or LP1 D40D65 12440
LC1 or LP1 D80 LC1 D95
LC1 D115 and LC1 D150 24440
d.c. control circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Rated insulation voltage Control voltage limits
0.851.1 Uc at 55 C 0.751.2 Uc at 55 C
0.751.2 Uc at 55 C 0.150.4 Uc at 55 C 270 to 365 2.45.1
Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Average operating time at Uc (1)
W W
0.10.25 Uc at 60 C 0.10.3 Uc at 55 C 5.4 22 22 5.4 22 22
Time constant L/R (L/R) Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour at ambient temperature y 60 C
ms 63 15 % 85110 95130 2035 ms 20 20 % 2035 2035 4075 Nota : The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. ms 28 65 75 25 30 3600 20 3600 20 3600 8 1200
Low consumption control circuit characteristics

Rated insulation voltage Maximum voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Of the control circuit on c Wide range coil (0.71.25 Uc) Closing Opening Operational Drop-out ms In millions of operating cycles At ambient temperature y 60 C Inrush Sealed "C" "O" V V 690 600 250 2.4 2.4 77 15 % 25 20% 0.7 to 1.25 Uc 0.10.3 Uc 40 30 3600
Average consumption d.c. at 20 C and at Uc Operating time (1) at Uc and at 20 C Voltage limits ( y 60 C) of the control circuit Time constant L/R (L/R) Mechanical durability Maximum operating rate
W W ms ms
ops/h
(1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
5/50
TeSys contactors
TeSys d
Characteristics of auxiliary contacts incorporated in the contactor

Mechanically linked contacts Conforming to IEC60947-5-1 Mirror contact Conforming to IEC60947-4-1 Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Conventional For ambient temperature thermal current (Ith) y 60 C Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity U min = 108 I min Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, I rms Short-time rating Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Each contactor has 2 N/O and N/C contacts mechanically linked on the same movable contact holder The N/C contact on each contactor represents the state of the power contacts and can be connected to a PREVENTA safety module 690 690 600 10 25400 17 5 gG fuse: 10 A a: 140, c: 250 100 120 140 > 10
V V V A Hz V mA
A A A A M
Guaranteed between ms 1.5 on energisation and on de-energisation N/C and N/O contacts a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the (cos 0.4). load. V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600 V 24 48 125 250 440 VA 60 120 280 560 960 1050 1440 W 96 76 76 76 44 VA 16 32 80 160 280 300 420 W 48 38 38 32 VA 4 8 20 40 70 80 100 W 14 12 12 AC-15 DC-13
Millions of operating cycles Millions of operating cycles
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
24 V 48 V 125 V
250 V 1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2 440 V
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,2
0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 0,5 0,7 0,9
4 5
6 7
8 10 9
0,1 0,1
0,2
0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 0,5 0,7 0,9
4 5
6 7
8 10 9
Current broken in A
Current broken in A
5/51
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks without dust and damp protected contacts for TeSys d contactors
Contact block type
LAD N or LAD C
LAD T and LAD S
LAD R
LAD 8
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Connection by cable Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc Without derating Phillips N 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end Flexible or solid cable without cable end C C C m mm2 IEC 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5-1 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70 3000 Min: 1 x 1, max: 2 x 2.5
mm2
Max. 2 x 2.5
Instantaneous and time delay contact characteristics

Number of contacts Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating Up to V 1, 2 or 4 690 690 600 10 25400 17 5 10 a : 140 ; c: 250 100 120 140 > 10 1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation) 1.5 30 See page 5/54 - 40+ 70 2 % + 15 % 0.25 % per C 5 - 40+ 70 2 % + 15 % 0.25 % per C 5 30 2 2 2
V Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V Conforming to UL, CSA For ambient temperature y 60 C A Hz U min I min Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 and VDE 0660. gG fuse Conforming to I rms IEC 60947-5-1 Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms V mA A A A A A M ms ms C
Insulation resistance Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Overlap time Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts on LAD C22 Time delay Ambient air temperature for (LAD T, R and S contact blocks) operation Accuracy only valid for setting Repeat accuracy range indicated on the front face Drift up to 0.5 million operating cycles Drift depending on ambient air temperature Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles Operational power of contacts Non-overlap time
5/52
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts for TeSys d contactors
Contact block type
LA1 DX
LA1 DZ Protected
LA1 DY Non protected
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Connection Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage and operation Phillips N 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end C mm 2 IEC 60947-5-1, VDE 0660 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X - 25+ 70 Min: 1 x 1, max: 2 x 2.5
Number of contacts
Contact characteristics
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Maximum operational current (Ie) Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating Up to Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to UL, CSA For ambient temperature y 40 C V V V A mA Hz U min I min Conforming to IEC 609475-1 gG fuse Conforming to IEC 60947 5-1, I rms Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms V mA A A A A A M 50 250 500 17 4 > 10 50 250 500 17 4 > 10 690 690 600 10 25400 17 5 10 a: 140; c: 250 100 120 140 > 10 24 250 50 3 0.3 > 10 5 Gold - Single break with crossed bars
Insulation resistance Mechanical durability Materials and technology used for dust and damp protected contacts In millions of operating cycles
5 5 30 Silver - Single break Silver - Single break
5/53
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts for TeSys d contactors
Rated operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 60947-5-1)

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4). V VA VA VA 24 60 16 4 48 120 32 8 115 280 80 20 230 560 160 40 400 960 280 70 440 1050 300 80 600 1440 420 100

10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5
0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9
4 5
6 7
8 10 9
Current broken in A
d.c. supply, category DC 13

Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W 24 120 70 25 48 90 50 18 125 75 38 14 250 68 33 12 440 61 28 10

10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V
24 V 48 V 125 V
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
440 V
0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9
Current broken in A
5/54
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Control modules, coil suppressor modules and mechanical latch blocks for TeSys d contactors
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc C C C IEC 60947-5-1 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X 40+ 80 25+ 55 25+ 70

Recommendation Rated insulation voltage Rated operational voltage Protection Built-in protection Indication Electrical durability Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Against electric shocks Contactor coil suppression By integral LED In operating cycles V V kV The Auto - Man selector switch must only be operated with the Start - Stop (O I) switch in position O 250 250 2 By varistor Illuminates when the contactor coil is energised 20 000
Suppressor modules
Module type Type of protection Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Maximum peak voltage Natural RC frequency 24/48 V 50/127 V 110/240 V 380/415 V Hz Hz Hz Hz V LA4 DA, LAD 4RC RC circuit a 24415 3 Uc 400 200 100 150 LA4 DB, LAD 4T Bidirectional peak limiting diode a or c 2472 2 Uc LA4 DC Diode c 12250 Uc LA4 DE, LAD 4V Varistor a or c 24250 2 Uc
Mechanical latch blocks (1)

Mechanical latch block type For mounting on contactor Product certifications Rated insulation voltage Rated control circuit voltage Power required Maximum operating rate On-load factor Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a 50/60 Hz and c For unlatching a
c
LA6 DK10 LC1 D40D65, LP1 D65 UL, CSA V V VA W 690 24415 25 30 1200 10 % 0.5
LAD 6K10 LC1 D09D38, DT20DT40
LA6 DK20 LC1 D80D150 LP1 D80 and LC1 D115 UL, CSA 690 24415 25 30 1200 10 % 0.5
In operating cycles/ hour
(1) Unlatching can be manually operated or electrically controlled (pulsed). The LA6 DK or LAD 6K latch coil and the LC1 D operating coil must not be energised simultaneously. The duration of the LA6 DK or LAD 6K and LC1 D control signals must be u 100 ms.
References : pages 5/70 5/73
5/55
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Electronic serial timer module for TeSys d contactors
Module type
LA4 DT (On-delay) IEC 60255-5 UL, CSA Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation For operation at Uc Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Phillips n 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid conductor with or without cable end C C C V mm2 TH Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X 40+ 80 25+ 55 25+ 70 250 Min: 1 x 1, max: 2 x 2.5
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Cabling

Built-in protection Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Permissible variation Type of control On input Contactor coil suppression V By varistor By varistor a or c 24250 0.81.1 Uc By mechanical contact only
Timing characteristics
Timing ranges s 040 C During time delay period After time delay period During time delay period After time delay period ms ms ms ms ms 0.12; 1.530; 25500 3 % (10 ms minimum) 150 50 10 2 Repeat accuracy Reset time Immunity to microbreaks Minimum control pulse duration Indication of time delay By LED
Illuminates during time delay period
Switching characteristics (solid state type)

Maximum power dissipated Leakage current Residual voltage Overvoltage protection Electrical durability W mA V 2 <5 3.3 3 kV; 0.5 joule 30
In millions of operating cycles
Function diagram
LA4 DT On-delay electronic timers
U supply A1-A2 Time delay output Contactor coil
1 0 1 0 t
Red LED
5/56
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Interface modules for TeSys d contactors
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc C C C IEC 60255-5 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X 40+ 80 25+ 55 25+ 70 LA4 DFBQ With relay 5 415 LA4 DFB LA4 DFE LA4 DLB LA4 DLE With relay With relay With relay + override 250 250 the contactor coil is energised c 48 c 24 c 48 3360 1730 3360 15 25 15 < 4.8 < 1.3 33 < 2.4 <2 17 < 4.8 < 1.3 33 LA4 DWB Solid state
Module type Rated insulation voltage Rated operational voltage Indication of input state Input signals Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Control voltage (E1-E2) Permissible variation Current consumption at 20 C State 0 guaranteed for U I State 1 guaranteed for U Against reverse polarity Of the input In millions of operating cycles V V
By integral LED which illuminates when V c 24 c 24 V 1730 1730 mA 25 25 V mA V < 2.4 <2 17 By diode By diode 3 4 0.6 LC1 D40D150 < 2.4 <2 17
c 24 530 8.5 for 5 V 15 for 24 V < 2.4 <2 5
Built-in protection Electrical durability at 220 A/240 V Maximum immunity to microbreaks Power dissipated Direct mounting without contactor Mounting with cabling adapter LAD 4BB
10 4 0.6
10 4 0.6
3 4 0.6
3 4 0.6
20 1 0.4 LC1 D40D115 LC1 D09D38, DT20DT40
ms At 20 C With coil a24250 V a 100250 V a 380415 V a24250 V a 380415 V W
With coil
LC1 D40D150 LC1 D09D38, DT20DT40
Total operating time at Uc (of the contactor)
With LA4 DF, LA4 DL Cabling Phillips N 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end
C "O"
LC1 D09D38, DT20DT40 The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate. LC1 D09D38, LC1 D40D65 LC1 D80 and D95 DT20DT40 ms 2030 2834 2843 ms 1624 2024 1832 mm 2 Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5
5/57
References
TeSys contactors
For motor control up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption
810356
3-pole contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 ( y 60 C) 220 V 380 V 230 V 400 V kW kW 2.2 4 3 5.5 4 7.5 5.5 11 7.5 15 9 18.5 11 18.5 15 22 18.5 30 22 37 25 45 30 55 40 75 660 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW kW 4 4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 10 10 11 11 15 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 22 22 30 25 30 30 33 37 37 37 37 45 45 55 45 45 45 55 45 59 59 75 80 80 80 90 100 Rated operational current in AC-3 440 V up to A 9 12 18 25 32 38 40 50 65 80 95 115 150 Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Fixing (1) Weight (3)
1000 V 22 30 37 45 45 65 75
LC1 D09pp
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LC1 D09pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D18pp LC1 D25pp LC1 D32pp LC1 D38pp LC1 D40pp LC1 D50pp LC1 D65pp LC1 D80pp LC1 D95pp LC1 D115pp LC1 D150pp
kg 0.320 0.325 0.330 0.370 0.375 0.380 1.400 1.400 1.400 1.590 1.610 2.500 2.500
810353
LC1 D25pp
3-pole contactors for connection by lugs or bars

In the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D096pp.
810352
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/68 to 5/75.
LC1 D95pp
LC1 D115pp
(1) LC1 D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC1 D40 to D95 a : clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 D40 to D95 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): a.c. supply Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500 LC1 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)) 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LC1 D40D115 50 Hz B5 D5 E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5 R5 S5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 R6 d.c. supply Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC1 D09D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD LC1 D40D95 U 0.851.1 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD U 0.751.2 Uc JW BW CW EW SW FW MW LC1 D115 and D150 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.751.2 Uc BD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD Low consumption Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250 LC1 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/76 to 5/81. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg for contactors LC1 D09 to D38, 0.785 kg for contactors LC1 D40 to D65 and 1 kg for contactors LC1 D80 and D95.
105517
5/58
References
TeSys contactors
For motor control up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
810358
3-pole contactors for connection by spring terminals

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 ( y 60 C) 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V kW 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 Rated operational current in AC-3 440 V up to A 9 12 18 25 32 (4) Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Fixing (1) Weight (3)
LC1 D123pp
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1
D093pp D123pp D183pp D253pp D323pp
kg 0.320 0.325 0.330 0.370 0.375
3-pole contactors for connection by Faston connectors

These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil and auxiliary terminals. It is possible to make 2 x 6.35 mm connections to the coil terminals by using a double Faston connector, reference: LA9 6180, to be ordered separately (sold in lots of 100). For contactors LC1 D09 and LC1 D12 only, in the references selected above, replace the figure 3 before the voltage code with a figure 9. Example: LC1 D093pp becomes LC1 D099pp.
Accessories
(1) LC1 D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): a.c. supply Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 LC1 D09D32 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 d.c. supply Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC1 D09D32 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD Low consumption Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250 LC1 D09...D32 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/76 to 5/81. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg for contactors LC1 D09 to D32. (4) Must be wired with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel on the upstream side. On the downstream side, outgoing terminal block LAD 331 may be used (Quickfit technology, see page 1/219).
5/59
References
TeSys contactors
For control in category AC-1, 25 to 200 A

810366
Non inductive loads maximum current ( y 60 C) utilisation category AC-1
Number of poles
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Fixing (2)
Weight (3)
A 25 32 40 50 60 80 125 200
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 or 1 1 1 or 1 1 or 1 or 1 or
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D09pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D18pp LC1 D25pp LC1 D32pp LC1 D38pp LC1 D40pp LC1 D50pp LC1 D65pp (4) LC1 D80pp LC1 D95pp (4) LC1 D115pp LC1 D150pp (5)
kg 0.320 0.325 0.330 0.370 0.375 0.380 1.400 1.400 1.400 1.590 1.610 2.500 2.500

In the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D096pp.
3-pole contactors for connection by Faston connectors
These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil terminals. It is possible to make 2 x 6.35 mm connections to the coil terminals by using a double Faston connector, reference: LAD 99635, to be ordered separately (sold in lots of 100). For contactors LC1 D09 and LC1 D12 only, in the references selected above, insert a figure 9 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D099pp.
810367

16 25 3 3 1 1 1 1 LC1 D093pp (6) or LC1 D123pp (6) LC1 D183pp (5) or LC1 D253pp (7) or LC1 D323pp (7) 0.320 0.325 0.335 0.325 0.325
LC1 D123pp
Accessories
(1) See note (1) page 5/61. (2) LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT40: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC1 D40 to D95 a : clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 or LP1 D40 to D95 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg for contactors LC1 D09 to D38, 0.785 kg for contactors LC1 D40 to D65 and 1 kg for contactors LC1 D80 and D95. (4) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve, page 5/164. (5) 32 A with 2 x 4 mm 2 cables connected in parallel. (6) 20 A with 2 x 2.5 mm2 cables connected in parallel. (7) 40 A with 2 x 4 mm 2 cables connected in parallel.
5/60
References
TeSys contactors
For control in category AC-1, 20 to 200 A

Non inductive loads maximum current ( y 60 C) utilisation category AC-1
565131
Number of poles
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Fixing (2)
Weight (3)
A 20 25 32 40 60
LC1 DT20pp
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 or or or or or or
80
4 2
125
4 2
200
LC1 DT20pp LC1 D098pp LC1 DT25pp LC1 D128pp LC1 DT32pp LC1 D188pp LC1 DT40pp LC1 D258pp LC1 D40004pp LP1 D40004pp LC1 D40008pp LP1 D40008pp LC1 D65004pp LP1 D65004pp LC1 D65008pp LP1 D65008pp LC1 D80004pp LP1 D80004pp LC1 D80008pp LP1 D80008pp LC1 D115004pp
kg 0.365 0.365 0.365 0.365 0.425 0.425 0.425 0.425 1.440 2.210 1.440 2.210 1.440 2.210 1.450 2.220 1.760 2.685 1.840 2.910 2.860

In the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code (except LC1 D65 ppp and LP1 D65 ppp). Example: LC1 DT20pp becomes LC1 DT206pp.
5
0.380 0.380 0.380 0.380 0.425 0.425 0.425 0.425

20 25 32 40 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 DT203 D0983 DT253 D1283 DT323 D1883 DT403 D2583
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/68 to 5/75. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
a.c. supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 LC1 D09...D150 and LC1 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 LC1 D40...D115 50 Hz B5 D5 E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 400 V7 V5 250 UD UD UD 415 N7 N5 440 RD RD RD 440 R7 R5 R6 500 S5
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 LC1 D09...D38 and LC1 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD LC1 or LP1 D40...D80 U 0.851.1 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD U 0.751.2 Uc JW BW CW EW SW FW LC1 D115 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.751.2 Uc BD ED ND SD FD 125 220 as standard) GD MD GD GD MD MW MD
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250 LC1 D09...D38 and LC1 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/76 to 5/81. (2) See note (2) page 5/60 (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.165 kg and for contactors LC1 D80, 1 kg.
5/61
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
Horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
810369
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

Pre-wired power connections Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Opera- Instantaneous tional auxiliary current contacts per in AC-3 contactor ( y 60 C) 440 V up to Contactors supplied with coils Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Fixing (1) Weight (3)
LC2 D12pp
220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 25 30 40 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 25 37 45 45 59 80 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 59 80 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 55 55 75 90 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 18.5 30 33 37 45 45 80 100 65 75
kg 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC2 LC2 LC2 LC2 LC2 LC2 LC2 LC2 LC2 LC2 LC2 D09pp (4) D12pp (4) D18pp (4) D25pp (4) D32pp (4) D38pp (4) D40pp D50pp D65pp D80pp D95pp 0.687 0.697 0.707 0.787 0.797 0.807 2.400 2.400 2.400 3.200 3.200 6.350 6.400
With mechanical interlock, without electrical interlocking

9 12 18 25 32 38 40 50 65 80 95 115 150
565132
With mechanical interlock and electrical interlocking

LC2 D115pp LC2 D150pp
LC2 D50pp
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by lugs or bars

For reversing contactors LC2 D09 to LC2 D38, LC2 D115 and LC2 D150, in the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code. Example: LC2 D09pp becomes LC2 D096 pp.
Accessories
(1) LC2 D09 to D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC2 D40 to D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC2 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
a.c. supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 LC2 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)) 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 LC2-D40D115 50 Hz B5 D5 E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 400 V7 V5 250 UD 415 N7 N5 440 RD 440 R7 R5 R6 500 S5
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 LC2 D09D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD 110 FD 125 GD 220 MD
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250 LC2 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/76 to 5/81. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.330 kg (LC2 D09 D38 ). (4) For reversing contactors with electrical interlocking pre-wired at the factory, add suffix V to the references selected above. Example: LC2 D09P7 becomes LC2 D09P7V.
5/62
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
Horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by spring terminals

565133
Pre-wired power connections Mechanical interlock, without electrical interlocking. Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Operational current in AC-3 ( y 60 C) 440 V up to A 9 12 18 25 32 Instantaneous Contactors supplied with coils auxiliary Basic reference, to be completed by contacts per adding the voltage code (2) contactor Fixing (1) Weight (3)
LC2 D123pp
220 V 380 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V kW kW kW kW kW 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 4 7.5 9 9 10 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 15 15 15 18.5
660 V 690 V kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
LC2 LC2 LC2 LC2 LC2
D093pp D123pp D183pp D253pp D323pp
kg 0.687 0.697 0.707 0.787 0.797
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by Faston connectors

All power connections are to be made by the customer. These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil terminals. It is possible to make 2 x 6.35 mm connections to the coil terminals by using a double Faston connector, reference: LAD 99635, to be ordered separately (sold in lots of 100). For contactors LC2 D09 and LC2 D12 only, replace the digit 3 with a 9 in the references selected above. Example: LC2 D093pp becomes LC2 D099pp.
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules : see pages 5/68 to 5/75.
(1) LC2 D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office).
a.c. supply
Volts LC2 D09D32 50/60 Hz 24 B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 115 FE7 220 M7 230 P7 110 FD 240 U7 125 GD 380 Q7 220 MD 400 V7 250 UD 415 N7 440 RD 440 R7
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 LC2 D09D32 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250 LC2 D09...D32 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/76 to 5/81. (3) The weights indicated are for reversing contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.330 kg.
5/63
References
TeSys contactors
Changeover contactor pairs for control in category AC-1, 20 to 200 A, horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
Pre-wired power connections LC2 DT20 to LC2 DT40: mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. LC2 D40 to LC2 D80: order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors (see page 5/69). For electrical interlocking incorporated in the mechanical interlock, please consult your Regional Sales Office. LC2 D115: mechanical interlock with integral, pre-wired electrical interlocking.
Utilisation category AC-1 Instantaneous auxiliary Non inductive loads contacts per contactor Maximum rated operational current ( y 60 C) A 20 25 32 40 60 80 125 Contactors supplied with coil Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Fixing (2) Weight
510441
LC2 DT20pp
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
LC2 DT20pp LC2 DT25pp LC2 DT32pp LC2 DT40pp LC2 D40004 pp LC2 D65004 pp LC2 D80004 pp LC2 D115004pp
kg 0.730 0.730 0.850 0.850 3.200 3.200 3.200 7.400
200
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection by lugs or bars

20 25 32 40 60 80 125 200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC2 DT206pp LC2 DT256pp LC2 DT326pp LC2 DT406pp LC2 D400046 LC2 D650046pp LC2 D800046pp LC2 D1150046pp 0.730 0.730 0.850 0.850 2.400 3.200 3.200 7.400
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 5/68 to 5/75 .
(1) See note (1) on next page. (2) LC2 DT20 to DT40: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC2 D65 and D80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC2 D115: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing.
5/64
References
TeSys contactors
Changeover contactor pairs for control in category AC-1, 20 A, horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
4-pole changeover contactor pairs for connection by spring terminals

Pre-wired power connections
Utilisation category AC-1 Instantaneous auxiliary Non inductive loads contacts per contactor Maximum rated operational current ( y 60 C) A 20 Contactors supplied with coil Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Fixing (2) Weight
LC2 DT203 pp
kg 0.760
Accessories
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules, see pages 5/68 to 5/75.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office).
a.c. supply
Volts LC2 DT20DT40 50/60 Hz LC2 D65D115 50 Hz 60 Hz 24 B7 B5 B6 42 D7 D5 48 E7 E5 E6 110 F7 F5 F6 115 FE7 FE5 220 M7 M5 M6 230 P7 P5 240 U7 U5 U6 125 GD 250 UL 380 Q7 Q5 Q6 220 MD 400 V7 V5 250 UD 415 N7 N5 440 RD 440 R7 R5 R6 500 S5
d.c. supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 LC2 DT20DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 LC2 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/76 to 5/81. (2) Clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing.
5/65
References
TeSys contactors
Component parts for assembling reversing contactors for motor control or low speed - high speed starters
For 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control

Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer
565135
Using 2 identical contactors (1)
Set of power connections Reference
Weight kg 0.045
Mechanical interlock Kit reference
Weight kg
Including mechanical interlock and an electrical interlocking kit for the contactors
LC1 D09D38 LAD 9R1V (2)
LA9 D4002
Including mechanical interlock with integral electrical interlocking

LC1 D40D65 LA9 D6569 LA9 D8069 LA9 D8069 LA9 D11569 0.290 0.290 0.490 1.450 LA9 D4002 LA9 D4002 LA9 D8002 LA9 D11502 0.170 0.170 0.170 0.290
810374
LC1 D80 and D95 (a) LC1 D80 and D95 (c) LC1 D115 and D150
LA9 D6569
810375
Including mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking

LC1 D09D38 with screw clamp terminals or connectors LC1 D09D32 with spring terminal connections LC1 D40D65 LC1 D80 and D95 (a) LC1 D80 and D95 (c) LAD 9R1 (2) 0.045
(3)
LA9 D6569 LA9 D8069 LA9 D8069
0.290 0.490 0.490
LA9 D50978 LA9 D50978 LA9 D80978
0.170 0.170 0.170
5
LA9 D8069
810373
For low speed - high speed starter

Description Connection kit enabling reversing of low and high speed directions, using a reversing contactor and a 2N/O + 2N/C main pole contactor For contactors with connections Screw clamps or connectors Power connection module with spring terminal connections Outgoing terminal block with spring terminal connections Reference LAD 9PVGV LAD 3PVGV LAD 3PVGV10 Weight kg 0.016 0.034 0.034
LAD 9R1
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/58 and 5/59. (2) Including mechanical interlock. (3) To build a reversing contactor with spring terminal connections, the following components must be ordered: - 1 mechanical interlock LAD 9V2, - 1 upstream power connection kit and 1 downstream power connection kit. Upstream power connection kit LAD 9V10: installed in the Quickfit system with power connection module LAD 34. (If module LAD 34 is not used, replace LAD 9V10 with LAD 9V12). Downstream power connection kit LAD 9V11 : installed in the Quickfit system with outgoing terminal block LAD 331. (If module LAD 331 is not used, replace LAD 9V11 with LAD 9V13 ).
565134
5/66
References
TeSys contactors
Component parts for assembling changeover contactor pairs for distribution
For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (3-phase distribution + neutral)

565137
Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer
Using 2 identical contactors (1)
Set of power connections Reference
Weight kg 0.040
Mechanical interlock Kit reference
Weight kg
Including mechanical interlock and an electrical interlocking kit for the contactors
LC1 DT20DT40 LAD T9R1V (2)
LA9 D4002

LC1 D65004 LC1 D80004 LA9 D6570 LA9 D8070 LA9 D8070 LA9 D11570 0.150 0.280 0.280 1.100 LA9 D4002 LA9 D4002 LA9 D8002 LA9 D11502 0.170 0.170 0.170 0.280
565136
LP1 D80004 LC1 D115004
Including mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking

LC1 DT20DT40 with screw clamp terminals or connectors LC1 DT203DT403 with spring terminal connections LC1 or LP1 D65004 LC1 D80004
810379
LAD-T9R1 (2)
0.035
(3)
LA9 D50978
LA9 D6570 (4) LA9 D8070 (4) LA9 D8070 (4)
0.150 0.280 0.280
LA9 D50978 LA9 D50978 LA9 D80978
0.155 0.155 0.180
LP1 D80004
LA9 D6570
For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs

LC1 D115 and D150 LA9 D11571 0.960 LA9 D11502 0.280
810380
LA9 D8070
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/61 and 5/62. (2) Including mechanical interlock. (3) To build a changeover contactor pair with spring terminal connections, the following components must be ordered in addition to the 2 contactors: - 1 mechanical interlock LAD 9V2 , - 1 downstream power connection kit LAD 9V9 . (4) Order 2 contact blocks LAD Np1 to build the electrical interlock, see page 5/69.
5/67
Presentation
TeSys contactors
See page opposite for mounting possibilities according to the contactor type and rating.
510385
5/68
References
TeSys contactors
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals

For use in normal operating environments In order to mount an LAD 8N on an LC1 D40 to D95, a set of shims must be ordered separately, see page 5/75 Clip-on mounting (1) Number of Composition Reference Weight contacts per block
Front
1 2
Side
4 incl. 1 N/O & 1 N/C make before break 2
1 2
2 1 2 2 2
1 1 2 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1
1 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
LAD N10 LAD N01 LAD N11 LAD N20 LAD N02 LAD N22 LAD N13 LAD N40 LAD N04 LAD N31 LAD C22 LAD 8N11 LAD 8N20 LAD 8N02 LAD N11G LAD N22G LAD N11P LAD N22P LA1 DX20 LA1 DX11 LA1 DX02 LA1 DY20 (2) LA1 DZ40 LA1 DZ31
kg 0.020 0.020 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.030 0.050 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.050 0.060
For terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012

Front, on 3P contactors and 2 4P contactors 20 to 60A 4 Front, on 4P contactors 2 80 to 200A 4 Front 2
With dust and damp protected contacts, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs

This type of connection is not possible for blocks with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the figure 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N116.
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

This type of connection is not possible for LAD 8, LAD N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the figure 3 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N113.
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors

This type of connection is not possible for LAD 8, LAD N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the figure 9 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N119. (1) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be fitted Contactors Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Time delay Front Type Number of poles and size Side mounted Front mounted mounted 1 contact 2 contacts 4 contacts a 3P LC1 D09D38 1 on LH side and 1 or 1 or 1 LC1 D40D95 (50/60 Hz) 1 on each side or 2 and 1 or 1 or 1 LC1 D40D95 (50 or 60 Hz) 1 on each side and 2 and 1 or 1 or 1 LC1 D115 and D150 1 on LH side and 1 or 1 or 1 4P LC1 DT20DT40 1 on LH side and 1 or 1 or 1 LC1 D40D80 1 on each side or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 LC1 D115 1 on each side and 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 c 3P LC1 D09D38 1 or 1 or 1 LC1 D40D95 2 and 1 or 1 or 1 LC1 D115 and D150 1 on LH side and 1 or 1 or 1 4P LC1 DT20DT40 1 or 1 or 1 LC1 D40D80 2 and 1 or 1 or 1 LC1 D115 1 on each side and 1 or 1 or 1 LC (3) 3P LC1 D09D38 1 4P LC1 DT20DT40 1 (2) Device fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals. (3) LC: low consumption.
5/69
References
TeSys contactors
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Mechanical latch blocks
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals
Maximum number of auxiliary contact blocks that can be fitted per contactor, see page 5/69. Sealing cover to be ordered separately, see page 5/75. LAD T0 and LAD R0: with extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. LAD S2: with switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact. Clip-on mounting Number of Time delay Reference Weight contacts Type Setting range per block kg Front 1 N/O + 1 N/C On-delay 0.13 s 0.130 s 10180 s 130 s Off-delay 0.13 s 0.130 s
810439
810438
LAD T0 LAD T2 LAD T4 LAD S2 LAD R0 LAD R2 LAD R4
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
LAD T
10180 s
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs

Add the figure 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T06.
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

LA6 DK
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors

810441

Clip-on mounting Unlatching control Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) LC1 D40D65 (3 P a or c) LA6 DK10p LC1 D40 and D65 (4 P a ) LP1 D40 and D65 (4 P c) LC1 D80D150 (3 P a ) LA6 DK20p LC1 D80 and D115 (3 P c) LC1 D80 (4 P a) LC1 D80 & D115 (4 P a) LP1 D80 & LC1 D115 (4 P c) LC1 D09D38 (a or c) LAD 6K10p LC1 DT20DT40 (a or c) For use on contactor Weight
Front
Manual or electric
kg 0.070
0.090
LAD T p3
810440
0.070
(1) The mechanical latch block must not be powered up at the same time as the contactor. The duration of the control signal for the mechanical latch block and the contactor should be: u 100 ms for a contactor operating on an a.c. supply u 250 ms for a contactor operating on a d.c. supply (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 50/60 Hz , c 24 32/36 42/48 60/72 100 110/127 220/240 256/277 380/415 Code B C E EN K F M U Q LA6 DK
5/70
References
TeSys contactors
Suppressor modules
RC circuits (Resistor-Capacitor)
b Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to "high frequency" interference. For use only in cases where the voltage is virtually sinusoidal, i.e. less than 5% total harmonic distortion. b Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. b Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time). Mounting For use with contactor (1) Reference Weight Rating Type Va Vc kg Clip-on (3) D09D38 (3P) 2448 LAD 4RCE 0.012 DT20DT40 50127 LAD 4RCG 0.012 110240 LAD 4RCU 0.012 Screw mounting (4) D40D150 (3P) and D40D115 (4P) 2448 50127 110240 380415 LA4 DA2E LA4 DA2G LA4 DA2U LA4 DA2N 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018
510384
LAD 4pp
Varistors (peak limiting)

b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. b Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). Clip-on (3) D09D38 (3P) (2) 2448 DT20DT40 50127 110250 Screw mounting (4) D40D115 (3P) and D40D115 (4P) 2448 50127 110250 2448 50127 110250
LAD 4VE LAD 4VG LAD 4VU LA4 DE2E LA4 DE2G LA4 DE2U LA4 DE3E LA4 DE3G LA4 DE3U
0.012 0.012 0.012 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018
810443
D40D95 (3P) and D40D80 (4P)
Flywheel diodes
b No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. b Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time). b Polarised component. Clip-on (5) D09D38 (3P) DT20DT40 Screw mounting (4) D40D95 (3P) D40D80 (4P)
LA4 Dpp
24250 24250
LAD 4DDL LA4 DC3U
0.012 0.018
Bidirectional peak limiting diode

b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Clip-on (3) (5) D09D38 (3P) (2) 24 DT20DT40 72 Screw mounting (4) LAD 4DDL or LAD 4TpDL D40D95 (3P) D40D80 (4P) 24 72
510726
24 72 125 250 600 24 72
LAD 4TB LAD 4TBDL LAD 4TS LAD 4TSDL LAD 4TGDL LAD 4TUDL LAD 4TXDL LA4 DB2B LA4 DB2S LA4 DB3B LA4 DB3S
0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018
(1) For satisfactory protection, a suppressor module must be fitted across the coil of each contactor. (2) From LC1 D09 to D38 and from LC1 DT20 to DT40, d.c. and low consumption 3-pole contactors are fitted with a built-in bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor as standard. On contactors produced after 15th July 2004, this bidirectional peak limiting diode is removable and can therefore be replaced by the user. (See reference above). If a d.c. or low consumption contactor is used without suppression, the standard suppressor should be replaced with a blanking plug (reference LAD 9DL) (3) Clipping-on makes the electrical connection. The overall size of the contactor remains unchanged. (4) Mounting at the top of the contactor on coil terminals A1 and A2. (5) In order to install these accessories, the existing suppression device must first be removed.
5/71
Presentation
TeSys contactors
510386
LA4 DT
LA4 DW
LA4 DF
LA4 DL
LA4 DM
LAD 4BB
LC1 D09D38
See page opposite for mounting possibilities according to contactor type and rating.
5/72
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories
Electronic serial timer modules (1)

b 3-pole contactors LC1 D09 to D38 and 4-pole contactors LC1 DT20 to DT40: mounted using adapter LAD 4BB, to be ordered separately, see page 5/75. b 3-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of contactor.
On-delay type
Operational voltage a 24250 V LC1 D09D38 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P) Time delay 100250 V LC1 D40D150 (3P) 0.12 s 1.530 s 25500 s Reference LA4 DT0U LA4 DT2U LA4 DT4U Weight kg 0.040 0.040 0.040
Interface modules
b 3-pole contactors LC1 D09 to D38 and 4-pole contactors LC1 DT20 to DT40: mounted using adapter LAD 4BB, to be ordered separately, see page 5/75. b 3-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of contactor.
Relay interface
Operational voltage a 24250 V 380415 V LC1 D09D150 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P) Supply voltage E1-E2 (c) 24 V Reference Weight kg 0.055
LA4 DFBQ
LC1 D09D150 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P)
24 V 48 V
LA4 DFB LA4 DFE
0.050 0.050
Relay interface with "AUTO-I" manual override switch (output forced ON)
Operational voltage a 24250 V LC1 D09D150 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P) Solid state interface LC1 D09D38 (3P) and DT20DT40 (4P) 100250 V Supply voltage E1-E2 (c) 24 V 48 V Reference Weight kg 0.045 0.045
LA4 DLB LA4 DLE
LC1 D40D115 (3P)
24 V
LA4 DWB
0.045

For local override operation tests with 2-position Auto-Man switch and O-I switch
b 3-pole contactors LC1 D09 to D38 and 4-pole contactors LC1 DT20 to DT40: mounted using adapter LAD 4BB, to be ordered separately, see page 5/75. b 3-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of contactor. Operational voltage a Reference Weight 24100 V 100250 V kg LC1 D09D150 (3P) LA4 DMK 0.040 and DT20DT40 (4P) LC1 D40D150 (3P) LA4 DMU 0.040
(1) For 24 V operation, the contactor must be fitted with a 21 V coil (code Z). See pages 5/76 to 5/81
5/73
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories
Accessories for main pole and control connections

810445
Description Connectors for cable, size (1 connector) Connectors for cable, size (2 connectors) Connectors for lug type terminals (2 connectors) Protective covers for connectors for lug type terminals LA9 D11550p Links for parallel connection of 4-pole 10 mm2 3-pole 25 mm2
For use with contactors LC1 a c DT20, DT25 DT20, DT25 D09D38 D09D38 D115, D150 D115 D115, D150 D115 D115, D150 D115, D150 D09D38
Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 2 2 10 1 2 2 2 10 10 10 3
Unit reference LA D92560 LA9 D3260 LA9 D115603 LA9 D115604 LA9 D115503 LA9 D115504 LA9 D115703 LA9 D115704 LA9 D2561 LA9 D1261 LA D96061 LA9 D40961 LA9 D80961 LAD 9P3 (2) LA9 D80962 LA9 D1263 LA9 D40963 LA9 D80963 LA9 D09966 LA9 D6567 LA9 D8067 GV7 AC03
Weight kg 0.030 0.040 0.560 0.740 0.300 0.360 0.250 0.300 0.060 0.012 0.060 0.021 0.060 0.005 0.080 0.024 0.070 0.100 0.006 0.010 0.010 0.180
LA9 D3260
3-pole 120 mm2 D115, D150 4-pole 120 mm2 D115 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole (1) 4-pole (1) 2 poles D115, D150 D115 D115, D150 D115, D150 D09D38
810446
DT20, DT25 (4P) DT20, DT25 (4P) DT32, DT40 (4P) DT32, DT40 (4P) D40D65 D80, D95 3 poles D09D38 (star connection) D80, D95 4 poles DT20, DT25 D40D65 D80, D95 D40D65 D80 D09D38 D80, D95 DT20, DT25 D40D65 D80 D40D80 D40D65 D80, D95 D115, D150
5
LA9 D11560p
810450
810447
Staggered coil connection Control circuit take-off from main pole
D40D65 D80, D95
Spreaders for increasing the pole pitch to 45 mm
D115, D150
LA9 D11570p
810448
(1) For 3-pole contactors: 1 set of 6 covers, for 4-pole contactors: 1 set of 8 covers. (2) Separate connecting bar for connecting 2 poles in parallel.
LA9 D80962
810449
LA9 D6567
5/74
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories
Sets of contacts and arc chambers

810452
Description Sets of contacts
For contactor 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 D115 D150 D115004 D115 D150 D115004
Reference LA5 D1158031 LA5 D150803 LA5 D115804 LA5 D11550 LA5 D15050 LA5 D115450
Arc chambers GV2 G245

810453
Weight kg 0.260 0.260 0.330 0.395 0.395 0.470
For adapting existing wiring to a new product LC1 D09D38 Without coil suppression LC1 DT20DT25 With coil a 2448 V suppression a 50127 V a 110250 V 2 contactors LC1 D09D18 or D25D38 4 contactors LC1 D09D18 or D25D38 For supply to one or more GV2 G busbar sets LAD 4BB LAD 4BBVE LAD 4BBVG LAD 4BBVU GV2 G245 GV2 G445 GV1 G09 0.019 0.014 0.014 0.014 0.036 0.077 0.040
Set of 63 A busbars for parallelling of contactors Terminal block GV1 G09

810451
Description Miniature circuit-breaker Sealing cover Safety cover preventing access to the moving contact carrier Application 5 x 20 with 4 A-250 V fuse For LAD T, LAD R LC1 D09D38 and DT20DT40 LC1 D40D65 LC1 D80 and D95 LC1 D115 and D150 Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference LA9 D941 LA9 D901 LAD 9ET1 LAD 9ET2 LAD 9ET3 LAD 9ET4 Weight kg 0.025 0.005 0.026 0.012 0.004 0.004
LA9 D941
Marking accessories
Description Application Contactors (except 4P), LC1 D40D115), LAD N (4 contacts), LA6 DK LAD N (2 contacts), LAD T, LAD R, LRD Contactors (except 4P), LC1 D40D115), LAD (4 contacts), LA6 DK All products Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference LAD 21 Sheet of 64 blank legends, self-adhesive, 8 x 33 mm (1) Sheet of 112 blank legends, self-adhesive, 8 x 12mm (1) Sheet of 64 blank legends for marking using plotter or 8 x 33 mm engraver Sheet of 440 blank legends for marking using plotter or 8 x 12 mm engraver Marker holder, snap-in 8 x 22 mm Marker holder, snap-in 8 x 18 mm Weight kg 0.020
810454
LAD 9ETp
10 10
LAD 22 LAD 23
0.020 0.050
563527
35
LAD 24
0.200
SIS-L
s uette are ion d'tiq ette softw di etich crat oftware etiquetas lling ione Labe iel de ngss crear Logic hriftu para la creaz Besc are Softw are per Softw
abel
Gerin n Merlin Modico D canique Square Teleme
XBY 2U
Bag of 300 blank legends self-adhesive, 7 x 21 mm SIS Label labelling software supplied on CD-Rom Mounting plate
4-pole contactors, LC1 D40...D80, LA6 DK LC1 D09...38, LC1 DT20...40, LAD N (4 contacts), LAD T, LAD R On holder LA9 D92 Multi-language version: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
100 100
LA9 D92 LAD 90
0.001 0.001
1 1
LA9 D93 XBY 2U
0.001 0.100
For replacement of LC1 F115 or 1 LA9 D730 F150 by LC1 D115 or D150 Set of shims For fitting side mounting blocks 1 LA9 D511 LAD 8N on LC1 D40 to D95 (1) These legends are for sticking onto the safety cover of the contactors or add-on block, if fitted. 0.360 0.020
5/75
References
TeSys contactors
a.c. coils for 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D
For contactors a LC1 D09...D38 and LC1 DT20DT40

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos = 0.75) 70 VA, - sealed (cos = 0.3) 50 Hz: 7 VA, 60 Hz: 7.5 VA Operating range ( y 60 C): 50 Hz: 0.81.1 Uc, 60 Hz: 0.851.1 Uc. Control circuit voltage Uc V
810391
Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 6.3 5.6 6.19 12.3 19.15 25 130 159 192.5 417 539 595 645 781 1580 1810 1938 2242 2300 2499 3432 3600 5600
Inductance of closed circuit H 0.26 0.24 0.26 0.48 0.77 1 5.5 6.7 7.5 16 22 21 25 30 60 64 74 79 85 119 135 190
Reference (1)
Weight kg
12 21 (2) 24 32 36 LXD 1pp 42 48 60 100 110
50/60 Hz LXD 1J7 LXD 1Z7 LXD 1B7 LXD 1C7 LXD 1CC7 LXD 1D7 LXD 1E7 LXD 1EE7 LXD 1K7 LXD 1F7 LXD 1FE7 LXD 1G7 LXD 1FC7 LXD 1L7 LXD 1LE7 LXD 1M7 LXD 1P7 LXD 1U7 LXD 1W7 LXD 1Q7 LXD 1V7 LXD 1N7 LXD 1R7 LXD 1T7 LXD 1S7 LXD 1SC7 LXD 1X7 LXD 1Y7
0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
115 120 127 200 208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 480 500 575 600 690
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code. (2) Voltage for special coils fitted in contactors with serial timer modules. with 24 V supply.
5/76
TeSys contactors
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D40, D50, D65, D80, D95

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos = 0.75) 50 Hz: 200 VA, 60 Hz: 220 VA, - sealed (cos = 0.3) 50 Hz: 20 VA, 60 Hz: 22 VA Operating range ( y 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc. Control circuit voltage Uc V
810394
Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 1.4 2.6 4.4 5.5 31 31 41 127 133 152 166 381 411 463 513 668 1220
Inductance of closed circuit H 0.09 0.16 0.27 0.35 1.9 1.9 2.4 7.5 8.1 8.7 10 22 25 26 30 38 67
Reference (1)
Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 1.05 4.2 22 28 86 98 120 157 300 392 480 675 775
Inductance of closed circuit H 0.06 0.23 1.2 1.5 4.3 4.8 5.7 8 14 19 23 33 36
Reference (1)
Weight
kg 60 Hz LX1 D6B6 LX1 D6E6 LX1 D6F6 LX1 D6G6 LX1 D6L6 LX1 D6M6 LX1 D6U6 LX1 D6W6 LX1 D6Q6 LX1 D6R6 LX1 D6T6 LX1 D6S6 LX1 D6X6 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280
LX1 D6pp
24 32 42 48 110 115 120 127 208 220 220/230 230 240 256 277 380 380/400 400 415 440 480 500 575 600 660
50 Hz LX1 D6B5 LX1 D6C5 LX1 D6D5 LX1 D6E5 LX1 D6F5 LX1 D6FE5 LX1 D6G5 LX1 D6M5 LX1 D6P5 LX1 D6U5 LX1 D6W5 LX1 D6Q5 LX1 D6V5 LX1 D6N5 LX1 D6R5 LX1 D6S5 LX1 D6Y5
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 245 VA at 50 Hz, - sealed (cos = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 26 VA at 50 Hz, Operating range ( 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc. 50/60 Hz LX1 D6B7 LX1 LX1 LX1 LX1 LX1 LX1 LX1 LX1 LX1 LX1 LX1 LX1 D6D7 D6E7 D6F7 D6FE7 D6G7 D6M7 D6P7 D6U7 D6Q7 D6V7 D6N7 D6R7
24 42 48 110 115 120 220/230 (2) 230 230/240 (3) 380/400 (4) 400 415 440
1.22 3.5 5 26 32 102 115 131 310 349 390 410
0.08 0.25 0.32 1.7 2 6.7 7.7 8.3 20 23 24 27
0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code. (2) For use on 230 V 50 Hz, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 5/48 and 5/49. This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz. (3) This coil can be used on 220/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz. (4) For use on 400 V 50 Hz, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 5/48 and 5/49.
5/77
TeSys contactors
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D115

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos = 0.8) 50 or 60 Hz: 300 VA, - sealed (cos = 0.3) 50 or 60 Hz: 22 VA Operating range ( y 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc. Control circuit voltage Uc V
565140
Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 1.24 2.14 3.91 4.51 26.53 26.53 32.75 104.77 104.77 125.25 338.51 368.43 368.43 441.56 566.62
Inductance of closed circuit H 0.09 0.17 0.28 0.36 2.00 2.00 2.44 7.65 8.29 8.89 22.26 25.55 27.65 30.34 38.12
Reference (1)
Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 0.87 3.91 19.97 24.02 67.92 79.61 97.04 125.75 243.07 338.51 368.43
Inductance of closed circuit H 0.07 0.28 1.45 1.70 5.06 5.69 6.75 8.89 17.04 22.26 25.55
Reference (1)
Weight
kg 60 Hz LX1 D8B6 LX1 D8E6 LX1 D8F6 LX1 D8G6 LX1 D8L6 LX1 D8M6 LX1 D8U6 LX1 D8W6 LX1 D8Q6 LX1 D8R6 LX1 D8T6 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260
LX1 D8pp
24 32 42 48 110 115 120 127 208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 480 500
50 Hz LX1 D8B5 LX1 D8C5 LX1 D8D5 LX1 D8E5 LX1 D8F5 LX1 D8FE5 LX1 D8FC5 LX1 D8M5 LX1 D8P5 LX1 D8U5 LX1 D8Q5 LX1 D8V5 LX1 D8N5 LX1 D8R5 LX1 D8S5
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D115, LC1 D150

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush cos = 0.9 - 280 to 350 VA, - sealed cos = 0.9 - 2 to 18 VA. Operating range ( y 55 C): 0.81.15 Uc. Coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard, class B. Control circuit voltage Uc V Average resistance at 20 C 10 % Inductance of closed circuit H Reference (1) Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 147 301 498 1061 4377 4377 4377 6586 10 895 9895 9895 9895 21 988 21 011 21 011 21 011 21 501 32 249 32 249 Inductance of closed circuit H 3.03 8.28 13.32 24.19 109.69 109.69 109.69 152.65 260.15 210.72 210.72 210.72 533.17 482.42 482.42 482.42 507.47 938.41 938.41 50/60 Hz LX1 D8B7 LX1 D8C7 LX1 D8D7 LX1 D8E7 LX1 D8F7 LX1 D8FE7 LX1 D8G7 LX1 D8FC7 LX1 D8LE7 LX1 D8M7 LX1 D8P7 LX1 D8U7 LX1 D8UE7 LX1 D8Q7 LX1 D8V7 LX1 D8N7 LX1 D8R7 LX1 D8T7 LX1 D8S7 Reference (1) Weight
kg 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290
24 32 42 48 110 115 120 127 208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 480 500 (1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
5/78
References
TeSys contactors
d.c. coils for 3 or 4-pole contactors
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D40D65 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D40D65

Specifications
Average consumption: 22 W. Operating range: 0.851.1 Uc. Control circuit voltage Uc V 12 24 36 48 60 72 LX4 D6pD 110 125 220 250 440 Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 7.1 26.8 58 109 173 234 560 717 2255 2940 9080 Inductance of closed circuit H 0.44 1.69 3.55 6.86 10.9 14.7 35.28 45.2 142 185 572 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415
565142
LX4 D6JD LX4 D6BD LX4 D6CD LX4 D6ED LX4 D6ND LX4 D6SD LX4 D6FD LX4 D6GD LX4 D6MD LX4 D6UD LX4 D6RD
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D80

Specifications
Average consumption: 22 W. Operating range: 0.851.1 Uc. Control circuit voltage Uc V 12 24 36 48 60 72 LX4 D7pD 110 125 220 250 440 Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 6.6 27 57 107 170 230 564 718 2215 2850 9195 Inductance of closed circuit H 0.46 1.89 4 7.5 11.9 16.1 39.5 50.3 155 200 640 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680
565142
LX4 D7JD LX4 D7BD LX4 D7CD LX4 D7ED LX4 D7ND LX4 D7SD LX4 D7FD LX4 D7GD LX4 D7MD LX4 D7UD LX4 D7RD
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
5/79
References
TeSys contactors
d.c. coils for 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D
For contactors LC1 D115, D150

Specifications
Consumption: inrush 270 to 365 W, sealed 2.4 to 5.1 W. Operating range: 0.71.2 Uc. Coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard, class B. Control circuit voltage Uc V 24 Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 147 Inductance of closed circuit H 3.03 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.300
565142
LX4 D8BD
48
1061
24.19
LX4 D8ED
0.300
60
1673
38.44
LX4 D8ND
0.300
72
2500
56.27
LX4 D8SD
0.300
110
4377
109.69
LX4 D8FD
0.300
125
6586
152.65
LX4 D8GD
0.300
220 LX4 D8pD 250
9895
210.72
LX4 D8MD
0.300
18 022
345.40
LX4 D8UD
0.300
440
21 501
684.66
LX4 D8RD
0.300
5/80
References
TeSys contactors
Wide range d.c. coils
(for specific applications)
for 3 or 4-pole contactors

For 3-pole contactors LC1 D40D65 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D40D65
Specifications
Average consumption: 22 W. Operating range: 0.751.2 Uc. Coils with "TH" treatment as standard. Control circuit voltage Uc V 12 24 36 48 72 110 LX4 D6pW 220 Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 6.8 30 53 110 215 580 2120 Inductance of closed circuit H 0.45 1.9 3.5 7.2 14.2 38.3 140 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415
565143
LX4 D6JW LX4 D6BW LX4 D6CW LX4 D6EW LX4 D6SW LX4 D6FW LX4 D6MW
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D80

Specifications
Average consumption: 23 W. Operating range: 0.75 to 1.2 Uc Coils with "TH" treatment as standard. Control circuit voltage Uc V 12 24 36 48 72 110 220 Average resistance at 20 C 10 % 6.2 23.5 51.9 94.2 204 483 1922 Inductance of closed circuit H 0.49 1.75 4.18 7 15.7 36 144 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680
LX4 D7JW LX4 D7BW LX4 D7CW LX4 D7EW LX4 D7SW LX4 D7FW LX4 D7MW
5/81
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys d contactors
LC1 D09D18 (3-pole)

44
LC1 D25D38 (3-pole), LC1 DT20DT40 (4-pole)

44
LA4 b1
LA4 b1
10 c1 c2 c3
LC1
12,5 (LAD 8)
45
12,5 (LAD 8) (1)
10 c1 c2 c3
D099 D129 80 95.5 111.5 (1) 120.5 (1) 127.5 (1) 84 86 117 129 137 141 D25 D38 85 98 114 (1) 123 (1) 130 (1) 90 92 123 135 143 147
12,5 (LAD 8)
45
12,5 (LAD 8) (1)
b without add-on blocks b1 with LAD 4BB with LA4 Dp2 with LA4 DF, DT with LA4 DW, DL c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6 DK10, LAD 6K10 c3 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover (1) Including LAD 4BB
D09D18 D093 D123 77 99 94 107 110 (1) 123 (1) 119 (1) 132 (1) 126 (1) 139 (1) 84 84 86 86 117 117 129 129 137 137 141 141
D183 D323 99 107 123 (1) 132 (1) 139 (1) 90 92 123 135 143 147
DT20 & DT25 85 98 114 129 190 90 92 123 135 143 147
DT203 & DT253 99 90 92 123 135 143 147
DT32 & DT40 91 97 99 131 143 151 155
DT323 & DT403 105 97 99 131 143 151 155
LC1 D40D65 (3-pole), LC1 D65004, D40008 & D65008 (4-pole)

32 44
LC1 D80 & D95 (3-pole), LC1 D80004 & D80008 (4-pole)
32 44
LA4 b1
LA4
b1
127
12
c c1 c2 c3
12,5 (LAD 8)
12,5 (LAD 8)
12
c c1 c2 c3
127
12,5 (LAD 8)
12,5 (LAD 8)
LC1 a b1 with LA4 Dp2 with LA4 DB3 with LA4 DF, DT with LA4 DM, DW, DL c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD N (1 contact) with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6 DK c3 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover LC1 a b1 with LA4 DA2 with LA4 DF, DT with LA4 DM, DL with LA4 DW c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6 DK20 c3 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover Selection : pages 5/160 to 5/191
D40D65 75 135 142 150 114 119 139 147 159 167 171 D115, D150 120 174 185 188 188 132 136 150 155 168 172
D40008 85 135 142 150 125 139 147 159 167 171 D115004 150 174 185 188 188 132 150 155 168 172 D115006 120 174 185 188 188 115 150 155 168 172
D80, D65004 85 135 135 142 150 125 130 150 158 170 178 182 D150006 120 174 185 188 115 150 155 168 172 D1150046 155 174 185 188 188 115 150 155 168 172
D95, D65008 85 135 142 150 125 130 150 158 170 178 182
D80004 96 135 142 150 125 150 158 170 178 182
D80008 96 135 142 150 140 150 158 170 178 182
LC1 D115 and D150 (3-pole), LC1 D115004 (4-pole)

LAD 8
LA4
10 158 b1 a
c c1 c2 c3
5/82
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys d contactors
LC1 D09D18 (3-pole)

LC1 D25D38 (3-pole)

10 c1 c2 c3
45
10 c1 c2 c3
D09D18 77 93 95 126 138 146 150 D093D123 99 93 95 126 138 146 150
45
LC1 b c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6 DK10 c3 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
D099D129 80 93 95 126 138 146 150
D25D38 85 99 101 132 144 152 156
D183D323 99 99 101 132 144 152 156
LC1 DT20 to DT40 (4-pole)

10 c1 c2 c3
LC1 b c c1 c2 c3
45
5
DT20 & DT25 D098 & D128 85 99 123 135 143 147 DT203 & DT253 D0983 & D1283 99 99 123 135 143 147 DT32 & DT40 D188D258 91 107 131 143 151 155 DT323 & DT403 D1883 & D2583 105 107 131 143 151 155
with with with with with
cover LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) LA6 DK10 LAD T, R, S LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
LC1 D40D65 (3-pole) LC1 D65004, LP1 D40008D65008 (4-pole)

LC1 D80 & D95 (3-pole) LP1 D80004, LP1 D80008 (4-pole)
12 c1 c2 c3
127
85
12 c1 c2 c3
LP1 D65004 171 196 202 213 221 225
127
96
LC1 D40D65 c without cover or add-on blocks 171 with cover, without add-on blocks 176 c1 with LAD N (1 contact) 196 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 202 c2 with LA6 DK10 213 c3 with LAD T, R, S 221 with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 225 LC1 D115ppp and LC1 D150ppp with c coil: see page 5/82 Selection : pages 5/160 to 5/191 Characteristics : pages 5/46 to 5/51
LP1 D40008 & D65008 182 196 202 213 221 225
LC1 D80 & D95 181 186 204 210 221 229 233
LP1 D80004 181 204 210 221 229 233
LP1 D80008 196 204 210 221 229 233
5/83
Mounting
TeSys contactors
TeSys d contactors
LC1 D09D38, DT20DT40

On mounting rail AM1 DP200, DR200 or AM1 DE200 (width 35 mm)
LC1 D40D95, LP1 D40D80

On mounting rail AM1 DL200 or DL201 (width 75 mm) On mounting rail AM1 EDppp or AM1 DE200 (width 35 mm)
=
= =
c c
LC1 b c c
D09D18 D25D38 DT2 & DT25 77 85 85 (AM1 DP200 or DR200) (1) 88 94 94 (AM1 DE200) (1) 96 102 102
DT32 & DT40 100 109 117
Control circuit: a.c. LC1 c c c (AM1 DL200) (1) (AM1 DL201) (1) (AM1 EDppp or DE200) (1)
=
D40D65 136 126 126
127
D80 & D95 147 137 137
Control circuit: d.c. b 77 c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) (1) 97 c (AM1 DE200) (1) 105
85 103 110
94 103 111
109 118 1236
Control circuit: d.c. LC1 c (AM1 DL200) (1) c (AM1 DL201) (1) LP1 c (AM1 DL200) c (AM1 DL201) (1) with safety cover.
D40D65 193 183 D40 188 178 D65 188 178
D80 & D95 203 203 D80 198 198
(1) with safety cover.
LC1 D115, D150

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
100
= 158
LC1 D40D95, LP1 D40D80

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
DZ5 ME5
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c. LC1 c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) c (AM1 DE200 or EDppp)
D115 & D150 134.5 142.5
D1156 & D1506 117.5 125.5
Control circuit: a.c. LC1 c with cover Control circuit: d.c. LC1 c with cover LP1 c
D40D65 119
D80 & D95 130
120
110
D40D65 176 D40 & D65 171
D80 & D95 186 D80 181
15
40
5/84
TeSys contactors
TeSys d contactors
LC1 D09D38 and LC1 DT20DT40

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB Control circuit: LC1 c with cover G H H1 4-pole contactors LC1 c G H H1 a.c. D09D18 86 35 60 70 DT20 & DT25 92 35 60 70 D25D38 92 35 60 70 DT32 & DT40 100 35 60 70 d.c. D09D18 95 35 70 70 DT20 & DT25 101 35 70 70 D25D38 101 35 70 70 DT32 & DT40 109 35 70 70
DZ5 ME8
H1
15
LC1 D09D38 and LC1 DT20DT40

On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC
LC1 D40D95, LP1 D40D80

On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC
AF1 EA4
G
c 40
a.c. D40D65 119
Control circuit: LC1 c with cover G H LC1 c with cover G H
a.c. D09D18 86 35 60/70 DT20 & DT25 80 35 60 AC
D25D38 92 35 60/70 DT32 & DT40 93 35 60
d.c. D09D18 95 35 70 DT20 & DT25 118 35 60 DC
D25D38 101 35 70 DT32 & DT40 132 35 60
Control circuit: LC1 c with cover LP1 c without cover
D80 & D95 130
d.c. D40D65 176 D40 & D65 171
110 AF1 EA6
D80 & D95 186 D80 181
LC1 D09D38
Panel mounted
LC1 D40D95, LP1 D40 D80

Panel mounted
2xM4
2xM4
2x4,5 =
60/70
c
Control circuit: LC1 c with cover 4-pole contactors LC1 c with cover
35
35
= c
Control circuit: LC1 c with cover LP1 c without cover a.c. D40D65 119
100/110 = 40 = 3x6,5
D25D38 101 DT32 & DT40 98 D80 & D95 130 d.c. D4D65 176
a.c. D09D18 86 DT20 & DT25 90
D25D38 92 DT32 & DT40 98
d.c. D09D18 95 DT20 & DT25 90
50
D80 & D95 186
D40 & D65 D80 171 181
LC1 D115, D150

Panel mounted
130 158
c
LC1 c G (3-pole) G (4-pole)
D115 132 96/110 130/144
D1156 115 96/110 130/144
D150 132 96/110
D1506 115 96/110
5/85
Schemes
TeSys contactors
TeSys d contactors
Contactors
3-pole contactors (References: pages 5/58 to 5/61)
LC1 D09 to D150
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 13/NO 14 21/NC 22
A2
A1
T1/2
4-pole contactors (References: pages 5/60 and 5/61)

LC1 DT20 to DT40
3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 7/L4 21/NC 13/NO
T2/4
T3/6
LC1 D115004
3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 7/L4
LC1 D098 to D258

13/NO 21/NC R1 R3
LC1 and LP1 D40008 to D80008

R1 R3 R4
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T4/8
T3/6
T4/8
R4
A2
14
22
14
22
A1
1 73/NO 2 74 73/NO 74 32 31/NC 31/NC 32 42 41/NC 44 43/NO 84 83/NO 84 83/NO
T1/2
T2/4
Front mounting add-on contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/69)
1 N/O LAD N10 (1)
43 NO 43/NO
1 N/C LAD N01 (1)

41/NC (92)
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11

61/NC 53/NO
R2
2 N/O LAD N20

53/NO 63/NO
(94)
62
44 (93)
42 (91)
5
2 N/C LAD N02
51/NC 61/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22

53/NO 61/NC 83/NO 71/NC
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13

53/NO 81/NC 61/NC 71/NC
54
4 N/O LAD N40

53/NO 63/NO
52
62
62
72
82
54
84
54
62
72
54
54
4 N/C LAD N04

51/NC 71/NC 61/NC 81/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LAD C22
53/NO 87/NO 61/NC 75/NC
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31

53/NO 61/NC
54
62
76
52
72
62
82
88
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 5/69)

1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11G
43/NO 31/NC
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11P

13/NO 21/NC

53/NO 63/NO 31/NC 41/NC

13/NO 21/NC
54
32
42
54
64
32
44

31/NC 43/NO 53/NO 63/NO
14
3 N/O + 1 N/C LADN31P

13/NO 21/NC 33/NO 43/NO
22

31/NC 51/NC 63/NO 41/NC
14

13/NO 21/NC
32
22
14
34
44
32
44
54
64
52
42
(1) Items in brackets are for blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.
64
5/86
14
22
22
62
64
64
R2
Schemes (continued)
TeSys contactors
TeSys d contactors
Front mounting add-on contact blocks

Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/69)
2 N/O (24-50 V) LA1 DX20
53/NO 63/NO
2 N/C (24-50 V) LA1 DX02

51/NC 61/NC
2 N/O (5-24 V) LA1 DY20

53/NO 63/NO
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) 2 N/O standard LA1 DZ40

53/NO 83/NO 63/NO 73/NO
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard LA1 DZ31

53/NO 73/NO 74 61/NC 83/NO 84
64
52
54
64
62
54
64
54
74
84
Time delay auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/70)

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD T
67/NO 55/NC
Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD R

57/NO 65/NC
On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD S

67/NO 55/NC
56
68
58
56
Mechanical latch blocks (References: page 5/70)

LAD 6K10 and LA6 DK20
E1
A2
A1
Side mounting add-on contact blocks

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/69)
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD 8N11 (1)
153/NO 161/NC (172)
E2
2 N/O LAD 8N20 (1)

153/NO (184) 163/NO (174)
66
2 N/C LAD 8N02 (1)

251/NC (282) 261/NC (272)
68
54
62
(184)
154 (183)
(1) Items in brackets are for blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor. Electronic serial timer modules On-delay LA4 DTpU
154 (183)
162 (171)
164 (173)
252 (281)
262 (271)
Auto-Man-Stop control modules LA4 DM p
A1
A1
A2
Auto /man I/O
A1
A2
A1
B1
(1)
(1) PLC.
Interface modules
Relay interface
LA4 DFp
E2 E1 +
Relay with manual override

LA4 DFBQ
E2 E1 +
A2
A2
Solid state
LA4 DWBp
LA4 DL p
E2 E1 +
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
E2
E1 +
References: page 5/73.
A2
5/87
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys d reversing contactors
LC2 D09 to D38

2 x LC1 D09 to D38
LC2DT20 to DT40
2 x LC1 DT20 to DT40
e1
60/70
e2
a
LC1 or 2 x LC1 a b c (1) D09 to D18 a 90 77 86 D093 to D123 a 90 99 86 D09 to D18 c 90 77 95 D093 to D123 c 90 99 95 D25 to D38 a 90 85 92 D183 to D383 a 90 99 92 D25 to D32 c 90 85 101 D183 to D383 c 90 99 101 e1 and e2: including cabling. (1) With safety cover, without add-on block. e1 4 4 9 9 e2 1.5 1.5 5 5 G 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 LC2 or 2 x LC1 DT20 and DT25 DT32 and DT40 c, e: including cabling. a 90 90 b 85 91
e2
G a
c 90 98
=
G 80 80
60/70 = e1 = 6x6,5 G1
LC2 D40 to D95

2 x LC1 D40 to D95 a 2 x LC1 D40 to D95 a
6x6,5 e1 = G1 = 8
2xM4
2xM4
= 8
100/110
13
e2
e2
40
G a
40 =
40
G a
40
LC2 or 2 x LC1 a D40 to D65 a 165 D65004 a 182 D80 and D95 a 182 D80004 a 207 c, e1 and e2: including cabling.
b 127 127 127 127
c 142 133 158 158
e1 5 13
e2 11 20
G 50 57 57 71
G1 90 97 96 111
2 x LC1 a D40 to D65 182 D80 and D95 207 c, e1 and e2: including cabling.
b 127 127
c 190 215
e1 5 13
e2 11 20
G 57 96
LC2 D115 and D150

2 x LC1 D115 and D150
e1
158
c
LC2 or 2 x LC1 a D115 and D150 266 D115004 334 c, e1 and e2: including cabling. Selection : pages 5/160 to 5/191
e2
G a
c 148 148
e1 56
e2 18 60
G 242/256 310/324
Schemes : page 5/89
5/88
130
13
G1 97 111
100/110
5
b
Schemes
TeSys contactors
TeSys d reversing contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control

LC2 D09D150 Horizontally mounted LAD 9R1V With integral electrical interlocking
L1 L2 L3 13/NO
L1
L2
L3 13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
21/NC
21/NC
13/NO
A1
A1
A1
21/NC
A2
A2
A2
22
14
14
22
22
14
Changeover contactor pairs

LC2 DT20DT40 Horizontally mounted LAD T9R1V With integral electrical interlocking
1N 2/L1 2/L2 1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 2/L3 2N
1N
2/L1
2/L2
1/L1
1/L2
1/L3
13/NO
2/L3
2N
13/NO
13/NO
14
21/NC
21/NC
21/NC
13/NO
22
A1
A1
21/NC 22
A2 A2 A1
A1
A2
A2
22
22
A2
22
14
14
14
14
A1
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
Electrical interlocking of reversing contactors fitted with:

Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts LA9 Dppp02 Mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts LA9 Dppp78, LAD 9R1
02
A1
A2
A1
01
A2
02
KM2 01
KM1
01 KM1 02
A1 A1 A1
KM2
A1
02
KM1
01
KM2 A2 A2
KM1 A2 A2
KM2
A2
Low speed-High speed cabling kit, screw clamp terminals

L1 L2 L3
A2
Low speed-High speed cabling kit, spring terminals

L1 L2 L3
13/NO
13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
N 21/NC
21/NC
21/NC
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
22
14
22
14
14
22
13
R1
13
R1
R3
21
R3
A1
A2
A2
A1
R2
R4
R2
R4
14
22
W1
U1
U2
LAD 3PV/GV10
PV GV
PV
GV
W2
V1
V2
14
22
21
LAD 9PV/GV
LAD 3PV/GV
14
22
A2
A1
5/89
References
TeSys contactors
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks, used for power factor correction,
Direct connection without choke inductors
Special contactors
Special contactors LC1 DpK are designed for switching 3-phase, single or multiple-step capacitor banks; they conform to standards IEC 60070 and 60831, NFC 54-100, VDE 0560, UL and CSA.
Contactor applications
Specification Contactors fitted with a block of early make poles and damping resistors, limiting the value of the current on closing to 60 In max. This current limitation increases the life of all the components of the installation, in particular that of the fuses and capacitors. The patented design of the add-on block (n 90 119-20) ensures safety and long life of the installation. Operating conditions There is no need to use choke inductors for either single or multiple-step capacitor banks. Short-circuit protection must be provided by gI type fuses rated at 1.72 In. Maximum operational power
811966
The power values given in the selection table below are for the following operating conditions: Prospective peak current at switch-on Maximum operating rate Electrical durability at nominal load LC1 DpK LC1 DFK, DGK, DLK, DMK, DPK LC1 DTK, DWK All contactor ratings 400 V 690 V Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Tightening torque on cable end 200 In 240 operating cycles/hour 100 operating cycles/hour 300 000 operating cycles 200 000 operating cycles Weight
Operational power at 50/60 Hz (1) y 55 C (2)
5
LC1 DFK11pp
220 V 240 V kVAR 6.7
400 V 440 V kVAR 12.5
660 V 690 V kVAR 18
N/O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N/C 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2
N.m 1.2 1.2 1.7 1.7 1.9 1.9 2.5 2.5 5 5 9
LC1 DFK11pp LC1 DFK02pp LC1 DGK11pp LC1 DGK02pp LC1 DLK11pp LC1 DLK02pp LC1 DMK11pp LC1 DMK02pp LC1 DPK12pp LC1 DTK12pp LC1 DWK12pp
kg 0.430 0.430 0.450 0.450 0.600 0.600 0.630 0.630 1.300 1.300 1.650
8.5
16.7
24
10
811967
20
30
15
25
36
20 25 40
33.3 40 60
48 58 92
Switching of multiple-step capacitor banks (with equal or different power ratings)

The correct contactor for each step is selected from the above table, according to the power rating of the step to be switched. Example: 50 kVAR 3-step capacitor bank. Temperature: 50 C and U = 400 V or 440 V. One 25 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DMK, one 15 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DGK, and one 10 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DFK. (1) Operational power of the contactor according to the scheme on the page opposite. (2) The average temperature over a 24-hour period, in accordance with standards IEC 60070 and 60831 is 45 C. (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 For other voltages between 24 and 440 V, please consult your Regional Sales Office LC1 DPK12pp
Dimensions, schemes : page 5/91
5/90
Dimensions, schemes
TeSys contactors
5
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks, used for power factor correction
Dimensions
LC1 DFK, DGK LC1 DPK, DTK
130
74
180
45
127
150
LC1 DFK DGK c 117 122 Type of fixing LC1 D12 See pages 5/84 and 5/85 LC1 D18 See pages 5/84 and 5/85 LC1 DPK DTK Type of fixing LC1 D40 LC1 D50
75
See pages 5/84 and 5/85 See pages 5/84 and 5/85
LC1 DLK, DMK
LC1 DWK
140
84
5
200 127 157
56
85
LC1 DLK DMK
c 117 122
Type of fixing LC1 D25 See pages 5/84 and 5/85 LC1 D32 See pages 5/84 and 5/85
LC1 DWK
Type of fixing LC1 D80
See pages 5/84 and 5/85
Schemes
LC1 DpK
R
1/L1
A2
A1
3/L2 4/T2
2/T1
6/T3
5/L3 R
R = Pre-wired resistor connections. Cabling (maximum permissible c.s.a.) Contactor type LC1 DFK Number of conductors 1 Flexible cable with cable end (mm2) 2.5 Solid cable with cable end (mm2) 4 References : page 5/90
2 1.5 4
DGK 1 4 6
2 2.5 6
DLK 1 4 10
2 4 6
DMK 1 6 16
2 4 10
DPK, DTK 1 2 16 6 25 16
DWK 1 50 50
2 25 35
5/91
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
From 115 to 2750 A
Applications
Control of all types of motor for standard or severe duty applications Control of resistive, inductive and capacitive circuits: heating, lighting, cos rectification, transformers, normal-standby
Ie max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) Ie max AC-1 ( y 40 C)
115 A 200 A
150 A 250 A
185 A 275 A
225 A 315 A
265 A 350 A
330 A 400 A
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
Number of poles
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
Rated operational power in category AC-3
220/240 V 380/400 V 415 V
30 kW 55 kW 59 kW 59 kW 75 kW 80 kW 65 kW
40 kW 75 kW 80 kW 80 kW 90 kW 100 kW 65 kW
55 kW 90 kW 100 kW 100 kW 110 kW 110 kW 100 kW
63 kW 110 kW 110 kW 110 kW 129 kW 129 kW 100 kW
75 kW 132 kW 140 kW 140 kW 160 kW 160 kW 147 kW
100 kW 160 kW 180 kW 200 kW 200 kW 220 kW 160 kW
440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks
Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1 D contactors (contacts: instantaneous LA1 DNpp, time delay LA2 DT or LA3 DR, dust and damp protected LA1 DX or DY or DZ)
Associated thermal overload relays
Manual-auto Electronic
LR9 F LT6
Interfaces
Specific Universal
LA4 FWB With or without, depending on the control circuit
Contactor type
LC1 F115
LC1 F150
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
Reversing contactor type
LC2 F115
LC2 F150
LC2 F185
LC2 F225
LC2 F265
For customer assembly 5/102 and 5/103 5/106 to 5/109
Pages
5/102 and 5/103 5/104 and 5/105
5/92
400 A 500 A
500 A 700 A
630 A 1000 A
780 A 1600 A
800 A 1000 A
750 A 800 A
1000 A 1250 A
1500 A 2000 A
1800 A 2750 A
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
2, 3 or 4
2, 3 or 4
2, 3 or 4
3 or 4
1 to 4
1 to 4
1 to 4
1 to 4
110 kW 200 kW 220 kW 250 kW 257 kW 280 kW 185 kW
147 kW 250 kW 280 kW 295 kW 355 kW 335 kW 335 kW
200 KW 335 kW 375 kW 400 kW 400 kW 450 kW 450 kW
220 kW 400 kW 425 kW 425 kW 450 kW 475 kW 450 kW
250 kW 450 kW 450 kW 450 kW 450 kW 475 kW 450 kW
220 kW 400 kW 425 kW 450 kW 500 kW 560 kW 530 kW
280 kW 500 kW 530 kW 560 kW 600 kW 670 kW 530 kW
425 kW 750 kW 800 kW 800 kW 700 kW 750 kW 670 kW
500 kW 900 kW 900 kW 900 kW 900 kW 900 kW 750 kW
4 instantaneous contact compositions: 2 N/C + 2 N/O, 3 N/O + 1 N/C, 1 N/O + 3 N/C or 4 N/O
LR9 F LT6
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F780
LC1 F800
LC1 BL
LC1 BM
LC1 BP
LC1 BR
For customer assembly
5/146 and 5/147 5/148
5/93
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F (115 to 800 A)
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
Environment
Contactor type Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Operation Permissible at Uc (1) Without derating Without derating C C C m Coil not connected to the power circuit V V kV LC1 F115 1000 1500 8 LC1 F150 1000 1500 8 LC1 F185 1000 1500 8
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, JEM 1038 CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS, LROS, CCC IP 2X front face with shrouds LA9 F Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F TH - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 40+ 70 3000
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions
5
(not to be used for LC1 F780) With derating Apply the following derating coefficients: 0.75 on the pull-in voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1. Apply the following derating coefficients: 1.15 on the pull-in voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1. In either case: neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and mechanical durabilities can be assured. Not to be used
Shock resistance (2) 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms
Contactor open Contactor closed
9 gn 15 gn 2 gn 6 gn
Vibration resistance (2) 5300 Hz
Contactor open Contactor closed
(1) In these conditions, it is recommended that LX9 F coils be used for contactor sizes F115 to F225. (2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). Where higher resistance to mechanical shock is required, select shock-proof contactors. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/94
LC1 F225 1000 1500 8
LC1 F265 1000 1500 8
LC1 F330 1000 1500 8
LC1 F400 1000 1500 8
LC1 F500 1000 1500 8
LC1 F630 1000 1500 8
LC1 F780 1000 1500 8
LC1 F800 1000 1500 8
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, JEM 1038 CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS, LROS, CCC IP 2X front face with shrouds LA9 F Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F TH - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 40+ 70 3000 - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 5+ 55 UL, CSA, GL, LROS
5
(not to be used for LC1 F780)
Apply the following derating coefficients: 0.75 on the pull-in voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1.
Apply the following derating coefficients: 1.15 on the pull-in voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1. In either case: neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and mechanical durabilities can be assured.
6 gn 15 gn 1.5 gn 5 gn
5 gn 15 gn 2.5 gn 5.5 gn
(1) In these conditions, it is recommended that LX9 F coils be used for contactor sizes F115 to F225. (2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). Where higher resistance to mechanical shock is required, select shock-proof contactors. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/95
TeSys contactors
Contactor type Number of poles Rated operational current (le) In AC-3, y 55 C (Ue y 440 V) In AC-1, y 40 C Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits Conventional thermal current Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity Up to Of the operational current (1) y 40 C A A V Hz A LC1 F115 3 or 4 115 200 1000 162/3200 200 LC1 F150 3 or 4 150 250 1000 162/3 200 250 LC1 F185 3 or 4 185 275 1000 162/3 200 275
I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 A I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 A A A A A A A A A m W W
Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4 Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4 1100 640 520 400 320 125 200 200 0.37 5 15 1200 700 600 450 350 160 200 250 0.35 8 22 1500 920 740 500 400 200 315 315 0.33 12 25
Maximum permissible current For 10 s No current flowing for preceding For 30 s 60 minutes with y 40 C For 1 min For 3 min For 10 min Short-circuit protection by fuses U y 440 V Motor circuit (type aM) With thermal overload relay (type gG) gG fuses At lth and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1
Average impedance per pole Power dissipation per pole for the above operational currents Connection Bar
Number of bars Bar Cable with lug Cable with connector Bolt diameter Tightening torque Power circuit connections
Maximum c.s.a. 2 2 2 mm 20 x 3 25 x 3 25 x 3 mm2 95 120 150 mm2 95 120 150 mm 6 8 8 N.m 10 18 18 (1) Sine wave without interference. Above these values, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/96
LC1 F225 3 or 4 225 315 1000 162/3200 315
LC1 F265 3 or 4 265 350 1000 162/3 200 350
LC1 F330 3 or 4 330 400 1000 16 2/3200 400
LC1 F400 2, 3 or 4 400 500 1000 162/3200 500
LC1 F500 2, 3 or 4 500 700 1000 162/3 200 700
LC1 F630 2, 3 or 4 630 1000 1000 16 2/3200 1000 1250
LC1 F780 3 or 4 780 1600 1000 162/3200 1600
LC1 F800 3 800 1000 1000 162/3 200 1000
1250
Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4 Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4 1800 1000 850 560 440 250 315 315 0.32 16 32 2200 1230 950 620 480 315 500 400 0.3 21 37 2650 1800 1300 900 750 400 500 500 0.28 31 44 3600 2400 1700 1200 1000 400 630 500 0.26 42 65 4200 3200 2400 1500 1200 500 800 800 0.18 45 88 5050 4400 3400 2200 1600 630 800 1000 0.12 48 120 6250 5600 4600 3000 2200 800 1000 2 x 800 (2) 0.10 60 250 5500 4600 3600 2600 1700 800 1000 1000 0.12 77 120
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 32 x 4 32 x 4 30 x 5 30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 60 x 5 185 240 240 2 x 150 2 x 240 185 240 10 10 10 10 10 12 35 35 35 35 35 58 (2) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturer's recommendations.
2 100 x 5 2 x 12 58
2 60 x 5 12 58
5/97
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Control circuit: a.c. supply
Control circuit characteristics with LX1 or LX9 coil

Contactor type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( y 55 C) 50 or 60 Hz coils 50 or 60 Hz V LC1 F115 241000 LC1 F150 LC1 F185
Operation Drop-out Operation Drop-out
0.851.1 Uc 0.350.55 Uc
40400 Hz coils
Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz Inrush 50 Hz coil 40400 Hz coil Cos Sealed 50 Hz coil 40400 Hz coil Cos 60 Hz coil 40400 Hz coil Cos 60 Hz coil 40400 Hz coil Cos
VA VA
550 0.3 45 0.3 660 0.3 55 0.3 1216 2335 515 10 2400 Min/max c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
550 0.3 45 0.3 660 0.3 55 0.3 1216 2335 515 10 2400
805 0.3 55 0.3 970 0.3 66 0.3 1824 2035 715 10 2400
VA VA
a 60 Hz Inrush
VA VA
Sealed
VA VA
Heat dissipation
W Closing "C" Opening "O" In millions of operating cycles ms ms
Operating time (1) Mechanical durability at Uc
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour at ambient temperature y 55 C Connection Flexible conductor 1 or 2 conductors without cable end Flexible conductor 1 conductor with cable end 2 conductors Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque Mechanical latching 1 or 2 conductors
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F. See pages 5/208 to 5/235. (1) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
5/98
LC1 F225 241000
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400 481000
LC1 F500
LC1 F630 481000
LC1 F780 110500
LC1 F800 110400
0.851.1 Uc 0.350.55 Uc
0.851.1 Uc 0.350.55 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.4 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc
805 0.3 55 0.3 970 0.3 66 0.3 1824 2035 715 10 2400 Min/max c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
650 0.9 10 0.9 650 0.9 10 0.9 8 4065 100170 10 2400
650 0.9 10 0.9 650 0.9 10 0.9 8 4065 100170 10 2400
1075 0.9 15 0.9 1075 0.9 15 0.9 14 4075 100170 10 2400
1100 0.9 18 0.9 1100 0.9 18 0.9 18 4075 100170 10 2400
1650 0.9 22 0.9 1650 0.9 22 0.9 20 4080 100200 5 1200
2100 0.9 50 0.9 2100 0.9 50 0.9 2 x 22 4080 130230 5 600
1700 0.9 12 1700 0.9 12 25 6080 150180 5 600
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F. See pages 5/208 to 5/235.
5/99
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Control circuit: d.c. supply
Control circuit characteristics with LX4 coil

Contactor type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( y 55 C) c Operation Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc c Inrush Sealed Average operating time at Uc (1) Closing "C" Opening "O" W W ms ms V LC1 F115 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 560 4,5 3040 3050 LC1 F150 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 560 4,5 3040 3050 LC1 F185 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 800 5 3040 3050
Mechanical durability at Uc Maximum operating rate at ambient temperaturey 55 C Connection Flexible conductor without cable end Flexible conductor with cable end
In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour
Note : The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. 10 10 10 2400 Min/max c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2 2400 2400
1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
5
Tightening torque
Mechanical latching
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F. See pages 5/208 to 5/235. (1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
5/100
LC1 F225 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 800 5 3040 3050
LC1 F265 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 750 5 4050 4065
LC1 F330 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 750 5 4050 4065
LC1 F400 48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 1000 6 5060 4560
LC1 F500 48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 1100 6 5060 4560
LC1 F630 48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 1600 9 6070 4050
LC1 F780 110440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.4 Uc 2 x 1000 2 x 21 7080 100130
LC1 F800 110400 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 1900 12 6080 4050
Nota : The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. 10 2400 Min/max c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2 10 2400 10 2400 10 2400 10 2400 5 1200 5 600 5 600
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F. See pages 5/208 to 5/235. (1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
5/101
References
TeSys contactors
For motor control in utilisation category AC-3 (115 to 800 A)
813080
3-pole contactors
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Rated operational current in cat. AC-3 220 V 380 V 660 V 440 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V up to kW 30 LC1 F225 40 55 kW 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 335 400 450 kW 59 80 100 110 140 180 220 280 375 425 450 kW 59 80 100 110 140 200 250 295 400 425 450 kW 75 90 110 129 160 200 257 355 400 450 450 kW 80 100 110 129 160 220 280 335 450 475 475 kW 65 65 100 100 147 160 185 335 450 450 450 A 115 150 185 225 265 330 400 500 630 780 800 Basic reference, Weight to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Screw fixing, cabling (1) LC1 F115pp LC1 F150pp LC1 F185pp LC1 F225pp LC1 F265pp LC1 F330pp LC1 F400pp LC1 F500pp LC1 F630pp LC1 F780pp LC1 F800pp kg 3.430 3.430 4.650 4.750 7.440 8.600 9.100 11.350 18.600 39.500 18.750
813079
63 75 100 110 147 200 LC1 F630 220 250
Nota : auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/110 to 5/115.
(1) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately, except on contactors LC1 F780 (see page 5/114). (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts a 24 48 110 115 120 208 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 LC1 F115F225 50 Hz (coil LX1) B5 E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5 60 Hz (coil LX1) E6 F6 G6 L6 M6 U6 Q6 R6 40400 Hz (coil LX9) E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LC1 F265F330 40400 Hz (coil LX1) B7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LC1 F400F630 40400 Hz (coil LX1) E7 F7 FE7 G7(3) L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LC1 F780 40400 Hz (coil LX1) F7 FE7 F7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LC1 F800 40400 Hz (coil LX4) (4) FW FW FW MW MW MW QW QW QW Volts c 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 400 440 LC1 F115F330 (coil LX4 F) BD ED FD GD MD MD UD RD LC1 F400F630 (coil LX4 F) ED FD GD MD UD RD LC1 F780 (coil LX4 F) FD GD MD UD RD LC1 F800 (coil LX4 F) FW FW MW MW QW (3) F7 for LC1 F630. (4) Coil LX4 F8pp + rectifier DR5STEpp.
5/102
TeSys contactors
For control in utilisation category AC-1 (200 to 1600 A)
2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum current in AC-1 ( y 40 C)
813082
Number of poles
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Screw fixing, cabling (1) LC1 F115pp LC1 F1154pp LC1 F150pp LC1 F1504pp LC1 F185pp LC1 F1854pp LC1 F225pp LC1 F2254pp LC1 F265pp LC1 F2654pp LC1 F330pp LC1 F3304pp LC1 F4002pp LC1 F400pp LC1 F4004pp LC1 F5002pp LC1 F500pp LC1 F5004pp LC1 F6302pp LC1 F630pp LC1 F6304pp LC1 F6302ppS011 LC1 F630ppS011 LC1 F6304ppS011 LC1 F780pp LC1 F7804pp
Weight
A 200 LC1 F1854 250
3 4 3 4
kg 3.430 3.830 3.430 3.830 4.650 5.450 4.750 5.550 7.440 8.540 8.600 9.500 8.000 9.100 10.200 9.750 11.350 12.950 15.500 18.600 21.500 15.500 18.600 21.500 39.500 48.000
275
3 4
315
813084
3 4
350
3 4
400
3 4
500 LC1 F4004
2 3 4
700
2 3 4
813083
1000
2 3 4
1250
2 3
LC1 F6304 1600
4 3 4
Nota : auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/110 to 5/115. (1) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately (except on contactors LC1 F780), see page 5/114. (2) Standard control circuit voltages, see previous page.
5/103
References
Contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control in utilisation category AC-3 (115 to 265 A), pre-assembled
3-pole reversing contactors (horizontally mounted)
(1) Weight
813149
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
Operational current in AC-3
LC2 F115
220 V 380 V 660 V 440 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V up to kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A 30 55 59 59 75 80 65 115
Maximum Contactors operasupplied tional without coil (2) voltage Complete reference Fixing, cabling (3) V 1000 LC2 F115
kg 7.560
40
75
80
80
90
100
65
150
1000
LC2 F150
7.560
55
90
100
100
110
110
100
185
1000
LC2 F185
10.100
63
110
110
110
129
129
100
225
1000
LC2 F225
14.200
75
132
140
140
160
160
147
265
1000
LC2 F265
16.480

Description Power terminal protection shrouds For reversing contactors LC2 F115 Quantity required 2 Reference LA9 F701 Weight kg 0.250
LC2 F150, F185
LA9 F702
0.250
5
LC2 F225, F265 Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules 2 LA9 F703 See pages 5/110 to 5/115 0.250
(1) Fitted with a mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/111 For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115 (2) Coils to be ordered separately: - a.c. supply, see pages 5/118 and 5/119, - d.c. supply, see page 5/121. (3) Screw fixing. Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately, see above.
5/104
Contactors
Changeover contactor pairs for control in utilisation category AC-1 (200 to 350 A), pre-assembled
4-pole changeover contactor pairs (horizontally mounted) (1)
813150
Utilisation category AC-1 Non inductive loads Maximum operational current < 40 C
Contactors supplied without coil (2) Complete reference Fixing, cabling (3) LC2 F1154
Weight
LC2 F1854
A 200
V 1000
kg 8.860
250
1000
LC2 F1504
8.860
275
1000
LC2 F1854
12.100
315
1000
LC2 F2254
15.200
350
1000
LC2 F2654
19.480

Description Power terminal protection shrouds For changeover pairs LC2 F1154 Quantity required 2 Reference LA9 F706 LA9 F707 Weight kg 0.250 0.250
LC2 F1504, F1854 2
LC2 F2254, F2654 2
LA9 F708
0.250
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules
See pages 5/110 to 5/115
(1) Fitted with a mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/111 For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115 (2) Coils to be ordered separately: - a.c. supply, see pages 5/118 and 5/119, - d.c. supply, see page 5/121. (3) Screw fixing. Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately, see above.
5/105
Combinations
Contactors
Reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs LC2 F
Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Horizontally mounted
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type : LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 F115 F150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800
Mechanical interlocks
Sets of power connections

Reversing contactors 3-pole changeover contactor pairs (1) LA9 F ppp82 (2)
1 1/L3 3 1/L2 5 1/L1 1 2/L1 3 2/L2 5 2/L3 L3 6
LA9 Fp970 (2)
LA9 Fppp76 (2)

L1 L2 3 L3
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
Vertically mounted
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type : LC1 F115 LC1 F150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F800 Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings, see page 5/108
LA9 FF4F LA9 FG4G LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 FH4H FJ4J FK4K FL4L
LC1 F780
LA9 FX970
(1) For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/108 and 5/109. (2) Complete references: see page 5/107.
5/106
L1
L2
A2
A1
References
Contactors
Reversing contactors and changeover pairs LC2 F

Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating
Contactor type (1) Set of power connections Reference Weight kg Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg
For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control

Horizontally mounted LC1 F115 LC1 F150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 or F800 Vertically mounted LC1 F115 or F150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 or F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 or F800 LC1 F780 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 FF976 F15076 FG976 F22576 FH976 FJ976 FJ976 FK976 FL976 0.600 0.600 0.780 1.500 1.500 2.100 2.100 2.350 3.800 LA9 FF970 LA9 FF970 LA9 FG970 LA9 FG970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FL970 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (3)
LA9 FF4F LA9 FG4G LA9 FG4G LA9 FH4H LA9 FJ4J LA9 FK4K LA9 FL4L LA9 FX970 (3)
0.345 0.350 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220 6.100
For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs (4)

Horizontally mounted LC1 F115 LC1 F150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 or F800 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 FF982 F15082 FG982 F22582 FH982 FJ982 FJ982 FK982 FL982 0.460 0.460 0.610 1.200 1.200 1.800 1.800 2.300 3.400 LA9 FF970 LA9 FF970 LA9 FG970 LA9 FG970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FL970 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150
Vertically mounted LC1 F115 or F150 (2) LA9 FF4F 0.345 LC1 F185 (2) LA9 FG4G 0.350 LC1 F225 (2) LA9 FG4G 0.350 LC1 F265 or F330 (2) LA9 FH4H 1.060 LC1 F400 (2) LA9 FJ4J 1.200 LC1 F500 (2) LA9 FK4K 1.200 LC1 F630 or F800 (2) LA9 FL4L 1.220 LC1 F780 (3) LA9 FX970 (3) 7.800 (1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/102 and 5/103 For the 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/111 For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115 (2) With the exception of contactors LC1 F780, all power connections are to be made by the customer. (3) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 3 power connecting links. (4) For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/108 and 5/109
5/107
Combinations
Contactors
Changeover contactor pairs LC2 F
Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type : LC1 F1154 LC1 F1504 LC1 F1854 LC1 F2254 LC1 F2654 LC1 F3304 LC1 F4004 LC1 F5004 LC1 F6304
LA9 Fp970

4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1) LA9 Fppp77
1N 3 1/L3 5 1/L2 7 1/L1 1 2/L1 3 2/L2 5 2/L3 2N 7 N 8 A2 A1
A2
A1
4 L2
L1
Vertically mounted
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type : LC1 F1154 LC1 F1504 LC1 F1854 LC1 F2254 LC1 F2654 LC1 F3304 LC1 F4004 LC1 F5004 LC1 F6304
Assembly A LA9 FF4F LA9 FG4G Assembly B LA9 FH4H LA9 FJ4J LA9 FK4K LA9 FL4L Assembly C LA9 FX971
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings, type : LC1 F115 or F1154 LC1 F150 or F1504 LC1 F185 or F1854 LC1 F225 or F2254 LC1 F265 or F2654 LC1 F330 or F3304 LC1 F400 or F4004 LC1 F500 or F5004 LC1 F630 or F6304 LC1 F800
Assembly A LA9 FG4F
Assembly B LA9 FH4F, LA9 FH4G LA9 FJ4F, LA9 FJ4G LA9 FK4F, LA9 FK4G LA9 FL4F, LA9 FL4G
Assembly C LA9 FJ4H LA9 FK4H, LA9 FK4J LA9 FL4H, LA9 FL4J and LA9 FL4K
Contactor pairs assembled using 3 contactors of identical or different ratings, type : LC1 F115 or F1154 LC1 F150 or F1504 LC1 F185 or F1854 LC1 F225 or F2254 LC1 F265 or F2654 LC1 F330 or F3304 LC1 F400 or F4004 LC1 F500 or F5004 LC1 F630 or F6304 LC1 F800
LA9 Fp4p4p : see pages 5/116 and 5/117 .
Important: the contactor ratings must be in decreasing size from top to bottom. (1) For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/106 and 5/107.
5/108
L3
References
Contactors
Changeover contactor pairs LC2 F
Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1)
Contactor type (2) Horizontally mounted LC1 F1154 LC1 F1504 LC1 F1854 LC1 F2254 LC1 F2654 LC1 F3304 LC1 F4004 LC1 F5004 LC1 F6304 Vertically mounted LC1 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F1854 LC1 F2254 LC1 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F4004 LC1 F5004 LC1 F6304 LC1 F7804 Set of power connections Reference Weight kg LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 FF977 F15077 FG977 F22577 FH977 FJ977 FJ977 FK977 FL977 0.460 0.460 0.610 1.200 1.200 1.800 1.800 2.300 3.400 Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg LA9 FF970 LA9 FF970 LA9 FG970 LA9 FG970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FJ970 LA9 FL970
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (4)
LA9 FF4F LA9 FG4G LA9 FG4G LA9 FH4H LA9 FJ4J LA9 FK4K LA9 FL4L LA9 FX971 (4)
0.345 0.350 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220 7.800
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings

For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
Contactor type(1) At bottom Vertically mounted LC1 F115 or F1154 or LC1 F150 or F1504 At top Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg LA9 FG4F LA9 FG4F LA9 FH4F LA9 FH4F LA9 FJ4F LA9 FK4F LA9 FL4F LA9 FH4G LA9 FH4G LA9 FJ4G LA9 FK4G LA9 FL4G LA9 FJ4H LA9 FK4H LA9 FL4H LA9 FK4J LA9 FL4J LA9 FL4K 0.350 0.350 0.870 0.870 0.930 0.940 0.940 0.860 0.860 0.940 0.940 0.950 1.130 1.130 1.140 1.200 1.210 1.210
LC1 F185 or F1854 or LC1 F225 or F2254
LC1 F265 or F2654 or LC1 F330 or F3304 LC1 F400 or F4004 LC1 F500 or F5004
LC1 F185 or F1854 LC1 F225 or F2254 LC1 F265 or F2654 LC1 F330 or F3304 LC1 F400 or F4004 LC1 F500 or F5004 LC1 F630, F6304 or F800 LC1 F265 or F2654 LC1 F330 or F3304 LC1 F400 or F4004 LC1 F500 or F5004 LC1 F630, F6304 or F800 LC1 F400 or F4004 LC1 F500 or F5004 LC1 F630, F6304 or F800 LC1 F500 or F5004 LC1 F630 or F6304 or F800 LC1 F630 or F6304 or F800
For assembly of reversers using 3 contactors, vertically mounted

See pages 5/116 and 5/117. (1) For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/106 and 5/108. (2) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/102 and 5/103. For the 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/111. For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115 (3) All power connections are to be made by the customer. (4) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 4 power connecting links.
5/109
Presentation
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
LAD N
LAD N, LAD C LAD N10, N01 LC1 F
LAD T, LAD S
LAD R
LA1 DX, DY, DZ
5/110
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F

For use in normal operating environments
Number of contacts Max. number of blocks per contactor Clip-on mounting Composition Reference Weight
1 1 2 2 1 4 3 2
1 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 (1)
LAD N10 LAD N01 LAD N11 LAD N20 LAD N02 LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD N22 N13 N40 N04 N31 C22
kg 0.020 0.020 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050
With terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012

2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 LAD N11P LAD N11G LAD N22P LAD N22G 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs

This type of connection is not possible for blocks with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the figure 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N116.
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts
Recommended for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Number of contacts Max. number of blocks per contactor Clip-on mounting Composition Reference Weight
2 2 2 2
2 (2) 2 1
LA1 DX20 LA1 DY20 LA1 DZ40 LA1 DZ31
kg 0.040 0.040 0.050 0.050
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Number of contacts 1 N/O + 1 N/C Max. number of blocks per contactor Clip-on mounting 2 Time delay Range s On-delay 0.1 3 (3) 0.1 30 10 180 1 30 (4) Type Reference Weight
LAD LAD LAD LAD
T0 T2 T4 S2
kg 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
Off-delay 0.1 3 (3) LAD R0 0.1 30 LAD R2 10 180 LAD R4
(1) Including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break. (2) Device fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals. (3) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. (4) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.
5/111
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories
Suppressor blocks
RC circuits (resistor-capacitor)
b Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. For use only in cases where the voltage is virtually sinusoidal, i.e. less than 5% total harmonic distortion. b Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. b Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.3 times the normal time). Mounting Uc Reference Weight kg Clip-on mounting on all ratings a 24 48 V LA4 FRCE 0.040 and all a.c. coils. 50 110 V LA4 FRCF 0.040 127240 V LA4 FRCP 0.040 265415 V LA4 FRCV 0.040
530416
LA4 Fppp

b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Clip-on mounting on all ratings a or c 24 48 V LA4 FVE and all coils. 50 110 V LA4 FVF 127240 V LA4 FVP 265415 V LA4 FVV
813087
0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040
Diodes
b No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. b Increase in drop-out time (3 to 4 times the normal time). b Polarised component. Clip-on mounting on all ratings c 24 48 V and all d.c. coils. 55 110 V 125250 V 280440 V
LA4 LA4 LA4 LA4
FDE FDF FDP FDV
0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040
5
LA9 Fp602
Bidirectional peak limiting diodes (transil)

b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to between 2 and 2.5 times Uc max. b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Clip-on mounting on all ratings a or c 24 48 V LA4 FTE 0.040 and all coils. 50 110 V LA4 FTF 0.040 127240 V LA4 FTP 0.040 265415 V LA4 FTV 0.040
813088
Cabling accessories
For use on 4-pole contactors Set of 4 links Set reference LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 FF602 FG602 FH602 FK602 FL602 Weight kg 0.200 0.350 1.000 1.750 3.000
Links for parallel connection of poles (in pairs)

LA9 Fp601 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 F1154 F1504, F1854 F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004 F5004 F6304
Links for star connection of 3 poles

LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 F115 F150, F185 F225, F265, F330, F400 F500 F630, F800 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 FF601 FG601 FH601 FK601 FL601 0.035 0.050 0.120 0.180 0.550
813090
Control circuit voltage take-off from power terminals

DZ3 FA3 For use on contactors LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 F115 F150, F185 F225F500 F630, F800 Mounted on bolt size M6 M8 M10 M12 Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 Unit reference DZ3 DZ3 DZ3 DZ3 FA3 GA3 HA3 JA3 Weight kg 0.004 0.004 0.006 0.009
5/112
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories
Right-angled connectors
For contactors or thermal overload relays
For use on Contactors LC1 F115 LA9 Fp981
813091
With connector plates Thermal overload relays (1) LR9 F5p67, LR9 F67 Width 15 mm Type Rear Side Large surface area Rear Side Large surface area Rear Side Large surface area Rear Side Large surface area Rear Side Large surface area
Set of 3 connectors Set reference Weight kg LA9 FF981 0.060 LA9 FF979 LA9 FF980 LA9 FG981 LA9 FG979 LA9 FG980 LA9 FJ981 LA9 FJ979 LA9 FJ980 LA9 FK981 LA9 FK979 LA9 FK980 LA9 FL981 LA9 FL979 LA9 FL980 0.240 0.150 0.080 0.350 0.200 0.430 0.750 0.490 0.480 0.920 0.800 1.210 2.570 3.190
813093
LC1 F150, F185
LR9 F5p69, F5p71, LR9 F69, F71
20 mm
LA9 Fp979
LC1 F225, F265, F330, F400
LR9 F7p75, LR9 F75
25 mm
LC1 F500
LR9 F7p79, F7p81, LR9 F79, F81
813092
30 mm
LC1 F630, F800
LR9 F7p81, LR9 F81
40 mm
LA9 FL980
For reversing contactors or star-delta contactors combined with a thermal overload relay
For use on Contactors LC1 F115 Thermal overload relays (1) LR9 F5p57, F5p63 LR9 F5p67, F5p69 LR9 F69, F71 LR9 F5p57, F5p63 Width of connector plate 15 mm Set of 3 busbars Set reference LA7 F401 Weight kg 0.110
LC1 F150 and F185 LC1 F185
20 mm
LA7 F402
0.110
LR9 F5p71, LR9 F71 LR9 F5p71, LR9 F71 LR9 F7p75, F7p79 LR9 F75, F79
25 mm
LA7 F407
0.160
LC1 F225 and F265
25 mm
LA7 F403
0.160
25 mm
LA7 F404
0.160
LC1 F330 and F400 LC1 F400
LR9 F7p75, F7p79 LR9 F75, F79 LR9 F7p81, LR9 F81 LR9 F7p75, F7p79 LR9 F7p81 LR9 F75, F79, F81 LR9 F7p81, LR9 F81
25 mm
LA7 F404
0.160
25 mm
LA7 F404
0.160
LC1 F500
30 mm
LA7 F405
0.270
LC1 F630, F800
40 mm
LA7 F406
0.600
(1) For protection relays class 10, replace the p with a 3 and for class 20, replace thep with a 5.
5/113
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories
Insulated terminal blocks

813094
For use on 3-pole contactors LC1 F115, F150, F185
Cabling 1 x 16 150 mm2 or 2 x 16 95 mm2
Tightening tool 4 mm hexagonal socket key
Set of 2 blocks Set reference LA9 F103
Weight kg 0.560
Power terminal protection shrouds

LA9 F103 For use on 2, 3 and 4-pole contactors LC1 F115 Number of shrouds per set 6 Set reference Weight kg 0.250
LA9 F701
813095
LC1 F150, F185
LA9 F702
0.250
LC1 F225, F265, F330, F400 and F4002, F500 and F5002 LC1 F630, F6302 and F800
LA9 F703
0.250
LA9 F704
0.250
LA9 F701
LC1 F1154
LA9 F706
0.300
LC1 F1504 and F1854
LA9 F707
0.300
LC1 F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004, F5004
LA9 F708
0.300
LC1 F6304
LA9 F709
0.300
5/114
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Spare parts
Main contact sets

813096
Per pole: 2 fixed contacts and 1 moving contact, 2 deflectors, 1 backplate, fixing screws and washers. For contactor 2-pole Type LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 F4002 F5002 F6302 F6302S011 F115, F150 F185, F225 F265 F330, F400 F500 F630 F780 Replacement Reference for 2 poles LA5 F400802 2 poles LA5 F500802 2 poles LA5 F630802 2 poles LA5 F630802S011 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 1 pole 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 ples 4 poles 4 poles 1 pole 4 poles 4 poles LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 FF431 FG431 FH431 F400803 F500803 F630803 F780801 (1) F780803 F800803 F630803S011 FF441 FG441 FH441 F400804 F500804 F630804 F780801 (1) F780804 F630804S011 Weight kg 1.350 1.950 4.700 4.800 0.270 0.350 0.660 2.000 2.950 6.100 4.700 13.200 6.100 6.200 0.360 0.465 0.880 2.700 3.900 8.150 4.700 17.300 8.400
LA5 FG431
3-pole
813097
LC1 F800 LC1 F630S011 4-pole LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 F1504, F1154 F1854, F2254 F2654 F3304, F4004 F5004 F6304 F7804
LC1 F6304S011
Arc chambers
For contactor LA5 F40050 2-pole LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 F4002 F5002 F6302 F6302S011 F115 F150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F780 F800 F630S011 F1154 F1504 F1854 F2254 F2654 F3304 F4004 F5004 F6304 F7804 F6304S011 Type Replacement Reference for 2 poles LA5 F400250 2 poles LA5 F500250 2 poles LA5 F630250 2 poles LA5 F630250 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 ples 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 1 pole 3 poles 3 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 1 pole 4 poles LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 LA5 F11550 F15050 F18550 F22550 F26550 F33050 F40050 F50050 F63050 F780150 (1) F80050 F63050 F115450 F150450 F185450 F225450 F265450 F330450 F400450 F500450 F630450 F780150 F630450 Weight kg 0.870 1.250 2.100 2.100 0.490 0.490 0.670 0.670 0.920 1.300 1.300 1.850 3.150 2.100 3.150 3.150 0.660 0.660 0.910 1.000 1.220 1.740 1.740 2.500 4.200 2.100 4.200
3-pole
4-pole
(2) (2) (3) (1)
(1) Comprising 2 identical items per pole. (2) Comprising two 2-pole arc chambers. (3) Comprising single-pole arc chambers.
5/115
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories for assembly of reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs using 3 contactors, vertically mounted - for customer assembly
Closing of one of the 3 contactors prevents closing of the other 2.
Mechanical interlock kits

813215
Contactor type (1) Top Middle LC1 F115, F150, F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, F1854 or F2254 LC1 F115, F150, F1154 or F1504 LC1 F115, F150, F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, F1854 or F2254
Bottom LC1 F115, F150, F1154 or F1504 LC1 F115, F150, F1154 or F1504
Mechanical interlock (2) Kit reference (3) Weight kg LA9 FF4F4F 0.554 LA9 FG4F4F 0.559
LA9 Fp4p4p
LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FG4G4F 0.559 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FG4G4G 0.562 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FH4F4F 1.350 F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FH4G4F 1.375 F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FH4G4G 1.375 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FH4H4F 1.524 F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FH4H4G 1.527 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FH4H4H 1.684 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F400, F4002 LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FJ4F4F 1.421 or F4004 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FJ4G4F 1.424 F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FJ4G4G 1.428 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FJ4H4F 1.595 F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FJ4H4G 1.598 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FJ4H4H 1.755 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F400, F4002 LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FJ4J4F 1.666 or F4004 F1154 or F1504 1.669 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FJ4J4G F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FJ4J4H 1.829 F2654 or F3304 LC1-F400, F4002 LA9 FJ4J4J 1.890 or F4004 LC1 F500, F5002 LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4F4F 1.421 or F5004 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504 (continued on page LC1 F185, F225, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4G4F 1.424 5/117) F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FK4G4G 1.428 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4H4F 1.595 F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FK4H4G 1.598 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FK4H4H 1.755 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F400, F4002 LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4J4F 1.666 or F4004 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FK4J4G 1.669 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FK4J4H 1.829 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F400, F4002 LA9 FK4J4J 1.896 or F4004 LC1 F500, F5002 LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4K4F 1.666 or F5004 F1154 or F1504 (1) To order the 3 contactors, see pages 5/102 and 5/103. For auxiliary contact blocks LAD N02 used for electrical locking, see page 5/111. For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115 (2) Minimum distances between contactors, see page 5/117. (3) The kit contains the lever arms, the 2 x 8 mm rods and all parts required for assembly.
5/116
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories for assembly of reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs using 3 contactors, vertically mounted - for customer assembly
Mechanical interlock kits
(continued) Bottom
813216
Contactor type (1) Top Middle LC1 F500, F5002 or F5004 (continued) LC1 F500, F5002 or F5004
LA9 Fp4p4p
LC1 F185, F225, F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FK4K4H 1.825 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F400, F4002 LA9 FK4K4J 1.896 or F4004 LC1-F500, F5002 LA9 FK4K4K 1.896 or F5004 LC1 F630, F800, LC1 F115, F150, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FL4F4F 1.428 F6302 or F6304 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FL4G4F 1.431 F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FL4G4G 1.436 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FL4H4F 1.602 F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FL4H4G 1.606 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FL4H4H 1.751 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F400, F4002 LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FL4J4F 1.673 or F4004 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FL4J4G 1.676 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FL4J4H 1.832 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F400, F4002 LA9 FL4J4J 1.903 or F4004 LC1-F500, F5002 LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FK4K4F 1.666 or F5004 F1154 or F1504 LC1 F185, F225, LA9 FK4K4G 1.669 F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FK4K4H 1.825 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F400, F4002 LA9 FK4K4J 1.896 or F4004 LC1-F500, F5002 LA9 FK4K4K 1.896 or F5004 LC1 F630, F800, LC1 F115, F150, LA9 FL4L4F 1.680 F6302 or F6304 F1154 or F1504 LA9 FL4L4G 1.683 LC1 F185, F225, F1854 or F2254 LC1 F265, F330, LA9 FL4L4H 1.910 F2654 or F3304 LC1 F400, F4002 LA9 FL4L4J 1.896 or F4004 LC1 F500, F5002 LA9 FL4L4K 1.896 or F5004 LC1 F630, F800, LA9 FL4L4L 1.920 F6302, or F6304 (1) To order the 3 contactors, see pages 5/102 and 5/103. For auxiliary contact blocks LAD N02 used for electrical locking, see page 5/111. For accessories, see pages 5/112 to 5/115. (2) Minimum distances between contactors. This is the distance, in mm, between the centres of two adjacent contactors (between the top and middle contactors or between the middle and bottom contactors). Contactor Bottom or top Middle LC1 F115 LC1 F185 LC1 F265 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 or F150 or F225 or F330 or F800 LC1 F115 or F150 200 210 240 250 270 320 LC1 F185 or F225 210 220 250 250 270 330 LC1 F265 or F330 240 250 250 260 280 350 LC1 F400 250 250 260 260 280 320 LC1 F500 270 270 280 280 300 340 LC1 F630 or F800 320 330 350 320 340 380 (3) The kit contains the lever arms, the 2 x 8 mm rods and all parts required for assembly.
Mechanical interlock (2) Kit reference (3) Weight kg LA9 FK4K4G 1.669
5/117
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
a.c. 50/60 Hz supply coils
References
Maximum ambient air temperature: 55 C. Above this, use an LX9 F coil, see page 5/123. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): y 2400. Control circuit voltage Average Inductance Voltage Reference Weight Uc - 50 Hz Uc - 60 Hz resistance at of closed code 20 C 10 % circuit V V H kg
813181
For contactors LC1 F115 and LC1 F150

24 0.27 0.04 B5 42 0.94 0.13 D5 48 0.78 0.11 E6 48 1.17 0.16 E5 110 4.55 0.59 F6 120 4.77 0.64 G6 110 6.38 0.86 F5 115 6.38 0.86 FE5 127/132 9.14 1.15 G5 200/208 14.5 1.87 L6 220 18.4 2.38 M6 240 18.9 2.5 U6 220 265/277 28.1 3.44 M5 230 28.1 3.44 P5 240 31.1 4.1 U5 380 57.2 7.05 Q6 440 72.6 9.21 R6 380 460/480 86.9 10.3 Q5 400 86.9 10.3 V5 415 95.1 12 N5 500 141 17 S5 660 172 20.3 Y6 660/690 254 28.9 Y5 1000 414 48.9 1000 610 68.5 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush 50 Hz: 550 VA; 60 Hz: 660 VA, - sealed 50 Hz: 45 VA; 60 Hz: 55 VA, cos = 0.3. Heat dissipation: 1216 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 2335 ms, opening = 515 ms. LX1 FF024 LX1 FF042 LX1 FF040 LX1 FF048 LX1 FF092 LX1 FF095 LX1 FF110 LX1 FF110 LX1 FF127 LX1 FF162 LX1 FF184 LX1 FF187 LX1 FF220 LX1 FF220 LX1 FF240 LX1 FF316 LX1 FF360 LX1 FF380 LX1 FF380 LX1 FF415 LX1 FF500 LX1 FF550 LX1 FF660 LX1 FF850 LX1 FF1000 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430
LX1 FFppp

24 0.18 0.03 B5 42 0.57 0.09 48 0.47 0.08 E6 48 0.71 0.12 E5 110 2.74 0.44 F6 115/120 2.87 0.49 G6 110 4.18 0.65 F5 115 4.18 0.65 FE5 127/132 5.35 0.86 G5 200/208 8.8 1.41 L6 220 11.1 1.8 M6 240 11.4 1.87 U6 220 265/277 16.5 2.59 M5 230 16.5 2.59 P5 240 20.1 3.09 U5 380 34 5.32 Q6 440 43.5 6.94 R6 380 460/480 51.3 7.75 Q5 400 51.3 7.75 V5 415 62.3 9.06 N5 500 82.7 12.8 S5 660 103 15.3 Y6 660/690 154 21.8 Y5 1000 249 36.6 1000 370 51.6 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush 50 Hz: 805 VA; 60 Hz: 970 VA, - sealed 50 Hz: 55 VA; 60 Hz: 66 VA, cos = 0.3. Heat dissipation: 1824 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 2035 ms, opening = 715 ms. LX1 FG024 LX1 FG042 LX1 FG040 LX1 FG048 LX1 FG092 LX1 FG095 LX1 FG110 LX1 FG110 LX1 FG127 LX1 FG162 LX1 FG184 LX1 FG187 LX1 FG220 LX1 FG220 LX1 FG240 LX1 FG316 LX1 FG360 LX1 FG380 LX1 FG380 LX1 FG415 LX1 FG500 LX1 FG550 LX1 FG660 LX1 FG850 LX1 FG1000 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550
813182
LX1 FGppp
5/118
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils
References
Low sealed consumption. Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): y 2400. Control Average resistance Inductance Voltage circuit at 20 C 10 % of closed code voltage circuit Inrush Sealed Uc V H
Reference
Weight
kg 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750

24 0.8 20 (1) B7 LX1 FH0242 48 2.96 67 (1) E7 LX1 FH0482 110 18.7 440 (1) F7 LX1 FH1102 115 18.7 440 (1) FE7 LX1 FH1102 120/127 22.9 536 (1) G7 LX1 FH1272 200/208 58.4 1366 (1) L7 LX1 FH2002 220 70.6 1578 (1) M7 LX1 FH2202 230 70.6 1578 (1) P7 LX1 FH2202 240 87.94 1968 (1) U7 LX1 FH2402 277 113 2444 (1) W7 LX1 FH2772 380 217 4631 (1) Q7 LX1 FH3802 400 217 4631 (1) V7 LX1 FH3802 415 217 4631 (1) N7 LX1-FH3802 440 265 6731 (1) R7 LX1 FH4402 480/500 329 8543 (1) S7 LX1 FH5002 600/660 296 10 245 (1) X7 LX1 FH6002 1000 696 25 880 (1) LX1 FH10002 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos = 0.9: - inrush: 600700 VA, - sealed: 810 VA. Heat dissipation: 8 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4065 ms, opening = 100170 ms.
813183
LX1 FHppp2
5
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
For contactor LC1 F400

48 1.6 29.5 0.18 E7 LX1 FJ048 110/120 9.8 230 1.35 F7 LX1 FJ110 115 9.8 230 1.35 FE7 LX1 FJ110 120/127 12.8 280 1.75 G7 LX1 FJ127 200/208 30 815 4.1 L7 LX1 FJ200 220 37 1030 5.1 M7 LX1 FJ220 230 37 1030 5.1 P7 LX1 FJ220 240 47.5 1320 6.4 U7 LX1 FJ240 265/277 61 1700 8.1 W7 LX1 FJ280 380 120 3310 15.8 Q7 LX1 FJ380 400 120 3310 15.8 V7 LX1 FJ380 415 145 4070 19.4 N7 LX1 FJ415 440 145 4070 19.4 R7 LX1 FJ415 500 190 4980 25.5 S7 LX1 FJ500 550/600 243 6310 27.4 X7 LX1 FJ600 1000 720 19 420 84.6 LX1 FJ1000 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos = 0.9 : - inrush: 10001150 VA, - sealed: 1218 VA. Heat dissipation: 14 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170 ms. (1) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
813184
LX1 FJppp
5/119
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Low sealed consumption. Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7. Control Average resistance Inductance Voltage circuit at 20 C 10 % of closed code voltage circuit Inrush Sealed Uc V H Reference Weight
kg 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150

48 1.9 33.5 0.19 E7 LX1 FK048 110/120 9.55 260 1.25 F7 LX1 FK110 115 9.55 260 1.25 FE7 LX1 FK110 120/127 11.5 315 1.5 G7 LX1 FK127 200/208 29 735 3.75 L7 LX1 FK200 220 35.5 915 4.55 M7 LX1 FK220 230 35.5 915 4.55 P7 LX1 FK220 240 44.5 1160 5.75 U7 LX1 FK240 265/277 56.5 1490 7.3 W7 LX1 FK280 380 112 2980 14.7 Q7 LX1 FK380 400 112 2980 14.7 V7 LX1 FK380 415 143 3730 18.4 N7 LX1 FK415 440 143 3730 18.4 R7 LX1 FK415 500 172 4590 22.8 S7 LX1 FK500 550/600 232 5660 23.9 X7 LX1 FK600 1000 679 16 960 72 LX1 FK1000 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, and cos = 0.9: - inrush: 10501150 VA, - sealed: 1620 VA. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): y 2400. Heat dissipation: 18 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170 ms.
813186
LX1 FKppp
5
813187

48 1.1 17.1 0.09 E7 LX1 FL048 110/120 6.45 165 1.85 F7 LX1 FL110 115 6.45 165 1.85 FE7 LX1 FL110 127 8.1 205 1.05 G7 LX1 FL127 200/208 20.5 605 2.65 L7 LX1 FL200 220 25.5 730 3.35 M7 LX1 FL220 230 25.5 730 3.35 P7 LX1 FL220 240 25.5 730 3.35 U7 LX1 FL220 265/277 31 900 4.1 W7 LX1 FL260 380 78 2360 10.5 Q7 LX1 FL380 400 78 2360 10.5 V7 LX1 FL380 415 96 2960 13 N7 LX1 FL415 440 96 2960 13 R7 LX1 FL415 500 120 3660 16.5 S7 LX1 FL500 550/600 155 4560 19.5 X7 LX1 FL600 1000 474 12 880 56.2 LX1 FL1000 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos = 0.9: - inrush: 15001730 VA, - sealed: 2025 VA. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): 1200. Heat dissipation: 20 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4080 ms, opening = 100200 ms. 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
LX1 FLppp
5/120
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Low sealed consumption. Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7. Control Average resistance Inductance Voltage Reference circuit at 20 C 10 % of closed code voltage circuit Inrush Sealed Uc V H Weight
kg (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000

110/120 4.95 (2) 230 (2) 0.21 F7 LX1 FX110 115 4.95 (2) 230 (2) 0.21 FE7 LX1 FX110 127 6.1 (2) 280 (2) 0.26 G7 LX1 FX127 200/208 15.5 (2) 750 (2) 0.66 L7 LX1 FX200 220 19.5 (2) 920 (2) 0.82 M7 LX1 FX220 230 19.5 (2) 920 (2) 0.82 P7 LX1 FX220 240 19.5 (2) 920 (2) 0.82 U7 LX1 FX220 265/277 29.8 (2) 1330 (2) 1.25 W7 LX1 FX280 380 60.9 (2) 2780 (2) 2.3 Q7 LX1 FX380 400 60.9 (2) 2780 (2) 2.3 V7 LX1 FX380 415/480 74.3 (2) 3340 (2) 2.8 N7 LX1 FX415 3340 (2) 2.8 R7 LX1 FX415 440 74.3 (2) 500 92 (2) 4180 (2) 3.5 S7 LX1 FX500 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos = 0.9: - inrush: 19002300 VA, - sealed: 4455 VA. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): 600. Heat dissipation: 2 x 22 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4080 ms, opening = 130230 ms.

Control circuit Voltage Rectifier Coil voltage code Reference Reference Uc (3) V 110/127 FE7 DR5 TE4U LX4 F8FW 220/240 P7 DR5 TE4U LX4 F8MW 380/440 V7 DR5 TE4S LX4 F8QW Specifications Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): 600. Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos = 0.8: - inrush: 1700 VA, - sealed: 12 VA. Operating time at Uc: closing = 6080 ms, opening = 160180 ms. (1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series. (2) Value for the 2 coils in series. (3) Rectifier to be ordered separately: 0.100 kg. Weight
kg 1.650 1.650 1.650
5/121
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils for specific applications (1)
References
Low sealed consumption. High tolerance to inrush voltage drops. Immune to micro-breaks (mains supply or contact chain). Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7. Control Average resistance Inductance Voltage circuit at 20 C 10 % of closed code voltage circuit Inrush Sealed Uc V H
Reference
Weight
kg 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430

48 3.03 80.2 0.3 E7 LX9 FF048 110 14.8 579 2.08 F7 LX9 FF110 115 14.8 579 2.08 FE7 LX9 FF110 120/127 19 746 2.65 G7 LX9 FF127 208 45 1788 5.95 L7 LX9 FF200 220 59.4 2190 7.7 M7 LX9 FF220 230 59.4 2190 7.7 P7 LX9 FF220 240 73.5 2750 9.68 U7 LX9 FF240 380 173 6540 23 Q7 LX9 FF380 400 173 6540 23 V7 LX9 FF380 415 218 8460 30 N7 LX9 FF415 440 218 8460 30 R7 LX9 FF415 500 262 10 300 36 S7 LX9 FF500 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 690855 VA, sealed: 6.68.1 VA. Heat dissipation: 5.97.2 W. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): < 2400. Operating time at Uc: closing = 35 ms, opening = 130 ms.
813188
LX9 FFppp
LX9 FGppp
48 2.2 60 0.23 E7 LX9 FG048 110 10.4 411 1.46 F7 LX9 FG110 115 10.4 411 1.46 FE7 LX9 FG110 120/127 13 520 1.85 G7 LX9 FG127 208 33 1339 4.9 L7 LX9 FG200 220 42.1 1680 5.84 M7 LX9 FG220 230 42.1 1680 5.84 P7 LX9 FG220 240 50.6 2060 7.22 U7 LX9 FG240 380 128 4730 16.4 Q7 LX9 FG380 400 128 4730 16.4 V7 LX9 FG380 415 157 5930 20.6 N7 LX9 FG415 440 157 5930 20.6 R7 LX9 FG415 500 194 7550 26.3 S7 LX9 FG500 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 9501180 VA, sealed: 8.910.9 VA. Heat dissipation: 89.8 W. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): < 2400. Operating time at Uc: closing = 35 ms, opening = 130 ms.
0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550
813189

48 2.96 72 (2) LX9 FH0482 0.750 110/115 18.7 415 (2) LX9 FH1102 0.750 120/127 22.9 156 (2) LX9 FH1272 0.750 220/230 71.6 1621 (2) LX9 FH2202 0.750 240 88 1968 (2) LX9 FH2402 0.750 380/415 222 5075 (2) LX9 FH3802 0.750 500 345 7990 (2) LX9 FH5002 0.750 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 560660 VA, sealed: 810 VA. Heat dissipation: 8.410.4 W. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): < 3600. Operating time at Uc: closing = 45 ms, opening = 25 ms. (1) Application examples: hoisting (inching, high operating rates), Main-Standby (unstable mains supplies). These coils are particularly suited for use at higher operating temperatures (mounting in non-ventilated compartments, enclosures, etc.). (2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/122
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils for specific applications
Coils with short operating times (at Uc) : - closing: 60 ms, - opening: 50 ms (a side); 20 ms (c side). Coils for high operating rates ( y 70 C): - 3600 operating cycles/hour, - 1800 for LC1 F630. Coils with low inrush consumption. Control Average resistance circuit at 20 C 10 % voltage Inrush Sealed Uc V
813190
Inductance Rectifier of closed Reference circuit (1) H 0.22 1.3 1.7 5 15 19 23 DR5 TF4V DR5 TE4U DR5 TE4U DR5 TE4U DR5 TE4S DR5 TE4S DR5 TE4S
Coil Reference
Weight
kg LX9 FJ917 LX9 FJ925 LX9 FJ926 LX9 FJ931 LX9 FJ936 LX9 FJ937 LX9 FJ938 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970

48 4.03 43 110 25.7 246 127 32.3 302 220/230 99.5 919 380/415 311 3011 440 386 3690 500 478 4380 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 500 VA, - sealed: 23 VA. Heat dissipation: 11.413.9 W.
LX9 FJppp

813191
LX9 FKppp
48 3.73 30.7 110 24 204 127 29.8 250 220/230 89.9 770 380/415 274 2075 440 361 3060 500 448 3750 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 550 VA, - sealed: 31 VA. Heat dissipation: 1518.3 W.
0.18 1.1 1.4 4 12 16 19
DR5 TF4V DR5 TE4U DR5 TE4U DR5 TE4U DR5 TE4S DR5 TE4S DR5 TE4S
LX9 FK917 LX9 FK925 LX9 FK926 LX9 FK931 LX9 FK936 LX9 FK937 LX9 FK938
1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080

813191
LX9 FLppp
48 2.81 20.8 0.17 DR5 TF4V 110 13.5 114 0.77 DR5 TE4U 127 20.8 167 1.2 DR5 TE4U 220 52 425 2.9 DR5 TE4U 220/240 64.5 518 3.6 DR5 TE4U 380/400 163 1360 8.8 DR5 TE4S 415/440 204 1670 11 DR5 TE4S 500 312 2510 17 DR5 TE4S Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 830 VA, - sealed: 47 VA. Heat dissipation: 22.827.8 W. (1) Rectifier to be ordered separately, weight of rectifier: 0.100 kg.
LX9 FL917 LX9 FL924 LX9 FL926 LX9 FL930 LX9 FL931 LX9 FL935 LX9 FL936 LX9 FL938
1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450
5/123
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
d.c. supply coils
References
Low sealed consumption. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): y 2400. Control Average resistance Inductance Voltage circuit at 20 C 10 % of closed code voltage circuit Inrush Sealed Uc V H Reference Weight
kg LX4 FF024 LX4 FF048 LX4 FF110 LX4 FF125 LX4 FF220 LX4 FF250 LX4 FF440 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430

24 1.12 177 11 BD 48 4.52 715 42.7 ED 110 21.7 2940 179 FD 125 26.8 3560 223 GD 220/230 84 11 100 704 MD 250 105 13 000 868 UD 440/460 301 48 200 4000 RD Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 543665 W, - sealed: 3.944.83 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 3040 ms, opening = 3050 ms.
813193
LX4 FFppp

24 0.79 169 14.9 BD 48 3.2 662 55.3 ED 110 14.9 2810 241 FD 125 19 3320 289 GD 220/230 57.7 10 200 890 MD 250 76 12 400 1140 UD 440/460 223 39 700 4210 RD Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 737902 W, - sealed: 4.135.07 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 3040 ms, opening = 3050 ms. LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 FG024 FG048 FG110 FG125 FG220 FG250 FG440 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550
5
813192

24 0.9 192 26.3 BD 48 3.49 707 92.9 ED 110 16.8 3180 424 FD 125 20.8 3840 530 GD 220/230 65.7 11 500 1590 MD 250 84 13 900 1910 UD 440/460 255 44 000 7570 RD Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 655803 W. - sealed: 3.684.53 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4050 ms, opening = 4065 ms. LX4 FH024 LX4 FH048 LX4 FH110 LX4 FH125 LX4 FH220 LX4 FH250 LX4 FH440 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740
LX4 FHppp

48 2.5 558 56 ED 110 12.7 2660 270 FD 125 15.8 3130 330 GD 220 47 8820 910 MD 250 61 10 500 1200 UD 440 236 33 750 4435 RD Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 9201140 W, - sealed: 47.5 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 5060 ms, opening = 4560 ms. LX4 FJ048 LX4 FJ110 LX4 FJ125 LX4 FJ220 LX4 FJ250 LX4 FJ440 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970
5/124
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
d.c. supply coils
Low sealed consumption. Control Average resistance circuit at 20 C 10 % voltage Inrush Sealed Uc V
813194
Inductance Voltage of closed code circuit H
Reference
Weight
kg LX4 FK048 LX4 FK110 LX4 FK125 LX4 FK220 LX4 FK250 LX4 FK440 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080

48 2.35 515 67 ED 110 11.5 2450 280 FD 125 15 2930 400 GD 220 44 8150 1080 MD 250 56 9650 1350 UD 440 225 31 300 5270 RD Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 9901220 W, - sealed: 4.548 W, Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): 2400. Operating time at Uc: closing = 5060 ms, opening = 4560 ms.
LX4 FKppp

48 1.7 353 40.5 ED LX4 FL048 110 8.1 1680 180 FD LX4 FL110 125 10 2110 230 GD LX4 FL125 220 31 5160 650 MD LX4 FL220 250 38 6080 815 UD LX4 FL250 440 152 23 120 2910 RD LX4 FL440 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 14201920 W, - sealed: 6.512.5 W. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): 1200. Operating time at Uc: closing = 6070 ms, opening = 4050 ms. 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450
5
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000

110 6.1 (2) 280 (2) 0.26 FD 125 7.7 (2) 410 (2) 0.33 GD 220 24.6 (2 ) 1100 (2) 1 MD 250 29.8 (2) 1330 (2) 1.25 UD 440 92 (2) 4180 (2) 3.5 RD Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 19602420 W, - sealed: 4252 W. Operating cycles/hour ( y 55 C): 600. Operating time at Uc: closing = 7080 ms, opening = 100130 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 FX110 FX125 FX220 FX250 FX440
ms. 1.650 1.650 1.650

110/120 FW LX4 F8FW 220/240 MW LX4 F8MW 380/400 QW LX4 F8QW Specifications Heat dissipation: 25 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 6080 ms, opening = 4050 ms. (1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series. (2) Value for the 2 coils in series.
5/125
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
d.c. supply coils for specific applications
References
Coils with short operating times (at Uc): - closing: 60 ms, - opening: 20 ms. Coils for high operating rates ( y 70 C): - 3600 operating cycles/hour, - 1800 for LC1 F630. Coils with low inrush consumption. Control Average resistance circuit at 20 C 10 % voltage Inrush Sealed Uc V
Induc- Resistor (1) tance of Qty Reference closed required circuit H 0.27 1.7 2 6.1 23 1 1 1 1 1 DR2 SC0047 DR2 SC0330 DR2 SC0390 DR2 SC1200 DR2 SC4700
Coil Reference
Weight
kg LX9 LX9 LX9 LX9 LX9 FJ918 FJ926 FJ927 FJ932 FJ938 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970

813194
48 5.11 110 32.3 125 39.4 220 123 440/460 478 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 430 W, - sealed: 22 W. LX9 FJppp
99 632 760 2320 9080

813196
5
LX9 FKppp
813195
48 4.67 110 29.8 125 37.4 220 115 440/460 448 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 470 W, - sealed: 29 W.
76.7 470 637 1935 7050
0.22 1.4 1.7 5.1 19
1 1 1 1 1
DR2 SC0039 DR2 SC0220 DR2 SC0330 DR2 SC1000 DR2 SC3300
LX9 LX9 LX9 LX9 LX9
FK918 FK926 FK927 FK932 FK938
1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080

48 3.43 110 17.2 125 20.8 220 64.5 440/460 260 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 733 W, - sealed: 48 W. LX9 FLppp 52.9 272 333 1018 4010 0.20 0.98 1.2 3.6 14 2 2 2 2 2 DR2 SC0047 DR2 SC0270 DR2 SC0330 DR2 SC1000 DR2 SC3900 LX9 LX9 LX9 LX9 LX9 FL918 FL925 FL926 FL931 FL937 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450
(1) Resistor to be ordered separately, weight of resistor: 0.030 kg.
5/126
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Wide range d.c. supply coils for specific applications
Wide range coils: 0.71.25 Uc. Operating cycles/hour: y 60 (1). Ambient temperature (operation): - 55 to + 70 C. Control circuit Average resistance voltage at 20 C 10 % Uc Inrush Sealed V
813198
Inductance of closed circuit H 7.4 27 66 121 149
Reference
Weight
kg LX4 FF020 LX4 FF040 LX4 FF060 LX4 FF090 LX4 FF100 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430

24 0.71 48 2.86 72 7.05 110 13.2 125 16.9 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 4151300 W, - sealed: 39 W. 24 0.52 48 2 72 5.07 110 9.66 125 12 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 5801820 W, - sealed: 3.19.5 W. 120 392 1055 1970 2340
LX4 FFppp

112 359 984 1840 2230 9.3 34.4 85 157 196 LX4 FG020 LX4 FG040 LX4 FG060 LX4 FG090 LX4 FG100 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550
813197

24 0.58 129 48 2.19 400 72 5.58 1110 110 11 2120 125 13.8 2520 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 5151600 W, - sealed: 2.78.5 W. Opera- Average Induc- Coil tional resistance tance voltage at 20 C of 10 % closed Reference circuit V H 17.3 59.5 149 287 353 LX4 FH020 LX4 FH040 LX4 FH060 LX4 FH090 LX4 FH100 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740
LX4 FHppp
Reduction of consumption Resistors in parallel No. Reference
Reference of the assembly (2)
Weight
kg 0.970 0.970 0.970

24 1.05 0.049 LX2 FJW11 3 56 DR2 SC0056 LX5 FJW11 48 4.8 0.22 LX2 FJW18 3 220 DR2 SC0220 LX5 FJW18 72 9.6 0.44 LX2 FJW21 3 470 DR2 SC0470 LX5 FJW21 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 290860 W, - sealed: 1647 W. (1) The mechanical durability of the contactor is limited to 1 million operating cycles. (2) The set comprises: 1 coil LX2 FJ and 3 resistors DR2 SC.
5/127
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
LC1 F115 to F330

S S1 F115 M6x25 F150 M8x25 F185 M8x25 F225 M10x35 F265 M10x35 F330 M10x35 = b2 b1
(1)
=
X1
J1
= = Z Q P a P Q1 f
G1 G
= Y
L c
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity LC1 200 500 V 600 1000 V F115, F150 10 15 F185 10 15 F225, F265 10 15 F330 10 15 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/114). M 147 147 150 150 154 154 172 172 178 178 181 181 P 37 37 40 40 40 40 48 48 48 48 48 48 Q 29.5 29.5 26 26 29 29 21 17 39 34 43 43 Q1 60 60 57.5 55.5 59.5 59.5 51.5 47.5 66.5 66.5 74 74 S 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25 S1 26 26 34 34 34 34 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 Y 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 38 38 38 38 Z 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 21.5 21.5 20.5 20.5
X1
LC1 F115
a b b1 b2 3P 163.5 162 137 265 4P 200.5 162 137 265 F150 3P 163.5 170 137 301 4P 200.5 170 137 301 F185 3P 168.5 174 137 305 4P 208.5 174 137 305 F225 3P 168.5 197 137 364 4P 208.5 197 137 364 F265 3P 201.5 203 145 375 4P 244.5 203 145 375 F330 3P 213 206 145 375 4P 261 206 145 375 f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
c 171 171 171 171 181 181 181 181 213 213 219 219
f 131 131 131 131 130 130 130 130 147 147 147 147
G 106 143 106 143 111 151 111 151 142 190 154.5 202.5
=
G1 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 96 96 96 96
J 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106
J1 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
L 107 107 107 107 113.5 113.5 113.5 113.5 141 141 145 145
LC1 F400 and F500

56 S 44,5 6xM10x35 = X1
(1)
209
120 =
= b2 M b
180
G 23,5 G1 J Q P P a Q1 f
L c
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. LC1 200 500 V 6001000 V F400 15 20 F500 15 20 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/114). L 145 145 145 146 146 146 M 181 181 181 208 208 208 P 48 48 48 55 55 55 Q 69 43 43 76 46 46 Q1 96 74 74 102 77 77 S 25 25 25 30 30 30
a b b2 c f 2P 213 206 375 219 146 3P 213 206 375 219 146 4P 261 206 375 219 146 F500 2P 233 238 400 232 150 3P 233 238 400 232 150 4P 288 238 400 232 150 f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
LC1 F400
X1
G supplied 80 80 80 80 80 140
G min. 66 66 66 66 66 66
G max. 102 102 150 120 120 175
G1 supplied G1 min G1 max. J 170 156 192 19.5 170 156 192 19.5 170 156 240 67.5 170 156 210 39.5 170 156 210 39.5 230 156 265 34.5
5/128
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
LC1 F630 and F800

72 40 64 6xM12x45
(1)
X1 =
280
304
464
264
X1
60,5 Q 80 a 80 Q1 181 (2)
J1
155 197 255
LC1 F630 F630. F800 F630
2P 3P 4P
a 309 309 389
G supplied 180 180 240
G min. 100 100 150
G max. 195 195 275
J1 68.5 68.5 68.5
Q 102 60 60
Q1 127 89 89
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage 200 500 V 690 1000 V 200 690 V 1000 V LC1 F630 20 30 LC1 F800 10 20 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/114). (2) Minimum distance required for coil removal.
LC1 F780
60 12xM12x45 = 26 = 26
180
5
22
X1
348 191 160 160 191 3P=702, 4P=862
280
X1
165 255 183 (1)
434
183 (1)
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage 200 500 V 690 1000 V X1 (mm) 30 35
(1) Minimum distance required for removal of each coil.
Fixing centres of LC1 F7804
Fixing centres of LC1 F780
400
127
180
127
90
240
190
240
102
90
240
240
132
5/129
127
180
127
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories
Right-angled connectors LA9 F p981 (set of 3) for rear connection

H b
b1
LA9 a b b1 c G H
FF981 15 18 3 42 24 10.5 6.5
FG981 20 23 3 45 26 13 9
FJ981 25 29 4 55 32.5 16.5 11
FK981 30 35 5 52 26 20 11
FL981 40 48 8 86 45 28 13
c
b1
Right-angled connectors LA9 F p979 (set of 3) for side connection
H a b
5
c c1 =
LA9 a b b1 c G G1 H
FF979 15 54 5 80 24 20 36 6.5
FG979 20 58 5 92 28 22 39 9
FJ979 25 63.5 6 120 37 29 41 11
FK979 30 68 6 120 37 29 42 11
FL979 40 117 10 130 37.5 35 76 13
Right-angled connectors LA9 F p980, with large surface area (set of 3)

a G = H1
LA9 a b b1 c c1 G H H1 H2 (1) FF980 35 70.5 40 29 3 18 18 10 60.5 6.5 7 x 10 FG980 40 82.5 45 29 3 20 20 12 72.5 9 9 x 12 FJ980 50 98.5 55 33 5 25 22 14 84.5 11 11 x 14 FK980 60 114 65 33 5 29 26 17 97 11 12.5 x 15 FL980 100 154 85 43 10 53 40 20 132 13 12.5 x 15
G1
b1 H2
(1)
5/130
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
Accessories
Paralleling links (set of 4)

LA9 FF602, FG602, FH602
a c = = H1 b b1
LA9 FK602, FL602
a c = G = H2 H1
LA9 a b b1 c G H H1 H2 1 2
FF602 25 45 30 4 37.5 12.5 6.5 11
FG602 30 55 35 5 45 15 9 11
FH602 40 60 40 8 52.5 15 11 13
FK602 50 85 55 10 22 70 14 22 11 11
FL602 60 100 65 10 26 85 17 26 13 14
b1
Links for star connection of 3 poles

LA9 Fp601 LA9 FF601 69 15 3 6.5 x 8.5 FG601 100 20 3 8.5 x 10.5 FH601 121 20 5 10.5 x 13 FK601 140 30 5 11 FL601 200 40 8 13
a = = b
a b c
5/131
Mounting
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
LC1 F115 to F330

On panel On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC On rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
(1)
G = DZ5 MF5
110
AF1 EA6
110
120
= J c
LC1
= G J1 c
F185 F225 181 181 80 80 F265 213 213 96 96 F330 219 219 96 96 LC1 c (2) 3P 4P G 3P 4P
c
F115 F150 171 171 80 80
15
F185 F225 181 181 80 80 F265 213 213 96 96 F330 219 219 96 96
F115 F185 F265 F330 LC1 F115 F150 F225 F150 c (2) 3P 171 181 213 219 c (2) 3P 171 4P 171 181 213 219 4P 171 G 3P 80 80 96 96 G 3P 80 4P 80 80 96 96 4P 80 J 3P 26.5 29 44.5 44.5 4P 45 49 68.5 68.5 J1 3P 57 59.5 61.5 61.5 4P 75.5 79.5 85.5 85.5 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/114). (2) See X1 (minimum electrical clearance) pages 5/128 and 5/129.
LC1 F
On 2 notched rails AM1 ECppp
LC1 F115 to F330
LC1 F400 to F800
AM1 EC200
AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820 (2) AF1 CD101+ AF1 VC10
(1)
AF1 CD061+ AF1 VA618 AF1 VA618 M6
AF1 CD061
AF1 VA618 M6 LA9 F100
AF1 CD081+ AF1 VC820
120
25
G AM1 EC200
35
110
G AM1 EC200 G3
G1 G2
LC1 c
F115, F150 F185, F225 F265 F330 3P 165 (3) 176 207 213 4P 165 (3) 176 207 213 G (M6) 3P 80 80 96 96 4P 80 80 96 96 G1 ( 8.5) 3P 4P G2 ( 10.5) 3P 4P (1) AF1 CDppp and AF1 VA ppp. (2) This AM1 EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (3) + 6 mm with time-delay block on LC1 F.
F400 219 219 80 80
F500 232 232 80 140
F630 255 255 180 240
F780 255 255 See page 5/129
F800 255 180
(please consult your Regional Sales Office).
5/132
180
M6
110
Schemes
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1 F
2, 3 and 4-pole contactors LC1 F115 to F630 (coil LX1 F a)
LC1 F115 to F630 (coil LX4 F c) LC1 F115 to F265 (coil LX9 F a) LC1 F800 (coil LX8 F a/ c)
3/L2 7/L4 5/L3 1/L1 A2
LC1 F780 a or c
7/L4
3/L2
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
A2
03
A1
T3/6
T4/8
A1
04
T4/8
A2
1/L1
5/L3 T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T1/2

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts 1 N/O LAD N10 (1) 1 N/C LAD N10 (1)
43/NO
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11

53/NO 61/NC
2 N/O LAD N20

53/NO 63/NO
2 N/C LAD N02

51/NC 61/NC
T2/4
T4/8
A1
7/L4
2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22

53/NO 83/NO 84 83/NO 84 51/NC 62 61/NC 62 71/NC 74 73/NO 72
44 (93)
(94)
42 (91)
41/NC (92)
54
62
64
52
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
4 N/O LAD N40

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
4 N/C LAD N04

51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
54
2 N/O + 2 N/C (2) LAD C22

53/NO 87/NO 61/NC 75/NC
62
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31

53/NO 54
54
54
64
74
84
54
62
52
82
62
62
(1) Items in brackets: see "TeSys d contactors". (2) 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break. Instantaneous auxiliary contacts with terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: pages 5/110 and 5/111) 1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N11P LAD N11G LAD N22P LAD N22G
13/NO 43/NO 13/NO 43/NO 53/NO 63/NO 21/NC 31/NC 21/NC 31/NC 31/NC 41/NC
72
72
82
76
88
54
5
53/NO 73/NO 74 A2 A2 61/NC 83/NO 84
22
44
14
32
44
42
54
14
32
22
Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts 2 N/O (24-50 V) 2 N/O (5-24 V) 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 2 N/O standard LA1 DX20 LA1 DY20 LA1 DZ40
53/NO 63/NO 53/NO 63/NO 53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
32
64
64
54
64
74
54
64
54
Time delay auxiliary contacts On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD T p

67/NO 55/N
Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp

57/NO 65/NC
84
On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD Sp

55/NC A1 67/NO A1 68
56
68
58
Standard a coils
LX1 FF, FG, FJFL LX1 FH0422FH3802
03 A1 A2
66
LX1 FH0202FH0362 LX1 FH4402FH10002 LX1 F8p

A1 A2
LX1 FX Rectifier supplied and fixed on the contactor
LX4 FF, FG, FH, FJ, FK, FL, FX (1), LX4 F8p
+
A1 A2 A1 A2
A2 A1 A2
A1
(1) 2 coils in series.
Special a coils
LX9 FF, FG
A1 A2
LX9 FHppp2
A1 B1 A2/B2
LX9 FJ, FK, FL
LX4 F8p
(1)
+
A1
(2)
A1 A2
A2 01
+
A1 A2
(1) Breaking on a side Drop-out time 50 ms. (2) Breaking on c side Drop-out time 20 ms.
54
Standard c coils
62
5/133
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Pre-assembled
LC2 F115 to F265 (reverser supplied on 2 bars which can be used for fixing the device)
S
X1 =
X1
L c f
Q1
P1 a
Q1 f
J1
= G1
= J a2
= G1
= J1
f - Minimum distance required for coil removal.
Bar fixing centres Vertical: 120 mm Horizontal: a2 see table
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. LC1 200500 V 6601000 V F115, F150 10 15 F185 10 15 F225, F265 10 15
LC2 F115 F150 F185 F225 F265
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
a 345 419 345 422 357 437 357 437 425 521
a2 317 378 317 381 326 390 326 390 386 464
b 162 162 170 170 174 174 197 197 203 203
b1 137 137 137 137 137 137 137 137 145 145
c 171 171 171 171 181 181 181 181 213 213
G1 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 96 96
J 71 108 71 111 78 118 78 118 109 157
J1 57 75.5 57 75.5 59.5 79.5 59.5 79.5 61.5 85.5
L 107 107 107 107 113.5 113.5 113.5 113.5 141 141
M 147 147 150 150 154 154 172 172 178 178
P 37 37 40 40 40 40 48 48 48 48
P1 77 77 71 71 78 78 62 54 100 100
Q1 60 60 57 55.5 59.5 59.5 51.5 47.5 66.5 66.5
S 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25
f 131 131 131 131 130 130 130 130 147 147
M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M10
5/134
110/120
120
b1
TeSys contactors
For customer assembly, fixing recommended on AM1 EC uprights, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
2 x LC1 F115 to F330 2 x LC1 F400, F500, F630, F800
P1
X1 =
(1)
P1
(1)
= 120 (2) = = 180 = b
110/120 =
b1
X1
L c J1
= G1
= J a
= G1
= J1
J1 J3
G G1
J J2 a
G G1
J1 J3
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. LC1 200500 V 6601000 V 200690 V 1000 V F115, F150 10 15 F185 10 15 F225, F265 10 15 F330 10 15 F400 15 20 F500 15 20 F630 20 30 F800 10 20
2 x LC1 F115 3P 4P F150 3P 4P F185 3P 4P F225 3P 4P F265 3P 4P F330 3P 4P F400 3P 4P F500 3P 4P F630 3P 4P F800 3P
a 345 419 345 422 357 437 357 437 425 521 447 543 446 542 485 595 636 796 636
b 162 162 170 170 174 174 197 197 203 203 206 206 206 206 238 238 304 304 304
b1 137 137 137 137 137 137 137 137 145 145 145 145 209 209 209 209 280 280 280
c 171 171 171 171 181 181 181 181 213 213 219 219 219 219 232 232 255 255 255
G 80 80 80 140 180 240 180
G1 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 96 96 96 96 170 170 170 230
J 71 108 71 111 78 118 78 118 109 157 124 172 157 157 156 156 139 139 139
J1 57 75.5 57 75.5 59.5 79.5 59.5 79.5 61.5 85.5 65.5 89.5 64.5 112.5 84.5 79.5 68.5 88.5 68.5
J2 67 67 66 66
J3 19.5 67.5 39.5 34.5
L 107 107 107 107 113.5 113.5 113.5 113.5 141 141 145 145 145 145 146 146 155 155 155
P1 77 77 71 71 78 78 62 54 100 100 107 107 107 107 112 112 137 137 137
(1) Except LC1 F630 and F800 : 4 x 10.5. (2) Except LC1 F630 and F800. For other dimensions: see pages 5/128 and 5/129.
5/135
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Vertically mounted
For customer assembly, with mechanical interlock (MI) LA9 F , fixing recommended on AM1 EC uprights (please consult your Regional Sales Office). 2 x LC1 identical or different ratings (LC1 F115 to F630 and F800). See pages 5/106 to 5/109 Assembly A Assembly B Assembly C
J3
80
(1) (3) = =
H
12,5 (5) (1)
G5
G1
12,5 (5) (1)
G5
G1
(6)
120
= =
H1
(1)
=
(3)
120 =
120
(1)
(3) =
(1) (5)
(6)
= =
(4)
J4 80 J2
(1) Mechanical interlock shaft. (2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only. (3) 4 x 6.5 for LC1 F115 to F225. Assembly A (7) - Mechanical interlock reference G3 3P G3 4P H min. H max. H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P J1 4P LA9 FF4F 0 0 200 310 80 190 137 155.5 LA9 FG4F 3 4 210 300 90 180 139.5 159.5 LA9 FG4G 0 0 220 310 100 190 139.5 159.5 J2 3P J2 4P J3 3P J3 4P J4 3P J4 4P LA9 FF4F 137 155.5 48.5 67 48.5 67 LA9 FG4F 137 155.5 53 73 54 69 LA9 FG4G 139.5 159.5 53 73 53 73 For customer assembly, fixing recommended on AM1 EC uprights, please consult your Regional Sales Office 2 x LC1 F780
J4
80 J2
9 12,5
G4
G2 J2
(4) 4 x 6.5 for LC1 F265. (5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket.
(6) 4 x 8.5 for LC1 F400, F500 or 4 x 10.5 for LC1 F630 and F800.
250
191
160
160
191
702(LC1 F780), 862(LC1 F7804)
X1 and fixings, see page 5/129. (7) Only 3P for F800. (8) In this case, G4 is greater than G5. Selection : pages 5/160 to 5/183 References : pages 5/104 to 5/109
Assembly B (7) - Mechanical interlock reference G1 3P G1 4P G3 3P G3 4P G5 3P G5 4P LA9 FH4F 96 96 21 27 60 83 LA9 FJ4F 80 80 45 26 83 83 LA9 FK4F 80 140 45 26 83 83 LA9 FL4F 180 240 35 17 74 74 LA9 FH4G 96 96 19 23 60 83 LA9 FJ4G 80 80 42 22 83 83 LA9 FK4G 80 140 42 22 83 83 LA9 FL4G 180 240 33 13 74 74 H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P J1 4P J2 3P J2 4P LA9 FH4F 110 250 157.5 181.5 137 155.5 LA9 FJ4F 80 210 144.5 192.5 137 155.5 LA9 FK4F 100 210 164.5 219.5 137 155.5 LA9 FL4F 140 210 248.5 328.5 137 155.5 LA9 FH4G 120 250 157.5 181.5 139.5 159.5 LA9 FJ4G 90 220 144.5 192.5 139.5 159.5 LA9 FK4G 110 220 164.5 219.5 139.5 159.5 LA9 FL4G 150 220 248.5 328.5 139.5 159.5 Assembly C (7) G1 3P G1 4P G2 3P G2 4P G3 3P G3 4P LA9 FH4H 96 96 96 96 0 0 LA9 FJ4H 80 80 96 96 23 0 LA9 FK4H 80 140 96 96 23 0 LA9 FL4H 180 240 96 96 14 9 (8) LA9 FJ4J 80 80 80 80 0 0 LA9 FK4J 80 140 80 80 0 0 LA9 FL4J 180 240 80 80 9 (8) 9 (8) LA9 FK4K 80 140 80 140 0 0 LA9 FL4K 180 240 80 140 9 (8) 9 (8) LA9 FL4L 180 240 180 240 0 0 H min. H max. H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P J1 4P LA9 FH4H 250 380 130 260 157.5 181.5 LA9 FJ4H 260 380 110 230 144.5 192.5 LA9 FK4H 280 380 130 230 164.5 219.5 LA9 FL4H 330 380 170 220 248.5 328.5 LA9 FJ4J 260 380 60 200 144.5 192.5 LA9 FK4J 280 380 100 200 164.5 219.5 LA9 FL4J 325 380 140 195 248.5 329.5 LA9 FK4K 300 380 120 200 164.5 329.5 LA9 FL4K 345 380 160 195 248.5 328.5 LA9 FL4L 380 380 200 200 248.5 328.5
H min. H max. 240 380 250 380 270 380 310 380 250 380 250 380 270 380 310 380 J4 3P J4 4P 48.5 67 48.5 67 48.5 67 48.5 67 53 73 53 73 53 73 53 73 G4 3P 60 60 60 60 83 83 83 83 83 74 J2 3P 157.5 157.5 157.5 157.5 144.5 144.5 144.5 164.5 164.5 248.5 G4 4P 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 74 J2 4P 181.5 181.5 181.5 181.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 219.5 219.5 328.5 G5 3PG5 4P 60 83 83 83 83 83 74 74 83 83 83 83 74 74 83 83 74 74 74 74
X1
X1
180
420 1034
180
5/136
F330 } 120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630 F800
H1
G3 (2)
H1
J1
9 G3(2) J1
(4)
F330 } 120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630 F800
(6)
G3(2)
J1
F330 } F265 120 F400 F500 180 F630 F800
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control LC2 F

2 x LC1 F 2 x LC1 F
L1 L2 L3
Vertically mounted
1/L1 1/L2 3 4 1/L3 6 5
A1
A1
A2
A1
L3 L2 L1
3 2/L2 1/L2 4 A1 1 5 1/L3 5 6 2/L3 8 7 1N 6
A2
A2
A2
Changeover contactor pairs for distribution LC2 F

2 x LC1 F 2 x LC1 F
1/L1 2/L1 2/L2 1/L3 1/L2 2/L3 1N 2N
Vertically mounted
1/L1
2/L1
2 2 1
A1
A1
A2
A1
N L3 L2 L1 3 A1 1 5 7
A2
A2
A2
L1
L2
L3
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
Electrical interlocking of reversers fitted with mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts
LA9 F
KM2 A1
KM1 A1
KM1 A2 A2
KM2
2N
5/137
General
TeSys contactors
General
A changeover contactor pair ensures continuity of operation of an installation and energy management. It switches between: b a power supply source M (main) which normally supplies the installation, b and a power supply source S (standby) which may be an incoming line from an additional network or a generating set. The supply sources may be 3-phase or 3-phase + neutral. Supply - 3-phase
Main Standby
1/1L1
1/2L1
5/1L3
KM1
6 2 4 2 4 6
3/2L2
3/1L2
3/2L2
5/2L3
KM2
Application
Supply 3-phase + neutral

Main Standby
1/1L1
1/2L1
W/L3
U/L1
V/L2
7/1N
3/1L2
KM1
6 8 2 4 2 4 6 8 N
5/1L3
5/2L3
7/2N
KM2
Application
The 2 contactors must be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent any paralleling, even transitory, of the two supplies.
5/138
W/L3
U/L1
V/L2
References
TeSys contactors
Changeover contactor pairs for customer assembly: 3-phase

Vertically mounted. Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V Utilisation category: AC-1 Maximum temperature in the vicinity of the devices: 40 C
813221
Maximum operational current Main Standby 3-phase 3-phase 1600 A 1000 A
Contactors (1) Main Reference LC1 F780
Standby Reference LC1 F6309
Mechanical interlock (2) Reference LA9 FX970
1600 A
1600 A
LC1 F780
LC1 F780
LA9 FX970
Changeover contactor pairs for customer assembly: 3-phase + neutral

LA9 FX970
Vertically mounted. Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V Utilisation category: AC-1 Maximum temperature in the vicinity of the devices: 40 C
Maximum operational current Main Standby 3-phase + N 3-phase + N 1600 A + 1000 A 1000 A + 1000 A Contactors (1) Main Reference LC1 F78041 Mechanical interlock (2) Reference LA9 FX970 (3)
813222
Standby Reference LC1 F63049
1600 A + 1000 A 1600 A + 1000 A
LC1 F78041
LC1 F78040
LA9 FX970 (3)
1600 A + 1600 A 1000 A + 1000 A
LC1 F7804
LC1 F63049
LA9 FX971
1600 A + 1600 A 1600 A + 1600 A
LC1 F7804
LC1 F7804
LA9 FX971
LA9 FX971
(1) Coils to be ordered separately, see pages 5/121 to 5/124. (2) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 4 power connecting links. To order the the 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors: see page 5/111. (3) Neutral connecting link not supplied (to be ordered separately).
5/139
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Dimensions
Contactors used to assemble high power changeover contactor pairs LC1 F780: see page 5/129
LC1 F6309 Common side view LC1 F63049
40
40
180/190 280 348
202
165 250
204 183 (1)

LC1 F78040
160 702
160
178 183 (1) 183 (1)
306
204
160
160 862
160
178 183 (1)
LC1 F78041
Common side view
60 40 40
60
180/190 280 434
202
264
165 250
191 183 (1)
160
160 862
173
178 183 (1) 183 (1)
264
178
173
160 862
160
191 183 (1)
(1) Minimum distance required for removal of each coil.
3-phase changeover contactor pairs

LC1 F780 + LC1 F780 + LA9 FX970: see page 5/136 LC1 F780 + LC1 F6309 + LA9 FX970
180
180
420
969
250
702
5/140
306
TeSys contactors
5
3-phase + neutral changeover contactor pairs
LC1 F78041 + LC1 F63049 + LA9 FX970 LC1 F78041 + LC1 F78040 + LA9 FX970
180
180
862 250 862
LC1 F7804 + LC1 F7804 + LA9 FX971
420
180
250
LC1 F7804 + LC1 F63049 + LA9 FX971
180
420
1034
969
180
180
5
1034
969
420
250
180
862 250 862
Schemes
3-phase changeover contactor pairs
1 1/L1 3 1/L2 5 1/L3
3-phase + neutral changeover contactor pairs

1 1/L1 3 1/L2 5 1/L3 1N 7 8 A2 N L3 L2 L1 3 A1 1 5 7 2N 8 A1 A2 A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A1
180
2
420
L3 L2 L1
5 A2 6 A1 A2 2/L1 2 2/L3
A2
A1
4 2/L2 4
2/L3 6
2/L1
2/L2
5/141
References, dimensions
TeSys contactors
5

For contactors TeSys LC1 D
References
These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt drop or momentary supply failure. Control circuit : d.c. supply
For use with contactor Type (1) Contactor reference to be completed (2) LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 or LC1 D09, D12, D18, D25, D32 D38 LC1 DppPD LC1 DppQD LC1 DppTD LC1 DppVD LC1 DppWD LC1 DppXD Corresponding delayed opening device Supply voltage NonReference 50/60 Hz adjustable delay time (Tr) Weight
V 110115 120127 220 240 380 415440
s 1.55 2.55 48 510 48 5.513
LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q
kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215
LAZ R90F
LC1 D40, LC1 D50 or LC1 D65
LC1 DppPD LC1 DppQD LC1 DppTD LC1 DppWD LC1 DppXD
110115 120127 220240 380 415440
0.51 0.51.5 12.5 12.5 13
LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q
0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215
LC1 D80
LC1 DppPD LC1 DppQD LC1 DppTD LC1 DppVD LC1 DppWD LC1 DppXD
110120 120127 220 240 380 415440
0.41 0.51 0.52 12.5 12 12.5
LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q
0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215
Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices

Application LAZ R91F For use with delayed opening device LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q Operational voltage Nonadjustable delay time s Tr x 2 Tr x 2 Tr x 2 Reference Weight
To double the delay time
V 110127 220240 380440
LAZ R91F LAZ R91M LAZ R91Q
kg 0.165 0.165 0.165
(1) These contactors can be supplied as standard for this application or can be adapted by replacing the coil (except for contactors LC1 D09 pppp to LC1 D38pppp on which the coil is not replaceable). (2) Reference to be completed : see page 5/58.
Dimensions
LAZ R9 pp
Schemes
LAZ R9pp + LC1 D
D+ (LAZ R) F1
LAZ R9pp + LC1 F

L+ (LAZ R) F1
3 3 77
1 A1
1 A1
108 114
55
L (LAZ R)
A2
L (LAZ R)
Other versions
Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/142
A2
References
TeSys contactors
For contactors TeSys LC1 F
References
These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt drop or momentary supply failure. Control circuit : d.c. supply (1)
For use with contactor Type With coil Corresponding delayed opening device Supply NonReference voltage adjustable 50/60 Hz delay time (Tr) V s 110 127 220 240 380415 440 110 127 220 240 380415 440 110 127 220 240 380415 440 110 127 220 240 380 415 440 110 127 220 240 380 415 440 110 127 220 240 380 415 440 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q LAZ R90F LAZ R90F LAZ R90M LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q LAZ R90Q Weight
kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215
LC1 F115 or LC1 F150
LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4
FF110 FF125 FF220 FF250 FF375 FF440 FG110 FG125 FG220 FG250 FG375 FG440 FH110 FH125 FH220 FH250 FH375 FH440 FJ110 FJ125 FJ220 FJ250 FJ375 FJ400 FJ440
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LX4 FK110 LX4 FK125 LX4 FK220 LX4 FK250 LX4 FK375 LX4 FK400 LX4 FK440 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 LX4 FL110 FL125 FL220 FL250 FL375 FL400 FL440
LC1 F630
Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices (1)

Application For use with Operational delayed voltage opening device V LAZ R90F 110127 LAZ R90M LAZ R90Q 220240 380440 Nonadjustable delay time s Tr x 2 Tr x 2 Tr x 2 Reference Weight
To double the delay time
LAZ R91F LAZ R91M LAZ R91Q
kg 0.165 0.165 0.165
(1) Dimensions and schemes: see page 5/142. Other versions Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/143
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Contactors TeSys LC1 B
Environment
Contactor type Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60158-1/IEC 60947-4 Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V V LC1 BL 1000 1500 LC1 BM 1000 1500 LC1 BP 1000 1500 LC1 BR 1000 1500
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Standard version Special version Storage Operation Permissible Without derating Without derating C C C m
IEC 60158-1, IEC 60947-4, NF C 63-110,VDE 0660, BS 5424 CSA, BV, RINA TC TH - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 50+ 60 3000 30 occasional, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Ambient air temperature around the device (for operation at Uc) Maximum operating altitude Operating positions
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3, y 55 C (Ue y 440 V) In AC-1, y 40 C Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to Frequency limits Without derating (sine wave) Derating coefficient A A V Hz 1, 2, 3 or 4 750 800 1, 2, 3 or 4 1000 1250 1, 2, 3 or 4 1500 2000 1, 2, 3 or 4 1800 2750
1000 50/60 100 Hz: 0.9 - 150 Hz: 0.8 - 250 Hz: 0.7 - 400 Hz: 0.5 800 10 000 10 000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 7000 4800 3500 2100 1200 800 1000 800 0.18 88 115 2 50 x 5 4x8 1250 10 000 10 000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 8000 5200 3800 2400 1800 1200 1500 1200 0.18 180 280 2 80 x 5 4 x 10 2000 15 000 15 000 12 000 9000 5000 12 000 12 000 9600 6400 5200 3600 2800 2 x 800 (1) 2 x 1000 (1) 2 x 1000 (1) 0.13 290 520 3 100 x5 4 x 10 2750 18 000 18 000 15 000 11 000 6000 15 000 15 000 12 000 8000 6300 4400 3600 2 x 1000 (1) 2 x 1200 (1) 2 x 1200 (1) 0.09 360 680 4 100 x 5 4 x 10
Maximum thermal current (Ith) y 40 C Rated making capacity I rms conforming to IEC 60158-1 and 60947-4 Rated breaking capacity I rms up to 440 V conforming to 500 V IEC 60158-1 660-690 V and 60947-4 1000 V Permissible short time rating For 1 s From cold state, with no current For 5 s flowing for previous 60 minutes For 10 s at y 40 C For 30 s For 1 min. For 3 min. For 10 min. Short-circuit protection by fuses U y 440 V Motor circuit (type aM) With thermal overload relay (type gl) gl fuses
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A m W W
Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz Power dissipated per pole AC-3 AC-1 Number of bars Bar
Connection
mm mm
Bolt diameter Tightening torque Power circuit connections
N.m 21 35 35 35 (1) Fuses must not be connected in parallel unless specified by the manufacturer.
Dimensions and schemes : pages 5/154 and 5/155
5/144
Contactors

Contactor type Rated control voltage 50/60 Hz c 1,2 or 3-pole contactors c 4-pole contactors Operation Drop-out a Number of poles: 1 Number of poles: 2 Number of poles: 3 Number of poles: 4 Number of poles: 1 Number of poles: 2 Number of poles: 3 Number of poles: 4 V V V V V VA VA VA VA LC1 BL 110500 48500 48500 0.851.1 Uc 0.300.50 Uc LC1 BM 110500 48500 48500 0.851.1 Uc 0.300.50 Uc LC1 BP 110500 48500 48500 0.851.1 Uc 0.350.50 Uc LC1 BR 110500 48500 60500 0.851.1 Ucw 0.400.50 Uc
Voltage limits
Maximum consumption (coil + economy resistor)
Inrush: 620 - sealed: 10 Inrush: 1000 - sealed: 20 Inrush: 1300 - sealed: 31 Inrush: 1600 - sealed: 47
c (1)
W W W W
Inrush: 520 - sealed: 10 Inrush: 800 - sealed: 20 Inrush: 1100 - sealed: 31 Inrush: 1400 - sealed: 47
Operating time (2) average at Uc (in milliseconds)
"C" O breaking on a side O breaking on c side
ms 100150 100150 100150 100150 ms 50100 50100 50100 50100 ms 2040 2040 2040 2040 Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Mechanical durability (at Uc)
In millions of operating cycles
Maximum operating rate in mechanical operating cycles
Ambient temperature y 55 C
Op. 120 cycs/h
120
120
120
Characteristics of instantaneous auxiliary contacts ZC4 GMp

Rated thermal current Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to VDE, group C Conforming to IEC 60947-1 and VDE 0660 A V V A 20 660 750 20
Short-circuit protection gl type cartridge fuses
Operational power 1 million operating cycles V VA/W
a supply 110/127 220 2000 4000
380 4000
415/440 500 4000 3500
c supply 110 220 250 250
440 230
500 200
Making and breaking capacity Cabling With cable end Without cable end
VA/W mm 2 mm 2
14 000
23 000
35 000
45 000
35 000
1600
800
400
360
1 or 2 x 4 mm2 conductors 1 or 2 x 6 mm2 conductors
(1) The inrush and sealed power values of d.c. electromagnets often require the use of an intermediate relay for control. (2) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
5/145
References
Contactors
Contactors for motor control in category AC-3, from 750 to 1800 A (a or c )

3-pole contactors
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Rated operational current in AC-3 440V up to 500 V kW 500 660 V 690 V kW 560 1000 V kW A 530 750 Instantan. auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
220 V 380 V 230 V 400 V kW kW 220 400
415 V kW 425
440 V kW 450
522612
2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4
2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3
LC1 BL33 p22 LC1 BL33 p31 LC1 BL33 p13 LC1 BL33 p40 LC1 BM33p22 LC1 BM33p31 LC1 BM33p13 LC1 BM33p40 LC1 BP33p22 LC1 BP33p31 LC1 BP33p13 LC1 BP33p40 LC1 BR33p22 LC1 BR33p31 LC1 BR33p13 LC1 BR33p40
kg 58.00 58.00 58.00 58.00 57.00 57.00 57.00 57.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 129.00 129.00 129.00 129.00
LC1 BP33
280
500
530
560
600
670
530
1000
425
750
800
800
700
750
670
1500
500
900
900
900
900
900
750
1800
Contactors for control in category AC-1, from 800 to 2750 A (a or c )

Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum operational current in AC-1 ( y 40 C) Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
2 2 LC1 BL31 p22 3 1 LC1 BL31 p31 1 3 LC1 BL31 p13 4 LC1 BL31 p40 2 2 2 LC1 BL32 p22 3 1 LC1 BL32 p31 1 3 LC1 BL32 p13 4 LC1 BL32 p40 3 2 2 LC1 BL33 p22 3 1 LC1 BL33 p31 1 3 LC1 BL33 p13 4 LC1 BL33 p40 4 2 2 LC1 BL34 p22 3 1 LC1 BL34 p31 1 3 LC1 BL34 p13 4 LC1 BL34 p40 (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 48 110 125 127 220 230 240 380 400 a 50400 Hz F G M P U Q V 1 c ED FD GD MD
A 800
kg 32.00 32.00 32.00 32.00 45.00 45.00 45.00 45.00 58.00 58.00 58.00 58.00 72.00 72.00 72.00 72.00 415 N 440 R RD 500 S
For voltages other than those indicated above, clearly note down the operational voltage (3 figures) and the type of current (2 letters: AC or DC). Example: 82 V d.c., the reference becomes LC1 BP33082DC22. For coil characteristics, see pages 5/150 to 5/153.
5/146
Contactors
Contactors for control in category AC-1, from 800 to 2750 A (a or c )

Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum operational current in AC-1 ( y 40 C) Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts
(continued)
Weight
522612
A 1250
2 LC1 BP33
2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4
2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3
LC1 BM31p22 LC1 BM31p31 LC1 BM31p13 LC1 BM31p40 LC1 BM32p22 LC1 BM32p31 LC1 BM32p13 LC1 BM32p40 LC1 BM33p22 LC1 BM33p31 LC1 BM33p13 LC1 BM33p40 LC1 BM34p22 LC1 BM34p31 LC1 BM34p13 LC1 BM34p40 LC1 BP31p22 LC1 BP31p31 LC1 BP31p13 LC1 BP31p 40 LC1 BP32p22 LC1 BP32p31 LC1 BP32p13 LC1 BP32p40 LC1 BP33p22 LC1 BP33p31 LC1 BP33p13 LC1 BP33p40 LC1 BP34p22 LC1 BP34p31 LC1 BP34p13 LC1 BP34p40 LC1 BR31p22 LC1 BR31p31 LC1 BR31p13 LC1 BR31p40 LC1 BR32p22 LC1 BR32p31 LC1 BR32p13 LC1 BR32p40 LC1 BR33p22 LC1 BR33p31 LC1 BR33p13 LC1 BR33p40 LC1 BR34p22 LC1 BR34p31 LC1 BR34p13 LC1 BR34p40
kg 31.00 31.00 31.00 31.00 44.00 44.00 44.00 44.00 57.00 57.00 57.00 57.00 71.00 71.00 71.00 71.00 41.00 41.00 41.00 41.00 65.00 65.00 65.00 65.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 52.00 52.00 52.00 52.00 85.00 85.00 85.00 85.00 129.00 129.00 129.00 129.00 160.00 160.00 160.00 160.00
2000
2750
(1) See previous page.
5/147
References
TeSys contactors
813307
Spare parts
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks ZC4 GM1 Description For contactor LC1 B Composition 1 N/O 1 N/C For contactor Number of sets required per contactor pole 1 1 2 3 Reference ZC4 GM1 ZC4 GM2 Set reference Weight kg 0.030 0.030 Weight kg 0.420 0.420 0.420 0.420 Weight kg 0.220 0.200 0.120 3.700 3.700 6.200 8.500
813308
Set of contacts (1 moving contact, 1 fixed contact)
813309
LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR
PA1 LB80 PA1 LB80 PA1 LB80 PA1 LB80 Reference PA1 LB75 PA1 LB76 PA1 LB89 PA1 LB50 PA1 LB50 PA1 PB50 PA1 RB50
PA1 LB80 (PA1 LB76 + PA1 LB75)
PA1 LB89 Description For contactor B B B BL BM
Moving contact LC1 only (for 1 finger) Fixed contact only LC1 (for 1 finger) Blow-out horn only LC1 (for 1 finger) Arc chamber LC1 (for 1 contactor pole) LC1
813306
LC1 BP
5
PA1 LB50 Description
LC1 BR
For contactor Sold in lots of 2 Unit reference LA9 B103 Weight kg 1.620
Bar support LC1 BL to BR bracket for mounting on 120 or 150 mm centres

813305
Assembly of two vertically mounted contactors by the customer

Description Mechanical interlock and locking device components For contactor LC1 B Reference EZ2 LB0601 Weight kg 1.280
Specifications
- Positive mechanical interlock between two vertically mounted contactors of the same or different ratings. - Connecting rod with cranks mounted on the right-hand, pole side. - Vertical fixing centres of the two contactors: 600 mm. Description Specification Height mm 1650 1850 2000 M8 M8 x 18 Sold in lots of 4 4 4 10 10 Unit reference AM1 EC165 AM1 EC185 AM1 EC200 AF1 CD081 AF1 VC820 Weight kg 2.460 2.760 2.980 0.020 0.024
Notched mounting rails used as uprights and as equipment support 1/4 turn sliding clip nut and corresponding screw for assembly of rails AM1 EC
2 mm steel, with zinc chromate treatment
EZ2 LB0601
5/148
Adjustment characteristics
TeSys contactors
5
Electromagnet
Electromagnet EB5 KB50 Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel
Moving circuit
E e
Coil Moving circuit
Return spring
Poles
Complete pole N/O pole
Fixed contact Moving contact
F
Opening gap adjustment
Pole spring
Adjustment of application force
c or a supply adjustment characteristics with economy resistor (and rectifier on a)

Contactor type Electromagnet Pick-up travel (E) Pull-in travel (e) Coil Pull-in voltage Drop-out voltage N/O pole Adjustment of application force (F ) on the contact per pole according to contactor composition 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole V V daN daN daN daN mm mm LC1 BL EB5 KB50 30 10 WB1 KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 30 30 30 LC1 BM EB5 KB50 30 10 WB1 KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 30 30 30 LC1 BP EB5 KB50 30 10 WB1 KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 (1) 30 (1) 30 (1) 30 (1) LC1 BR EB5 KB50 30 10 WB1 KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 (2) 30 (2) 30 (2) 30 (2)
(1) Each pole has 2 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts. (2) Each pole has 3 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
5/149
References
TeSys contactors
Replacement coils and accessories for single-pole contactors
References
The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply. b For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: - 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor). b For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: - 1 individual rectifier (to be wired), - 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectified current side.
Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 19.7 25.2 32.5 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 257 408 507 I inrush 10 % at Un max A 10.3 9.5 8.9 7.1 6.9 5.3 4.7 4.3 4.2 3 2.7 2.4 2.3 1.9 1.7 1.6 1.6 1.1 (3) 1 (4) Economy resistor Economy resistor Unit reference Contact Total resistance 270 330 390 560 680 820 1000 1200 1800 2700 3300 3900 4700 6800 8200 10 000 12 000 20 000 24 000 Qty Reference Rectifier (for a only) Reference Coil (2) Reference Weight
WB1 KBppp
V 47-51 52-56 57-64 65-68 69-79 80-87 88-94 95-108 109-136 137-151 152-166 167-189 190-221 222-243 244-267 268-318 319-405 406-446 447-500
V 110-125 126-155 156-173 174-191 192-216 217-256 257-280 281-307 308-365 366-463 464-500
DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2
SC0270 SC0330 SC0390 SC0560 SC0680 SC0820 SC1000 SC1200 SC1800 SC2700 SC3300 SC3900 SC4700 SC6800 SC8200 SC1001 SC1201 SC1001 SC1201
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 LP1 D12004LD LP1 D12004UD LP1 D12004UD LP1 D12004TD LP1 D12004VD LP1 D12004RD
DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S
WB1 KB155 WB1 KB132 WB1 KB123 WB1 KB133 WB1 KB121 WB1 KB130 WB1 KB140 WB1 KB134 WB1 KB124 WB1 KB122 WB1 KB135 WB1 KB136 WB1 KB139 WB1 KB125 WB1 KB137 WB1 KB126 WB1 KB138 WB1 KB127 WB1 KB128
kg 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
522634
Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 380520 W, sealed 0.150.20 W - a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 450620 VA, sealed 0.150.20 VA b Time constant when sealed 25 ms b Economy resistor consumption: 710 W b Operating cycles/hour at y 55 C: y 120 b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current. (2) Standard coils: TC treatment. For hot and humid atmospheres TH treatment is available; add the suffix TH to the coil reference: Example: WB1 KB135 becomes WB1 KB135TH. (3) 2 resistors in series 2 x 10 000 . (4) 2 resistors in series: 2 x 12 000 .
5/150
References
TeSys contactors
Replacement coils and accessories for 2-pole contactors
References
Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % 3.22 4.04 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 19.7 25.2 32.5 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 257 I inrush 10 % at Un max A 15.8 13.8 12.5 11.6 11 8.8 8.6 6.6 6 5.4 5.3 3.8 3.4 3 3 2.4 2.1 2 1.9 Economy resistor Resistors (2 in series) Unit Total reference resistance 2x68 82 + 100 100 + 120 2x120 2x150 180 + 220 220 + 270 2x330 2x390 2x470 2x680 2x1000 2x1200 1500 + 1800 1800 + 2200 2x2700 2x3300 2x3900 4700 + 5600 Contact Qty Reference Rectifier (for a only) Reference Coil (2) Reference Weight
V 48-51 52-56 57-62 63-68 69-79 80-85 86-98 99-108 109-119 120-136 137-173 174-191 192-210 211-238 239-279 280-310 311-341 342-399 400-500
V 99-113 114-125 126-136 137-156 157-196 197-216 217-238 239-272 273-318 319-359 360-387 388-452 453-500
WB1 KBppp
DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2
SC0068 SC0082 SC0100 SC0100 SC0120 SC0120 SC0150 SC0180 SC0220 SC0220 SC0270 SC0330 SC0390 SC0470 SC0680 SC1000 SC1200 SC1500 SC1800 SC1800 SC2200 SC2700 SC3300 SC3900 SC4700 SC5600
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 ZC4 ZC4 ZC4 ZC4 ZC4 ZC4 GM2 GM2 GM2 GM2 GM2 GM2 GM2
DR5 DR5 DR5 DR5 DR5 DR5 DR5 TE1U TE1U TE1U TE1U TE1U TE1U TE1U
kg 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
522634
LP1 D12004UD LP1 LP1 LP1 LP1 D12004UD D12004TD D12004VD D12004VD
DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S
Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 600800 W, sealed 0.350.5 W - a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 7201000 VA, sealed 0.350.5 VA b Time constant when sealed 25 ms b Economy resistor consumption: 1520 W. b Operating cycles/hour at y 55 C: y 120 b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current. (2) Standard coils: TC treatment. For hot and humid atmospheres TH treatment is available; add the suffix TH to the coil reference: Example: WB1 KB135 becomes WB1 KB135TH.
5/151
References
TeSys contactors
References
Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % 1.85 2.35 3.22 4.04 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 11.7 25.2 32.2 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 257 I inrush 10 % at Un max A 27 23.5 18.5 16 14.5 13.5 12.8 10.2 10 7.7 7 6.3 6.2 4.5 4 3.6 3.5 2.8 2.5 2.4 1.9 Economy resistor Resistors (2 in parallel or in series) Unit Total reference resistance DR2 SC0150 2x150// DR2 SC0180 2x180// DR2 SC0220 2x220// DR2 SC0270 2X270// DR2 SC0330 2x330// DR2 SC0100 2x100 DR2 SC0120 2x120 DR2 SC0150 150 + DR2 SC0180 180 DR2 SC0180 180 + DR2 SC0220 220 DR2 SC0270 2x270 DR2 SC0330 2x330 DR2 SC0390 390 + DR2 SC0470 470 DR2 SC0560 2x560 DR2 SC0820 2x820 DR2 SC1000 2x1000 DR2 SC1200 2x1200 DR2 SC1500 2x1500 DR2 SC2200 2x2200 DR2 SC2700 2x2700 DR2 SC3300 2x3300 DR2 SC3900 2x3900 Contact Qty Reference Rectifier (for a only) Reference Coil (2) Reference Weight
WB1 KBppp
V 47-50 51-55 56-60 61-66 67-72 73-79 80-92 93-98 99-114
V 108-113 114-132 133-145 146-160 161-181 182-228 229-255 256-282 283-316 317-372 373-408 409-452 453-500
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ZC4 ZC4 ZC4 ZC4 ZC4 ZC4 ZC4 ZC4
GM2 GM2 GM2 GM2 GM2 GM2 GM2 GM2
DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S
WB1 KB154 WB1 KB153 WB1 KB141 WB1 KB142 WB1 KB155 WB1 KB132 WB1 KB123 WB1 KB133 WB1 KB121 WB1 KB130 WB1 KB140 WB1 KB134 WB1 KB124 WB1 KB122 WB1 KB135 WB1 KB136 WB1 KB139 WB1 KB125 WB1 KB137 WB1 KB126 WB1 KB138
kg 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
522634
ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 LP1 D12004LD LP1 D12004UD LP1 D12004UD LP1 D12004TD LP1 D12004VD LP1 D12004VD LP1 D12004RD
115-126 127-139 140-159 160-201 202-222 223-246 247-277 278-327 328-360 361-399 400-469 470-500
Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 9001100 W, sealed 0.71 W - a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 11001300 VA, sealed 0.71 VA b Time constant when sealed 25 ms b Economy resistor consumption: 2430 W. b Operating cycles/hour at y 55 C: y 120 b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current. (2) Standard coils: TC treatment. For hot and humid atmospheres TH treatment is available; add the suffix TH to the coil reference: Example: WB1 KB135 becomes WB1 KB135TH.
5/152
References
TeSys contactors
References
Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % 2.35 3.22 4.04 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 19.7 25.2 32.5 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 I inrush 10 % at Un max A 26 21 18 16.3 15 14 11.5 11.3 8.7 8 7.1 6.9 5 4.5 4 3.9 3.2 2.8 2.5 Economy resistor Resistors (3 in series) Unit Total reference resistance 3x27 3x33 3x39 3x47 3x56 3x68 3x100 3x100 3x150 3x180 3x220 3x330 3x470 3x560 3x680 3x820 3x1200 3x1500 3x1800 Contact Qty Reference Rectifier (for a only) Reference Coil (2) Reference Weight
WB1 KBppp
V 57-61 62-67 68-73 74-81 82-89 90-102 103-111 112-129 130-143 144-157 158-180 181-226 227-251 252-278 279-313 314-368 369-408 409-448 449-500
V 105-119 120-128 129-148 149-163 164-179 180-204 205-259 260-288 289-317 318-356 357-418 419-462 463-500
DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2 DR2
SC0027 SC0033 SC0039 SC0047 SC0056 SC0068 SC0100 SC0100 SC0150 SC0180 SC0220 SC0330 SC0470 SC0560 SC0680 SC0820 SC1200 SC1500 SC1800
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM2 LP1 D12004LD LP1 D12004UD LP1 D12004UD LP1 D12004TD LP1 D12004VD LP1 D12004VD LP1 D12004RD
DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S
kg 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
522634
Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 11001400 W, sealed 1.21.6 W - a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 13001600 VA, sealed 1.21.6 VA b Time constant when sealed 25 ms b Economy resistor consumption: 3545 W. b Operating cycles/hour at y 55 C: y 120 b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current. (2) Standard coils: TC treatment. For hot and humid atmospheres TH treatment is available; add the suffix TH to the coil reference: Example: WB1 KB135 becomes WB1 KB135TH.
5/153
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 B Common side view

185 R 290
Single, 2 or 3-pole contactors LC1 Bp31, Bp32 or Bp33
4-pole contactors LC1 Bp34
330
330
15
15
15
365
260
44 30 15
P
M
Q1 30
P 30 M1 L
51 M2
Q1 30
c 85 b c
T
LC1 BL 1 2 50 50 59 59 16 16 345 445 285 385 121 121 100 100 100 100 122 122 10 10 30 30 9 9 LC1 BM 1 2 63 63 55 55 20 20 345 445 285 385 125 125 100 100 100 100 157 157 17 17 30 30 11 11 LC1 BP 1 2 100 100 55 55 20 20 385 540 325 480 125 125 150 150 110 110 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11 LC1 BR 1 2 125 125 50 50 25 25 445 635 385 575 130 130 195 195 130 130 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11
Number of poles a b c L M M1 M2 N P Q1 R S T
3 50 59 16 540 480 121 100 100 122 10 30 9
4 50 59 16 760 308 392 121 100 100 122 10 30 9
3 63 55 20 540 480 125 100 100 157 17 30 11
4 63 55 20 760 308 392 125 100 100 157 17 30 11
3 100 55 20 760 700 125 150 110 173 20 60 11
4 100 55 20 1065 455 550 125 150 110 173 20 60 11
3 125 50 25 885 825 130 195 130 173 20 60 11
4 125 50 25 1065 455 550 130 195 130 173 20 60 11
Electrical safety clearance

Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (a 3-phase supply). a 3-phase voltage 380/440 V X1 X2 LC1 BL 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250 LC1 BM 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250 LC1 BP 150 200 150 220 200 250 200 250 LC1 BR 200 250 200 250 200 250 250 300
X2
500 V
X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2
660/690 V
1000 V
X1
Mechanical interlock for assembling vertically mounted reversing contactors

EZ2 LB0601
A = (E112) 488
E = 600
5/154
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Contactors type LC1 B

type LC1 Bp31p22
A1
LC1 Bp31p31
A1
LC1 Bp31p13
A1
LC1 Bp31p40
A1
A2
A2
type LC1 Bp32p22

A1
LC1 Bp32p31
A1
LC1 Bp32p13
A1
A2
LC1 Bp32p40
A1
A2
A2
A2
type LC1 Bp33p22

A1
LC1 Bp33p31
A1
LC1 Bp33p13
A1
LC1 Bp33p40
A1
A2
type LC1 Bp34p22

A1
LC1 Bp34p31
A1
A2
LC1 Bp34p13
A1
A2
LC1 Bp34p40
A1 A2
A2
A2
a.c. control circuit
S3
S1
A2
A2
A2
A2
KM
2-wire control
S2
3-wire control
KM
+
KM
Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items required.
d.c. control circuit
S3
S1 KA KM
2-wire control
S3
S1
S2
3-wire control 2-wire control
KM
S2
3-wire control
KM R
KM R
KM
KM
KA
Nota : It is essential to check that the control circuit contacts have ratings compatible with the voltage and power consumption of the operating coil of the contactor. If not, an intermediate KA relay must be fitted and wired as shown. Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items required.
5/155
General
Technical information
Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1
based on rated operational current Ie and rated operational voltage Ue
Contactors
Electrical durability: making and breaking conditions Occasional duty: making and breaking conditions Making I U 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue Breaking I U 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue
a.c. supply
Typical applications Resistors, non inductive or slightly inductive loads Motors Slip ring motors: starting, breaking. Squirrel cage motors: starting, breaking whilst motor running. Squirrel cage motors: starting, reversing, inching Utilisation category AC-1 Making I U Ie Ue cos 0.95 Breaking I U Ie Ue cos 0.95 cos 0.8 cos 0.8
AC-2
2.5 Ie
Ue
0.65
2.5 Ie
Ue
0.65
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
0.65
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
0.65
AC-3 Ie y (1) Ie > (2) AC-4 Ie y (1) Ie > (2)
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
1 Ie 1 Ie
0.17 Ue 0.17 Ue
0.65 0.35
10 Ie 10 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
8 Ie 8 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
12 Ie 12 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
10 Ie 10 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
d.c. supply
Typical applications Resistors, non inductive or slightly inductive loads Shunt wound motors: starting, reversing, inching Series wound motors: starting, reversing, inching Utilisation category DC-1 Making I U Ie Ue L/R (ms) 1 Breaking I U Ie Ue Making L/R (ms) I U 1 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue Breaking L/R (ms) I U 1 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue L/R (ms) 1
DC-3
2.5 Ie
Ue
2.5 Ie
Ue
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
2.5
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
2.5
DC-5
2.5 Ie
Ue
7.5
2.5 Ie
Ue
7.5
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
15
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
15
Control relays and auxiliary contacts

Electrical durability: making and breaking conditions Occasional duty: making and breaking conditions Making I U 6 Ie 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 1.1 Ue Breaking I U 6 Ie 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 1.1 Ue
a.c. supply
Typical applications Electromagnets y 72 VA > 72 VA Utilisation category AC-14 AC-15 Making I U 10 Ie Ue cos 0.7 Breaking I U Ie Ue cos 0.4 cos 0.7 0.3 cos 0.7 0.3
d.c. supply
Typical applications Electromagnets Utilisation category DC-13 Making I U Ie Ue L/R (ms) 6 P (3) Breaking I U Ie Ue Making L/R (ms) I U 6 P (3) 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue Breaking L/R (ms) I U 6 P (3) 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue L/R (ms) 6 P (3)
(1) Ie y 17 A for electrical durability, Ie y 100 A for occasional duty. (2) Ie > 17 A for electrical durability, Ie > 100 A for occasional duty. (3) The value 6 P (in watts) is based on practical observations and is considered to represent the majority of d.c. magnetic loads up to the maximum limit of P = 50 W i.e. 6 P = 300 ms = L/R. Above this, the loads are made up of smaller loads in parallel. The value 300 ms is therefore a maximum limit whatever the value of current drawn.
5/156
General
Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors at nominal load
3-phase 4-pole motors

Current values for power in kW
Rated operational power (1) Indicative rated operational current values at: 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
Current values for power in hp

Rated operational power (2) hp 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Indicative rated operational current values at: 110 120 V A 4.4 6.4 8.4 12 13.6 19.2 30.4 44 56 84 108 136 160 208 260 200 V A 2.5 3.7 4.8 6.9 7.8 11 17.5 25.3 32.2 48.3 62.1 78.2 92 120 150 177 221 285 359 414 552 208 V A 2.4 3.5 4.6 6.6 7.5 10.6 16.7 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88 114 143 169 211 273 343 396 528 220 240 V A 2.2 3.2 4.2 6 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 604 722 828 954 1030 1180 380 415 V A 1.3 1.8 2.3 3.3 4.3 6.1 9.7 14 18 27 34 44 51 66 83 103 128 165 208 240 320 403 482 560 636 786 440 480 V A 1.1 1.6 2.1 3 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 515 590 550 600 V A 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 242 289 336 382 412 472
kW A A A A 0.06 0.35 0.2 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.52 0.3 0.24 0.17 0.12 0.7 0.44 0.32 0.23 0.18 1 0.6 0.48 0.35 0.25 1.5 0.85 0.68 0.49 0.37 1.9 1.1 0.88 0.64 0.55 2.6 1.5 1.2 0.87 0.75 3.3 1.9 1.5 1.1 1.1 4.7 2.7 2.2 1.6 1.5 6.3 3.6 2.9 2.1 2.2 8.5 4.9 3.9 2.8 3 11.3 6.5 5.2 3.8 4 15 8.5 6.8 4.9 5.5 20 11.5 9.2 6.7 7.5 27 15.5 12.4 8.9 11 38 22 17.6 12.8 15 51 29 23 17 18.5 61 35 28 21 22 72 41 33 24 30 96 55 44 32 37 115 66 53 39 45 140 80 64 47 55 169 97 78 57 75 230 132 106 77 90 278 160 128 93 110 340 195 156 113 132 400 230 184 134 160 487 280 224 162 200 609 350 280 203 250 748 430 344 250 315 940 540 432 313 355 1061 610 488 354 400 1200 690 552 400 500 1478 850 680 493 560 1652 950 760 551 630 1844 1060 848 615 710 2070 1190 952 690 800 2340 1346 1076 780 900 2640 1518 1214 880 1000 2910 1673 1339 970 (1) Values conforming to standard IEC 60072-1 (at 50 Hz). (2) Values conforming to standard UL 508 (at 60 Hz).
Nota : These values are given as a guide. They may vary depending on the type of motor, its polarity and the manufacturer.
5/157
Definitions and comments
Contactors
Altitude
The rarefied atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor. It also reduces the cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor (unless the temperature drops at the same time). No derating is necessary up to 3000 m. Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage and current (a.c. supply) are as follows. Altitude 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 5000 m Rated operetional voltage 0,90 0,80 0,70 0,60 Rated operational current 0,92 0,90 0,88 0,86
Ambient air temperature
The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The operating characteristics are given : - with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 C, - with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 C. This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and duty, utilisation category and ambient temperature around the device. The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a minimum of 8 hours without its temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards. The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a short time after a period of no load, without dangerous overheating. This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current, determines the use of the contactor or starter, and on which the corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits it is expressed as the voltage between phases. Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui. The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form (less than 5% total harmonic distortion). This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and referred to in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As the specifications are not identical for all standards, the rated value given for each of them is not necessarily the same. The peak value of a voltage surge which the device is able to withstand without breaking down. The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor, at the stated operational voltage. This is the current value which the contactor can break in accordance with the breaking conditions specified in the IEC standard. This is the current value which the contactor can make in accordance with the making conditions specified in the IEC standard. This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T) m= t T
Rated operational current (Ie)
Rated conventional thermal current (Ith) (1)
Permissible short time rating
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational power (expressed in kW)
Rated breaking capacity (2)
Rated making capacity (2)
On-load factor (m)
Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current Pole impedance The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components between the input terminal and the output terminal. The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component (X = L). The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally given for 50 Hz. This average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current. This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage. This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow through the main poles) which the contactor can perform without mechanical failure. (1) Conventional thermal current, in free air, conforming to IEC standards. (2) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component. Note : these definitions are extracted from standard IEC 60947-1.
5/158
Definitions and comments
Contactors
Contactor utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4

The standard utilisation categories define the current values which the contactor must be able to make or break. These values depend on: - the type of load being switched : squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors, - the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting or running, reversing, plugging.
a.c. applications
Category AC-1 This category applies to all types of a.c. load with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95 (cos u 0.95). Application examples: heating, distribution. Category AC-2 This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors. On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated current of the motor. On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains supply voltage. This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking during normal running of the motor. On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated current of the motor. On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the contactor terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light. Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc... . This category covers applications with plugging and inching of squirrel cage and slip ring motors. The contactor closes at a current peak which may be as high as 5 or 7 times the rated motor current. On opening it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, cranes and hoists, metallurgy industry.
Category AC-3
Category AC-4
d.c. applications
Category DC-1 This category applies to all types of d.c. load with a time constant (L/R) of less than or equal to 1 ms. This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of shunt motors. Time constant y 2 ms. On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated motor current. On opening, the contactor must be able to break 2.5 times the starting current at a voltage which is less than or equal to the mains voltage. The slower the motor speed, and therefore the lower its back e.m.f., the higher this voltage. Breaking is difficult. This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of series wound motors. Time constant y 7.5 ms. On closing, the contactor makes a starting current peak which may be as high as 2.5 times the rated motor current. On opening, the contactor breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Category DC-3
Category DC-5
Utilisation categories for auxiliary contacts & control relays conforming to IEC 60947-5
a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (1) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA. Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays. Category AC-15 (1) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is more 72 VA. Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.
d.c. applications
Category DC-13 (2) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time taken to reach 95% of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the power P drawn by the load (with P y 50 W). Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors without economy resistor. (1) Replaces category AC-11. (2) Replaces category DC-13.
5/159
Selection
TeSys contactors
For utilisation category AC-3
Operational current and power conforming to IEC

Contactor size LC1/ LP1 K06 6 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 3 3 LC1/ LP1 K09 9 2.2 4 4 4 4 4
( y 60 C)
LC1 K16 16 3 7.5 7.5 7.5 5.5 4 LC1 D09 9 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 LC1 D12 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 LC1 D18 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 LC1 D25 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 LC1 D32 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 LC1 D38 38 9 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 LC1 D40 40 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 22
LC1 K12 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 4 4
Maximum operational current in AC-3 Rated operational power P (standard motor power ratings)
y 440 V 220/240 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V
A kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour (1)

On-load factor y 85 % Operational power P 0.5 P y 25 % P LC1 D09 1200 3000 1800 LC1 D12 1200 3000 1800 LC1 D18 1200 2500 1800 LC1 D25 1200 2500 1800 LC1 D32 1000 2500 1200 LC1 D38 1000 2500 1200 LC1 D40 1000 2500 1200
Operational current and power conforming to UL, CSA

Contactor size LC1/ LP1 K06 6 1.5 1.5 3 3 LC1/ LP1 K09 9 2 3 5 5
( y 60 C)
LC1 D09 9 2 2 5 7.5 LC1 D12 12 3 3 7.5 10 LC1 D18 18 5 5 10 15 LC1 D25 25 7.5 7.5 15 20 LC1 D32 32 10 10 20 25 LC1 D38 LC1 D40 40 10 10 30 30
Maximum operational current in AC-3 Rated operational power P (standard motor power ratings 60 Hz)
y 440 V 200/208 V 230/240 V 460/480 V 575/600 V
A HP HP HP HP
LC1/ LP1 K12 12 3 3 7.5 10
(1) Depending on the operational power and the on-load factor ( y 60 C).
5/160
LC1 D50 50 15 22 25 30 30 33 30
LC1 D65 65 18.5 30 37 37 37 37 37
LC1 D80 80 22 37 45 45 55 45 45
LC1 D95 95 25 45 45 45 55 45 45
LC1 D115 115 30 55 59 59 75 80 65
LC1 D150 150 40 75 80 80 90 100 75
LC1 F185 185 55 90 100 100 110 110 100
LC1 F225 225 63 110 110 110 129 129 100
LC1 F265 265 75 132 140 140 160 160 147
LC1 F330 330 100 160 180 200 200 220 160
LC1 F400 400 110 200 220 250 257 280 185
LC1 F500 500 147 250 280 295 355 335 335
LC1 F630 630 200 335 375 400 400 450 450
LC1 F780 780 220 400 425 425 450 475 450
LC1 F800 800 250 450 450 450 450 475 450
LC1 BL 750 220 400 425 450 500 560 530
LC1 BM 1000 280 500 530 560 600 670 530
LC1 BP 1500 425 750 800 800 750 750 670
LC1 BR 1800 500 900 900 900 900 900 750
LC1 D50 1000 2500 1200
LC1 D65 1000 2500 1200
LC1 D80 750 2000 1200
LC1 D95 750 2000 1200
LC1 D115 750 2000 1200
LC1 D150 750 1200 1200
LC1 F185 750 2000 1200
LC1 F225 750 2000 1200
LC1 F265 750 2000 1200
LC1 F330 750 2000 1200
LC1 F400 500 1200 1200
LC1 F500 500 1200 1200
LC1 F630 500 1200 1200
LC1 F780 500 1200 600
LC1 F800 500 600 600
LC1 BL 120 120 120
LC1 BM 120 120 120
LC1 BP 120 120 120
LC1 BR 120 120 120
LC1 D50 50 15 15 40 40
LC1 D65 65 20 20 50 50
LC1 D80 80 30 30 60 60
LC1 D95 95 30 30 60 60
LC1 D115 115 30 40 75 100
LC1 D150 150 40 50 100 125
LC1 F185 185 50 60 125 150
LC1 F225 225 60 75 150 150
LC1 F265 265 60 75 150 200
LC1 F330 330 75 100 200 250
LC1 F400 400 100 125 250 300
LC1 F500 500 150 200 400 500
LC1 F630 630 250 300 600 800
LC1 F780 780 450 900
LC1 F800 800 350 400 900 900
5/161
Selection (continued)
TeSys contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06 LC1, LP1, LP4 K09 LC1, LP1, LP4 K12 LC1 D12
LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115
10 8 6 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 16 20 18 50 25 30 37 32 40 65 80 95 115 150 200 Current broken in A
LC1 D150
LC1-D09
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
LC1 D32 LC1 D38
LC1 D40
LC1 D50
LC1 D65
LC1 K16
0,55
0,75
1,5
18,5
2,2
5,5
7,5
11
15
22 25
30
230 V 0,75 5,5 18,5 1,5 2,2 7,5 22 30 37 15 11 45 55 75
kW
400 V
kW
1,5
18,5
2,2
5,5
7,5
11
15
30
37 45
55
22
75
440 V
kW
Operational power in kW-50 Hz. Example : Asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 400 V - Ie = 11 A - Ic = Ie = 11 A or asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 11 A - Ic = Ie = 11 A 3 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 D18.
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V) (1) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 D32, LC1 D38 LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D65
10 8 6 4 3 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 6,6 9 11 15 17 20 22 50 60 33 40 35 42 48 80 90 100 200

Current broken in A
(1) For Ue = 1000 V use the 660/690 V curves, but do not exceed the operational current at the operational power indicated for 1000 V.
5/162
TeSys contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
LC1 BL, BM LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F800 LC1 F780 LC1 F630 LC1 BR LC1 BP
10 8 6 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 20 30 40 50 60 80 90

18,5 147 110 200 220
(1)
100
200
400
600
800
1000 2000 Current broken in A
5,5
7,5
15
40 45
25
11
22
30
55
75
220 V 230 V
18,5 110 132 200 400 500 750 250 160 335 11 15 22 45 30 37 55 75 90
kW
900
380 V 400 V
18,5 132 200 37 55 90 285 11 15 22 30 45 75
kW
440 V
kW
Operational power in kW-50 Hz. Example : Asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 245 A - Ic = Ie = 245 A or asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 240 A - Ic = Ie = 240 A 1.5 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 F330.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 BL contactors.
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 BL, BM LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F780 LC1 F800 LC1 BR
800 1000
10 8 6 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 20 30 40 50 60 80 90 100 118 129 170 200 220 400 305 355 600 485 2000
Current broken in A
(1)
475
129
220
560
LC1 BP
670
160
335
110
355
750
900
660 V 690 V
kW
Example : Asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 660 V - Ie = 140 A - Ic = Ie = 140 A 1.5 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 F330.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 BL contactors. Characteristics : pages 5/46 to 5/51 References : pages 5/58 to 5/61 Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/82 to 5/87
5/163
Selection
TeSys contactors
Maximum operational current (open-mounted device)

Contactor size LC1/ LP1 K09 600 Cable c.s.a. Bar c.s.a. Operational current in AC-1 in A, according to the ambient temperature conforming to IEC 60947-1 Maximum operational power y 60 C y 40 C y 60 C y 70 C 220/230 V 240 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V mm2 mm A A A (at UC) kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW 4 20 20 (1) 8 8 14 14 15 17 22 LC1/ LP1 K12 600 4 20 20 (1) 8 8 14 14 15 17 22 LC1 D09 600 4 25 25 17 9 9 15 17 18 20 27 LC1 DT20 600 4 20 20 (1) 8 8 14 14 15 17 22 LC1 D12 DT25 600 4 25 25 17 9 9 15 17 18 20 27 LC1 D18 DT32 600 6 32 32 22 11 12 20 21 23 23 34 LC1 D25 DT40 600 6 40 40 28 14 15 25 27 29 33 43 LC1 D32 600 10 50 50 35 18 19 31 34 36 41 54 LC1 D38 600 10 50 50 35 18 19 31 34 36 41 54 LC1 D40 600 16 60 60 42 21 23 37 41 43 49 65 70
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour Connection conforming to IEC 60947-1
(1) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles Apply the following coefficients to the currents or power values given above; these coefficients take into account an often unbalanced current distribution between the poles: b 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6 b 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 b 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.8
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-1 (Ue y 440 V)

LC1, LP1, LP4 K09 LC1, LP1, LP4 K12 LC1 D32, LC1 D38 LC1, LP1 D12 LC1, LP1 D25 LC1, LP1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1, LP1 D65 LC1, LP1 D80
10 8 6 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 25 32 40 50 60 80 100 125 200 250 400

Current broken in A
Control of resistive circuits (cos u 0.95). The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load. Example: b Ue = 220 V - Ie = 50 A - y 40 C - Ic = Ie = 50 A. b 2 million operating cycles required. b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: either LC1 or LP1 D50.
5/164
LC1 D115 LC1 D150
LC1 D09
LC1 D18
LC1 D95
LC1 D50 600 25 80 80 56 29 31 50 54 58 65 86 85
LC1/ LP1 D65 600 25 80 80 56 29 31 50 54 58 65 86 100
LC1/ LP1 D80 600 50 125 125 80 45 49 78 85 90 102 135 120
LC1 D95 600 50 125 125 80 45 49 78 85 90 102 135 120
LC1 D115 600 120 250 200 160 80 83 135 140 150 170 235 345
LC1 D150 600 120 250 200 160 80 83 135 140 150 170 235 345
LC1 F185 600 150 275 275 180 90 100 165 170 180 200 280 410
LC1 F225 600 185 315 280 200 100 110 175 185 200 220 300 450
LC1 F265 600 185 350 300 250 120 125 210 220 230 270 370 540
LC1 F330 600 240 400 360 290 145 160 250 260 290 320 400 640
LC1 F400 600 2 30 x 5 500 430 340 170 180 300 310 330 380 530 760
LC1 F500 600 2 40 x 5 700 580 500 240 255 430 445 470 660 740 950
LC1 F630 600 2 60 x 5 1000 850 700 350 370 600 630 670 750 1000 1500
LC1 F780 600 2 100 x 5 1600 1350 1100 550 570 950 1000 1050 1200 1650 2400
LC1 F800 600 2 60 x 5 1000 850 700 350 370 600 630 670 750 1000 1500
LC1 BL 120 2 50 x 5 800 700 600 300 330 500 525 550 600 800 1100
LC1 BM 120 2 80 x 5 1250 1100 900 425 450 800 825 850 900 1100 1700
LC1 BP 120 2 100 x 5 2000 1750 1500 700 800 1200 1250 1400 1500 1900 3000
LC1 BR 120 2 100 x 10 2750 2400 2000 1000 1100 1600 1700 2000 2100 2700 4200
5
LC1 BL, BM LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F630 LC1 F800 LC1 F780
10 8 6 4
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
(1)
0,2
0,1 20 40 50 60 80 100 200 600 800 1000 300 350 275 315 400 500 700 1600 2000 4000
Current broken in A
Example: b Ue = 220 V - Ie = 500 A - y 40 C - Ic = Ie = 500 A. b 2 million operating cycles required. b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 F780.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 F225 contactors.
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
5/165
Selection
TeSys contactors
For utilisation categories AC-2 or AC-4
Maximum breaking current

Category AC-2: slip ring motors - breaking the starting current Category AC-4: squirrel cage motors - breaking the starting current.
Contactor size LC1/ LP1 K06 36 LC1/ LP1 K09 54 LC1/ LP1 K12 54 LC1 D09 54 LC1 D12 72 LC1 D18 108 LC1 D25 150 LC1 D32 192 LC1 D38 192 LC1 D40 240
In category AC-4 (le max)
Ue y 440 V le max broken = 6 x l motor 440 V < Ue y 690 V le max broken = 6 x l motor
26
40
40
40
50
70
90
105
105
150
Depending on the maximum operating rate (1) and the on-load factor, y 60 C (2)
From 150 and 15 % to 300 and 10 % From 150 and 20 % to 600 and 10 % From 150 and 30 % to 1200 and 10 % From 150 and 55 % to 2400 and 10 % From 150 and 85 % to 3600 and 10 % A A A A A 20 18 16 13 10 30 27 24 19 16 30 27 24 19 16 30 27 24 19 16 40 36 30 24 21 45 40 35 30 25 75 67 56 45 40 80 70 60 50 45 80 70 60 50 45 110 96 80 62 53
(1) Do not exceed the maximum number of mechanical operating cycles. (2) For temperatures higher than 60 C, use a maximum operating rate value equal to 80% of the actual value when selecting from the tables.
Plugging The current varies from the maximum plug-braking current to the rated motor current. The making current must be compatible with the rated making and breaking capacities of the contactor.
As breaking normally takes place at a current value at or near the locked rotor current, the contactor can be selected using the criteria for categories AC-2 and AC-4.
Permissible AC-4 power rating for 200 000 operating cycles

Operational voltage LCp/ LP p K06 0.75 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 LCp/ LPp K09 1.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 4 LCp LPp K12 1.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 4 LCp D09 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 4 LCp D12 1.5 3.7 3 3 4 5.5 LCp D18 2.2 4 3.7 3.7 5.5 7.5 LCp D25 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 LCp D32 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 11 LCp D38 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 11 LCp D4 4 9 9 11 11 15
220/230 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW
5/166
LC1 D50 300
LC1 D65 390
LC1 D80 480
LC1 D95 570
LC1 D115 630
LC1 D150 830
LC1 F185 1020
LC1 F225 1230
LC1 F26 1470
LC1 F330 1800
LC1 F40 2220
LC1 F500 2760
LC1 F630 3360
LC1 F780 4260
LC1 F800 3690
LC1 BL 4320
LC1 BM 5000
LC1 BP 7500
LC1 BR 9000
170
210
250
250
540
640
708
810
1020
1410
1830
2130
2760
2910
2910
4000
4800
5400
6600
140 120 100 80 70
160 148 132 110 90
200 170 145 120 100
200 170 145 120 100
280 250 215 150 125
310 280 240 170 145
380 350 300 240 170
420 400 330 270 190
560 500 400 320 230
670 600 500 390 290
780 700 600 450 350
1100 950 750 600 500
1400 1250 950 720 660
1600 1400 1100 820 710
1600 1400 1100 820 710
2250 2000 1500 1000 750
3000 2400 2000 1500 1000
4500 3750 3000 2000 1500
5400 5000 3600 2500 1800
5
LCp D50 5.5 11 11 11 15 18.5 LCp D65 7.5 11 11 15 18.5 22 LCp D80 7.5 15 15 15 22 25 LCp D95 9 15 15 15 22 25 LC1 D115 9 18.5 18.5 18.5 30 30 LC1 D150 11 22 22 22 37 45 LC1 F185 18.5 33 37 37 45 63 LC1 F225 22 40 45 45 55 75 LC1 F265 28 51 55 59 63 90 LC1 F330 33 59 63 63 75 110 LC1 F400 40 75 80 80 90 129 LC1 F500 45 80 90 100 110 140 LC1 F630 55 100 100 110 132 160 LC1 F780 63 110 110 132 150 185 LC1 F800 63 110 110 132 150 185 LC1 BL 90 160 160 160 180 200 LC1 BM 110 160 160 200 200 250 LC1 BP 150 220 250 250 250 315 LC1 BR 200 250 280 315 355 450
5/167
TeSys contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue y 440 V) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled. The current broken (Ic) in AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie. The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06 LC1 D32 et D38 LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1, LP1, LP4 K09,K12
LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
(1)
0,01 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 36 40 50 54 72 80 108 150 192 240 300 390 480 570 630 828 1000
LC1 D150
LC1 D09
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
Current broken in A
Example: b Asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 400 V - Ie = 11 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A or asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 11 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A. b 200 000 operating cycles required. b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 D25.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1, LP1 K12 contactors.
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue y 690 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled. The current broken (Ic) in AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie. The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1 D32, D38 LC1 D40 LC1 D50
LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,07 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
0,01 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 70 90 105 150 170 210 250 300 400 500 540 640 800 1000
Current broken in A
5/168
LC1 D150
LC1 D09
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
TeSys contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue y 440 V) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled. The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1 BL, BM LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F800 LC1 F780 LC1 BR LC1 BP
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04
0,02
0,01 100 200 400 600 800 1020 1470 2220 3360 4260 5000 8000 20 000 6000 10 000 1230 1800 2760 3690 Current broken in A
Example: b Asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 170 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 1020 A or asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 165 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 990 A. b 60 000 operating cycles required. b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 F265.
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue y 690 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled. The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1 F780, F800 LC1 BL, BM
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400 LC1 F500
LC1 F630
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04
0,02
0,01 100 200 400 600 800 1000 2000 8000 10 000 20 000
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
4000
Current broken in A
5/169
Selection
TeSys contactors
For utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-1, L y 1 ms, ambient temperature y 60 C (1) resistive loads: time constant --R
Rated operational voltage Ue V 24 No. of Contactor rating (1) poles LC1 LC1 LC1 connec- D09 DT20 D12 ted in DT25 series 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 4 1 4 2 3 4 20 20 20 20 20 20 4 20 20 1 4 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 4 20 20 20 1 4 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 4 20 20 20 1 4 20 20 20 LC1 D18 DT32 LC1 D25 DT40 LC1 DT60 LC1 D32 LC1 D38 LC1/ LP1 D40
48/75
+ +
125
225
300 460
900 1200 1500
25 25 20 25 25 25 4 25 25 1 4 25
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 7 32 32 32 1 7 32 32 32
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 7 40 40 40 1 7 40 40 40
40 40 40 40 40 40 7 40 40 1 7 40
40 40 40 40 40 40 7 40 40 1 7 40
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 7 50 50 50 1 7 50 50 50
Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-2 to L y 15 ms, ambient temperature y 60 C (2) DC-5, resistive loads: time constant --R
Rated operational voltage Ue V 24 No. of Contactor rating (1) poles LC1 LC1 LC1 connec- D09 DT20 D12 ted in DT25 series LC1 D18 DT32 LC1 D25 DT40 LC1 DT60 LC1 D32 LC1 D38 LC1 D40
+ +
1 20 20 20 25 32 2 20 20 20 25 32 3 20 20 20 25 32 4 20 20 32 48/75 1 8 8 8 8 32 2 20 20 20 25 32 3 20 20 20 25 32 4 20 20 32 125 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 15 15 15 15 32 3 20 20 20 25 32 4 20 20 32 225 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 8 8 8 8 32 4 20 20 32 300 3 4 8 8 32 460 1 4 900 2 1200 3 1500 4 (1) For rated operational currents of contactors LC1 and LP1 Sales Office.
40 40 40 50 40 40 40 50 40 40 40 50 40 50 40 40 40 50 40 40 40 50 40 40 40 50 40 50 3 3 3 4 40 40 40 50 40 40 40 50 40 50 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 40 40 40 50 40 50 40 50 K: please consult your Regional
5/170
LC1 D50
LC1/ LP1 D65
LC1/ LP1 D80
LC1 D95
LC1 D115
LC1 D150
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F780
LC1 F800
LC1 BL
LC1 BM
LC1 BP
LC1 BR
65 65 65 65 65 65 7 65 65 1 7 65
65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 7 65 65 65 1.5 7 65 65 65
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 12 100 100 100 1.5 12 100 100 100
100 100 100 100 100 100 12 100 100 1.5 12 100
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 10 200 200 200 200 200 200
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 10 200 200 200
240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 210 210 240 240 190 240 240 190 240 190
260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 230 230 260 260 200 260 260 200 260 200
300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 270 270 300 300 250 300 300 250 300 250
360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 320 320 360 360 280 360 360 280 360 280
430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 380 380 430 430 350 430 430 350 430 350
580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 520 520 580 580 450 580 580 450 580 450
850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 760 760 850 850 700 850 850 700 850 700
1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1180 1180 1300 1300 1000 1300 1300 1000 1000 1000
850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 760 760 850 850 700 850 850 700 850 700
700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700
1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100
1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
LC1 D50
LC1 LP1 D65
LC1 LP1 D80
LC1 D95
LC1 D115
LC1 D150
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F780
LC1 F800
LC1 BL
LC1 BM
LC1 BP
LC1 BR
65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 4 4 5 5 200 200 700 1100 65 65 40 40 200 200 160 180 250 300 350 500 700 1000 700 700 1100 65 65 60 60 200 200 240 240 280 310 350 550 850 1000 850 700 1100 65 72 200 240 240 280 310 350 550 850 1000 850 700 1100 1 1.5 2 2 3 3 700 1100 4 4 5 5 200 200 140 160 220 280 310 480 680 900 680 700 1100 65 65 100 100 200 200 160 180 250 300 350 500 700 1000 700 700 1100 65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 200 200 140 160 220 280 310 480 680 900 680 700 1100 65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 700 1100 200 140 160 220 280 310 480 680 800 680 700 1100 700 1100 700 1100 700 1100 (2) Contactors LC1 F and LC1 B operating at an ambient temperature of 40 C, have higher operational currents: please consult your Regional
1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 1750 2400 Sales Office.
5/171
Selection
TeSys contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories DC-1 to DC-5

The criteria for contactor selection are: b the rated operational current Ie, b the rated operational voltage (Ue), b the utilisation category and the time constant L/R, b the required electrical durability. Maximum operating rate (operating cycles) The following operating rate must not be exceeded: 120 operating cycles/hour at rated operational current Ie.
LC1 D115, D150 7 8 9 10
LC1, LP1 D12
LC1, LP1 D25
LC1, LP1 D40
LC1, LP1 D65 4
10 8 6 4 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 5 6 14 16 20 24 40 50 60 70 90 100 30 80 32 36 Power broken per pole in kW
Example Series wound motor - P = 1.5 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 7.5 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching. b Utilisation category = DC-5. b Select contactor LC1 D25 or LP1 D25 with 3 poles in series. b The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 7.5 = 3.75 kW. b The power broken per pole is: 1.25 kW. b The electrical durability read from the curve is u 106 operating cycles. Use of poles in parallel Electrical durability can be increased by using poles connected in parallel. With N poles connected in parallel, the electrical durability becomes: electrical durability read from the curves x N x 0.7.
Nota : 1
When the poles are connected in parallel, the maximum operational currents indicated on pages 5/170 and 5/171 must not be exceeded.
Nota : 2
Ensure that the connections are made in such a way as to equalise the currents in each pole.
5/172
LC1, LP1 D80 LC1 D95
LC1 D32, LC1 D38
LC1 D09
LC1 D18
LC1 D50
TeSys contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories DC-1 to DC-5

Determining the electrical durability The electrical durability can be read directly from the curves below, having previously calculated the power broken as follows: P broken = U broken x l broken. The tables below give the values of Uc and Ic for the various utilisation categories.
Power broken
Utilisation categories: DC-1 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads DC-2 Shunt wound motors, breaking whilst motor running DC-3 Shunt wound motors, reversing, inching DC-4 Series wound motors, breaking whilst motor running DC-5 Series wound motors, reversing, inching U broken Ue 0.1 Ue Ue 0.3 Ue Ue I broken Ie Ie 2.5 Ie Ie 2.5 Ie P broken Ue x Ie 0.1 Ue x Ie Ue x 2.5 Ie 0.3 Ue x Ie Ue x 2.5 Ie
LC1 F185, F225
LC1 F630, F800
LC1 F400 LC1 F500
LC1 F265
LC1 BL, BM
LC1 F330
LC1 F780
10 8 6 4 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 90 100 200 300 400 600 800 1000 500 700 900 4000 2000 3000 5000
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
Power broken per pole in kW
Example Series wound motor: P = 40 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 200 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching. Utilisation category = DC-5. b Select contactor LC1 F265 with 2 poles in series. b The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 200 = 100 kW. b The power broken per pole is 50 kW. b The electrical durability read from the curve is 400 0000 operating cycles.
5/173
Selection
TeSys contactors
For lighting circuits
General
The operating conditions of lighting circuits have the following characteristics: b continuous duty: the switching device can remain closed for several days or even months, b a dispersion factor of 1: all luminaires in the same group are switched on or off simultaneously, b a relatively high temperature around the device due to the enclosure, the presence of fuses, or an unventilated control panel location. This is why the operational current for lighting is lower than the value given for AC-1 duty.
Protection
The continuous duty current drawn by a lighting circuit is constant. In fact: b it is unlikely that the number of luminaires of an existing circuit will be modified, b this type of circuit cannot create an overload of long duration. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection. This can be provided by: b gG type fuses, or b modular circuit-breakers. Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses.
Distribution system
Single-phase circuit, 220/240 V The tables on pages 5/175 to 5/179 are based on a single-phase 220/240 V circuit and can therefore be applied directly in this case. 3-phase circuit, 380/415 V (with neutral) The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups, each connected between one phase and neutral. The contactor can then be selected from the 220/240 V single-phase tables for a number of lamps equal to N --- lamps. 3
3-phase circuit, 220/240 V The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups, each connected between 2 phases (L1-L2), (L2-L3), (L3-L1). The contactor can then be selected N- lamps. from the 220/240 V single-phase table for a number of lamps equal to -----3
Contactor selection tables

For the different types of lamps, the tables on pages 5/175 to 5/179 give the maximum number of lamps of unit power P (in Watts), which can be switched simultaneously for each size of contactor. They are based on: b a 220/240 V single-phase circuit, b an ambient temperature of 55 C (1), taking into account the operating conditions (see General paragraph). b an electrical life of more than 10 years (200 days' operation per year). They take into account: b the total current drawn (including ballast), b transient phenomena which occur at switch-on, b the starting currents and their duration, b the circulation of any harmonics which may be present. Lamps with compensating capacitor C (F) connected in parallel Parallel connected compensating capacitors C cause a current peak at the moment of switchon. To ensure that the value of this current peak remains compatible with the making characteristics of the contactors, the unit value of the capacitance must not exceed the following: Switching contactor LC1 LP1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 rating K09 K09 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40 D50 D65 D80 Maximum unit value C (F) of parallel connected 7 3 18 18 25 60 96 96 120 120 240 240 compensating capacitor Switching contactor LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 rating D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800 Maximum unit value C (F) of parallel connected 240 300 360 800 1200 1700 2500 4000 6000 9000 10 800 compensating capacitor This value is independent of the number of lamps switched by the contactor. (1) For an ambient temperature of 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2.
5/174
TeSys contactors
Usual values
The tables show the following values: b IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage, b C: unit capacitance for each lamp, corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers. These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2).
Incandescent and halogen lamps

P (W) 60 IB (A) 0.27 Max. no. 35 of lamps 59 according 77 to P (W) 92 129 163 207 296 430 466 710 770 888 1006 1274 1718 2328 2776 75 0.34 28 47 61 73 103 129 164 235 340 370 564 610 704 800 1010 1364 1850 2204 100 0.45 21 35 46 55 77 97 124 177 256 280 426 462 532 604 764 1030 1396 1666 150 0.68 14 23 30 36 51 64 82 117 170 184 282 304 352 400 504 682 924 1102 200 0.91 10 17 23 27 38 48 62 88 126 138 210 228 262 298 378 508 690 824 300 1.40 6 11 15 18 25 31 40 57 82 90 136 148 170 194 244 330 448 534 500 2.30 4 7 9 11 15 19 24 34 50 54 82 90 104 118 148 200 272 326 750 3.40 2 4 6 7 10 13 16 23 34 36 56 60 70 80 100 136 184 220 1000 4.60 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17 24 26 40 44 52 58 74 100 136 162 LC1 K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40 D50, D65 D80, D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800
Mixed lighting lamps

P (W) IB (A) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) 100 0.45 21 35 46 55 77 97 124 177 256 280 426 462 532 604 764 1030 1398 1666 160 0.72 13 22 29 36 48 61 77 111 160 174 266 288 332 378 478 644 874 1040 250 1.10 8 14 18 23 30 38 49 70 104 114 174 188 218 246 312 422 572 680 500 2.30 4 7 9 11 15 19 24 34 50 54 82 90 104 118 150 202 272 326 1000 4.50 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17 26 28 42 46 52 60 76 102 140 166 LC1 K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40 D50, D65 D80, D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800
5/175
TeSys contactors
Usual values
Fluorescent lamps with starter. Single fitting

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 20 40 0.39 0.45 24 21 41 35 53 46 66 57 89 77 112 97 143 124 205 177 410 354 492 426 532 462 614 532 696 604 882 764 1190 1030 1612 1398 65 0.70 13 22 30 37 50 62 80 114 228 274 296 342 388 490 662 698 80 0.80 12 20 26 32 43 55 70 100 200 240 260 300 340 430 580 786 With parallel correction 110 20 40 65 1.2 0.17 0.26 0.42 5 5 7 8 56 36 22 13 94 61 38 17 123 80 50 21 152 100 61 29 205 134 83 36 258 169 104 46 329 215 133 66 470 367 190 132 940 614 380 160 1128 738 456 172 1224 800 490 200 1412 922 570 226 1600 1046 648 286 2024 1322 818 386 2728 1724 1104 524 3700 2418 1498 80 0.52 7 18 30 40 50 67 84 107 153 306 368 400 462 522 662 892 1210 110 0.72 16 22 29 36 48 61 77 111 222 266 288 332 378 478 644 874
LC1 K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40 D50, D65 D80, D95 D115, D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630, F800
Fluorescent lamps with starter. Twin fitting

P (W) IB (A) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 2x20 2x40 2x0.22 2x0.41 2x21 2x11 2x36 2x18 2x46 2x24 2x58 2x30 2x78 2x42 2x100 2x52 2x126 2x68 2x180 2x96 2x360 2x194 2x436 2x234 2x472 2x254 2x544 2x292 2x618 2x332 2x782 2x420 2x1054 2x566 2x1430 2x766 2x65 2x0.67 2x7 2x10 2x14 2x18 2x26 2x32 2x40 2x58 2x118 2x142 2x154 2x178 2x202 2x256 2x346 2x468 2x80 2x0.82 2x5 2x8 2x12 2x14 2x20 2x26 2x34 2x48 2x96 2x116 2x126 2x146 2x166 2x210 2x282 2x384 2x110 2x1.1 2x4 2x6 2x8 2x10 2x14 2x18 2x24 2x36 2x72 2x86 2x94 2x108 2x124 2x156 2x210 2x286 With series correction 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x0.13 2x0.24 2x0.39 2x36 2x20 2x12 2x60 2x32 2x20 2x80 2x42 2x26 2x100 2x54 2x32 2x134 2x72 2x44 2x168 2x90 2x56 2x214 2x116 2x70 2x306 2x166 2x102 2x614 2x332 2x204 2x738 2x400 2x246 2x800 2x432 2x266 2x922 2x500 2x308 2x1046 2x566 2x348 2x1322 2x716 2x440 2x1784 2x966 2x594 2x2418 2x1310 2x806 2x80 2x0.48 2x10 2x16 2x20 2x26 2x36 2x44 2x58 2x82 2x166 2x200 2x216 2x250 2x282 2x358 2x482 2x654 2x110 2x0.65 2x7 2x12 2x16 2x20 2x26 2x32 2x42 2x60 2x122 2x148 2x160 2x184 2x208 2x264 2x356 2x484
5/176
TeSys contactors
Usual values
Fluorescent lamps without starter. Single fitting

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 20 40 0.43 0.55 22 17 37 29 48 38 60 47 97 63 102 80 130 101 186 145 372 290 446 348 484 378 558 436 632 494 800 624 1078 844 1462 1144 65 0.80 12 20 26 32 43 55 70 100 200 240 260 300 340 430 580 786 80 0.95 10 16 22 27 36 46 58 84 168 202 218 252 286 362 488 662 110 1.4 6 11 15 18 25 31 40 57 114 136 148 170 194 246 330 448 With parallel correction 20 40 65 0.19 0.29 0.46 5 5 7 50 33 20 84 55 34 110 72 45 136 89 56 184 101 76 231 151 95 294 193 121 421 275 173 842 550 346 1010 662 416 1094 716 452 1262 828 522 1432 938 590 1810 1186 748 2442 1600 1008 3310 2168 1366 80 0.57 7 16 28 36 45 61 77 98 140 280 336 364 420 476 604 814 1104 110 0.79 16 20 26 32 44 55 70 101 202 242 262 304 344 434 586 796
Fluorescent lamps without starter. Twin fitting

Non corrected P (W) 2x20 2x40 IB (A) 2x0.25 2x0.47 Max. no. 2x19 2x10 of lamps 2x32 2x16 according 2x42 2x22 to P (W) 2x52 2x26 2x70 2x36 2x88 2x46 2x112 2x58 2x160 2x84 2x320 2x170 2x384 2x204 2x416 2x220 2x480 2x254 2x544 2x288 2x688 2x366 2x928 2x494 2x1258 2x668 2x65 2x0.76 2x6 2x10 2x12 2x16 2x22 2x28 2x36 2x52 2x104 2x126 2x136 2x158 2x178 2x226 2x304 2x414 2x80 2x0.93 2x5 2x8 2x10 2x12 2x18 2x22 2x30 2x42 2x86 2x102 2x112 2x128 2x146 2x184 2x248 2x338 2x110 2x1.3 2x3 2x6 2x8 2x10 2x12 2x16 2x20 2x30 2x60 2x74 2x80 2x92 2x104 2x132 2x178 2x242 With series correction 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x0.14 2x0.26 2x0.43 2x34 2x18 2x11 2x56 2x30 2x18 2x74 2x40 2x24 2x92 2x50 2x30 2x124 2x66 2x40 2x156 2x84 2x50 2x200 2x106 2x64 2x234 2x152 2x92 2x570 2x306 2x186 2x686 2x368 2x222 2x742 2x400 2x242 2x856 2x462 2x278 2x970 2x522 2x316 2x1228 2x662 2x400 2x1656 2x892 2x540 2x2246 2x1210 2x730 2x80 2x0.53 2x9 2x14 2x18 2x24 2x32 2x40 2x52 2x74 2x150 2x180 2x196 2x226 2x256 2x324 2x438 2x592 2x110 2x0.72 2x6 2x10 2x14 2x18 2x24 2x30 2x38 2x54 2x110 2x132 2x144 2x166 2x188 2x238 2x322 2x436
5
5/177
TeSys contactors
Usual values
Low pressure sodium vapour lamps

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 35 55 90 1.2 1.6 2.4 6 5 3 10 7 5 12 9 6 15 11 7 21 16 10 27 20 13 35 26 17 50 37 25 100 75 50 140 104 70 152 114 76 174 130 88 198 148 98 250 188 124 338 254 168 496 372 248 135 3.1 2 3 4 6 8 10 13 19 38 54 58 68 76 96 130 192 150 3.2 2 3 4 5 8 10 13 18 36 52 56 66 74 94 126 186 180 3.3 2 3 4 5 7 10 12 18 36 50 54 64 72 90 122 180 200 3.4 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17 34 48 54 62 70 88 118 174 With parallel correction 35 55 90 135 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 17 17 25 36 40 30 50 37 25 63 47 31 21 86 65 43 28 110 82 55 36 140 105 70 46 200 150 100 66 400 300 200 132 560 420 280 186 606 454 302 202 700 524 350 232 792 594 396 264 1002 752 502 334 1352 1014 676 450 1982 1488 992 660 150 1 36 19 26 33 42 60 120 168 182 210 238 300 406 594 180 1.2 36 15 21 27 35 50 100 140 152 174 198 250 338 496 200 1.3 36 14 20 25 32 46 92 128 140 162 182 252 312 458
High pressure sodium vapour lamps

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 150 250 1.9 3.2 4 2 6 3 7 4 10 5 13 8 17 10 22 13 31 18 62 36 88 52 96 56 110 66 124 74 158 94 214 126 312 186 400 5 1 2 3 3 5 6 8 12 24 34 36 42 48 60 80 118 700 8.8 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 18 20 24 26 34 46 68 1000 12.4 1 1 2 2 3 4 8 14 16 18 20 24 32 48 With parallel correction 150 250 400 0.84 1.4 2.2 20 32 48 17 22 13 8 30 18 11 39 23 15 50 30 19 71 42 27 142 84 54 200 120 76 216 130 82 250 150 94 282 170 108 358 214 136 482 290 184 708 424 270 700 3.9 96 6 8 10 15 30 42 46 54 60 76 104 152 1000 5.5 120 6 7 10 20 30 32 38 42 54 74 108
5/178
TeSys contactors
Usual values
High pressure mercury vapour lamps

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 50 80 125 0.54 0.81 1.20 14 9 6 22 14 9 27 18 12 35 23 15 48 32 21 61 40 27 77 51 34 111 74 49 222 148 100 310 206 140 336 224 152 388 258 174 440 294 198 556 372 250 752 500 338 1102 734 496 250 2.30 3 5 6 8 11 14 17 26 52 72 78 90 102 130 176 258 400 4.10 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 14 28 40 44 50 58 72 98 144 700 6.80 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 16 24 26 30 34 44 60 88 1000 9.90 1 1 1 2 3 4 6 12 17 18 20 24 30 40 60 With 50 0.3 10 40 50 63 86 110 140 200 400 560 606 700 792 1002 1352 1982 parallel correction 80 125 250 0.45 0.67 1.3 10 10 18 26 17 9 33 22 11 42 28 14 57 38 20 73 49 25 93 62 32 133 89 46 266 178 92 372 250 128 404 272 140 466 312 162 528 354 182 668 448 232 902 606 312 1322 888 458 400 2.3 25 6 8 11 14 18 26 52 72 78 90 102 130 176 258 700 3.8 40 5 6 8 11 15 30 44 48 54 62 78 106 156 1000 5.5 60 3 4 6 7 10 20 30 32 38 42 54 74 108
Metal iodine vapour lamps

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 250 400 2.5 3.6 3 2 4 3 6 4 7 5 10 7 13 9 16 11 24 16 48 32 66 46 72 50 84 58 94 66 120 84 162 112 238 164 1000 9.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 18 20 22 24 32 42 62 2000 20 1 1 2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 30 With parallel correction 250 400 1000 1.4 2 5.3 32 32 64 13 9 18 13 4 23 16 6 30 21 7 42 30 11 84 60 22 120 84 32 130 90 34 150 104 40 170 118 44 214 150 56 290 202 76 424 298 112 2000 11.2 140 5 10 14 16 18 20 26 36 52
5
5/179
Selection
TeSys contactors
For heating circuits
Selection
General
A heating circuit is a power switching circuit supplying one or more resistive heating elements switched by a contactor. The same general rules apply as for motor circuits, except that heating circuits are not normally subjected to overload currents. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection.
Characteristics of heating elements

The examples below are based on resistive heating elements used for industrial furnaces or for the heating of buildings (infra-red or resistive radiant type, convector heaters, closed loop heating circuits, etc.). The variation in resistance values between hot and cold states causes a current peak at switchon which never exceeds 2 to 3 times the rated operational current (In). This initial peak does not recur during normal operation where subsequent switching is thermostatically controlled. The rated power and current of a heater are given for the normal operating temperature.
Protection
The steady state current drawn by a heating circuit is constant when the voltage is stable. In fact: b It is unlikely that the number of loads in an existing circuit will be modified; b This type of circuit cannot create overloads. It is therefore only necessary to provide shortcircuit protection. This can be provided by: b gG type fuses, or b modular circuit-breakers. Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses.
Switching, control, protection

A heating element or group of heating elements of a given power may be either single-phase or 3-phase and may be supplied from a 220/127 V or a 400/230 V distribution system. Excluding a single-phase 127 V system (which is no longer commonly used), the following 3 types of circuit arrangement are possible: b Single-phase, 2-pole switching b Single-phase, 4-pole switching b 3-phase switching
Component selection according to the power switched

The combinations suggested below are based on an ambient temperature of 55 C and for powers at the nominal voltage, but they also ensure switching in the event of prolonged overloads up to 1.05 Ue.
Single-phase, 2-pole switching

Maximum power (kW) 220/240 V 380/415 V 3.5 6.5 4.5 8 6 10.5 7 13 10 18 13 22.5 16.5 28.5 24 42 44 76 48 83 52 90 60 104 75 130 86 145 116 200 170 290 270 460 140 242 220 380 350 605 480 830 Contactor rating 660/690 V 11 14 18.5 22.5 30.5 39.5 43.5 73 118 130 145 160 200 230 310 450 715 370 580 925 1270 1000 V 48 68 82.5 157 170 185 210 250 300 400 695 945 490 770 1225 1680 LC1, LP1 K09 LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D32, LC1 D38 LC1 D40 LC1, LP1 D65 LC1, LP1 D80 LC1 D115, LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F4002 LC1 F5002 LC1 F6302, LC1 F800 LC1 F780 LC1 BL32 LC1 BM32 LC1 BP32 LC1 BR32
KM1
Circuit controlled by 2 poles of the contactor.
5/180
TeSys contactors
For heating circuits
Component selection according to the power switched

(continued) Single-phase, 4-pole switching
Maximum power (kW) 220/240 V 380/415 V 4.5 8 7 13 12 21 26 45.5 38 66 70 121 76 132 80 142 96 166 120 205 137 236 185 320 272 470 425 735 224 387 352 608 560 968 768 1328 Contactor rating 660/690 V 13.5 22.5 36.5 79.5 117.5 190 202 230 253 320 363 490 718 1140 590 930 1478 2025 1000 V 109 132 251 270 295 335 400 480 650 950 1520 785 1230 1960 2685 LC1, LP1 K09004 LC1 DT25 LC1 DT40 LC1, LP1 D65004 LC1, LP1 D80004 LC1 D115004 LC1 F1854 LC1 F2254 LC1 F2654 LC1 F3304 LC1 F4004 LC1 F5004 LC1 F6304 LC1 F7804 LC1 BL34 LC1 BM34 LC1 BP34 LC1 BR34
KM1
Circuit controlled by a 4-pole contactor with the poles parallel connected in pairs using appropriate connecting links. This solution enables the control of power values approximately equivalent to those controlled by the same contactor on 3-phase.
3-phase switching
Maximum power (kW) 220/240 V 380/415 V 4.5 8 7 13 10 18 13 22.5 18 31 22.5 38 28.5 49 40.5 70.5 76 131 82 143 90 155 103 179 130 225 149 256 200 346 294 509 463 800 242 419 380 658 606 1047 830 1437 Contactor rating 660/690 V 13.5 22.5 30.5 39.5 52.5 68 86 126 206 220 250 275 345 395 530 780 1235 640 1005 1600 2200 1000 V 78 112.5 135.5 275 295 320 370 432 525 710 1030 1650 850 1350 2150 2950 LC1, LP1 K09 LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D32, LC1 D38 LC1 D40 LC1, LP1 D65 LC1, LP1 D80 LC1 D115, LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630, LC1 F800 LC1 F780 LC1 BL33 LC1 BM33 LC1 BP33 LC1 BR33
U U U
KM1
Circuit controlled by 3 poles of the contactor.
For a 220 V, 50 Hz, single-phase circuit supplying a total heating load of 12.5 kW. Select: a 3-pole contactor LC1 D65 or LP1 D65 . (1) See complete contactor references on pages 5/58 to 5/61 or consult your Regional Sales Office.
Application example
5/181
Selection
TeSys contactors
For switching the primaries of 3-phase LV/LV transformers
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C. When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner to quickly reach its steady state value. The value of this current depends on: b the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area of the core, rated inductance, number of turns, layout and size of the windings, ...) b the performance of the magnetic laminations used, b the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains voltage at the moment of switch-on. The inrush current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is independent of the "no-load" or "onload" state of the transformer.
Contactor selection
The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given in the tables below. Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour. LC1/ LC1/ LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LP1 LP1 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40 D50 D65 D80 D95 D115 D150 K06 K09 160 225 350 350 420 630 770 770 1100 1250 1400 1550 1650 1800 2000
Contactor rating
Maximum permissible current peak at switch-on Maximum operational power (1) 220 240 380 400 415 440 500 V V V V V V V
kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA
2 3.5 4 5 6
2.5 5 5.5 7 8.5
4 7 8 9 12
4 7 8 9 12
5 8 9 11 14
8.5
8.5 15 17 20
14 24 28 32 42 60
16 27 32 36 48 70
18 31 36 40 53 80
19.5 34 39 45 59 85
19.5 25 34 39 45 59 95 50 55 65 80 100
25 50 55 65 80 100
12.5 15 14 17
16.5 20
660 V 690 V 1000 V
21.5 26.5 26.5
Contactor rating Maximum permissible current peak at switch-on Maximum operational power (1) 220 240 380 400 415 440 500 V V V V V V V A
LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LP1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F780 F800 BL BM BP BR 2900 3300 3800 5000 6300 7700 9000 12 000 11 000 18 000 18 000 24 000 30 000
kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA
40 75 80 95 120 150
45 80 90 100 130 170
50 90 100 110 140 200
65 120 130 140 170 225
75 130 140 170 200 250
100 170 190 225 270 375
120 175 200 280 220 310 260 350 350 400 470 650
145 245 270 315 425 550
230 400 450 480 600 700
230 400 450 480 600 700
300 530 560 600 800
380 660 700 750 950
660 V 690 V 1000 V
1000 1200
(1) Maximum operational power corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.
5/182
Selection
TeSys contactors
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks used for power factor correction
Standard contactors
Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which can, at the moment of switch-on, give rise to high transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies (1 to 15 kHz). As a general rule, the peak current on energisation is lower when: b the mains inductances are high, b the line transformer ratings are low, b the transformer short-circuit voltage is high, b the ratio between the sum of the ratings of the capacitors already switched into the circuit and that of the capacitor to be switched in is small (for multiple step capacitor banks). In accordance with standards IEC 60070, NF C 54-100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must be able to withstand a continuous current of 1.43 times the rated current of the capacitor bank step being switched. The rated operational powers given in the tables below take this overload into account. Short-circuit protection is normally provided by gI type HPC fuses rated at 1.7 to 2 In.
Contactor applications
Capacitors are directly switched. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed the values indicated opposite. An inductor may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the peak current, if necessary. Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature.
Power factor correction by a single-step capacitor bank

The use of a choke inductor is unnecessary: the inductance of the mains supply is adequate to limit the peak to a value compatible with the contactor characteristics.
Power factor correction by a multiple-step capacitor bank

Select a special contactor as defined on page 5/90. If a standard contactor is used, it is essential to insert a choke inductor in each of the three phases of each step.
Maximum operational power of contactors

Standard contactors
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour. Electrical durability at maxiumum load: 100 000 operating cycles. With choke inductors connected, where necessary. Operational power at 50/60 Hz Max. peak y 40 C (1) y 55 C (1) current 220/240 V 400/440 V 600/690 V 220/240 V 400/440 V 600/690 V kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR A 6 11 15 6 11 15 560 9 15 20 9 15 20 850 11 20 25 11 20 25 1600 14 25 30 14 25 30 1900 17 30 37 17 30 37 2160 22 40 50 22 40 50 2160 22 40 50 22 40 50 3040 35 60 75 35 60 75 3040 50 90 125 38 75 80 3100 60 110 135 40 85 90 3300 70 125 160 50 100 100 3500 80 140 190 60 110 110 4000 90 160 225 75 125 125 5000 100 190 275 85 140 165 6500 125 220 300 100 160 200 8000 180 300 400 125 220 300 10 000 250 400 600 190 350 500 12 000 250 400 600 190 350 500 14 200 200 350 500 180 350 500 25 000 300 550 650 250 500 600 25 000 500 850 950 400 750 750 25 000 600 1100 1300 500 1000 1000 25 000 (1) Upper limit of temperature category conforming to IEC 60070. Contactor rating
LC1 D09, D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D32, D38 LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D65 LC1 D80, D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F800 LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR
5/183
Recommended wiring scheme, operation, curves

Applications
TeSys contactors
For auto-transformer starting
5
Auto-transformer starting is suitable for starting all types of squirrel cage motors: with 3, 6 or even 9 terminals according to North American technology. Starting is performed at reduced voltage and produces maximum torque at minimum line current. It allows the starting torque (C = f(U)2) to be adapted to the resistive torque of the driven machine by means of the 2 or 3 intermediate voltage take-off connections on the auto-transformer (0.65 and 0.8 Un or 0.5, 0.65 and 0.8 Un). In general, only one take-off connection is used. This type of starting is used for high power and/or high inertia machines. The motor is never disconnected from its power supply during starting (closed transition) and transient phenomena are eliminated.
Recommended wiring scheme

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 F2 F3 96 95 96 95 14 21 13 2 F1 1 Q1/2
Q1 1 2 3 4 5 6 S1
Q1
F2 2 4 6 S2
13
13
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
KA1 14 T1 56
KM1 14
KM3 14
13 KM2
KM3
KM2
51
55 14
13 22
61
A1 52
A1 62
A1 62
A1 14
2 U2
A2
A2
A2
3 1 3 5
Q1/6
KM1
KM3
KM2
KA1
Operation
Starting is performed in 3 stages: b star connection of the auto-transformer is made by KM1, then contactor KM2 closes and the motor starts under reduced voltage; b the neutral point is opened by KM1; part of the auto-transformer winding is switched into each phase for a short moment, constituting a stator starting inductance; b KM3 switches the motor to full mains voltage and causes the auto-transformer to be shunted out of circuit by KM2. The auto-transformer used generally has an air gap (adjusted or not) in order to obtain, during the second phase of starting, a series inductance whose value is compatible with correct starting.
Operating curves
Current
Torque
XIN
2,5
XCN
ID 6 5
1
4 I2 3 2
1,5
1 2
CN 1
2
0,5
IN 1 0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed 0 0 0,25
3
0,50 0,75 1 Speed
1 Direct switching current 2 Current with auto-transformer
1 Direct motor torque 2 Torque with auto-transformer 3 Resistive torque of the machine
5/184
6 F3
KM1
A2
6 W2
4 V2
U3 V3 W3
KM3
KM1
13
61 KA1 KM3 T3
TeSys contactors
5
For auto-transformer starting
Auto-transformer starters from 59 to 900 kW up to 440 V (type 1 coordination) The components recommended in the table below have been determined according to the following characteristics: b auto-transformer: on 0.65 Un connection with non adjusted air gap, b 3 starts per hour, of which 2 consecutive, b Motor starting current: Id/In = 6, b Iq = 70 kA, b Transient current on closing of KM3 y 7 2 In, b Maximum starting time: 30 seconds, b Ambient temperature y 40 C.
Switch-disconnector-fuses: operators and accessories, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Contactors: 3-pole. LC1 D: see pages 5/58 and 5/59, LC1 F: please consult your Regional Sales Office, LC1 B: please consult your Regional Sales Office. Auxiliary contact blocks: b for contactors LC1 D: one LAD N11 (1 N/O + 1 N/C) on KM1, b for contactors LC1 F: one LAD N22 (2 N/O + 2 N/C) on KM1, KM2 and KM3. Thermal overload relays: b LR: see pages 6/16 to 6/19, b LR9 D: see pages 6/17 to 6/19, b LR9 F: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 230 V kW 30 40 51 63 75 90 110 140 180 200 380/ 415 V 440 V 400 V kW kW kW 55 59 59 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 80 90 110 132 160 200 257 355 375 80 100 110 150 185 220 280 375 400 SwitchaM fuses disconnector- Size Rating fuse Reference Contactors KM3 KM2 LC1 LC1 Overload relays Reference Setting (1) range
KM1 LC1
In max A 105 GS1 K 138 170 205 245 300 370 460 584 635 GS1 L GS1 N GS1 N GS1 N GS1 QQ GS1 QQ GS1 S GS1 S GS1 V
22 x 58 T0 T1 T1 T1 T2 T2 T3 T3 T4
A 125 160 200 250 250 315 400 500 630 800
D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800
D115 D115 D115 D150 F185 F265 F330 F400 F400 F500
D3210 D5011 D5011 D8011 D115 D115 D115 D115 D185 F185
LR9 D5369 LRD 4367 LR9 D5369 LRD 4369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5375 LR9 F5375 LR9 F5379 LR9 F5379 LR9 F5381
A 90150 95120 90150 110140 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500 300500 380630 505800 505800 6301000 6301000 7901250 7901250 9451500 1001750 2602000
TC800/1 + LRD 05 220 400 425 450 710 GS1 V T4 800 F800 F500 F265 TC800/1 + LRD 05 250 450 475 500 800 GS1 V T4 800 F800 F500 F265 TC1000/1 + LRD 05 280 500 530 560 900 GS1 V T4 1000 BM33p22 F630 F330 TC1000/1 LRD 05 315 560 600 630 1000 GS1 V T4 1000 BM33p22 F630 F400 TC1250/1 LRD 05 335 630 670 710 1100 GS1 V T4 1250 BP33p22 F630 F400 TC1250/1 LRD 05 BP33p22 F780 F400 TC1500/1 400 710 750 800 1260 On base T4 2 x 800 (2) LRD 05 450 800 800 800 1450 On base T4 2 x 800 BP33p22 F780 F400 TC1750/1 (2) LRD 05 500 900 900 900 1600 On base T4 2 x 800 BR33p22 F780 F500 TC2000/1 (2) LRD 05 (1) For power ratings greater than or equal to 400 kW at 415 V, use one LRD-05 on the current transformer. (2) Check with the motor manufacturer whether the fuses should be fitted in parallel.
5/185
Operation
TeSys contactors
For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
Applications
These contactors are used to eliminate starting resistance in the rotor circuit of slipring motors. The most common application is for starters without inching and without rotor speed adjustment: pumps, fans, conveyors, compressors, ... In the case of control by means of a manually operated master controller, the use of contactors with magnetic blow-out is recommended. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. For hoisting applications, contactor selection must take into account the type of motor duty, the operating rate, the rotor voltage and current, the type of connection, the ambient temperature, etc. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Operation
The rotor circuit contactors are interlocked with the stator contactor and therefore do not open until after the stator contactor has opened, when the rotor voltage has disappeared, or virtually disappeared. They make the current corresponding to the normal starting peak (1.5 to 2.5 times the rated rotor current) and open the circuit under no-load. Making and breaking are easy.
Different types of rotor connection Star connection
Delta connection
V connection
W connection
5/186
Selection
TeSys contactors
For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
Contactor selection according to the type of connection

Rotor current and voltage coefficients Coefficients to be applied to the operational current values shown in the table below.
Type of connection
Rotor I coefficient Operational I 1 1.4 1 1.6
Star Delta In V In W
3-phase rotor Ue (1) Maximum LC1 F LC1 B 2000 V 2000 V 1700 V 1700 V 1700 V 1700 V 1700 V 1700 V
With counter-current LC1 F LC1 B 1000 V 1000 V 850 V 850 V 850 V 850 V 850 V 850 V
Selection according to the operational current

The selection examples below take into account: b a ratio of 2 between the maximum operational rotor voltage (Uer) and the rated stator operational voltage (Ues). This ratio is given in standard IEC 60947-4, b a guarantee of occasional duty (making and breaking capacities) specified in the above standards.
Time current flowing Contactor rating LC1 LC1 D150 F185 450 A 280 A 220 A 550 A 400 A 300 A
LC1 F265 800 A 550 A 400 A
LC1 F400 1100 A 730 A 550 A
LC1 F500 1500 A 1000 A 750 A
LC1 F630 2000 A 1500 A 1200 A
LC1 F780 2500 A 2000 A 1500 A
LC1 BL 2000 A 1200 A 1000 A
LC1 BM 2400 A 1800 A 1500 A
LC1 BP 3750 A 2600 A 2200 A
LC1 BR 5000 A 3600 A 3000 A
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 30/h

10 s 30 s 60 s
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 60/h

5s 10 s 30 s 450 A 330 A 220 A 550 A 450 A 300 A 800 A 620 A 400 A 1100 A 860 A 550 A 1500 A 1250 A 750 A 2000 A 1800 A 1200 A 2500 A 2300 A 1500 A 2000 A 1600 A 1000 A 2400 A 2200 A 1500 A 3750 A 3400 A 2200 A 5000 A 4500 A 3000 A
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 150/h for LC1 F and 120/h for LC1 B
5s 10 s 300 A 250 A 420 A 350 A 580 A 430 A 820 A 600 A 1150 A 850 A 1650 A 1300 A 2200 A 1600 A 1500 A 1100 A 2100 A 1600 A 3200 A 2300 A 4200 A 3200 A
Rotor short-circuit contactor and intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles > 150/h for LC1 F and 120/h for LC1 B
200 A 270 A 350 A 500 A 700 A 1000 A 1600 A 800 A 1250 A 2000 A 2750 A
For automatic starting, the electrical durability is in the region of 1 million operating cycles.
(1) For use up to 3000 V, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/187
General
TeSys contactors
Long distance remote control
Voltage drop caused by the inrush current

When the operating coil of a contactor is energised, the inrush current produces a voltage drop in the control circuit cable caused by the resistance of the conductors, which can adversely affect closing of the contactor. An excessive voltage drop in the control circuit cables (both a.c. and d.c.) can lead to non closure of the contactor poles or even destruction of the coil due to overheating. This phenomenon is aggravated by: b a long line, b a low control circuit voltage, b a cable with a small c.s.a., b a high inrush power drawn by the coil. The maximum length of cable, depending on the control voltage, the inrush power and the conductor c.s.a. is indicated in the graphs below. Remedial action To reduce the voltage drop at switch-on: b increase the conductor c.s.a., b use a higher control circuit voltage, b use an intermediate control relay. Selection of conductor c.s.a. These graphs are for a maximum line voltage drop of 5%. They give a direct indication of the copper conductor c.s.a. to be used for the control cable, depending on its length, the inrush power drawn by the contactor coil and the control circuit voltage (see example page 5/189).
Total resistance of the 2 conductors in the control cable in (1) Total resistance of the 2 conductors in the control cable in (1)
1000
1000
100
5 4 3X 2 1
100
10
10
A B C Y DE F
100 500 5000 150 1000 10 000 Length of control cable in m (2)
0,1
1 5
10
100 500 2000 50 200 1000 Inrush power drawn in VA
0,1 10 50
1 a 24 V 2 a 48 V
3 a 115 V 4 a 230 V
5 a 400 V 6 a 690 V
A 0.75 mm2 B 1 mm2
C.s.a. of copper cables C 1.5 mm2
D 2.5 mm2
E 4 mm2 F 6 mm2
Total resistance of the 2 conductors in the control cable in (1) 1000
Total resistance of the 2 conductors in the control cable in (1) 1000
100
100
10
10
9 8 7
10
A BC DE F
100 50 1000 500 10 000 5000
0,1 1 5 10 50 100 200 2000 500 1000
0,1 10
Inrush power drawn in W
Length of control cable in m (2)
7 c 24 V 8 c 48 V
9 c 125 V 10 c 250 V
A 0.75 mm2 B 1 mm2
C.s.a. of copper cables C 1.5 mm2
D 2.5 mm2
E 4 mm2 F 6 mm2
(1) For 3-wire control, the current only flows in 2 of the conductors. (2) This is the length of the cable comprising 2 or 3 conductors. (Distance between the contactor and the control device).
5/188
General (continued)
TeSys contactors
Voltage drop caused by the inrush current (continued) What cable c.s.a. is required for the control circuit of an LC1 D40, 115 V contactor, operated from a distance of 150 metres?
b Contactor LC1 D40, voltage 115 V, 50 Hz: inrush power: 200 VA. On the left-hand graph on the page opposite, point X is at the intersection of the vertical line corresponding to 200 VA and the a 115 V voltage curve. On the right-hand graph on the page opposite, point Y is at the intersection of the vertical line corresponding to 150 m and the horizontal line passing through point X. Use the conductor c.s.a. indicated by the curve which passes through point Y, i.e.: 1.5 mm 2. If point Y lies between two c.s.a. curves, choose the larger of the c.s.a. values. Calculating the maximum cable length The maximum permissible length for acceptable line voltage drop is calculated by the formula: U2 L = ___ .s.K SA where: L : distance between the contactor and the control device in m, (length of the cable), U : supply voltage in V, SA : apparent inrush power drawn by the coil in VA, s : conductor c.s.a. in mm2, K : factor given in the table below.
a.c. supply SA in VA K 20 1.38 40 1.5 100 1.8 150 2 200 2.15
d.c. supply
Irrespective of the apparent inrush power SA, expressed in W K = 1.38
5/189
General (continued)
TeSys contactors
Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance

When the control contact of a contactor is opened the control cable capacitance is effectively in series with the coil of the electromagnet. This capacitance can cause a residual current to be maintained in the coil, with the risk that the contactor will remain closed. This only applies to contactors operating on an a.c. supply. This phenomenon is aggravated by: b a long line length between the coil control contact and the contactor, or between the coil control contact and the power supply, b a high control circuit voltage, b a low coil consumption, sealed, b a low value of contactor drop-out voltage. The maximum control cable length, according to the contactor coil supply voltage, is indicated in the graph on the page opposite. Remedial action Various solutions can be adopted to avoid the risk of the contactor remaining closed due to cable capacitance: b use a d.c. control voltage, or, b add a rectifier, connected as shown in the scheme below, but retaining an a.c. operating coil: in this way, rectified a.c. current flows in the control cable. When calculating the maximum cable length, take the resistance of the conductors into account.
1
A2
Supply 50/60 Hz
A1
b Connect a resistor in parallel with the contactor coil (1). Value of the resistance: 1 R = ___ 103 C (F)
(C capacitance of the control cable)
Power to be dissipated: U2 PW = ___ R

(1) To avoid increasing the voltage drop due to inrush current, this resistor must be brought into operation after the contactor has closed by using an N/O contact.
5/190
General (continued)
TeSys contactors
Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance (continued) These graphs are for a capacitance, between 2 conductors, of 0.2 F/km. They make it possible to determine whether there is a risk of the contactor remaining closed due to the power drawn by the coil when sealed, as well as the control circuit voltage, according to the length of the control cable.
Cable capacitance in F Cable capacitance in F
100
100
10
1 2
10
3
0,1
7 8
4 5 6
0,1
B
0,01 100 300 500 1000 5000 10 000 Length of control cable in m
0,01
5 7 10 50 100 Power drawn, sealed in VA
1 a 24 V 2 a 48 V
3 a 115 V 4 a 230 V
5 a 400 V 6 a 690 V
7 3-wire control 8 2-wire control
In the zones below the straight lines for 3-wire and 2-wire control respectively, there is a risk of the contactor remaining closed. Examples What is the maximum length for the control cable of an LC1 D12 contactor, operating on 230 V, with 2-wire control? b Contactor LC1 D12, voltage 230 V, 50 Hz: power sealed 7 VA. On the left-hand graph, point A is at the intersection of the vertical line for 7 VA with the a 230 V voltage curve. On the right-hand graph, point B is at the intersection of the horizontal line with the 2-wire control curve. The maximum cable length is therefore 300 m. In the same example, with a 600 m cable, the point lies in the risk zone. A resistor must therefore be connected in parallel with the contactor coil. Value of this resistance: 1 1 R = ___ = ___ = 8.3 10 3 . C 103 . 0.12 Power to be dissipated: U2 (220)2 P = ___ = ___ = 6 W R 8300 Alternative solution: use a d.c. control supply. Calculating the cable length The maximum permitted length of control cable to avoid the effects of capacitance is calculated using the formula: S L = 455 . ___ U2.Co L : distance between the contactor and the control device in km (length of the cable), S : apparent power, sealed, in VA, U : control voltage in V, Co : cable capacitance in F/km.
5/191
Selection
TeSys contactors
For the North American market
Conforming to standards UL and CSA, 20 to 200 A
534278
Selection
Standard power ratings of motors 50/60 Hz Single-phase 3-phase 1 3 115 V 230 V 200 V 240 V 208 V HP HP HP 0.5 1 2 Size Associated Continuous Type of contactor required cable current Basic reference, type to be completed (1) 75 C-Cu Fixing, cabling (2) A 20
LC1 D09pp
230 V 240 V HP 2
460 V 480 V HP 5
575 V 600 V HP 7.5
00
AWG10
LC1 D09pp
1
534279
7.5
10
AWG10
25
LC1 D12pp
10
15
AWG8
32
LC1 D18pp
7.5
15
20
AWG6
40
LC1 D25pp
7.5
10
20
30
AWG6
50
LC1 D32pp
3 LC1 D25pp 7.5
10
10
30
30
AWG3
60
LC1 D40pp
7.5
15
15
40
40
AWG3
70
LC1 D50pp
7.5
534280
10
20
20
50
50
AWG3
80
LC1 D65pp
7.5
15
20
25
60
60
AWG2
110
LC1 D80pp
7.5
15
20
25
60
60
AWG2
110
LC1 D95pp
30
40
75
100
AWG2/0
175
LC1 D115pp
LC1 D95pp
40
50
100
125
AWG3/0
200
LC1 D150pp
Application example For a 15 HP-230 V motor
Select a contactor type LC1 D50. Information: the contactor rating selected corresponds to size 2, the associated cable is type AWG3 75 C-Cu.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office) : a.c. supply Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 LC1 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 LC1 D40D115 50 Hz B5 D5 E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 d.c. supply Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 LC1 D09D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD LC1 D40D95 U 0.851.1 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD U 0.751.2 Uc JW BW CW EW SW FW MW LC1 D115 and D150 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.751.2 Uc BD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD Low consumption Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250 LC1 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) U 0.71.25 Uc AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL (2) LC1 D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 6 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC1 D40 to D80 and LC1 D95: clip-on mounting on 35 or 75 mm 6 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 6 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing.
415 N7 N5 440 RD RD RD
440 R7 R5 R6
500 S5
5/192
Selection
TeSys contactors
For the North American market
Conforming to standards UL and CSA, 200 to 1350 A
534281
Selection
(continued)
Size Associated cable type 75 C-Cu at I continuous Continuous current at 600 V max. Type of contactor required Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1), (2)
Standard power ratings of motors 50/60 Hz Phases 3 200 V 230 V 460 V 208 V 240 V 480 V HP HP HP 50 60 125 LC1 F225pp 60 75 150
575 V 600 V HP 150
AWG 3/0
A 200
LC1 F185pp
150
300 MCM
250
LC1 F225pp
60
75
150
200
300 MCM
285
LC1 F265pp
75
100
200
250
600 MCM
370
LC1 F330pp
534282
100
125
250
300
600 MCM
420
LC1 F400pp
150 250
200 300
400 600
500 800
6 7
2 x 600 MCM 3 x 600 MCM
700 1000
LC1 F500pp LC1 F630pp
LC1 F630pp
400
900
3 x 600 MCM
1000
LC1 F800pp
450
900
2 x 3 x 600 MCM
1350
LC1 F780pp
5
Application example For a 60 HP-230 V motor Select a contactor TeSys LC1 F185. Information: the contactor rating selected corresponds to size 4, the associated cable is type AWG 3/0 75 C-Cu.
(1) Auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/110 to 5/115 Power terminals can be protected by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately. See page 5/114. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts a 24 48 110 120 208 220 240 380 LC1 F185 and F225 50 Hz (coil LX1) B5 E5 F5 M5 U5 Q5 60 Hz (coil LX1) E6 F6 G6 L6 M6 U6 Q6 40400 Hz (coil LX9) E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 Volts a LC1 F265F780 40400 Hz (coil LX1) 48 E7 (3) 110 F7 48 ED (6) 120 G7 (4) 110 FD 208 L7 125 GD 220 M7 220 MD 240 U7 250 UD 380 Q7 440 RD 415 N7
415 N5 N7
440 R6 R7
Volts c 24 LC1 F185F780 BD (5) (3) LC1 F265 to F630 only. (4) F7 for LC1 F630 and F780. (5) LC1 F185 to F330 only. (6) LC1 F265 to F630 only.
5/193
Selection guide
5 0
TeSys contactors
Variable composition standard and high performance contactors
Applications
b b b b b
Motor switching in categories AC-3 Resistive load switching : heating, etc. Distribution circuit switching : line contactor Supply changeover switching : circuit coupling etc Transformer, capacitor, lighting switching
Type
Standard contactors
AC-3 AC-4/DC-5 AC-1
80 A 80 A
200 A 200 A
250 A 300 A
350 A 470 A
460 A 630 A
700 A 1000 A
5
690 V a
690 V a
690 V a
690 V a
690 V a
690 V a
Control circuit
Standard applications a.c. supply a
d.c. supply c
A1
A1
A2
Number of poles (P or R)
1 to 6
Contacteurs
Type Calibre
CV1 F G H J K L
Pages
5/196 to 5/199
5/194
A2
A1
A2
5 0
b b b b
Motor switching in categories AC-4, DC-5 Inductive circuit switching High voltage d.c. switching : crane electromagnets, railway locomotives Load switching at high operating rates
High performance contactors
80 A 80/80 A 80A
170 A 170/170 A 170 A
250 A 205/250 A 250A
300 A 250/320 A 320 A
460 A 380/500 A 500 A
750 A 720/800 A 800 A
1000 A 830/1000 A 1250 A
1500 A 1250/1800 A 2000 A
1800 A 1500/2500 A 2750 A
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
Low consumption applications a.c. supply via economy resistor
d.c. supply via economy resistor
KM A1
KM A1
KM A2
KM A2
1 to 4
CV3 F G H J K
CV3 L M P R
5/195
References
TeSys contactors
Variable composition contactors TeSys CV1 B (80 to 1000 A) and CV3 B (80 to 500 A)
Completed reference (see examples on page 5/197)

Type of contactor related to application a 690 V, c 220 V/pole a 1000 V, c 440 V/pole Contactor rating CV1 : 80 A CV3 : 80 A CV1 : 200 A CV3 : 170 A CV1 : 300 A CV3 : 250 A CV1 : 470 A CV3 : 320 A CV1 : 630 A CV3 : 500 A CV1 : 1000 A Number of poles (PN1 poles for CV1, PA3 poles for CV3) N/O poles 1 N/O 2 N/O 3 N/O 4 N/O 5 N/O N/C poles 1 N/C 2 N/C 3 N/C No main poles Operational current 11 A 20 A 40 A 80 A 125 A 170 A 200 A 250 A 300 A 320 A 400 A 470 A 500 A 630 A 1000 A Control circuit voltage 24 V 48 V 110 V 120 V 208 V 220 V 230 V 240 V 380 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 480 V 500 V 600 V Operating frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 50/60 Hz c c + economy resistor Auxiliary contacts N/O instantaneous 1 N/O 2 N/O 3 N/O 4 N/O N/C instantaneous 1 N/C 2 N/C 3 N/C 4 N/C No instantaneous auxiliary contacts On-delay 1 C/O Off-delay 1 C/O CV1 B CV3 B F G H J K L 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 0
Z E N P F R W G S H T U J V K L
Z E N P F R W G S H T U J V K L B E F K L M P U Q V N R T S X 5 6 7 D R 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 0 J N
5/196
Selection
TeSys contactors
Guide to selection of code combinations

CV1 contactors: maximum number of power poles
Contactor type Pole type Number of poles CV1 BF PN 5 PR 0 CV1 BG PN 5 (1) 0 PR 0 CV1 BH PN 5 PR 0 CV1 BJ PN 4 PR 0 CV1 BK PN 4 PR 0 CV1 BL PN 2 (4) 4 (3) 0 PR 0
2 (3)
CV3 contactors: maximum number of power poles

Contactor type Pole type Number of poles CV3 BF PA3 PR3 5 0 CV3 BG PA3 PR3 5 0 (1) 0 2 CV3 BH PA3 PR3 4 0 CV3 BJ PA3 PR3 3 0 (3) (4) CV3 BK PA3 PR3 3 0
3 (2)
Selection restrictions, according to coil type:

(1) 4 PN, 0PR, with c electromagnet, direct. (2) 2 PN, 1PR, with c electromagnet, direct. (3) With a or c electromagnet + economy resistor. (4) With c electromagnet.
Examples: b Switching single-phase capacitor: 400 V - 80 A - 1 N/O main pole - 220 V / 50 Hz control circuit voltage, 1 N/O and 1 N/C instantaneous auxiliary contacts. Reference: CV1 BF1F0ZM511. b Switching d.c. heating circuits: 800 V - 150 A - 2 N/O main poles - 48 V c control circuit voltage, 1 N/O instantaneous.+ 1 C/O on-delay auxilairy contacts. Reference: CV3 BG2W0ZED10J. Other versions: See page 5/199, order form CF452.
5/197
TeSys contactors
Selection restrictions (using the symbol combination table)

Contactor rating Rated 11 A operational current 13 A 20 A 40 A 50 A 80 A 125 A 170 A 200 A 250 A 300 A 320 A 400 A 470 A 500 A F E M N P Q F Z G Q R W G Z H R G H Z J S T J Z K U V K Z L K L Z
630 A 1000 A 0 Without arc chamber
5/198
Order form
TeSys contactors
Variable composition contactors, TeSys CV1 and CV3
Date of order / / Company
Editor |
Order n |
Required delivery (1) / / Customer Order N
Job n
Number of identical contactors
Type and rating
Power circuit
Operational voltage (Ue) .....................V Number of N/O main poles .............. Number of N/C main poles .............. Operational current (Ie) ......... A Operational current (Ie) ......... A a a c c P PR
Control circuit
a.c. voltage (a ) ............. V d.c. voltage (c) ............. V Frequency .............. Hz Electromagnet ..................................................................... Coil....................................................................................... Coil maintaining contact....................................................... Rectifier Economy resistor Series or parallel Economy resistor contact
Economy resistor: Customer marking
Yes
No
Auxiliary contacts
Number of instantaneous contacts: ZC4 GM1 (N/O) ............................. ZC1 GP5 (N/C+N/O)......................... ZC2 GG1 (On-delay) ........................ ZC4 GM2 (N/C) ............................. ZC1 GP6 (N/O+N/O) .......................... ZC2 GG1 (Off-delay) ........................
Number of time delay contacts: (Maximum number: 1) Note: a ZC1-GP4 contact (N/C) is mounted as standard for reversing contactor pairs.
Mounting
Contactors Dimensions in catalogue: Yes No Dimensions not in catalogue L = ............... mm C = ............... mm
Vertically mounted reversers:
Mechanical interlock: Contactor size:
Yes
No
CM :
Upper position contactor: Lower position contactor:
Comments and specifications (auxiliary contact layout, price, etc)
(1) Standard delivery time: 15 days. For faster delivery, please consult your Regional Sales Office. For use by Schneider Electric.
5/199
Selection, characteristics
TeSys contactors
5
Selection
Contactor size LC1 V160 A 230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V 1500 V 200 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V 800 V 1000 V 1500 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 1500 V 208 240 480 600 V V V V kW kW kW kW kW kW hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp kVAR kVAR kVAR kVAR kVA kVA kVA kVA 160 45 75 110 150 200 280 50 60 100 125 150 200 250 400 47 95 100 250 20 23 47 59 LC1 V320 10 gn 10 gn 2 gn 3600 4500 - 40+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 10+ 75 LC1 V320 320 90 160 220 280 400 600 100 125 200 250 300 400 500 800 94 190 200 500 41 47 94 117 LC1 V610 610 160 300 400 560 800 930 150 200 300 400 500 700 1000 1300 176 356 400 1000 81 94 188 234 LC1 V610 10 gn 10 gn 2 gn 3600 4500 - 40+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 10+ 75

Maximum operational current in AC-3 Rated operational power P (standard power ratings of motors)
For 3-phase motors conforming to CSA standards

Rated operational power P (standard power ratings of 3-phase CSA motors)
For switching 3-phase capacitors

Rated operational power P
For switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)

Rated operational power P
Contactor type Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave = 11 ms) Vibration resistance Operating altitude Above sea level Below sea level Contacts closed Contacts open 10500 Hz Maximum Minimum Storage Operation 0.8 1.1 Uc Permissible for operation at Uc Conforming to IEC 60529 m m C C C LC1 V160 10 gn 10 gn 2 gn 3600 2500 - 40+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 10+ 75
Degree of protection Operating position Cabling
IP 00 Any
IP 00 Any 185 20 39 2000 600 20 0.81.1 Uc 24...32
IP 00 Any 2 x 185 20 39 2000 1700 28 0.81.1 Uc 24...32
Cable c.s.a. Key for hex. screws Tightening torque To earth Inrush Sealed
mm 2 mm N.m V VA VA
70 Allen 4 14 2000 300 30 0.81.1 Uc

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Consumption
Permissible control circuit voltage Closing time (1) Opening time (1) ms
18...22
ms 95...115 95...115 95...115 (1) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
5/200
TeSys contactors
Contactor type
LC1 V160
LC1 V320
LC1 V610
Main pole characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Approvals Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) y 40 C AC-1 y 55 C AC-3 y 55 C AC-4 Electrical durability in millions of operating cycles (400 V at I max) Mechanical durability Maximum operating rate in operating cycles per hour AC-1 AC-3 AC-4 In millions of operating cycles Mechanical AC-1 AC-3 AC-4 Ue = 1500 V To IEC 60947 A A A A A V kV 1500 8 1500 8 1500 8
EN 60947-4-1 - IEC 60947-4-1 CSA 160 160 160 130 1.2 1.6 0.18 5 1200 900 900 450 1900 320 320 320 270 1 1.5 0.15 2.5 1200 900 900 450 3800 630 630 610 540 1 1.5 0.12 2 1200 900 900 450 7300
Maximum making capacity (lrms) Maximum breaking capacity (lrms) Maximum permissible current
Ue = 1500 V To IEC 60947
1600
3200
6100
For 1 s For 2 s For 10 s For 30 s aM fuse
A A A A A
2400 2000 1600 960 160
4500 3750 3200 1920 400
9000 7580 6100 3600 630
Short-circuit protection at Ie in cat. AC-3 max.

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) AC-15, 230 V AC-15, 400 V AC-15, 500 V DC-13, 24 V DC-13, 110 V DC-13, 220 V Cabling Short-circuit protection Operating time (1) (at 100 % of Uc) Cable c.s.a. gG fuse "C" "O" V A A A A A A A mm 2 A 690 10 0.78 0.45 0.35 1.1 0.24 0.12 2.5 10
ms 5 ms 5 (1) Operating time in relation to the main contacts.
5/201
References
TeSys contactors
Power and control circuits a.c. supply
Vacuum contactors
105194
Standard power ratings 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
Rated operational current Ie
Control Basic Weight circuit reference (1) voltage (50/60 Hz)
230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V AC-3 AC-1 kW kW kW kW kW A A 45 LC1 V320 90 160 75 160 300 110 220 400 150 280 560 200 400 800 160 320 610 160 320 630 2 1 1 1 (1) 1 (1) 1 (1) LC1 V160pp LC1 V320pp LC1 V610pp
kg 3.800 10.500 13.000
Reversing vacuum contactors

L1 L2 L3
5 L3 3 L2 1 L1 5 L3 3 L2 1 L1
The reversing contactor range comprises : b for 160 A rating, a kit with set of power connections allowing assembly of the starter, b for 320 and 610 A ratings, a complete starter, ready for use.
Standard power ratings 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Rated operational current Ie Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Control Basic Weight circuit reference (1) voltage (50/60 Hz)
LC1V6
10
KM2
ON / I /0 OFF 6 T3 4 T2
LC1V6
10
KM1
ON / I 2 T1 /0 OFF 6 T3
4 T2 2 T1
LC2 V610
LA9 V974 (1) Basic reference; add code indicating control circuit voltage. Standard control circuit voltages : Volts 50/60 Hz 110120 220240 380415 440480 550600 Item FE7 P7 V7 R7 X7 (2) Kit containing a mechanical interlock, a set of power connections and a fixing plate. To build a complete reversing contactor, order contactors LC1 V160pp separately.
5/202
gf
230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V AC-3 AC-1 kW kW kW kW kW A A 45 90 75 160 110 220 150 280 200 400 160 320 160 320 2 1 1 LA9 V974 (2)
kg 1.200 30 30 30 36 36
1 110-120 V LC2 V320FE7 220-240 V LC2 V320P7 380-415 V LC2 V320V7
160
300
400
560
800
610
630
1 110-120 V LC2 V610FE7 220-240 V LC2 V610P7
TeSys contactors
Power and control circuits a.c. supply
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (1)
500308
Number of contacts
Maximum number of blocks per contactor
Auxiliary contacts
Reference
Weight
kg 2 LA1 VN11 4 1 2 1 1 2 1 LA1 VN11 LA1 VN02 LA1 VN20 LA1 VN11X (2) 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
50/60 Hz coils
Rated voltage V Voltage code Reference Weight kg 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400
For contactors LC1 V160

110120 220240 380415 440480
500310
FE7 P7 V7 R7 X7
LX1 V160FE7 LX1 V160P7 LX1 V160V7 LX1 V160R7 LX1 V160X7
550600

LX1 V320pp 110120 220240 380415 440480 550600 FE7 P7 V7 R7 X7 LX1 V320FE7 LX1 V320P7 LX1 V320V7 LX1 V320R7 LX1 V320X7 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800

110120 220240 380415 440480 550600 FE7 P7 V7 R7 X7 LX1 V610FE7 LX1 V610P7 LX1 V610V7 LX1 V610R7 LX1 V610X7 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
(1) LC1 V160 : auxiliary contact blocks mounted at the top of the contactor, with no change to the overall dimensions. LC1 V320 or LC1 V610 : 2 auxiliary contact blocks mounted on the RH and LH side of the contactor, with no change to the overall dimensions. (2) For LC1 V160 : 1 N/C contact for the coil + 1 N/O contact.
5/203
Dimensions, mounting, schemes
TeSys contactors
3-pole vacuum contactors
5
LC1 V160
48 24
500311
168
152
151
36,5 123
36,5
24 48
LC1 V320
156 133
500312
50 35
3,5
70 2x10,5
2x8,5x19
185 222 203 191
2x8 2x8,5
9,5
130
37 63,5 63,5 201
38 48 76 170 15
159
LC1 V610
178 127 68 68
500313
2x8,5x19
222
328
356
203
2x8,5
95
32,5
68 201
68
Schemes
LC1 V160
03/NO 13/NO 21/NC 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1
LC1 V320, V610

13/NO 21/NC 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
6/T3
A2
A2
04

LA1 VN11 1 N/O & 1 N/C LA1 VN02 2 N/C
51/NC 61/NC 13/NO 21/NC
14
22
LA1 VN20 2 N/O

33/NO 43/NO
14
22
LA1 VN11X 1 N/O

03/NO NC
5/204
14
22
coil
34
44
52
62
04
9,5
172
15
TeSys reversing contactors

5
3-pole reversing vacuum contactors
LA9 V974 + 2 x LC1V160

88,9
562320
53 151 254 48 81,8 177,8 48
LC2 V320
559 168
536047
152,4
215
11,18
107 16
63
96
41
22
54 446
463
356
5
104 241 418 616 108 63 48 54 559 112 69 165 16
562322
LC2 V610
69
41
105 117 432
L1
L2
L3
463 356
T1
T2
T3
199 616
68
68 112
63
5/205
Schemes

LA9 V974 + 2 x LC1V160

1/L1 3/L2 3 5/L3 5 1
A1
5 A1
KM1
A2 2 4 6 2 4 6 A2
KM2
V 3/L2
LC2 V320
1/L1 5/L3
F1
Stop
A1 A1
(1)
KM2
3 6
KM1
A2 2 4 6 2 4 6 A2
Start
- KM1
- KM1
Start
- KM2
- KM2
- KM2 A1
- KM1 A2 - KM2 A1
- KM1 A2
(1) Dotted line indicates wiring to be installed by the customer.
5/206
Schemes (continued)

LC2 V610
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
F1
Stop
1 3 5 1 3 A1 5 A1
(1)
KM2
3
6
KM1
A2 2 4 6 2 4 6 A2
Start
- KM1 - KM1
Start
- KM2 - KM2
- KM2
- KM1
- KM1
- KM2
A1
- KM1
A2
- KM2
A2
A1
(1) Dotted line indicates wiring to be installed by the customer.
5/207
General
Contactors
Magnetic latching contactors

Magnetic latching contactors of both block and bar mounted types are fitted with a special electromagnet which enables them to remain in the "On" position when the coil is no longer energised. Applications The special properties of magnetic latching contactors make them suitable for a large number of applications.
Properties Applications
b Retention of the sequence memory in automatic control equipment in the event of loss of control voltage. b Energy saving, since the source of supply to the coil does not need to supply current when the contactor is latched in the closed state. b Change of state from "Closed" to "Open" by current signal through the coil. b Unaffected by mains interference. b Utilisation of contactors beyond their breaking capacity, as operations are performed off-load. b Contactors are silent in the latched position. Operation of the electromagnet
b Refineries, power stations, excitation circuits. b Contactors remaining in the closed state for long periods. Examples: refineries, power supplies, low voltage distribution b Selective opening control.
b No unwanted opening and closing of the main power poles. b Current carrying at voltages up to 1000 Volts.
CR1 F block contactors CR1 F magnetic latching contactors are fitted with a double coil with 3 terminals comprising a latching winding and an unlatching winding. The 2 windings have a common point which can necessitate special wiring precautions when the latching supply is separate from the unlatching supply. The power supplies may be a.c. or d.c. For d.c. operation, the polarities indicated must be complied with. Operating precautions: v the 2 windings must not be supplied simultaneously, v a winding must not be supplied continuously, v supply to the coils must be via pulsed contacts. Manual opening: if the control voltage is not present, the contactor can be unlatched manually. CR1 B bar mounted contactors CR1 B magnetic latching contactors are fitted with a single coil, supplied with d.c. or with a.c. through a rectifier. Latching is obtained by direct supply of the coil in one direction of current flow. Unlatching is obtained by a reverse current, adjusted by resistors.
Mechanical latching contactors

LC1 D block contactors For applications using smaller contactor sizes than those described on page 5/209 , it is possible to obtain the same function by the addition of a mechanical latch block type LA6 DK, which can be mounted on LC1 D contactors (see page 5/70).
5/208
Selection
Contactors
Selection guide for direct on-line starting of squirrel cage motors
Continuous or intermittent duty up to 30 operating cycles/hour

Motor (1) 220 V 230 V 380 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 3-pole contactor (2) P kW 25 30 33 37 40 45 51 55 59 63 75 80 90 100 110 129 132 140 147 In A 85 103 113 126 134 150 170 182 195 203 240 260 295 325 356 420 425 450 472 P kW 51 55 59 63 75 80 90 100 110 129 132 140 147 150 160 180 185 200 In A 98 105 112 117 138 147 170 188 205 242 245 260 273 280 300 333 342 370 P kW 55 59 63 75 80 90 100 110 129 132 140 147 150 160 180 185 200 220 250 257 280 295 300 315 335 355 375 400 425 445 450 475 500 530 560 600 In A 100 105 115 135 138 165 182 200 230 240 250 260 270 280 320 325 340 385 425 450 475 500 510 535 550 580 610 650 690 730 740 780 820 870 920 978 P kW 59 63 75 80 90 100 110 129 132 140 147 150 160 180 185 200 220 250 257 280 295 300 315 335 355 375 400 425 445 450 475 500 530 560 600 630 In A 97 109 125 131 146 162 178 209 215 227 236 246 256 289 295 321 353 401 412 450 473 481 505 518 549 575 611 650 680 690 730 780 825 870 920 965 Reference CR1 F150 CR1 F150 CR1 F150 CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F265 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 LR9 F5367 LR9 F5369 LR9 F5369 LR9 F5369 LR9 F5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 A 60100 90150 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 3-pole differential thermal overload relay Reference Setting range 3 fuses Type aM BS-88
HP 35 40 45 50 54 60 70 75 80 85 100 110 125 136 150 175 180 190 200
HP 70 75 80 85 100 110 125 138 150 175 180 190 200 205 220 245 250 270
HP 75 80 85 100 110 125 136 150 175 180 190 200 205 220 245 250 270 300 340 350 380 400 410 430 450 480 500 g g g g g g g g g
HP 80 85 100 110 125 136 150 175 180 190 200 205 220 245 250 270 300 340 350 380 400 410 430 450 480 500 454 g g g g g g g g g
Rating A A 100 125 100 160 125 160 160 200 250 250 315 315 160 200 200 250 315 315 400 400
CR1 F400 CR1 F400 CR1 F400
LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379
200330 300500 300500
315 400 400
400 500 500
220 300 408 CR1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500 500 630 250 340 460 CR1 F500 LR9 F7381 380630 500 630 CR1 F500 LR9 F7381 380630 500 630 257 350 475 CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630 500 630 CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630 630 800 150 205 483 280 380 510 160 220 520 295 400 546 180 245 578 300 410 565 CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630 630 800 185 250 595 315 430 584 200 270 626 335 450 620 CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630 800 1000 220 g 700 355 g 635 CR1 BL33 LR2 F8383 500800 800 1000 375 g 670 400 g 710 250 g 800 425 g 760 CR1 BM33 LR2 F8383 500800 800 1000 826 445 g 790 257 g CR1 BM33 LR2 F8383 6301000 1000 1250 900 450 g 800 280 g 948 475 g 850 295 g 980 500 g 900 300 g 990 530 g 950 315 g (1) The ratings are for standard 220/230 V, 380/400 V, 415 or 440 V motors. The overload relays should preferably be set to the motor full-load current shown on the motor rating plate. For other power ratings, select the overload relay with the appropriate range; the associated contactor and fuses must have ratings equal to or immediately greater than In. (2) Reference to be completed, see page 5/218. g There are no standard power ratings for these motors.
5/209
Selection
Contactors
Selection guide for utilisation category AC-3
Contactor size
CR1 F150 A A A A 150 135 130 47
CR1 F185 185 175 140 73
CR1 F265 265 245 230 95
CR1 F400 400 385 365 135
CR1 F500 500 500 435 270
CR1 F630 630 540 470 330
CR1 BL 750 750 700 400
CR1 BM 1000 900 800 400
CR1 BP 1500 1200 900 500
CR1 BR 1800 1500 1100 600
Rated operational current in AC-3 ( y 55 C)

440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V
Rated operational power

220240 V kW HP 380400 V kW HP 415 V kW HP 440 V kW HP 500 V kW HP
(standard motor power ratings)

40 54 75 100 80 110 80 110 90 125 100 65 55 75 90 185 100 136 100 136 110 150 110 100 136 75 100 132 180 140 180 140 190 160 220 160 147 200 110 150 200 270 220 300 250 340 257 350 280 185 250 147 200 250 340 280 380 295 400 355 480 335 335 200 270 335 450 375 500 400 545 400 545 450 610 450 610 220 300 400 545 425 580 450 610 500 680 560 760 530 720 280 380 500 680 530 720 560 760 600 810 670 910 530 720 425 580 750 1000 800 1100 800 1100 750 1000 750 1000 670 910 500 680 900 1220 900 1220 900 1220 900 1220 900 1220 750 1000
660/690 V
kW HP
1000 V
kW HP
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour, at rated operational power with an on-load factor = 85%: 750 for CR1 F150 to F265, 500 for CR1 F400 to F630 and 120 for CR1 B.
5/210
Selection
Contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability
Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) (1) ( y 55 C) The current (Ic) in AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) drawn by the motor.
CR1 BL, BM CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02
0,01 0,008 0,006 0,004

Current breaking limits In categories
0,002 0,001 0,008 20 30 40 50 60 70 8090 100 150 200 300 400 600 800 1000 500 1500 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 10 000 Current broken in A
CR1 BR
CR1 BP
AC-3
AC-2 AC4
Example: Asynchronous motor with P = 50 kW, Ue = 380 V, Ie = 100 A, Ic = Ie = 100 A, or asynchronous motor with P = 55 kW, Ue = 415 V, Ie = 100 A, Ic = Ie = 100 A 600 000 operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed, CR1 F185.
(1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.
5/211
Selection
Contactors
Selection guide for utilisation category AC-1 and according to required electrical durability
Maximum operational current (on-load factor u 0.95)

Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour
Contactor size Cable c.s.a. Number of bars Bar c.s.a. Operational current in category AC-1 at ambient temperature y 40 C y 55 C y 70 C mm A A A mm2 CR1 F150 120 250 250 170 CR1 F185 150 275 275 180 CR1 F265 185 350 300 250 CR1 F400 2 30 x 5 500 430 340 CR1 F500 2 40 x 5 700 580 500 CR1 F630 2 60 x 5 1000 850 700 CR1 BL 2 50 x 5 800 700 600 CR1 BM 2 80 x 5 1250 1100 900 CR1 BP 3 CR1 BR 4
100 x 5 100 x 5 2000 1750 1500 2750 2400 2000
Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles Apply the following coefficients to the above currents; these coefficients take into account an often unbalanced distribution of current between the poles: v 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6 v 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 v 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.8
Electrical durability (Ue y 440 V) (1)

CR1 BL, BM
CR1 F150
CR1 F185
CR1 F265
CR1 F400
CR1 F500
CR1 F630
1 0,8
0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04
0,02
0,01
60
80
100
250 275 350
400 500
600 700
800
1000 1250
CR1 BP
CR1 BR
2000 2750
4000
Current broken in A
Example: Ue = 220 V - Ie = 200 A - = 40 C - Ic = Ie = 200 A 600 000 operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed, CR1 F400.
(1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.
5/212
Selection
Contactors
Selection guide for switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers
Operating conditions Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V, 5060 Hz When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner to quickly reach its steady state value. The value of this current depends on: v the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area of the core, rated inductance, number of turns, size of the windings, ...) v the performance of the magnetic laminations used (residual induction and saturation inductance), v the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains voltage at the moment of switch-on. The peak current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is independent of the "no-load" or "on-load" state of the transformer. The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given in the tables below.
Contactor selection
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour
Contactor size Maximum permissible current peak at switch-on Maximum operational power (1) A 220230 V 380400 V 415440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA CR1 F150 1700 25 50 55 65 80 100 CR1 F185 2800 40 75 80 95 120 150 CR1 F265 3500 50 90 100 110 140 200 CR1 F400 5500 75 130 140 170 200 250 CR1 F500 6800 100 170 190 225 270 375 CR1 F630 9000 140 225 250 280 315 470 CR1 BL 18 000 230 400 450 480 600 700 CR1 BM 18 000 230 400 450 480 600 700 CR1 BP 24 000 300 530 560 600 800 1000 CR1 BR 30 000 380 660 700 750 950 1200
(1) Maximum operational power corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.
5/213
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Contactor type
CR1 F150 Conforming to IEC 60158-1, V BS 775, 60947-4 Conforming to VDE 0110 grC V Standard version Special version Storage For operation at Uc Without derating Without derating C C m 1000 1500 TH - 60+ 80 - 15+ 70 3000 5
CR1 F185 1000 1500
CR1 F265 1000 1500
Environment
Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating positions
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits (sine wave) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity In AC-3, y 40 C In AC-1, y 40 C In AC-4, y 40 C Up to Of the opeational current I rms I rms 220440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V A A A V Hz A 3 or 4 150 250 138 1000 25200 1700 1500 1200 1100 450 1200 1200 1200 700 600 450 350 160 250 0.45 6 18 1 120 120 2 25 x 3 8 18 3 or 4 185 275 170 1000 25200 2100 1800 1600 1200 600 1500 1500 1500 920 740 500 400 200 315 0.36 12 26 1 150 150 2 25 x 3 8 18 3 or 4 265 350 245 1000 25200 2940 2450 2200 1700 800 2200 2200 2200 1230 950 620 480 315 400 0.32 22 39 1 240 240 2 32 x 4 10 35
A A A A A Permissible short time rating For 1 s from cold state, with no current A For 5 s flowing for previous 60 minutes A For 10 s at y 40 C A For 30 s A For 1 min A For 3 min A For 10 min Short-circuit protection by fuses Motor circuit AC-3 (type aM) A y 440 V AC-1 circuit (type gG, BS 88) A Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz m W W
Power dissipated per pole AC-3 for the above operational currents AC-1 Connection Number of conductors Cable with lugs Cable with connector Number of bars Bar c.s.a. Bolt diameter Tightening torque
mm2 mm2 mm N.m
5/214
CR1 F400 1000 1500 TH - 60+ 80 - 15+ 70 3000
CR1 F500 1000 1500
CR1 F630 1000 1500
CR1 BL 1000 1500 TC TH - 60+ 80 - 15+ 60 3000
CR1 BM 1000 1500
CR1 BP 1000 1500
CR1 BR 1000 1500
5 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
5 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
3 or 4 400 500 370 1000 25200 4500 4000 3500 3000 1200 3600 3600 3600 2400 1700 1200 1000 400 500 0.28 45 70
3 or 4 500 700 460 1000 25200 5000 5000 4500 3560 2500 4200 4200 4200 3200 2400 1500 1200 500 800 0.18 45 88
3 or 4 630 1000 560 1000 25200 6740 6300 5400 4600 3200 5050 5050 5050 4400 3400 2200 1600 630 1000 0.12 48 120
1, 2, 3 or 4 750 800 700 1000 5060 10 000 10 000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 7000 4800 3500 2100 1200 800 800 0.18 88 115
1, 2, 3 or 4 1000 1250 800 1000 5060 10 000 10 000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 8000 5200 3800 2400 1800 1200 1200 0.18 180 280
1, 2, 3 or 4 1500 2000 1250 1000 5060 15 000 15 000 12 000 9000 5000 12 000 12 000 9600 6400 5200 3600 2800 800 x 2 (1) 1000 x 2 (1) 0.13 290 520 3 100 x 5 4 x 10 35
1, 2, 3 or 4 1800 2750 1500 1000 5060 18 000 18 000 15 000 11 000 6000 15 000 15 000 12 000 8000 6300 4400 3600 1000 x 2 (1) 1200 x 2 (1) 0.09 360 680 4 100 x 10 4 x 10 35
2 2 150 240 2 2 2 2 2 30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 50 x 5 80 x 5 10 10 12 4x8 4 x 10 35 35 58 21 35 (1) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturer's recommendations.
5/215
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Contactor type
CR1 F150 a 50 or 60 Hz a 400 Hz c c low consumption Latching Unlatching In operating cycles per hour V V V V 48415 48220 48220 48220 0.851.1 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 120
CR1 F185
CR1 F265

Control voltage limits a and c Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 40 C Mechanical durability Average consumption 50/60 Hz
In millions of operating cycles 1 VA Latching 1-pole VA 2-pole VA 1100 1600 1650 3-pole VA 100 1600 1650 4-pole VA Unlatching 1-pole VA 2-pole VA 7.3 8 9 3-pole VA 7.3 8 9 4-pole VA 400 Hz and c Latching 1-pole VA 2-pole VA 1260 1750 1800 3-pole VA 1260 1750 1800 4-pole VA Unlatching 1-pole VA 2-pole VA 10 11 12 3-pole VA 10 11 12 4-pole W 500 500 500 c low Latching 3/4-pole consumption W 15 20 40 Unlatching 3/4-pole ms 3540 3540 4550 Average operating time Latching at Uc (1) ms 50100 50100 50100 Unlatching (1) The closing time is measured from the moment the closing coil is energised to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment the opening coil is energised to the moment the main poles separate. Nota : the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the main poles. For 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.

Type of contacts Conventional thermal current Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Connection Operational power of contacts LAD N for contactors CR1 F A Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V Flexible or solid conductor with or without cable end mm2 LAD N for contactors CR1 F 10 690 1 x 1 min; 2 x 2.5 max d.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V 48 125 250 440 W W 90 700 75 400 68 260 61 220
a.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4). V 48 115 230 400 600 VA VA 120 2600 280 7000 560 960 1440 13 000 15 000 9000
1 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity
5/216
CR1 F400 48415 48220 48220 48220 0.851.1 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 120 1
CR1 F500
CR1 F630
CR1 BL 110500 110500 110500 0.851.1 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 120 1
CR1 BM
CR1 BP
CR1 BR
650 650 650 650 1100 1100 1100 1100 1450 1650 2100 1650 1650 1650 1650 1450 1650 2100 1850 1850 1850 1850 110 110 110 110 125 125 125 125 12 9.5 8 165 165 165 165 12 9.5 8 175 175 175 175 600 600 600 600 1000 1000 1000 1000 1600 1800 2300 1500 1500 1500 1500 1600 1800 2300 1700 1700 1700 1700 100 100 100 100 115 115 115 115 16 13 11 150 150 150 150 16 13 11 160 160 160 160 500 550 620 70 60 45 4075 4080 4080 100150 100150 100150 100150 50100 50100 50100 2040 2040 2040 2040 (1) The closing time is measured from the moment the closing coil is energised to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment the opening coil is energised to the moment the main poles separate. Nota : the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the main poles. For 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. LAD N for contactors CR1 F 10 690 1 x 1 min; 2 x 2.5 max Operational power of contacts ZC4 GM for contactors CR1 B ZC4 GM for contactors CR1 B 20 660 2 min; 4 max a.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 2400 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4). V 110 220 380 415 500 127 440 VA 2000 4000 4000 4000 3500 VA 14 000 23 000 35 000 45 000 35 000 d.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V 110 120 440 500 W W 250 1600 250 800 230 400 200 360
1 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity
5/217
References
TeSys contactors
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c. supply
Maximum thermal current in category AC-1 40 C
Rated Number operational of poles current in category AC-3 (440 V max) A 150
Weight
CR1 F1854
5
CR1 F500
CR1 BP33
275 185 350 265 500 400 700 500 1000 630 800 750 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1250 1000 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 2000 1500 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 2750 1800 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 (1) Standard control circuit voltages: see page opposite. Characteristics : pages 5/228 to 5/217 Dimensions : pages 5/228 to 5/232
501614_1
501613_1
501612_1
A 250
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 1
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
CR1 F150pp CR1 F1504pp CR1 F185pp CR1 F1854pp CR1 F265pp CR1 F2654pp CR1 F400pp CR1 F4004pp CR1 F500pp CR1 F5004pp CR1 F630pp CR1 F6304pp CR1 BL31p12 CR1 BL31p21 CR1 BL31p30 CR1 BL32p12 CR1 BL32p21 CR1 BL32p30 CR1 BL33p12 CR1 BL33p21 CR1 BL33p30 CR1 BL34p12 CR1 BL34p21 CR1 BL34p30 CR1 BM31p12 CR1 BM31p21 CR1 BM31p30 CR1 BM32p12 CR1 BM32p21 CR1 BM32p30 CR1 BM33p12 CR1 BM33p21 CR1 BM33p30 CR1 BM34p12 CR1 BM34p21 CR1 BM34p30 CR1 BP31p12 CR1 BP31p21 CR1 BP31p30 CR1 BP32p12 CR1 BP32p21 CR1 BP32p30 CR1 BP33p12 CR1 BP33p21 CR1 BP33p30 CR1 BP34p12 CR1 BP34p21 CR1 BP34p30 CR1 BR31p12 CR1 BR31p21 CR1 BR31p30 CR1 BR32p12 CR1 BR32p21 CR1 BR32p30 CR1 BR33p12 CR1 BR33p21 CR1 BR33p30 CR1 BR34p12 CR1 BR34p21 CR1 BR34p30
kg 3.500 3.800 4.600 5.400 7.400 8.500 9.100 10.200 11.300 12.900 18.600 21.500 32.000 32.000 32.000 45.000 45.000 45.000 58.000 58.000 58.000 72.000 72.000 72.000 31.000 31.000 31.000 44.000 44.000 44.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 71.000 71.000 71.000 41.000 41.000 41.000 65.000 65.000 65.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 120.000 120.000 120.000 52.000 52.000 52.000 85.000 85.000 85.000 129.000 129.000 129.000 160.000 160.000 160.000
5/218
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories
Accessories for contactors CR1 F

Description
501377_1
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Time delay auxiliary contacts Contact blocks with protected terminals for 3-pole contactors (for mounting on contactors with closed arc chamber) Power terminal protection shrouds LAD N
Number of contacts or shrouds (1) (1) Set of 2 blocks
For use on
Reference
Weight kg 0.050 0.060 0.300
CR1 F CR1 F CR1 F150 and CR1 F185
LAD N (1) LAD p (1) LA9 F103
Set of 6 shrouds for 3-pole contactors
CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1
F150 and F185 F265 to F500 F630 F1504 and F1854 F2654 to F5004 F6304
LA9 F702 LA9 F703 LA9 F704 LA9 F707 LA9 F708 LA9 F709
0.250 0.250 0.250 0.300 0.300 0.300
501616_1
Set of 8 shrouds for 4-pole contactors
LA9 F103 Description

501617_1
Application For assembly of reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs
Reference See pages 5/220 and 5/221
Mechanical interlock and power connections
Accessories for contactors CR1 B

Description Application Reference Mechanical interlock For vertical assembly of EZ2 LB0601 with mounting reversing contactors and accessories (3) changeover contactor pairs Kit containing 2 For mounting on LA9 B103 1.620 bar mounting brackets 120 or 150 mm centres (1) For maximum number per contactor and complete reference, see page 5/111. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 48 110 125 127 220 230 240 250 380 400 415 440 500 Weight kg 1.560
LA9 F70p
501618_1
For contactors CR1 F

a 50/60 Hz a 400 Hz c c low consumption E7 E7 E7 EZ7 F7 F7 F7 FZ7 G7 G7 G7 GZ7 M7 M7 M7 MZ7 M7 M7 M7 U7 Q7 Q7 N7
For contactors CR1 B

a 50400 Hz F G M M U Q V N R S c FD GD MD UD UCD RD SD (3) Positive mechanical interlocking between 2 vertically mounted contactors of identical or different ratings. Connecting rods and cranks assembled on right-hand sides, crank pins on the pole side. Vertical fixing centre distance between the two contactors: 600 mm.
EZ2 LB0601
5/219
Mounting
TeSys contactors
Components for assembling reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs CR1 F Horizontally or vertically mounted
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 LA9 F p970

Reversing contactors LA9 F p976
L1 L2 L3
3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs LA9 Fp977 or LA9 F p982

3 1/L3 5 1/L2 7 1/L1 1 2/L1 3 2/L2 5 2/L3 1N 2N 7 N 8 A2 E1 A1
A1
A1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A1
4 L2
L1
Vertically mounted
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 LA9 FF4F LA9 FG4G Assembly A LA9 FH4H LA9 FJ4J LA9 FK4K LA9 FL4L Assembly C
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings, type: CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630
LA9 FG4F
Assembly A
LA9 FH4F LA9 FJ4F LA9 FK4F LA9 FL4F LA9 FH4G LA9 FJ4G LA9 FK4G LA9 FL4G
Assembly B
LA9 FJ4H LA9 FK4H LA9 FL4H LA9 FK4J LA9 FL4J LA9 FK4K
Assembly C
Reversers assembled using 3 contactors of identical or different ratings
LA9 F p4p4p
CR1 F500
F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630
Warning: the contactor ratings must be in decreasing size from top to bottom.
CR1 F265
CR1 F185
5/220
L3
References
TeSys contactors
Components for assembling reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs CR1 F
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating

Contactor type Set of power connections 3-pole Reference For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control (1) 4-pole Reference LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 FF977 FG977 FH977 FJ977 FK977 FL977 Weight kg 0.600 0.780 1.500 2.100 2.350 3.800 0.460 0.610 1.200 1.800 2.300 3.400 Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg 0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150 0.345 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220 0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150 0.345 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220
CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 F1504 F1854 F2654 F4004 F5004 F6304 F1504 F1854 F2654 F4004 F5004 F6304 LA9 FF976 LA9 FG976 LA9 FH976 LA9 FJ976 LA9 FK976 LA9 FL976 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) LA9 FF982 LA9 FG982 LA9 FH982 LA9 FJ982 LA9 FK982 LA9 FL982 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 LA9 FF970 FG970 FJ970 FJ970 FJ970 FL970 FF4F FG4G FH4H FJ4J FK4K FL4L FF970 FG970 FJ970 FJ970 FJ970 FL970 FF4F FG4G FH4H FJ4J FK4K FL4L
Vertically mounted
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1 CR1
Vertically mounted
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings

Contactor type At bottom For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs At top Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg or F1854 or F2654 or F4004 or F5004 or F6304 or F2654 or F4004 or F5004 or F6304 or F4004 or F5004 or F6304 or F5004 or F6304 or F6304 LA9 FG4F LA9 FH4F LA9 FJ4F LA9 FK4F LA9 FL4F LA9 FH4G LA9 FJ4G LA9 FK4G LA9 FL4G LA9 FJ4H LA9 FK4H LA9 FL4H LA9 FK4J LA9 FL4J LA9 FL4K Mechanical interlock Kit reference (4) LA9 Fp4p4p 0.350 0.870 0.930 0.940 0.940 0.860 0.940 0.940 0.950 1.130 1.130 1.140 1.200 1.210 1.210
Vertically mounted (3)

CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 CR1 F185 or F1854 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 CR1 F265 or F2654 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 CR1 F400 or F4004 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 CR1 F500 or F5004 CR1 F630 Using 3 contactors (vertically mounted) of identical or different ratings CR1 F150 or F1504
For assembly of 3 or 4-pole reversing contactors
The contactor ratings must be in decreasing size from top to bottom. (1) A 3-pole reversing contactor for motor control can be converted into a 3-pole changeover contactor pair by removing the upper connecting links. (2) All power connections are to be made by the customer. (3) With identical or different number of poles. Power connections to be made by the customer. (4) Complete the reference by replacing the first dot with the code for the upper contactor, the second dot with the code for the middle contactor and the third dot with the code for the bottom contactor. Contactors CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 Code F G H J K L Example: mechanical interlock for reversing contactor made up of 3 different contactors: CR1 F500 top, CR1 F26 middle and CR1 F185 bottom: LA9 FK4H4G.
5/221
References
TeSys contactors
Coils for contactors CR1 F
Standard coils
Usual voltages 50400 Hz 50 Hz, 60 Hz or c V V 48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415
501470_1
Resistance of winding at = 20 C Latching Unlatching 1.98 9.35 11.61 23.50 37.55 45.16 114.10 139.50 230.8 1453 1788 4098 5139 6544 12 447 16 717
Reference
Voltage Weight code
kg LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FF005 FF006 FF007 FF020 FF008 FF009 FF010 FF011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440
For contactors CR1 F150

LX0 FF009 48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415 1,42 6.92 8.45 21.30 26.27 32.95 82.29 102.30 220 1339 1676 3169 4729 4729 11 885 14 305 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FG005 FG006 FG007 FG020 FG008 FG009 FG010 FG011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 0,560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560

48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415 1.34 6.90 8.56 20.20 25.77 33.03 78.39 102.9 183.4 1031 1325 2654 4090 5002 11 803 15 006 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FH005 FH006 FH007 FH020 FH008 FH009 FH010 FH011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
501471_1

LX0 FH009 48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415 1.32 8.09 9.79 24.40 30.14 37.02 94.80 121.10 90.5 813 1027 2643 3309 4074 9380 11 763 LX0 FJ005 LX0 FJ006 LX0-FJ007 LX0 FJ020 LX0 FJ008 LX0 FJ009 LX0 FJ010 LX0 FJ011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120

48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415 1.57 7.53 9.56 23.60 28.81 35.67 89.56 112.06 166 916 1159 2981 3733 4595 10 570 13 256 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FK005 FK006 FK007 FK020 FK008 FK009 FK010 FK011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220

48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415 0.87 5.20 6.45 20.20 25.36 25.36 60.95 77.97 204 1423 1830 2961 4603 5658 10 676 13 003 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FL005 FL006 FL007 FL020 FL008 FL009 FL010 FL011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460
5/222
TeSys contactors
Special coils
Coils with two windings with common point, allowing the use of two separate power sources for latching and unlatching.
501472_1
Coil voltages at 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 400 Hz or c Latching Unlatching V V 220 24
Resistance of winding at = 20 C Latching Unlatching 29.5 39.5
Reference
Voltage Weight code kg

LX0 FF224 MB7 0.440

220 24 26.5 19 LX0 FG224 MB7 0.560

LX0 FF030 220 24 26 29.5 LX0 FH224 MB7 0.780

220 24 30 23 LX0 FJ224 MB7 1.120

220 24 29 26 LX0 FK224 MB7 1.220

220 24 26 41 LX0 FL224 MB7 1.460
Coils with low inrush consumption

Usual voltages c V 48 110 127 220 Resistance of winding at = 20 C Latching Unlatching 4.56 22.37 35.54 89.85 140.56 706.44 1086.36 3342.51 Reference Voltage Weight code kg LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FF055 FF056 FF057 FF058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440

48 110 127 220 5.19 25.50 32.75 102.44 106.54 536.26 732.64 2378.62 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FG055 FG056 FG057 FG058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 0.570 0.570 0.570 0.570

48 110 127 220 5.19 25 30.98 97.89 74.26 364.61 458.45 1344.46 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FH055 FH056 FH057 FH058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800

48 110 127 220 5.05 25.39 31.86 98.19 36.36 171.49 221.20 648.79 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FJ055 FJ056 FJ057 FJ058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150

48 110 127 220 4.42 22.74 28.25 85.12 41 193.36 313.60 918.68 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FK055 FK056 FK057 FK058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 1.270 1.270 1.270 1.270

48 110 127 220 3.94 19.36 25.39 74.44 59.17 365.33 452.27 1071.43 LX0 LX0 LX0 LX0 FL055 FL056 FL057 FL058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
5/223
References
TeSys contactors
Coils for contactors CR1 B
Coils with TC treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite)

Usual voltages c a 50400 Hz V V Resistance at = 20 C 19.7 25.2 77.2 94 128 197 257 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 KB140 KB134 KB136 KB139 KB125 KB126 KB138 Reference Weight
kg 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
For contactors CR1 Bp31

110125 220 250 110120 220240 380400 415440
501473_1

WB1 KBppp 110 125 220 250 110 120127 220/230 240 380400 415440 9.6 11.4 19.7 32.5 49.7 77.2 128 160 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 KB133 KB121 KB140 KB124 KB122 KB136 KB125 KB137 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120

110 125 220 250 110 120127 240 380415 440 7.2 9.6 11.4 32.5 61 94 128 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 KB123 KB133 KB121 KB124 KB135 KB139 KB125 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120

110 125 250 110 120127 220/230 240 380 400440 5.8 7.2 11.4 25.2 32.5 49.7 77.2 94 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 WB1 KB132 KB123 KB121 KB134 KB124 KB122 KB136 KB139 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
Coils with TH treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite) Add suffix TH to the references selected above. Example: WB1 KB140TH.
5/224
TeSys contactors
Coils for contactors CR1 B
Accessories for use with coils

Coils (TC or TH) Additional resistors (2)
(1) Automatic coil cut-out contact (3) Nb Reference Rectifier (4) Reference
R1
501474_1
Reference
R2 47 68 180 220 270 470 470
Reference

WB1 KB140 WB1 KB134 WB1 KB136 WB1 KB139 WB1 KB125 DR2 SC0220 WB1 KB126
501475_1
68 68 220 270 330 470 1000
DR2 SC0068 DR2 SC0068 DR2 SC0220 DR2 SC0270 DR2 SC0330 DR2 SC0470 DR2 SC1000
DR2 SC0047 DR2 SC0068 DR2 SC0180 DR2 SC0220 DR2 SC0270 DR2 SC0470 DR2 SC0470
2 2 2 2 3 3 3
WB1 KB138
ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM8 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM8 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM8 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM8 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM8 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM8 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM8
or or or or or or or
DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S

WB1 KB133 WB1 KB121 WB1 KB140 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB124 WB1 KB122 10 47 100 120 220 330 470 680 DR2 SC0010 DR2 SC0047 DR2 SC0100 DR2 SC0120 DR2 SC0220 DR2 SC0330 DR2 SC0470 DR2 SC0680 33 39 47 120 150 220 470 560 DR2 SC0033 DR2 SC0039 DR2 SC0047 DR2 SC0120 DR2 SC0150 DR2 SC0220 DR2 SC0470 DR2 SC0560 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PR4 FB0011 PR4 FB0010 PR4 FB0009 PR4 FB0007 PR4 FB0007 PR4 FB0006 PR4 FB0005 PR4 FB0004 DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S
501476_1
WB1 KB136 WB1 KB125 WB1 KB137

WB1 KB123 WB1 KB133 WB1 KB121 WB1 KB124 WB1 KB135 WB1 KB139 WB1 KB125 39 47 56 180 270 470 680 DR2 SC0039 DR2 SC0047 DR2 SC0056 27 39 47 DR2 SC0027 DR2 SC0039 DR2 SC0047 DR2 SC0120 DR2 SC0270 DR2 SC0390 DR2 SC0470 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PR4 FB0012 PR4 FB0011 PR4 FB0010 PR4 FB0008 PR4 FB0006 PR4 FB0005 PR4 FB0004 DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S
DR2-SC0180 120 DR2 SC0270 DR2 SC0470 270 390
DR2-SC0680 470

WB1 KB132 PR4 FB0014 WB1 KB123 WB1 KB121 WB1 KB134
501477_1
33 47 56 150 180 270 390 560
DR2 SC0033 DR2 SC0047 DR2 SC0056 DR2 SC0150
27 33 56 120
DR2 SC0027 DR2 SC0033 DR2 SC0056 DR2 SC0120 DR2 SC0150 DR2 SC0220 DR2 SC0390 DR2 SC0470
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PR4 FB0014 PR4 FB0012 PR4 FB0010 PR4 FB0008 PR4 FB0007 PR4 FB0007 PR4 FB0006 PR4 FB0005
DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1U DR5 TE1S DR5 TE1S
WB1 KB124 WB1 KB122 WB1 KB136 WB1 KB139 DR5 TE1U
DR2-SC0180 150 DR2 SC0270 DR2 SC0390 DR2 SC0560 220 390 470
(1) For connections, see page 5/235. (2) Weight of resistors DR2 SCpppp : 0.030 kg. (3) Weight of automatic coil cut-out contacts: ZC4 GMp : 0.030 kg and PR4 FB00pp : 0.600 kg. (4) Weight of rectifier DR5 TE1p : 0.100 kg. The rectifier is for use on a.c. only.
5/225
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1 F
References
501478_1
Description Complete sets of contacts for 3 or 4 poles (1)
For contactor 3-pole CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500
Reference LA5 FF431 LA5 FG431 LA5 FH431 LA5 F400803 LA5 F500803 LA5 F630803 LA5 FF441 LA5 FG441 LA5 FH441 LA5 F400804 LA5 F500804 LA5 F630804 LA5 F15050 LA5 F18550 LA5 F26550 LA5 F40050 LA5 F50050 LA5 F63050 LA5 F150450 LA5 F185450 LA5 F265450 LA5 F400450 LA5 F500450 LA5 F630450
Weight kg 0.270 0.350 0.660 0.660 0.660 0.660 0.360 0.465 0.880 0.465 0.465 0.465 0.490 0.670 0.920 1.300 1.850 3.150 0.660 0.910 1.220 1.740 2.500 4.200
LA5 FG431 CR1 F630 4-pole CR1 F1504 CR1 F1854 CR1 F2654 CR1 F4004 CR1 F5004 CR1 F6304
501479_1
Arc chambers
3-pole
CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630
4-pole
CR1 F1504 CR1 F1854 CR1 F2654
LA5 F40050
CR1 F4004 CR1 F5004 CR1 F6304
(1) Set containing the following (per pole): 2 fixed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 deflectors, 1 back-plate, clamping screws and washers.
5/226
TeSys contactors
Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1 B
Description
501480_1
For contactors CR1 BL
Sets of contacts (1 moving contact, 1 fixed contact)
Number of sets required per pole 1
Unit reference of set PA1 LB80
Weight kg 0.420
CR1 BM CR1 BP PA1 LB80 (PA1 LB76 + PA1 LB75) CR1 BR Description Moving contact only (for one finger) Fixed contact only (for one finger) Blow-out horn only (for 1 finger) Arc chambers (for a single pole) PA1 LB89 For contactors All ratings All ratings All ratings CR1 BL CR1 BM ZC4 GM1 CR1 BP CR1 BR Auxiliary contact blocks All ratings All ratings All ratings All ratings N/C pole for automatic cut-out coil Set of moving and fixed contacts for N/C pole Arc chamber for N/C pole Electromagnet Description PA1 LB50 Return springs for moving part of electromagnet N/O pole springs All ratings All ratings All ratings All ratings For contactors CR1 B (1 pole) CR1 B (2, 3 or 4 poles) CR1 BL, BM or BP CR1 BR
1 2 3 Composition 1 N/O contact - normal 1 N/C contact - normal 1 N/O contact - gold flashed 1 N/C contact - gold flashed No. of parts required 1 2 1 per pole 1 per pole
PA1 LB80 PA1 LB80 PA1 LB80 Reference PA1 LB75 PA1 LB76 PA1 LB89 PA1 LB50 PA1 LB50 PA1 PB50 PA1 RB50 ZC4 GM1 ZC4 GM2 ZC4 GM9 ZC4 GM8 PR4 FB00pp (1) PV1 FA80 PN1 FB50 ET1 KB50 Reference DV1 RT292 DV1 RT292 DV1 RC201 DV1 RC155
0.420 0.420 0.420 Weight kg 0.220 0.200 0.120 3.700 3.700 6.200 8.500 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.600 0.035 0.220 10.600 Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.020 0.020
501481_1
501483_1
501482_1
501484_1
(1) Reference to be completed, see page 5/225.
PR4 FB004pp
5/227
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 F
CR1 F150 to F500

Common side view CR1 F150, F185, F265 CR1 F400, F500
S1
(1)
=
F150 M8x25 F185 M8x25 F265 M10x35 =
44,5 6xM10x35 8x8,5
3x6,5 = =
X1
b b2
b1
J J1
= X1 = =
Z
G1 G
= Y Q P a P Q1 f
23,5
G G1
L c
CR1
P a
Q1 f
CR1
F150 F185 F265 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P a 163.5 201.5 168.5 208.5 201.5 244.5 b 170 170 174 174 203 203 b1 137 137 137 137 145 145 b2 301 301 305 305 370 370 c 171 171 181 181 213 213 f 131 131 130 130 147 147 G 106 143 111 151 142 190 G1 80 80 80 80 96 96 J 106 106 106 106 106 106 J1 120 120 120 120 120 120 L 107 107 113.5 113.5 141 141 M 150 150 154 154 178 178 P 40 40 40 40 48 48 Q 26 26 29 29 39 34 Q1 57.5 55.5 59.5 59.5 66.5 66.5 S 20 20 20 20 25 25 S1 27 27 34 34 38 38 Y 44 44 38.5 30.5 30.5 21.5 Z 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 15.5 15.5 f = minimum distance required for coil removal. X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage in V 200500 CR1 F150 10 CR1 F185 10 CR1 F265 10 (1) Power terminal protection shroud. 6601000 15 15 15
F400 3P a 213 G min. 66 b 206 b2 375 c 219 f 146 G supplied 80 G max. 102 G1 supplied 170 G1 min. 156 G1 max. 192 J 12 L 145 M 181 P 48 Q 43 Q1 74 S 25
4P 261 66 206 375 219 146 80 150 170 156 240 60 145 181 48 43 74 25
F500 3P 233 66 238 400 232 150 80 120 170 156 210 32 146 208 55 47 77 30
4P 288 66 238 400 232 150 140 175 230 156 265 27 146 208 55 47 77 30
f = minimum distance required for coil removal. X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage in V 200500 6601000 CR1 F400 15 20 CR1 F500 15 20
CR1 F630
72 40 64 6xM12x45 = 4x10,5 =
(1)
60,5 Q 80 a 80 Q1 181 (2)
J1
155 197 255

CR1 F630 3P 4P a 309 389 G supplied 180 240 G min. 100 150 G max. 195 275 J1 61 81 Q 60 60 Q1 89 89 X1: Min. electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage in V X1 200500 20 6901000 30 (1) Power terminal protection shroud. (2) Minimum distance required for coil removal.
X1
280 304 464
264
X1
5/228
180
120 180
Mounting
TeSys contactors
CR1 F150F265
Panel mounted On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC On rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
(1)
3x6,5 =
DZ5 MF5
110
AF1 EA6
110
120
= J c
CR1 c F150 3P 171 4P 171 G 3P 80 4P 80 J 3P 26.5 4P 45 J1 3P 57 4P 75.5 (1) Power terminal protection
= G J1 c c
F150 171 171 80 80 F185 181 181 80 80 F265 213 213 96 96 CR1 c G
15
F150 171 171 80 80 F185 181 181 80 80 F265 213 213 96 96
F185 181 181 80 80 29 49 59.5 79.5 shroud.
F265 213 213 96 96 44.5 68.5 61.5 85.5
CR1 c G
3P 4P 3P 4P
3P 4P 3P 4P
CR1 F150F650
On 2 notched uprights AM1 ECppp
110
AM1 EC200
AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820 (2) AF1 CD101+ AF1 VC10
5
AF1 CD081+ AF1 VC820
(1)
AF1 CD061+ AF1 VA618 AF1 VA618 M6
AF1 CD061
AF1 VA618 M6 LA9 F100
110
120
10,5
25
G AM1 EC200
G AM1 EC200 G3
35
G1 G2
CR1 c
F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 3P 171 181 213 213 226 250 4P 171 181 213 213 226 250 G (M6) 3P 80 80 96 4P 80 80 96 G1 ( 8.5) 3P 80 80 4P 80 140 G2 ( 10.5) 3P 180 4P 240 (1) AF1 CDppp or AF1 VAppp. (2) This AM1 EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (please consult your Regional Sales Office).
180
M6
8,5
5/229
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F150F265

Reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F400F630
3x6,5
P1
3x6,5 =
8x8,5 (1)
P1
8x8,5 (1) = 120 (2) = = 180 =

F500 485 595 238 238 80 140 170 230 156 156 84.5 79.5 66 66 39.5 34.5 112 112
110/120
= J1 G1
= J a
= G1
= J1
J1 J3
G G1
J J2 a
G G1
J1 J3
2 x CR1 a 3P 4P b 3P 4P G1 3P 4P J 3P 4P J1 3P 4P P1 3P 4P
F150 345 422 170 170 80 80 71 111 57 75.5 71 71
F185 357 437 174 174 80 80 78 118 59.5 79.5 78 78
F265 425 521 203 203 96 96 109 157 61.5 85.5 100 100
3P 4P b 3P 4P G 3P 4P G1 3P 4P J 3P 4P J1 3P 4P J2 3P 4P J3 3P 4P P1 3P 4P (1) Except F630: 4 x 10.5. (2) Except F630: 180.
2 x CR1 a
F400 446 542 206 206 80 80 170 170 157 157 64.5 112.5 67 67 19.5 67.5 107 107
F630 636 796 304 304 180 240 139 139 68.5 68.5 137 137
5/230
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors
Vertically mounted with mechanical interlock LA9 Fppp. 2 contactors CR1 F of identical or different ratings (CR1 F150F630), see pages 5/220 and 5/221. Assembly A Assembly B
Assembly C
J3
80
(1) (3) = =
H
12,5 (5) (1)
G5
G1
12,5 (5) (1) F330 }120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630
G5
G1
= =
120
= =
(4)
J4 80 J2 J4 80 J2 9 12,5 G4 G2 J2
(1) Mechanical interlock shaft. (2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only. (3) 3 x 6.5 mm for CR1 F150F265. (4) 3 x 6.5 mm for CR1 F265. (5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket. (6) 4 x 8.5 mm for CR1 F400, F500 or 4 x 10.5 mm. Assembly type A B LA9 F F4F G4F G4G H4F J4F K4F G1 3P 96 80 80 4P 96 80 140 G2 3P 4P G3 3P 0 3 0 21 45 45 4P 0 4 0 27 26 26 G4 3P 4P G5 3P 60 83 83 4P 83 83 83 H min. 200 210 220 240 250 270 max. 310 300 310 380 380 380 H1 min. 80 90 100 110 80 100 max. 190 180 190 250 210 210 J1 3P 133 134 134 149.5 137 157 4P 145 146 146 164.5 185 212 J2 3P 133 133 134 183 133 183 4P 145 145 146 145 145 145 J3 3P 48.5 53 53 4P 67 73 73 J4 3P 48.5 54 53 48.5 48.5 48.5 4P 67 69 73 67 67 67 (7) In this case, G4 is greater than G5.
180
(1)
(3) =
(1) (5)
(6)
F330 }120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630
(1)
(3)
H1
H1
G3 (2)
H1
J1
9 G3(2) J1
(4)
G3(2)
J1
F330 }120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630
(6)
120
(6)
5
L4F 180 240 35 17 74 74 310 380 140 210 241 321 133 145 48.5 67 H4G 96 96 19 23 60 83 250 380 120 250 149.5 164.5 134 146 53 73 J4G 80 80 42 22 83 83 250 380 90 220 137 185 134 146 53 73 K4G 80 140 42 22 83 83 270 380 110 220 157 212 134 146 53 73 L4G 180 240 33 13 74 74 310 380 150 220 241 321 134 146 53 73 C H4H 96 96 96 96 0 0 60 83 60 83 250 380 130 260 149.5 164.5 142.5 164.5 J4H 80 80 96 96 23 0 60 83 83 83 260 380 110 230 137 185 149.5 164.5 K4H 80 140 96 96 23 0 60 83 83 83 280 380 130 230 157 212 149.5 164.5 L4H 180 240 96 96 14 9 (7) 60 83 74 74 330 380 170 220 24 321 149.5 164.5 J4J 80 80 80 80 0 0 83 83 83 83 260 380 60 200 137 185 137 185 K4J 80 140 80 80 0 0 83 83 83 83 280 380 100 200 157 212 137 185 L4J 180 240 80 80 9 (7) 9 (7) 83 83 74 74 325 380 140 195 241 321 137 185 K4K 80 140 80 140 0 0 83 83 83 83 300 380 120 200 157 212 157 212 L4K 180 240 80 140 9 (7) 9 (7) 83 83 74 74 345 380 160 195 244 321 157 212 L4L 180 240 180 240 0 0 74 74 74 74 380 380 200 200 241 321 241 312
5/231
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 B
Contactors CR1 B
Common side view
Single-pole, 2-pole or 3-pole
4-pole
185 R
290 350 350
15 365
15
15
c 85 b c
260
44 N 30 15
P M L
Q1 30 30
P M1
51 M2 L
Q1 30
CR1 BL 1P 2P 50 50 59 59 16 16 345 445 285 385 121 121 100 100 100 100 122 122 10 10 30 30 9 9 CR1 BM 1P 2P 63 63 55 55 20 20 345 445 285 385 125 125 100 100 100 100 157 157 17 17 30 30 11 11 CR1 BP 1P 2P 100 100 55 55 20 20 385 540 325 480 125 125 150 150 110 110 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11 CR1 BR 1P 2P 125 125 50 50 25 25 445 635 385 575 130 130 195 195 123 123 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11
a b c L M M1 M2 N P Q1 R S T
3P 50 59 16 540 480 121 100 100 122 10 30 9
4P 50 59 16 760 308 392 121 100 100 122 10 30 9
3P 63 55 20 540 480 125 100 100 157 17 30 11
4P 63 55 20 760 308 392 125 100 100 157 17 30 11
3P 100 55 20 760 700 125 150 110 173 20 60 11
4P 100 55 20 1065 455 550 125 150 110 173 20 60 11
3P 125 50 25 885 825 130 195 123 173 20 60 11
4P 125 50 25 1065 455 550 130 195 123 173 20 60 11

Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (3-phase a current). 3-phase a voltage 380-415-440 V X1 X2 500 V X1 X2 600 V X1 X2 1000 V X1 X2 CR1 BL 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250 CR1 BM 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250 CR1 BP 150 200 150 220 200 250 200 250 CR1 BR 200 250 200 250 200 250 250 300
X2
X1
Mechanical interlock for assembly of vertically mounted reversing contactors EZ2 LB0601
A = (E112) 488
E = 600
5/232
Adjustment characteristics
TeSys contactors
5
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 B
501391_1
Complete pole
Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel
1
E e
2 3
1 2 3 4
Moving circuit Coil Moving circuit Return spring
N/O pole adjustment

1
F
3
1 2 3 4 5
Fixed contact Moving contact Pull-in gap adjustment Adjustment of application force Pole spring
5
4 5
N/C automatic coil cut-out pole adjustment

1
F
2
1 2 3 4 5
Fixed contact Moving contact Opening gap adjustment Adjustment of application force Pole spring
3 4 5
a.c. or d.c. supply with economy resistor (and rectifier on a)

Contactor type Electromagnet (EB5 KB50) Coil (WB1 KB) N/O power pole (PA1) N/C automatic coil cut-out pole (PR4) Pick-up travel (E) Pull-in travel (e) Pull-in voltage Drop-out voltage Application force (F ) to contact per pole Application force (F ) Opening gap (b) with electromagnet closed mm mm V V daN daN mm CR1 BL 30 10 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 0.9 3.5 0.5 CR1 BM 30 10 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 0.9 3.5 0.5 CR1 BP 30 10 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 (1) 0.9 3.5 0.5 CR1 BR 30 10 0.30.5 Uc 30 (2) 0.9 3.5 0.5
(1) Each pole has 2 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts. (2) Each pole has 3 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts. Selection : pages 5/207 to 5/211 Characteristics : pages 5/214 to 5/217 References : pages 5/218 to 5/227 Schemes : pages 5/234 and 5/235
5/233
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Contactors CR1 F
3-pole
3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 A1
4-pole
3/L2 A1 1/L1 5/L3 T3/6 7/L4 T4/8
A2 E1
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
A2 E1
T1/2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/111)

1 N/O LAD N10 (1)
43 NO 43/NO (94)
1 N/C LAD N01 (1)

41/NC (92)
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11

61/NC 53/NO
2 N/O LAD N20

53/NO 63/NO
2 N/C LAD N02

51/NC 61/NC
T2/4
2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22

53/NO 61/NC 83/NO 84 83/NO 84 71/NC 74 73/NO 72
62
64
52
44 (93)
42 (91)
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13

81/NC 53/NO 61/NC 71/NC
4 N/O LAD N40

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
4 N/C LAD N04

51/NC 71/NC 61/NC 81/NC
54
53/NO
87/NO
53/NO 54
61/NC
54
62
76
75/NC
88
82
54
52
72
62
72
54
64
74
(1) Items in brackets refer to blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 5/111)

1 N/O +1 N/C LAD N11P
13/NO 21/NC
1 N/O +1 N/C LAD N11G

43/NO 31/NC
84

13/NO 43/NO 21/NC 31/NC
62
82

53/NO 63/NO 31/NC 41/NC
22
14
32
44
32
42
54
22
14
32
Front mounting add-on contact blocks - Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/111)
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
83/NO
53/NO
63/NO
73/NO
64
74
62
54
64
54
64
54
84
54
74
73/NO
61/NC
Time delay auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/111)

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Tp
67/NO 55/NC
Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp

57/NO 65/NC
On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD Sp

67/NO 55/NC
56
56
68
58
3-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F150F630

L1 L2 L3
66
4-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F1504F6304

1N 1/L3 1/L2 1/L1 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 2N
68
A1
84
83/NO
2 N/O (24-50 V) LA1 DX20
2 N/O (5-24 V) LA1 DY20
44
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) 2 N/O standard LA1 DZ40
64
A1
A1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A2 E1
L1
L2
L3
Vertically mounted contactors using 2 contactors of identical or different ratings

1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 1N
A1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A1
L3 L2 L1 3 1 5 3 A1 A1 1 5 7
N L3 L2 L1
A2 E1
A2 E1
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
5/234
2N
A2 E1
A1
62
61/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C of which 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LAD C22
54
62
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31
54
62
Schemes (continued)
TeSys contactors
Contactors CR1 B
CR1 Bp31p12
A1
CR1 Bp31 p21

A1
CR1 Bp31p30
A1
A2
A2
CR1 Bp32p12
A1
CR1 Bp32 p21

A1
CR1 Bp32p30
A1
A2
A2
CR1 Bp33p12
A1
CR1 Bp33 p21

A1
CR1 Bp33p30
A1
A2
CR1 Bp34p12
A1
A2
CR1 Bp34 p21

A1
CR1 Bp34p30
A1
A2
A2
Wiring schemes
Contactors CR1 F and CR1 B Contactors CR1 F with thermal overload relay
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 KM1:5
Connectors CR1 B
KM1:1 KM1:5
KM1 2 4 6 97 95
A2
A2
A2
A2
13
21
F1 2 4 6
S2
F1 A1 96
13
13
22
14
14
R1
KM1
A2
KM1:1
(1) automatic coil cut-out contact ZC4 GM or PR4 FB00pp S1: latching pushbutton S2: unlatching pushbutton

Pushbutton control
Start
Scheme of internal circuit
A1
CR1
Latching winding Stop
14
M 3c
S1
R2
KM1
13 A2
A1 E1
14
13
S1
KM1
98
97
95 2
F1 96 98
S2
KM1
(1)
14
A1
a()/c
Switch control
A2 E1
a(+)/c
A2
CR1
Start/Stop
Unlatching winding
A1
E1
A2 E1
CR1
a()/c
a(+)/c
Warning : terminal A2 is common to both windings in all cases.
5/235
Selection guide
Modular equipment
Applications
Control of lighting, heating, hot water systems, ventilation systems and small motors
Functions
Contactors for standard applications
Dual tariffcontactors
Rating
1663 A
1663 A
Number of 17.5 mm modules (variable, depending on size and number of poles)
13
14
Device type
GC
GY
Pages
5/246
5/260
5/236
Control of lighting, heating, hot water systems, ventilation systems and small motors
Direct control of motors
Fuse protection
Motor control and protection
Impulse relays
Rotary switch disconnectors
Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole fuse carriers, with or without neutral
16 A
2580 A
Up to 125 A
0,132 A
2.5
18
2.5
GF 16
VVD, VVE
DF6, GK1
GV2 M
5/250
Please consult your Regional Sales Office
4/26
3/45
5/237
Presentation, standards
Modular equipment
5
Standard contactors, type GC
533704
Presentation
GC contactors are designed for use in modular panels and enclosures. These contactors feature: b Easy installation v quick clip-on fixing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail, v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten, captive, pozidrive screw terminals. b Compact size All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in modules of 17.5 mm (width of one module: 17.5 mm). b v v v v User safety use of materials conforming to strictest fire safety standards, live parts protected against direct finger contact, completely safe operation, state indication on front panel.
GC 25
Standards
This range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the requirements of international standard IEC 61095. This standard is specific to Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar use. It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the safety of equipment and persons in premises and areas accessible to the public. Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc. Applications GC modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase or 4-phase loads up to 100 A. Power switching These contactors have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific supply is required: b lighting, b heating, b ventilation, b motorised shutters or gates.
5/238
Setting-up precautions
Modular equipment
5
The contactor controls must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block 1 (GAP 21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals y 250 V. When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side, a GAC 5 ventilation 1/2 module 2 must be fitted every 2 contactors.
It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to separate them from electromechanical units by a space 3 equal to one module, or by 2 ventilation 1/2 modules (GAC 5).
3
Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the enclosure is > 40 C
Contactor rating 40 C 16 A 16 A 25 A 25 A 40 A 40 A 63 A 63 A 100 A 100 A (1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be fitted 50 14 22 36 57 87 C A A A A A 60 13 20 32 50 80 C (1) A A A A A
5/239
Contactor selection for lighting circuits
Modular equipment
5
Modular contactors
Lighting (Maximum number of lamps depending on the power of each unit)

Presentation of installations according to type of supply
Single-phase circuit, 230 V
230V L1 N
3-phase circuit, 230 V

230V 230V L1 L2 L3 230V
The maximum number of lamps which can be operated per phase is equal to the number of lamps in the single phase 230 V table divided by 3.
3-phase circuit, 400 V (with neutral)

L1 230V L2 L3 N
Contactor rating for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole)

Fluorescent lamps with starter Single fitting P (W) IB (A) C (F) Non corrected 20 40 50 80 110 0.39 0.43 0.70 0.80 1.2 20 28 60 90 13 17 35 56 10 15 30 48 7 10 20 32 With parallel correction 20 40 58 80 110 0.19 0.29 0.46 0.57 0.79 5 5 7 7 16 15 20 40 60 15 20 40 60 10 15 30 43 10 15 30 43 5 7 14 20 Contactor rating 16 25 40 63 A A A A
Maximum 22 number 30 of lamps 70 100 Twin fitting P (W) IB (A) C (F)
Non corrected 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140 0.44 0.82 1.34 1.64 2.2 11 16 26 42 7 10 16 25 5 8 13 21 4 6 10 16
230V
The maximum number of lamps which can be operated per phase is equal to the total number of lamps in the singlephase 230 V table.
230V
With series correction 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140 0.26 0.48 0.78 0.96 1.3 3.5 4.5 7 9 18 30 46 80 123 17 25 43 67 10 16 27 42 9 13 22 34 6 10 16 25
Contactor rating 16 25 40 63 A A A A
Maximum 20 number 30 of lamps 50 75
High pressure mercury vapour lamps Non corrected P (W) IB (A) C (F) 50 80 125 250 400 700 0.6 0.8 1.15 2.15 3.25 5.4 With parallel correction 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000 0.35 0.50 0.7 1.5 2.4 4 5.7 7 8 10 18 25 40 60 1 3 5 Contactor rating 16 25 40 63 A A A A
Maximum 15 10 8 4 2 1 10 9 9 4 3 2 number 20 15 10 6 4 2 15 13 10 6 4 2 of lamps 34 27 20 10 6 4 28 25 20 11 8 5 53 40 28 15 10 6 43 38 30 17 12 7 IB : value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage. C : unit capacitance for each lamp. IB and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers
5/240
Contactor selection for lighting circuits (continued)
Modular equipment
5
Modular contactors
Contactor rating for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole) (continued)

Low pressure sodium vapour lamps Non corrected P (W) IB (A) C (F) 18 35 55 90 135 180 0.35 1.4 1.4 2.1 3.1 3.1 4 9 14 24 5 9 14 24 3 6 9 19 2 4 6 10 2 4 6 10 With parallel correction 18 35 55 90 135 180 0.35 0.6 0.6 0.9 0.9 0.9 5 20 20 26 45 40 14 21 40 60 3 5 10 15 3 5 10 15 2 4 8 11 1 2 4 6 1 2 5 7 Contactor rating 16 25 40 63 A A A A
High pressure sodium vapour lamps Non corrected P (W) IB (A) C (F) 70 1 150 250 400 1000 1.8 3 4.4 10.3 4 7 13 18 2 4 8 11 1 3 5 8 1 2 3 With parallel correction 70 150 250 400 1000 0.6 0.7 1.5 2.5 6 12 20 32 45 100 6 9 18 25 6 9 18 25 2 3 6 9 2 4 8 12 1 2 4 6 Contactor rating 16 25 40 63 A A A A
Metal iodine or halogen vapour lamps Non corrected P (W) IB (A) C (F) 35 70 150 250 400 1000 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2.5 6 16 24 42 64 8 12 20 32 5 8 14 21 3 5 8 13 1 2 4 5 With parallel correction 39 70 150 250 400 1000 2000 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2.5 6 5.5 6 12 20 32 45 85 60 12 18 31 50 6 9 16 25 4 6 10 15 3 4 7 10 2 3 5 7 1 3 4 1 2 3 5 Contactor rating 16 25 40 63 A A A A
Incandescent and halogen lamps Contactor rating 16 25 40 63 A A A A
P (W) IB (A)
60 75 100 150 200 300 0.26 0.32 0.44 0.65 0.87 1.3 25 38 70 100 19 28 50 73 12 18 35 50 10 14 26 37 7 10 18 25
500 1000 2.17 4.4 4 6 10 15 2 3 6 8
Halogen lamps used with transformer Contactor rating 16 25 40 63 A A A A
P (W) IB (A)
60 80 105 150 0.26 0.35 0.45 0.65
Maximum 9 8 6 4 of lamps 14 12 9 6 27 23 18 13 40 35 27 19 IB : value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage. C : unit capacitance for each lamp. IB and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers Characteristics : pages 5/244 and 5/245 References : pages 5/246 and 5/247 Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/248 and 5/249
5/241
Contactor selection for heating circuits (continued)
Modular equipment
5
Modular contactors
Heating (AC-7a)
Single-phase, 2-pole switching
3-phase switching
Heating by resistive elements or by infra-red radiators, convectors or radiators, heating ducts, industrial furnaces. The current peak between the hot and cold states must not exceed 2 to 3 In at the moment of switch-on. Contactor selection according to power and required electrical life
Electrical durability (in operating cycles) Maximum power (kW) 100 x 103 150 x 103 200 x 10 3 500 x 103 10 6 3.5 3 2.2 1 0.8 5.4 8.6 13.6 21.6 3-phase switching 400 V (3-pole) 10 16 26 41 64.8 4.6 7.4 11.6 18.4 9 14 22 35 55.2 3.5 5.6 8.8 14 6.5 10 17 26.5 42 1.6 2.6 4 6.4 3.2 5 7.5 12 19.2 1.2 1.9 3 4.8 2.2 3.5 6 9 14.4 Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 100 A 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 100 A
Single-phase switching 230 V (2-pole)
5/242
Contactor selection for motor control
Modular equipment
5
Modular contactors
Motor control
(AC-7b) Single-phase circuit, 230 V

U
L1
M
L2
3-phase circuit, 400 V

U
L1
V
L2 L3
Contactor selection according to maximum power in kW

230 V single-phase capacitor motor (2-pole) 0.55 1.1 2.2 4 400 V 3-phase motor Contactor rating (Ith) 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
2.2 4 7.5 11
5/243
Characteristics
Modular equipment
Contactor type
GC16 Conforming to IEC 61095 Conforming to VDE 0110 V V kV 500 500 4 in enclosure
GC25
GC40
GC63
GC100
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 10 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Flame resistance Conforming to VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Operation Without derating Without derating Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed C C m
IEC 61095, VDE 0637-3 and IEC 60947-5 for auxiliary contacts NF- USE, VDE, CEBEC, VE Protection against direct finger contact (IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure) TC - 40+ 70 - 5+ 50 (0.851.1 Uc) 3000 30 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 3 gn Conforming to IEC 61095
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits Conventional thermal current (lth) Rated breaking and making capacity Permissible short time rating no current flowing for preceding 15 minutes with y 40 C Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit breaker U y 440 V Average impedance per pole Power dissipated per pole Maximum cabling c.s.a. In AC-7a (heating) In AC-7b (motor control) Up to Of the operating current y 50 C Conforming to IEC 61095 (AC-7b) I rms 400 V 3-phase For 10 s For 30 s gl fuse Circuit-breaker I2t 230 V (at 3 kA rms 400 V prospective) At lth and 50 Hz A A V Hz A A
2, 3 or 4 16 5 25 8.5 40 15 63 25 100
250 two-pole contactors, 415 three and four-pole contactors 400 16 40 25 68 40 120 63 200 100
A A A A2s A2s m W mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
128 40 16 5000 9000 2.5 0.65 6 4 6 1.5 6 4 1.4
200 62 25 10 000 14 000 2.5 1.6 6 4 6 1.5 6 4 1.4
320 100 40 16 000 17 500 2 3.2 25 16 16 4 25 6 3.5
504 157 63 18 000 20 000 2 8 25 16 16 4 25 6 3.5
800 250 100 1 10 35 35 35 10 5
For the above operational currents Flexible cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors
Solid cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Tightening torque Power circuit connections
5/244
Modular equipment
Contactor type
GC16, GC25 single or 2-pole
GC16, GC25 3 or 4-pole GC40, GC63 2-pole
GC40, GC63 3 or 4-pole GC100 2-pole
GC100 4-pole

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits 50 Hz coils ( y 50 C) Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz 50 or 60 Hz Operational Drop-out Inrush Sealed 50/60 Hz Closing "C" Opening "O" V 12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.75 Uc 15 3.8 1.3 1030 1025 106 300 2.5 34 4.6 1.6 53 6.5 2.1 106 13 4.2
VA VA W ms ms
Maximum heat dissipation Operating time
Mechanical durability Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 50 C Maximum Flexible cable cabling c.s.a. without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque
In operating cycles In operating cycles per hour mm 2 1 or 2 conductors
1 conductor 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2
2.5 1.5 1.5
N.m
1.4
Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC 60947-5 Conforming to VDE 0110 For ambient y 50 C Operating cycles Flexible or solid conductor mm 2 N.m V V V A 250 500 500 5 106 2.5 1.4
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Mechanical durability Maximum cabling c.s.a. Tightening torque
5/245
References
Modular equipment

533709
Maximum current rating category AC-7a A 16
No. of poles Number of 17.5 mm modules
Sold in lots of
Weight
GC 2520
1 2 3 4 1 2
1 2
1 1 2 2 1 2
12 12 6 6 12 6
GC 1610pp GC 1620pp GC 1630pp GC 1640pp GC 1611pp GC 1622pp
kg 0.110 0.110 0.230 0.230 0.110 0.230
25
533710
1 2 3 4 1 2
1 2 2 4
1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2
12 12 6 6 12 6 12 6
GC 2510pp GC 2520pp GC 2530pp GC 2540pp GC 2511pp GC 2522pp GC 2502pp GC 2504pp
0.110 0.110 0.230 0.230 0.110 0.230 0.110 0.230
40
GC 4040
5
63
2 3 4 1 2
1 2 2 4
2 3 3 2 3 2 3
6 4 4 6 4 6 4
GC 4020pp GC 4030pp GC 4040pp GC 4011pp GC 4022pp GC 4002pp GC 4004pp
0.230 0.350 0.390 0.230 0.390 0.230 0.390
2 3 4 1 2
1 2 2 4
2 3 3 2 3 2 3
6 4 4 6 4 6 4
GC 6320pp GC 6330pp GC 6340pp GC 6311pp GC 6322pp GC 6302pp GC 6304pp
0.340 0.390 0.390 0.340 0.390 0.340 0.390
100
2 4
3 6
4 2
GC 10020pp GC 10040pp
0.680 0.780
GC 10020
(1) Standard Office): Volts 50 Hz 60 Hz
control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales 12 J5 J6 24 B5 B6 48 E5 E6 110 F5 F6 220/240 M5 M6
5/246
Modular equipment
533715

Number of contacts No. of poles Reference Weight
kg 2 1 1 GAC 0521 0.016
GAC 05pp
533715
GAC 0531
0.016
GAC 0511
0.016
Accessories
Description For use on Number Operational Sold in contactor of voltage lots of modules V 1 1248 1 Unit reference Weight
GAP 2p
Coil suppression blocks comprising 2 RC circuits
GAP 21
kg 0.090
48127
GAP 22
0.090
220240
GAP 23
0.090
Ventilation 1/2 module Clips onto 5 rail Cover plates GAC 5 GA1 Cp
1/2
10
GAC 5
0.015
5
1/2 10 GA1 C7 0.001 1 10 GA1 C6 0.001
Set of sealable terminal covers (10 top parts + 10 bottom parts) GW 254 GW 63p
16 or 25 A 3 or 4 contacts 40 or 63 A 2 contacts 40 or 63 A 3 or 4 contacts
GW 254
0.040
GW 632
0.040
GW 634
0.050
5/247
Dimensions
Modular equipment
Dimensions
Contactors
Common side view GC 1610, 1611, 1620 GC 2502, 2510, 2511, 2520 1 module GC 1622, 1640 GC 2504, 2522, 2530, 2540 2 modules
44,4
81
43,7 60 65
17,5
35
Common side view
GC 4002, 4011, 4020 GC 6302, 6311, 6320 2 modules
GC 4004, 4022, 4030, 4040 GC 6304, 6322, 6330, 6340 3 modules
44,4
81
43,7 60 65
35
52,5
Common side view
GC 10020 3 modules
GC 10040 6 modules
44,4
43,7 60 65
81
54
108
5/248
Dimensions (continued) schemes
Modular equipment
5
Dimensions
Auxiliary contacts
GAC 0511, 0531 and 0521
Coil suppression blocks

GAP 21, 22 and 23
44,4
43,7 60 65
8,75 12,75
43,7 60 65
17,5
Clip-on ventilation 1/2 module

GAC 5
Cover plates
GA1 C6 GA1 C7
44
44,4
81
81
67
11,5
18
11,5
65
54
54
Schemes
Contactors
GC pp10
A1 1
GC pp20
A1 1 3
GC pp30
A1 1 3 5
GC pp40
A1 1 3 5 6 R5 R6 7 R8 R7 8
2 R1 R2
A2
A2
A2
GC pp11
R1 A1 1
GC pp22
R1 R3 A1 1 3
GC pp02
R1 R3 A1
A2
GC pp04
A1 R3 R4
R2
R2
R4
R2
R4
A2
A2
A2
Auxiliary contacts
GAC 0521
13/NO 21/NC
GAC 0531
13/NO 23/NO
GAC 0511
13/NO
14
22
14
24
14/NO
12
A2
5/249
Presentation
Modular equipment
Impulse relays, type GF16
534004
Presentation
GF 16 impulse relays are designed for use in modular enclosures. They feature: b Easy installation v quick clip-on fixing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail, v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals. b Compact size Units have a common depth of 60 mm and width of 18 mm.
GF 16
b v v v
User safety live parts protected against direct finger contact, completely safe operation, state indication on front panel.
Standards
This range of modular impulse relays has been designed taking into account the requirements of international standard IEC 60669-2. This standard is specific to "Impulse relays". Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc.
Functions Modular impulse relays are designed for opening and closing of circuits which are remotely controlled by impulses. The position is mechanically maintained. These impulse relays are used in lighting circuits when there are more than two switching points.
Power switching GF 16 impulse relays have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific lighting supply is required:
5/250
Selection for lighting and heating circuits
Modular equipment
5
Impulse relays, type GF 16
Lighting circuits
Fluorescent lamps with starter
Single fitting Power in W Number of lamps Non corrected 18 70 36 35 58 21 With parallel correction 18 50 36 25 58 16
Twin fitting Power in W Number of lamps
With series correction 2 x 18 56 2 x 36 28 2 x 58 17
Incandescent lamps: filament lamps

Power in W Number of lamps 40 40 60 25 75 20 100 16 200 8
Incandescent lamps: halogen lamps

Power in W Number of lamps 300 5 500 3 1000 1 1500 1
Incandescent lamps: very low voltage halogen lamps

Power in W Number of lamps 20 70 50 28 75 19 100 4
Low pressure sodium vapour lamps

Non corrected Power in W Number of lamps 55 24 90 15 135 10 180 7
High pressure sodium vapour lamps

Non corrected Power in W Number of lamps 250 5 400 3 1000 1
Heating circuits
Single-phase 230 V, 2-pole
Power in kW 3.6
5/251
Characteristics
Modular equipment
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1-5 Conforming to VDE 0110 Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Operation Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 10 ms Without derating Without derating Impulse relay open Impulse relay closed Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Impulse relay open Impulse relay closed C C m V V kV 400 400 4 in enclosure IEC 60669-1 and 60669-2, NF C 61-112 NF-USE, CEBEC, ASE, KEMA, N, S, D, FI, VDE Protection against direct finger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure TC - 40+ 80 - 20+ 50 2000 90 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane Please consult your Regional Sales Office Please consult your Regional Sales Office 4 gn 4 gn
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue y 250 V) Rated operational voltage Conventional thermal current (lth) Permissible short time rating no current flowing for preceding 15 minutes with y 40 C In AC-7a (heating) A V y 50 C For 1 s For 10 s For 30 s Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit-breaker gl fuse Circuit-breaker I2t (at 3 kA rms prospective) At lth and 50 Hz A A A A A A2s m W 1 or 2 16 250 16 320 96 48 16 5000 4 1 Min. 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.4 Max. 6 4 6 4 6 4
Average impedance per pole Power dissipated per pole Maximum cabling c.s.a.
Flexible cable without cable end
1 conductor 2 conductors
Flexible cable with cable end
Tightening torque
Power circuit connections
5/252
Modular equipment

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V 12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office
Control voltage limits ( < 50 C) Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Operating time
V Operating threshold, dual frequency 50/60 Hz Inrush at 50 Hz VA
0.851.1 Uc
19
Closing "C"
ms
70
Opening "O"
ms
70
Minimum impulse time
ms
70
106 operating cycles
Electrical durability AC-21 200 000 operating cycles
AC-22
100 000 operating cycles
Maximum operating rate
Operating cycles per hour
900
Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end 1 or 2 conductors mm 2 2.5
5
1 conductor mm 2 2.5
2 conductors
mm 2
1.5
Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque
1 or 2 conductors
mm 2
1.5
N.m
1.4
5/253
References
Modular equipment
534005
Impulse relays type GF 16

Maximum current rating category AC-1 Composition Coil voltages a 50/60 Hz c Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
A 16
V 12 24
V 6 12 24 48 110
12 12 12 12 12 12
GF 1610J7 GF 1610B7 GF 1610E7 GF 1610F7 GF 1610M7 GF 1610U7
kg 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110
GF 1610 48 110 220 230/240
12 24 48 110 220 230/240
6 12 24 48 110
12 12 12 12 12 12
0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110
12 24 48 110 220 230/240
6 12 24 48 110
12 12 12 12 12 12
0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110
5/254
Dimensions, schemes
Modular equipment
5
Dimensions
GF 1610, GF 1611, GF 1620
81
44 60 64 5,5
18
Schemes
GF 1610
A1 1
GF 1611
A1 R1 1
45
GF 1620
A1 1 2 3 4
A2
R2
A2
A2
5/255
Presentation standards
Modular equipment
5
Dual tariff contactors, type GY
812020
Presentation
GY "Dual tariff" contactors are designed for use in modular panels and enclosures. These contactors feature: b Easy installation v quick clip-on fixing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail, v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals. b Compact size All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in modules of 17.5 mm (width of one module: 17.5 mm). b v v v v User safety use of materials conforming to strictest fire safety standards, live parts protected against direct finger contact, completely safe operation, state indication on front panel.
GY 25
Dual tariff contactors are designed for use with Electricity Supply Authority dual tariffs. They have a 4-position selector switch on the front panel: Stop (O) For switching off the load, e.g. for prolonged periods of absence. The contactor switches automatically during off peak hours as set by the Supply Authority remote control and thus supplies the load, (washing machine, dishwasher, convector heater, water heater) during this period, at an economy rate to the user. In this position, the contactor supplies the load to cater for additional requirements for hot water, heating, etc., but at the standard rate. The contactor returns automatically to the off-peak position at the start of the off-peak period. Facility for setting the contactor to continuous manual operation, ignoring the automation system and the Supply Authority control; setting and locking is achieved by means of a tool, with manual return to the AUTO position.
Off peak Automatic start (A)
Peak time Manual start (I)
Peak time Manual override with lock
Standards
This range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the requirements of international standard IEC 61095. This standard is specific to Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar use. It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the safety of equipment and persons in premises and areas accessible to the public. Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc. Applications "Dual tariff" modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase or 4-phase loads up to 63 A. Power switching GY contactors have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific supply is required: v lighting, v heating, ventilation, v motorised shutters or gates.
5/256
Modular equipment
5
The contactor controls must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block 1 (GAP 21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals y 250 V. When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side, a GAC 5 ventilation 1/2 module 2 must be fitted every 2 contactors.
It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to separate them from electromechanical units by a space equal to one module 3 or by 2 ventilation 1/2 modules GAC 5
5
40C 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 50C 14 A 22 A 36 A 57 A 60 C (1) 13 A 20 A 32 A 50 A
Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the enclosure is > 40 C
Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
(1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be fitted
5/257
Characteristics
Modular equipment
Environment
Type
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 61095 Conforming to VDE 0110 V V kV
GY 16
500 500 4 in enclosure
GY 25
GY 40
GY 63
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Flame resistance Conforming to VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Operation Without derating Without derating Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed
IEC 61095, VDE 0637-3 and IEC 60947-5 for auxiliary contacts NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, VE Protection against direct finger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure TC C C m - 40+ 70 - 5+ 50 (0.851.1 Uc) 3000 30 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 3 gn Conforming to IEC 61095
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-7a (heating) (Ue y 440 V) In AC-7b (motor control) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to Frequency limits Of the operating current Conventional thermal current (lth) Rated breaking and making capacity y 50 C Conforming to IEC 61095 (AC-7b) I rms 400 V 3-phase For 10 s For 30 s A A V Hz A A
2, 3 or 4 16 5 25 8.5 40 15 63 25
250 - 2-pole contactors, 415 - 3 and 4-pole contactors 400 16 40 25 68 40 120 63 200
Short time rating with no current flow for the previous previous 15 minutes with y 40 C Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit breaker U y 440 V gl fuse 230V Circuit breaker I 2t (at 3 kA rms prospective) 400V Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz Power dissipated per pole Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque
A A
128 40
200 62
320 100
504 157
A A2s A2s m W
16 5000 9000 2.5 0.65
25 10 000 14 000 2.5 1.6
40 16 000 17 500 2 3.2
63 18 000 20 000 2 8
For the above operational currents 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors Power circuit connections
6 4 6 1.5 6 4 1.4
6 4 6 1.5 6 4 1.4
25 16 16 4 25 6 3.5
25 16 16 4 25 6 3.5
5/258
Modular equipment

Type GY 16, GY 25 single or 2-pole GY 16, GY 25 GY 40, GY 63 3 or 4-pole 3 or 4-pole GY 40, GY 63 2-pole 12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office
Rated control 50 or 60 Hz circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( y 50 C) 50 Hz coils Operational Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz Inrush Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time 50/60 Hz Closing "C" Opening "O" In operating cycles
0.851.1 Uc 0.20.75 Uc
VA VA W ms ms
15 3.8 1.3 10 ... 30 10 ... 25 106 300
34 4.6 1.6
53 6,5 2.1
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour at ambient temperature y 50 C Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors without cable end Flexible cable 1 conductor with cable end 2 conductors Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque 1 or 2 conductors
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m
2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.4
Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC 60947-5 Conforming to VDE 0110 Conventional thermal current (Ith) Mechanical durability Maximum cabling c.s.a. Tightening torque For ambient y 50 C In operating cycles Flexible or solid conductor mm 2 N.m V V V A 250 500 500 5 106 2.5 1.4
5/259
References
Modular equipment

Maximum current rating category AC-7a A 16 No. of poles Number of 17.5 mm modules Sold in lots of Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
812024
2 4 1
1 1
1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3 2 3 3
12 6 12 12 6 6 12 6 4 4 6 4 4
GY 1620pp GY 1640pp GY 1611pp GY 2520pp GY 2530pp GY 2540pp GY 2511pp GY 4020pp GY 4030pp GY 4040pp GY 6320pp GY 6330pp GY 6340pp
kg 0.110 0.230 0.110 0.110 0.230 0.230 0.110 0.230 0.350 0.390 0.340 0.390 0.390
25
2 3
GY 2520
4 1
812023
40
2 3 4
63
2 3
4 GY 6340
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 12 24 48 110 220/240 50 Hz J5 B5 E5 F5 M5 60 Hz J6 B6 E6 F6 M6
5/260
References
Modular equipment
812030

Number of contacts Number of poles Reference Weight
1 2
GAC 0521 GAC 0531 GAC 0511
kg 0.016 0.016 0.016
GAP 2p
812029 812029
Accessories
Description For use on contactor Number of modules 1 Operational voltage in V 1248 48127 Sold in lots of 1 1 1 Unit reference GAP 21 GAP 22 GAP 23 Weight kg 0.090 0.090 0.090
Coil suppression blocks comprising 2 RC circuits
GAC 5
522643
GA1 Cp
220240
Ventilation 1/2 module clips onto 5 rail Cover plates GW 254
1/2
10
GAC 5
0.015
1/2 1
10 10
GA1 C7 GA1 C6
0.001 0.001
522644
Set of sealable terminal covers (10 top parts + 10 bottom parts)
16 or 25 A 2 3 or 4 contacts 40 or 63 A 2 2 contacts 40 or 63 A 3 3 or 4 contacts
1 1 1
GW 254 GW 632 GW 634
0.040 0.040 0.050
GW 63p
5/261
Dimensions
Modular equipment
Dual tariff contactors

GY 1611, 1620 GY 2511, 2520 1 module GY 1640 GY 2530, 2540 2 modules
Common side view
44,4
81
43,7 64 69
17,5
35
Common side view
GY 4020 GY 6320 2 modules
GY 4030, 4040 GY 6330, 6340 3 modules
44,4
5
43,7 64 69 35 52,5
81
Dimensions and schemes : page 5/263
5/262
Modular equipment
5
Dimensions
Auxiliary contacts GAC 0511, 0531 and 0521 Coil suppression block GAP 21, 22 and 23
44,4
43,7 60 65
Clip-on ventilation 1/2 module GAC 5
8,75 12,75
43,7 60 65
Cover plates GA1 C6
17,5
GA1 C7
44
44,4
81
81
67
11,5
18
11,5
65
54
54
5
Schemes
Contactors GY pp20
A1 1 3
GY pp30
A1 1 3 5
GY pp40
A1 1 3 5 7
GY pp11
A1 R1 R2 1 2
A2
A2
A2
Auxiliary contacts GAC 0521

13/NO 21/NC
GAC 0531
13/NO 23/NO
GAC 0511
13/NO
14
22
14
24
14/NO
12
A2
5/263
Contents
6 - Protection components Relays
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 6/2 b Motor protection v General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4
k thermal overload relays

b Adjustable from 0,11 to 16 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/8
3-pole thermal overload relays TeSys d

b Description, characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/12 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/16 b Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/19 b Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/20
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays LR9 D

b Description, characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/14 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/17 b Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/19 b Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/20
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays LR9 F

b Presentation, characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/24 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/28 b Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/30
b Dimensions, schemes, setting-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/32
Electronic over current relays LR97 D and LT47

b Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/34 b Curves, characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/35 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/38 b Dimensions, mounting, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/39
Multifunction protection relays LT6 P

b Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/40 b Characteristics, curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/42 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/48 b Dimensions, mounting, application schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/50
Thermistor protection units for use with PTC thermistor probes, LT3 S
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 6/58 b General, characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/60 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/64 b Dimensions, schemes, setting-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/66 b Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/67
6/0
Single-pole magnetic over current relays RM1 XA

b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/68 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/69 b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/71
6/1
Selection guide
Relays
Applications
Standard motor protection
Line protection
Protection
Motor overload Stalling Phase failure
Communication
Associated with contactor type
LC1 K, LP1 K
LC1 D
LC1 F
Motor current (In)
0.1116 A
0.1150 A
30630 A
Relay type references
LR2 K
LRp D
LR9 F
Pages
6/10
6/18 and 6/19
6/28 and 6/29
6/2
Machine protection
Standard motor protection
Motor protection and control Protection of resistors, bearings, capacitors Protection
Specific motor protection
Protection of slip ring motors and of circuits without current peaks
Overtorque Mechanical shocks Locked rotor Phase failure
Overtorque Mechanical shocks
Strong overcurrent Stalling
Frequent starting Harsh environments
Thermal overload Phase imbalance and phase failure Stalling Reversal of phase rotation Underload and protracted starting time Earth fault Too low power factor, cos
Yes
All contactors
0.338 A
0.360 A
0.7630 A
Unlimited
15 A
LR97 D
LT47
RM1 XA
LT3 S
LT6
6/38
6/69 and 6/70
6/64
6/48 and 6/49
6/3
General
Motor protection
There are many possible causes of electric motor failure. One of the most common, and which is often accidental, is the utilisation of motors beyond the operating limits defined by the manufacturer or in abnormal ambient conditions. A statistical survey carried out in Britain, covering 9000 incidents of motor failure, gave the following results:
Overloads Pollution (example: corrosive atmosphere) Phase failure Bearing failure Ageing (example: ambient temperature too high) Rotor faults Miscellaneous 30 % 19 % 14 % 13 % 10 % 5% 9%
These faults are related to motors with a power rating of 37 kW or more. An examination of the above results shows that, in more than 50 % of cases, the fault is due to the effects of heating. Leaving aside the replacement of wearing parts, such as bearings, slip rings, brushes, etc., the life of a rotating machine is linked to that of its insulation. Provided that the temperature rise limit is not exceeded, the life expectancy of insulating materials is extremely long. It is decreased by approximately one half for an excess temperature rise of 10 C. The operating temperature limit TL of an insulating material depends on the type of material and is the sum of the ambient air temperature AT (cooling air), the temperature rise limit TRL and an additional temperature rise value ATR considered necessary because the measurement of winding resistance variation does not determine the temperature of the hottest part of the motor winding, but only gives an average value for temperature rise. The diagram below defines the standardised limits for different classes of insulation. In all cases, the normal ambient cooling air temperature is fixed at 40 C.
ATR TRL
180 165 155 140 130 125 120 115 100 80 60 40
0 E B F H Insulation classes
6/4
AT
20
TL
General (continued)
Motor protection
The rated power of a motor corresponds to its temperature rise limit for an ambient temperature of 40 C. The standard temperature rise limits for the different parts of a machine are given in the following table, which is an extract from publication IEC 60034-1. Temperature rise limit in C
Insulation class B F 80 100 90 (1) 60 (2) H 125 100 (1) 60 (2)
Insulated winding (measurement by resistance) Commutators and slip-rings 80 Bearings
60
When a motor is used at an ambient air temperature other than the normal value, its temperature rise limit should be modified in order to maintain the same maximum temperature limit. The result is that the motor operational power is no longer the same as its rated power. Also, the altitude of the installation, if this is above 1000 m, affects the cooling and increases the temperature rise. The following table gives the ratio between operational power and rated power, according to the operating conditions, for a given ambient temperature. It corresponds to insulation class B. Operational power / Rated power in watts
Altitude m 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Ambient temperature 30 C 35 C 40 C 1.07 1.04 1.00 1.04 1.01 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.83 1.01 0.98 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.87 0.83 0.78 45 C 0.96 0.93 0.90 0.87 0.84 0.80 0.75 50 C 0.92 0.89 0.86 0.84 0.80 0.76 0.72 55 C 0.87 0.84 0.82 0.79 0.76 0.72 0.68 60 C 0.82 0.79 0.77 0.75 0.71 0.68 0.64
The values shown in the above table are for guidance only. In effect, the derating of a motor depends on its size, insulation class, method of construction (self-ventilated or forced ventilation, degree of protection IP 23, IP 44, etc.), and varies according to the manufacturer. Also, in addition to the normal ambient conditions, the rated power of a motor is defined by the manufacturer for continuous duty S1. This covers continuous operation of sufficient duration to enable the motor to reach a steady temperature. It is this value of rated power that is normally shown on the motor plate. There are other standardised types of duty, such as temporary duty S2, or intermittent periodic duty type S3, S4 and S5, for which the motor manufacturer defines an operational power appropriate to each and different from the rated power.
(1) For temperature rise limits of 90 C and 100 C the brushes must be selected with the agreement of the motor manufacturer. (2) These limit values may be exceeded, depending on the quality of the grease used and the applied loads.
6/5
General
Motor protection
Selection of thermal protection

To optimise the life of a motor, it is important to select the appropriate thermal protection which will prevent operation under abnormal heating conditions, whilst ensuring maximum continuity in the operation of the driven machine or associated plant by avoiding unnecessary stoppages. It is essential to know the real operating conditions: b ambient temperature, b operating altitude, b type of standard duty, in order to determine the operational values for the motor (power, current) and to be able to select efficient thermal protection. These operational values are given by the motor manufacturer. Various types of thermal protection devices are available: b thermal overload relays or thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers, b thermistor protection relays, with PTC thermistor probes (1) b multifunction relays.
Protection by thermal overload relay

A conventional thermal overload relay protects the motor in the following two cases: b overload, by monitoring the current drawn by each phase, b phase imbalance or failure, by its differential mechanism. It therefore covers 44% of the cases of motor failure. This type of protection relay is widely used, is extremely reliable and is a relatively low cost device. It is particularly recommended if there is a risk of rotor locking. Nevertheless, it has the disadvantage of not taking into account, with sufficient accuracy, the thermal state of the motor. The operating principle of this type of device is, in fact, based on the bending of bimetal strips caused by the current drawn by the motor. As the thermal inertias of the overload relay and motor are different, in some cases it may be possible to restart the motor following an overload trip even though its temperature is still too high.
Protection by instantaneous electronic over current relays

LR97 D and LT47 electronic over current relays have been developed to satisfy machine protection requirements. By monitoring the current through the current transformers with which they are equipped, they provide protection against: b overtorque or mechanical shock, b locked rotor (mechanical locking under steady state conditions), b phase failure. These relays are particularly recommended for providing mechanical protection on machines with: b high resistive torque, b high inertia, b and with strong probability of locking under steady state conditions. They do not incorporate a thermal overload memory and can therefore be used to provide motor protection in severe duty applications, such as: b long starting times, b frequent starting. These relays have definite time characteristics: current threshold and time based function Because of their two separate time settings "D-Time" (starting time) and "O-Time" (trip time during steady state), these over current relays can be combined with the motor-starter function.
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient
6/6
General (continued)
Motor protection
Resistance ()
4000
Protection by PTC thermistor relay

Better monitoring of the internal motor temperature can be provided by PTC thermistor probes, embedded in the motor windings during manufacture, associated with a thermistor protection relay (type LT3 S). PTC probes are resistors with a positive temperature coefficient. Their resistance value increases very rapidly when their temperature reaches the Nominal Operating Temperature threshold, indicated by NOT on the curve opposite. Their small size means that they have a low thermal inertia and can rapidly follow the temperature variations of their surroundings.
NOT -20
1330
550 250
100 50
NOT -5 NOT NOT +5
-20
Temperature (C)
NOT +15
This is the only solution for motor protection in applications involving severe starting/ stopping (duties S3, S4, S5) and, likewise, for applications where the motor could be inadvertently overcooled. Problems other than those due to thermal effect can also arise: earth fault, abnormal overheating of bearings, etc. More comprehensive protection can be obtained: b either by associating several types of protection device (example: thermal overload relay + thermistor protection relay + earth fault relay), b or by using a multifunction protection relay type LT6.
Markings complied with by universal probes Mark A (standard EC 60034-11-1A)
Protection relays
Relay type Thermal Over overload (1) current LR2 K, LRD, LR97D LR9 F Over current LT47 For use with PTC probes LT3 Multifunction LT6
Causes of overheating
Slight overload
Locked rotor
Underload
6
With PTC probes With PTC probes With PTC probes
Supply phase failure Ventilation fault
Abnormal rise in ambient temperature Shaft bearing seizure Insulation fault
Protracted starting time
Severe duty
With PTC probes
Ideally suited Possible solution Not suitable (no protection) (1) Or motor circuit-breaker type GV2 ME, for example.
6/7
Characteristics
k thermal overload relays, adjustable from 0.11 to 16 A
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to IEC 60068 (DIN 50016) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage For normal operation (IEC 60947) Operating limit Without derating C C C m IEC 60947, NF C 63-650, VDE 0660, BS 4941 UL, CSA TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct finger contact - 40...+ 70 - 20...+ 55 (without derating) - 30...+ 60 (with derating) (1) 2000 Vertical axis Horizontal axis
Without derating Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to NF F 16-101 and 16-102 Shock resistance, hot state Conforming to IEC 60068, (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) N/C contact Conforming to IEC 60068, N/O contact Vibration resistance, Conforming to IEC 60068, hot state N/C contact 5 to 300 Hz Conforming to IEC 60068, N/O contact Safe separation of Conforming to VDE 0106 circuits and IEC 60536 Cabling Screw clamp terminals Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Philips head n 2 - 6 Self-extinguishing material V1 Conforming to requirement 2 10 gn 10 gn 2 gn 2 gn VLSV (2), up to 400 V Minimum 1 x 1.5 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.34 0.8 Directly under the contactor or reversing contactor Maximum 2x4 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
With derating (1)
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Maximum to IEC 60947 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
Tightening torque Mounting Connections
Made automatically when mounted under the contactor, as follows : b contactor terminal A2 connected to overload relay terminal 96 on all products, b contactor terminal 14 connected to overload relay terminal 95 on products with 3 P + N/O. When using 3 P + N/C, or 4 P contactors, or the N/O auxiliary contact marked 13-14, at a voltage other than the coil voltage, break off the link marked 14.

Number of contacts Conventional thermal current Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947, VDE 0660. gG fuse or circuit-breaker GB2 CBpp a.c. A A 1 N/C + 1 N/O 6 6 max.
Maximum power of the controlled contactor coils (sealed) (Occasional operating d.c. cycles of contact 95-96)
V VA V W V V
24 100 24 100 690 250
48 200 48 100
110 400 110 50
220/230 600 220 45
400 600 250 35
415/440 600
600/690 600
a.c., category AC-15 d.c., category DC-13
(1) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Very low safety voltage.
Schemes : page 6/11
6/8
Electrical characteristics of the power circuit

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to BS 4941 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to VDE 0110 group C Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 V V V V V kV Hz W 690 690 690 750 600 6 Up to 400 2
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits of the operational current Power dissipated per pole
Sensitivity to phase failure Reset Signalling Reset-Stop function Conforming to IEC 60947 Manual or automatic On front of relay Yes Selected by means of a lockable and sealable switch on the front of the relay Trip indicator Pressing the Reset-Stop button : - actuates the N/C contact - has no effect on the N/O contact Pressing the Test button enables : - checking of the control circuit wiring - simulation of overload tripping (actuation of both N/C and N/O contacts, and of the trip indicator) See pages 1/18 and 1/28
Test function
By pushbutton
Short-circuit protection and coordination
Tripping curves
Average operating time related to multiples of the current setting (Class 10 A) Balanced 3-phase operation, from cold state Balanced operation with 2 phases only, from cold state
Time 2h 1h 20 min 1h Time 2h 1h 20 min 1h
40 min 20 min 10 min 6 min 4 min 2 min 1 min 40 s 20 s 10 s 6s 4s 2s 1s
40 min 20 min 10 min 6 min 4 min 2 min 1 min 40 s 20 s 10 s 6s 4s
1 2
1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15
2s 1s 1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4
1 Setting : at lower end of scale

5 6 8 10 15 X setting current (Ir)
2 Setting : at upper end of scale
X setting current (Ir)
Schemes : page 6/11
6/9
References
3-pole relays with screw clamp terminals

These overload relays are designed for the protection of motors. They are compensated and phase failure sensitive. Resetting can either be manual or automatic. Direct mounting: under the contactor for versions with screw clamp terminals only; pre-wired terminals, see pages 6/8 and 6/11. Separate mounting: using terminal block LA7 K0064 (see below). On the front face of the overload relay: b selection of reset mode: Manual (marked H) or Automatic (marked A), b red pushbutton: Trip Test function, b blue pushbutton: Stop and manual Reset, b yellow trip flag indicator: overload relay tripped. Protection by magnetic circuit-breaker type GV2 LE, see pages 1/18 and 1/28. Class 10 A (the standard specifies a tripping time of between 2 and 10 seconds at 7.2 In)
Relay setting range Fuses to be used with selected relay Maximum rating Type aM gG BS88 A A A 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 4 6 8 10 16 20 0.5 1 1.6 2 4 6 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 6 6 10 16 16 20 20 25 32 Reference Weight
535738
A 0.110.16 0.160.23 0.230.36 0.360.54 0.540.8 LR2 K031 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7
LR2 K0301 LR2 K0302 LR2 K0303 LR2 K0304 LR2 K0305 LR2 K0306 LR2 K0307 LR2 K0308 LR2 K0310 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0316 LR2 K0321 LR2 K0322
kg 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145
3.75.5 5.58 811.5 1014 1216

535739
Overload relays for unbalanced loads

Class 10 A: To order, replace the prefix LR2 by LR7 in the references selected from above (only applicable to overload relays LR2 K0305 to LR2 K0322). Example: LR7 K0308.
Accessory
Description Terminal block for separate clip-on mounting of the overload relay on 35 mm 7 rail Type of connection Screw clamp Reference LA7 K0064 Weight kg 0.100
LA7 K0064
Schemes: page 6/11
6/10
6
LR2 K
Direct mounting beneath the contactor Separate mounting with terminal block LA7 K0064 on 35 mm 7 rail (AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200)
8
=
35
50
38 58 116
75 c
80
45
65
45
AM1 DP200 DE200 c 78.5 86
Schemes
LR2 K LR2 K + LCp K
Pre-wiring scheme
A H 1 3 5 A1 13 13 KM1 14 95 97 95 O 96 96 KM1 A1 A2 97 95
Reset/stop
96
98
96
Test
98
A2
14
95
LR7 K
A H 1 3 5
Note : If pre-wiring is not required, break off the 2 links located on the thermal overload relay.
95
96
Test Reset/stop
98
97
6/11
Description, characteristics

6
3-pole thermal overload relays, model d
Description
1 6 2, 5 4 3 7
Model d 3-pole thermal overload relays are designed to protect a.c. circuits and motors against overloads, phase failure, long starting times and prolonged stalling of the motor. 1 Adjustment dial Ir. 2 Test button. Operation of the Test button allows: - checking of control circuit wiring, - simulation of relay tripping (actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts). 3 Stop button. Actuates the N/C contact; does not affect the N/O contact. 4 Reset button. 5 Trip indicator. 6 Setting locked by sealing the cover. 7 Selector for manual or automatic reset. Relays LRD 01 to 35 are supplied with the selector in the manual position, protected by a cover. Deliberate action is required to move it to the automatic position.
RESET 3 5 4 3,5 0 1 STOP
LRD 0135
1
37
A
41
TEST
R A E S E T
5 3 4 2 6
98
LRD 33224369, LR2 D
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, NF C 63-650 VDE 0660, BS 4941 CSA, UL, Sichere Trennung, PTB except LAD 4: UL, CSA. Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X TH - 60+ 70 - 20+ 60
Operating positions without derating Shock resistance Vibration resistance Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Surge withstand

Conventional thermal current Maximum sealed current a.c. supply consumption of the operating coils of controlled contactors d.c. supply (Occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Short-circuit protection By gG, BS fuses. Maximum rating or by GB2 circuit-breaker Connection to screw clamp terminals (Min/max c.s.a.) Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors without cable end Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors with cable end Solid cable 1 or 2 conductors without cable end Tightening torque Connection to spring terminals (Min/max c.s.a.) Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors without cable end Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors with cable end A V VA V W A 5 24 100 24 100 5 48 200 48 100 110 400 110 50 220 600 220 45 380 600 440 25 600 600
6/12
46 50
NO 97 95
NC 96
Conforming to VDE 0106 Conforming to IEC 60068 Storage Normal operation, without derating (IEC 60947-4-1) Minimum and maximum operating temperatures (with derating) In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-7 Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60255-5 Conforming to IEC 60801-5
C C
- 40+ 70
Any position 15 gn - 11 ms 6 gn kV kV 6 6
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm2 mm2
1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1.7 1/2.5 1/2.5
Dimensions, mounting: pages 6/20 to 6/22
Schemes: page 6/23
Characteristics

Relay type
LRD 01 16, LR3 D01 D16 Conforming to UL 508, IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to UL, CSA 10 A V V kV Hz A mm 2 mm 2 690 600 6 0400 0.113 1.5/10 1/4
LR D15pp
LRD 21 35, LR3 D21 D35 10 A 690 600 6 0400 1238 1.5/10 1/6 except LRD 21: 1/4 1.5/10 except LRD 21: 1/6 2.5 1.5/4 1.5/4
LRD 3322 33696 LR3 D3322 D33696 10 A 1000 600 6 0400 17104 4/35 4/35
LR2 D35pp
LRD 4365 4369
Electrical characteristics of power circuit

Tripping class Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 20 20 10 A 1000 600 except LRD 4369 6 0400 80140 4/50 4/35
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits Of the operating current Setting range Depending on model Connection to screw clamp terminals (Min/max c.s.a.) Flexible cable 1 conductor without cable end Flexible cable 1 conductor with cable end Solid cable without cable end 1 conductor
mm 2
1/6
4/35
4/50
Tightening torque Connection to spring terminals (Min/max c.s.a.) Flexible cable 1 conductor without cable end Solid cable 1 conductor without cable end
N.m mm 2 mm 2
1.7 1.5/4 1.5/4
1.85
Temperature compensation Tripping threshold Sensitivity to phase failure Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 C A - 20+ 60 - 30+ 60 - 30+ 60 1.14 0.06 In Tripping current 30 % of In on one phase, the others at In - 20+ 60
Tripping curves
Average operating times related to multiples of the setting current
Time Hours Class 10 A Hours Time Class 20 A
2 1 40 20
2 1 40 20
Minutes
10 4 2 1 40 20
Minutes Seconds
10 4 2 1 40 20 10 4 2 1 0,8 0,8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20 x the setting current (Ir)
Seconds
10 4 2 1 0,8 0,8 1 2 4
1 2 3
6 10 17 20 x the setting current (Ir)
1 2 3
1 Balanced operation, 3-phase, from cold state. 2 2-phase operation, from cold state. 3 Balanced operation, 3-phase, after a long period at the set current (hot state).
Schemes: page 6/23
6/13
Description, characteristics

6
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, model LR9 D
Description
1 2 5 4 3
98 NO 97 95 NC 96
LR9 D electronic thermal overload relays are designed for use with contactors LC1 D115 and D150. In addition to the protection provided by model d thermal overload relays (see page 6/12) they offer the following special features: b protection against phase imbalance, b choice of starting class, b protection of unbalanced circuits, b protection of single-phase circuits, b alarm function to avoid tripping by load shedding.
107
Ir(A) 127
90
150
6
LR9 D5367D5569
7 8 2
Class Ir(A) 20 107 127 + 90 150 10
24 V - / 103 104
Load
5 4 3
Alarm 98 NO 97 95 NC 96
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 6
LR9 D67 and D69
Adjustment dial Ir Test button Stop button Reset button Trip indicator Setting locked by sealing the cover Class 10/Class 20 selector switch Selector for balanced load /unbalanced load
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device (conforming to IEC 60255-8) Maximum operating altitude Operating positions without derating Shock resistance Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60529 and VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Normal operation Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60255-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 IEC 60947-4-1, 255-8, 255-17, VDE 0660 and EN 60947-4-1 UL 508 , CSA 22-2 IP 20 on front panel with protective covers LA9 D11570p or D11560p "TH - 40+ 85 - 20+ 55 (1) 2000 Any position 13 gn - 11 ms 2 gn - 5 to 300 Hz kV kV kV V/m 6 6 8 10
C C m
Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Surge withstand Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radio-frequency Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 conducted disturbance and NF C 46-022 Resistance to fast transient currents Electromagnetic compatibility Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 Draft EN 50081-1 and 2, EN 50082-2
kV
2 Meet requirements
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Conventional thermal current Maximum sealed current a.c. supply consumption of the operating coils of controlled contactors d.c. supply (Occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Short-circuit protection By gG or BS fuses or by circuit-breaker GB2 Connection 1 or 2 conductors Flexible cable without cable end Tightening torque A V VA V W A mm2 N.m 5 24 100 24 100 5 Minimum c.s.a.: 1 Maximum c.s.a.: 2.5 1.2 48 200 48 100 110 400 110 50 220 600 220 45 380 600 440 25 600 600
(1) For operating temperatures up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes: page 6/23
6/14

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, model LR9 D
Relay type
LR9 D A V V kV Hz A mm N.m 10 or 20 1000 600 8 5060. For other frequencies, please consult your Regional Sales Office (1) 60150 20 M8 18

Tripping class Conforming to UL 508, IEC 60947-4-1 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits Of the operating current Setting range Depending on model Power circuit connections Width of terminal lug Clamping screw Tightening torque
Temperature compensation Tripping thresholds C Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Alarm Tripping Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 d.c. supply No-load A A - 20+ 70 1.05 0.06 In 1.12 0.06 In Tripping in 4 s 20 % in the event of phase failure 24 1732 y5 0150 Self protected y 2.5 0.51.5 0.45
Sensitivity to phase failure Rated supply voltage Supply voltage limits Current consumption Switching capacity Protection Voltage drop Cabling Tightening torque
Alarm circuit characteristics

V V mA mA
Short-circuit and overload V Closed state Flexible cable without cable end mm 2 N.m
(1) For applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft starters or variable speed drives, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
LR9 D tripping curve

Tripping time in seconds 1000
Average operating times related to multiples of the setting current.
100
10
1 2
1
1,12
7 8 9 10 11 12 x times the setting current (Ir)
1 Cold state curve 2 Hot state curve
Schemes: page 6/23
6/15
References

810464
Differential thermal overload relays for use with fuses

b Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset, b with relay trip indicator, b for a.c. or d.c.
Relay setting range (A) 0.100.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1624 2332 3038 1725 2332 3040 3750 4865 5570 6380 80104 80104 95120 110140 80104 95120 110140 0.100.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1624 Fuses to be used with selected relay aM (A) gG (A) BS88 (A) 0.25 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 6 8 12 12 16 20 25 40 40 25 40 40 63 63 80 80 100 125 125 160 100 125 160 0.25 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 6 8 12 12 16 20 25 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 10 16 20 20 25 35 50 63 80 50 63 100 100 100 125 125 160 200 200 250 160 200 250 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 10 16 20 20 25 35 50 6 10 16 16 20 20 25 32 50 63 80 50 63 80 100 100 125 125 160 160 200 200 160 200 200 6 10 16 16 20 20 25 32 50 For use with contactor LC1 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D12D38 D18D38 D25D38 D25D38 D32 and D38 D40D95 D40D95 D40D95 D40D95 D50D95 D50D95 D65D95 D80 and D95 D115 and D150 D115 and D150 D150 (2) (2) (2) D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D12D38 D18D38 D25D38 Reference Weight kg 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.900 0.900 0.900 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
Class 10 A (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

LRD 08pp LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD LRD 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 10 12 14 16 21 22 32 35 3322 3353 3355 3357 3359 3361 3363 3365 4365 4367 4369 33656 33676 33696 013 023 033 043 053 063 073 083 103 123 143 163 213 223
810465
LRD 21pp
810466
LRD 33pp
533573
Class 10 A (1) with spring terminal connections (only for direct mounting on the contactor)
LRD 083pp
Class 10 A (1) with connection by lug-clamps Select overload relay with screw clamp terminals or connectors from the table above and add one of the following suffixes: b figure 6 for relays LRD 01 to LRD 35, b A66 for relays LRD 3322 to LRD 3365. The remaining references are suitable, as standard, for use with lug-clamps.
Thermal overload relays for use with unbalanced loads

Class 10 A (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals In the references selected above, change LRD (except LRD 4ppp) to LR3 D. Example: LRD 01 becomes LR3 D01 .
Thermal overload relays for use on 1000 V supplies

Class 10 A (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals For relays LRD 06 to LRD 35 only, for an operating voltage of 1000 V, and only for independent mounting, the reference becomes LRD 33ppA66. Example: LRD 12 becomes LRD 3312A66. Order an LA7 D3064 terminal block separately, see page 6/19.
(1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current I R : class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds. (2) Independent mounting Characteristics: pages 6/12 to 6/15 Dimensions, mounting: pages 6/20 to 6/22 Schemes: page 6/23
6/16

810468
Differential thermal overload relays for use with fuses

b Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset, b with relay trip indicator, b for a.c. or d.c.
Relay setting range (A) LRD 15pp 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1725 2328 2532 1725 2332 3040 3750 4865 5570 6380 Fuses to be used with selected relay aM (A) gG (A) BS88 (A) 6 8 12 16 16 25 32 40 40 32 40 50 63 80 100 100 10 16 20 20 25 35 50 63 63 50 63 100 100 125 125 160 16 16 20 25 25 40 50 63 63 50 63 80 100 100 125 125 For use with contactor LC1 D09D32 D09D32 D09D32 D09D32 D12D32 D18D32 D25 and D32 D25 and D32 D25 and D32 D40D95 D40D95 D40D95 D50D95 D50D95 D65D95 D80 and D95 Reference Weight
Class 20 (1) with connection by screw clamp terminals

LRD 1508 LRD 1510 LRD 1512 LRD 1514 LRD 1516 LRD 1521 LRD 1522 LRD 1530 LRD 1532 LR2 D3522 LR2 D3553 LR2 D3555 LR2 D3557 LR2 D3559 LR2 D3561 LR2 D3563 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535
810470
LR2 D35pp
Electronic differential thermal overload relays for use with fuses

b Compensated relays, with relay trip indicator, b for a.c., b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (2).
Relay setting range (A) Fuses to be used with selected relay aM (A) gG (A) For direct mounting beneath contactor LC1 D115 and D150 D115 and D150 D115 and D150 D115 and D150 Reference Weight
Class 10 or 10A (1) with connection using bars or connectors

60100 90150 60100 90150 100 160 125 200 160 250 160 250 LR9 D5367 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5567 LR9 D5569 0.885 0.885 0.885 0.885
Class 20 (3) with connection using bars or connectors
Electronic thermal overload relays for use with balanced or unbalanced loads
b Compensated relays, b with separate outputs for alarm and tripping.
Relay setting range (A) Fuses to be used with selected relay aM (A) gG (A) For direct mounting beneath contactor LC1 Reference Weight
Class 10 or 20 (1) selectable with connection using bars or connectors

60100 100 160 D115 and D150 LR9 D67 0.900 90150 160 250 D115 and D150 LR9 D69 0.900 (1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR : class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds, class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds, class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds. (2) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 5/74).
Other versions
Thermal overload relays for resistive circuits in category AC-1. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes: page 6/23
6/17
References

6/18

Accessories

Description
533574
For use with LC1 D09D18 LC1 D25D38 LRD 0135 and LR3 D01D35 LRD 150832 LRD 3ppp, LR3 D3ppp, LR2 D35pp LRD 3ppp, LR3 D3ppp, LRD 35 pp
Pre-wiring kit allowing direct connection of the N/C contact of relay LRD 0135 or LR3 D01D35 to the contactor Terminal block (2) for clip-on mounting on 35 mm rail (AM1 DP200) or screw fixing; for fixing centres, see pages 6/20 to 6/22 Terminal block adapter for mounting a relay beneath an LC1 D115 or D150 contactor Mounting plates (4) for screw fixing on 110 mm centres
Sold in lots of 10 10 1 1 1 1
Unit reference LAD 7C1 (1) LAD 7C2 (1) LAD 7B106 LAD 7B105 LA7 D3064 (3) LA7 D3058 (3)
Weight kg 0.002 0.003 0.100 0.100 0.370 0.080
LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35, LRD 150832 LRD 3ppp, LR3 D3ppp, LR2 D35pp All relays except LRD 0135 and LR3 D01D35 (5) All relays except LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35 and LR9 D LRD 0135 and LR3 D01D35 All relays except LRD 0135 and LR3 D01D35 LR9 D
10 1 100 1 10 1 1 2
DX1 AP25 LA7 D902 LA7 D903 LA9 D91 LA7 D901 LAD 703p (7) (8) LA7 D03p (7) LA9 F103
0.065 0.130 0.001 0.001 0.005 0.090 0.090 0.560
Marker holder snap-in Bag of 400 labels (blank, self-adhesive, 7 x 16 mm) Stop button locking device LAD 7Cp Remote stop or electrical reset device (6) Remote tripping or electrical reset device (6) Block of insulated terminals
533575
Remote control
Reset function
Description By flexible cable (length = 0.5 m) For use with LRD 0135 and LR3 D01D35 All relays except LRD 0135 and LR3 D01D35 Sold in lots of 1 1 Unit reference LAD 7305 (8) LA7 D305 Weight kg 0.075 0.075
"Stop" and/or "Reset" functions

LAD 7B106 The terminal protection shroud must be removed and the following 3 products Adapter All relays except LRD 0135 and for door mounting LR3 D01D35 Operating heads Stop All relays for spring return pushbutton Reset All relays must be ordered separately: 1 LA7 D1020 1 1 XB5 AL84101 XB5 AA86102 0.005 0.027 0.027
(1) These pre-wiring kits cannot be used with reversing contactors. (2) Terminal blocks are supplied with terminals protected against direct finger contact and screws in the open, "ready-to-tighten" position. (3) To order a terminal block for connection by lugs, the reference becomes LA7 D30646. (4) Do not forget to order the terminal block corresponding to the type of relay. (5) For LRD 0135 , see page 5/75. (6) The time for which the coil of remote tripping or electrical resetting device LA7 D03 or LAD 703 can remain energised depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest time; 10 s pulse duration with 90 s rest time; maximum pulse duration 20 s with a rest time of 300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms. (7) Reference to be completed by adding the code indicating control circuit voltage. Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 12 24 48 96 110 220/230 380/400 415/440 50/60 Hz B E F M Q N Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA c J B E DD F M Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W. (8) Not compatible with 3-pole relays fitted with spring terminals.
Illustrations: page 6/18
6/19
Dimensions

Thermal overload relays, model d
LRD 0135
Direct mounting beneath contactors with screw clamp connections
LRD 150832
Direct mounting beneath contactors with screw clamp connections
LRD 013353
Direct mounting beneath contactors with spring terminal connections
70
45
92 c
45
66
LC1 b c D09D18 D25D38 123 137 See pages 5/82 and 5/83 LC1 b c e a D09 18 90 97 53 a D25 38 97 96 60 c D09 18 90 107 53 c D25 38 97 106 60 LC1 b c D03 D383 168 See pages 5/82 and 5/83
45
LRD 3 ppp
Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D40D95 and LP1 D40D80 AM1 d DL201 7 DL200 17 b Control circuit: a.c. LC1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D65 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 Control circuit: d.c. LC1 D40, LP1 D40 LC1 D50 LC1 D65, LP1 D65 LC1 D80, D95, LPA D80 c e g g (3-pole) (4-pole) 4.5 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 9.5 13 13 22 13 13 22
6
4
111 111 111 115.5 115.5 111 111 111 115.5
119 119 119 124 124 119 176 176 179.4
72.4 72.4 72.4 76.9 76.9 72.4 72.4 72.4 76.9
54
109 c d 70
21 30 g
LRD 4 ppp
Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D115 and D150
LR9 D
Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D115 and D150
267
255 150 132 174
189
136
120
DE200 and EDppp 10.5
132
AM1 d Characteristics: pages 6/12 to 6/15
d
DL200 and DR200 2.5 References: pages 6/16 and 6/17
120
DE200 and EDppp 10.5 Schemes: page 6/23 AM1 d DP200 and DR200 2.5
6/20
Mounting

LRD 0135
Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200
LRD 0135
Independent mounting on 110 mm centres
46 LAD 7B106
LAD 7B106 35 10
=
=
15
37,5
90
DX1 AP25
2x6,5
Remote tripping or electrical reset
LAD 703 (1)
32
(1) Can only be mounted on RH side of relay LRD 0135.
LRD 15pp
Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200 Remote tripping or electrical reset
80
45
50
125
110
85
45 LAD 7B105 = 35 = LA7 D03 (1)
41
82
50/65
100
2x4,5 17
96
34
AM1 d
DP200 2
DE200 9.5
(1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LR2 D15.
Schemes: page 6/23
6/21

LRD 3 ppp and LR2 D35pp

Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200
LRD 3ppp, LR2 D35 pp and LR9 D

Remote tripping or electrical reset
75 LA7 D3064 = 50 = LA7 D03 (1) 2 75/87
51,5
100
121
2x4,5 32
23,5
119
21
AM1 DP200 2
AM1 DE200 9.5
(1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LRD 3ppp, LR2 D35pp or LR9 D.
LRD 15 and LRD 3 ppp

Adapter for door mounted operator LA7 D1020 Stop Reset
10
LA7 D1020
c : adjustable from 17 to 120 mm
LRD, LRD 15 and LR9 D

Reset by flexible cable LA7 D305 and LAD 7305 Mounting with cable straight
Mounting with cable bent
c e M10x1
c : up to 550 mm e : up to 20 mm
e : up to 20 mm
6/22
Schemes

LRD, LR2 D and LR3 D
Pre-wiring kit LAD 7C1, LAD 7C2
Reset
Auto
_ KM
95 97
Man.
Test Stop
96
98
95 96 _ LRD
LR9 D5ppp
L1 L2 L3
_ KM1 2 4 6
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
(3)
(4) (2)
Test Stop Man. reset
(3)
95 97 96
_A
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
M 3
_M A1
_ KM 14
13
98
_ KM N A2
(1)
(1) Tripped. (2) Overload. (3) Setting current. (4) Specialised circuit.
A2
A1
LR9 D67 and LR9 D69

L1 L2 L3
+
1 3 5
0V
_ KM1 2 4 6
(5)
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
103
(3)
(4) (5)
104
(3) (2)
95 97 96
_
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A _ KM A1 14 13
M 3
_M
98
_ KM N A2
(1)
(1) Tripped. (2) Overload. (3) Setting current. (4) Specialised circuit. (5) Alarm.
6/23
Presentation
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, model LR9 F
Presentation
LR9 F electronic protection relays are especially suited to the operating conditions of motors. They provide protection against: b thermal overload of 3-phase or single-phase balanced or unbalanced circuits; b phase failure and large phase unbalance, b protracted starting times, b prolonged stalled rotor condition. LR9 F electronic protection relays are mounted directly below an LC1 F type contactor. They cover a range from 30 to 630 A, in eight ratings. The settings can be locked by sealing the transparent protective cover. A reset button is mounted on the front of the relay. Two versions are available: b simplified version: class 10: LR9 Fp3pp, class 20: LR9 Fp5pp, b complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, conforming to EN 60947-4-1: LR9 Fpp. This latter version includes an alarm function which makes it possible to forestall tripping by load shedding. Simplified version: class 10 or 20
1
2 5 4 3
98 NO 97 95 NC 96
107
Ir(A) 127
90
150
Complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, and alarm circuit
6
Class Ir(A) 20 107 127 + 90 150 10
24 V - / 103 104
7 8 2
Load
5 4 3
Alarm 98 NO 97 95 NC 96
9 1 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Ir adjustment dial Test button Stop button Reset button Trip indicator Setting locked by sealing the cover Class 10/class 20 selector switch Selector switch for balanced load /unbalanced load Alarm circuit
6/24
Characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Conforming to IEC 60529 Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device (conforming to IEC 60255-8) Maximum operating altitude Operating positions without derating Shock resistance Standard version Storage Normal operation Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-7 Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 255-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 kV kV kV C C m IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60255-8, IEC 60255-17, EN 60947-4-1 and VDE 0660 UL 508, CSA 22-2 IP 20 IP 20 on front of relay with accessories LA9 F103 or LA7 F70p, see page 6/31 TH - 40+ 85 - 20+ 55 (1) 2000 Any position
13 gn - 11 ms
Vibration resistance
2 gn - 5 to 300 Hz
Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Surge withstand Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radiated radio-frequency disturbance Resistance to fast transient currents Electromagnetic compatibility
6 4 8 (in air) 6 (in indirect mode) 10
V/m
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 EN 50081-1 and 2, EN 50082-2
kV
2 Conforming
(1) For operating temperatures up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
6/25

Relay type LR9 F5p57, F57 F5p63, F63 F5p67, F67 F5p69, F69 F5p71, F71 F7p75, F75 F7p79, F79 F7p81, F81
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-4 (Ui) Rated operational voltage Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C (Ue) Rated impulse Conforming to IEC 60947-1 withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational current (Ie) Short-circuit protection and coordination Frequency limits Power circuit connections Of the operating current Width of terminal lug
V V kV A
1000 1000 8 30 to 630 See pages: 24540/2, 24540/3, 24544/2 and 24544/3
Hz mm
5060. For other frequencies, please consult your Regional Sales Office (1) 20 25 25 30 LR9 F7p75 and LR9 F75 40 LR9 F7p79 and LR9 F79 M10 35 40
Clamping screw Tightening torque N.m
M6 10
M8 18
M10 35
M12 58
Auxiliary contact electrical characteristics

Conventional thermal current Short-circuit protection Control circuit connections By gG or BS fuses or by circuit-breaker GB2 CD10 Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors Flexible cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Solid cable 1 conductor 2 conductors A A 5 5 Min. 1 x 0.75 2x1 1 x 0.75 2x1 1 x 0.75 2x1 1.2 24 100 24 100 48 200 48 100 110 400 110 50 220 600 220 45 380 600 440 25 600 600 Max. 1 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 1x4 2 x 2.5 1 x 2.5
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m V VA V W
6
Maximum sealed current consumption of the coils of associated contactors (occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96)
Tightening torque a.c. supply
d.c. supply
(1) For applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft starters or variable speed drives, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
6/26
Tripping class Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 C 10, 10 A and 20 - 20+ 70 Manual on front of relay On front of relay On front of relay Actuation of N/C contact, without affecting N/O contact Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Alarm Tripping A A 1.05 0.06 In 1.12 0.06 In Tripping in 4 s 20 % in the event of phase failure Setting dial on front of relay Yes Temperature compensation Reset Fault indication Test function Stop function Tripping thresholds
Sensitivity to phase failure Adjustment (nominal motor current) Security sealing
Alarm circuit characteristics

Rated supply voltage Supply voltage limits Current consumption Switching current Protection Voltage drop Connection Tightening torque Short-circuit and overload Closed state Flexible cable without cable end V mm 2 N.m No-load d.c. supply V V mA mA 24 1732 y5 0150 Auto-protected y 2.5 0.51.5 0.45
LR9 F tripping curve

Average operating times depending on multiples of the setting current Class 10 Class 20
Tripping time in seconds Tripping time in seconds 1000
1000
100
100
10
1 2
1 2
10
1 0 1 2 1,12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 x times the setting current (Ir)
1 0 1 1,12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x times the setting current (Ir)
1 Cold state curve 2 Hot state curve
6/27
References
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, model LR9 F for motor protection
Compensated and differential overload relays

Thermal overload relays: b compensated and differential, b with relay trip indicator, b for a.c., b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1).
Relay setting range A Fuses to be used with selected relay aM gG A A 50 80 100 160 250 400 500 630 80 125 200 250 315 500 800 800 For direct mounting Reference beneath contactor LC1 Weight
kg F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F185F400 F225F500 F225F500 F400F630 and F800 F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F185F400 F225F500 F225F500 F400F630 and F800 LR9 F5357 LR9 F5363 LR9 F5367 LR9 F5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381 0.885 0.900 0.900 0.885 0.950 2.320 2.320 4.160
Class 10 (2)
819555
3050 4880 60100 LR9 F53pp 90150 132220 200330
819556
300500 380630
Class 20 (2)
3050 4880 60100 LR9 F73pp 90150 132220 160 250 400 500 630 250 315 500 800 800 LR9 F5569 LR9 F5571 LR9 F7575 LR9 F7579 LR9 F7581 0.885 0.950 2.320 2.320 4.160 50 80 100 80 125 200 LR9 F5557 LR9 F5563 LR9 F5567 0.885 0.900 0.900
200330 300500 380630
(1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9 F5371 directly beneath the contactor, they may be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 6/31). Above this size it is always necessary to use the mounting plate. Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/ or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 6/31). (2) Standard IEC 60947-4 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current In: - class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds, - class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds.
6/28
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, model LR9 F for motor protection
Compensated overload relays, class 10 or 20 with alarm

Thermal overload relays: b compensated, b with relay trip indicator, b for a.c., b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1), b class 10 or 20 by selector switch, b protection of 3-phase or single-phase circuits by selector switch, b with alarm function that enables tripping to be forestalled.
Relay setting range A 3050 4880 60100 90150 LR9 F57 132220 200330 300500 380630 Fuses to be used with selected relay aM gG A A 50 80 80 100 160 250 400 500 630 125 200 250 315 500 800 800 For direct mounting Reference beneath contactor LC1 F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F185F400 F225F500 F225F500 LR9 F57 LR9 F63 LR9 F67 LR9 F69 LR9 F71 LR9 F75 LR9 F79 Weight
819557
kg 0.885 0.900 0.900 0.885 0.950 2.320 2.320
F400F630 and LR9 F81 4.160 F800 (1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9 F71 directly beneath the contactor, they may be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 6/31). Above this size it is always necessary to use the mounting plate. Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/ or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 6/31).
6/29
References
Control accessories
Description Remote electrical reset device (1) LA7 D03p Remote Reset function control by flexible cable (length = 0.5 m) Sold in lots of 1 1 Unit reference LA7 D03p (2) LA7 D305 Weight kg 0.090 0.075
Remote Stop and/or Reset function control
Adapter for door mounted operator Rod (snap-off end to obtain required length, between 17 and 120 mm) Operating head for spring return pushbutton
LA7 D1020
0.005
10
ZA2 BZ13
0.100
ZA2 Bpppp (3)
0.012
For mounting an LR9 F5p71 thermal overload relay together with an LC1 F185 contactor
Description Reference LA7 F407 Weight kg 0.160
LA7 D305
Set of 3 busbars
For mounting a thermal overload relay beneath a reversing contactor or star-delta contactors
Application For relay For contactor Width of terminal lug mm 15 Set of 3 busbars Reference LA7 F401 Weight kg 0.110
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5 p67, LC1 F115 F5p69, F69, F71 LR9 F5p57, F5p63 LR9 F5p71, LR9 F71 LC1 F150, F185 LC1 F185
20 25
LA7 F402 LA7 F407
0.110 0.160
LR9 F5p71, LR9 F71 LR9 F7p75, F7p79, LR9 F75, F79 LR9 F7p81, LR9 F81
LC1 F225, F265
25
LA7 F403
0.160
LC1 F225...F400
25
LA7 F404
0.160
LC1 F400
25
LA7 F404
0.160
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LC1 F500 LR9 F75, F79, F81 LR9 F7p81, LR9 F81 LC1 F630, F800
30
LA7 F405
0.270
40
LA7 F406
0.600
(1) The time for which the coil of remote electrical reset device LA7 D03 can remain energised depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest time; 10 s pulse duration with 90 s rest time. Maximum pulse duration of 20 s with rest time of 300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms. (2) Reference to be completed by adding the coil voltage code. Standard control circuit voltages, (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office) : Volts 12 24 48 96 110 F F 220/ 230 M M 380/ 400 Q 415/ 440 N
a 50/60 Hz B E Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA c J B E DD Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W. (3) Stop: ZA2 BL432 and Reset: ZA2 BL639.
6/30
Mounting plates for overload relay

For use with relays LR9 F5 p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F5p71, LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69, F71 LR9 F7 p75, F7p79, F7p81, LR9 F75, F79, F81 Reference LA7 F901 Weight kg 0.100
LA7 F902
0.100
LA7 F90p
Sets of power terminal protection shrouds, single-pole

For use with relays LR9 F5 p57, LR9 F57 LR9 F5 p63, F5p67, F5p69, LR9 F63, F67, F69 LR9 F5 p71, LR9 F71 LR9 F7 p75, F7p79, F7p81, LR9 F75, F79, F81 Number of shrouds per set 6 Set reference LA9 F701 Weight kg 0.015
LA9 F702
0.015
LA9 F705
0.015
LA9 F703
0.015
LA9 F70p
Power terminal protection shrouds, 3-pole

For use with relays LR9 F5 p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69 LR9 F5 p71, LR9 F71 LR9 F7 p75, F7p79, F7p81, LR9 F75, F79, F81 Reference LA7 F701 Weight kg 0.030
LA7 F702
0.030
LA7 F703
0.030
LA7 F70p
Insulated terminal blocks

For use with relays LR9 F5 p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69 Set of 2 blocks Reference LA9 F103 Weight kg 0.560
Marking accessories
Description Clip-in marker holder LA9 F103 Bag of 400 blank self-adhesive legends 7 x 16 mm Sold in lots of 100 1 Unit reference LA7 D903 LA9 D91 Weight kg 0.001 0.001
6/31
Dimensions
Common side view
LR9 F5p71, F71
LR9 F5 p57, F5p63, F5 p67, LR9 F5 p69, F57, F63, F67, F69
120 50 5,5 50
123,5 56,8 (1) 3
48 25
48
50
50 40
5,5
(2)
40
44,8
101
96
60
71
60
76
71
46,8
115
(2) 6.5 x 13.5 for LR9 F5p57 and F57. 8.5 x 13.5 for LR9 F5p63, F5 p67, F5p69, F63, F67, F69
20 115
(1) Terminal shroud LA9 F70p
Common side view

127,6
LR9 F7p75, F7 p79, F7p81, LR9 F75, F79, F81

P1 P2 30
LR9 F7 p81 (for mounting beneath LC1 F630 and F800), LR9 F81
200 80 20 80
(1)
42,2
14 22,1
6 82 136,8
108,8 70
44,8
228,8
25 6
(1) Terminal shroud LA9 F70p LR9 F7p75, F75 LR9 F7p79, F7p81, F79, F81 P1 48 55
51,5 66 150
51,5 66 40
P2 48 55
188,8
62,1
40
76,5 193
76,5
Direct mounting beneath contactor LC1 F
6
H3
Mounting beneath contactors: reversing LC2 F or star-delta LC3 F
Mounting plate for LR9 F
H3
G H1 b H1 LA7 F4
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2) (3)
H1 30 30 30 40 50 40 60 60 60 70 110 H2 50 50 50 50 58 50 58 58 58 58 58 H3 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 180 180 180 Contactors LC1 With LR9 relays b F115 F5 p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, 279 F57, F63, F67, F69 F150 F5 p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 283 F57, F63, F67, F69 F185 F5 p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 285 F57, F63, F67, F69 F225 F5 p71, F71 F7 p75, F7p79, F75, F79 360 F265 F5 p71, F71 332 F7 p75, F7p79, F75, F79 363 F330 F7 p75, F7p79, F75, F79 364 F400 F7 p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 364 F500 F7 p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 390 F630, F800 F7 p81, F81 509 (3) DZ5 MB for LC1 F115 to F400 H1 60 60 60 H2 50 50 50 H3 120 120 120
Contactors LC1 With LR9 relays b F115 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, 240 F57, F63, F67, F69 F150 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 246 F57, F63, F67, F69 F185 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 250 F57, F63, F67, F69 F225 F5p71, F71 273 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 308 F265 F5p71, F71 279 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 314 F330 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 317 F400 F7p75, F7 p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 317 F500 F7p75, F7 p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 346 F630, F800 F7p81, F81 510 (1) Relay mounting plate LA7 F90p, see page 6/31 (2) AM1 EC or AM1 DF for LC1 F115 to F630 and LC1 F800
H2
LA7 F901 F902
G 145 190
H2
100 90 100 100 100 110 120
58 50 58 58 58 58 58
Schemes : page 6/33
6/32
H2
120 120 120 120 180 180 180
76
Schemes, setting-up
6
Schemes
LR9 F5p57F7p81
L1 L2 L3
LR9 F57F81 (with alarm)

L1 L2 L3
0V
(2)
KM1 2 4 6 2 4 6 KM1
1/L1
3/L2
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
5/L3
103
(3) (1)
112 %
(3)
(4)
(4)
(2)
104
(1)
95 2/T1 4/T2 96 6/T3 97 98
95 97 96 98
KM A1 14 13
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A M 3 13 M 3
M A1
KM 14
KM A2 N
(1)
N
KM A2
(1)
(1) Tripped on thermal overload (2) Overheating alarm (3) Setting current (4) Specialised circuit
Setting-up the special functions of LR9 F thermal overload relays

Setting the relay b Lift the transparent cover 7 to gain access to the various settings. b Adjustment is achieved by turning dial 1 which is graduated directly in Amperes. b The setting can be locked by sealing the cover 7.
6
LR9 F5369
Ir(A) TEST TRIPPED STOP RESET
1 7
105
125
90
150
protection lectronique moteur ELECTRONIC MOTOR PROTECTION
98
NO
97
95
NC
96
6 5 4 3 2
Stop function 3
Stop
Test function 2
Test Trip indicator
PED RESE STOP T
TRIPP TEST
ED STOP RESE T TRIPP TEST
ED STOP RE
b The Stop function is obtained by pressing the red STOP button 3. b Pressing the Test button: v actuates the N/C contact, v has no effect on the N/O contact. b The STOP button can be locked by fitting a U clip (reference: LA7 D901 ).
b The Test function is obtained by pressing the red TEST button 2 with a screwdriver. b Operation of the TEST button simulates tripping of the relay and: v actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts, v actuates the trip indicator 5.
6/33
Presentation, description

6
Electronic over current relays
Presentation
LR97 D and LT47 electronic over current relays have been developed to satisfy machine protection requirements. These relays have definite time characteristics: current threshold and time based function. They are particularly recommended for providing mechanical protection on machines with high resistive torque, high inertia and with strong probability of jamming under steady state conditions. They can be used for motor protection in the case of long starting times or frequent starting. The LR97 D relay also incorporates two fixed time protection functions, one of 0.5 seconds against locked rotor and one of 3 seconds against phase failure. LR97 D and LT47 can be used to provide mechanical shock protection. In this case, setting the O-Time knob to minimum will ensure tripping in 0.3 seconds.
510429
Applications
LR97 D and LT47 relays are particularly suitable for the following machines: b Monitoring function for excessively long starting time on machines with a risk of difficult starting: v Machines with high resistive torque, high inertia machines. b Monitoring of machines during steady state operation: overtorque detection function v Machines with strong risk of jamming, machines with torque build-up over time, v Mechanical failure monitoring, v Faster detection of malfunctioning on machines where the motor is oversized in relation to its thermal protection It. b Motor protection for specific applications: v Machines with long starting times, v Machines with high on-load factor: more than 30 to 50 starts/hour, v Machine with fluctuating load from a steady state, where the thermal image of a thermal overload relay (thermal memory) is unsuitable in relation to actual overheating of the motor. Examples of machines: v Conveyors, crushers and mixers, v Fans, pumps and compressors, v Centrifuges and spin-dryers, v Presses, shearing machines, saws, broaching machines, sanders and lifting hoists.
LR97 D
510430
Operation
Because of their two separate time settings, LR97 D and LT47 relays can be combined with the motor-starter function: D-Time: starting time, O-Time: trip time during steady state. The D-Time function is only available during the motor starting phase. During this phase the overload detection function is inhibited in order to allow starting. Under steady state conditions, when the motor current is greater than the setting current due to an overload or single-phasing, the red LED lights up and the internal relay switches its contact after a time preset by the O-Time knob. The red LED stays on, indicating that the relay has tripped. The relays are simple to set, in 5 easy steps: - Adjust the 3 knobs to maximum (Load, D-Time and O-Time), - Adjust the D-Time knob to the value corresponding to the motor starting time. - When the motor reaches steady state, adjust the Load knob (turn the knob counter-clockwise until the red LED starts to flicker). - Slowly turn the Load knob clockwise until the LED goes out. - Set the required tripping time, using the O-Time knob.
LT47
Description
Description
LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp
Status signalling
LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp To assist fast diagnostics, two LEDs (one green and one red) allow signalling of the operating status:
LED signal Green LED On Off Red LED LED signal Green LED On Off Red LED
RESET
3 4 9 1 8 2
3 4 2
TEST RESET
Status Voltage Starting Steady state On On Off Off L1 Off L2 Off
Condition Voltage Starting
TEST/STOP
A1
A2
98
95
96
2T1
4T2
6T3
Off
Steady state Overload
On On Off
Off
5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 RESET knob TEST/STOP knob Ready/Run Indicator Relay tripped indicator Current setting Adjustment of starting time
10
Overload OverTrip current Rotor locked Pha se failure
7 Adjustment of tripping time 8 Manual/Auto adjustment 9 Single-phase/3-phase adjustment 10 Retractable fixing lugs
On
Trip
On
L3 Off
Curves : pages 6/35 and 6/36
Schemes : page 6/39
6/34
Curves

Curves
LR97 D
Overload protection Protection against locked rotor and mechanical jamming under steady state conditions
U power supply A1-A2 Starting Locked rotor on starting Mechanical jamming during steady state operation Overload Brief overload
3 x I setting
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time
t 0,5 s
O-Time O-Time Reset: Manual (1) or electric (3)
Tripping due to locked rotor or mechanical jamming during 95 steady state operation Tripping on overload 95
96 98 96 98
Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3)
Overload protection Protection against phase failure during starting and during steady state operation
U power supply A1-A2 Starting Phase failure Missing phase Overload Brief overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time
t <3s
O-Time O-Time Reset: Manual (1) or electric (3)
<3s
Tripping due to 95 phase failure Tripping on overload 95
96 98 96 98
Mechanical shock protection

U power supply A1-A2 Starting Overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time O-Time set to minimum (02-03 s) Tripping to due mechanical shock 95 Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3)
96 98
(1) By Reset button. (2) Fixed time of 120 s. Selectable by dip switch. Function not available in the event of tripping due to locked rotor/mechanical jamming (I> 3 x I setting) or phase failure. (3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.
Presentation, description : page 6/34
Schemes : page 6/39
6/35
Curves (continued), characteristics

6
Curves (continued)
LT47 Overload protection
U power supply A1-A2 Starting Brief overload Overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time O-Time O-Time Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3)
Trip on overload
95 97
96 98
Mechanical shock protection

U power supply A1-A2 Starting Overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time O-Time set to minimum (02-03 s) Tripping due to 95 mechanical shock 97
96 98
t
(1) By Reset button. (2) Only available on version with automatic reset (LT47 ppppA). Time adjustable from 1 to 120 s with the R-Time knob. (3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.
Characteristics
Environment
Relay type Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device LR97 Dppppp IEC 60255-6, IEC 60947 UL, CSA IP 20 (front face) TH - 30+ 80 - 25+ 60 2000 Any position 15 gn - 11 ms 4 gn kV kV kV kV V/m kV V 2 6 8 (level 3) 6 (level 3) 10 (level 3) 2 Class A 10 LT47 ppppp IEC 60255-6, IEC 60947 UL, CSA IP 20 (front face) TH - 30+ 80 - 25+ 60 2000 Any position 15 gn - 11 ms 4 gn 2 6 8 (level 3) 6 (level 3) 10 (level 3) 2 Class A 10
Conforming to IEC 60529 and VDE 0106 Conforming to IEC 60068 Storage Normal operation without derating (IEC 60947-4-1)
C C m
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions In relation to normal without derating vertical mounting plane Shock resistance Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-7 Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Conforming to IEC 60255-5 Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 Resistance to In open air electrostatic discharge In direct mode Immunity to radiated radio-frequency disturbance Immunity to fast transient currents Conducted emissions Conforming to EN 55011 Conducted HF disturbance Conforming to EN 61000-4-6
Schemes : page 6/39
6/36

Characteristics
Relay type Contact type Conventional thermal current Maximum hold consumption of controlled contactor coils (occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Short-circuit protection LR97 Dppppp 1 NO/NC 3 a 24 a 48 70 140 c 24 c 48 55 55 3 LT47 ppppp 1 N/O + 1N/C 3 a 24 a 48 70 140 c 24 c 48 55 55 3
Conforming to IEC 60947
By gG, BS fuses. Maximum rating or GB2 circuit-breaker Connection by cable or lug-clamps Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors Min. without cable end Max. Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors Min. with cable end Max. External of lugs of screw Tightening torque
A V VA V W A
a 110 360 c 110 28
a 220 360 c 220 28
a 110 360 c 110 28
a 220 360 c 220 28
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm mm N.m
1 x 0.75 2 x 2.5 1 x 0.34 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 7 M3 0.61.2
1x1 2 x 2.5 1x1 2 x 2.5 7 M3.5 0.8...1.7

Relay type Setting range Tripping class Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Depending on model Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to UL, CSA A V V kV Hz mm 2 mm 2 mm mm N.m LR97 D015pp to LR97 D25pp 0.338 Adjustable 690 600 6 5060 1.5 10 1 4 10 M4 2 2.5 10 1 6 12 M4 2 LR97 D38pp LT47 ppppp 0.560 Adjustable 690 600 6 5060
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits Of the operating current Connection by cable or lug-clamps Flexible cable 1 conductor Min. without cable end Max. Flexible cable 1 conductor Min. with cable end Max. External of lugs of screw Tightening torque
6
LT47 ppppA "Load" knob 0.2/0.330 1120 Reset button R-time knob: 1-120 s By interruption of power supply (minimum 0.1 s) After O-time
Relay type Adjustment Current Time A s s s LR97 Dppppp "Load" knob 0.530 0.2/0.310 Reset button 120 s fixed By interruption of power supply (minimum 0.1 s) On starting Steady state Inhibited After O-time during D-time After D-time < 0.5 s LT47 ppppS "Load" knob 0.530 0.2/0.310 Reset button By interruption of power supply (minimum 0.1 s) On starting Steady state Inhibited After O-time during D-time Inhibited After O-time during D-time Inhibited After O-time during D-time 2 LEDs No load Under load Yes
D-time knob O-time knob R-time knob
Reset
Manual Automatic Electrical
Protection functions Overload Imax > Isetting Tripping
Locked rotor, mechanical jamming I > 3 x I setting
Tripping
After O-time
Sensitivity to phase failure Tripping
<3s
<3s
After O-time
Status and fault signalling (see table page 6/34) TEST/STOP function Sealing
2 LEDs Test Stop No load Under load Yes
2 LEDs No load Under load Yes
Schemes : page 6/39
6/37
References

510429
LR97 D electronic over current relays

Relay setting range A 0.31.5 Usable range (1) A 0.31.3 For use with contactor (2) LC1 D09D38 Relay supply voltage a 200240 a 100120 c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 a 100120 c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 a 100120 c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 a 100120 c/a 24 V c/a 48 V Reference (3) Weight
1.27
1.26
LC1 D09D38
LR97 D07pp
525
521
LC1 D09D38
2038
2034
LC1 D25D38
V LR97 D015M7 V LR97 D015F7 LR97 D015B LR97 D015E V LR97 D07M7 V LR97 D07F7 LR97 D07B LR97 D07E V LR97 D25M7 V LR97 D25F7 LR97 D25B LR97 D25E V LR97 D38M7 V LR97 D38F7 LR97 D38B LR97 D38E
kg 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172
510430
LT47 electronic over current relays

Relay setting range A 0.56 Usable range (1) A 0.55 Relay supply voltage Reference Weight
kg a 200240 a 100120 c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 a 100120 c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 a 100120 c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 a 100120 c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 a 100120 c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 a 100120 c/a 24 V c/a 48 V For use with V V LT47 06M7S LT47 06F7S LT47 06BS LT47 06ES LT47 30M7S LT47 30F7S LT47 30BS LT47 30ES LT47 60M7S LT47 60F7S LT47 60BS LT47 60ES LT47 LT47 LT47 LT47 LT47 LT47 LT47 LT47 LT47 LT47 LT47 LT47 Sold in lots of 06M7A 06F7A 06BA 06EA 30M7A 30F7A 30BA 30EA 60M7A 60F7A 60BA 60EA 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0,192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 Weight
LT47 relay with manual/electric reset
330
325
V V
LT47 30ppp
560
550
V V
LT47 relay with automatic reset

0.56 0.55 V V
330
325
V V
560
550
V V

Description Unit reference
kg Pre-wiring kits allowing LC1 D09D18 10 LAD 7C1 0.002 connection of the LR97 D LC1 D25D38 10 LAD 7C2 0.003 relay N/C contact directly to the contactor Terminal block for clip-on LR97 D 1 LAD 7B106 0.100 mounting on 35 mm rail (AM1 DP200) (1) To allow adjustment of the tripping sensitivity, see adjustment method (page 6/34). (2) Please see pages 5/42 and 5/43. (3) If a pre-wiring kit is used, it is no longer possible to electrically wire signalling of tripped status.
Schemes : page 6/39
6/38

6
Dimensions
LR97 Dpppp LT47 pppp
62,2 13 10
63 51
12
51,5
20,4 45 77,2 56 71
LT47 pppp
19,5 67,5
Mounting
LR97 Dpppp Direct mounting beneath the contactor c
67,5
LC1 b c D09D18 D25D38 123 137 See pages 5/82 and 5/83
45
Note: Can be mounted on 5 rail.
50,8
70,3
Schemes
LR97 Dpppp
L1 L2 L3
LT47 pppp
L1 L2 L3 MCBB
MCBB
Stop Stop
13
13
KM1 KM1
Test/Stop Reset Start
KM1
Test/Stop Reset
Start
L1
L2
L3
KM1
A1 A2 98 95 96
T1
T2
T3
KM1 A2
M3
a M3
LT47
A1 A2 97 98 95 96
A1 A2 98 95 96
A1
A2
A1
LR 97D
14
14
6/39
Functions
The LT6 is a protection relay designed for motor control.

813347
Not using serial link communication

The LT6 protects against: b thermal overloads, by monitoring the machine currents, b machine overheating (using PTC probes), b phase imbalance and phase failure, b earth fault. It provides: b fault signalling via a relay output and a 7 segment display, b the control of motors (reversing).
Using serial link communication

LT6 P0M005FM
The LT6 protects against: b thermal overloads, by monitoring the machine currents, b machine overheating (using PTC probes), b phase imbalance and phase failure, b earth fault, b no-load running, b long starting time, b overtorque and stalled rotor, b reversal of phase rotation, b a too low power factor (cos ). It provides: b fault and alarm signalling, using a remote display, b fault signalling via a relay output and a 7 segment display, b load shedding by monitoring voltage between phases, b signalling if short-circuit current is exceeded, b thermal alarm, b the control of motors (independent, reversing and 2-stage). It communicates via a bus: b for receiving configuration parameters for the LT6 (protection, motor control), b for information exchange with the LT6: v instantaneous values (voltage, current per phase, frequency, cos , thermal state), v data log of 5 previous trip incidents (causes and remedies), v maintenance statistics, cause of trip statistics, v operating and alarm states. It incorporates a communication watchdog function: in the event of loss of communication, fallback mode parameters can be set.
Description
On the front panel of the relay: b a 7 segment display for fault indication, b a Test button which opens the control contacts and closes the fault signalling contacts, b a trip Reset button. b a DIP switch for selection of: v bus communication address, v communication protocol (Uni-Telway or Jbus/Modbus), v manual or automatic reset following a thermal fault, v thermal overload parameter settings from the front panel or via serial link communication (line adjust or local adjust). b a serial interface (9-way SUB-D) enables RS 232 or RS 485 connection, depending on the user's cabling method, v using RS 232 connection, kit reference LA9 P620 enables communication (parameters and indication) between the relay and a PC running under Microsoft Windows 95, 98 or NT 4, v using RS 485 connection, the relay is connected to a Uni-Telway or Jbus/Modbus bus, v using RS 232 connection enables the relay status to be read at a remote display unit XBT H41101 p.
Characteristics, curves : pages 6/42 to 6/47
Application schemes : pages 6/52 to 6/57
6/40
LT6 configuration table

Functions Description Factory activated Setting parameters Activated/ Description deactivated by serial link Ir (% rating) Class Overload alarm Id (% of I rms average) (2) Time before tripping IDR Time before tripping IsD (% of Ir) Starting time Iv (% of Ir) Time before tripping IL c (% of Ir) Time before tripping Cos Time before tripping Initial values Adjustment range accessible via serial link communication 20109 % (1) 530 (1) 0125 % 1030 % 010 s 010 s 0.330 A 05 s 100500 % Ir 030 s 3090 % Ir 030 s 150800 % Ir 030 s - 11 010 s
Thermal overload: thermal protection of motor by monitoring current consumption Overheating (PTC): thermal monitoring of motor using built-in PTC temperature probes Phase imbalance and phase failure: monitors symmetry of rms current values Earth fault (DDR): monitors insulation faults using toroid sensor Long starting time: LT6 trips if both Is D and preset time exceeded No-load running: LT6 trips if both Iv and preset time exceeded Torque limitation: LT6 trips if both I Lc and preset time exceeded. Function inactive during starting Cos : monitors phase shift between motor current and voltage Monitoring of rotational direction of phases
20 % 5 100 % 30 % of I average 0.7 s (starting) 5 s (running) 30 A 5s 150 % Ir 10 s 30 % Ir 10 s 200 % Ir 10 s 0.1 10 s Forward running
Load shedding: opens channels A and B of LT6 if voltage drops below preset value
Short-circuit detection: signals short-circuit condition via the serial interface Reset: effective after programmable time or when the thermal state drops below a programmed value Motor control
Shedding Time before shedding Re-establishment Time before reestablishment Isc
70 % Un 10 000 s 90 % Un 10 000 s 15 x lr peak
68120 % Un 0100 000 s 68120 % Un 0100 000 s
Time before reset 0s C (iron) before reset 100 % n Control of outputs A and B Reversing
01000 s 40100 % n Reversing, independent 2stage Self-cooled or autocooled
Self-cooled/Auto-cooled
Self-cooled
Communication watchdog
Opening of outputs A and B, in the event of loss of communication (1) These values can be activated and adjusted from the front panel of the relay when set to Local adjust. (2) The average rms current is equal to the average current value of the 3 phases. Factory activated functions or functions activated/deactivated by serial link communication.
Characteristics, curves : pages 6/42 to 6/47
6/41
Characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards e marking Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 6068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 6068-2-6 Storage Operation Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating position In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Conforming to UL 94 m C C IEC 600947-4-1, IEC 60034-11, IEC 60755, VDE 0106, VDE 0660 Meets the essential requirements of European Low Voltage and EMC Directives UL 508, CSA, RINA, LROS TH IP 20 (1) 15 gn, 11 ms 2 gn from 3 to 100 Hz - 35+ 85 - 20+ 70 V0 2000
90
Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radiated electromagnetic interference Resistance to fast transient currents Resistance to conducted radio-frequency disturbance Non-dissipating shock wave (U imp) Dissipated shock wave Supply harmonics Resistance to micro-breaks
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2, kV level 3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3, V/m level 3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4, kV level 4
Conforming to IEC 60947-1
kV
(1) Only applicable when power cabling to relay exceeds the following sizes: 1.5 mm2 with cable end or 2.5 mm2 without cable end .
Functions : pages 6/40 and 6/41
90
8 10 2 6
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6, level 3
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5, level 3 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 appendix F Conforming to IEC 61000-4-11
6/42
Power circuit characteristics

Relay type Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operating frequency Rated operational current Input impedance Connection Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Associated protection By circuit-breaker Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V Hz A LT6 P0M005FM a 690 50/60 1 or 5 (1) < 0.1 LT6 P0M025FM a 690 50/60 25 < 0.1
1 or 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 N.m
1.56 1.56 1.54 1.7
Operational current y 25 A Operational current > 25 A (using a current transformer) A Operational current y 25 A
y GV2 L05 (1 A relay rating) y GV2 L10 (5 A relay rating) Compact NSppppMA (Merlin Gerin) y 2 aM, 4 gG (1 A relay rating) y 6 aM, 16 gG (5 A relay rating) u 32 (aM), u 63 (gG, gM)
y GV2 L22
By fuses
y 25 (aM), y 50 (gG, gM)
Operational current > 25 A (using a current transformer)
Control circuit supply characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operating voltage Power consumption Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V V 50/60 Hz c VA W a 380 c or a 50/60 Hz: 90276 15 7
Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Plug-in connector 1 or 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors mm 2 mm 2 0.51 0.51
mm 2 mm 2 N.m
0.51 0.50.75 0.7
Discrete input characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operating voltage Current consumption Power consumption Input impedance Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V V Minimum transient value mA W k a 250 c 90...150. a 90276 u 1 (changing from state 0 to state 1 in t u 4 ms) 0.5 56
(1) Using external current transformer for operating currents exceeding 25 A: see page 6/48.
6/43
Communication interface characteristics

Physical interface Connector on LT6 Maximum transmission speed Minimum time between 2 requests bit/s m/s RS 232: connection to PC or XBT H RS 485: connection to programmable controller 9-way SUB-D 9600 100
Discrete output characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Output type Associated fuse protection a.c. loads Rated voltage Permissible power for category AC-15 Associated with contactor d.c. loads Rated voltage Permissible power for category DC-15 Associated with contactor V W c 30 50 (Ie = 0.5 A, Ue = c 250 V, Ith = 5 A, L/R y 25 ms for 100 000 operations) LP1 K, LP2 K, LP1 D09 and D12 LC1 D09 to D38 c LC1 D40 to D95 (with LA4 DC3U) V VA a 250 500 (Ie = 0.5 A, Ue = a 250 V, Ith = 5 A, cos = 0.4 for 100 000 operations) LC1 K, LC2 K, LC7 K, LC8 K, LC1 D09 to D150 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Relay interface Conforming to IEC 60947-5 V a 380 1 N/O per channel A 6 (type gC)
Signalling output characteristics

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Output type Associated fuse protection Current limit Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Relay interface Conforming to IEC 60947-5 At U = c 5 V V V A mA a 380 1 N/O per channel 2 (type gC) 10
a.c. loads Rated voltage Permissible power for category AC-15 Associated with contactor d.c. loads Rated voltage Permissible power for category DC-15 Associated with contactor V W c 30 50 (Ie = 0.2 A, Ue = c 30 V, Ith = 2 A, 300 000 operations on a resistive load) LP1 K, LP2 K with suppressor module LA4 KC V VA a 250 250 (Ie = 0.2 A, Ue = a 250 V, Ith = 2 A, 300 000 operations on a resistive load) LC1 K, LC2 K, LC7 K, LC8 K with suppressor module LA4 KE
6/44
LT6 CTpppp external current transformer characteristics

Conforming to standards Precision Precision limit factor Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Maximum operating temperature Transformer ratio Diameter of conductor passage hole Maximum cabling c.s.a. V C A mm mm 2 IEC 60185, BS 7626 Class 5P 15 690 50 100/1 35 300 200/1 35 300 400/1 35 300 800/1 10 Incorporated (1)
XBT H41101p display module characteristics

Supply Display Type Capacity Input keys Pilot lights C C % Front panel Rear panel IEC 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60068-2-27 IEC 60068-2-6 V/m V c 24 LCD, 9 mm 2 lines of 20 characters 2 LED, communication LED, acknowledgement of input key operation 0+ 50 - 20+ 70 085 IP 65 (IEC 60529, NF C 20-010, UL) IP 20 Level 3 10 Level 3 30 gn, 11 ms, 1/2 sine 0.075 mm from 2 to 57 Hz 1 gn from 57 to 150 Hz Serial link type using specific cable XBT Z9701 (see page 6/48) Loaded as standard and available in 3 languages (1) Electrical connection to be made using M10 bolt.
Operating temperature Storage temperature Humidity (without condensation) Protection
Resistance to electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic interference Electrical interference Shock resistance Vibration resistance Communication with the LT6 Software
Modbus protocol
6/45
Characteristics
Probe characteristics
Probe type Conforming to standards Resistance Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Insulation Length of connecting cables At 25 C Per probe V kV DA1 TTppp IEC 60034-11 mark A 3 x 250 in series c 2.5 max 2.5 Reinforced Between probes Between probe and motor terminal plate mm m 250 1
Guaranteed operating zones: example with 3 probes type DA1 TT ppp (250 at 25 C) in series, conforming to standard EC 60034-11, mark A.
Resistance (ohms)
10 000
4000
Trip zone
1650 1500 1000 750
Reset zone
100
20 10
Trip zone on probe short-circuit
NOT - 5 C NOT NOT + 5 C
NOT + 15 C
NOT - 20 C
-20
Temperature (C)
1 3 probes type DA1 TT ppp (250 to 25 C) in series. NOT: Nominal Operating Temperature Protection unit tripped. Protection unit reset.
6/46
Tripping curves
Cold state curves (1)

t (s) 10 000
1000
100
10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5 (10 A)
1 1 1,12 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I/Ir
Hot state curves (1)

t (s) 10 000
6
1000
100
10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5 (10 A) I/Ir
1 1 1,12 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(1) Tripping time accuracy: 8 % at 7.2 x I/Ir.
6/47
References
3-pole multifunction protection relays

813353
Operational current (1) A 0.21 15 525
Description LT6 P0M005FM LT6 P0M025FM
Weight kg 1.030 1.030
Configuration software
Description Languages For use with All relay ratings Reference LA9 P620 Kit comprising: English, French, - two 3" 1/2 diskettes, German, Italian, (for Windows 2000 XP 95, 98, Spanish NT 4), - 2 m connection cable fitted at each end with a 9-way SUB-D connector (female-female) Weight kg 0.550
LT6 P0M005FM
Operational current Primary A 100 200 400 800 Reference Secondary A 1 1 1 1 Weight kg 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.680
813354
LT6 CT1001 LT6 CT2001 LT6 CT4001 LT6 CT8001
Display modules
Language LT6 CT4001 French English Supply voltage V c 24 c 24 c 24 Reference XBT H411011 XBT H411013 XBT H411014 Weight kg 0.620 0.620 0.620
Spanish
Connection cable
Function Reference Ensures connection link between the LT6 relay XBT Z9701 and display modules XBT H/P/E/HM/PM. Comprising a 9-way SUB-D female connector and a 25-way SUB-D male connector (length 2.2 m) (1) For operational currents greater than 25 A, use an external current transformer with a 1 A or 5 A secondary. Weight kg 0.200
Characteristics, curves: pages 6/42 to 6/47
6/48
Earth fault toroids

Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand
Sensitivity A 0.330 Internal of toroid mm 30 46 50 80 110 120 200 300 Reference Weight kg 0.120 1.300 0.200 0.420 3.200 0.530 1.320 2.230
TA30 POA PA50 IA80 GOA MA120 SA200 GA300
813355
PTC thermistor probes

Description
(1)
Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Unit reference DA1 DA1 DA1 DA1 DA1 DA1 DA1 DA1 TT090 TT110 TT120 TT130 TT140 TT150 TT160 TT170 Weight kg 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Triple probes
Nominal Operating Temperature (NOT) C 90 110 120 130 140 150 160 170
Marking accessories
Description
(to be ordered separately)

Sold in lots of 25 Unit reference AB1 Rp (2) Weight kg 0.002
Composition
DA1 TT ppp
Clip-in markers (maximum of 5 per relay)
Strips of 10 identical numbers (0 to 9) Strips of 10 identical capital letters (A to Z)
25
AB1 G p (2)
0.002
Replacement part
Description Set of plug-in connectors (3) Reference LA9 P600 Weight kg 0.150
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient. (2) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required. (3) The set includes upstream, downstream and probe-entry connectors.
6/49
6
Protection relays LT6 P

LT6 P0MpppFM On 35 mm 7 mounting rail On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA
AF1 EA4
118
131
90 54
LT6 CT
Display modules
XBT H41101p
42
30
35
25
a 95
25
6
10 10
6,2
202
89,6
107
102
6,2
120 12,35 2,5 183,8 5,85
20
42,5
42,5
LT6 CT1001 CT2001 CT4001 CT8001
a 35 35 35 10
2,5
Panel cut-out
(1)
50
90
184
Support panel thickness e = 1.56 mm. (1) R: 3.5 max / 2 min.
6/50
110 7
6
Earth fault toroids

TA30, PA50 IA80, MA120, SA200
c2 8
21 4
16
b1
b2
b1
29 c1 J c1 a G a1
Type TA30 PA50
b 83 109
b1 53 66
c 30 50
c1 60 87
c2 31 45
H 50 60
Type IA80 MA120 SA200
a 26,5 26,5 29
a1 44 44 46
b 122 164 256
b1 80 80 120
b2 55 55 90
c 80 120 196
c1 150 190 274
G 35 35 37
H 65 65 104
J 126 166 254
H
K 40 40 60
GA300
POA, GOA
344
6
a G
299 29
Type GOA POA a 72 78 b 148 224 c 46 110 G 57 76
6/51
Application schemes
Motor control: D.O.L. starting (channels A and B set for reversing or independent control)
Control from front panel of relay
KM1
Motor start Motor stop
Control via discrete inputs of relay
D1 D2 D3 D4
Channel A
D1 D2 D3 D4
95 96
95
Channel A
KM1
KM1
Reserved
Reserved
96
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Channel B
I8 O1 O2 I7 I6 I5 97
Signalling
O1 O2
Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A Local or serial communication control of A and B Reset Alarm
Stop channels A and B Start channel B Signalling Start channel A Local or serial communication control of A and B Reset Alarm
I4 I3 I2
97 98
98
93 I1 94
93 94
C1 Common 1 () C2 Common 2 ()
Control supply (1)
C1 Common 1 () T1 T2 NC Earth fault toroid H1 H2

PTC probes
C2 Common 2 ()
Control supply (1)
A2 A1
A2 A1
T1 T2 NC H1 Earth fault toroid H2

PTC probes
400 V KM1
400 V KM1
L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3

M 3
L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3
Control via serial link communication (Uni-Telway or Jbus/Modbus)
D1 D2 D3 D4
95
Channel A
KM1
Reserved
96
I8 I7 I6
O1 O2
I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A Signalling
97 98
Local or serial communication control of A and B Reset Alarm
93 94
Control supply (1)
A2 A1

PTC probes
400 V KM1
L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3

M 3
(1) For d.c. supplies, inputs I1 to I8 must be connected to the positive line.
6/52
Application schemes
(continued)
6
Motor control: D.O.L. starting

Control via serial link communication with signalling, earth fault toroid, PTC probes, state of power components Channels A and B set for reversing or independent control. Possible to control the motor via discrete input (local position) or by serial link communication
D1 D2 D3 D4 95
Channel A
KM1
Reserved
96
I8
Q1 KM1
I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2
O1 O2
Stop channels A and B Start channel B Signalling Start channel A Local or serial communication control of A and B Reset Common 1 () Common 2 () Alarm
97 98
Tripped
Line Local
93 94
Overload
I1 C1 C2
Q1
Control supply (1)
A2 A1

PTC probes
KM1 400 V
L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3
U V
M 3
(1) For d.c. supplies inputs I1 to I8 must be connected to the positive line.
6/53
Application schemes
(continued)
6
Motor control: reverser starting

Control via serial link communication Channels A and B set for reversing control.
95
Channel A
Control via discrete inputs of relay Channels A and B set for reversing control.
95
Channel A
D1 D2 D3 D4
KM1
D1 D2 D3 D4
KM1
Reserved
96
Reserved
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
KM2
96
I8 O1
KM2
KM2
I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2
O1
KM2
O2
KM1
O2
Stop channels A and B Start channel B Signalling Start channel A Local or serial communication control of A and B Reset Common 1 () Common 2 () Alarm
KM1
97 98
97 98
93 I1 94 C1
93 94
Control supply (1)
A2 A1
T1 T2 NC Earth fault toroid H1 H2

PTC probes
C2
Control supply (1)
A2 A1

PTC probes
400 V
KM1
L11 L21
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3
400 V
KM1
L11 L21
2T1 4T2 6T3
KM2
L31
KM2
L31
Control from front panel of relay Channels A and B set for independent control.
D1 D2 D3 D4 95
Channel A
Reserved
96
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Motor stop
O1 Forward start O2
KM2
KM1
Reverse start
KM2
Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A Signalling
KM1 KM2
97 98
KM1
Local or serial communication control of A and B Reset Alarm
93 94
Control supply (1)
A2 A1

PTC probes
400 V KM1
L11 L21
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3
KM2
L31
6/54
Application schemes
(continued)
6
Motor control: reverser starting with measurement of cos and voltage

Control via serial link communication Channels A and B set for reversing control.
D1 D2 D3 D4 95
Channel A
Reserved
KM2
KM1
96
230 V From voltage measuring transformer 0 V
C2 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 C1
Common 2 () Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Channel B
O1
KM1 KM2
O2
Stop channels A and B
97 Start channel A Signalling Local or serial communication 98 control of A and B Reset 93 Common 1 () Alarm 94
Start channel B
Control supply (1) Voltage and cos measuring transformer 400 V 230 V
A2 A1 T1 T2 NC H1 Earth fault toroid H2

PTC probes
0V
400 V
0V
KM1
To discrete input E (I8)
L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3
KM2
6/55
Application schemes
(continued)
6
Motor control: star-delta starting (channels A and B set for 2-stage control)
Control via discrete inputs of relay
D1 D2 D3 D4 95
Channel A
KM1
Reserved
KM3
96
KM3 KM1 KM2
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A Local or serial communication control of A and B Reset Signalling Channel B
O1
KM3
O2
KM1
97 98
Control supply (1) Alarm
93 94
1 KM1 2 3 5 4 6 U1 V1 3 5 6 W1 W2 M U2 V2
A2 A1
PTC probes
400 V
L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3
1 KM2 2 3 4
1 KM3 2 3 5 4 6
Control via serial link communication

D1 D2 D3 D4 95
Channel A
6
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 C1 C2
Control supply (1)
KM1
Reserved Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Stop channels A and B Start channel B Start channel A Local or serial communication control of A and B Reset Common 1 () Common 2 () Alarm Signalling Channel B
KM3 KM1 KM2
96
KM3
O1
KM3
O2
KM1
97 98 93 94
A2 A1

PTC probes
1 KM1 2 3 5 4 6 U1 V1 3 5 6 W1 W2 M U2 V2
400 V
L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3
1 KM2 2 3 4
1 KM3 2 3 5 4 6
(1) For d.c. supplies inputs I1 to I8 must be connected to the positive line. Functions : pages 6/40 and 6/41 Characteristics, curves: pages 6/42 to 6/47 References : pages 6/48 and 6/49 Dimensions, mounting : pages 6/50 and 6/51
6/56
Application schemes
(continued)
6
Motor control: star-delta starting with adjustable time delay

Control via serial link communication Channels A and B set for 2-stage control.
D1 D2 D3 D4
95
Channel A
Reserved
KM3 96
KM1
KM3
230 V From voltage measuring transformer 0 V
C2 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4
Common 2 () Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Channel B
KM1 O1 KM1 O2 KM3 KM2
Stop channels A and B
Control supply (1) Voltage measuring transformer 400 V/230 V 230 V 400 V To input E (I8)
Start channel B 97 Start channel A Signalling Local or serial communication 98 I2 control of A and B I1 Reset 93 C1 Common 1 () Alarm 94 A2
I3
A1
1k T1 T2 NC Earth fault toroid H1 H2

PTC probes
5 KM1 6 3 1 4 2 W1 V1 3 1 2 U1 U2 M W2 V2
0V
0V 400 V L11 L21 L31
2T1 4T2 6T3
5 KM2 6 3 4
5 KM3 6 3 1 4 2
(1) For d.c. supplies the inputs I1 to I8 must be connected to the positive line. LT6 P0M005FM connections with current transformers LT6 CTpppp
D1 D2 D3 D4
95
Channel A
LT6 P0M0 p5FM connections with display module XBT H41101p

D1 D2 D3 D4
95 96
Channel A
Reserved Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C Channel B
96 I8 O1 O2 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Reserved
C2 Common 2 () I8 I7 I6 I5 I4
Discrete input E Discrete input D Discrete input C
O1
Channel B
O2
Stop channels A and B Start channel B
97 Start channel A Signalling Local or serial communication 98 I2 control of A and B I1 Reset 93 C1 Common 1 () Alarm Common 2 () C2 94 A2 I3 A1 T1 T2 NC H1 Earth fault toroid H2
PTC probes
97 98
Ph1
Ph2
Ph3
C1 Common 1 () A2 A1
93 94
P1 P2

PTC probes
S1 S2 P1 P2 S1 S2 P1 P2 S1 S2
L11 L21 L31
LT6 P0M005FM
2T1 4T2 6T3
L11 L21 L31
LT6 P0M0 5FM
2T1 4T2 6T3
XBT H41101
XBT Z9701
M 3
6/57
Selection guide
Thermistor protection units for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)
Applications
General protection and protection of motors fitted with PTC thermistor probes (1)
Standards and approvals
IEC 60034-11, UL, CSA
Reset method
Automatic
Fault signalling
Fault memory in the event of a supply failure
Fault test
6
Rated control circuit voltages a 50/60 Hz Single voltage 115 V or 230 V Rated control circuit voltages c Single voltage 24 V
Contact type
1 N/C
Protection unit type
LT3 SE
6/64 (1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient
Pages
6/58
6 6
IEC 60034-11, PTB, UL, CSA Marine: BV, LROS, GL, DNV, RINA
Automatic
Manual or automatic
On front panel of unit and remote
Yes
By pushbutton on front panel of unit
6
Dual voltage 115/230 V Multivoltage 24230 V Single voltage 400 V Dual voltage 24/48 V, 115/230 V Multivoltage 24230 V Dual voltage 24/48 V Multivoltage 24230 V Dual voltage 24/48 V
Dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O Multivoltage 2 C/O
Single voltage or dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O Multivoltage 2 C/O
LT3 SA
6/64
LT3 SM
6/59
General
Application
LT3 Sp thermistor protection units continuously monitor the temperature of the machines to be protected (motors, generators, etc.) by means of PTC thermistor probes embedded in the machine windings. If the nominal operating temperature of the probes is reached, they convert the rapid increase in resistance into a switching function which can be used to switch off the machine or signal a fault (see paragraph relating to thermistor probes below). Accidental breaks in the supply circuits of the thermistors are also detected.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Conforming to "Electromagnetic compatibility" directive. Conforming to standard EN 61000-6-2. Resistance to electrostatic discharge (conforming to IEC 61000-4-2) Resistance to fast transients (conforming to IEC 61000-4-4) Susceptibility to electromagnetic fields (conforming to IEC 61000-4-3) Surge resistance 1.2/50 - 8/20 (conforming to IEC 61000-4.5) Immunity to microbreaks and voltage drops (IEC 61000-4-11) Suitable for use with variable speed controllers
Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 4
Thermistor probes
Range of most commonly used PTC thermistor probes: from 90 to 160 C, in steps of 10 C. Curve R = f (), characteristic of a PTC thermistor probe, is defined by standard IEC 60947-8. The choice of PTC thermistor probe to be incorporated in the motor winding depends on the insulation class, the type of motor and the most suitable location for the probe. This choice is usually made by the motor manufacturer or the motor rewinder, who have all the necessary information. Application example
Insulation class of rotating machines conforming to IEC 60034-11 (S1 duty) NOT Nominal operating temperature Temperature at which rapid increase in resistance occurs Probes used for Fault Alarm C C
A B E F H
100 110 120 140 160
100 110 120 140 160
100 120 130 150 170
6/60
Characteristics
Protection unit type Reset method Fault indication Fault test Probe interchangeability
LT3 SE Automatic Label Mark A to IEC 60034-11 IEC 60034-11 VDE 0660
LT3 SA Automatic On front panel of unit and remote Label Mark A to IEC 60034-11 IEC 60034-11 VDE 0660 LROS
LT3 SM Manual/Automatic On front panel of unit and remote By pushbutton on front panel of unit Label Mark A to IEC 60034-11 IEC 60034-11 VDE 0660
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection e marking
IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529, VDE 0106 LT3 Sp protection units have been designed to comply with the basic recommendations of European directives relating to low voltage and EMC. Therefore LT3 Sp products bear the European Community e mark. - 40+ 85
Storage Conforming to IEC 60068-2-1 and 2-2 Operation Without derating With derating Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
- 25+ 60 1500 m Up to 3000 m, the maximum permissible ambient air temperature for operation (60 C) must be reduced by 5 C per additional 500 m above 1500 m 2.5 gn (225 Hz) 1 gn (25150 Hz) 5 gn (11 ms) Any position
Maximum operating altitude
Vibration resistance Shock resistance Operating positions without derating
Power supply circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) a 50/60 Hz 0.851.1 Uc a 50/60 Hz 0.851.1 Uc c 0.81.25 Uc 0.851.1 Uc Sealed Single voltage Dual voltage Multivoltage Single voltage Dual voltage Multivoltage a c V V V V V V VA W (1) 115 or 230 24 < 2.5 <1 115/230 24230 24/48 24230 < 2.5 <1 400 115/230. 24/48 24230 24/48 24230 < 2.5 except (400 V : 2.7) <1
Average consumption
PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient
6/61

Protection unit type Resistance Maximum number of probes fitted in series (2) Voltage at terminals in the thermistor circuit Tripping Reset Probes y 250 at 25 Normal operation (R = 1500 ) Conforming to IEC 60034-11 (R = 4000 ) Operating threshold Distance Minimum c.s.a. of conductors LT3 SE 27003100 15001650 6 < 2.5 < 7.5 300 0.75 400 1 LT3 SA 27003100 15001650 6 < 2.5 < 7.5 < 20 500 1.5 LT3 SM 27003100 15001650 6 < 2.5 < 7.5 < 20 1000 (3) 2.5
V V m mm2
Thermistor probe short-circuit detection Connection of probes to the LT3
Electrical characteristics of the output relay contacts

Contact type Rated insulation voltage Maximum operational voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage Conventional thermal current Operational power Breaking capacity Uimp Single voltage or dual voltage Multivoltage V V kV A VA 120 V 250 V 24 V A A A mm2 mm2 N.m 1 N/C a 500 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 C/O 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 C/O
a 250 (a 400 V for LT3 SM00V) 2.5 5 100 for 0.5 million operating cycles 6 3 2 2 x 11 x 2.5 1 x 0.752 x 2.5 0.8
At 220 V In cat. AC-16
In DC-13 Cabling (cage type connector) for flexible or solid cable Tightening torque
Without cable end With cable end
Thermistor probe characteristics

Probe type Conforming to standards Resistance Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Insulation Length of connecting cables At 25 C Per probe V kV DA1 TTppp IEC 60034-11. Mark A 3 x 250 in series c 2.5 V max 2.5 Reinforced Between probes Between probe and motor terminal plate mm m 250 1 DA1 TSppp
250 c 2.5 V max 1 Reinforced 1
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient (2) Provided that the total resistance of the probe circuit is less than 1500 at 20 C. (3) For distances greater than 500 m take cabling precautions (twisted shielded pairs).
6/62
LT3 S protection unit/thermistor probe combination

Guaranteed operating zones: examples with 3 probes type DA1 TT ppp (250 at 25 C) in series, conforming to standard IEC 60034-11, Mark A. LT3 SE, LT3 SA, LT3 SM protection units
Resistance (ohms)
10 000
3100 2700 1650 1500 1000 750
Trip zone Reset zone
100
20 10
Trip zone on probe short-circuit
NOT -5 C NOT NOT +5 C
3 probes type DA1 TTppp (250 at 25 C) in series.
NOT: Nominal Operating Temperature Protection unit tripped. Protection unit reset. (1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient
NOT -20 C
-20
NOT + 15 C
Temperature (C)
6/63
References
108694-24-M
Protection units (without fault memory)

Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection
Connection Cage connectors Voltage a 50/60 Hz 115 V 230 V c 24 V Output contact N/C N/C N/C Reference LT3 SE00F LT3 SE00M LT3 SE00BD Weight kg 0.220 0.220 0.220
Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection On front panel: fault and voltage signalling indicator.
LT3 SE00M
108698-24-M
Connection Cage connectors
Voltage a 50/60 Hz c a 50/60 Hz or c 115/230 V 24/48 V
Output contact N/C + N/O N/C + N/O
Reference LT3 SA00M LT3 SA00ED LT3 SA00MW
Weight kg 0.220 0.220 0.220
24230 V 2 C/O
Protection units (with fault memory)

Units with manual reset with thermistor short-circuit detection On front panel: - fault and voltage signalling indicator, - Test and Reset button.
Connection LT3 SA00M Cage connectors
108696-24-M
Voltage a 50/60 Hz 400 V 24/48 V 115/230 V
Output contact N/C + N/O N/C + N/O N/C + N/O N/C + N/O
Reference LT3 SM00V LT3 SM00E LT3 SM00M LT3 SM00ED LT3 SM00MW
Weight kg 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220
c a 50/60 Hz or c
24/48 V
24230 V 2 C/O
LT3 SM00M
6/64
813383
PTC thermistor probes

Description
(1)
Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Unit reference DA1 TT090 DA1 TT110 DA1 TT120 DA1 TT130 DA1 TT140 DA1 TT150 DA1 TT160 DA1 TT170 DA1 TS060 DA1 TS070 DA1 TS080 DA1 TS090 DA1 TS100 Weight kg 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005
Integrated triple probes
Nominal Operating Temperature (NOT) C 90 110 120 130 140 150 160 170
Surface probes DA1 TT ppp
60 70 80
813384
90 100

Description Application Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference RHZ 66 Weight kg 0.005
Adapter
For fixing on 4 rail DZ5 MB
Marking accessories
Clip-in markers (maximum of 5 per unit) Strips of 10 identical numbers (0 to 9) 25 AB1 Rp (2) 0.002
Strips of 10 identical capital letters (A to Z) DA1 TSppp
25
AB1 G p (2)
0.002
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient (2) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required.
6/65
Dimensions, schemes, setting-up
6
Dimensions
LT3 SE, SA, SM Mounting on 5 rail AM1 DP200 Mounting on 1 4 rail (with adapter RHZ 66)
100
115
98,4
100
50
50
RHZ 66 22,5
Schemes for no fault operation

LT3 SE Without fault memory LT3 SA dual voltage LT3 SA multivoltage
A1
A1 or B1
A1
96
95
T1
(1)
96
T1
Ue
(1)
98 97 95
T1
Ue
Fault
(2)
05 08 06 98
T2
95
T2
Fault
T2
A2
A2
A M K K
A2
96
A
A M K K H
M K
K H
LT3 SM dual voltage and 400 V (without B1)
LT3 SM multivoltage
LT3 Sp dual voltage Terminal Voltage A1 48 V 230 V B1 24 V 115 V
A1 or B1
A1
96
95
6
Rd
T1
Ue
(1)
98 97 95
Rd
T1
Ue
(1)
05 08
T2
Fault
T2
Fault
06 98 96
A
Y1 Test Reset A2 Y2
Y2
A M K K H
A2
Y1 Test Reset
M K
K H
Setting-up
Cabling It is inadvisable to use the same multi-core cable for the thermistor probe circuit and the power circuit. This is especially important for long cable runs. If it is impossible to comply with the above recommendation, a pair of twisted conductors must be used for the thermistor probe circuit. Testing the insulation of the line connecting the thermistors to the LT3 S unit Before carrying out this test, short-circuit all the terminals of the LT3 S protection unit. Measure the insulation value between these terminals and earth using a megger or a flash tester, progressively increasing the voltage to the value defined by the standards. Checking the PTC thermistor probes for correct operation With the machine stopped, in the cold state and after having taken all the necessary safety precautions: b disconnect the line linking the thermistors to the LT3 S protection unit, at the terminals of the machine being protected: motor, etc., b using an ohmmeter with a voltage rating less than or equal to 2.5 V, measure the resistance of the probe circuit at the machine terminals, b depending on the number and type of thermistors connected in series, check that their resistance value at 25 C is correct. Example: motor fitted with 3 PTC thermistor probes with a resistance y 250 at 25 C. Any value higher than 250 x 3 = 750 indicates a problem. (1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient (2) Relay energised: the contacts are shown in the "operating" position.
6/66
Operation
LT3 SA protection units

L1
A1 or B1
L2 L3 N T2 T1
96 98 97
Ko
Ue
Fault
Starting The LT3 SA is normally energised and its internal relay is in the pre-energised position. The motor is started by operating pushbutton M automatically held in by K (3-wire control circuit).
95
A M K K H
Thermal fault The strong increase in resistance of the PTC probes at the moment their temperature reaches the nominal operating temperature (NOT) is detected by the LT3 SA unit and causes the relay to drop out; indicator H comes on, as does the built-in indicator on unit LT3 SA. Contactor K drops out and pressing button M has no effect.
Operating temperature NOT, Tripping threshold Reset threshold
A2
Reset As the motor cools, it reaches the reset threshold, 2 to 3C below the nominal operating temperature. The relay resets and the motor can be started by pressing button M.
Relay Ko Fault indicator Contactor K
Pushbutton M
LT3 SM protection units

Operation is very similar to that described above, except for the following:
L1
A1 or B1
L2 L3 N T2 T1
96 98 97
Ko
Ue
Reset After tripping on thermal fault and cooling to the reset threshold, the Test/RESET button on the unit (R1) or a remote reset button (Rd) must be pressed to energise the relay. The fault is therefore memorised, even though the temperature of the probes has dropped to well below the reset threshold.
Fault
95
R1 K
A2
A Rd M K K H
Signalling circuit As the relay is fitted with 2 separate contacts, the signalling voltage may be different from the contactor control voltage.
Operating temperature NOT, Tripping threshold Reset threshold Test/Reset button Reset Rd Relay Ko Fault indicator Contactor K
Test Pressing the Test/RESET button simulates a fault and causes the relay to drop out: the FAULT indicator comes on, as does the remote signalling indicator. The unit is reset by pressing the Test/RESET button again.
Pushbutton M
6/67
Presentation, characteristics
6
Single-pole magnetic over current relays
Presentation
The RM1 XA electromagnetic relay detects over current peaks in excess of the maximum permissible current value. It is designed for the protection of circuits which are not subject to current peaks (starters, resistors) or for controlling starting peaks on slip ring motors. It trips instantaneously and is not suitable for frequent operation (12 operating cycles per hour). It can withstand a continuous current equivalent to 1.25 times the minimum setting current.
Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating position C m Standard version NF C 63-650, VDE 0660 CSA Standard version TC, special version TH Storage: - 60+ 70 Operation: - 40+ 60 3000 15 in relation to normal vertical mounting position

Maximum rated operational voltage Frequency limits of the rated operational current Conventional thermal current Occasional making and breaking capacities V Hz a or c 600 060
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

A 10
a.c. supply
Voltage Power (1)
V VA V W
48 4000 48 240
110 12 000 110 200
220 17 000 220 190
380 22 000 440 180
600 600 180
d.c. supply
Voltage Power (2)
(1) Circuit such as the electromagnet of a contactor - cos inrush: 0.7 and cos sealed: 0.4. (2) Circuit such as an electromagnet without economy resistor ; time constant varying from 20 ms for 5 W to 200 ms for 100 W or more.
Operating times
Time in ms
Operating times: because of the numerous applications for RM1 XA over current relays, it is not possible to give precise operating times. The curves shown are therefore purely indicative.
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 2 In
Setting points
4 25 In 3 1,6 In
10 8 0,9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 current passing/set current
0,8 In
Schemes: page 6/71
6/68
References
533558
Non-latching
With 1 C/O contact block, non-latching
Recommanded operating range (motor In) A a or c RM1 XA001 Setting range (trip current) Maximum continuous current a or c A 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 200 315 500 1000 1000 Reference Weight
0.71.15 1.161.8 1.92.9 34.6 4.77.2 7.311.5 11.618 18.129 29.146 46.172 73115 116145 146230 231360
A 1.254 26.3 3.210 516 825 12.540 2063 32100 50160 80250 125400 160500 250800 400 1250 6302200 6302000
RM1 XA001 RM1 XA002 RM1 XA004 RM1 XA006 RM1 XA010 RM1 XA016 RM1 XA025 RM1 XA040 RM1 XA063 RM1 XA100 RM1 XA160 RM1 XA200 RM1 XA315 RM1 XA500 RM1 XA101 RM1 XA101
kg 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990
a c
361630 361570
Accessory (to be ordered separately)

Description 1 C/O contact block, non-latching Reference RM1 ZG21 Weight kg 0.060
Schemes: page 6/71
6/69
533559
Latching with manual reset

With 1 C/O contact block, latching with manual reset
Recommanded operating range (motor In) A a or c RM1 XA0011 Setting range (trip current) Maximum continuous current a or c A 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 200 315 500 1000 1000 Reference Weight
0.71.15 1.161.8 1.92.9 34.6 4.77.2
A 1.254 26.3 3.210 516 825 12.540 2063 32100 50160 80250 125400 160500 250800 4001250 6302200 6302000
RM1 XA0011 RM1 XA0021 RM1 XA0041 RM1 XA0061 RM1 XA0101 RM1 XA0161 RM1 XA0251 RM1 XA0401 RM1 XA0631 RM1 XA1001 RM1 XA1601 RM1 XA2001 RM1 XA3151 RM1 XA5001 RM1 XA1011 RM1 XA1011
kg 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990
533560
7.311.5 11.618 18.129 29.146 46.172 RM1 XA1001 + ER1 XA2p 73115 116145 146230 231360 a 361630 361570
533561
6
RM1 XA0011 + RM1 ZH21

Description 1 C/O contact block, latching Reference RM1 ZH21 Weight kg 0.070 0.240
Electrical reset (1) ER1 XA2p (consumption: inrush, sealed: 500 VA) (fitted to the relay together with a latching contact block) Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) (1) The impulse duration must not exceed 2 seconds within 10 minute intervals. (2) Standard coil voltages for electrical reset: Volts 24 48 110 220 50 Hz B E F M
380 Q
Schemes: page 6/71
6/70
Dimensions, schemes
6
Dimensions
RM1 XAppp , RM1 XAppp 1 RM1 XA001XA040 RM1 XA0011XA0401 RM1 XA063, XA100 and XA315 RM1 XA0631, XA1001 and XA3151 RM1 XA160, XA200, and XA500 RM1 XA1601, XA2001, and XA5001 RM1 XA101, RM1 XA1011
Common side view
RM1 ZH2
M4/M5
d1
L1
M12 25
L 13 123
27,5 27,5
55
S d
S d
50 63,5
RM1 XAppp 1 with electrical reset ER1 XA2p

48
RM1 XA XA XA XA XA XA XA 063 100 160 200 315 500 101
d 20.5 20.5 27.5 27.5 35.5 40.5
d1 5.5 5.5 7
M 83 87 94 94 74 84
L 25 25 25 25 44 44 37
L1 40 40 40 40 55 55 64
S 15 20 25 25 30 40
25 25 25
M6 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10
110
155
124
27,5 27,5 55
Schemes
RM1 XAppp 1
Latching
RM1 XAppp
Non-latching
6
RM1 XA
3-wire control (without mechanical latching)
1 91 93
2-wire control (with mechanical latching)

1 91 93
3-wire control (with trip signal)

91 93 94 X1 H1 A2 X2 1 2
91
93
91
93
RM1
RM1 94 92 94 2 2
RM1 92 S1 13 S2 14 A1 14 KM1 14 KM1 A2 A1 13 12 11
92
94
92
94
S1 12 13 13
11
92
S2 14
KM1
KM1
A1 14
KM1
A2
13
6/71
Contents
7 - Control relays
Control relays
b k control relays v For a.c or d.c control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4 v For d.c control circuit (low consumption) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/5 v Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contact blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6 v Mounting and marking accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/7 b Mini-control relays v Mini-control relays CA2 SK and CA3 SK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/12 v Mini-control relay with alternating contacts CA2 SKE . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/12 v Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor modules . . . . . page 7/13 b TeSys d control relays and add-on blocks v Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/21 v Add-on blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/22 v Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/23
Zelio Time: timing relays

Zelio Control: measurement and control relays

7/1
Contents
7 - Control relays
Control relays
b k control relays v For a.c or d.c control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4 v For d.c control circuit (low consumption) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/5 v Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contact blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6 v Mounting and marking accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/7 b Mini-control relays v Mini-control relays CA2 SK and CA3 SK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/12 v Mini-control relay with alternating contacts CA2 SKE . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/12 v Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor modules . . . . . page 7/13 b TeSys d control relays and add-on blocks v Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/21 v Add-on blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/22 v Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/23
Zelio Time: timing relays

Zelio Control: measurement and control relays

7/1
Characteristics
Control relays
k control relays
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Operating positions IEC 60947, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 5424 UL, CSA
Vertical axis
Horizontal axis
Without derating
Without derating
Connection Screw clamp connections Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable Spring terminals Flexible cable without cable end Faston connectors Clip Solder pins for With locating device between printed circuit board power and control circuits Tightening torque Philips head n 2 and 6 Terminal referencing Conforming to standards EN 50005 and EN 50011 Protective treatment Conf. to IEC 60068 (DIN 50016) Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Vibration resistance 5...300 Hz Flame resistance Storage Operation Without derating Control relay open Control relay closed Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to NF F 16-101 and 16-102 Control relay open Control relay closed Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 60536
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm
Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.34 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.75 2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35 4 mm x 35 microns 0.81.3 Up to 8 contacts
Max. 2x4 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5
Possible positions for CA2 K only, with derating, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Max. to IEC 60947 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
N.m
C C m
"TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct finger contact (devices with screw clamp terminals or pins for printed circuit board) - 50...+ 80 - 25...+ 50 2000 2 gn 4 gn Self-extinguishing material V1 Conforming to requirement 2 10 gn 15 gn SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) Safety separation of circuits
Control relay type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits For operation (y 50 C) single voltage coil For drop-out Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil In millions of operating cycles Standard c coil Wide range, low consumption c coil Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour Average consumption Inrush at 20 C and at Uc Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time Between coil energisation and at 20 C and at Uc opening of the N/C contacts closing of the N/O contacts
CA2 K a 12...690 0.8...1.15 Uc y 0.2 Uc 10 10 000 30 VA 4.5 VA 1.3 5...15 10...20 10...20 15...25 2
CA3 K c 12...250 0.8...1.15 Uc y 0.1 Uc 20 10 000 3W 3W 3 25...35 30...40 10 15 2
CA4 K c 12...120 0.7...1.3 Uc y 0.1 Uc 30 6000 1.8 W 1.8 W 1.8 25...35 30...40 10...20 15...25 2
W ms ms
Between coil de-energisation and opening of the N/O contacts ms ms closing of the N/C contacts ms Maximum immunity to microbreaks
Schemes : page 7/9
7/2
Control relays
k control relays
Contact characteristics of control relays and instantaneous contact blocks

Number of auxiliary contacts On CAp K On LA1 K Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to BS 5424 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to VDE 0110 group C Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 Conventional thermal current For ambient temperature y 50 C (Ith) Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity U min (DIN 19 240) I min Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 and VDE 0660, gG fuse Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947 I rms Short-time rating Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap distance CAp K and LA1 K: linked contacts conforming to INRS, BIA and CNA specifications V V V V V A Hz V mA A 4 2 or 4 for CA2 K and CA3 K, 2 for CA4 K 690 690 690 750 600 10 Up to 400 17 5 10
A A A A M mm
110 80 90 110 > 10 0.5 (see schemes page 7/9)

a.c. supply, category AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4)
Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load.
V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 440 600 52 28 8 300 51 26 7 230 50 25 6 200
V 1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity VA VA VA VA
24
110/ 127 48 96 240 17 34 86 7 14 36 1000 2050 5000
48
220/ 380/ 440 600/ 230 400 690 440 800 880 1200 158 288 317 500 66 120 132 200 10 000 14 000 13 000 9000
Time constant in ms
1 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: b maximum of 50 operating cycles at 10 s intervals (power broken = making current x cos 0.7). 2 b b b Electrical durability of contacts for: 1 million operating cycles (2a) 3 million operating cycles (2b) 10 million operating cycles (2c ).
Power broken in VA
Power broken in W
16 000 10 000 8000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 800 600 500 400 300 200 1000 700 500 300 200 100 80 60 50 40 30 20 10 8 6 12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V
4 3
250
200 140
3 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: b maximum of 20 operating cycles at 10 s intervals with current passing for 0.5 s per operating cycle. 4 Thermal limit
2a 2b 2c
2a 2b
24 48
100
100 80 60 40
50
2c
20 110 120 220 380 500 440 690 V
Schemes : page 7/9
7/3
References
Control relays
k control relays
For a.c. or d.c. control circuit
Control relays for a.c. control circuit

816892
b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. b Screws in the open "ready-to-tighten" position.

Control circuit Consumption Auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
kg

CA2 KN40pp 4.5 VA 4 3 2 1 2 CA2 KN40pp CA2 KN31pp CA2 KN22pp 0.180 0.180 0.180
816891

4.5 VA 4 3 2 1 2 CA2 KN403pp CA2 KN313pp CA2 KN223pp 0.180 0.180 0.180

4.5 VA CA2 KN403pp 4 3 2 1 2 CA2 KN407pp CA2 KN317pp CA2 KN227pp 0.180 0.180 0.180

4.5 VA 4 3 2 1 2 CA2 KN405pp CA2 KN315pp CA2 KN225pp 0.210 0.210 0.210
Control relays for d.c. control circuit

819411

3W 4 3 2 1 2 CA3 KN40pp CA3 KN31pp CA3 KN22pp 0.225 0.225 0.225

3W CA3 KN407pp 4 3 2 1 2 CA3 KN403pp CA3 KN313pp CA3 KN223pp 0.225 0.225 0.225


(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Control relays CA2 K (0.8...1.15 Uc) (0.85...1.1 Uc) Volts a 12 20 24(2) 36 42 48 110 115 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/ 50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690 Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 Control relays CA3 K (0.8...1.15 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24(2) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 200 220 230 240 250 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD LD MD MPD MUD UD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3 . (2) When connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the coil of the control relay, select a 20 V coil (a code Z7, c code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
Schemes : page 7/9
7/4
References
Control relays
k control relays
For d.c. control circuit
Low consumption control relays (d.c. control circuit)

816895
Control circuit Consumption
Auxiliary contacts
Weight
kg

1.8 W CA4 KN40ppp 4 3 2 1 2 CA4 KN40pp CA4 KN31pp CA4 KN22pp 0.235 0.235 0.235

1.8 W 4 3 2 1 2 CA4 KN403pp CA4 KN313pp CA4 KN223pp 0.235 0.235 0.235


(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Control relays CA4 K (Wide range coil: 0.7...1.3 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3
Schemes : page 7/9
7/5
References
Control relays
k control relays
Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contact blocks

816899
Clip-on front mounting, 1 per control relay

Connection Composition Reference Weight
LA1 KN20
Screw clamp terminals
2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1
2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4
LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1
KN20 KN02 KN11 KN40 (1) KN31 (1) KN22 (1) KN13 (1 ) KN04 (1) KN203 KN023 KN113 KN403 (1) KN313 (1) KN223 (1) KN133 (1) KN043 (1) KN207 KN027 KN117 KN407 (1) KN317 (1) KN227 (1) KN137 (1) KN047 (1)
kg 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
816900
Spring terminals
LA1 KN40
Faston connectors 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

b b b b b
816899
Relay output with common point changeover contact, a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum Control voltage 0.85...1.1 Uc Maximum switching capacity 250 VA or 150 W Operating temperature - 10...+ 60 C Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period 0.5 s after the time delay period
Clip-on front mounting, 1 per control relay

Voltage Type Timing range Composition Reference Weight
7
LA2 KT2p V a or c 24...48 On-delay
s 1...30
LA2 KT2E
kg 0.040
a 110...240
On-delay
1...30
LA2 KT2U
0.040
Other versions
Electronic timers type RE4. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) Block of 4 contacts for use on CA2 K and CA3 K.
Schemes : page 7/9
7/6
References
Control relays
k control relays
Mounting and marking accessories
Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator

Mounting and connection Clips onto front of relay with locating device. No tools required. Type For voltages a and c 12...24 V a and c 32...48 V a and c 50...129 V LA4 K ppp a and c 130...250 V Diode + Zener diode (2) c 12...24 V c 32...48 V RC (3) a 220...250 V Sold in lots of 5 Unit reference LA4 KE1B Weight kg 0.010
Varistor (1)
LA4 KE1E
0.010
LA4 KE1FC
0.010
LA4 KE1UG
0.010
LA4 KC1B
0.010
LA4 KC1E
0.010
LA4 KA1U
0.010
Description Application Sold in lots of Clip-on 1 Unit reference LA9 D973 Weight kg 0.025
Mounting plates
On 1 4 rail
On 2 4 rails
110/120 mm fixing centres
10
DX1 AP25
0.065
LA9 D973
Marking accessories
Description Application Sold in lots of 100 Unit reference LA9 D90 Weight kg 0.001
Marker holder
Clip-on fixing on front face
Clip-in markers
4 maximum per relay
Strips of 10 identical numbers 0 to 9 Strips of 10 identical capital letters A to Z
25
AB1 Rp (4)
0.002
25
AB1 Gp (4)
0.002
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Polarised component. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (3) Protection by limiting the transient voltage to 3 Uc max. and limitation of the oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time). (4) Complete the reference by replacing the dot with the required character.
7/7
Control relays
7
k control relays
Control relays
CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K
On panel On printed circuit board
LA1 K
=
8,65
= = =
A1
58
58
50
45
50
35
57
35 45
A2
On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
58
57
45
LA9 D973
On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates
DX1 AP25
On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates
DZ5 ME5
50
53
120
57
21
35 45
57
57
27
45
LA2 KT
On control relay
LA2 KT 27
38
38
38
57
Suppressor modules
LA4 K
On control relay
25
LA4 K
22
57
Schemes: page 7/9
7/8
58
22
58
110
Schemes
Control relays
k control relays
Control relays
CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K
4 N/O
13/NO 23/NO 33/NO 43/NO

CA3 K
3 N/O + 1 N/C
13/NO 33/NO 43/NO 21/NC
CA4 K
2 N/O + 2 N/C
13/NO 43/NO 21/NC 31/NC
A1
A2
A1
A2
A2
14
24
34
44
A1
14
22
32
14
22
34
44
44
A2
+A1
+ A1
_ A2
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks LA1 K

For CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K
2 N/O LA1 KN20, LA1 KN207
53/NO 63/NO
For CA2 K, CA3 K

1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1 KN11, LA1 KN117
53/NO 61/NC
2 N/C LA1 KN02, LA1 KN027

51/NC 61/NC
4 N/O LA1 KN40, LA1 KN407

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
3 N/O + 1 N/C LA1 KN31, LA1 KN317

53/NO 73/NO 83/NO 61/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C LA1 KN22, LA1 KN227

53/NO 83/NO 84 61/NC 62 71/NC 72
52
62
62
54
64
54
64
54
74
84
54
62
74
84
1 N/O + 3 N/C LA1 KN13, LA1 KN137

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
4 N/C LA1 KN04, LA1 KN047

51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
52
62
72
54
62
72
Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2 KT

For CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K
1 C/O LA2 KT2
A1
16 18
Suppressor modules
LA4 KC LA4 KE
A2
15
82
82
54
Dimensions, mounting: page 7/8
7/9
Characteristics
Control relays
Mini-control relays types CAp SK and CA2 SKE
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947, VDE 0110 gr C, BS 5424, CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508 Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068 (DIN 50015) Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Ambient air temperature Storage around the device Operation Maximum operating altitude Without derating Operating position V 690
IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424 UL, CSA TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct finger contact - 50+ 70 - 20+ 50 2000 Horizontal axis
C C m
Vertical axis
Without derating Connection by connectors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Pozidriv n 1 head Conforming to standards EN 50005 and EN 50011 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m Min. 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 0.8 Up to 4 contacts
Without derating Max. 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
Tightening torque Terminal referencing

Control relay type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits For operation (y 50 C) For drop-out Average consumption Inrush at 20 C and at Uc Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time Between coil energisation and at 20 C and at Uc opening of the N/C contacts closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and opening of the N/O contacts closing of the N/C contacts Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil in millions of operating cycles Standard c coil V CA2 SK a 24400 0.851.1 Uc u 0.20 Uc 16 VA 4.2 VA 1.4 816 714 68 810 1200 10 CA2 SKE CA3 SK c 1272 0.851.1 Uc u 0.10 Uc 2.2 W 2.2 W 2.2 1018 812 46 68 1200 10
W ms ms ms ms
23 VA 4.9 VA 1.5
Schemes : page 7/15
7/10
Control relays
Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-control relays and instantaneous contact blocks

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V V Up to 690 690 Conforming to IEC 96047, BS 5424, VDE 0110 group C, CSA C 22-2 n 14 Conventional rated For ambient temperature thermal current (Ith) y 55 C Frequency of the operational current Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 and VDE 0660, gl fuse
A Hz A
10 Up to 400 10

a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4). V 1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity VA VA VA VA 110/ 127 48 96 240 17 34 86 7 14 36 1000 2050 5000 24 48 220/ 230 440 158 66 10000 380/ 400 800 288 120 14000 440 880 317 132 13 000 d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230
Schemes : page 7/15
7/11
References
Control relays
Mini-control relays types CA2 SK and CA3 SK
Mini-control relay type CA2 SKE with alternating contacts
Mini-control relays
b Width of mini-control relays 27 mm. b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail. b Connection by connectors.
Control circuit supply Auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) CA2 SK20pp CA2 SK11pp CA3 SK20pp CA3 SK11pp Weight
533664
CA2 SK20pp
a.c. supply
2 1
1 1
kg 0.132 0.132 0.132 0.132
d.c. supply
2 1
Mini-control relay with alternating contacts

This mini-control relay with alternating contacts (see function diagram page 7/15) makes it possible to automatically split the operating time between 2 circuits of a redundant system. By regularly energising the "safety circuits", this device makes it possible to ensure that they are operating correctly. b b b b b
CA2 SKE20pp
533665
Width of mini-control relay 45 mm. Fixing by 4 screws. Connection by connectors. Cannot be fitted with front-mounted auxiliary contact block. Cannot be fitted with coil suppressor module.
Auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) CA2 SKE20pp Weight
Control circuit supply
a.c. supply
kg 0.175
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Mini-control relays CA2 SK and CA2 SKE Volts a 24 48 110 120 220 230 240 50/60 Hz Code B7 E7 F7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Mini-control relays CA3 SK Volts c 12 24 36 48 72 Code JD BD CD ED SD
380 Q7
400 V7
Schemes: page 7/15
7/12
References
Control relays
Mini-control relays types CA2 SK and CA3 SK
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor modules

533666
Clip-on front mounting

For use on control relays Maximum number of blocks per contactor Composition Reference Weight
CA2 SK20 LA1 SK11
2 1
2 1
LA1 SK20 LA1 SK02 LA1 SK11
kg 0.022 0.022 0.022
Suppressor modules
533667
Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor
For use on control relays CA2 SK and CA3 SK LA4 SKp1p Type For voltages a and c 24 V48 V Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference LA4 SKE1E LA4 SKE1U LA4 SKC1U Weight kg 0.003 0.003 0.003
Varistor (1)
a and c 110 V250 V 10 Diode (2) c 24 V250 V 10
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
Schemes: page 7/15
7/13
Control relays
Dimensions
Mini-control relays
CA2 SK and CA3 SK
55,5
27
84,5 55,5 27
56
LA4 SK
3,5 LA1 SK (1) 3,5
(1) Only on CA2 SK20.
Mounting
Mini-control relays
CA2 SK and CA3 SK On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
55,5
27
Dimensions
CA2 SKE
68 45
56
7
4
Mounting
CA2 SKE
On panel On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
58
68
45
48-50
34-35
Schemes : page 7/15
7/14
58
56
Schemes
Control relays
Schemes
CA2 SK20, CA3 SK20
2 N/O
13/NO 23/NO
CA2 SK11, CA3 SK11

1 N/O + 1 N/C
13/NO 14 A2 14 24 21/NO 22
Energised De-energised Close Open Close Open
A1
A2
14
24
CA2 SKE
2 N/O
13/NO 23/NO
A1
A2
A1
14
24

2 N/O LA1 SK20
33/NO 43/NO
2 N/C LA1 SK02

31/NC 41/NC
A2 13 23
A1
CA2 SKE
Function diagram
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1 SK11

33/NO 34 41/NC 42
34
44
32
42
7/15
Characteristics
TeSys control relays

TeSys d control relays
Control relay type
CAD a
CAD c
CAD low consumption 690
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Overvoltage category III and degree of pollution 3 Conforming to UL, CSA Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60536 and VDE 0106 V 690 690
V kV
600 6
600 6
600 6
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Separation of electrical circuits Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device
Reinforced insulation up to 400 V IEC 60947-5-1, N-F C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5 UL, CSA
Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation, conforming to IEC 60255 (0.81.1 UC) For operation at Uc Without derating Without derating in the following positions C C C m
TH Front face protected against direct finger contact IP 2X - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70 3000 - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70 3000 Protection against direct finger contact - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70 3000
30
180
30
90
90
180
1 80
Shock resistance (1) half sine wave for 11ms Vibration resistance (1) 5300 Hz Screw clamp connections
Control relay open Control relay closed Control relay open Control relay closed Flexible 1 conductor 2 without cable end Flexible 1 conductor with 2 cable end Solid conductor 1 without cable 2 end Tightening torque conductor conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 14 14
10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 14 14
10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 14 14
conductor conductors conductor conductors
14 12.5 14 14 1.7
14 12.5 14 14 1.7
14 12.5 14 14 1.7
1 or 2 flexible or rigid conductors mm2 12.5 12.5 12.5 without cable end (1) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state, with coil supplied at Uc.
Schemes : page 7/25
7/16

Control relay type
CAD a
CAD c
CAD low consumption c 572 0.71.25 Uc 0.10.25 Uc Inrush or sealed: 2.4 45

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits Operation With coil 50/60 Hz With standard coil, wide range Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50/60 Hz (at 50 Hz) VA V 12690 0.81.1 Uc at 50 Hz 0.851.1 Uc at 60 Hz 0.30.6 Uc Inrush: 70 sealed: 8 419 12440 0.71.25 Uc 0.10.25 Uc Inrush or sealed: 5.4 3545
With standard coil Operating time (at rated control circuit voltage and at 20 C)
Between coil energisation ms and - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts ms Between coil de-energisation ms and - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts ms
1222 412
5055 614
6070 1015
617 2 3 30
20 2 3 30 28
25 2 3 30 40
Short supply failure Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles
Time constant L/R
Maximum duration without ms affecting hold-in of the device In operating cycles per second With coil 50/60 Hz (at 50 Hz) With standard coil c wide range ms
Schemes : page 7/25
7/17

Characteristics of instantaneous contacts incorporated in the control relay

Number of contacts Up to Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Conventional For ambient temperature 60 C thermal current (Ith) Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity U min I min Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to I rms IEC 60947-5-1 Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms V V V A Hz V mA 5 690 690 600 10 25...400 17 5 gG fuse: 10 A a : 140, c : 250 A A A M Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Philips head n 2 and 6 ms N.m 100 120 140 > 10 1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation) 1.2 Linked contacts in association with auxiliary contacts LAD N The 3 N/O contacts and the 2 N/C contacts of CAD N32 are linked mechanically by one mobile contact carrier.
Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Tightening torque Non-overlap distance Linked contacts
Conforming to draft standard IEC 60947-4-5
Schemes : page 7/25
7/18

Rated operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 60947-5-1)

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos 0.4).
V VA VA VA 24 60 16 4 48 120 32 8 115 280 80 20 230 560 160 40 400 960 280 70 440 1050 300 80 600 1440 420 100

1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A 4
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the power.
V W W W 24 120 70 25 48 90 50 18 125 75 38 14 250 68 33 12 440 61 28 10

1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V
24 V 48 V 125 V
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
440 V
0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 4 6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A
Schemes : page 7/25
7/19
References

TeSys d control relays and add-on blocks
See page opposite for mounting possibilities according to control relay type and rating
7/20
References

Control relays for connection by screw clamp terminals

Type Number of contacts Composition Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (1) Standard voltages a Instantaneous 5 5 3 CAD 50 pp 2 CAD 50 pp (3) CAD 32 pp (3) B7 B7 P7 P7 c BD BD LC (2) BL BL kg 0.580 0.580 Weight
Control relays for connection by spring terminals

Instantaneous 5 5 3 2 CAD 503 pp CAD 323 pp B7 B7 P7 P7 BD BD BL BL 0.580 0.580
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals

For use in normal operating environments
Number of contacts Maximum number per relay Clip-on mounting front side 1 1 1 1 1 on LH side 1 on LH side 1 on LH side Composition Reference Weight
CAD 32 pp
kg 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 1 2 LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD N11 8N11 (6) N20 8N20 (6) N02 8N02 (6) N22 N13 N40 N04 N31 C22 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050
4 (4)
4 (4) 1 Including 1 N/O and 1 N/C make before break. CAD 503pp Number of contacts Maximum number per relay Front mounting 1 Composition
With dust and damp protected contacts, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Reference Weight
4 (4)
protected (5) 2 2 2 2 2 2
kg 2 1 1 LA1 DX20 LA1 DX02 LA1 DY20 LA1 DZ40 LA1 DZ31 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.050 0.050
CAD 323 pp
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

This type of connection is not possible for contact blocks LAD 8 and blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the digit 3 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N113. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). a.c. supply Volts a 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 d.c. supply (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) Volts c 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 U from 0.7 to 1.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD Low consumption (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250 Code AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL (2) LC: low consumption. (3) To order control relays with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of the selected reference. Example: CAD50pp becomes CAD506 pp. (4) Blocks with 4 auxiliary contacts cannot be used on low consumption control relays. (5) Product fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals. (6) These contact blocks cannot be used on low consumption control relays. Characteristics : pages 7/16 and 7/17 Dimensions : page 7/24 Schemes : page 7/25
7/21
References

Add-on blocks
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals (1)
Number and type of contacts 1 N/C and 1 N/O Maximum number per relay Front mounting 1 Time delay Type On-delay Range 0.13 s (2) 0.130 s 10180 s 130 s (3) 0.13 s (2) 0.130 s 10180 s Reference Weight kg LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD T0 T2 T4 S2 R0 R2 R4 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
Off-delay (Sealing cover: see page 5/73) LAD T
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals

Add the digit 3 to the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T03 .

Unlatching control Manual or electric Maximum number per relay Front mounting 1 Basic reference to be completed (5) LAD 6K10 p Weight kg 0.070
Suppressor modules
These modules clip onto the top of the control relay and the electrical connection is instantly made. Fitting of an input module is still possible. LAD 6K10
RC circuits (Resistor-Capacitor)
b Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to "high frequency" interference. b Voltage limited to 3 Uc maximum and oscillating frequency limited to 400Hz maximum. b Slight time delay on drop-out (1.2 to 2 times the normal time). For Operational Reference mounting on voltage CAD a a 2448 V LAD 4RCE a 110240 V LAD 4RCU
Weight kg 0.012 0.012

b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage value to 2Uc maximum. b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. b Slight time delay on drop-out (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). CAD a a 2448 V LAD 4VE a 50127 V LAD 4VG a 110250 V LAD 4VU
0.012 0.012 0.012
Freewheel diode
LAD 4pp b No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. b Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time). b Polarised component. CAD c c 24250 V
LAD 4DDL
0.012
Bidirectional peak limiting diode

b Protection provided by limiting the transient overvoltage value to 2Uc maximum. b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. CAD a a 24 V LAD 4TB a 72 V LAD 4TS CAD c c 24 V LAD 4TBDL c 72 V LAD 4TSDL c 125 V LAD 4TGDL c 250 V LAD 4TUDL c 600 V LAD 4TXDL
0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012
LAD 4DDL ou LAD 4T pDL
(1) These contact blocks cannot be used on low consumption control relays. (2) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. (3) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact. (4) Power should not be simultaneously applied or maintained to the mechanical latching block of the CAD N. The duration of the control signal to the mechanical latching block and the CAD N should be u 100 ms. (5) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts a and c 24 32/36 42/48 60/72 100 110/127 220/240 256/277 380/415 Code B C E EN K F M U Q (6) CAD pp d.c. and low consumption control relays are fitted with a built-in bi-directional peak limiting diode suppressor as standard. On control relays produced after 15th July 2004, this diode is removable. It can therefore be replaced by the user (see references LAD 4T ppp above). It can also be replaced by a freewheel diode LAD 4DDL . If a d.c. or low consumption control replay is used without suppression, the standard suppressor should be replaced with a blanking plug LAD 9DL.
Schemes : page 7/25
7/22
References


Description For marking Sheet of 64 blank legends, self-adhesive, 8 x 33 mm For mounting on CAD, LAD (4 contacts) Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.200
LAD 21 LAD 22
Sheet of 112 blank legends, LAD (2 contacts), self-adhesive, 8 x 12 mm LAD T Strips of blank, self-adhesive All products legends for printing by plotter (4 sets of 5 strips) SIS Label labelling Multi-language version: software for legends LAD 21 English, French, German, and LAD 22, supplied on Italian, Spanish CD-Rom Legend holder, snap-in, LC1 D09...38 8 x 18 mm LC1DT20...40 LADN (4 contacts) LAD T, LAD R For protection Sealing cover LAD T, LAD R Safety cover preventing CAD access to the moving contact carrier 35
LAD 24
XBY 2U
0.100
SIS-L
s uette are ion d'tiq ette softw di etich crat oftware etiquetas lling ione Labe iel de ngss crear Logic hriftu para la creaz Besc are Softw are per Softw
abel
Gerin n Merlin Modico D canique Square Teleme
100
LAD 90
0.001
XBY 2U
1 1
LA9 D901 LAD 9ET1
0.005 0.004
Spare parts: coils

LA9 D901 Specifications b Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 70 VA at 50 Hz, - sealed (cos = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 8 VA at 60 Hz, b Operating range ( < 60 C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc Control circuit Average resistance Inductance of Reference (1) voltage Uc at 20 C 10 % closed circuit 50/60 Hz V V H 12 6.3 0.26 LXD 1J7 21 (2) 5.6 0.24 LXD 1Z7 24 6.19 0.26 LXD 1B7 32 12.3 0.48 LXD 1C7 36 LXD 1CC7 42 19.15 0.77 LXD 1D7 48 25 1 LXD 1E7 60 LXD 1EE7 100 LXD 1K7 110 130 5.5 LXD 1F7 115 LXD 1FE7 120 159 6.7 LXD 1G7 127 192.5 7.5 LXD 1FC7 200 LXD 1L7 208 417 16 LXD 1LE7 220/230 539 22 LXD 1M7 (3) 230 595 21 LXD 1P7 230/240 645 25 LXD 1U7 (4) 277 781 30 LXD 1W7 380/400 1580 60 LXD 1Q7 400 1810 64 LXD 1V7 415 1938 74 LXD 1N7 440 2242 79 LXD 1R7 480 2300 85 LXD 1T7 2499 LXD 1S7 500 575 3294 LXD 1SC7 600 3600 135 LXD 1X7 690 5600 190 LXD 1Y7 (1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code. (2) Voltage for special coils fitted in control relays with serial timer module with 24 V supply. (3) This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz. (4) This coil can be used on 230/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz.
Weight kg 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
LAD 9ET1
LXD 1
Schemes : page 7/25
7/23

7
Dimensions
CAD a CAD c or LC (low consumption)
c c1 c2 c3
12,5 (LAD 8)
45 c1 c2 c3
45
CAD
b c
32 50
77 84 86 117 129 137 141
323 503
99 84 86 117 129 137 141
CAD
b c
32 50
77 93 95 126 138 146 150
323 503
99 93 95 126 138 146 150
without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LAD 6K10 c3 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LAD 6K10
c3 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
Mounting
CAD
Panel mounted Mounted on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200
(1)
=
= = 78
60/70
45
CAD a
CAD c or LC
95 c (AM1 DP200) (2) c (AM1 DP200) (2) (2) With cover
35
CAD a
88 96
CAD c or LC
97 105
with cover
86
(1) 2 elongated holes 4.5 x 9 Mounted on plate AM1 P
AF1 EA4
35
CAD a
c with cover 86
CAD c or LC
95
60/70
Schemes : page 7/25
7/24
Schemes

Schemes
5 N/O CAD 50
13/NO 23/NO 33/NO 43/NO 03/NO
3 N/O + 2 N/C CAD 32

13/NO 43/NO 44 03/NO 04 21/NC 22 31/NC 32
A1
A2
A1
A2
14
24
34
44

1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11
53/NO 61/NC
04
14
LAD 8N11 (1)

161/NC (172) 153/NO (184)
2 N/O LAD N20

53/NO 63/NO
LAD 8N20 (1)

153/NO (184) 163/NC (174)
2 N/C LAD 8N02

151/NC (182) 161/NC (172)
LAD N02
51/NC 52 83/NO 53/NO 61/NC 62
54
62
54
64
152 (181)
53/NO
154 (183)
162 (171)
(1) The figures in brackets are for the device mounted on the RH side of the control relay. 2 N/O + 2F N/C LAD N22
53/NO 83/NO 61/NC 71/NC
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
4 N/O LAD N40

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
4 N/C LAD N04

71/NC 51/NC 61/NC 81/NC
154 (183)
164 (173)
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31

73/NO 74 83/NO 84 61/NC 62
54
62
72
84
54
64
74
84
62
72
82
72
52
2 N/O + 2 N/C including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LAD C22
53/NO 87/NO 61/NC 75/NC
54
With dust and damp protected contacts 2 N/O protected 2 N/C protected
2 N/O protected (2)
62
82
54
2 N/O protected + 2 N/O non protected LA1 DZ40

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO
162 (171)
LA1 DX20
53/NO 63/NO
LA1 DX02
51/NC 61/NC
LA1 DY20
53/NO 63/NO
2 N/O protected + 1 N/O + 1 N/C non protected LA1 DZ31

73/NO 74 61/NC 83/NO 84
54
62
76
88
64
52
62
54
64
54
74
84
54
(2) Product fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals.
64
54
62
7
Mechanical latch blocks
LAD 6K10
A1
65/NC
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD T
67/NO 55/NC
LAD S
67/NO 55/NC
Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD R

57/NO
56
68
56
68
58
66
A2
E2
E1
Schemes : page 7/25
7/25
Selection guide
Zelio Time
Timing relays
Applications
These timing relays enable simple automation cycles to be set up using wired logic. They can also be used to complement the functions of PLCs. Solid state Timing relays with solid state output reduce the amount of wiring required (wired in series). The durability of these timing relays is independent of the number of operating cycles. Relay Relay outputs provide complete isolation between the supply and outut circuits. It is possible to have several output circuits.
Output
Type
Modular
Industrial
Modular
Industrial
Timing ranges
7 ranges: 1 or 2 ranges, 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, depending on model: 1 h, 10 h, 100 h 10 s, 30 s, 300 s, 60 min
Depending on model: 6 ranges: 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, 1 h, 10 h 7 ranges: 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, 1 h, 10 h, 100 h
Depending on model : 4 ranges: 0.6 s, 2.5 s, 20 s, 160 s 7 ranges: 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, 1 h, 10 h, 100 h 7 ranges: 1 s, 3 s, 10 s, 30 s, 100 s, 300 s, 10 min 10 ranges: 1 s, 3 s, 10 s, 30 s, 100 s, 300 s, 30 min, 300 min, 30 h, 300 h
Relay type
RE11 Lp pp
RE9
RE11 Rp pp
RE 88 865 ppp RE7
Pages
Please consult our catalogue Automation and relay functions.
7/26
These timing relays enable simple automation cycles to be set up using wired logic. They can also be used to complement the functions of PLCs. Relay Relay outputs provide complete isolation between the supply and output circuits. It is possible to have several output circuits.
Optimum
Plug-in Universal Miniature 7 ranges: 0,1 s...1 s 1 s...10 s 0,1 min...1 min 1 min...10 min 0,1 h...1 h 1 h...10 h 10 h...100 h
Panel-mounted Analogue 14 ranges: 1,2 s, 3 s, 12 s, 30 s, 120 s, 300 s, 12 min, 30 min, 120 min, 300 min, 12 h, 30 h, 120 h, 300 h Digital Depending on model: 7 range : 99.99 s, 999.99 s, 99 min 59 s, 99.99 min, 999.9 min, 99 h 59 min, 999.9 h 11 ranges: 99.99 s, 999.99 s, 9999 s, 99 min 59 s, 99.99 min, 999.9 min, 9999 min, 99 h 59 min, 99,99 h, 999.9 h, 9999 h
1 range, depending on model: 0.5 s, 3 s, 10 s, 30 s, 300 s, 30 min
7 ranges: 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, 1 h, 10 h, 100 h
RE8
RE 88 867 ppp
RE XL pTMpp
RE 48A ppp
RE 88 857 ppp
7/27
Selection guide
Zelio Control
Measurement and control relays
Applications
Supply control relays 3-phase 3-phase + neutral
Functions
Control : - rotational direction, - presence of phases, - undervoltage, - overvoltage and undervoltage - asymmetry of phases
Control : - overvoltage and undervoltage - presence of neutral,
Relay output Width
1 or 2 C/O contacts 22.5 mm 45 mm
2 C/O contacts 45 mm
Relay type
RM4 Tppp RM 84 873 004 RM 84 873 299 RM 84 873 5pp
RM 84 873 01p RM 84 873 201 RM 84 873 3pp
RM 84 873 211
Pages
7/28
Voltage measurement relays
Current measurement relays
Control : - overvoltage a 50 mV...5 V a 1..0.100 V a 30..0.500 V
Control : - overvoltage or undervoltage a 50 mV...5 V a 0.2...60 V a 1...100 V a 15...600 V a 30...500 V a 0.2...60 V a 15...600 V a orc 20...80 V a orc 65...260 V 1 or 2 C/O contacts 1 C/O contact 45 mm
Control : Control : - overvoltage and - overcurrent undervoltage 1...20 A with built-in TI
3 mA...1 A
Control : overcurrent and undercurrent 3 mA...1 A 0.3...15 A 2...500 mA 2...500 mA 0.1...10 A 0.1...10 A 10...100 A with built-in TI
1 C/O contact 22.5 mm
2 C/O contacts 22.5 mm
1 C/O contact 17.5 mm 22.5 mm
1 or 2 C/O contacts 45 mm
RM4 UA0pp RM4 UA3p RM 84 872 3pp RM4 UB3p RM 84 871 102 RM4 JA01p RM4 JA31pp RM4 JA32pp RM 84 872 0pp RM 84 871 0pp RM 84 871 3pp
7/29
Selection guide
(continued)
7
Zelio Control
Measurement and control relays
Applications
Liquid level control relays
Functions
Control : - empty
Control : - empty or fill
Relay output Width
1 C/O contact 22.5 mm Plug-in 8 or 11-pin
1 or 2 C/O contacts 22.5 mm
Relay type
RM 84 870 1p1
RM 84 870 30p RM 84 870 807
RM4 L pppp RM 84 870 00p
Pages
7/30
Liquid level control relays
Motor control relays
Control : - empty or fill with alarm
Control : - empty and fill
Control : - underspeed
Control : - overload and underload (cos ) 2 C/O contacts
2 C/O contacts 45 mm
1 C/O contact
1 C/O contact Plug-in 8 or 11-pin
1 C/O contact 45 mm
RM 84 870 50p
RM 84 870 604
RM 84 870 40p RM 84 870 808
RM 84 874 30p
RM 84 873 40p
7/31
Contents
8 - Technical information
b Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/2 b Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors at nominal load . . . . . . . page 8/3 b Protective treatment of equipment according to climatic environment . . page 8/4 b Product standards and certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/6 b Degrees of protection provided by enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/8
8/1
General
Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1
based on rated operational current Ie and rated operational voltage Ue
Contactors
Electrical durability: making and breaking conditions Occasional duty: making and breaking conditions Making I U 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue Breaking I U 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue
a.c. supply
Typical applications Resistors, non inductive or slightly inductive loads Motors Slip ring motors: starting, breaking. Squirrel cage motors: starting, breaking whilst motor running. Squirrel cage motors: starting, reversing, inching Utilisation category AC-1 Making I U Ie Ue cos 0.95 Breaking I U Ie Ue cos 0.95 cos 0.8 cos 0.8
AC-2
2.5 Ie
Ue
0.65
2.5 Ie
Ue
0.65
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
0.65
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
0.65
AC-3 Ie y (1) Ie > (2) AC-4 Ie y (1) Ie > (2)
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
1 Ie 1 Ie
0.17 Ue 0.17 Ue
0.65 0.35
10 Ie 10 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
8 Ie 8 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
12 Ie 12 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
10 Ie 10 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
d.c. supply
Typical applications Resistors, non inductive or slightly inductive loads Shunt wound motors: starting, reversing, inching Series wound motors: starting, reversing, inching Utilisation category DC-1 Making I U Ie Ue L/R (ms) 1 Breaking I U Ie Ue Making L/R (ms) I U 1 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue Breaking L/R (ms) I U 1 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue L/R (ms) 1
DC-3
2.5 Ie
Ue
2.5 Ie
Ue
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
2.5
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
2.5
DC-5
2.5 Ie
Ue
7.5
2.5 Ie
Ue
7.5
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
15
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
15
Control relays and auxiliary contacts

Electrical durability: making and breaking conditions Occasional duty: making and breaking conditions Making I U 6 Ie 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 1.1 Ue Breaking I U 6 Ie 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 1.1 Ue
a.c. supply
Typical applications Electromagnets y 72 VA > 72 VA Utilisation category AC-14 AC-15 Making I U 10 Ie Ue cos 0.7 Breaking I U Ie Ue cos 0.4 cos 0.7 0.3 cos 0.7 0.3
d.c. supply
Typical applications Electromagnets
Utilisation category DC-13
Making I U Ie Ue
L/R (ms) 6 P (3)
Breaking I U Ie Ue
Making L/R (ms) I U 6 P (3) 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue
Breaking L/R (ms) I U 6 P (3) 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue
L/R (ms) 6 P (3)
(1) Ie y 17 A for electrical durability, Ie y 100 A for occasional duty. (2) Ie > 17 A for electrical durability, Ie > 100 A for occasional duty. (3) The value 6 P (in watts) is based on practical observations and is considered to represent the majority of d.c. magnetic loads up to the maximum limit of P = 50 W i.e. 6 P = 300 ms = L/R. Above this, the loads are made up of smaller loads in parallel. The value 300 ms is therefore a maximum limit whatever the value of current drawn.
8/2
General
Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors at nominal load
3-phase 4-pole motors

Current values for power in kW
Rated operational power(1) Indicative rated operational current values at: 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
Current values for power in hp

Rated operational power(2) hp 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Indicative rated operational current values at: 110 120 V A 4.4 6.4 8.4 12 13.6 19.2 30.4 44 56 84 108 136 160 208 260 200 V A 2.5 3.7 4.8 6.9 7.8 11 17.5 25.3 32.2 48.3 62.1 78.2 92 120 150 177 221 285 359 414 552 208 V A 2.4 3.5 4.6 6.6 7.5 10.6 16.7 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88 114 143 169 211 273 343 396 528 220 240 V A 2.2 3.2 4.2 6 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 604 722 828 954 1030 1180 380 415 V A 1.3 1.8 2.3 3.3 4.3 6.1 9.7 14 18 27 34 44 51 66 83 103 128 165 208 240 320 403 482 560 636 786 440 480 V A 1.1 1.6 2.1 3 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 515 590 550 600 V A 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 242 289 336 382 412 472
kW A A A A 0.06 0.35 0.2 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.52 0.3 0.24 0.17 0.12 0.7 0.44 0.32 0.23 0.18 1 0.6 0.48 0.35 0.25 1.5 0.85 0.68 0.49 0.37 1.9 1.1 0.88 0.64 0.55 2.6 1.5 1.2 0.87 0.75 3.3 1.9 1.5 1.1 1.1 4.7 2.7 2.2 1.6 1.5 6.3 3.6 2.9 2.1 2.2 8.5 4.9 3.9 2.8 3 11.3 6.5 5.2 3.8 4 15 8.5 6.8 4.9 5.5 20 11.5 9.2 6.7 7.5 27 15.5 12.4 8.9 11 38 22 17.6 12.8 15 51 29 23 17 18.5 61 35 28 21 22 72 41 33 24 30 96 55 44 32 37 115 66 53 39 45 140 80 64 47 55 169 97 78 57 75 230 132 106 77 90 278 160 128 93 110 340 195 156 113 132 400 230 184 134 160 487 280 224 162 200 609 350 280 203 250 748 430 344 250 315 940 540 432 313 355 1061 610 488 354 400 1200 690 552 400 500 1478 850 680 493 560 1652 950 760 551 630 1844 1060 848 615 710 2070 1190 952 690 800 2340 1346 1076 780 900 2640 1518 1214 880 1000 2910 1673 1339 970 (1) Values conforming to standard IEC 60072-1 (at 50 Hz). (2) Values conforming to standard UL 508 (at 60 Hz).
Note : These values are given as a guide. They may vary depending on the type of motor, its polarity and the manufacturer.
8/3
General
Protective treatment of equipment according to climatic environment
Depending on the climatic and environmental conditions in which the equipment is placed, Schneider Electric can offer specially adapted products to meet your requirements. In order to make the correct choice of protective finish, two points should be remembered: b the prevailing climate of the country is never the only criterion, b only the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the equipment need be considered.
All climates treatment TC

This is the standard treatment for Telemecanique brand equipment and is suitable for the vast majority of applications. It is the equivalent of treatments described as Klimafest, Climateproof. In particular, it meets the requirements specified in the following publications: b Publication UTE C 63-100 (method l), successive cycles of humid heat at: + 40 C and 95 % relative humidity. b DIN 50016 - Variations of ambient conditions within a climatic chamber: + 23 C and 83 % relative humidity, + 40 C and 92 % relative humidity. It also meets the requirements of the following marine classification societies: BV-LR-GL-DNV-RINA. Characteristics b Steel components are usually treated with zinc. When they have a mechanical function, they may also be painted. b Insulating materials are selected for their high electrical, dielectric and mechanical characteristics. b Metal enclosures have a stoved paint finish, applied over a primary phosphate protective coat, or are galvanised (e.g. some prefabricated busbar trunking components). Limits for use of TC (All climates) treatment b TC treatment is suitable for the following temperatures and humidity: Temperature (C) Relative humidity (%)
20 40 50 95 80 50
TC treatment is therefore suitable for all latitudes and in particular tropical and equatorial regions where the equipment is mounted in normally ventilated industrial premises. Being sheltered from external climatic conditions, temperature variations are small, the risk of condensation is minimised and the risk of dripping water is virtually non-existent. Extension of use of TC (All climates) treatment In cases where the humidity around the equipment exceeds the conditions described above, or in equatorial regions if the equipment is mounted outdoors, or if it is placed in a very humid location (laundries, sugar refineries, steam rooms, etc.), TC treatment can still be used if the following precautions are taken: b The enclosure in which the equipment is mounted must be protected with a TH finish (see next page) and must be well ventilated to avoid condensation and dripping water (e.g. enclosure base plate mounted on spacers). b Components mounted inside the enclosure must have a TC finish. b If the equipment is to be switched off for long periods, a heater must be provided (0.2 to 0.5 kW per square decimetre of enclosure), that switches on automatically when the equipment is turned off. This heater keeps the inside of the enclosure at a temperature slightly higher than the outside surrounding temperature, thereby avoiding any risk of condensation and dripping water (the heat produced by the equipment itself during normal running is sufficient to provide this temperature difference). b Special considerations for "Operator dialog" and "Detection" products: for certain pilot devices, the use of TC treatment can be extended to outdoor use provided their enclosure is made of light alloys, zinc alloys or plastic material. In this case, it is also essential to ensure that the degree of protection against penetration of liquids and solid objects is suitable for the applications involved.
8/4
General
Protective treatment of equipment according to climatic environment
TH treatment for hot and humid environments

This treatment is suitable for hot and humid atmospheres where installations are regularly subject to condensation, dripping water and the risk of fungi. In addition, plastic insulating components are resistant to attacks from insects such as termites and cockroaches. These properties have often led to this treatment being described as Tropical Finish, but this does not mean that all equipment installed in tropical and equatorial regions must systematically have undergone TH treatment. On the other hand, certain operating conditions in temperate climates may well require the use of TH treated equipment (see limitations for use of TC treatment). Special characteristics of TH treatment b All insulating components are made of materials which are either resistant to fungi or treated with a fungicide, and which have increased resistance to creepage (Standards IEC 60112, NF C 26-220, DIN 5348). b Metal enclosures receive a top-coat of stoved, fungicidal paint, applied over a rust inhibiting undercoat. Components with TH treatment may be subject to a surcharge (1). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Protective treatment selection guide

Surrounding environment Duty cycle Internal heating of enclosure when not in use Not necessary No Yes Not necessary Type of climate Protective treatment of of equipencloment sure TC TH TH TH TH
Indoors
No dripping water or condensation Presence of dripping water or condensation Unimportant Frequent switching off for periods of more than 1 day Continuous Unimportant TC Temperate TC Equatorial TH Unimportant TC Unimportant TC
Outdoors (sheltered)
No dripping water or dew Frequent and regular presence of dripping water or dew Unimportant Not necessary Temperate TC Equatorial TH Temperate TC Equatorial TH Unimportant TC Unimportant TC TC TH TH TH TH TH
Exposed outdoors or near the sea

Frequent switching off for periods of more than 1 day Continuous No Yes Not necessary
These treatments cover, in particular, the applications defined by methods I and II of guide UTE C 63-100.
Special precautions for electronic equipment

Electronic products always meet the requirements of TC treatment. A number of them are TH treated as standard. Some electronic products (for example: programmable controllers, flush mountable controllers CCX and flush mountable operator terminals XBT) require the use of an enclosure providing a degree of protection to at least IP 54, as defined by standards IEC 60664 and NF C 20 040, for use in industrial applications or in environmental conditions requiring TH treatment. These electronic products, including flush mountable products, must have a degree of protection to at least IP 20 (provided either by their own enclosure or by their installation method) for restricted access locations where the degree of pollution does not exceed 2 (a test booth not containing machinery or other dust producing activities, for example).
Special treatments
For particularly harsh industrial environments, Schneider Electric is able to offer special protective treatments. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) A large number of the Telemecanique brand products are TH treated as standard and are, therefore, not subject to a surcharge.
8/5
General
Product standards and certifications
Standardisation
Conformity to standards
Telemecanique brand products satisfy, in the majority of cases, national (for example: BS in Great Britain, NF in France, DIN in Germany), European (for example: CENELEC) or international (IEC) standards. These product standards precisely define the performance of the designated products (such as IEC 60947 for low voltage equipment). When used correctly, as designated by the manufacturer and in accordance with regulations and correct practices, these products will allow users to build equipment, machine systems or installations that conform to their appropriate standards (for example: IEC 60204-1, relating to electrical equipment used on industrial machines). Schneider Electric is able to provide proof of conformity of its production to the standards it has chosen to comply with, through its quality assurance system. On request, and depending on the situation, Schneider Electric can provide the following: b a declaration of conformity, b a certificate of conformity (ASEFA/LOVAG), b a homologation certificate or approval, in the countries where this procedure is required or for particular specifications, such as those existing in the merchant navy. Code ANSI BS CEI DIN/VDE EN GOST IEC JIS NBN NEN NF SAA UNE Certification authority Name American National Standards Institute British Standards Institution Comitato Elettrotecnico Italiano Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker Comit Europen de Normalisation Electrotechnique Gosudarstvenne Komitet Standartov International Electrotechnical Commission Japanese Industrial Standard Institut Belge de Normalisation Nederlands Normalisatie Institut Union Technique de l'Electricit Standards Association of Australia Asociacion Espaola de Normalizacion y Certificacion Country Abbreviation ANSI USA BSI Great Britain CEI Italy VDE Germany CENELEC Europe GOST Russia IEC Worldwide JISC Japan IBN Belgium NNI Netherlands UTE France SAA Australia AENOR Spain
European EN standards
These are technical specifications established in conjunction with, and with approval of, the relative bodies within the various CENELEC member countries (European Union, European Free Trade Association and many central and eastern European countries having member or affiliated status). Prepared in accordance with the principle of consensus, the European standards are the result of a weighted majority vote. Such adopted standards are then integrated into the national collection of standards, and contradictory national standards are withdrawn. European standards incorporated within the French collection of standards carry the prefix NF EN. At the 'Union Technique de l'Electricit' (Technical Union of Electricity) (UTE), the French version of a corresponding European standard carries a dual number: European reference (NF EN ) and classification index (C ). Therefore, the standard NF EN 60947-4-1 relating to motor contactors and starters, effectively constitutes the French version of the European standard EN 60947-4-1 and carries the UTE classification C 63-110. This standard is identical to the British standard BS EN 60947-4-1 or the German standard DIN EN 60947-4-1. Whenever reasonably practical, European standards reflect the international standards (IEC). With regard to automation system components and distribution equipment, in addition to complying with the requirements of French NF standards, Telemecanique brand components conform to the standards of all other major industrial countries.
Regulations
European Directives
Opening up of European markets assumes harmonisation of the regulations pertaining to each of the member countries of the European Union. The purpose of the European Directive is to eliminate obstacles hindering the free circulation of goods within the European Union, and it must be applied in all member countries. Member countries are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and to simultaneously withdraw any contradictory regulations. The Directives, in particular those of a technical nature which concern us, only establish the objectives to be achieved, referred to as "essential requirements". The manufacturer must take all the necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to the requirements of each Directive applicable to his production. As a general rule, the manufacturer certifies conformity to the essential requirements of the Directive(s) for his product by affixing the e mark. The e mark is affixed to Telemecanique brand products concerned, in order to comply with French and European regulations. Significance of the e mark b The e mark affixed to a product signifies that the manufacturer certifies that the product conforms to the relevant European Directive(s) which concern it; this condition must be met to allow free distribution and circulation within the countries of the European Union of any product subject to one or more of the E.U. Directives. b The e mark is intended solely for national market control authorities. b The e mark must not be confused with a conformity marking.
8/6
General
Product standards and certifications
European Directives (continued)

For electrical equipment, only conformity to standards signifies that the product is suitable for its designated function, and only the guarantee of an established manufacturer can provide a high level of quality assurance. For Telemecanique brand products, one or several Directives are likely to be applicable, depending on the product, and in particular: b the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC: the e mark relating to this Directive has been compulsory since 1st January 1997. b the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC: the e mark on products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since 1st January 1996
ASEFA-LOVAG certification
The function of ASEFA (Association des Stations d'Essais Franaise d'Appareils lectriques Association of French Testing Stations for Low Voltage Industrial Electrical Equipment) is to carry out tests of conformity to standards and to issue certificates of conformity and test reports. ASEFA laboratories are authorised by the French authorisation committee (COFRAC). ASEFA is now a member of the European agreement group LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement Group). This means that any certificates issued by LOVAG/ASEFA are recognised by all the authorities which are members of the group and carry the same validity as those issued by any of the member authorities.
Quality labels
When components can be used in domestic and similar applications, it is sometimes recommended that a Quality label be obtained, which is a form of certification of conformity. Code Quality label Country CEBEC Comit Electrotechnique Belge Belgium KEMA-KEUR Keuring van Electrotechnische Materialen Netherlands NF Union Technique de lElectricit France VE sterreichischer Verband fr Electrotechnik Austria SEMKO Svenska Electriska Materiel Kontrollanatalten Sweden
In some countries, the certification of certain electrical components is a legal requirement. In this case, a certificate of conformity to the standard is issued by the official test authority. Each certified device must bear the relevant certification symbols when these are mandatory: Code Certification authority Country CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada UL Underwriters Laboratories USA Note on certifications issued by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). There are two levels of approval: Recognized ( ) The component is fully approved for inclusion in equipment built in a workshop, where the operating limits are known by the equipment manufacturer and where its use within such limits is acceptable by the Underwriters Laboratories. The component is not approved as a Product for general use because its manufacturing characteristics are incomplete or its application possibilities are limited. A Recognized component does not necessarily carry the certification symbol. Listed (UL) The component conforms to all the requirements of the classification applicable to it and may therefore be used both as a Product for general use and as a component in assembled equipment. A Listed component must carry the certification symbol.
Marine classification societies

Prior approval (= certification) by certain marine classification societies is generally required for electrical equipment which is intended for use on board merchant vessels. Code Classification authority Country BV Bureau Veritas France DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany LR Lloyd's Register Great Britain NKK Nippon Kaiji Kyoka Japan RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italy RRS Register of Shipping Russia
Note
For further details on a specific product, please refer to the Characteristics pages in this catalogue or consult your Regional Sales Office.
8/7
Presentation
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
IP code
Degrees of protection against the penetration of solid bodies, water and personnel access to live parts
The European standard EN 60529 dated October 1991, IEC publication 529 (2nd edition - November 1989), defines a coding system (IP code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against accidental direct contact with live parts and against the ingress of solid foreign objects or water. This standard does not apply to protection against the risk of explosion or conditions such as humidity, corrosive gasses, fungi or vermin. Certain equipment is designed to be mounted on an enclosure which will contribute towards achieving the required degree of protection (example : control devices mounted on an enclosure). Different parts of an equipment can have different degrees of protection (example : enclosure with an opening in the base). Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external factors. Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed.
IP ppp code
The IP code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IP 55) and may include an additional letter when the actual protection of personnel against direct contact with live parts is better than that indicated by the first numeral (e.g. IP 20C). Any characteristic numeral which is unspecified is replaced by an X (e.g. IP XXB). 1st characteristic numeral: 2nd characteristic numeral: Additional letter: corresponds to protection of the equipment against corresponds to protection of the equipment corresponds to protection of penetration of solid objects and protection of personnel against penetration of water with harmful effects. personnel against direct contact against direct contact with live parts. with live parts.
Protection of the equipment Protection of personnel Non-protected Protected against direct contact with the back of the hand (accidental contacts). Protected against direct finger contact.
0 1
Non-protected Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 50 mm Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 12.5 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 2.5 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter > 1 mm. Dust protected (no harmful deposits).
0 1
Non-protected Protected against vertical dripping water, (condensation).
A B
With the back of the hand.

With the finger.
15
Protected against dripping water at an angle of up to 15.
With a 2.5 mm tool.
Protected against direct contact with a 2.5 mm tool.
60
Protected against rain at an angle of up to 60.
With a 1 mm wire.
Protected against direct contact with a 1 mm wire.
Protected against splashing water in all directions.
Protected against water jets in all directions.
Dust tight.
Protected against powerful jets of water and waves.
7
1m
15 cm min
Protected against the effects of temporary immersion. Protected against the effects of prolonged immersion under specified conditions.
8
m
8/8
Presentation
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
IK code
Degrees of protection against mechanical impact
The European standard EN 50102 dated March 1995 defines a coding system (IK code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against external mechanical impact. Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51 A, provides a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external factors. Practical guide UTE C 15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed.
IK pp code
The IK code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IK 05). 2 characteristic numerals: corresponding to a value of impact energy.
h (cm) Energy (J)
00 01 02 03 04 05
Non-protected 7.5 10 17.5 25 35 0.15 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.7
0,2 kg h
06 07
0,5 kg h
20 40
1 2
08
1,7 kg h
30
09 10
5 kg h
20 40
10 20
8/9

Tesys - Motor Stater Solution - 2006

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tesys - Motor Stater Solution - 2006

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

s

MOTOR STATER SOLUTION

1 - TeSys motor starters open version

b Levels of services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/4

Combination automatic motor starters

Combination starters for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

Star-delta starters for motor control

integral 18, 32 and 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Adaptators for use with busbar system

TeSys Quickfit installation system for motor starter components

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5

TeSys motor starters

Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard

TeSys motor starters

TeSys motor starters - open version

Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters

Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters with fuse protection

Fuse carrier + plate mounted contactor

3 contactors (line, star and delta, mounted on plate, rail or chassis)

1/6 and 1/7

1/8 and 1/9

1/10 and 1/11

Starters for customer assembly

D.O.L. or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers

Type 1 and type 2 coordination

Thermal magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor(s)

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay

Fuse carrier + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay

Switch-disconnector-fuse + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay

1/22 and 1/23

1/16 and 1/17 1/26 and 1/27

1/18 and 1/19 1/28 and 1/29

1/25, 1/31 1/32 and 1/33

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

ME14K1 50 15 10 (4 kW) 6 (5.5 kW)

Motor Contactor circuit-breaker Reference to Reference be completed (3)

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 GV2 ME10K1pp 3 4 5.5

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5

Dimensions : page 1/12

Schemes : page 1/14

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

Motor Contactor circuit-breaker Reference to Reference be completed (3)

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5

kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5

Dimensions : page 1/12

Schemes : page 1/14

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 37 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

Breaking capacity (lq) (1)

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1

400/415 V 440 V 500 V

Motor Contactor circuit-breaker Reference to Reference be completed (2)

A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6

Dimensions : pages 1/12 and 1/13

Schemes : page 1/14

TeSys motor starters - open version